《Starting By Acting As A Bank Robber, I Shock The World》 Chapter 1

Chapter 1: Mission, acting as a bank robber?

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Jon, this drill is very important. You need great courage, outstanding wisdom, and a serious attitude toplete this mission. Are you confident?¡± In the conference room, the FBI Director looked at Jon and said. His voice was loud and full of authority. Just as the director finished speaking, everyone in the conference room turned to Jon, who was sitting at the back. The media in the room also adjusted their cameras to focus on Jon. The sh of the cameras and the focus of the crowd made Kirby Jon looked a little dazed. The man who exuded azy aura was sitting at the back row. He looked tough. His short hair was short and sharp. He had a bushy beard. He hadn¡¯t shaved for days. His clothes looked cheap. A mild alcohol smell was on him if you get closer. He didn¡¯t look special. He was working for the FBI. And those who knew him knew he was not at all the decadence he was now. A former Navy SEAL. Kirby Jon was now a member of the FBI for a special assignment. He had used his vast experience and exceptional courage to solve several major crimes in the bureau. Congrattions and flowers filled his office for a while. But some time afterward, the man who had great moments had somehow fallen silent. He had even be invisible. He was once a star in the FBI. Now he was sitting in a corner where no one was looking. Now. All eyes were on him. Jon didn¡¯t care about the gazes on him. After he retired from the Navy SEAL team, he only thought about when he could retire. The cases he solved easily in the past didn¡¯t make his life easier. It even made his life more troublesome. Where there were people, there wereplications. His outstanding ability naturally attracted others¡¯ envy. Although he had a hundred ways to kill these people, he could still get away with it perfectly. But he was a person who didn¡¯t like trouble. In his eyes, these people¡¯s lives were less precious than a bottle of cold beer in the refrigerator. So he simply ignored these people. As long as they didn¡¯te to provoke him, he didn¡¯t mind being invisible. Now he was the most idle man in the bureau. Living a dreamlike life where he could drink and fart every day. And being the most useless character. The most dishonorable character in the drill, the robber. He thought of himself naturally. He watched the way they looked at him. They were either teasing, joking, or smug. Jon didn¡¯t want to respond at all. He was only thinking how he could refuse to work overtime reasonably and get off work early. ¡°There¡¯s a new bar in the city. I haven¡¯t been there yet.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s have a drink with Blucher.¡± As a formerrade, it had been a long time since they had met. As for being a robber? Who would want to take this lousy job. ¡°Ding!¡± ¡°God-tier acting system binding...¡± A cold notification sounded in Jon¡¯s mind. Jon was slightly stunned. System? What the hell was that? ¡°Ding! Host upation detected.¡± ¡°Identity: FBI agent, former Navy SEAL.¡± ¡°Current event: participating in bank drill, acting as bank robber.¡± The cold voice sounded in Jon¡¯s mind. ? ying a bank robber? That¡¯s a lot of work. Jon hadn¡¯t been interested in this kind of trouble for a long time. ¡°Ding!¡± ¡°Mission: impersonate the robber sessfully and seed in robbing the bank. The system will rate the performance of the host. Host may be rewarded with a maximum reward of $5 million.¡± As Jon pondered how to get out of the drudgery in front of the media and his boss, the system¡¯s cold notification sounded again. Jon was stunned. 5 million USD reward!! Jon stood up immediately. ¡°Yes! Director! I will definitely contribute my part to protect the citizens of New York! I will do my best toplete the mission!¡± The director then continued to speak. ¡°Very good! I hope that this drill will allow all of us to have a sense of crisis at any time!¡± ¡°Only if we can resolve such an emergency at any time can we guarantee the safety of the entire American citizens!¡± As soon as he finished speaking, a thunderous apuse and the sound of cameras snapping rang out in the hall. In the conference hall. The crowd dispersed after the director said a few more words. His colleagues, bank staff representatives, and media reporters were all chatting andughing as they packed up their belongings and prepared to leave. They didn¡¯t care about Jon¡¯s identity at all. It was like it was just a normal meeting. A drill? Don¡¯t be ridiculous. Who cared about a normal drill? It was just for the inspection. Obviously, everyone was thinking the same thing. It was just an act. They would follow procedure. The robbers woulde in, the FBI would arrest them and then the media would report that the FBI were efficient. Everything was so natural and beautiful. It was a good opportunity to praise the government. If Jon hadn¡¯t awakened the system, all of this would have been fine. But now. Jon had a meaningful smile on his face. Now everyone treated the drill as a game and didn¡¯t ask Jon what he thought. Did they really think that what he said was just for show? Jon thought to himself, he really meant it! The more he acted like a bank robber, the higher his score would be. The reward would be more. Five million US dors. He might not be able to get five million dors even if he really robbed a bank! He could get the reward as long as he acted like a bank robber. He didn¡¯t have to worry about the rest of his life if he could get the money. So what a real robber needed to prepare? A weapon that could shock everyone. A blueprint of the bank design. A map of the terrain around the bank. The best escape route. Most importantly, he need a good brother who could coordinate from the inside! As for what he said before being a robber was too troublesome? Sorry. This robber... He was determined! Chapter 2

Chapter 2: I need a weapon for men!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio After the prep rally ended, Jon was called into the director¡¯s office. He said he wanted to talk to him. ¡°Director!¡± Jon walked into the office and greeted the director behind the desk. The director motioned for Jon to sit down. He asked straightforwardly. ¡°What do you think about this drill?¡± The director leaned forward slightly and his hands leaned against the desk. Psychologically, this meant he was listening at the moment. Jon looked rxed and teased. ¡°The director told me toplete this mission seriously, so I must be a good robber.¡± He yed with the pen holder in front of the director as he spoke. He was testing the director¡¯s attitude. After all, if the bureau chief only wanted to be perfunctory in this drill, his evaluation system would also be affected. The more perfectly he acted, the more opposite his evaluation would be. The bureau chief¡¯s attitude was crucial. ¡°Very good!¡± ¡°Do you know why I chose you?¡± The bureau chief suddenly changed his tone. Jon was actually curious about this matter, too. He was an invisible person in the bureau. Why would the bureau still want him to participate in this mission? ¡°Because the entire FBI doesn¡¯t want to handle this matter properly!¡± ¡°Everyone is thinking about how to brush off their superiors! Brush off the media! Brush off the public!¡± The director stood up from his office chair excitedly and looked down at Jon. ¡°But you¡¯re different.¡± ¡°You¡¯re not from a faction and you don¡¯t have the ambition to climb up!¡± ¡°Many people haveined about you in front of me, but I¡¯ve suppressed them.¡± ¡°A person with ambition wouldn¡¯t have so many enemies.¡± The director propped his hands on the table. ¡°Crush them, Jon!¡± ¡°I need you to teach them a lesson.¡± ¡°The drill will begin in three days. I¡¯ll give you three days off to prepare.¡± ¡°If you need any help, you can ask me.¡± The director¡¯s words stunned Jon. It turned out that the director knew about his situation and had suppressed it. Jon looked at the director in surprise. The director usually seemed to be silent, but in fact, he knew what was going on. However, he was pleasantly surprised by the bureau chief¡¯s next promise. He did not expect that his most difficult problem had been solved. In order to act sessfully, Jon already knew what he wanted. ¡°Director, I need some men¡¯s weapons now!¡± A bank robber could not rob with his bare hands, right? There had been a lot of drills before this. But for safety reasons, they either used fake guns or they used fake bullets. These were all too childish. No matter how serious he was, others wouldn¡¯t get nervous looking at these fake equipments. Something that could threaten the lives of others was what a robber wanted. Suddenly, he missed those big guys in the Navy SEAL. Jon looked at the director and smiled. ¡°I need to check the FBI¡¯s armory.¡± ¡°There are a few things that seem to have been left there.¡± The director nodded. Since they were going to put on a real show this time... They couldn¡¯t scare people just by relying on low-quality props. This request was reasonable. ¡°Okay! I approve!¡± ¡°After work, you go to the armory to pick weapons.¡± ¡°But remember to hide! This is a special operation!¡± Looking at the director who sat back at his desk, Jon reminded him with some kindness. ¡°Director, I think I will make you regret your decision to choose me.¡± As soon as he said this, the directorughed even more. ¡°If you can make me regret, then this will be my best choice.¡± The director waved his hand at Jon as he spoke, indicating that he could leave. He came out of the director¡¯s office. Jon, who had just returned to his desk, sat down. The hottest woman in the entire FBI, Laura, came looking for him. She sat down on Jon¡¯s desk. Her exaggerated hips were squeezed by the desk. It revealed an astonishing arc. ¡°Hey! Hot girl! You¡¯ve made my desk¡¯s value increase quite a lot.¡± Jon frowned slightly and teased. He didn¡¯t know what this woman was doing at this time. Laura nced at Jon, who was a little sloppy but still strong. She pinched a cowhide bag with two fingers and handed it to Jon. ¡°Jon, the director gave this to you specifically.¡± ¡°It seems to be interesting about this drill. Do you mind going out to talkter?¡± Laura stared at him. It was as if water could be seen. He took the cowhide bag. If it were any other time, Jon would definitely be there. But now... Five million was still waiting for him. How could he be distracted? Jon chanted the Buddhist scriptures in his heart. Looking at Laura¡¯s hot figure... He turned down the invitation of the hottest girl in the bureau apologetically. After sending Laura away... Jon woke up the system. He opened his attribute interface. [ host ] : Kirby Jon [ IQ ] : 120 (normal person¡¯s average is 100) [ physical fitness ] : 130 (average person is 100) [ points ] : 0. [ skills ] :bat skills (advanced) , firearms proficiency (advanced) , robber¡¯s aura (low). There was some basic information in the attribute panel. Jon looked at the system¡¯s evaluation of him. He was smarter than the average person and his physical fitness was better than the average person. Other than that, he was not surprised that he was proficient in fighting and firearms. His previous training had allowed him to receive a high evaluation. However, this robber¡¯s aura skill caught Jon¡¯s interest immediately. He stood in front of the mirror and switched on this skill in the system. He looked up at himself in the mirror. Although his appearance had not changed, his aura had indeed undergone a huge change. His face did not have any expression in front of the mirror. But it gave off a fierce feeling. Jon estimated. His aura would probably scare those kids to tears if he walked on the streets. Although he had learned makeup and acting lessons in the Navy SEAL, it wasn¡¯t as natural as the system made it seem. It was as if he really was a robber. He put away his robber vibe. Jon looked at himself in the mirror again. He was back to his sloppy self. It was a magical skill. Jon shrugged slightly and did not go deep into it. He sat in his office chair and used hisputer to search for cop movies and TV shows. He also bought a few books on criminal psychology, which were at the top of the sales list. Since he had to y a bank robber perfectly, Jon had to do some homework in advance. The reward from the system was definitely going to be Jon¡¯s! Chapter 3

Chapter 3: Rob the bank! Go!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Jon after got off from work. He arrived smoothly at the FBI armory with a certificate from the director. This was the ce he had wanted to go for a long time. It used to be a restricted area. Now he had a green light all the way. Was this a privilege? Jon was grateful. He came to a small building as he went deeper. Its appearance was unremarkable. But Jon knew he had reached the destination. Usually, these buildings were just a cover. The actual ce was hidden underground. They were even coated with nano-coatings to prevent detection. Just like NORAD in North America. The door was opened. He followed the entourage into the elevator. Floor selection was only allowed after facial recognition. Ordinary guards can only go to the top three floors. The staff pressed to the nearest floor to the ground. To a mysterious ce. The lights in the distance gradually lit on. Arge number of shelves arranged neatly in this space. Guns and ammunition. Cold weapon grenade. Jon could name any. Some used AR-15 tform and MP5 series. One of the best weapons currently in service, the G36-C. The Remington GPC series. And the Benelli M4 Super 90 that the FBI had in their possession. Looking at these weapons, Jon closed his eyes and took a deep breath. The bloodthirsty gene seemed to had waken up from a deep sleep. His beating heart reminded him these were Jon¡¯s best friends. They strolled among the weapons. He picked one up. The familiar touch activated Jon¡¯s muscle memory. Straighten! Load! It took less than a second. Jon smiled. ¡°Old buddy, looks like we¡¯re still getting along.¡± He held the butt of the gun. The thick sense of security made Jon tough. He knew half of his body was filled with blood while the other half was filled by gunpowder. Jon pulled out arge ck backpack after selecting his guns. It was rare to take anything at your wish in an FBI armory. Jon packed all his guns into the backpack. He took smoke grenades, grenades, and a little TNT. Did the robbers need TNT? Of course they did. A man who knew how to solve a crime would know how to do it better, especially when he was a former Navy SEAL. And now he was under orders. How could he be worthy of the trust of the director if he didn¡¯t y a little bigger. Jon¡¯s mouth curved into a strange arc. A bold and crazy n appeared in his mind. Coming out of the armory, Jon walked out from the back door with a cap and the backpack on his back. He needed to avoid his co-workers. It was a secret operation. He put the backpack in the trunk of his car. He drove it to his rental house as usual. He greeted passersby cheerfully on the way. He looked no different from a normal person. But no one expected that he would be responsible for the heist that would shock the world three dayster. Jon put the backpack on the table in the rental house. He took a cold beer from the refrigerator and opened it with his teeth. Heid on the sofa and thought about the n. Now he had three days to prepare. The next three days were to gather intelligence and confirm the n. Jon spent first two days in the rented house cramming with all kinds of knowledge. In the past, he watched all kinds of police movies, TV shows, and novels just for fun. But now... He watched TV shows and movies was for studying. In two days, Jon took notes for a whole book. He even called old friends to ask them professional questions. Such as sting expert Sean, makeup artist Leo, prop master Alicia and... a taxi driver. These people helped him in perfecting his n. Jon went around the bank on thest day. He was looking for a good sniper position near the bank from police¡¯s point of view and the best ce for a bank raid. Jon didn¡¯t ask the director for the bank¡¯s blueprints because every bank kept their designs a secret. They wouldn¡¯t release them to the FBI. He couldn¡¯t get his hands on them so he didn¡¯t bother to ask. He didn¡¯t know anything about the bank¡¯s surroundings. He had to gather information and target a few targets. He had to get to the bottom of it. After getting a lot of information, he had a preliminary understanding of the bank including the staffing, the work schedule, and buildings location. Now he had a general understanding about all this. He even checked the site in advance. He simted the robbery process in my mind. He wrote it all down on a piece of paper after making sure it was all right. Jon nodded with satisfaction as he looked at the robbery n posted on his wall. He was satisfied that he managed toe up with a n in three days. It would scare the hell out of those colleagues. Jon let out a mischievousugh as he thought of this. Three days passed in a sh. On the day of the drill. At four o¡¯clock in the afternoon. It was hot in New York City. Everyone was drowsy. A vigorous figure came out of the rental house. At the beginning of the day, Jon entered the role of a robber. The more serious he was, the higher the system¡¯s score would be. Since Jon was a ¡°robber¡± who wanted to rob a bank, he naturally had to dress up. A ck windbreaker, a pair ofbat boots and a cap on his head covered half of his face. Jon¡¯s clothes were bulging, coupled with his fierce expression. No one would doubt that he was aw-abiding citizen. This appearance made the crowd dispersed automatically at ces he went. The voices of two people quarrelling on the side of the road lowered unconsciously when they saw Jon dressed in such a way. They were afraid what they did would provoke this ouw and shot by him and fell to the ground. Jon inserted the key and started the car engine. The car started moving slowly. Jon carried a backpack with automatic rifles, handguns, and a couple of smoke grenades. He drove to the target bank but he did not park outside the bank. Jon got off at a stoplight about a mile from the bank. He would got himself exposed easily if he got off at the bank. This would be a rookie robbery mistake. So... Jon chose to walk a bit. He lowered the cap on his head a bit and walked quickly towards the bank with his ck backpack. As he walked... He put on a bloody clown mask on his face. Chapter 4

Chapter 4: He Was Like a Devil!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio New York. Brooklyn. Under the hot sun. Different people in different ces. Happy beach vacationers. Traffic on the road. Old people sitting on the side of the road while busy workers in the alleys. These people made up Brooklyn. And in the distance was the Manhattan skyline with its high-rise buildings. A bustling, morous, cosmopolitan city of opportunity and desire. Here, people of all races and colors move around this society in an orderly fashion under the scorching sun. Here, it seemed everyone was ying a different role. A bank on a street in the city. Security guards were removing the national g at the door. This meant that the bank was closing soon. Inside the bank. The bank was going to leave work early in order to cooperate with this drill. Although they had stopped taking numbers at three o¡¯clock, there were still three or four people in the bank waiting for their turn at this time. A few bank employees were at the counter and the lobby manager was looking out from the door in the lobby. The security guard was bored. Everyone¡¯s mood was rxed and happy at this moment. After all... The bank was able to close early due to the drill. The drill would be just a formality and they would be able to get off work one or two hours earlier than usual. Just as they were thinking of this... A man got out of a taxi at the entrance. He was wearing a ck windbreaker and was carrying arge white gift box. A ck backpack was behind him, too. If he wasn¡¯t wearing a bloody clown mask, they would have thought that he was going to meet his lover. They saw him pushed open the door and walked into the bank lobby as if no one was there. Everything seemed to have been nned. It was as familiar as walking around his own backyard. ¡°Hello, our bank is closed. If you need any service, pleasee back tomorrow.¡± The security guard who was enjoying the air-conditioning in the lobby reached out his hand to stop him. The man heard him and ignored him. It was as if he did not hear him. He continued to walk forward. The security guard frowned and took out his baton, stopping Jon again. ¡°Stop! Don¡¯t move!¡± Jon was wearing a windbreaker, a clown mask and a big ck backpack was on his back. He didn¡¯t look like a good person from his head to his toe! Jon stopped and looked up at the security guard. That murderous look made the security guard shivered in the summer. He suddenly remembered that the FBI would be ying the role of a robber at the bank today. He immediately retracted his hand. ¡°Ops! I forgot that today is the drill. It¡¯s so hot today and you¡¯re wearing so much.¡± ¡°You¡¯re here to rob the bank. Hurry up and go in.¡± When the security guard saw Jon, cold sweat broke out on his head. The drill. Wasn¡¯t it just an act. This wasn¡¯t the first time. It was just a formality. As a security guard, there was no need for him to stop Jon. It was just that he was stunned by Jon¡¯s imposing manner for a moment. He even thought that he was really a bank robber. The murderous intent was clearly felt by him. ording to Jon¡¯s understanding, walking in from the front door of the bank was the stupidest n. It was because the front door must be the most defensible and easiest to get caught. He knew that the bank had a back door. Jon¡¯s ideal route was toe in from the back. He wanted to use the employee card he got to swipe in so he could sneak in quietly. Then, he would not be stopped by security at the front door. But today, the bank had locked the electronic back door early because of the drill. Inadvertently, this also increased the difficulty of Jon¡¯s robbery. But fortunately, the problem was not big. Jon continued to walk into the hall after getting rid of the security. He circled around and looked quickly at all the people in the bank. The lobby manager was leaning against an empty window while chatting with the blonde woman behind the counter. He was talking andughing and there was no tension at all. So he didn¡¯t notice Jon hade in. Some people had been evacuated in advance due to the drill today. There were six people in the bank, including the lobby manager and the security guard. There were three more customers in the waiting area. One who was doing business at the bank counter while the other was drinking water at the water dispenser. Jon stood up after confirming the number of people in the bank. He walked to the front door and took out the iron chain hidden in his backpack. He slowly wrapped it around. The loud sound was particrly ear-piercing in this quiet space. Seeing Jon locked the door, it naturally attracted the attention of everyone in the bank. ¡°Who are you? Why did you lock the door?¡± ¡°The bank¡¯s door! How dare you touch it!¡± ¡°Who the hell are you?¡± There was amotion among the bank staff as the door was locked by Jon. The lobby manager, Sunny, also walked towards Jon. Jon was wearing a clown mask so they did not recognize him. When the security guard saw that the door was locked, he quickly ran over. At this moment, there were twelve people in the bank, including Jon. ¡°Pop...¡± The door was locked before the manager, Sunny, walked to the frontof Jon. All the customers in the bank were still looking at Jon in confusion. What was this person trying to do? Why did he lock the bank¡¯s door the moment he entered. At this moment, a few bank employees had already guessed that the person who locked the bank¡¯s door was the robber, Jon. It was about time. The manager was only a few steps away from Jon. Jon pulled the lock on the door. After making sure it was secure, Jon released the package in his hand. It wasn¡¯t flowers for a woman. It was a weapon with a ck glow. An Ithaca Model 37 shotgun! It was a very famous weapon. He turned around and aimed the gun at the manager in front of him. A loud shout rang out! ¡°Don¡¯t move! Robbing!¡± This shout was like a p of thunder. It woke up all the people who were sleepy at this moment. There was a robber who wanted to rob the bank! After a few seconds, everyone finally reacted. A few customers in the bank were shocked. They looked at the man with a gun with a terrified expression. Onedy evenid on the ground in a hurry. Everyone was shocked except for the bank staff who knew in advance that there would be a drill. The bank staff at the counter quietly reached her hand under the table. ording to the staff manual, that was the rm button that led directly to the police station. But this scene was witnessed by Jon. ¡°B*tch, I don¡¯t want to hurt you!¡± ¡°But please stay away from those damn rms!¡± ¡°Come to the middle obediently! B*tch!¡± With that said, he pointed the ck muzzle of his shotgun at the female employee. The blonde female employee shivered under the gun. The man in front of her was like a beast that had been hungry for days. His entire body was emitting a terrifying aura. It was as if he would rip her body apart to vent his desire at the next moment. Jon¡¯s natural bandit instinct made her forget that she was in a drill. Instead, she was trying to figure out ways not to provoke him. She came out of the counter. She was trembling with fear as she did so. She was too afraid to fight the man in front of her. She would do anything right now, even if she was asked to strip. She was too afraid. Jon was like a devil to her!! Chapter 5

Chapter 5: Make One More Move, I¡¯ll Fire!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The bank manager looked at themotion at the moment and frowned. He was also shocked in the face of this sudden change. His face turned red and there was a trace of anger in his eyes. Although this man was holding a gun, he looked like a robber, too. But it was just a drill, why was he so serious? Could he really hurt himself? Especially when he had scared his beautiful subordinate. D*mn it! However, wasn¡¯t this a good opportunity for him to show his masculinity? This was an opportunity specially created for him! After thinking about this, he walked up to the men fearlessly and exined to the people around him. ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t be nervous. This is just a drill where we cooperate with the FBI.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be afraid. Everyone, sit down.¡± This exnation made everyone heaved a sigh of relief. When Jon entered the room and locked the door, he took out his gun and scared everyone. Then, he immediately expressed his extreme dissatisfaction with the man¡¯s behavior. ¡°A drill? Why didn¡¯t you inform me earlier? You almost scared me out of my asthma!¡± ¡°Sh*t! You¡¯re wasting my time! I¡¯ll definitely file aint against you!¡± ¡°Hey, brother, don¡¯t y with these next time. I can¡¯t help but pee.¡±. A few female bank employees also patted their chests and felt a sense of relief. The pressure of being held at gunpoint by a man was really great. His temperament was too much like a robber who was licking blood from a knife¡¯s edge. If it weren¡¯t for Megan standing in front of him, they would have been scared to death just now. The mask was really too scary. They even thought that it was a real robber came to rob a bank. Meanwhile, a few other employees started to me Jon in a low voice. It was just a drill, why were he so serious about it. Jon¡¯s gun was not put down at this time. Seeing that the man in front of him did not move his gun, the manager was displeased instantly. ¡°Officer, can you move your gun away?¡± ¡°Can you be responsible if Miss Megan has any problems because of you?¡± ¡°Pointing a toy gun around. Do you really think you¡¯re a robber?!¡± The manager immediately exposed his innermost thoughts. In the manager¡¯s eyes, the drill was for the robber to enter the bank and then wait to be caught by the police. In the past, how could there be someone like Jon who entered the bank without saying a word. He even secretly locked the door and put on a show with a gun. In the past, the drill was not thatplicated. He was just messing around! He heard that the actor of the robber had offended people everywhere in the investigation bureau. It was no wonder. This kind of person who did not follow the rules was such a waste. ¡°I f*cking told you not to move.¡± Jon looked at the lobby manager, Sunny, who was walking towards him and spoke again in a deep voice. Jon took off the cap and mask on his head as he spoke. Jon activated the robber¡¯s imposing manner skill that the system had given him silently as he took off the cap. For a moment, Jon¡¯s entire body exuded a fierce aura of a fierce robber. Even from the back, Jon¡¯s back did not look like he was someone to be trifled with. This was momentum! Jon¡¯s finger was on the trigger, as if he was really going to shoot the bullet into his head in the next second. As he sensed Jon¡¯s momentum at that moment, manager Sunny could not help but be slightly stunned. Looking at the muzzle in front of him, he lost the courage to move forwardpletely. Although he knew it was a drill, the acting was too real. Shocked by Jon¡¯s imposing manner, Sunny stood where he was and did not dare to move again. ¡°It¡¯s enough to have some fun!¡± ¡°Quickly put down the gun and then I¡¯ll arrest you and wait for the police toe!¡± While manager Sunny stood where he was and did not dare to move, the man who was leaning against the water dispenser and drinking water walked up. The man also realized that this was just a bank drill because Jon hadn¡¯t fired a single shot. Only replica gun was used in the drill. So his speech was much more rxed. It was obvious. In his eyes, this drill, like most acting, was something to fool the public. There was no need to take it too seriously. Just be cooperative would do. He looked at the man who kept approaching him. Jon had been observing everyone since he entered the hall. The others were very ordinary. He was the only one. Whether it was his aura or his posture, based on his many years of experience, this man had definitely been in the army or even in the war. Although he did not know what his current upation was, it was definitely the aura of someone who had been on the battlefield. Not only had he joined the army, but he had also been there for a long time. Among all the people presented in the bank, the one who posed the greatest threat to him was the man in front of him. ¡°Sir, if you want to see God, then take another step.¡± Jon immediately turned his gun and aimed at the man who was walking towards him. He spoke coldly. His eyebrows were furrowed and his gaze was extremely cold as he spoke. Coupled with the aura on his body, everyone presented did not dare to doubt what he had just said. ¡°Gulp...¡± The bank manager who was closest to him could almost hear himself gulping. He was the one who had truly felt the intent from Jon. At this moment, he was so frightened by Jon that ayer of cold sweat had already formed on his forehead. It was clearly an act but this guy¡¯s appearance was really too frightening. Especially that gaze, as if he would really kill someone. As he thought so, his body did not dare to move at all. After listening to Jon¡¯s words, the man who was walking towards Jon also frowned slightly. He stopped and looked at Jon with a serious expression. Strange. He looked at Jon at this moment. Jon¡¯s entire body were exuding the aura of a bandit. Such a fierce gaze pulled him into memories in an instant. It was no less than the feeling he had when he were on the battlefield and met the enemy. It was too simr! He even suspected that he had mistaken the robber for the real one. At this moment, the man could not help but hesitate in his heart. This guy would not use the name of the drill to rob a bank with real weapons, right? If that was really the case! He robbed a bank in the name of the drill. That could really be written into history. ¡°OK, OK, calm down first. Let¡¯s talk things out!¡± The man took a deep breath and lowered his body to show his submission. He spoke again. When he spoke again, there was no longer any trace of a joking tone. He really thought of Jon as a robber! A few bank employees who had ridiculed Jon quietly just now only dared to watch what was happening from afar. They were afraid that they would provoke Jon so they didn¡¯t dare to say anything. They weren¡¯t as rxed as before when they could leave work early. Now they were just afraid. They were afraid of the real bank robber in front of them. Chapter 6

Chapter 6: Lie Down! You Were Dead!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Jon did not answer the man. The ck muzzle was still aimed at the man. ¡°Hey! Calm down, brother. This is just a drill...¡± The man took a deep breath to calm himself down and let Jon calmed down. In the beginning, the man did not care about this drill. He just happened to be here. When Jon locked the door with iron chains and took out the shotgun in his backpack, he was not too nervous. He was confident that there were dozens of ways to escape. When he heard that it was just a bank drill, he had only thought of it as a formality. But... now he didn¡¯t think so. Jon¡¯s imposing manner and the heavy atmosphere made the man felt that Jon wasn¡¯t someone to be trifled with. Was he ying with the name of the drill. Even more so, one couldn¡¯t help but wonder if the Ithaca Model 37 shotgun in Jon¡¯s hand was a real gun. If it was a real gun, then the people in the bank might really be in danger! Jon remained silent. But the hand holding the gun did not rx. His eyes were locked on the other party and the gun was always aimed at the man. In the bank, everyone was in an extremely tense atmosphere. Was this a drill? Compared to the usual drill, this was way too different, right? When the man saw that Jon did not move, he thought that he had already stabilized Jon. Then, he carefully approached Jon again. Heforted Jon as he walked. Don¡¯t be agitated. This was just a drill. At this moment, the man was only about ten meters away from Jon. He slowly moved his feet with his eyes fixed on Jon. He was afraid that Jon would make a move suddenly. Nine meters... Eight meters... Seven meters... The man stretched out his hand to exin that he was only trying to move to a safe area. At the same time, he carefully approached Jon. The distance was getting closer. As long as he was within three meters of Jon, he was confident that he could quickly close in and subdue Jon. Six meters... Five meters... All the employees of the bank were worried secretly. They didn¡¯t know why they were so nervous in an ordinary drill. After all, the bank¡¯s drills usually ended in a rxed, happy and even a little ridiculous atmosphere in the past. Everyone was happy when the gangster was subdued by the police. But this time, it was far beyond their imagination. It was as if they were really experiencing a bank robbery at this moment. The manager even thought that once the man pounced on him, he would subdue Jon together with him! They were both men, who was afraid of each other! Just as Sunny was thinking so and the man was only about four meters away from Jon. ¡°Bang!¡± A fierce gunshot was shot out from the shotgun. The loud sound exploded in the extremely quiet bank. Jon kept silent and waited quietly. He was waiting for the man to enter his shooting range. Jon had said that he would shoot if the man moved one more step! So, when the man moved closer to him, Jon was ready to shoot him. ¡°You¡¯re already dead.¡± With both hands pointing the muzzle upward, Jon, who was emitting white smoke, said coldly to the dazed man in front of him. The man¡¯s mind was nk. Although he was still alive, he felt as if he had really taken a trip by the grim reaper in his heart. He kneeled there in a daze and was unable to move for a long time. ¡°Ah...¡± ¡°He killed someone!!¡± For a moment, a few bank employees screamed cowardly as they squatted on the ground. A few bank employees even closed their eyes. The man¡¯s entire body exuded the bloodthirsty and murderous aura of a bandit. It made a few customers who were sitting in the waiting area shivered in fear and they stood there trembling. He really shot someone! A huge sense of fear surrounded Sunny. All of his courage was shattered by the gunshot. He was the one who was closest to the bullet. After hearing the gunshot, his eyes went nk. Countless images shed through his mind. He had his parents, his bankbook and a beautiful world. At that moment, he felt as if death was walking by him quietly. He couldn¡¯t help but kneel down. His trembling legs could no longer stand. This was a real robber!! He was here to rob!!! At this moment, the FBI headquarters was also silent. Hundreds of people looked at the screen above with serious expressions. The FBI had been connected to the bank cameras since the beginning of the drill. They monitored every movement in the hall. Just as everyone wasughing and ready to watch Jon made a fool of himself on the screen,. With the iron chain locking the door and the shotgun pulling the trigger, they couldn¡¯t smile anymore. Jon¡¯s murderous gaze and his crazy demeanor had shocked them all. They hadn¡¯t given Jon a real gun. How could he have a real gun? Dozens of officers took a deep breath to calm themselves. They were confused. Shooting was not allowed in the drill. And Jon, he had almost killed someone! He couldn¡¯t have been faking it, could he? Just as this absurd thought appeared in everyone¡¯s minds. No one could have imagined that Jon¡¯s shot was just the beginning of the robbery... The sound of the gun echoed through the bank. But no blood sttered after the shot was fired. The terrifying power of the shotgun opened a big hole in the ceiling. Jon repeated that sentence. ¡°You¡¯re dead.¡± The man came back to his senses after hearing that. He listened to Jon obediently. His hands were behind his back and heid on the ground. He did not dare to resist Jon¡¯s orders at all. Because he knew that look in Jon¡¯s eyes. Jon did not have the slightest intention of joking. Jon watched the man lied down obediently before he put down his gun and spoke coldly. ¡°Ithaca Model 37 shotgun. One shot from such a close distance is enough to blow up your head. You¡¯re dead already.¡± At this moment, a bank employee took advantage of the time Jon was talking and pressed the rm. The rm went straight to the police station. The police would arrive within ten minutes. Of course, Jon knew this but he didn¡¯t stop them. Since he was robbing, how could there not be a scene of confrontation with the police. The man who had been killedid on the ground silently. Jon could see what he was thinking. ¡°Most robbers, no matter how fierce they are, know that a hostage is a bargaining chip. They don¡¯t usually kill people as soon as they enter the bank.¡± ¡°But this is also your habitual thinking.¡± ¡°I saw the badge you¡¯re going to wear.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve already exposed your identity as a police officer. In order to prevent you from cooperating with the outside world, it¡¯s reasonable for me to shoot you.¡± When Jon spoke, his appearance, tone, and aura made it seemed like he was a real bank robber and this was a real bank robbery. No one dared to doubt what he had just said. Jon walked to the man lying on the ground, grabbed his feet and dragged him backward. ¡°What are you doing!?¡± The man looked at Jon in shock and fear. ¡°The impact of a shotgun is very strong. Your ce of death should be here.¡± ¡°Also, dead people don¡¯t talk. If you say another word, I¡¯ll shoot you again!¡± The ck muzzle was aimed at the man¡¯s forehead. The man looked at the muzzle and then at the fierce-looking Jon. He could only continue to act as a corpse and didn¡¯t dare to make any more movements. Jon dragged the man to the spot where he was shot and put him down. ¡°So now, are there still people who want to die?¡± Jon held the gun and nced at the people in the bank as he said coldly. No one dared to make a sound in the noisy bank lobby. This man! He would really kill them all! Chapter 7

Chapter 7: Why a Key Was Needed for the Vault Door?

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Chapter Seven: Why a key was needed for the vault door? The police should be here soon. He had to speed up his actions. He walked to the counter with a gun in his hand. It looked like he was going to eat them alive. The female employee was so scared that she curled up into a ball. ¡°Fill up the money!¡± Jon threw the ck backpack that he used to carry his weapons on the counter. He said coldly to the employee behind. All the other weapons were hidden in his windbreaker except the shotgun in his hand. ¡°How much?¡± The employee at the counter asked very carefully. She was afraid that she would be shot. ¡°A hundred-dor bill weighs 1.15 grams, 10,000 is 115 grams, a million is 11,500 grams, 23 catties.¡± ¡°I want 69 catties!¡± ¡°Three million!¡± Why only three million? Although money was something that no one would think too much of, the first consideration of a robbery was the convenience. Before Jon came, he had already thought of the quantity. If it exceeded this amount, it would affect his next move. And since he was a bank robber, he would definitely take the money with him. The female employee was so nervous that she even trembled when she opened the cab. ¡°There¡¯s not enough money in the front desk.¡± The female employee¡¯s voice had a hint of crying. ¡°Manager...e here.¡± Jon pointed the gun in his hand at the manager, Sunny who was kneeling on the ground. Seeing Jon pointing the gun at him, he shuddered. He slowly stood up. ¡°Brother, what¡¯s the matter with your little brother here?¡± Sunny gulped. Jon¡¯s imposing manner made him unable to restrain the nervousness in his heart. ¡°Come and open the vault.¡± Jon knew that the bank¡¯srge amount of money was kept in the vault behind. The manager had the key to open the vault. Sunny took the key out of his pocket with trembling. It was a half-finished piece. Opening it rashly would set off the vault¡¯s rm system. The police would be notified. The only way to open the vault was tobine the two identical keys into aplete key. He didn¡¯t have the other key. The bank did not expect Jon to really rob the bank. So they did not consider this situation at all. This scared Sunny so much that tears almost came out of his eyes. He kept exining loudly, ¡°It¡¯s really not my fault. I only have this one key.¡± ¡°Who would have thought that someone would really rob the bank? I have money on me. Take it all. Please don¡¯t kill me, okay?¡± With that, Sunny cried and knelt down. He was too afraid of this man who killed without batting an eyelid. He had long forgotten all about the drill and cooperation. He only wanted to live. Live. Jon could not help butin. It turned out that it was not only the FBI who were unprofessional. The internal departments of the bank did not take it seriously at all. Fortunately, he was prepared. In order to act like a robber. He had already considered this situation. ¡°What if the vault can¡¯t be opened without a key?¡± ¡°Why use a key to open the vault door?¡± His experience of destroying tanks and armored vehicles on the battlefield made Jon prepared a pile of thermite. It only took a small bag to melt steel ten centimeters thick. It was more than enough to break through the vault door. He did it right away. He arranged the thermite he prepared ording to the size of a human. He lit it up and burned it. The steel door of the vault was melted in an instant. A hole was revealed for adults to enter and exit. Jon saw that the temperature had cooled down. He pointed at a female bank clerk and said, ¡°You, go in and get the money.¡± The female employee nodded and quickly went into the vault. She was already in the state where she would do whatever Jon said. When she saw the stack of dor bills in front of her, she couldn¡¯t help but felt a little tempted and her hands were a little out of control. She thought that she wouldn¡¯t be discovered if she took out one at this time! But then she thought of the devil-like man behind her and dismissed the idea. Money was important but her own life was more important! He watched the female staff constantly brought money out of the vault. Meanwhile, Sunny stood there, stunned. Jon immediately said impatiently. ¡°Go over and help!¡± ¡°What are you standing there for?¡± Hearing that, sunny hurriedly got up and walked into the vault to help the female staff filled up the money. Three million in cash filled a backpack. Sunny handed the backpack to Jon. Suddenly there was a siren outside the door. It was obvious. By this time, the police had arrived. Jon looked at his watch. It had been 20 minutes since he hade in. The police were a little slow. The wait was getting boring. The FBI colleagues were shocked to see Jon cracked the hard vault with thermite. They were shocked. When they saw the piles of money being shipped out, they realized the seriousness of the problem. Jon was really putting on a show! He started to be a robber! If this got out, the entire FBI would be disgraced! The FBI had to do something! They had to consult the director first! After all, he was the one who had chosen Jon for the role. After reading the report from the investigation bureau, the old bureau chief could not help butugh out loud. As themander and referee of this drill, what he had to ensure was that the drill was fair and just. He was obviously very satisfied with Jon¡¯s actions. ¡°Looks like this kid is really preparing to make me regret my choice!¡± ¡°Not bad, not bad...¡± ¡°But from the looks of it, my choice is the right one.¡± After rejecting the report that was submitted to him, he was looking forward to what kind of surprise Jon would bring him. He looked at the officer who came over to take the report. Thest time he saw them so nervous was during the U.S. presidential election. Hearing the siren outside, everyone in the bank was shocked. The police were finally here! Sunny nced sideways at Jon. He saw Jon raised his eyebrows and gave him a cold look. His eyes were cold and murderous. The look stopped Sunny from speaking. He had wanted Jon to surrender so they could be safe. But Jon¡¯s casual nce... Stopped him from thinking about it. It was said that murderous intent could be seen in the eyes of a murderer. Jon¡¯s nce was even more terrifying than that of a murderer. The police had only just begun. ¡°Tell us, how do you want us to cooperate with you?¡± Feeling Jon¡¯s terrifying gaze, manager Sunny spoke in hurry. He bent his back as he spoke, looking very obedient. ¡°Take these people to the corner. Put your hands behind your head and squat down.¡± Jon spoke calmly. He carefully sized up the police who had already arrived outside the bank as he spoke. Everyone obediently lined up and squatted in the corner. This included the customers who were originally unrted. They were no longer as contemptuous as before. What was left was 100% fear and obedience. Chapter 8

Chapter 8: National Sensation!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio At this moment, a police cordon had been set up in the open space outside the bank. People around the bank heard the gunshots and realized something was wrong, so they called the police. The onlookers kept taking pictures and posting them on their socialworks. They hadn¡¯t seen such a scene for a long time. And it was human nature to join in the fun. More than a dozen police cars parked on the opposite road. They were fully armed to evacuate the surrounding onlookers. But they still couldn¡¯t stop the enthusiastic crowd. Many police officers saw this and didn¡¯t care. It was just an act and there wouldn¡¯t be any danger. Although their chief said that they should treat it a actualbat and want them take it seriously. But wasn¡¯t it just a robbery drill? It was just an amateur robber. They had already surrounded the bank, so it wouldn¡¯t be long before they caught him. ... ¡°Everyone, put your hands on your heads and crouch in the corner!¡± Jon squatted by the wall and observed the policemen outside the bank through the crack in the ss. He held his gun and spoke to everyone in the bank. Everyone shivered and quickly moved to the corner with their hands on their heads and crouched. Jon¡¯s gaze could make them shivered. One girl was stunned by Jon¡¯s roar. Her phone fell out of her hand. She was a female host on Twitch. She was about to go out and broadcast her daily life. She met a bank drill. Jon¡¯s action was broadcast live. The audience in the live broadcast room also watched the entire operation. At first, some people thought that the host was on some kind of acting set. But as they watched, they realized that something was wrong. Some audience members were even frightened by Jon¡¯s gaze across the screen. Only then did they realize that it was really a bank robbery! Some people called the police in time while others quickly spread the news to social media tforms. This incident was alsopiled byizens and posted on the forum. ¡°The robbery has been broadcasted live!!¡± The eye-catching title was instantly shared by countlessizens. ¡°OMG, did she meet a bank robber during the live broadcast? That¡¯s too cool!¡± ¡°Is he acting? This person¡¯s acting skills are too good! The props are too realistic!¡± ¡°This robber¡¯s gaze is too scary! Is he a real murderer?¡± ¡°The streamer has fainted from the shock. This is a live broadcast of the robber! Quickly go and see!!¡± A message made the onlookers found a connecting point. Following the link posted on the forum, they quickly found the live broadcast room. At this moment, they saw the real situation at the scene. They were all stunned. Everyone squatted in the corner with their hands on their heads. A big hole was opened in the bank¡¯s vault door. In the corner, a ck backpack was filled with US dors. What was even more terrifying was that the robber was holding a shotgun and his eyes staring coldly at the screen. It was as if he was going to kill them in the next second. This scene was screenshot by countlessizens and posted on their social media app. The title was ¡°Let me show you the eyes of a real murderer!!¡± This video, whichsted less than five seconds, was posted on social media and forwarded by countless people. There were even quite a number of celebrities among them. Many of them evenmented on their own posts, ¡°This brother looks much more ruthless than my brother in prison.¡± ¡°This brother should have a lot of lives at his hands. His gaze can¡¯t be imitated.¡± ¡°Oh! This brother is still broadcasting his robbery? I have to go and support him!¡± As the inte spread rapidly, the female streamer¡¯s live broadcast room was flooded with countless spectators. They had seen live broadcasts of daily activities, live broadcasts of goods and live broadcasts of concerts. But they had never seen a live broadcast of a robbery before. Such crazy and bold actions had stimted them. They had never seen such an arrogant robber before. The live broadcast room was also crazily rewarded by the tycoons and left messages. ¡°Is this person an actor? What kind of movie is this now?¡± ¡°Hey, brother, you¡¯re famous, you know? If you¡¯re acting, you¡¯ve already seeded.¡± ¡°As long as you kill the stupid police outside, I¡¯ll give you 100,000 dors!¡± ¡°Hey, baby, your eyes are too attractive. If you don¡¯t mind leaving a message, I don¡¯t mind having a short story with you.¡± ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Cameron. I hope you can see this message. I hope you cane and audition for my next movie. The male lead is very suitable for you.¡± Countless tips and bulletments made this little live broadcast room, which was not famous, go straight to the front page of the entire tform. On this in and hot afternoon, everyone was attracted by Jon. It became the most popr live broadcast room in the United States. And there were countless people rushing over. Jon looked at the bullet screen that was dancing like snowkes, he could not help but smile coldly. The live broadcast room immediately shot out another row of messages crazily. ¡°Look! He¡¯s smiling! Oh my God! I¡¯m going to be conquered by his smile!¡± ¡°He¡¯s so handsome that he doesn¡¯t want to be an actor. He wants to rob. When did the threshold for a robber be so high!?¡± ¡°Brother, if you don¡¯t have a job, I can give you a job as a model. The partners are LV, Gi, Chanel! Believe me! We will package you as a top model!¡± ¡°Sir! We are willing to sign you! We guarantee the resources for two movies a year! Please contact us!!¡± At this time, everyone on the inte was paying attention to this live broadcast room. There were people who wanted to sign a contract with Jon, those who wanted to act with Jon and even those who wanted to hook up with Jon. Everyone wanted to take advantage of this poprity. Countless people saw a business opportunity in this matter. They stared at Jon as if he was a gold mine that was waiting to be dug out. At this moment, Jon¡¯s poprity was rising crazily. The police outside also sensed that something was wrong. ¡°Sir, there¡¯s been an ident. Take a look at this!¡± The captain, who was slowly taking out his loudspeaker, heard the voice behind him and looked at his subordinate calmly. He took the phone from his subordinate in confusion. His small eyes, which were squeezed out by the fat, gradually widened. ¡°WTF? What is this kid trying to do? Is he still broadcasting?¡± The captain was about to get angry when he saw the equipment on Jon. Ithaca Model 37 shotgun! Military single-arm grenade! Smoke grenade used by police! ¡°WTF! Where did this kid get these things?¡± The captain was so surprised that he cursed. After all, the robbers would only y with toy guns and anti-riot bullets in the past. They would never use real weapons. Now, these equipment and weapons were not only real weapons, they were even several times stronger than the equipment of his ordinary police! The captain¡¯s fat body instantly became extremely agile. He quickly took out his walkie-talkie and shouted. ¡°Change the n! The bank robbers are equipped with weapons of mass destruction!¡± ¡°Contact the FBI and ask what these sons of b*tches mean. Give the f*ck robbers real weapons?¡± After hanging up the walkie-talkie fiercely, the captain kicked the door of the vehicle fiercely. He had a feeling. There was something wrong with today¡¯s show! Chapter 9

Chapter 9: The Drill Closest to Actual Combat!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio At this moment, the media that smelled the scent also took action quickly. In this feast of traffic, how could there be no sharks that smelled the scent of blood? At the Sun¡¯s headquarters, editor-in-chief Richard was looking at the proposal submitted by his subordinates. As he flipped through the pages, he became more and more irritated. ¡°A bunch of good-for-nothings. It would be more explosive than you think if I went to Times Square to dance naked!¡± The irascible Richard lit up a cigarette. He browsed the social media tform on his phone to see what was trending today. An eye-catching headline appeared on his home page. ¡°The most handsome robber in history!¡± ¡°Live broadcast of the robbery. This guy is really too arrogant!¡± ¡°Live broadcast the whole time! The robber and the police are confronting each other at the entrance of the bank!¡± Richard was smoking as he browsed through thements. Arge number ofizens flooded into this topic. He took a deep puff of his cigarette and pressed the remaining half into the ashtray! This man was the highlight he wanted! He took out his office phone and called his assistant. Everyone who was free now, who could run, move and speak rushed to the scene with cameras immediately! Thepany¡¯s helicopter was also mobilized. He wanted to broadcast the entire robbery process live. He had high hopes for this man. From the moment Jon entered the scene until now, whether he was doing his job or confronting others, he had always maintained his calm. This meant that he did not rob impulsively but had a n! The news that would be stirred up by this kind of person would be historic. This traffic would definitely explode! Richard waved his hand excitedly. Then he picked up the phone again and shouted at his assistant. ¡°Haven¡¯t you eaten? Do you want me to call a rocket to send you there?¡± ¡°If I don¡¯t get the content in half an hour, all of you can f*cking get lost!¡± Everyone moved immediately as Richard roared and urged. At this time, a simr scene yed out in all the mediapanies... ... In the bank. Jon showed that he had chased all the hostages to the waiting area. Then, he had cordoned them off. Originally... ording to the previous n, Jon was going to tie up all the hostages. However... Jon found that ever since he had used the robber acting skill, his temperament alone was enough to scare the hostages. Now, they didn¡¯t even dare to whisper. It didn¡¯t seem to make much difference whether they were tied up or not. He had taken all the hostages under control. In a building like a bank, most of the walls in front of it were made of ss. And there were no curtains. The police stood outside the bank could see what was going on in the bank from a distance. This was very disadvantageous for Jon. So... Now he was going to close the windows of the bank. There were many posters in the bank. Jon nned to use these posters to cover the ss so that there would be no way to detect the situation inside the bank from the outside. This would make it impossible for the police to keep track of his movements so that he could be in a favorable position. More than a dozen posters were posted on the ss walls with instructions. Although they were notpletely sealed, the situation inside the bank was basically invisible from the outside. ¡°He¡¯s blocking all the ss!¡± The police outside the bank were watching Jon¡¯s movements and they couldn¡¯t help but frowned. Ever since they found out that Jon was broadcasting, a part of the police had been watching the broadcast room. But they found out that Jon would point the camera at the hostages when he made his move. This made it impossible for the police to track Jon¡¯s movements through the live broadcast. This put him in a favorable position. Seeing that Jon had covered all the ss walls of the bank, the captain thought to himself that it seemed that this kid was nning to confront him for a long time! ¡°Sir! The bank¡¯s surveince camera is connected!¡± At this moment, a subordinate walked behind the captain and reported the situation. The captain nodded. He turned around and walked quickly toward the RV connected to the surveince camera. The RV was filled with all kinds of equipment and a few screens were hanging in the RV. At this moment, the four screens were ying the surveince footage. The footage clearly showed the scene in the bank. The captain sat down and was about to observe the surveince footage when he saw Jon carried adder toward the camera. He climbed up thedder calmly. Jon covered the camera with a piece of A4 paper and taped it securely. In an instant, the camera turned pitch ck. The police captain could not help but twitched his lips. He knew what Jon was going to do. As he ran back and forth, the remaining three cameras were also covered by Jon¡¯s A4 paper. In an instant, the surveince footage on the four screens turnedpletely ck. The captain couldn¡¯t help but scratched his head. ¡°This kid didn¡¯t disappoint you, did he?¡± Outside the RV, a slightly aged voice appeared. ¡°Yo, this kid is quite professional.¡± Seeing that the surveince images werepletely covered, the person who came looked even more cheerful. As he spoke, he was obviously very satisfied with Jon¡¯s actions. FBI bureau chief... Hearing the voice beside him, the captain turned his head quickly and greeted the director. Then, the captain looked at him angrily. ¡°Not only did your team member use the real thing, he even ¡®killed¡¯ one of our team members.¡± ¡°Oh right, let me give you a friendly reminder. This robber not only has a weapon but also military grenade.¡± After listening to the captain¡¯sints, the director had a general understanding of the current situation. He spoke slowly. ¡°This is an extremely ferocious robber. He will attack the hostages at any time.¡± ¡°These weapons were given to him by me.¡± The director¡¯s words instantly shocked the people around him. The captain¡¯s eyes were filled with anger. He questioned loudly, ¡°Do you know how dangerous this is! What if the hostages are injured? There are so many media around us. If we don¡¯t handle this properly, we will all be responsible!¡± Facing the captain¡¯s doubts, the chief was indeed very rxed at the moment. That rxed look of his waspletely like a spectator who wanted to watch the live broadcast. In the current police force and peaceful era, too many people were self-righteous,zy, and had low vignce! Therefore, the chief prepared this show as actualbat to teach these rookies a lesson. It was precisely because of this. The more trouble caused by Jon, who was ying the role of the robber, for the police officers, the happier the chief was. Hearing the police captain questioned him so much, the chief¡¯s dignity was also revealed. He looked at the other party and his eyes were staring fiercely at him. Seeing that the other party¡¯s imposing manner was being suppressed by him, he asked in a deep voice. ¡°Sir, can you only deal with robbers who rob banks with kitchen knives?¡± ¡°Can you be sure that the robbers will y with you like this?!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ve already applied for a casualty quota for this show. There will be a pension for death.¡± The chief¡¯s words caused a pile of cold sweat to appear on the police captain¡¯s forehead. This show was definitely the closest to actualbat in recent years! Chapter 10

Chapter 10: No Need to Save Him, I Shot Him in the Head

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Outside the cordon, countless media with video cameras appeared at the drill site. Not only that, there were even helicopters in action to film the building. Many media used live broadcast methods. They thought they would have to wait for the police and the robbers to have a dialogue before they would have any content. However, everyone was excited after seeing the bank¡¯s door opened and closed. They thought that the robber would appear but only one woman walked out. The media reporters were also stunned. What was going on with this woman who walked out? Although the woman had just been protected by the police, this group of reporters still had to get first-hand news! ¡°Hello! We¡¯re from the Washington Times! May I ask why you were released?¡± ¡°Hello! We¡¯re from the Sun! May I ask if the robber has done anything to you?¡± ¡°We¡¯re from the Wall Street Journal! Did the robber make any demands?¡± Everyone quickly stopped the woman who had just walked out from the bank with their photographers and asked with the microphones in hands. After all, the reporters did not know what the situation in the bank was like. They could only interview the hostage who had just walked out from the bank. This female streamer, who was dressed very flirtatiously, had some lingering fear at the first ce. However, when she saw the camera lens, her face quickly smiled. She even subconsciously arranged the hair on her forehead. When they saw the hostage stopped to cooperate with them, the camera and the shlights were ced in front of her immediately. The female streamer knew that this might be her chance to be famous! Sheposed herself immediately. ¡°He... is very scary. His gaze seems like he will eat you up in the next second.¡± ¡°He wants to kill someone at the slightest disagreement. I was almost scared to death.¡± ¡°He has now killed a police officer. There is still a few million dors that he robbed in his bag! There are also guns and grenades. We are all scared to death.¡± The woman recalled Jon in the bank and her body instantly trembled. She spoke with a face full of lingering fear and a serious face. All the media became excited when these words were said. After all, the robber seemed really excited from the description of this woman! And in this era of entertainment, what the public needed the most was excitement! Jon released this woman to let the public know about this. He let the media came out and pressured the police. Only then could he continued to negotiate terms so that they would not dare to attack. The more attention public paid, the safer he would be. The more he would be like a crazy robber. The poprity of his live broadcast also continued to rise. Other than the cell phone that he was broadcasting, Jon got up and took away everyone¡¯s cell phones. As a robber, he would not allow the hostage to carry anymunication devices. At first, Jon thought that someone would struggle. He did not expect things to go smoothly. When Jon walked over with the box, no one dared to look up at Jon. They all handed over their cell phones with trembling hands. It was obvious. This was the deterrent effect of his robber¡¯s imposing manner! Everyone was afraid that this man would put a ck gun barrel on his head. That kind of physical fear made no one dare to resist Jon¡¯s orders. The only way to contact them now was through thendline phone in the bank. After receiving the phone, thendline phone in the bank just happened to ring. Jon raised his eyebrows slightly and smiled but he still walked over to pick up the phone. As the police outside hadpletely lost track of his movements in the bank so sooner orter, they would call him to find a solution. Giving them half an hour to surround the entire bank was giving enough face to the police. He brought up the live broadcast and positioned it to shoot him while he picked up the phone. ¡°Hello.¡± After picking up the phone, Jon spoke calmly. ¡°This is Sheriff Jerry from the New York Police Department.¡± A deep voice sounded on the ohter end of the phone. ¡°I know. What¡¯s the matter? Speak!¡± Jon still replied calmly. ¡°Is there a police officer in the bank who has been shot?¡± ¡°We can arrange a doctor going in and give him first aid.¡± ¡°After all, you know, your sentence will be very severe if someone is dead.¡± The captain seemed to be thinking for Jon, but in fact, he had his own ns. The captain could not help but frowned at Jon¡¯s calm tone. One had to know that the people who yed the role of robbers were usually chosen at random. After all, no one wanted to do this kind of dirty work. But... Jon¡¯s performance was too calm, too much like a repeat offender. It was as if he had really robbed a bank and knew how to deal with the police. ¡°No need.¡± ¡°Ithaca Model 37 shotgun, five meters away. One shot to the head. He¡¯s already dead.¡± Jon was so calm that it was as if he was telling Jerry that he had thrown away a bag of trash. ¡°Oh right, I¡¯ve already taken several lives so I won¡¯t think about what happens after I¡¯m arrested.¡± ¡°Besides, you won¡¯t be able to catch me.¡± Jon continued to speak calmly. The live broadcast room was also impressed by Jon¡¯s performance. ¡°That¡¯s crazy! This man! He¡¯s really an ouw!¡± ¡°This is too cool! It¡¯s just like in a movie! It¡¯s more exciting than a movie theater!¡± ¡°Did you hear that? This is what a real confrontation with the police looks like! Those movies are so weak!!¡± ¡°Sir! We have hired the most famouswyer in the United States to fight for you. As long as you can join ourpany, we will help you get out of jail!¡± Sheriff Jerry could not see these messages. But he had already fallen into silence because of what Jon said. This kid was really difficult to deal with. Originally, he wanted to use the excuse of sending a first aid officer in as an excuse to send a police undercover. Many criminals with weak defenses didn¡¯t care about this at all and directly let him go. This was also amon method used by the police. But... Jon¡¯s calm made him not fall for it at all. The sheriff needed to change his move. ¡°Okay, by the way, it¡¯s almost six o¡¯clock now. You and the hostage should have not eaten yet, right?¡± ¡°How about this, I ordered a few pizzas. I¡¯ll get someone to send them over to you. Can you finish your meal?¡± The sheriff did not give up and continued to speak. When he spoke, he tried his best to make his tone a little more rxed and amiable. ¡°Sure, twelve pizzas.¡± Without much hesitation, Jon replied directly. Then he hung up the phone. Jon knew his n. This confrontation would take some time to reach its climax. He still needed some pizzas to replenish his energy. And... Jon knew very well that the police would definitely use this pizza delivery opportunity to do something. But he didn¡¯t care. Whatever the police did, he would make them regret it. Chapter 11

Chapter 11: Detail-filled Sheriff

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Soon, the pizza was ready. All the ready-made pizza were packed in boxes and sent by a police officer into an RV that served as a temporarymand center. At this time, the sheriff and a few key members of the police department were holding theyout of the bank and studying the next battle n. In the RV, in addition to the police officers and the sheriff, the female anchor who had been released was there, too. Now, the windows of the bank were filled with posters all over the ce so the situation inside the bank could not be seen from the outside. They could only try their best to understand the situation from the mouth of the female anchor who had been released. They asked her about the general situation inside and had people take a statement with her before they could rest. They were going to start deploying their next rescue operation. ¡°Which box of pizza is equipped with a bug and a miniature camera?¡± The sheriff looked at the twelve boxes of pizza on the table and asked seriously. The policeman who delivered the pizza opened the top box. On the lid of this box of pizza, there was a small inteyer. In the inteyer, there was a bug and a pinhole camera. The technology was so advanced. The high-tech products used by the police were more advanced than people thought. Things like bugs and tiny pinhole cameras could be designed very small and simple. For example, the Soviet Union gave the American ambassador a wooden American emblem as a gift. When the American ambassador returned to the embassy, he hung the emblem in his office. From the end of February 1945, this US national emblem with the Soviet ¡°Golden Lip¡± bug inside had stayed in the most secret office of the US Embassy. It took eight years to find out. These pizza boxes had a mezzanine space of only four or five millimeters. At first nce, this box looked just like any other box. It waspletely undetectable that there was a mezzanine here. On the pizza lid, there was only a small hole left for the miniature pinhole camera to capture. Without careful observation, one would not have been able to see that there was something inside. ¡°Well done!¡± ¡°Even if that kid did his homework, he would not have thought that we would use so many high-tech things to deal with him!¡± The sheriff looked at the hiddenyer and nodded in satisfaction. After finished speaking, the sheriff switched the first box of pizza and the second box of pizza. He ced the pizza with a bug and camera in the second position. At this moment, some police officers were puzzled. ¡°Sir, why did you switch the two boxes of pizza?¡± ¡°If these two boxes of pizza are all the same, the robber would probably take the top box directly.¡± ¡°My purpose is to prevent the pizza with bug and camera from falling into the hands of the robber.¡± ¡°After all, if that box of pizza falls into the hands of the robber, it will naturally increase the probability of being discovered.¡± The sheriff spoke slowly. When he spoke, there was a trace of a confident smile on his face. After all, the sheriff was from a criminal investigation background. His control over these details was naturally something that ordinary people could notpare to. ¡°So that¡¯s how it is!¡± When the police officer heard this, he could not help but nodded. At that moment, he also had an expression of praise for the sherrif¡¯s wit. ¡°Find someone change his clothes and send the pizza in.¡± The sheriff gave an order to the police officer beside him. ¡°Yes!¡± The police officer replied and quickly went to prepare. About three minutester, a police officer dressed as a deliery man carried twelve boxes of pizza and walked towards the bank¡¯s entrance. The reporters and cameramen followed from afar. In the bank. Jon held a shotgun and sat beside the bank¡¯s entrance. He had been observing the police officers¡¯ actions through the cracks between the posters. Jon had seen the man in delivery man clothes carrying the pizza as he walked toward the bank. ¡°Sunny,e here!¡± Jon stood up and shouted at the lobby manager, Sunny, who was among the hostages in the waiting area. At this time, the hostages had gradually changed from being quiet at first to discussing the matter in a low voice. As Sunny heard Jon calling him, he shivered and got up quickly and ran over. All the hostages in the bank were already scared out of their wits by Jon. At the end of this drill, many of them would probably never work in the bank again. After all, they would never feel safe in the bank again. Their minds would y back today¡¯s experience at any time. But... what did this have to do with him. He was not their colleague. As long as he could get the five million reward from the system, even if he saved it and did nothing, it would still be higher than his sry. So, Jon did not care what they thought. Whether they were afraid of him or not was not something that Jon needed to consider. ¡°Brother, why are you looking for me?¡± When the lobby manager, Sunny, heard Jon called out to him, he rushed over and looked at Jon with a smile on his face. This guy was a bully. In the past, he liked to flirt with female employees and bully subordinates. But now... his attitude towards Jon was the most ttering. ¡°Dinner is here. Come with me to get it.¡± Jon nced at Sunny and spoke calmly. There was no expression on his face when he spoke. It was obvious that Jon could see the nature of this person. As long as he had a gun, he would not be afraid of him thinking of other things. ... At the bank entrance. The policeman dressed as a delivery man was holding the pizza and looking into the bank. This was a rare opportunity to get close to the bank without angering the robbers. Hence, these experienced policemen naturally wanted to take this opportunity to quickly understand the situation inside the bank. After all, the scope of the camera was too wide. Seeing the actual situation with their own eyes was extremely beneficial for them to rescue the hostages. ¡°Give me the pizza!¡± Just as the policeman was looking into the bank, a voice suddenly rang out. The sudden voice caused the highly focused policeman to tremble in fear. Earlier, he had been focused on observing the situation in the bank through the gap between the posters and had not noticed that there was a person standing behind the bank¡¯s door. He raised his head to look. That person was wearing the bank staff¡¯s clothes so it was obvious that he was not a robber. The real robber was standing behind the employee with a gun in his hand. The ck muzzle of the gun was pointed at the employee¡¯s head. He did not move at all. ¡°Oh, okay!¡± The policeman held the pizza boxes in his hand and was about to hand it over. An ident happened. The opening of the door that was chained was too small. The pizza could not enter. Chapter 12

Chapter 12: The Second Policeman Killed!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The policeman smiled awkwardly. ¡°The gap is too small. Why don¡¯t you open the door a little and I¡¯ll pass it to you?¡± The policeman dressed as a delivery man looked at Jon, who was hiding behind Sunny, and spoke calmly. Jon frowned slightly but did not speak. Outside the bank, there was an alloy gate. And behind the gate, there was a ss door. The ss door was now opened and the gap between it and the door was not small. However, Jon looked at the packaging of pizza. It was indeed veryrge. There was no way to pass through the gap between the alloy gate. There was a few seconds of silence. Jon pointed the gun at Sunny¡¯s head with one hand and he untied the iron chain on the alloy gate with another hand. ¡°Click click click...¡± A faint sound could be heard. The gate opened slowly and Jon stopped when it was wide enough. ¡°Pass it over!¡± Jon said coldly. This width was enough to bring the pizza in. The policeman in the delivery uniform walked over slowly and brought the pizza in from the alloy gate. When he handed the pizza, the policeman dressed as a delivery man was still staring at Jon. It was obvious the policeman had a n in mind. Jon did not move. Sunny, who was held at the head with a gun, slowly squatted down and went to get the pizza. At this moment, the policeman who squatted down and handed the pizza went through the gap directly as he stared at the ground and passed through the alloy gate. The series of movements were extremely smooth. One could tell that he was well-trained with a look. In his eyes, he was disguised as a delivery man and had just delivered the pizza. Now was the time for the robber to let down his guard. He was so close to the robber. As long as he found a good opportunity, there was a great chance to subdue the robber! After all, he was a fighting champion among the police force. At such a close distance, guns would not be of much use. If he used his fighting skills, it would not be a big problem to take down a small robber. Everything... was well thought out. However, just as the policeman rolled into the bank and before he could get up or make a move on Jon who was standing beside him, a ck muzzle was floating above his head as he looked up. ¡°Police? Don¡¯t move!¡± Jon¡¯s cold voice rang out. The policeman dressed as a delivery man was stunned. How did this kid know his identity as a police officer? Hadn¡¯t he disguised himself well without exposing his identity at all? The policeman looked at the muzzle in front of him and slowly raised his hand. He could only surrender now. No!! His raised right hand was about 10 centimeters away from Jon¡¯s left leg. As long as he could grab Jon¡¯s leg, he could instantly pull him down and make him trip. With his body¡¯s center of gravity turned upside down, he would not have the chance to shoot! ¡°How did you know my identity?¡± The policeman spoke to Jon and tried to distract him. His raised right hand was slowly approaching Jon¡¯s left leg. ¡°Bang!¡± The unique gunshot of the Ithaca Model 37 shotgun rang out from the bank. The bullet that was emitting mes instantly shot out and hit the ceiling on the policeman¡¯s forehead. Although it didn¡¯t hit him directly from a distance of more than a meter, the huge explosion that was emitting the smell of gunpowder still made him nearly faint. The policeman was also stunned for a moment and then his face instantly turned pale. D*mn it, did this kid really shoot? ¡°I said don¡¯t move!¡± ¡°Do you think that just because you distracted me, I won¡¯t care about your hand that is leaning toward me?¡± ¡°Now you are dead!¡± Jon said coldly. After saying that, he dragged the police officer into the bank without any exnation. He stood behind Sunny and locked the alloy gate with the iron chain again. Everything that happened now was quickly broadcasted to the live broadcast room through Jon¡¯s phone. The policemanid down aesthetically and smoothly jumped into the bank. Then, he was shot in the head and dragged into the bank by the robber. Countless gifts started to appear on the bullet screen again. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect him to really dare to shoot! This robber is really something.¡± ¡°He didn¡¯t kill the police. Looks like it¡¯s just a drill. It¡¯s boring.¡± ¡°I want to know the oue of this drill. At the very least, he really dares to shoot!¡± ¡°Although it¡¯s a drill, this robber is even more real than the real robber! Didn¡¯t you see how he killed two police officers?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just like watching a movie now. Leaving halfway through? I want to see the end!¡± ¡°It¡¯s better if he is not the robber. I can ask him out when he gets off work. ughing)¡± The bullet screen was scrolling crazily. This matter hade too quickly. The police didn¡¯t have time to react. Everything had been nned very well. However, the operation was too rough. The final oue was indeed a little out of everyone¡¯s expectations because another policeman had died in the bank. ... And in the RV. ¡°What¡¯s going on!¡± The sheriff looked at what had happened and pped the table as he spoke angrily. ¡°Who told him to do this? He¡¯s acting on his own ord!¡± In the temporarymand center, the sheriff pped the table and spoke angrily. Originally, he only wanted to use the opportunity of delivering the pizza to ce a bug and camera in as he wanted to confirm the situation in the bank and the location of the robber. It would be easier for him to make his next move in that case. Who knew. The pizza delivery policeman actually acted on his own ord and put his own life at risk. Seeing the sheriff¡¯s expression, the few police officers at the side also shut their mouths and did not dare to say anything. After all, the pizza delivery policeman acted on his own ord and did not inform them in advance. ¡°The drill has been two hours.¡± ¡°Two policemen were killed in the bank but we didn¡¯t make any progress at all. ¡°This problem is already very serious!¡± The director, who was sitting at the side, spoke at this moment. He looked at the sheriff and a few police officers with a gloomy expression. He didn¡¯t speak loudly but his tone was very unpleasant. The current situation could already be said to be a dereliction of duty in the eyes of the police. Of course, the main reason was that they had underestimated the robber, Jon at the beginning. They thought that even if it was a drill, what could an unlucky FBI agent who had been chosen immediately cause? However, they had never expected that it was this ordinary agent. He had caused them to suffer several big losses in a row. Chapter 13

Chapter 13: The Police Who Failed Again

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The sheriff¡¯s brows were tightly knitted together. At this moment, he had also realized the seriousness of the matter. ¡°It can¡¯t be said that there isn¡¯t any progress at all.¡± ¡°Haven¡¯t we already sent in the bugged meal boxes with camera?¡± ¡°As long as we can determine the location of the robber, we can start our operation at any time.¡± The police sheriff pinched the space between his eyebrows and took a deep breath before he spoke seriously. The director sat back in his seat and did not say anything else. He was just the referee. No matter which party was approaching victory in the drill, the director would not interfere too much. After all, what he wanted was fairness and justice, not forcibly shifting the bnce towards justice. Meanwhile, reporters and cameramen were already reporting live from the scene. They had nothing to do but now they found the news material they wanted. They quickly recorded the entire process of the police who had dressed up as deliveryman to deliver food. When the police jumped in to subdue the robber, the number of viewers and the number of bullet screens on all the TV stations soared. Then, when the police were warned by the robber with gun, the viewership ratings of several TV stations rose to the highest of the month. The scene when the police seemed to want to make another move but the robber fired his shotgun directly has caused the viewership ratings of all the TV stations to rise to the highest of the year! After all, everyone liked to watch bank robbing as long as it was not their own money, especially bank money. In the past, they weren¡¯t interested in this kind of drill because the drill was too fake. In previous drill, the person who yed the robber wanted to tie himself up and send himself off to the police as soon as the police arrived at the scene. He didn¡¯t look like a robber at all. They didn¡¯t care about the drill. If they ended the drill early and everyone got off work early, wouldn¡¯t everyone be happy with each other. This kind of drill was too childish. Not only would it fail for any detection, the public would also not be interested in such drills. But this time was different. Not only did he use real guns to blow up the bank at the start, he even killed two policemen in a row. Now that he had sealed the door and taken away the cash, many people even wondered if this person was really putting on a show. How could the public not be interested in such a real feeling? ¡°Sheriff, can I ask?¡± ¡°After another policeman was killed by the robber, what¡¯s our next n?¡± ¡°The police and the robbers have been in a stalemate for two hours now, but they still haven¡¯t taken any effective action.¡± ¡°Is the New York Police Department helpless against this robber?¡± The reporter quickly interviewed the sheriff who came out from the temporarymand center. Then, he asked a few questions that he had prepared in advance. ¡°Although the robber is experienced, unusually cunning and brutal this time, please rest assured that we will definitely arrest him and rescue the hostages sessfully!¡± ¡°The pizza with camera and bug had been sent into the bank. As long as we can confirm the location of the robber, we will take a forceful attack!¡± Although the sheriff was very upset, he still looked at the camera and said a few words. Though the sheriff thought that the robber was very cunning, he still could not help but tell the whole n to the media. Anyway, this was not a secret. It was just a drill. After all, exposing himself in the media was also a good opportunity to show the public the strength of the police. After responding to the reporter¡¯s questions, the sheriff and a few police didn¡¯t sit idle. They quickly looked at the disy screen on the console. The miniature pinhole camera was connected to the WIFI module. Now that the camera had been sent in, all they had to do was to quickly connect to the camera. They wanted to see if they could locate the robber. ¡°Sheriff! There¡¯s a sound!¡± Just as the sheriff was standing next to the control panel, the police officer who connected the equipment on the control panel spoke. ¡°Turn on the loudspeaker!¡± The sheriff hurriedly spoke. ¡°Rip... Rip...¡± After connecting to the microphone channel and turning on the loudspeaker, the sound of stic bags rubbing against each other could be heard. Everyone present was waiting for the machine to be adjusted and listening quietly because they knew that it was the sound of the robber picking up the pizza. Now, everyone was hoping that the robber would not choose the pizza with the bug and camera. The sound of stic scraping was still heard. However, other than this sound, there was no other sound. The sheriff could not help but frown slightly. There were more than a dozen hostages in this bank. Why didn¡¯t they make any sound? Could it be that this robber had sealed their mouths? Otherwise... The drill had continued for so long and the hostages didn¡¯tin at all? ¡°Hey, I say...¡± ¡°Can you give me a box of your pizza?¡± Just as everyone was wondering why it was so quiet, a voice suddenly sounded. Everyone¡¯s hearts tightened. This voice was very familiar. It was obviously the policeman who disguised himself as a deliveryman to deliver the pizza. ¡°I said, dead people can¡¯t make a sound.¡± ¡°But you just had to speak to me when I was holding the second box of pizza. This is obviously to attract my attention and make me ignore the second box of pizza.¡± After weighing the two boxes in his hands, Jon said directly. ¡°If I¡¯m not wrong, you must have tampered with the contents of this box of pizza, right?¡± ¡°A bug? Or a camera?¡± When everyone was afraid to gasp and listened, a cold voice sounded. This voice was obviously Jon. Exposed! The sheriff gritted his teeth and mmed the table again. What was this smart-alecky teammate doing? The sheriff had already said that this robber was meticulous and extremely careful. He still made a series of mistakes. Not only did he lose his life, but he also ruined the police¡¯s n. However... What the sheriff didn¡¯t know was that even if the police didn¡¯t speak, Jon would still find out because he was simply deceiving the other party. The second box was heavier than the first. All pizza boxes had the same standard, so there was something wrong with the second box! With a casual bluff, the other side¡¯s expression froze. Then Jon was 100% sure that there was something wrong with the second box. Jon¡¯s cold voice fell. At this moment, the policemen in themand room were very clear that the idea of using bugs and microcameras to check the situation in the bank had been shattered. What should they do next? Chapter 14

Chapter 14: The Special Forces Were on the Move!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio At this moment, Jon¡¯s words were also transmitted to the live broadcast room. It once again caused a heated discussion in the live broadcast room. ¡°This robber¡¯s IQ is too high! It¡¯s a a total high IQ crime!¡± ¡°I have to say, this exercise is really exciting. Compared to the previous exercises, this is much more like it.¡± ¡°It seems that whether the exercise is meaningful or not depends on whether the viin is serious or not. Who is the person ying the role of the robber? Is he also a policeman?¡± ¡°Anyone want to bet on how long this robber canst?¡± ¡°It could be true that this robber is cautious and has a high IQ but the main reason there is no progress so far is that the police¡¯s methods are too old-fashioned. These are all old-fashioned methods in movies. The probability of identifying them is too high.¡± ¡°Is this live broadcast really that good? I need to quickly follow it.¡± ¡°This live broadcast can totally be viewed as an unedited version of a movie!¡± ... In the bank. Jon had distributed the pizza to the hostages under his control. As long as they obediently listened to orders, he could not be bothered to mistreat them. After casually sitting down on the ground, Jon picked up his own pizza. And this box of pizza was the one with the hiddenyer, the one with the bug and camera. However, the bug and camera in the pizza box had been taken out by Jon and ced on the ground by now. The camera was facing Jon. ¡°If you just want to see me, you don¡¯t have to go through so much trouble.¡± Jon ate his pizza while looking at the camera. As he spoke, he had a provocative smile on his face. At this moment, Jon had activated the robber¡¯s acting skill, so no matter what he said or did, he looked like an extremely arrogant robber. ¡°I had killed that policeman just now.¡± ¡°Up until now, I¡¯ve already killed two policemen.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t send any more this kind of policemen. I won¡¯t have enough bullets.¡± ¡°Oh right, I¡¯m in a good mood right now, but I don¡¯t know when I¡¯ll be in a bad mood.¡± ¡°But when I¡¯m in a bad mood, that¡¯s when I¡¯ll start killing hostages.¡± Jon ate his food while looking at the camera. Naturally, no one responded to him. However... He knew that the police outside must be watching him provoking them so arrogantly. After saying a few words, Jon had already eaten a few pieces of pizza. After filling his stomach, he picked up the camera and bug on the ground and walked to the front door of the bank. ¡°There¡¯s not much time left for you.¡± Standing behind the thick wall to hide his figure, Jon looked at the camera and said thest sentence. Then, he directly opened a gap in the ss door and threw the bug and camera out. ... In themand room. The sheriff looked at the picture on the control screen and could not help but twitched his lips. Provocation!! This was a great provocation to the New York police and all the police officers! ¡°He¡¯s too arrogant!¡± The sheriff gritted his teeth and said. These words were squeezed out from the gaps between his teeth. It was enough to show how angry he was now and a few police officers looked at each other in dismay. The director, who sat at the back in silence, had a satisfied smile on his face. It seemed that he had really found the right person. This drill was enough to expose a lot of inadequacies in the police force. If there were inadequacies, they were not afraid of being discovered. What they were afraid of was that when the real thing happened, these inadequacies were then exposed. Because...every policeman only had one life. Now that they could see so many shorings with just the anomalous drill, there was still a chance to correct them. Even if it would affect the reputation of the policemen, it was still very worth it. The purpose of this joint exercise was achieved. Jon¡¯s provocation to the policemen was quickly spread to the live broadcast room. The live broadcast room became more and more lively. After all, this drill was really exciting where it got everyone pumped. ... After Jon threw the bug and camera out of the bank for less than two minutes, a siren suddenly sounded. Jon hurriedly got up and stood at the door of the bank. He looked out through the gap between the posters. In the square outside, several police cars appeared. Many fully armed policemen got out of the cars. These policemen were dressed differently from the previous policemen and their equipment was several times more luxurious. These were the special forces of the New York City Police Force. Jon raised his eyebrows. Once the special forces arrived, the assault on the police was about to begin. What followed was the most important confrontation of this drill. ¡°Everyone, change your clothes!¡± ¡°Whoever doesn¡¯t change, I¡¯ll kill him!¡± Jon turned around, looked at the hostages in the alert area and said fiercely. With a cold and murderous voice, Jon¡¯s sharp gaze swept across every hostage. That terrifying gaze made all the quiet hostages swallowed their saliva. This aura, this gaze... It was too frightening! No one dared to be negligent. They were all chased into the toilet by Jon to change into the clothes that Jon had prepared for them. The blue windbreaker, blue jeans, ck cap and ckbat boots were exactly the same as Jon¡¯s current attire. These things had been prepared by Jon long ago. Although the clothes were cheap, Jon still spent a lot of money to prepare more than ten sets of clothes. In the bank, except for the two policemen who had been killed, the other eleven people all wore the same clothes. They also wore the same mask that Jon had given them. With the cap lowered, it was impossible to tell who was who, except for a certain difference in height and body shape. Even if it was someone who knew Jon, they might not be able to find him among the 11 people. Jon was among them while preparing for the next n. ... ¡°Reporting in!¡± When the special forces rushed over, the director and the sheriff walked out from the temporarymand room. The squad leader of the special forces walked up to the two of them, greeted and saluted. After nodding his head, the squad leader asked directly. ¡°How¡¯s the situation at the scene now?¡± In the case of a bank robbery, since special forces had rushed to the scene, the special forces would take over the assault mission. Of course, the nominalmander was still the police. It was just that they no longer had the authority tomand the following operations. At this stage, it meant that the ordinary police could no longer deal with the robber in the bank. The sheriff¡¯s face was somewhat ugly. Chapter 15

Chapter 15: Ten Minutes Was Given To Me

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The sheriff exined the current situation to the squad leader. ¡°Two policemen have been killed.¡± ¡°The robber destroyed the surveince camera in the bank and covered all the windows. We have no idea what is going on in the bank.¡± ¡°This robber is extremely cunning and ruthless. He is extremely cautious.¡± The sheriff made a simple and direct opening and exined the scene to the special force squad leader. The special force squad leader nodded. ¡°Do you have theyout of the bank here?¡± The special force squad leader asked again. ¡°Yes!¡± The sheriff nodded. As soon as he finished speaking, a police officer standing behind him ran to the temporarymand room and took out the blueprint. The special force squad leader took the blueprint and looked at it carefully. ¡°By the way, how many waves of attacks have theyunched so far?¡± While looking at the blueprint, the special force squad leader asked the sheriff casually. The sheriff was silent for a moment. He still told him about the incident where a policeman disguised himself as a delivery man to send in bug and camera. After hearing the whole story, the special force squad leader could not help butugh. ¡°Hey, what do you mean?¡± The sheriff was instantly unhappy when he saw it. Was heughing at him? ¡°Sorry, I couldn¡¯t help it.¡± ¡°But it¡¯s okay, just leave it to us!¡± ¡°I guarantee that the robber will be subdued within ten minutes! All the hostages will be rescued!¡± The SWAT team quickly put away their smiles and looked at the sheriff opposite them seriously. Although they put away their smiles, they did not hide the fact that they wereughing at the sheriff. After all, putting a bug and a camera in a pizza box was a bit too old-fashioned, wasn¡¯t it? Was it the level of thinking during the Cold War? Moreover, it took two hours for such an action to be taken. In the end, they had not seeded. It was ridiculous in the eyes of the special force squad leader. Now the special force squad leader was full of confidence with theyout of the bank. He decided to end the exercise in ten minutes and show the SWAT team¡¯sbat ability in front of the sheriff. After listening to the SWAT team, the sheriff did not speak again. A meaningful smile was on his face. Ten minutes to rescue the hostages? He seemed to have said that when he left the police station. But now he was suffered with a rebuff. He could already imagine the dejected expression on the squad leader¡¯s face after the surprise attack of the SWAT team failed. The live broadcast hosts of the nearby television stations were waiting for the news material. The SWAT team and the sheriff did not avoid the media. The purpose of the exercise was to let them show off their muscles. After the television station broadcast it, the conversation between the SWAT team and the sheriff instantly caused a discussion. ¡°Settle it in ten minutes? This SWAT team is a little confident!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. You have to know that the SWAT team¡¯s equipment and thebat ability of its members are all first-ss. They must be confident.¡± ¡°But why do I feel the SWAT team will be pped in the face?¡± ¡°Probably not. After all, the SWAT team is here. This robber won¡¯t be able to hold on by himself. The drill will probably end soon.¡± ¡°Sigh, I just came to watch. Is it about to end soon?¡± ¡°Why... I hope the robber can hold on a little longer?¡± ¡°...¡± Most of the viewers in the live broadcast room were more optimistic about the SWAT team. After all, the SWAT team was indeed a squad with rtively strongbat strength. For the robbers to hold on until they appeared in a drill was a situation that had never happened before. And this also meant that this drill was about to end. After all, an ordinary robber would not be able to hold on for five minutes before they were subdued, let alone ten minutes. With the bankyout map held, the captain of the SWAT team found five members and told them about his strategic n. The snipers in the squad had already arrived at the best gathering point nearby. Everything was ready in two minutes. ¡°Action!¡± The captain of the SWAT team waved his hand. A few well-equipped SWAT members hid themselves and went around the back door of the bank from the back of the car. The strategy of the SWAT team leader was very simple. The five members were the assault team. They took the bank president¡¯s ID card and entered through the electronic door at the back. ording to the map of the bankyout, they sneaked into the back of the bank lobby. They would then use the front door to attract the attention of the robbers. The snipers on the nearby buildings would look for opportunities to kill the robber directly. It was the simplest and mostmon strategy. And this kind of strategy was also the most useful in actualbat. ¡°Watch carefully. Give me ten minutes.¡± The captain of the SWAT team returned to the side of the sheriff and said slowly. The sheriff still didn¡¯t speak, but he had a meaningful smile on his face. The captain of the SWAT team didn¡¯t say much either. He directly picked up the loudspeaker and walked toward the bank. When he was two to three meters away from the bank¡¯s door, he stopped. ¡°Listen up, robbers inside. You are surrounded by us now. There is only one way out for you now, and that is to quicklye out and surrender.¡± The powerful voice passed through the loudspeaker and slowly echoed in the square. However, no one responded. The captain of the SWAT team was not in a hurry. He picked up the loudspeaker again and shouted. ¡°This stalemate will not benefit you.¡± ¡°How about this, youe and talk to us.¡± ¡°As long as you release the hostages, we can fulfill some reasonable requests of yours!¡± ¡°Do you have any family members you want to meet? We can let you meet them.¡± ¡°Do you have anything you want to say? There are media outside. You can tell us all about the grievances you have suffered.¡± The captain of the SWAT team continued to shout, but there was still no response. At this moment, a few members of SWAT team had already entered through the back door of the bank. They carefully walked forward along the way, but they did not find any danger. It was as if the robbers werepletely unaware of their surprise attack. At this moment, Jon was sitting quietly in the bank. His expression was calm and he did not pay any attention to the shouting outside. In the bank, twelve people, including Jon, were all wearing the same clothes, caps, and masks. Jon was sitting among them. Even Jon¡¯s parents might not be able to find him in a short time. The captain of SWAT¡¯s voice fell but no one in the bank responded. The captain of SWAT raised his eyebrows slightly. Was this robber nning to waste his time like this? He looked back at the sniper on the roof opposite the bank. If the robber hid like this and didn¡¯t show up to negotiate, then the sniper wouldn¡¯t be able to catch the target at all. If the sniper couldn¡¯t y a role, then they could only rely on the assault team! Chapter 16

Chapter 16: The Assault Team Killed

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Assault team, what¡¯s the situation now?¡± The captain took out his walkie-talkie and asked softly about the assault team¡¯s situation. ¡°Everything is safe.¡± ¡°We have arrived at the back door of the bank lobby. We canunch an assault at any time.¡± The news of the assault team came through the earpiece. The captain was amused. He didn¡¯t expect the assault team would be able to enter the back door of the bank lobby so easily. It seemed that the sheriff wasn¡¯t exaggerating when he said that the robber was cunning and cautious! The captain looked back at the sheriff and made an OK gesture. Now, the captain was more confident in his n to take down the robber and rescue the hostages within ten minutes. ¡°Assault team, listen up!¡± ¡°Now I¡¯m shouting at the robber again to attract his attention.¡± ¡°After I¡¯m done shouting, they¡¯ll immediatelyunch a raid!¡± ¡°Remember, the robber is wearing a green windbreaker, a cap, and ckbat boots. Don¡¯t identally injure the hostages.¡± The captain spoke into the walkie-talkie again. Jon¡¯s attire had been captured by the security camera at the bank entrance before he entered. The captain had seen the surveince footage in the car before he arrived at the bank. ¡°Yes!¡± The response from the assault team came through the headset again. At this moment, the sheriff, the chief, as well as photographers, media, and hosts were all paying close attention to the squad leader¡¯smand. The helmets worn by the assault team members were equipped with cameras. The cameras were linked to the control panel in the temporarymand room, where they could see the situation of the assault team. Now, the assault team stood outside the back door of the bank lobby. The back door was left ajar and did not close. The assault team members also carefully checked this door and confirmed that there were no traps or dangers. Looking at the situation, the sheriff could not help but frown slightly. Could it be that the SWAT team would really subdue Jon within ten minutes and end this drill? If that was really the case, he would lose face. He took a slight breath and stared at the screen. ¡°People inside, listen up. If you don¡¯te out and surrender now, we willunch a strong attack on the bank in ten minutes!¡± ¡°If youe out and surrender now, you still have a chance to get your sentence reduced.¡± ¡°If you resist stubbornly, you will only make the current situation worse!¡± In the square, the SWAT team continued to shout through the loudspeaker. He deliberately said that they wouldunch a strong attack in ten minutes. This was to attract the robber and put pressure on him. This way, it would create more favorable conditions for the assault team. ¡°Action!¡± As soon as he shouted, the SWAT team leader quickly picked up the walkie-talkie in his hand and gave the order to the assault team. ¡°Bang!¡± A dull thud was heard from the other side. In the temporarymand room, everyone was staring at the disy screen in front of them. With a dull thud, they saw the assault team directly kicked open the back door of the bank lobby. The five assault team members quickly entered the bank lobby in an orderly manner. They held guns and covered each other. At the same time, they were still looking for the target robber in the bank. Military green windbreaker, ck cap, ckbat boots... The robber was extremely ferocious. Once he was discovered, he would be immediately killed. However, the five assault team members were instantly stunned after charging into the bank lobby. Other than the two police officers who were lying dead on the ground, the remaining ten or so people standing inside the bank were all dressed the same. Military green windbreaker, ck cap, ckbat boots and the same masks. It was impossible to tell who was who. When the people in the temporarymand center saw this situation, they were also stunned. What was going on? Why were they all wearing the same clothes? Who could tell who was Jon? ¡°Captain! There¡¯s a trick!¡± ¡°Everyone in the bank is dressed the same!¡± The SWAT team leader stood in front of the bank and waited for his team member to bring him the good news of victory. An anxious voice of his team member suddenly sounded in his earpiece. The SWAT team leader was stunned. Something had happened! ¡°Don¡¯t move, all of you don¡¯t move!¡± The assault team member squatting at the front held his gun and shouted sternly. However, the more than ten people were in a mess after the stern shout. The assault team members held their guns and did not dare to make any movements. After all, they could not tell who the robber was and they could not shoot under such circumstances. ¡°Bang...¡± Just as the assault team members were extremely nervous, a cold voice sounded. The assault team members looked down and saw a grenade on the ground. ¡°There¡¯s a grenade! Take cover!¡± The assault team member who discovered the grenade first hurriedly shouted. However, it was toote now. The standard time for a grenade to detonate was 3.5 seconds. The grenade was right under their feet. It was impossible to hide by the narrow back door of the bank lobby in such a short time. Of course, the assault team members who were squatting at the front had a chance to kick the grenade back. However, the grenade was thrown from the hostages. Even if they sacrificed their lives at the expense of them, they could not hurt the hostages. ¡°Chi...¡± Another sound was heard. Before the few assault team members could take cover, the grenade on the ground suddenly exploded. However, the explosion was different from what they had imagined. After the grenade exploded, green liquid sshed out and quickly stained the few assault team members. They were all within the explosion range of the grenade. The assault team members were all eliminated! Green liquid shot out and the assault team members were all stunned on the spot. They knew very well this was a drill and it was impossible to use real grenades. The things on their bodies meant that the grenade had already exploded. Within such a short distance, the explosive power of a grenade was extremely terrifying and none of them would be spared. ¡°Now, all of you are dead!¡± ¡°All of you lie on the ground and put your equipment aside.¡± ¡°If you feel that you are notpletely dead, I can fulfill your wish of taking a bullet.¡± When the assault team was at a loss, a cold voice sounded among the hostages. Jon picked up the gun on his back and walked out without any haste. Taking off his mask, Jon looked at the assault team sharply, as if he was looking at a few dead people. Chapter 17

Chapter 17: Explosion of Public Opinion!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio In the temporarymand center, the SWAT team leader just ran back and saw Jon on the screen. Jon was currently standing in front of the assault team member. The camera on the assault team member¡¯s helmet was just enough to capture him. His cold gaze was like a silent mockery of the police. Just like that? ¡°F*ck!¡± The SWAT team leader looked at Jon¡¯s cold expression and could not help cursing. His five brothers were killed and now the SWAT team leader not only med himself, but was also a little angry. He really did not expect that this kid, Jon who yed the robber would be so cunning. An ordinary person would not have thought to change all the hostages¡¯ clothes into the same style as himself. ¡°I dere!¡± ¡°The assault failed and all five members of the assault team were killed!¡± ¡°Continue with the drill!¡± The director stood at the front. At this moment, he turned around to look at the SWAT team leader and the sheriff and said expressionlessly. Although it was not death in real battle at the moment, these were five living lives. At this moment, the director was naturally angry at the SWAT team leader for dismissing the wrong decision. The sheriff looked at the SWAT team leader, who had threatened to end the drill in ten minutes waspletely disheartened, but he did not dare to mock at the moment. After all, not only were there his own people in this drill, there were higher-ups watching. It waspletely treated as a real battle this time. This was not the time to mock others. ... The director¡¯s words sounded like a ruthless judge¡¯s judgment from the headset. Although the five team members were unwilling, they took off all their equipment, including the helmets with cameras. They were put into a box by Jon. Jon let the dead team members lied on the ground and sat down on the floor in the middle of the bank. Here came the men from special forces. The snipers must have been in position. However, Jon had observed the best ce to gather was on the opposite roof which faced the bank lobby before he entered the bank. Therefore, he was careful of the view from the opposite roof while putting up the posters. There was also a heavy wall blocking his position. With the cover of the posters, the sniper would not be able to see him no matter how he adjusted his position. Jon looked up at the time. It was already 6:30. It was almost dark. The exercise hadsted for two and a half hours. In the history of bank exercises, such a long battle had never happened in this city. However, Jon wanted to get a high score from the system and this amount of time was obviously not enough. ... At this moment, it was fuming in the live broadcast room. Not only had the number of viewers increased by ten times, the number of bullet screens had also soared to a terrifying degree. ¡°D*mn, the robber is too smart. How did he think of changing the hostages into the same clothes as himself?¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect the special forces to fail.¡± ¡°This time five people were killed. Including the two police officers, there were a total of seven. What if this was a real incident?!¡± ¡°Fortunately, it was a drill. After all, these people only have one life!¡± ¡°I think the robber is too strong. Real robbers should be like this. They are cruel, cunning, and have many tricks. Killing people is like killing a chicken. Only then, the drill will be meaningful.¡± ¡°What the person above said makes sense. Only by finding problems in the act, we may reduce the problems in actualbat.¡± ¡°A highly intelligent robber is really difficult to deal with. I don¡¯t know how the police will deal with him next.¡± ¡°I strongly request that the city of Chicago invite this robber to hold a drill here! Only in this way can the lives of the citizens and police in Chicago be better protected in actualbat.¡± ¡°Ditto. I hope that Washington will also hold a drill like this. We should invite professional robbers. It will definitely be exciting!¡± ¡°Start from actualbat! It¡¯s very meaningful!¡± ¡°...¡± In the bullet screens, most of them were praising Jon, who had be a robber. After all, the robber in this drill was really valiantpared to previous drills. The police paid their lives to protect the safety and property of the public. Naturally, the public wanted to protect the safety of the police, too. Moreover, the purpose of this exercise was obvious to everyone. Only by finding the problem in time could the problem be reduced. The audience felt that it was really necessary to hold excercise, which is in the live broadcast now. A sessful exercise was the result that everyone wanted to see. So, in the bullet screens, many started to crazily invite Jon to participate in drills in other cities. The poprity was abnormally high. And... At this moment, all kinds of posts discussing the drill were also soaring on the inte. [ New York City strongest bank robbery. The strongest robber is out, seven police officers are dead. Who else can subdue him? ] [ Identifying the problem to solve it. What do you think of this drill in New York City? ] [ Shocking! The drill in New York City has actually developed to this stage... ] [ Netizens from all over the world have issued invitations to the robber in this New York City drill. Do you want this ¡°vicious¡± and ¡°brutal¡± robber to go to your hometown? ] [ The safest and most effective way to ensure the safety of the citizens and the police is to have a real drill like New York City. ] ... There were various posts and each one was very popr. This bank drill hadsted for two and a half hours and was extremely close to actualbat. It had instantly upied countless hot searches. Among these posts, all of them were praising Jon¡¯s extremely upright attitude toward the exercise. Although he acted very brutal, cold, and cunning, he won everyone¡¯s admiration. For a time, Jon seemed to have be a national celebrity without knowing it. A surprise attack had just failed. In order not to anger the robber, threaten the lives of the hostages and caused more casualties in the police force, the police officers did not dare to act again. In themand room. The sheriff, the SWAT team, and a few key police officers were looking at theyout of the bank, as well as the information of the robber. They were discussing what to do next. Chapter 18

Chapter 18: Negotiator Arrived!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Inside the bank. Jon observed the ground for a while and saw there was no movement outside. He got up and went to the water dispenser for a drink. Jon went to the side of the dead policemen while holding the ss. He searched for his own equipment while looking at the policemen beside him. After taking a sip of water, a new n suddenly appeared his eyes. As Jon was thinking about the details, a voice suddenly came from outside the bank. ¡°Listen up, robber inside!¡± ¡°I¡¯m the negotiator in the city. I¡¯m here to help you.¡± ¡°If you have any requests, we can talk. As long as you don¡¯t hurt the hostages, we can meet your reasonable requests.¡± Jon raised his eyebrows. He made a cat leap. When he arrived at the bank¡¯s entrance, he stood behind the load-bearing wall and hid his body. At the same time, he looked out through the gaps between the posters. In the square, a middle-aged man in casual clothes was holding a loudspeaker and shouting into the bank. A negotiator? Jon knew that until now, the police probably wouldn¡¯t choose a spy toe in. Because once the spy failed, it would definitely cause the robber to rage and threaten the hostages¡¯ lives. Therefore, this negotiator should not be too much of a problem. ¡°Youe in!¡± ¡°I¡¯ll only negotiate with you.¡± Jon hesitated for a moment, but he still spoke to the outside. The current situation was a stalemate. It was not only stressful for the police, but also for Jon. Through the negotiator, Jon could pressure the police again and make some requests for them to keep them busy. It was just in time for Jon to prepare his next step. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the negotiation experts outside were slightly stunned. Into the bank to negotiate? But inside the bank, there was a brutal robber who carried the lives of seven police officers on his back. It was too risky for the negotiator to enter the bank. ¡°I don¡¯t agree with you going in. The robber is extremely brutal. If there are any problems with the negotiation, you will be in danger at any time.¡± ¡°Now, seven policemen have been killed, and eleven hostages are in the hands of the robber.¡± ¡°If you go in and any problems happen again, things will only get worse.¡± Just as the negotiator was hesitating, the sheriff¡¯s voice sounded in his earpiece. As themander of this exercise, the sheriff naturally had to express his opinion on everything. ¡°The robber is willing to negotiate shows that he is willing to use the chips in his hands to exchange for some requests.¡± ¡°I think this is a chance to stabilize the robber.¡± ¡°Captain, let me go in and try!¡± The negotiator hesitated for a few seconds before replying to the captain into the microphone. As a negotiator, he knew very well that in this kind of bank robbery, the psychological pressure of the robber would be greater as time passed. At this time, the robber would easily act on the hostage. Negotiation was the best way to satisfy some of the robber¡¯s requirements at this point, such as meeting his family and preparing a fully-fueled car for him... Satisfying these requirements allowed him to see a glimmer of hope. With hope in his heart, the robber would cherish the chips in his hands and would not easily harm the hostage. This was the meaning of negotiation. On the other end of the earpiece, the sheriff was silent, too. There was indeed no better way now. After all... In the bank, all the hostages and robber were dressed in the same uniform. They did not even know where the robber was. Even if they took a forceful attack, the chances of sess were almost zero. ¡°Ensure your own safety!¡± After a long silence, the sheriff¡¯s solemn voice came from the earpiece. The negotiator did not respond. He just raised the loudspeaker in his hand and shouted at the bank again. ¡°Open the door and I¡¯lle in to talk to you alone.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I don¡¯t have any weapons on me.¡± A loud voice came through the loudspeaker. After saying that, the negotiator put the loudspeaker in his hand on the ground. He raised his hands high and slowly approached the bank. ¡°Click click...¡± A slight sound was heard. The electronic door of the bank slowly opened and the ss door was also opened to a width that a person could pass through. The sniper on the opposite building hurriedly searched for a target. There was indeed a figure wearing a military green windbreaker, a cap, ckbat boots and a mask inside the bank¡¯s main door. However, he was raising his hand high and a ck gun barrel was behind his head. The person with the gun was hiding behind the load-bearing wall. ¡°Report, a figure wearing the same clothes as the robber appeared at the bank entrance but he should be a hostage!¡± ¡°The robber is hiding behind the load-bearing wall with a gun, unable to aim at the target.¡± The sniper hurriedly reported the situation. ¡°All police officers, don¡¯t act rashly. Don¡¯t anger the robber now!¡± ¡°Everyone, stay alert and listen to my orders!¡± The sheriff¡¯s anxious voice sounded in all the police¡¯s earphones. All the police officers followed the orders after hearing that and didn¡¯t dare to take any action. The negotiation expert walked towards the bank. All the police officers were on standby and didn¡¯t dare to take any action. Because... If they alerted the robber, the robber would immediately shoot and kill the hostage in front of the muzzle. Moreover... The robber was well hidden. Even the sniper could not locate the robber. ¡°Hello.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. I¡¯m really here to help you.¡± The negotiator raised his hands and finally walked into the bank. He also saw Jon hiding behind the load-bearing wall. His eyes were cold and calm. Usually, people who were confident in themselves would have such eyes. The negotiator tried his best to speak to Jon in the gentlest tone possible. As he spoke, he kept repeating that he was here to help him. While he wasforting Jon, he also wanted to gain his trust. ¡°Don¡¯t talk nonsense!¡± ¡°Put your hands on your head and lie on the ground. Don¡¯t do anything.¡± ¡°As soon as you make a move, I¡¯ll shoot him!¡± Jon looked at the negotiator and said coldly. He directly disyed the aura of a thug. The hostage standing in front of the muzzle was the lobby manager, Sunny. At this moment, he did not dare to move. ording to Jon¡¯s request, he just stood behind the ss door of the bank with his hands held high. When the negotiator heard Jon¡¯s words, he quickly followed. With his hands on his head, he slowly knelt down and then prostrated on the ground. ¡°Click click click...¡± With the sound of the iron chains, the alloy gate of the bank was once again locked. In the temporarymand center, a fewmanders stood quietly. The negotiator was wearing a microphone and headset. They could also raise the content of the negotiation here. This was Jon¡¯s first formal conversation with the police. Chapter 19

Chapter 19: Tied Up the Negotiator!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°You, go and sit down!¡± After Jon closed the door, he first motioned Sunny to return to the alert area. Sunny did not dare to say anything and hurriedly run back to his seat. With Jon¡¯s current brutal temperament, he did not dare to provoke Jon at all. After Sunny sat down, Jon squatted down. He searched the body of the negotiator who was lying on the ground. After confirming that he was indeed unarmed, Jon removed the microphone and headset from the negotiator¡¯s body. ¡°Very good, I only have two requests!¡± ¡°First: get all the police officers in front of the bank to withdraw and get rid of the sniper upstairs!¡± ¡°Second: get me a fully-fueled car!¡± Jon put on his headset and spoke about the subject indifferently. ¡°These two requests of yours are really difficult.¡± ¡°Do you have any other requests, such as letting you meet the person you want to meet the most or eating your favorite food?¡± ¡°Do you have children? We can...¡± After hearing Jon¡¯s words, the negotiator who was lying on the ground hurriedly spoke up. Indeed, actualbat was different from movies. Any request that asked for police retreat, a car or money, the police would not agree to it. Because once they agreed, the robber would drive away with the hostage and the capture would be more difficult. But they would not directly refuse. Because once they refused, it might anger the robber. The robber would directly attack the hostage and make things worse. Therefore, the negotiator only vaguely responded to Jon¡¯s two requests. Then he asked if there were any other requests that could be fulfilled. ¡°Shut up, I didn¡¯t tell you!¡± ¡°Director, did you hear my two requests?¡± However, the negotiator could not finish his words. He was directly interrupted by Jon¡¯s stern voice. Jon spoke into the microphone again after interrupting the negotiator. His two requests were not addressed to the negotiator, but to the other end of the microphone, only for the highest sheriff. In the temporarymand room. At this moment, few of them were a little confused by Jon¡¯s actions. Since this kid did not want to negotiate, why did he let the negotiator into the bank? ¡°As long as you promise not to hurt the hostages, we will do our best to fulfill your request!¡± The sheriff stood up in the temporarymand room and spoke into the microphone. ¡°You have 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, if I don¡¯t see what I want, I will start killing the hostages!¡± ¡°Kill one every 10 minutes!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I still have enough hostages here to kill for two hours. So all the time added up, you guys still have quite a lot of time.¡± Jon continued to speak into the microphone. After hearing Jon¡¯s words, everyone in themand center had serious expressions on their faces. The robber had already announced that he was going to start attacking the hostages. Then the situation would be even more serious. ¡°Oh right, thank you for sending another hostage in!¡± ¡°Including him, the hostage in my hands canst for two hours!¡± In themand room, when everyone felt that the situation was grim, Jon¡¯s voice sounded again. Everyone was stunned. This kid had no intention of negotiating with the negotiator? He let the negotiator in just to take another hostage? ¡°D*mn it! This kid even kidnapped the negotiator!¡± The SWAT team leader frowned and said coldly. ¡°He took the lives of seven policemen. It¡¯s not impossible for him to kidnap the negotiator.¡± ¡°Now he has a total of twelve hostages in his hands. This matter is even more troublesome.¡± The sheriff sighed. He had his first reaction was afraid this would happen, so he stopped the negotiator. Now it seemed that he should have stick to his opinion. However... Since it had happened, there was no remorse for it. ... In the bank. Jon found the handcuffs from the belongings of the earliest policemen who died and handcuffed the negotiator to the waiting area. Then, he took away the microphone and headset that he brought in and ced them in the box where the items were previously ced. After that, Jon sat on the floor of the bank lobby again, quietly watching the situation outside. The negotiator, who was leaning against his seat with handcuffs, tried to talk to Jon a few more times. He wanted to see if there was a chance to break Jon¡¯s psychological defense with words. However, Jonpletely ignored him. While quietly watching the situation outside, Jon also looked at the watch on the wall from time to time, observing the passage of time. Jon was making a big move right now. At this point in the exercise, the time of the confrontation hade to a close. Jon was getting ready to walk away. If he could get out of this bank drill, he should be able to get the highest score from the system. And Jon let the negotiator in without killing him because this negotiator... was the most important piece in his n to get out. The negotiator was kidnapped and the robber made unreasonable demands. At this point in the exercise, the rhythm waspletely in the hands of the robber. After all, there were 12 hostages in the hands of the robber. So many lives were in the hands of the robber. In order not to anger the robber and threaten the safety of the hostages, the police could only allow the robber to lead them by the nose. ¡°Sheriff, what should we do now?¡± In the temporarymand room, a cadre of police officers looked at the chiefmander and asked. Should they satisfy the robber¡¯s request? If they really got a car for the robber, the difficulty of capturing him would definitely increase after the robber drove away. However... The robber had so many hostages. If they didn¡¯t give it to him, the robber would definitely kill the hostages. The original purpose of the negotiation was to appease the robber and try to stall for time. But now, the robber had directly requested that his request be met within 30 minutes. Obviously, they couldn¡¯t dy any longer. ¡°First, withdraw the sniper on the opposite rooftop.¡± ¡°Find another car.¡± ¡°Oh right, find a two-seater sedan so that when the robber want to take the hostages away, he can¡¯t take so many people away.¡± ¡°Reducing the number of hostages will be more beneficial to us.¡± The sheriff was silent for nearly a minute before he spoke in a deep voice. Since they couldn¡¯t dy any longer, they could only satisfy the robber¡¯s request and save the hostages¡¯ lives. ¡°Yes!¡± The police officer behind him heard this and responded, then quickly went to prepare the vehicle. The SWAT team leader also hurriedly picked up the walkie-talkie and withdrew the sniper from the opposite rooftop. This cunning robber, Jon, definitely had a way to verify whether there was a sniper. At this time, he could not provoke him. Otherwise, the SWAT team leader would definitely be the scapegoat! Chapter 20

Chapter 20: Preparation Before the Perfect Ending

The sheriff held the topographic map around the bank in his hand and analyzed the escape route of the robber if he got the car. ¡°The robber asked the police at the front door to retreat and even asked us to prepare the car. He must be trying to escape through the front door!¡± ¡°And there are only two main roads if he leaves from the front door.¡± ¡°Go and transfer the police guarding the back door over. Guard the surroundings of these two main roads and monitor the robber¡¯s escape route. As for the back door, leave two police officers behind!¡± The police were now surrounding the bank and there were many policemen at the back door. The conditions put forward by the robber was not expensive as all of them pointed to him wanting to escape through the front door. Therefore, the sheriff transferred a part of the people at the back door to directly set up a perimeter around the possible escape route of the robber at the front door. ¡°Sheriff, is it possible that the robber wanted to escape through the back door, so he deliberately confused us and proposed the conditions to escape through the front door?¡± ¡°If we were transferred here through the back door, weren¡¯t we be falling into the robber¡¯s trap?¡± The police officer next to him listened to the sheriff¡¯s analysis and asked. ¡°It¡¯s unlikely.¡± ¡°This is the back door of the bank. There¡¯s no traffic road and it¡¯s a hundred meters away from the nearestne.¡± ¡°And there¡¯s a very high wall here.¡± ¡°If the robber want to escape through the back door, he has to abandon all the hostages. This is not a wise choice for the robber.¡± The sheriff pointed at the topographic map and analyzed it rationally. If the robber really chose to abandon all the hostages and escaped through the back door, it would be a good thing for the police. After all, he would not have any hostages, so it was easier to catch him. ¡°Yes!¡± After listening to the sheriff¡¯s analysis, the police officer nodded and began to deploy manpower ording to his instructions. ¡­ Just as the police were making all sorts of arrangements and considering Jon¡¯s escape route. Jon also stood up from the ground and moved his body slightly in the bank. ¡°Everyone, hold on a little longer. This drill is almosting to an end.¡± After moving his body, Jon looked at the hostages in the bank and the dead policemen. Now, Jon was about to begin his final move. This was a risky move. In this drill, whether he could end perfectly depended on this next risky move. After finished speaking, Jon walked to the area where the hostages were and chased all the hostages apart from the negotiator. Although the hostages didn¡¯t know what Jon wanted to do, they still obediently walked in front of Jon. Under Jon¡¯s guidance, they walked towards the bank¡¯s office area. At the beginning of the act, Jonpletely relied on his aura to suppress the hostages. But¡­ Now that the exercise had been going on for so long, everyone was already in character. They began to cooperate with the exercise. After all¡­ It was a good life experience to be able to go through such an exercise in one¡¯s life. After driving the hostages to the office area, Jon found six rooms and locked the hostages two in one rooms. The extra lobby manager, Sunny, was locked in a separate room. In the room where Sunny was locked, Jon first clenched Sunny¡¯s hands into fists, then wrapped them with tape. He made sure that his hands could not tear the tape off each other. Finally, he sealed Sunny¡¯s mouth with tape. ¡°Listen carefully, there are two remote-controlled bombs in my clothes. As soon as I press the button, they will explode instantly!¡± ¡°Now, I¡¯ll give you this clothes!¡± ¡°If you want to stay alive and see your wife, listen to me obediently.¡± Jon looked at Sunny and said coldly. Sunny heard him and nodded hurriedly. He had to believe that this person dared to take a real gun, so why wouldn¡¯t he dare to take a real bomb? As he spoke, Jon put on his military green windbreaker on Sunny. Finally, he helped Sunny put on a mask. Sunny¡¯s figure was almost the same as Jon¡¯s. The difference in height was about three centimeters, and his figure was almost invisible under the cover of the military green windbreaker. Almost no one would notice if he reced Jon. After doing all this, Jon took out a cell phone from the pocket of Sunny¡¯s windbreaker. Then, he put on Sunny¡¯s windbreaker and returned to the lobby. In the hall, Sunny came to the waiting area where only the negotiator was left. ¡°There are only ten minutes left before I start killing people.¡± Jon said coldly. ¡°I¡¯ll kill you first then.¡± ¡°However, killing one person in ten minutes seems a little boring, so I n to kill two people every ten minutes.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve locked them in the office ording to their time of death and let them wait for their deaths quietly.¡± ¡°Hehehe¡­¡± Jon bent down and whispered into the negotiator¡¯s ear with a cold smile. His tone was rather deranged, as if he was a perverted murderer. However¡­ As Jon spoke, the negotiator noticed that a cell phone slipped out of Jon¡¯s pocket and fell not far away from the negotiator. Jon did not seem to notice the cell phone slip. The cell phone was the negotiator¡¯s cell phone that Jon had confiscated. It seemed to have been kicked in his pocket and forgotten to put it in the box. The negotiator quickly covered the cell phone with his thigh. After Jon spoke, he turned around and left. However¡­ When he left, a smile appeared on Jon¡¯s face. The fish had bitten the hook! After talking to the negotiator, Jon continued to sit on the floor of the bank lobby. The negotiator¡¯s eyes were fixed on Jon¡¯s back. The movable hand quietly moved the cell phone under his leg. About three minutester, Jon stood up. ¡°Sit properly. Don¡¯t y any tricks. I¡¯m going to the toilet.¡± Jon turned around and looked at the negotiator and said coldly. The negotiator nodded repeatedly. Although he had tried his best to restrain himself, he still could not hide the guilty and nervous expression on his face. Even¡­ Ayer of cold sweat appeared on his forehead. However¡­ Jon did not seem to notice that there was something wrong with the negotiator. He just turned around and walked towards the office. The bank¡¯s toilet was in the office. Jon entered the office and quietly walked to the back door. He threw Sunny¡¯s ID card on the floor of the back door. Then, Jon came to the room where Sunny was in. ¡°Now, you go to the lobby.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say anything and don¡¯t y any tricks on me.¡± ¡°Sit down where I usually sit, and don¡¯t turn around. I¡¯ll be watching you!¡± ¡°If you don¡¯t listen, I¡¯ll just press the remote control, and you¡¯ll be blown to pieces in an instant, understand?¡± Jon looked at Sunny and said coldly. Chapter 21

Chapter 21: Information from the Negotiator

When Jon spoke, he looked at him with an unusually fierce expression, and Sunny trembled. Jon, the way you acted today was too terrifying. Even if Sunny did not want to cooperate with this drill, he could only do as he was told in order to avoid Jon¡¯s revenge in the future. Sunny nodded heavily as he looked at Jon. ¡°Very good!¡± ¡°As long as you listen to me, you¡¯ll be able to suffer less.¡± Jon sneered and patted Sunny¡¯s shoulder. After saying that, Jon directly took down the shotgun that he had been holding in his hand and ced it on Sunny¡¯s shoulder. ¡­ At the same time. In the bank lobby. After seeing Sunny leave, the negotiator hurriedly took out his phone which was under his thigh. Right now, his hand was handcuffed to the chair by Jon. His free right hand could still move easily. Taking out his cell phone, the negotiator did not hesitate and quickly dialed the sheriff¡¯s number. ¡­ In the temporarymand room. The sheriff, who had just made a thorough n, suddenly had his cell phone rung in his pocket. He took out his cell phone and had a look. When he saw the caller ID, the sheriff was stunned. ¡°Shh!¡± The sheriff made a silent gesture to everyone before he picked up the call. When the negotiator called, the sheriff¡¯s first reaction was a call from the robber, Jon. After all, the negotiator was now tied up by Jon. ¡°Hello?¡± After picking up the phone, the sheriff pressed the loudspeaker button and put the phone on the table. ¡°Sheriff, it¡¯s me!¡± ¡°Listen to me, the robber have taken all the hostages except me to the offices in the office area.¡± ¡°Only me and the robber is left in the lobby.¡± ¡°The robber usually sit on the floor in the middle of the lobby.¡± ¡°He said that he would start killing the hostages in ten minutes. Now might be the best time to attack!¡± After the call was connected, the negotiator exined the current situation in as concise Chinese as possible. Hearing the voice of the negotiator on the other end, everyone in the temporarymand room was slightly stunned. However, the phone was hung up again before they could respond. Everyone in the temporarymand room was silent. They had not thought of attacking forcefully after a failed raid. It was mainly because¡­ All the hostages and robber in the bank were dressed the same. They could not even determine the location of the robber. Even if they attacked forcefully, they would not be able to find the robber urately. There was also a high possibility of identally injuring the hostages. But now, the robber had actually locked the hostages up in the office. Only he and the negotiator were left in the bank lobby. Wasn¡¯t this giving the police officers a chance to attack? ¡°Captain, what shall we do now? Do we take the offensive?¡± The SWAT team leader stood behind the sheriff and asked. His five brothers had died in the surprise attack. At this moment, the SWAT team leader was feeling aggrieved. Now that there was such a chance to kill the robber, he really did not want to let it go. The sheriff fell into silence and did not speak. ¡°Captain, this may be a rare opportunity!¡± ¡°After all, if the robber escaped in a car, then the difficulty of our capture would undoubtedly be much greater.¡± The other police officer at the side saw the silence of the sheriff and also opened his mouth to remind him. After all, the opportunity would disappear in the blink of an eye and he had to seize it immediately! ¡°Do you think that the cunning, cautious, and highly intelligent criminal, Jon, will really create such a good opportunity for us to attack?¡± ¡°It¡¯s like a w was revealed in a perfect n and it was ced in front of us.¡± The sheriff patted his left arm with his right hand, looked at the photo of Jon on the wall in themand room and said slowly. The sheriff frowned deeply. This opportunity did not seem as simple as he thought. ¡°Maybe Jon was confused?¡± ¡°After all, as time passes, the robber will feel more and more stressed. There will always be a w.¡± The SWAT team leader was silent for two seconds before he spoke. No one made a n without a single w. Maybe this was Jon¡¯s carelessness. ¡°Organize the SWAT team and attack in two minutes!¡± ¡°The robber is sitting on the floor in the middle of the bank lobby. The robber is extremely brutal and have heavy weapons in his hands. If the robber show any signs of resistance, kill him immediately.¡± The sheriff took a deep breath and gave the order. This was indeed a great opportunity. If they didn¡¯t seize it, they might not have such a good opportunity in the future. There were only six minutes left in the half-hour time set by the robber. The policemen didn¡¯t have much time left! ¡°Yes!¡± The moment the sheriff¡¯s order was given, the policemen in themand room and the SWAT team leader responded. They hurriedly began to prepare for the assault. The director sat in themand room without saying a word and his face was expressionless. As a judge, he was indeed fair and impartial as he did not participate in any decisions made by the police. As soon as the negotiator hung up the phone, the sound of footsteps came from the other side of the office. The negotiator, Ah Ji, quickly put away his phone. The door of the office was opened. A figure wearing a military green windbreaker, a ck cap, a mask, and a shotgun appeared. He slowly walked toward the center of the bank lobby. With his head lowered, he walked a little unnaturally. There was a thinyer of cold sweat on his forehead under the cap. However¡­ The negotiator in the bank and a few dead policemen did not seem to notice anything unusual. They sat silently in the bank lobby. Looking at the robber sitting quietly in the middle of the bank lobby, the negotiator could not help but sigh in relief as if Jon did not notice that he had made a call. What he did not know was that the robber in his eyes was not Jon. It was the lobby manager, Sunny, whose hand was wrapped by Jon¡¯s tape and whose mouth was sealed. Sunny, on the other hand, was very obedient. ording to what Jon said, he didn¡¯t make any movements. He just quietly walked to the center of the lobby and sat down. Because they were about the same size and dressed exactly the same. No one would think that the robber had been reced. At this time, the real robber, Jon, was in the toilet. Inside the bathroom was a ck backpack with $3 million in it. Next to the backpack was a set of SWAT uniforms. Chapter 22

Chapter 22: Escape

Not only did Jon confiscate all the equipment of the five SWAT team members who failed the assault, but he also took off their coats. An hour ago, Jon had already put a set of clothes and equipment in the toilet. At this time, Jon took the time to change into the SWAT team members¡¯ clothes. Then, he hid his set of clothes in the dor bottom of the ck backpack. Then, he pasted all the prepared TNT on the wall of the bank vault. After doing all this, Jon quietly waited behind the toilet. ¡­ At the same time, the police outside the bank and the team assembled to attack. There were thirteen SWAT team members. This time, the SWAT team leader was leading the team. He was going to take advantage of this hard-won opportunity to directly attack the bank and rescue the hostages. The sheriff stood outside the temporarymand center and looked at the time. It was almost two minutes from the agreed time. Since the start of the drill, their reputation had already spread. Countless people rushed to the bank to watch. There were also a few more media. After all, the live broadcast of the previous media hadpletely exploded. Viewers from all over the country were watching. Jon¡¯s live broadcast room had also be the most popr live broadcast room on the Inte. There had never been a city where the television station¡¯s viewership ratings had all exceeded the highest level in history. This was a glorious moment for all the television stations. Therefore, in the face of such a big piece of news, it was perfectly normal for it to attract other media outlets toe over. With so many people watching, there was also the live broadcast of the media. It was equivalent to nearly a few million pairs of eyes across the country watching the police force¡¯s assault once again. The big shots were watching now, too. If it failed, the impact would naturally be very great. Therefore, the captain was extremely nervous at this moment. ¡°Action!¡± The sheriff gave the order with a solemn expression after taking a deep breath. For a moment, the heavy-duty vehicles that had long been prepared drove up. A few policemen hooked the iron chains connected to the heavy-duty vehicles onto the electronic iron door. They stepped on the elerator. The huge force of the vehicle directly tore the electronic iron door into pieces. Immediately after, a few policemen with door-breaking hammers stepped forward and directly smashed the ss door of the bank. The policemen standing at the front threw a few smoke bombs into the bank lobby. The SWAT team members who had already been prepared rushed in with guns in their hands. Everything had been going out up to now, and there were no problems at all. ¡­ In the bank. After the smoke bomb was thrown in, thick smoke rose up, and the visibility in the bank lobby was very low for a moment. Sitting in the middle of the lobby, ¡°The robber is struggling to stand up.¡± The SWAT team had already entered the bank. ¡°Don¡¯t move!¡± ¡°Raise your hands andy on the ground with your hands on your head.¡± A fierce shout was heard. The ¡°robber¡± was slightly stunned. He wanted to call for help, but because his mouth was taped with tape, he could not make any sound. Sunny had never seen such a big scene. He quickly followed the order and raised his hands. Before he could lie on the ground, he was pressed to the ground by the SWAT team. Two guns were pointed at his head. ¡°Report, the robber has been subdued!¡± Ten secondster, the voice of the SWAT team leader came from the walkie-talkie held by the sheriff standing outside. The sheriff was delighted, and a smile immediately appeared on his face. Did It work? Great, this exercise had finally ended sessfully. ¡°Hurry up and rescue the hostages. Check the condition of all the hostages to see if they need first aid!¡± The sheriff immediately spoke into the walkie-talkie. Since the robber had been subdued, the next important thing was to rescue the hostages. After all, these more than ten hostages had been in the hands of the robber for more than four hours. It was very likely that they would be injured, and the psychological pressure would definitely be great. ¡°Received!¡± The SWAT team leader replied into the walkie-talkie. ¡°Keep an eye on the robber. The rest of you, follow me to rescue the hostages!¡± ¡°Keep an eye on this kid. I¡¯ll have a good time with him when Ie outter!¡± The SWAT team leader gave the order. Then, he led the rest of the SWAT team members to the office. The policemen and negotiator who had been killed heaved a sigh of relief when they saw the current situation. Had this difficult drill finallye to an end for the policemen? At this moment¡­ ¡°Bang!!!!!¡± An earth-shattering explosion immediately sounded from the back door of the bank. ¡°Get down!!!¡± The SWAT team leader immediately shouted at everyone. They were still in the bank lobby, so the explosion only had a slight impact on them. The SWAT team leader woke up from the explosion. He seemed to have thought of something. He grabbed the receiver and shouted. ¡°Sheriff! The robber ran out from the back door! The front door was used to delusion!¡± Not long after the explosion, the sound of a car starting could be heard not far from the bank. The SWAT team leader finally realized that the robber had a helper!!!! When the sheriff heard the explosion, he realized that things had started to go from bad to worse. However, when the sheriff received the news from the SWAT team leader, he could not help but be shocked. He immediately shouted at everyone. ¡°Everyone! Go to the back door and arrest the robber!¡± When the explosion urred, all the media quickly turned their cameras to the scene of the explosion. This was a free movie-grade scene! This caused the viewership ratings to soar to a new high. And Jon¡¯s cell phone in the lobby also fell to the ground because of the vibration of the explosion. Everyone in the live broadcast room was stunned by the explosion. They had never seen such a big scene. And at this moment, the camera was facing the head of the SWAT team leader whose face was covered in dust from the explosion. Like a director, he switched the camera smoothly. The roar of the SWAT team leader was immediately transmitted through the live broadcast to the audience in the live broadcast room. At this moment, the bullet screen in the live broadcast room was also in an uproar. ¡°WTF! Is this an explosion? I guarantee that this is the most exciting robber that I have ever seen!¡± ¡°Even the most arrogant robber wouldn¡¯t dare to do this, right? Directly opening a big hole in the bank! This is crazy!¡± ¡°The one who was caught by the police is definitely not the robber! The robber must have escaped! This is too amazing!¡± ¡°I heard the sound of the car starting up! We can still watch the car racing scer!¡± Countless tips and bullet messages quickly appeared in the live broadcast room. Many people cried out in excitement. This scene was more like a movie than a movie. It simply made them feel the same way. And the scenes that made the SWAT team leader deted had made countless peopleughed at the police¡¯s ipetence. And the worship of the robber Jon! At this moment, everyone was looking for Jon¡¯s location. Chapter 23

Chapter 23: Escape!

The police quickly pulled out all the avable police force and rushed to the back door of the bank. ¡°Drive! A bunch of idiots!¡± The sheriff couldn¡¯t help cursing when he saw how flustered these people were. After reacting, they immediately turned around and started driving the police car. They immediately chased after the booted car not far away. At this moment, most of the police and media were all staring at the highway that connected to the exit of the bank. The sheriff quickly raised the roadblocks around the bank through the walkie-talkie. Now, the TV station also dispatched a helicopter, which would broadcast the entire race in the sky. Everyone also wanted to see how the robber would continue to deal with the police. In addition to the sheriff and director, the bank now had a small number of police officers to maintain order and deal with the scene. All the remaining police officers drove in the direction of the robber¡¯s car, the SWAT team leader¡¯s gaze was filled with killing intent. His gaze was like an enraged bull. ¡°Don¡¯t let me catch you, you b*tch!¡± He mmed the elerator to the end and vowed to personally catch this robber who had fooled them several times! ¡­ The toilet in the bank¡¯s office area was located at the corner of the office area and the back door. All the police forces were now attracted by the loud explosion and the speeding vehicles. The sheriff was in themand room, looking at the surveince cameras andmanding loudly! Except for some people, no one noticed at this time. While all of them were chasing the fleeing car and taking care of the hostages, a SWAT member in a SWAT uniform came out of the toilet. He was carrying a ck backpack and a SWAT assault rifle. Jon unhurriedly pushed the door open from the office and walked into the bank lobby. At the same time, Sunny, who had been pinned under the SWAT member, got up and the tape on his mouth was torn off. He panted heavily. As an ordinary person, he had never encountered such a situation. He was so nervous that he couldn¡¯t hold on any longer. So he sat in the bank lobby and wailed. The police officers next to him looked at him sympathetically. He was just an ordinary bank staff but he had encountered the most thrilling part of the exercise. At this moment, the smoke created by the smoke bombs was still very thick in the bank lobby. Jon was not flustered at all. After walking to the lobby, he supported Sunny, who was sitting on the ground with tears flowing down his face. Sunny looked at the SWAT beside him and immediately felt relieved because the SWAT¡¯s attire was almostpletely enveloped a person, only revealing a pair of eyes. Therefore, Sunny could not recognize the ¡®SWAT¡¯ beside him at all. He would never thought that the ¡®SWAT¡¯ next to him was the robber, Jon that caused his current situation. Under the thick smoke, most of the police officers could not tell who was who, let alone Sunny. Jon carried the ck backpack and walked through the bank lobby. His current attire and the way he helped Sunny made everyone think that he was a member of SWAT who rescued the hostages. Everyone only nced at him before they continued to do their jobs. They didn¡¯t care about what Jon was doing. When Jon helped Sunny out, all the media, reporters, and spectators outside were staring at Sunny. Despite being stared by so many eyes, Jon still didn¡¯t show any signs of stage fright. He carried a ck backpack and held an assault rifle as he calmly walked towards themand room. The crowd did not dare to step forward because of Jon¡¯s imposing manner. After all, Jon¡¯s outfit as a SWAT with a gun was very intimidating. The chaotic scene suddenly became a little more orderly. ¡°Report, the hostage has been rescued!¡± Jon walked to the door of themand room and reported to the sheriff. His loud voice waspletely different from the cold voice in the bank. The sheriff looked at the SWAT team member in front of him with satisfaction. This was the police officer he wanted. He could intimidate the crowd and carry out orders. He patted his shoulder. ¡°Very good!¡± ¡°Send the hostage to the police car. Prioritize the safety of the people¡¯s lives and property!¡± The captain sheriff encouraged him with a smile. He raised the volume of next sentence as it was meant for the media. The media, who had heard the news, heard the sheriff¡¯s words and took a few photos. At this time, any photos were hot enough. Hot meant money! Who would go against money? ¡°Yes!¡± After Jon responded, he brought Sunny back to the police car in the crowd. ¡°Wait!¡± The sheriff suddenly stopped Jon. Jon, who was preparing his next n, immediately stopped. ¡°What¡¯s in the backpack behind you?¡± The director pointed behind Jon. He didn¡¯t remember the SWAT team member carrying such a big backpack? Wouldn¡¯t that interfere with the operation? At this time, everyone¡¯s eyes were fixed on Jon. The surrounding reporters also focused their cameras on the SWAT. The atmosphere seemed to slowly be a little strange. However, Jon was not nervous at all. He turned around to face the police sheriff and pulled open his backpack. Arge number of bank employees¡¯ clothes appeared in the public¡¯s view. There were even bras and underwear. ¡°Report, sheriff! These are the hostages¡¯ clothes. Let me bring them to the police car for them to change!¡± When he saw the underwear, the sheriff covered his eyes. He waved his hand and signaled Jon to quickly put it away. Then he waved his hand and let him take the hostage away. Jon was very ¡®cooperative¡¯ as he pulled the backpack and helped Sunny into the police car again. At this time, the old director was watching from the side. When Jon and the sheriff confronted each other, he couldn¡¯t help but look at Jon because he felt that this SWAT was somewhat familiar. Jon also met each other¡¯s eyes at once. The two pairs of eyes met in the air. The director was slightly stunned. He recognized it! This SWAT was Jon in disguise! He stared at the sheriff at this time and saw that he was waving for Jon to leave. He couldn¡¯t help but smile. He didn¡¯t say anything. Because¡­ He was just the judge of this drill. He wouldn¡¯t provide any help to the participants. Whether it was Jon or the sheriff. He just smiled as he thought this kid was really bold. He wondered what the sheriff will look like when he found out. Thinking of this, the director¡¯s smile became even brighter. The media immediately felt that it was meaningless. They casually took two photos of Jon opening his backpack and considered it as a confession. Who would know. These two photos that were taken inadvertently would be the most valuable photos in this exercise. Chapter 24

Chapter 24: The Robber Ran Away?

Jon took Sunny to a police car. The door of the police car was opened at random. At this time, it was just him and Sunny. After taking out all the clothes in his bag, American dors were slowly exposed in his backpack. ¡°Hello, can you give me the clothes¡­ F*ck!¡± Sunny sat in the back seat and saw Jon taking out the clothes of the bank staff. He wanted to look for his clothes. But he found that the SWAT team member¡¯s backpack was filled with cash! ¡°You¡­ you¡­ You are!!!¡± Sunny stuttered with agitation. Sunny saw in the rearview mirror that the SWAT in the driver¡¯s seat had put a finger to his mouth. He quickly covered his mouth with both hands. He didn¡¯t make a sound. The corner of the SWAT¡¯s mouth was reflected in the mirror with a curve rose. ¡­ Half an hourter. The roadblock set up by the police finally stopped the speeding car. The SWAT team leader had a bad temper, so he directly got out of the car and took out an assault rifle. He shouted fiercely at the driver¡¯s seat. ¡°F*ck! Get out here, you b*tch!¡± But when he opened the door, the SWAT team leader was dumbfounded. A middle-aged bald man in his forties or fifties with tanned skin walked out with his hands raised. ¡°F*ck! Where¡¯s your partner?¡± The SWAT team leader raised his gun and asked in confusion. There was a hint of unease in his voice. ¡°Sir, I don¡¯t have any partners. It¡¯s just that my appendix has acted up and I¡¯m in a hurry to go to the hospital. Is that against thew?¡± The middle-aged man replied innocently. ¡°Impossible!¡± The SWAT team leader pushed him away and personally checked the entire car. However¡­ The SWAT team leader realized that there was no robber, Jon, in the car. There was only a driver with a calm expression standing beside him. ¡°F*ck!¡± He angrily kicked the tire. ¡°Sheriff! We¡¯ve been yed!¡± The SWAT team leader suddenly shouted into the walkie-talkie. ¡°What do you mean?¡± The sheriff¡¯s voice was solemn. Had they not caught the escaped Jon? This cunning robber! He had aplices!! ¡°Sheriff, in the car¡­ It¡¯s not Jon!¡± The SWAT team leader¡¯s voice was trembling. ¡°There¡¯s only one person in the car!!¡± ¡°!!!!¡± ¡°It¡¯s over!¡± When he heard the news from the SWAT team leader, his heart suddenly skipped a beat. What had worried him most had happened. Jon was a very cunning, fierce, and calm criminal with an IQ. But from the beginning of dressing the hostages, all the police¡¯s rhythm did not follow the sheriff¡¯s thinking. Why would Jon blow up the bank and choose to drive away? If he wanted transportation, he could have talked to the negotiator. But he took the negotiator hostage. The explosion was just a cover!! The sheriff fell into Jon¡¯s trap from the beginning. When he realized something was wrong, it was already half an hourter. Jon was definitely neither in the bank nor the getaway car now. Where could Jon be? The sheriff kept thinking in his mind and kept repeating what he had missed! Suddenly, he had a sh of inspiration. ¡°Hostage.¡± It was the hostage that time! The sheriff shouted in his heart. ¡°He got into the police car right under my nose.¡± ¡°I watched him drove away in that car?¡± The sheriff¡¯s face gradually turned pale! That SWAT! That SWAT was actually Jon! The SWAT who opened his backpack in front of me was actually Jon! I actually let him go! The sheriff covered his face. ¡°Sheriff, what happened?¡± The SWAT team leader asked anxiously as it was silence in the other end. ¡°This kid ran away!¡± The sheriff¡¯s regretful voice suddenly came from the walkie-talkie. ???? Looking at thepletely silent reaction on the other side, the sheriff sighed. Today, his face really couldn¡¯t hang on. He was filled with regret. He was only one step away from catching the robber! Half an hour had passed and Jon must have escaped somewhere. His every move was recorded by the cameras. If he told the SWAT team leader that Jon had escaped right under his nose and even patted him on the shoulder, he would be praised for setting an example as a SWAT. That was a shame. However, the sheriff still told him everything that had happened. While exining to the SWAT team leader, the sheriff epted another wave of questions. ¡°What? You said someone came out wearing SWAT uniform?¡± ¡°He even took the hostage to the police car?¡± ¡°The police car was driven away by someone?¡± ¡°Jon already drove away?¡± ¡°The bank¡¯s money was also taken away?¡± The SWAT team leader was dumbfounded when he heard that. ¡°You¡¯re saying that you personally let go of the robber, Jon who we¡¯ve been chasing for half a day?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The sheriff¡¯s hoarse voice confirmed this matter. ¡°F*ck¡­¡± ¡°This kid is really something. His acting skills are actually so good that he could even deceive you.¡± Although the SWAT team leader was angry at this time, he thought that the main scapegoat was the sheriff, themander-in-chief. He could not help but slow down his emotions andforted him. It had been half an hour since the explosion. Even if it was a pig, it had already disappeared without a trace. The sheriff told the SWAT team leader to prepare to retreat. This time, as themander-in-chief, he had undoubtedly failed. Not only did he fall into the robber¡¯s trap, the robber got away, too. Now, themand room was full of media. The sheriff¡¯s face was pale. Now they were all waiting for him to catch the robber and report the news. But now, the drill was not over and the robber had run away. The sheriff told the SWAT team leader toe back. It was still a little difficult for him to face the reporters alone¡­ ¡­ Jon changed his SWAT uniform when he was in the police car. He casually put on a bank clerk¡¯s uniform. His previous uniform was too obvious. He found a ce and threw it away. Then¡­ He stopped the police car. He tore off all Sunny¡¯s tape, took out a stack of money from his backpack and gave it to him. ¡°Compensation for mental damage.¡± Jon turned his head and smiled at Sunny, switching back to his usual state. Sonny was quick-witted. When he saw the money, his eyes immediately went wide. At that moment, his greed overcame his fear. Jon held him back with one hand when he was reaching out to take it. Sunny¡¯s eyes widened. It was as if he was saying, ¡°Isn¡¯t this for me?¡± Jon could read his eyes. ¡°You can take the money, but when the policee to ask you, just say that you don¡¯t know. If you confess me, I¡¯ll say that you¡¯re my aplice.¡± Jon said coldly to Sunny. When Sunny heard Jon say that, he almost cursed. Wasn¡¯t it the ¡°mental damage fee¡± you said? Why were there conditions attached?! But when he met Jon¡¯s cold gaze and looked at the assault rifle in his hand, Sunny swallowed his saliva. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ve always kept my mouth shut.¡± After he said that, his hands clenched tightly onto the USD that was thrown at him. Jon smiled. After receiving the ¡°stolen money¡±, he couldn¡¯t clean it up. Everyone was in the same boat. He patted Sunny on the shoulder. Jon quickly got out of the car and took a taxi nearby. Chapter 25

Chapter 25: Yes, Jon Ran Away!

The SWAT team leader led a group of people back to themand center of the bank. All the media were waiting for the police to catch the robber. The SWAT team leader¡¯s eye-catching anti-riot vehicle quickly attracted everyone¡¯s attention. Countless cameras and microphones were pointed at the SWAT team leader. They were ready to receive first-hand explosive information at any time. After all¡­ This drill wasn¡¯t just for New York City but had shocked the entire United States. This robber was already very strong. It wasn¡¯t easy for him tost this long with the police. Neither the police nor the hostages were the most popr thing on the inte right now. It was Jon, who yed like a real robber! Many people had be Jon¡¯s fans spontaneously. There were also many models and agencies waiting to contact him. Now, they not only wanted to get an interview with the sheriff and the SWAT team leader, they wanted an exclusive interview with Jon, too. Whoever could get this hot topic meant that money and status in hispany were at his fingertips. Everyone¡¯s eyes were shining green. No one would want to miss such fat. Just as everyone was waiting for the robber, Jon, to get out of the car, only the SWAT team leader got out of the car and walked directly to the sheriff¡¯smand room. Many of the waiting media were dumbfounded. Why did he just ignore them? They were still waiting for the news?! The SWAT team leader couldn¡¯t say anything either. He did not think Jon is not on the escape car and Jon was actually let go by the sheriff himself. This caused his blood pressure to soar. Even the reporter¡¯s interview was not epted at all, and he came directly to the sheriff to discuss countermeasures. ¡°Sheriff, what shall we do now?¡± The SWAT team leader naturally set his eyes on themander-in-chief of the police force. Jon had escaped and now he was the most anxious one. ¡°What can I do? I can only tell the truth.¡± The sheriff hung his head in frustration. The biggest problem now was the group of media waiting for big news outside. And now he had be the ¡°big news¡±. The sheriff smiled wryly as he had to face this fact. Even if the robber, Jon, had escaped the police¡¯s encirclement, it didn¡¯t mean that there was no remedy. Now he had to bear the consequences of his actions alone. He took a deep breath. Under the encouraging eyes of the surrounding police officers, he walked out from the door of temporarymand room. After the mass media outside saw that the police had made a move, they quickly pointed their microphones and cameras at the sheriff. Before he could speak, countless reporters had already raised their questions. ¡°Sheriff, has the police taken control of the robber, Jon?¡± ¡°Sheriff, ording to the footage from our helicopter, the car that the police stopped did not find the robber, Jon. Is this true?¡± ¡°Sheriff, if Jon has not been arrested and brought to justice, then where is he now?¡± Faced with the police¡¯s hesitant attitude, no matter how stupid the media was, they knew that there was a problem with this arrest! As a result, countless spections appeared on the inte. Some said that the police hadn¡¯t found Jon at all and were currently considering how to catch Jon who was escaping. Others said that the robber, Jon, was still in the bank. He had only dug a secret passage to hide inside, and had even escaped outside. Some also said that Jon had actually been arrested at that time. But he was arrested because he felt that the game was boring. There was even said that Jon had yed too seriously, which led to firing at the opponent and was shot dead by the police. A lot of theories appeared on the inte. The media also took the opportunity tounch a vote on the inte. ording to the statistics of half an hour, the probability of supporting Jon not being arrested was over 90%. This meant that all theizens were reluctant to part with this cat-and-mouse game. They hadn¡¯t seen such a wonderful bank exercise for a long time. Whether it was a few consecutive reversals in the bank or Jon¡¯s excellent mentality, they were amuzed. If this was made into a movie and Jon were the protagonist, it would have a huge box office. A real-life movie based on real people with Jon as the tough guy. This was one of the craziest movies ever made. Everyone was waiting for the sheriff to announce the results of the drill. All media that could be reached in New York City had their radios ready. They were waiting for the sheriff¡¯s answer. The sheriff saw everyone asking questions one by one and the sheriff couldn¡¯t answer. He could only wait until all the reporters calmed down and said the words that made the media on the scene crazy. ¡°Yes, Jon ran away!¡± It was only four words. At this moment, through the live broadcast, it was transmitted to New York, Chicago, Washington, and all the audience who was watching the live broadcast. When they heard that Jon was not arrested, they were even happier than Jon. The inte was even filled with cheers. ¡°Jon is still alive.¡± This news was immediately pushed to the top of Twitter. Countless people were rejoicing for the robber, Jon. The media, on the other hand, would certainly not be satisfied with these words. They needed more details. For example, the opportunity to rescue the hostages to lure the police to attack. Including how the robber, Jon, used the explosion to attract everyone¡¯s attention. He wore the SWAT uniform to sneak into the police force and deceive the sheriff. These details were revealed one by one. Even the reporter who was taking photos at the SWAT shouted when he saw the photos he had taken. ¡°This time he took a frontal photo of the robber, Jon!¡± It was the only one in New York. This photo was instantly offered at five figures in order for Jon to appear in their newspaper as soon as possible. As the press continued to bid, the price went up. It was just a photo taken on a whim and The Sun took it for six figures. It set a new record for The Sun¡¯s own news material but it was all worth it. The Sun, who bought the photos, imagined when everyone had a copy of The Sun. The investment was worthy. When more details were revealed, theizens were also shocked and excited. Who would think that the lobby manager, Sunny, would put on robber¡¯s clothes. He use explosions as bait to trick the police into attacking. When the police force was empty, he wore the SWAT uniform and swaggered out of the encirclement in front of all the police officers. All this was too imaginative. Not only they didn¡¯t me the police for their mistakes, they even wanted to continue watching the TV series. Chapter 26

Chapter 26: Made a Call to the Press Conference

It wasn¡¯t just New York City anymore, the bank robbery drill was trending on the inte all over the United States. The happiest part was the media in New York City. All of their television stations had seen the highest ratings in history. They were even getting new ratings. Who would have thought that The Sun and The Washington Post¡¯s highest viewership ratings would be one second ago. The next second, the new viewership ratings set a new record. Regarding this incident, the online short videos and inte celebrities also expressed their views at this hour. The talk show media followed the current events, too. The Fallon Talk Show and Ellen Show quickly ridiculed this hot current event that the entire country was concerned. ¡°This robbery incident is even more popr than the presidential election.¡± ¡°This time, the robber warned all the banks in the United States not to put money in the banks. It¡¯s not safe.¡± In the era of national entertainment, everything would be entertaining. Now there was such a serious robber, everyone was looking forward to it. And the sheriff also promised all the media a press conference would be heldter to address the police¡¯s response. Subsequently, the sheriff retreated to themand car and slumped heavily on the surveince chair. This was definitely not a man¡¯s job. He was running out of energy for the uing press conference. The director patted on his shoulder. After all, he handpicked the robber who had turned the police into this. The sheriff seemed to gain strength and struggled to get up. He had to discuss the next round-up n with the other officers, too. The bank exercise had included how the police would round-up the robbers when they escaped. It was just that the previous exercise had never met a robber who had escaped like Jon. And there was no need to initiate a round-up n. But now¡­ The emergency n required all the NYPD to move and themand car had started moving at that moment. They were preparing for the next press conference. The sheriff needed toe up with a n and announce it to the public while he was on his way to the press conference. Otherwise, his position would be a direct failure of duty. The sheriff didn¡¯t want his old age to end with him beingid off. He reached out to a few police officers around him and started to discuss. ¡­ Jon left the police car. He first found a secluded ce and changed into SWAT uniform. This uniform was too eye-catching. He was already famous on the inte. If he appeared on the street recklessly, he would definitely be photographed. If he posted it on the inte, he would definitely leak his whereabouts to the police. What he needed to do now was to make his routepletely unpredictable to the police. Escaping from the police¡¯s encirclement was only the first step as the police would definitely start searching for him. New York City was so big, so there were naturally countless hiding ces. Just entering a big city had to face the surveince cameras, which immediately reduced Jon¡¯s hiding area. If the police searched ording to the camera blind spots, Jon¡¯s hiding area would be much smaller. Especially tonight, the police would definitely go crazy searching for him. The ce to stay was even more particr. Jon put his changed clothes in his backpack. He slowly walked into the abandoned factory that he had checked out. This was one of the safe houses that he had nned in advance. He had found six such safe houses. In each of them, he had prepared food and water. This gave him confidence in his next escape. However, he took out his cell phone. Now, he had to give the director a d tidings. ¡­ New York Police¡¯s press conference. At this moment, all the media had moved their equipment here. Everyone was looking forward to the game and what would happen next. The sheriff looked at the discussion n in his hand and read it out loud in a hoarse voice. ¡°The pace of this exercise is expected to be 24 hours. The next ten hours or so will be the round-up phase.¡± ¡°The police have already formted a round-up n based on our experience.¡± ¡°We¡­¡± ¡°Ding, ding, ding¡­¡± A phone rang. It was especially eye-catching at an event like the press conference. ¡°Can¡­¡± ¡°Ding, ding, ding¡­¡± ¡°Ding, ding, ding¡­¡± The phone rang continuously in the venue. Just as the police sheriff was about to lose his temper¡­ The director, who was standing behind him, slowly took out his cell phone from his pocket. ¡°Director, what are you¡­¡± The sheriff asked. ¡°I only have one number in this phone.¡± The director answered the phone calmly and said to the sheriff. ¡°It¡¯s Jon¡¯s number.¡± At this moment, all the reporters suddenly fell silent. Everyone knew what was the hottest topic in US right now. It was a robber who was trying to escape. And now, at the press conference where the police announced how to arrest him¡­ He actually dared to call in! His courage was simply shocking. It had been a long time since such an arrogant criminal had appeared. Everyone¡¯s mood was instantly lifted but they also tacitly did not speak. At this time, they did not even dare to swallow their saliva. They were afraid of missing the details of the conversation. The sheriff¡¯s forehead was also sweating. He did not expect Jon to do this to him. He watched as the director slowly pressed the answer button. Jon¡¯s voice slowly came from the other end of the phone. ¡°Director, it¡¯s Jon.¡± ¡°This operation didn¡¯t disappoint you, did it?¡± After pausing for a moment, Jon said the first thing that the media could hear. The director smiled at the sheriff and said to the other end of the line. ¡°Jon, good job. Or rather, you did real good!¡± ¡°Kid, you gave me a big surprise!¡± Jon also smiled. The conversation between the two made the sheriff beside him extremely awkward because everyone knew that Jon was able to roam freely outside now. Thanks to the current sheriff. Every conversation between them was like an old scar being revealed over and over again on his body. The director encouraged Jon, too. ¡°If you persist for more than ten hours, this drill will count as your victory.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± On the other end of the line, Jon¡¯s unwavering answer came through. The two of them fell into aplete silence. Just as everyone thought that Jon was going to hang up the phone¡­ Jon¡¯s voice sounded on the other end of the line. ¡°Yea, director.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve said before that you¡¯ll regret choosing me. Do you regret it now?¡± The director¡¯s eyes narrowed after hearing this. ¡°Choosing you was the best choice I¡¯ve ever made.¡± After hearing this, Jon smiled, too. He hung up the phone. At this moment, the entire media in the city knew how professional and confident the robber were this time. He directly called the police round-up press conference. This operation, you f*cking dare to believe it? Chapter 27

Chapter 27: The Perfect Robbery

At this moment, Jon¡¯s operation was like a heat bomb. It blew up countless media and all the media found news about Jon. At this moment, the police press conference was no longer important in their eyes. Jon¡¯s conversationpletely confirmed the identity of the other party. Jon was an FBI agent! Many online spection about Jon¡¯s identity had finallye to a conclusion. Some guessed that he was a real robber or an experienced police officer. There were people thought that he was an FBI agent. Now the truth hade out. Indeed! This made everyone look forward to what would happen next. The strength of an FBI agent could be seen from this bank drill. A brilliant mind, a series of tricks, good skills and outstanding psychological quality. This made all the people look forward to the cat-and-mouse game. They wanted to see what Jon would do next to resist the pursuit. All the media began to discuss unconsciously. Seeing that the scene was about to get out of control, the sheriff also withstood the pressure to n the police¡¯s next move, including the details of the hunt for Jon. The media was gradually brought back by the details of the n. The sheriff slowly pulled back the rhythm of being led astray by Jon. At this time, the reporters at the scene returned to the press conference and began to ask questions. ¡°May I ask how the police n to catch the robber, Jon?¡± The sheriff replied. ¡°It¡¯s obviously impossible to escape from this city after more than ten hours, so the fugitive can only be in this city.¡± ¡°Right now, all the police officers are watching all the surveince cameras in the city. As long as there are suspicious people with the right appearance and body shape, they will immediately lock onto them.¡± Another reporter heard the sheriff¡¯s words and quickly added. ¡°If the robber doesn¡¯t appear in the surveince cameras, what should we do?¡± Only then did the sheriff smile. ¡°The entire city without surveince cameras will be searched. This is equivalent to narrowing the area that the police can encircle.¡± The reporter continued to ask other than these, were there any other measures? ¡°Because this robber is extremely cunning, the police can¡¯t think from a fixed point of view.¡± ¡°Therefore, we now have a portion of our police officers keeping an eye on the entrances and exits of New York City.¡± ¡°We will strictly check the passing vehicles and restrict the robber to the city area.¡± ¡°As long as he is still within the city area, he will definitely unable to escape the pursuit of our police!¡± The sheriff was very confident in his own analysis. This was due to his rich criminal investigation experience and the efforts of many of his colleagues. After the press conference, the sheriff immediately went back to the backstage to discuss the following matters with his colleagues. About the n of how to catch the robber, Jon, the sheriff looked at theyout map of New York City in front of him. He was the first to ask. ¡°How far are we now?¡± Everyone immediately saluted when they saw the sheriff. An older police officer immediately replied. ¡°We¡¯ve observed the route of the robber, Jon.¡± ¡°We discovered that he appeared near his rented house twice.¡± ¡°Once on New York Street. Other than that, we didn¡¯t find him in front of the surveince cameras.¡± ¡°Therefore, our initial judgment is that the robber is most likely still within the Brooklyn area.¡± ¡°If the robber is still within the Brooklyn area, then we¡¯ll narrow down the scope of the surveince cameras.¡± ¡°Then we can get the route of the robber and the approximate range of his movements.¡± The sheriff looked at the topographic map of New York and the officer¡¯s analysis. He touched his chin. ¡°The other party is an extremely cunning robber, who might take advantage of our stereotyped thinking.¡± ¡°If he happens to be around his rented house, won¡¯t we be blind?¡± The sheriff had always remembered that he had been deceived by Jon right under his nose. This time, nothing could be missed out. The sheriff¡¯s matter had be a thorn in his heart and he had to take it seriously. A police officer immediately spoke up. ¡°There will be a 24-hour police patrol near Jon¡¯s rental house.¡± ¡°And they will be equipped with police dogs. As long as he appears in the vicinity, he will be immediately discovered!¡± ¡°Very good!¡± The sheriff waved his hand vigorously. But even with such a detailed n, he still felt that he had missed something. He thought for a moment and suddenly a clue popped up. ¡°When the robber left, he was carrying a big ck bag. How much money did this kid take from the bank?¡± ¡°ording to the bank inventory, it is around 3 million to 3.2 million US dors.¡± A police officer immediately reported the data to the sheriff. ¡°3 million US dors is not light. If he was carrying this money, he cannot go very far.¡± ¡°The sheriff has his eyes on the topographic map of Brooklyn.¡± ¡°He definitely wouldn¡¯t dare to appear near the rental house at the moment as he was carrying the money with him.¡± ¡°Then he wouldn¡¯t run to a crowded ce. After all, with so much money with him, even he could not guarantee absolute safety.¡± ¡°Furthermore, it¡¯s unlikely that he would go to a few areas that are not well-kept. Gangs run rampant here, so even if you have a gun, it won¡¯t work.¡± Then, what happened next¡­ The sheriff stared at the remaining four areas. These were the four areas with better security and fewer people. ording to thest surveince image, Jon was walking toward two of the four areas. But since Jon was an FBI agent, he must have known that there were surveince cameras. It was not certain whether anti-reconnaissance measures would be made to deliberately confuse the police. Such a cunning robber was not only unpredictable, they couldn¡¯t use technology to define his actions. The sheriff thought carefully and looked at four of the districts. He was sure that Jon was in one of the four districts. But the remaining police force was limited, so was the time. It was getting dark and it would be surprisingly troublesome to deal with the people during the search. Private property was very important here. If one randomly broke into someone¡¯s home, it would be a good thing if they didn¡¯t get shot. This heavy difficulty made the sheriff frowned. There were only a dozen hours but it was like looking for a needle in a haystack to search for a cunning robber. Everyone was really very sleepy. But there was no room for hesitation now. At this moment, the sheriff ordered the two areas that he had marked out to his subordinates. ¡°Now conduct a heavy search of these two areas. Report immediately if you find any problems.¡± The remaining time forced him to make a quick judgment. As themander-in-chief, he must be the least confused person. ¡­ At the moment. He went to the rental house and took out his clothes and nkets. Heid them out in the cement pipes of the abandoned factory. He nned to make do here for the night. As for the rest¡­ He would have to wait until he woke up. He was sure that he was close topleting a perfect robbery. Chapter 28

Chapter 28: New York¡¯s Top Arrest Team Joined In!

At this moment, three new police officers appeared in the meeting room. These three people hadposed expressions and one could tell that they were experienced police officers. Other than the sheriff, all the other police officers made way when they saw them. It was enough to show the status of these three people in the police station. After the three of them sat down, the meeting continued. And the sheriff directly asked, ¡°Do you all have anything to say?¡± The sheriff spent a lot of effort to invite them. The three people who came formed the core team to catch the robber, Jon. Criminal investigation veteran, James had many years of hunting experience. He had solved many big cases and had rich experience in detection and anti-detection. There is also Ryan, the professional psychologist. He was the one who prepared the psychometric test for everyone enrolled in the Police Academy. Next was Ian, theputer genius who can monitor 20 monitors at once. These guys are the best in the NYPD. They wouldn¡¯t have taken part in a bank drill until this heist had caused such a stir. The whole city of New York was paying attention, including some big shots. He received a notice that the higher-ups were very dissatisfied and needed him to arrest the robber as soon as possible! The higher-ups gave the order and he had to call out these big shots in the police station. When the sheriff asked this question, Ian, theputer expert had just sat down and looked up with the sound of a keyboard typing. The screen in the conference room suddenly lit up. In a very short period of time, he had already controlled thework in the conference room. ¡°We know very little about this robber. I¡¯ll put the information I found on the screen.¡± ¡°And I found some interesting things.¡± ¡°Everyone, please take a look. This is the audio I intercepted from the phone call between the robber and the director. I think it will be very helpful for our subsequent hunt.¡± Ian casually sent the document to the big screen. He looked at the sheriff and asked for his consent. At the sheriff¡¯s signal, he pressed the y button. The audio yed aplete conversation between Jon and the director. This sarcastic conversation caused the sheriff¡¯s blood pressure to rise again. In about 30 seconds, everyone finished listening to the conversation. As a veteran of criminal investigation, James naturally heard the clues. Using his years of criminal investigation experience, he immediately analyzed the situation. ¡°First: the location of the robber, Jon, is obviously in a closed environment, but there are no noisy people around. Based on my initial estimation, it¡¯s not in the downtown area.¡± ¡°Second: outside of the call, we heard the sound of a truck¡¯s horn, which means that it¡¯s most likely near the factory in the suburbs.¡± ¡°Thirdly, the location is most likely pre-arranged by the robber, so there won¡¯t be many people around. It¡¯s predicted to be an abandoned ce.¡± ¡°Combined with the amount of cash that was robbed, we can temporarily cover the area of action of the robber with a few keywords.¡± James stared into everyone¡¯s eyes and said word by word. ¡°Brooklyn, suburbs, near the factory, abandoned.¡± This set of analysis instantly made the sheriff¡¯s thought much clearer. Many police officers also nodded crazily. As expected, a veteran criminal police officer who had solved many big cases, James had taught the young police officers a lot. The sheriff also nodded as he agreed with the above statement. Then, he looked down at the topographic map in front of him. Combined with the clues given by James, he roughly eliminated a few areas that did not match. Then, the next ce was the hideout of the robber! The sheriff severely drew a circle around a ce. At this time, the psychologist, Ryan reminded him, too. ¡°The robber¡¯s current state is the joy of escaping from the police with a huge amount of money. I¡¯m inclined to think that he won¡¯t choose a ce with many people, so the fewer people there are, the more he is at ease.¡± ¡°I suggest that the police focus on searching this part of the area first. The surrounding area shall be sealed off.¡± Ryan also reminded the sheriff to cross out the residential areas. Once again, the search area was narrowed down. ¡°I¡¯ve already focused all the cameras here on the screen. Once there¡¯s a problem, I¡¯ll find it immediately.¡± Ian nodded and replied. His thought immediately followed Ryan and added. This set of well-rounded cooperation made everyone marveled at their professionalism. Sure enough, professional matters still had to be handed over to professional people. The sheriff looked at the three people in the meeting and couldn¡¯t help butforted in his heart. These three people had only relied on one phone call. In a short period of time, they had actually analyzed the hiding ces one by one. Of course, this couldn¡¯t be done without rich experience. However, the most important thing was their flexible mind and strong technical support. With thisbination, the sheriff could not help but full of confidence. This time, he had to capture Jon! ¡°Are you all ready?¡± The sheriff said to the surrounding police officers. ¡°Yes, we¡¯ll attack at any time!¡± ¡°Everyone! Let¡¯s go!¡± The sheriff looked at the video surveince and gave an order to the walkie-talkie! He would take the lead in the search this time. He vowed to make up for the mistakes he had made! At this hour, it is about ten o¡¯clock in the United States. All the New York police officers drove to the area that the sheriff had told. James, Ryan, and Ian would sit in the police station and report thetest situation at any time. The sheriff, who was sitting in the police car, was not sleepy at all. He wanted to catch the guy who humiliated him in front of all the people of New York! A lot of the media were squatting in front of the police station, waiting for the police to make a move. As all the police were deployed, the media followed behind. Although they did not know what had happened, with such a big lineup, there would definitely be big news! When the New York police were deployed, Jon was still sleeping in a safe house in an abandoned factory. He also knew that he had fooled the NYPD today. They would be looking for him crazily tonight. He only had a few hours to rest. After hanging up the director¡¯s phone, he spent half an hour getting new clothes and nkets out of the rental house. He even fooled the police on the monitor before he got back here to rest. He looked at his watch. There was still more than ten hours to 24 hours. Afterying the carpet, he went straight to sleep. In the SEALs, they had been trained to fall asleep quickly in any environment within five minutes. The environment was much better than on the battlefield. Moreover, he had set up some small traps around him. They would make noise to alert him if anything happened. After doing all this, Jon quickly fell asleep. At this time, he didn¡¯t know. Several hunters had figured out his position. All the New York police were about to surround him! He didn¡¯t have much time to rest. Chapter 29

Chapter 29: The Hair-raising Hunt!

The suburbs of Brooklyn. Although there were no residential areas, there were still a group of natural owners. That was the tramp here. This bunch of homeless people made their homes everywhere. Today, a few homeless men drank the wine found in the trash and came here all the way in a daze. It was veryte, so they had to find a ce to hide from the cold. Every year, there would be homeless people who got drunk and died outside due to the cold. And none of them wanted to be like this on the next day¡¯s social news. Coincidentally, they found an abandoned factory nearby. Normally, they wouldn¡¯t consider such an abandoned factory but tonight¡¯s situation was special, so they had to stay here. The wind was chilly in the middle of the night. They were also shivering as they walked into the abandoned factory. Three of them were looking for a room in the factory that they could stay in for the night. Suddenly, a vagrant saw a ck backpack. ¡°Hey, John, there¡¯s a backpack here!¡± The vagrant quickly called out to hispanions and told them about this discovery. ¡°Oh? Let me take a look.¡± The tramp named John, who seemed to be the core of this group, went forward to pick up the ck backpack on the ground. However, he did not realize that his footsteps had triggered a small mechanism. ¡°John, did you hear the sound of a bell ringing?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid that you¡¯re hallucinating from drinking too much. Quickly open the backpack and see what¡¯s in it.¡± After hearing this, John ignored it and opened the zipper of the ck backpack. ¡°Some clothes.¡± ¡°Some food.¡± ¡°A gun?¡± John felt more and more out of the ce. It didn¡¯t seem like abandonment. ¡°Sh¡­ Holy sh*t! Dors!¡± ¡°Come and see! So much money!¡± John hastened to call in the other twopanions! ¡°Are you drunk again? Where¡¯s the dol¡­ F*ck! There¡¯s so much money! !¡± ¡°Are you two high on drugs? Where did an abandoned factory get¡­ F*ck! So much money!¡± The three of them were immediately shocked by the things in the backpack. They swore that they had never seen so much money except in movies! ¡°Are we¡­ rich?¡± A homeless man said excitedly to John who was holding the bag. At this time, John looked at the money in the bag and ignored the two of them. His nk eyes were full of greed. ¡°Us? hahahaha!¡± The man named John took out a gun from the bag and pointed it at the other two people as he said crazily. ¡°This money is mine! You two idiots!¡± ¡°With this money, who will still be your brothers? I¡¯m going to enjoy my life!¡± The other two homeless men were stunned and then showed angry expressions. But then their eyes gradually became calm, and even a little scared. Finally, it turned into fear. John thought the two men were scared and heughed even crazily because of the alcohol. He was wondering if he should kill the two men on the opposite side. In any case, if the vagrants died, so be it. These two vagrants were not the only ones who died every year. As John was thinking this, the two persons in front of him seemed to have seen something scarier than a gun, so they ran away. John was looking at the two of them in puzzlement. ¡°What are you holding in your hand?¡± A low and cold voice suddenly came from behind John. He was so scared by the voice that he shivered. The voice was like the whisper of a demon, making his goosebumps rised. He turned his head to see what it was. A cold gaze filled his eyes and were staring fiercely into his eyes. The thick killing intent made John¡¯s legs tremble uncontrobly. He couldn¡¯t even lift the gun in his hand. He waspletely overwhelmed by this man¡¯s imposing manner. He even felt that bullets couldn¡¯t kill this man. This was Jon, who was ying the robber. Awakened by the trap, John woke up at once. Jon turned over and hid. He thought that he was a policeman, but he didn¡¯t expect that it would be three vagrants who had lost their way. The three of them picked up the backpack that he had casually thrown on the ground, and it looked like a good show. Looking at his watch, he had rested for two hours. That was enough. He decided to shift his position. He was on guard and would not stay in a safe house forever. Looking at the trembling homeless man in front of him, a knife directly knocked him unconscious on the ground. Such a small character did not need to waste time with him. And before he fainted, Jon actually pulled the trigger subconsciously. A gunshot rang out in the quiet night. ¡­ Countless police and media arrived at the outskirts of Brooklyn. There were manyrge factories and abandoned old factories here. It would definitely be the most suitable ce for escape. At this moment, the sheriff pressed on the walkie-talkie and asked the police station, ¡°Everyone has arrived at the scene. Where should we start the search?¡± Following the sheriff¡¯s question, the three people in the police station immediately gave their own judgment. Detective James looked at the scene captured by the cameras. ¡°These abandoned residences might be the hiding ces of the robber. The most important thing for us now is not to search.¡± ¡°But to form an encirclement first.¡± ¡°As long as we form an encirclement and keep narrowing the area, the robber will be found by us sooner orter.¡± James used his rich experience to give the sheriff a rough n. Psychologist Ryan also analyzed. ¡°The robbers who are cornered may even use the trick of impersonating a special forces officer. Remember not to wear a headgear.¡± They had understood Jon¡¯s previous trick, so they, too, were on guard in advance. ¡°I have already monitored all the cameras in the surroundings. I know if there are flies flying over.¡± Ian said confidently to the sheriff. The three men¡¯s suggestions allowed the sheriff to quickly organize a n for a round-up. He picked up the walkie-talkie and switched to the public channel. ¡°Team One is in charge of the south side!¡± ¡°Team Two is in charge of the east side!¡± ¡°Team Three is in charge of the north side!¡± ¡°Team Four is in charge of the west side!¡± ¡°All teams must make sure that the people in the team are our own people at all times!¡± ¡°Target! All abandoned and uninhabited buildings! Search them one by one with police dogs! If we don¡¯t find him tonight, we¡¯ll all be in trouble tomorrow!¡± ¡°Do you hear me?!¡± The sheriff roared into the walkie-talkie. ¡°Yes! Sir!¡± In fact, they didn¡¯t need the sheriff to say it. They knew that the New York Police Force had be theughingstock of the police forces in other cities today. ¡°If this mass arrest fails again, you can imagine how the media will report on them.¡± The sheriff nodded in satisfaction as he looked at the four teams that he had arranged and attacked quickly. They no longer had their usualzy appearance. It had to be said that although Jon¡¯s actions had ruthlessly pped the New York Police Force in the face, it had made these usually motionlesszy people be serious, too. ¡°This time, I want to thank you in person, Jon.¡± The sheriff couldn¡¯t help butugh wildly in his heart. Chapter 30

Chapter 30: Jon Was Done for this Time!

Jon frowned when he saw the homeless man unlocking his gun. ¡°F*ck, my luck is really bad.¡± The gunshot was exceptionally clear in this empty abandoned factory. This made Jon realized that something was wrong. The gunshot made him suddenly heard some dog barks in the distance. ¡°Barking dogs?¡± Jon pondered for a moment and suddenly packed his things into his backpack. He realized that something was not right! How could someone keep a dog in a ce where there was no people at all! The only thing that would appear at this time was a police dog! The New York Police Force had found this ce! Jon was a little surprised. He had thought that the police would find this ce. After all, even though he had done a reverse reconnaissance, there were only a few areas that matched his escape location. Sooner orter, they would find this ce. Therefore, he would also move every two hours and fight with the other party until dawn. But he did not expect that the police were not all good-for-nothings. Raising his eyebrows, Jon was even a little excited. That was more like it. It was too boring to be escaped just like this. Jon licked his lips. Without escaping, this game was be less interesting. The robbers didn¡¯t just rob, more importantly, there was a follow-up escape route. If he escaped sessfully this time, he would definitely receive a perfect acting reward! Thinking of this, he cleaned up all traces of this ce and took everything away. This safe house would be found by the police sooner orter. Thus, all the safe houses that were found would be abandoned by him. He turned his head and took a look. Only the homeless man who had been knocked unconscious by him was left. Grabbing the ck backpack, Jon judged that the police were only a few kilometers away from him based on the sound of the police dogs just now. They could be even rushing toward him. He had to hurry. As a former Navy SEALs, Jon was not good at camouge and acting but he was good at escaping! He had learned a lot about escaping from the pursuit when he was in the team. So he had used it in this exercise. Why was this called a safe house. It was because there were very few people here, far from residential areas. It was also because there was at least one route for him to escape. Of course there was one here. After confirming the location, Jon took out a huge stic bag and packed his ck backpack inside. He also switched the clothes of the homeless man with his own. He did this to cover up the smell on his clothes. Of course, he had more extreme methods. But if there were ready-made ones, he naturally didn¡¯t want to use them. He looked at the time after he was done with that. It was already early in the morning. Given the time, it should be about time to go. It turned out Jon¡¯s abandoned factory is next to a garbage disposal nt. New York City is full of abandoned factories. The reason Jon chose this ce as a safe house was, firstly, the waste incineration needed to be processed here and the pollution was high. Thus, the situation where no one woulde met the conditions of concealment. The second reason was that this ce had a means of transportation that could reach all parts of the city, and it fulfilled the condition of being able to escape. As for the safe houses that met these two conditions, Jon still had a few. Not far away, a white garbage disposal truck was slowly starting to start. The sound of the truck that forensic expert James had heard in the police station was the sound of the garbage truck. Every morning, this was the time when the garbage truck set off to clean up the garbage in the city. This was the escape route that Jon had left for himself. He followed the two garbage trucks back to the city. There wasn¡¯t much time left for him now. When he was almost ready, Jon prepared to hitch a ride. But before he left, he left a little ¡°surprise¡± for the police officers who were looking for him. ¡­ Team Three, who was in charge of the north, rushed to the destination as soon as he heard the sheriff¡¯s order. He was about to start a thorough search here. Each team had ten sub-teams. One sub-team had 12 people. It was fully equipped with a police dog. A team of 120 people in total. And this was just the search team in the north. Thebined police force was a few hundred men. The sheriff was going all out this time. After all¡­ The rest of New York City needed to be maintained. It had never been heard before that so many officers to be deployed on short notice to hunt down a fugitive from a bank drill. This was the authority that the sheriff finally applied for with his boss. One had to know that normally, he did not have the authority to mobilize so many police forces to set up a case. This time he couldn¡¯t let the robber run away again. Thus, he had to be absolutely sure. Hundreds of police forces and the smartest brains in the police station. This time, no matter what Jon said, he would not be able to escape their pursuit! As each team reported their situation, the sheriff suddenly heard a signal from the northern team. ¡°Report, sheriff! We heard gunshots in the north! Suspected robber!¡± Hearing that new progress had been made so soon, the sheriff smiled. He picked up the walkie-talkie and quickly gave the order. ¡°The teams in the north continue to carpet search. Do not take the initiative to attack. Right now, we are the active party. Do not fall into the rhythm of the other side.¡± ¡°The other teams do not need to be distracted. This robber is very cunning. Right now, time is with us. Continue to carry out the mission ording to the original n.¡± When the team members heard this, they all agreed. The three people in the police station also nodded their heads repeatedly. As a veteran of the police station, the sheriff naturally showed his old side after he adjusted his mentality. No one could find fault with this wave ofmanding. All the live broadcast media nodded repeatedly, too. This time the sheriff did not sit in themanding car but wasmanding on the spot. Not only did he want to show off his ability, but he also wanted to wash away his shame. There was actually someone on the inte said that he was a good-for-nothing who only knew how to receive money from taxpayers? What he wanted was to prove to them that he was not! Meanwhile, the audience in the live broadcast room also started to send bulletments. ¡°Now he looks a little like the sheriff. What were the orders from the bank previously?¡± ¡°I have to say that this arrest operation is much more serious than the previous one.¡± ¡°This time, the robber is really unlucky. The police are getting serious now.¡± ¡°Previously, the police did not take it seriously and took advantage of the loophole. Now, he can¡¯t y tricks.¡± Manyizens also felt that the police were certain this time. Many people on the inte didn¡¯t expect that Jon would continue to write his own legend of a robber. After all, they all believed that if the police became serious and mobilized so many people, Jon would be caught sooner orter. The police had an absolute advantage in numbers and equipment. And Jon¡¯s only advantage was that he had time and could hide in advance. Now he was being analyzed by a few police brains. He waspletely locked in a circle, not a fly could fly out. Everyone thought Jon was doomed this time! Chapter 31

Chapter 31: Garbage Truck Escape?

Phew¡­ The cold wind howled. Jon tightened his clothes and stood outside. Now, he needed to face the police again. And this time, the battlefield was not in the city. It was in the suburbs. It was a different battlefield, but Jon did not want to waste time with the police. He knew that his only advantage now was that he knew the other party¡¯s location. And the other party had not figured out his location yet. He hoped that the two vagrants he had just let go would be able to confuse the police for a while. Jon took out the small binocrs in his pocket. The garbage truck not far away was slowly starting up. The garbage trucks that came out of the garbage incineration station were usually empty. The reason Jon wrapped the big ck bag in a stic bag was to throw it into the garbage truck to fool the police. The ¡°little surprise¡± he had prepared in the factory could hold off the police for a while. Now he had about an hour to prepare. After a short jog, Jon climbed over the wall and sneaked into the garbage incinerator. There was no barbed wire or razor des here. This was a garbage dump. Who would steal here? And ording to the previous scouting, Jon had figured out the pattern. A garbage truck usually had a driver and a cleaner. They worked together. And Jon¡¯s goal today¡­ ¡­ After a few seconds the shot was fired, the north police team report back immediately. Receiving instructions from the sheriff, they said yes. Everyone was still searching the area as nned. They had already been fooled several times. They couldn¡¯t continue to be fooled. Just as the person-in-charge of the police squad was thinking so, suddenly, the police dog started barking crazily at a dark ce. ¡°Woof!¡± ¡°Woof woof!¡± There was a situation! ¡°Raise your hands and don¡¯t move!¡± The person-in-charge of the squad immediately shone the searchlight on the police car! And pointed the gun in his hand. Under the searchlight, two slovenly-dressed hobos raised their hands and stood up. The squad leader immediately went forward in excitement! Because the sheriff had told them that this robber was extremely cunning. It was very likely that he would disguise himself as anyone, so he needed to confirm with the people around him at any time. These two slovenly-dressed hobos fit very well into the conditions that the sheriff said. When the vagrants saw so many police officers, they almost peed. Weren¡¯t they just drunk? Did they need so many police officers to arrest them? Under the light, the two of them trembled. With more than a hundred police officers pointing their guns at them, they could brag to all the vagrants in New York. ¡°Put your hands in the air! Turn around! Routine search!¡± The two vagrants naturally cooperated with the search obediently. After the police officers inspected them, they reported to the team leader. ¡°These two people are not wearing makeup. Confirm that they are not the robber, Jon!¡± They were not? The police team leader shouted at them loudly. ¡°F*ck!¡± Anyone who searched for the robber in this cold wind would not have a good temper. ¡°Why don¡¯t you f*cking stay in the bridge hole! What are you doing here?!¡± The police officer scolded the two of them fiercely. ¡°S¡­ Sir¡­ We got drunk and lost our way.¡± ¡°We wanted to spend the night in the abandoned factory in front of us, but we found a demon here.¡± The two homeless men felt that they were extremely unlucky today. Not only did they lose a friend today, but they also met a man who looked like a demon. In the end, they were even pointed at by the police. ¡°Demon?¡± The police officer immediately caught a very strange message. ¡°Tell me more about the demon.¡± A look of horror suddenly appeared in the expression of the tramp. He suddenly started to speak incoherently. ¡°His eyes¡­ are like the eyes of a demon.¡± ¡°His body¡­ is like a strong warrior.¡± ¡°He must have taken John away! He must have killed John!!¡± Fear instantly appeared in their eyes. It was as if they had seen something that would terrify them for the rest of their lives. When the person-in-charge of the police force saw this, he knew that it was another two addicts who were addicted to drugs. Then, he looked at the two of them with disdain. He let them go. With their current expressions, it was obvious that they could not get anything out of them. He took out the walkie-talkie on his chest and dialed the sheriff¡¯smunication channel. ¡°Report! Sheriff! We found two vagrants here.¡± ¡°ording to their statements, they saw a demon in an abandoned factory three kilometers ahead, suspected to be the robber, Jon.¡± ¡°Request permission to arrest!¡± The person-in-charge of the northern team immediately consolidated the information he found and reported it to the sheriff. The sheriff heard that there was a new development in the matter. He could not help but think for a while. They could not give up the advantage of the police¡¯s encirclement for the time being. The encirclement that they had painstakingly reduced was the key to their police¡¯s victory. However, there was a high probability that they had already found Jon. The sheriff asked James and the other two at this time. ¡°James, what do you guys think?¡± James said, ¡°Sheriff, the time is with us now. Just to be safe, don¡¯t force the formation to be disrupted.¡± ¡°Ryan, Ian, what do you think?¡± Ryan said, ¡°If that gunshot could still be a trap, then this homeless man is definitely not. The chances are that what they said is true.¡± ¡°I suggest that the police team in the north absolutely do not speed up the search. The more anxious Jon is, the more ws will be exposed.¡± Ian said, ¡°I do not see Jon on the camera. If Jon does not make a move, it will take at most an hour to find him. I do not think that you are short of an hour, sheriff.¡± After listening to their words, the sheriff could not help but admire them. They were really calm. He even wished that he could go to the north to arrest Jon himself. But they were really too steady. The sheriff had no choice but to give up on this idea. Since the three of them had said so, he would wait for another hour! There were still a few hours before daybreak! He could totally afford to wait. The sheriff took out his walkie-talkie and said to the person-in-charge of the northern team. ¡°Keep in formation, don¡¯t be rash. Time is on our side, don¡¯t give the robber any chance!¡± The sheriff briefly expressed his thoughts. It had been two consecutive times. The sheriff was unmoved. The live broadcast media felt that the sheriff this time was really quite reliable. The bulletments at the scene were also optimistic. ¡°Two consecutive attempts failed. Does Jon really have no other tricks up his sleeve this time?¡± ¡°If there is only one way to win in the world, it is to be like the sheriff who ispletely unmoved by temptation.¡± ¡°To be honest, Jon is already very good up to now. If it were anyone else, they would have already surrendered and admitted defeat.¡± ¡°I agree, too. Although I know that Jon will be arrested in the end, I will still cheer for him.¡± At this moment, all the bullet messages were cheering for Jon. Because they thought that in this cat and mouse game, it was only a matter of time before Jon was arrested. Chapter 32

Chapter 32: Escape from the Encirclement

¡°Anderson, have a good night sleep after you¡¯re done.¡± Old Martin passed a cup of coffee to the other party. ¡°Old Martin, it¡¯s going to be difficult tonight. The entire city has been upied by the New York police.¡± ¡°Did something happen?¡± Old Martin asked while drinking hot coffee in his janitor¡¯s uniform. ¡°Don¡¯t you watch the news? A robber robbed a bank and even ran out. Now the entire New York police force is looking for him like crazy.¡± Anderson held his coffee and teased old Martin. ¡°Then this robber is really crazy. He can make so many police officers in New York y with him.¡± Old Martin threw away the coffee cup in his hand and prepared to get into the truck. He was actually not very interested in these news. He just wanted to finish his work early and go back to bed and rest. Anderson was obviously younger, but he still talked about these new things endlessly. Old Martin didn¡¯t stop him. After all, having a ¡°radio station¡± in his ear at night could also prevent him from dozing off while driving. The two of them got in the truck and fastened their seatbelts. There was still a ¡°battle¡± waiting for them tonight. The truck slowly started and slowly drove out of the burning factory. At this time, there were basically no cars on the road. The speed also slowly increased. It was different from the crowded city center. It was veryfortable to drive at this hour. The music on the radio and Anderson¡¯s news broadcast made him did not hear the slight sounding from behind. So old Martin followed the nned route and drove all the way to the edge of the suburbs. There were a few police cars guarding here. The roadblocks blocking the road had already been raised. The floodlights in front shone, as if it was daytime. ¡°Old Martin, look at the police ahead. Isn¡¯t that right? Right now, these police are looking for that robber like they¡¯ve gone crazy!¡± When old Martin heard Anderson¡¯s excited words, he pinched the space between his eyebrows. The more police there were, the stricter the inspection would be. Theter we would go back, silly child. However, he had no choice but to slow down first. He drove over and greeted the police officer who was blocking the road. ¡°Can you let me pass? The trash in New York is piling up, Officer.¡± Old Martin rolled down the truck window first and showed his work permit to the police officer. The smell of such arge garbage truck was always unpleasant. The police officer who was blocking the intersection also ran to the side in disgust. He took out his walkie-talkie and reported to the sheriff. ¡°Sir, there¡¯s a garbage trucking from the southern suburbs. It needs to enter the city. Do you approve?¡± In fact, there had always been vehiclesing and going between the suburbs and the city¡¯s entrance. It was just that it was easier to get out than to enter the city. Although the general location of the robber had been confirmed, the sheriff still would not let go of these vehicles easily. ¡°Check carefully, especially the people. The robber is very cunning and will pretend to be anyone. You must pay attention to this!¡± The sheriff said to the walkie-talkie. He was confident that he would not miss a single detail this time, not even a fly! Just as the sheriff thought that they must check carefully, the public channel of the walkie-talkie suddenly sounded! ¡°Sheriff! We found a figure in an abandoned factory three kilometers away!¡± ¡°And when we approached the factory gate, the other party fired a warning shot!¡± ¡°Shall we take the strong attack now? Please advise!¡± Found it!! When the sheriff heard the news, he immediately forgot about the garbage truck and the inspection. He opened the public channel! He shouted at everyone! ¡°The northern team has found the whereabouts of the robber, Jon! The northen team is waiting for the other teams to form a circle!¡± ¡°The rest of you rush to the center of the encirclement! Form the secondyer of encirclement! I don¡¯t believe he can escape from twoyers of encirclement!¡± The sheriff excitedly gave the order. James and the other two also clenched their fists. Since they had already discovered the other party, the other party would either hold their ground or think of a way to escape. They had not formed an encirclement at the bank previously, thus, Jon took advantage of the back door. There was no way he¡¯d be fooled this time! He surrounded the ce with twoyers of encirclement. The robber would never escape! As the sheriff gave the order, everyone was rushing to the abandoned factory. The officers in front of the garbage truck got the message. After verifying their identities and checking the two people in the car, they quickly let them through. They didn¡¯t have time to waste with a garbage truck. They had to rush to the marked location. The end of the operation wasing. Anyone who wasn¡¯t there would be called out and criticized. This wasn¡¯t the time to check out a garbage truck. They had more important things to do. A police car whizzed by. Old Martin watched the policemen left. He slowly started the garbage truck. ¡°Looks like we found the robber. Thank God, I hope New York City can be more peaceful.¡± Old Martin hoped that the robber would be caught soon. After all, they had already wasted at least half an hour. He didn¡¯t want to waste another half an hour when they came back. However, Anderson was still indifferent as he ridiculed them crazily. ¡°This robber caused such a bigmotion. The sheriff is personallymanding it. It seems like there are more than a hundred people.¡± ¡°I really want to see the robber with my own eyes. I heard that after the bank robbery, someone was so scared that they went to see a psychologist.¡± Old Martin slowly took a puff of his cigarette. ¡°Anderson, people like this usually have really killed people. It¡¯s best for ordinary people like us not to meet them in our lifetime.¡± Old Martin looked out of the window with a dazed look, as if he was thinking of something from the past. The smoke quickly faded in the night wind. At this time, they had already arrived at the first garbage station in the city. Just as they got off the truck and prepared their tools, out of the corner of his eye, Anderson suddenly saw a tall ck shadow standing not far from them. This person was wearing a hoodie, so no one could see his face clearly. He looked at the man in front of him. Old Martin quickly blocked him with tools at his front and pulled him back to the truck door. ¡°He¡¯s right. Don¡¯t be curious about a robber like me.¡± The ck figure in the hoodie said to Anderson with a pair of cold eyes. Anderson was scared out of his wits. He hid his entire body behind old Martin¡¯s sturdy body. This person¡¯s aura was like a serial killer. There was no humanity in his eyes. Anderson was so scared that he was trembling. Old Martin looked at this familiar figure and asked tentatively. ¡°Are you¡­ the bank robber from the TV?¡± The ck figure smiled. This made Anderson even more afraid. He ran away in panic. He was afraid that he would be killed by the ck figure in the next second! Chapter 33

Chapter 33: the Gangsters in the Alley

Looking at Anderson who was running away, old Martin was calm. Jon¡¯s aura was scary, but if he wanted to make a move, Anderson wouldn¡¯t be able to escape. ¡°I hope you won¡¯t expose my whereabouts. After all, if I¡¯m really the robber, I can kill all of you.¡± Jon threatened the strong ck man in front of him. ¡°Of course, we all hope that the police will suffer a little.¡± Old Martin also smiled. He didn¡¯t like the police very much. Jon also nodded. ¡°Remember to keep your partner under control well.¡± ¡°After all, I don¡¯t like to cause trouble for others afterwards.¡± Jon¡¯s tone was half joking and half threatening. As a former SEALs, he had many ways to cause trouble for the other party. Old Martin nodded naturally. He¡¯d heard Anderson talk a lot about Jon in the car. Facing off against the entire NYPD alone, not only did he escape, but he also robbed a bank with millions of dors. Whether it was Anderson or himself, if Jon was the real robber, he probably wouldn¡¯t have been able to escape. He would have been killed immediately¡­ At the thought of this, old Martin broke out in a cold sweat. He decided toe back and take care of Anderson¡¯s big mouth. It wasn¡¯t a matter for Anderson to be unlucky by himself but it would be worse if he got old Martin into trouble, too. How did he meet such a partner! Old Martin thought to himself. He had no idea that Jon had left. The darkness gave Jon the best protection. He naturally knew that the city was full of surveince cameras. But he had already memorized them. Every route was a blind spot for the cameras. In a dark corner. ¡°Hey, beauty, do you mind ying with us?¡± A gangster-like hooligan was teasing a scantily d beauty. Mary was a waitress at the strip club next door. She wanted to earn an extra $50 tonight, so she stayed there and worked an extra hour. She knew that the security here was not good. But in order to earn enough rent for next month, she had to go all out. She did not expect to meet a gangster from a nearby gang just after a few steps from the club. Shouldn¡¯t they be eating at this time. ¡°Hey, if it wasn¡¯t for the seige by those idiots from New York, I wouldn¡¯t have taken so long to get out.¡± ¡°However, I might not have met such a beautiful woman.¡± The gangster swallowed his saliva as if he was admiring a beautiful dish. Mary¡¯s heart was filled with despair. She had deliberately avoided the gangster activities. She did not expect to encounter such an unexpected incident. What a bad luck! Mary tightened her bag and clothes. That exposed figure made the two gangsters even more bestial. Tragedy was about to happen. ¡°It seems that it was me causing the problem.¡± A cold voice came from the alley. A ck figure wearing a hoodie suddenly appeared at the alley entrance. The voice surprised the two gangsters. The voice was extremely cold and terrifying. Under the moonlight, it was like a judgeing to punish their sins. The gangster immediately took out the knife hidden in his trouser pocket. ¡°I advise you to mind your own business, you b*stard.¡± He looked at the man warily, waving the knife in both hands. He wanted to scare the man away. He didn¡¯t know why but he had a bad feeling. He didn¡¯t want to waste time talking to this man. The man at the end of the alley smiled. He revealed a mouthful of white teeth, as if he didn¡¯t care about the other party at all. ¡°Hurry up and scram. This is your final advice.¡± This ck shadow wasn¡¯t polite to the hooligans at all. The moment he opened his mouth, he wanted to make the other party scram. How could a gangster be treated this way. He looked at Mary beside him and then looked at his knife. Suddenly, he became bolder. ¡°Hey, I¡¯m going to make a few holes on your body. Only then will you know how powerful I am!¡± As he said that, he took the dagger and rushed towards the ck shadow. The gangster beside him also had bloodthirsty eyes. He had not killed anyone in a long time. Thest time was a man who liked to pretend to be a gentleman. He was directly stabbed by his dagger until he was dripping with blood. Seeing that man begging for mercy under his feet, he was extremely carefree. This was the consequence of stopping your grandfather! He watched as he rushed forward with the dagger. He had already imagined the feeling of the knife stabbing the man. It was like stabbing into a sandbag but it wasn¡¯t that hard. It was like stabbing into a milk bag, but it was a bit hindered. In short, it was a wonderful feeling. Just as the hooligan approached the man with the dagger while his right hand was about to stab him, he was suddenly stunned. He thought he felt¡­ An extremely cold thing suddenly pressed against his forehead. He was very familiar with this feeling. ¡°Gun!¡± And it was a powerful shotgun! The power of this gun could blow his head off! He was definitely not joking. He did not have the habit of joking about his own head. His hand holding the dagger was trembling. This alley was a camera blind spot. It was a ce where the gang dealt with matters. Even if this man killed him here, there would not have any evidence. This was still a dead end. The ck shadow was blocking the only exit, making him could not escape. ¡°Who is going to open a hole for whom now?¡± The cold voice was like the call of the grim reaper. He swallowed his saliva and sweat covered his forehead. ¡°I¡­ I¡¯m just joking, I¡¯ll get out now¡­¡± The hoodlum holding the dagger immediately admitted defeat. But he wasn¡¯t thinking of running, he was thinking of bringing more people to kill the shadow. He wanted the man in front of him to let him go by pretending to be pitiful now. Just when the man slowly moved the muzzle away and held it in his hand. He was instantly delighted. ¡°I¡¯ll bring people to kill youter! You b*tch!¡± Just as he was about to run away what awaited him was not an escape. Instead, it was the man who smashed the butt of the gun on the back of his neck. The little hooligan¡¯s vision turned ck. He fell to the ground. ¡°You devil, what did you do to him!¡± Another gangster immediately took out a dagger and pressed it against Mary¡¯s neck. ¡°If you move again, I¡¯ll kill her!¡± The ck shadow looked over. His cold gaze made the gangster¡¯s body tremble. He had not seen such a terrifying gaze for a long time. It was as if he had just killed someone. The ck shadow was indifferent to his words and walked from the alley entrance step by step. Just like that, he kept staring at the other party. ¡°I¡¯m warning you, you better note over! Or else I¡¯ll really kill her!¡± The ck shadow was stunned when he heard that and continued to walk in. ¡°Whether you kill her or not, what does it have to do with me?¡± ¡°I¡¯m not interested in her, I¡¯m only interested in you.¡± Jon¡¯s cold gaze, coupled with the shotgun that was dripping with blood. This terrifying scene¡­ scared the shit out of him. Chapter 34

Chapter 34: Shocked the Sheriff Again!

The gangster¡¯s hand trembled as he held the dagger. Jon walked step by step, as if there was a rhythm. It was the same as the gangster¡¯s heartbeat. Series of idents had made the gangster extremely tense. When he saw Jon pointing the gun at him, he couldn¡¯t help it anymore and knelt on the ground. He couldn¡¯t stop shaking. He kept mumbling when he saw the robber like this. Jon didn¡¯t stand on ceremony either. He went up with a butt of the gun and knocked out the other man again. Two gangsters were subdued by Jon in a very short time. He took off the coat of one gangster and threw it to the shivering Mary. ¡°Next time, don¡¯t go out alone inte night.¡± When he threw the coat to Mary, his masculine face under the hood was revealed. Mary immediately recognized that it was Jon, who had be popr on the Inte today! ¡°Oh my God!¡± Mary covered her mouth with both hands. Wasn¡¯t he a fugitive?! He actually came to help me! The deep voice made Mary felt as if she had found her backbone. She hurriedly rushed up and pulled Jon, who was about to leave. ¡°I. . . What should I do next?¡± ¡°I mean, what should I do with these two robbers? Calling the police will affect your actions, right?¡± Mary¡¯s words stunned Jon. That was indeed the case. If Mary called the police at this hour, the police would quickly deduce that it was probably Jon. They might even start arge-scale search. This was extremely disadvantageous to him. Thinking of this, Jon was about to speak. But he found that he could not speak. A jade-like finger pressed against Jon¡¯s mouth. ¡°Can you stay with me for one night? I¡¯m a little scared by myself.¡± ¡°The house I rented is nearby. You don¡¯t have anywhere to go, right?¡± Mary¡¯s words made Jon raised an eyebrow. ¡°Aren¡¯t you afraid that I¡¯m a bad person?¡± ¡°I¡¯ll admit it if you¡¯re a bad person.¡± Mary gave Jon a wink. This man was so popr on the Inte. Everyone wanted to get to know him. In addition, she had just been scared. She desperately needed a sense of security. Jon not only fit the bill perfectly. He was good-looking, too. Jon was already in the top 20 of the most wanted sex partners in thetest list. It¡¯s a testament to his poprity and good look. Mary was still walking on the dangerous streets in her skimpy clothes. But she was not afraid at all as she was being protected by a strong man. ¡­ On the police side. The sheriff wasmanding everyone to surround the abandoned factory in the north. At this moment, the sheriff turned on the walkie-talkie and shouted to the person-in-charge of the northen team. ¡°What¡¯s the situation over there now!¡± ¡°Report, sheriff! They are still in a standoff with the robber.¡± ¡°When the door is broken through, the other party will fire bullets. Request for anesthetic bullets for backup!¡± The person-in-charge of the team was also keeping an eye at the abandoned factory. He was constantly making sure that the other party inside did not escape. Moreover, the other party¡¯s figure could be seen from his side. If he applied for sniper anesthetic bullets from this angle, there was a very high sess rate. After listening, the sheriff also sent the sniper there. There were many buildings nearby, and the vantage point was very easy to find. The sheriff was driving the police car crazily. He wanted to say to Jon face to face, ¡°You can¡¯t f*cking run out of my hands!¡± The four squads, north, south, east, and west, all moved out. In their eyes, Jon had nowhere to run this time! The sheriff soon arrived at the abandoned factory. Nearly a hundred police cars blocked this ce. All the police surrounded this ce. The high-frequency searchlights not only illuminated this ce as if it was daytime, they also took out infrared detection equipment to check the position of Jon. ¡°Second floor, by the window.¡± The policeman told the sniper and the sheriff this news. The sniper was also ready to take position. In this position, Jon¡¯s exposed figure was like a naked beauty in the eyes of the sniper. Everywhere was filled with tempting spots. In the headset. After receiving the sniper¡¯s confirmation, the sheriff confidently took out the loudspeaker. No matter how foolish he was this time, it was impossible for him to escape in front of him! ¡°Jon! You¡¯re surrounded by us, there¡¯s no way you can escape!¡± ¡°There¡¯s no one here who can make you pretend, everyone aim!¡± ¡°Jon! The drill is over!¡± The sheriff held the microphone and issued an ultimatum. He hadn¡¯t eaten anything since the afternoon. Just so he could catch Jon. But he had to admit that Jon had taught him a lesson. If it wasn¡¯t for his serious y that had pped all of them in the face, how could they be so serious. With that, a smile appeared on the sheriff¡¯s face. He wanted to thank Jon in person for taking such ¡®good care¡¯ of him. The sheriff grinned at the thought. It was as if the long period of depression had been swept away. And the sheriff didn¡¯t immediately let the sniper use the tranquilizer gun as he wanted to wait for the media to arrive. All his preparations were for this moment. When the media¡¯s live broadcast arrived at the scene and saw the densely packed police cars and police officers, the bullet screens were all shocked. ¡°I really can¡¯t think of what I would do if I were Jon.¡± ¡°If I were him, I would probably choose to surrender. This is the first time I¡¯ve seen so many police officers.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve seen the police snipers aiming at this ce. If Jon still doesn¡¯t surrender, I reckon he¡¯ll have to sleep for a while.¡± ¡°But since the drill has progressed to this point, Jon is already very impressive. We pay our respects to him.¡± Many people continued to pay attention to this matter evente into the night. Many people finally heaved a sigh of relief. It was like watching the end of a TV series. The media was also writing nervously, preparing to release it when the sheriff arrested Jon. The police, the media, andizens all knew the ending. They were waiting for Jon toe out and confess. The sheriff couldn¡¯t get any feedback. He ordered the sniper to anesthetize him! After the sniper received the signal, he immediately turned on the optical sight. He urately shot the other party. ¡°Sheriff, I got him!¡± The sniper reported the situation. His task waspleted. But he was a little strange. Why didn¡¯t Jon react after being shot. The sheriff received the signal. He immediately rushed up. Everyone was stunned. They had never seen an old sheriff being so agile! The sheriff didn¡¯t care. The only thought in his mind was to catch Jon. He rushed up to the second floor of the abandoned factory. He saw a masked man sitting on a stool. ¡°Jon! I finally caught you this time!¡± ¡°You still want to y that game with a mask on!¡± The sheriff red at the man. He walked to the man who was shot with a tranquilizer bullet. He lifted the mask on the other side and saw the face under the mask. The sheriff was stunned. The person under the mask was not Jon. It was a homeless man he didn¡¯t even know! Chapter 35

Chapter 35: All the Police Were Shocked!

The police officers and media that rushed over quickly arrived. All the live broadcast media focused their cameras on ¡®Jon¡¯. Even in the middle of the night, the live broadcast room was the hottest spot on the Inte. ¡°Is this Jon? Is he wearing make-up? Why does he look different from the photo?¡± ¡°He should be wearing make-up and a mask. He wants to blend in with the team again and slip away.¡± ¡°This¡­ Something¡¯s not right. No matter how good his make-up skills are, can he still make up his body?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. This person¡¯s body size doesn¡¯t match Jon¡¯s body size at all!¡± Although it was very sudden. But many attentiveizens still noticed it. In the live broadcast, body size of Jon waspletely different from his public body size. Jon should be a man with muscles all over his body. In the live broadcast, he did look like a drunk and drug addict. Many police officers still did not know what had happened. They were about to go forward to arrest him. The leader of the northern team personally handcuffed him. He was ready to take credit for it. But he was greeted with a pair of angry eyes. ¡°A bunch of idiots!¡± The sheriff pointed at the nose of the leader and cursed. ? The person-in-charge and all the police officers were stunned. They had already caught Jon. Why was the sheriff still angry? Many of the media were also puzzled. They turned their cameras towards the sheriff. They thought the sheriff was just dissatisfied with all the police officers¡¯ actions today. They caught him sote. ¡°A bunch of idiots! This is f*cking fake!¡± ¡°Jon ran away!¡± The sheriff held the megaphone and shouted at everyone present. In an instant, everyone was stunned. The police officers were stunned. The person-in-charge was stunned. James, Ryan, and Ian from themand center were stunned. The media was stunned. The audience in the live broadcast room was stunned as well. Jon, who was clearly trapped in the abandoned factory¡­ ran away? At this moment, a wave of fear rose in everyone¡¯s hearts. ¡°Jon can¡¯t be the devil, right?¡± ¡°Otherwise, how could he escape under the surveince of so many people?¡± The sheriff roared at everyone. Now everyone search this ce carefully! And enclosed with the secondyer of encirclement! Jon could still be in our encirclement! We had to look carefully! The police officers immediately started running again. What happened tonight was too strange for them. They used so much manpower, resources and they didn¡¯t catch Jon? The sheriff just sat on the factory floor, waiting for the dismissal of the search. James in the police station also asked Ian. ¡°Didn¡¯t you find Jon on the surveince camera?¡± Ian kept using the surveince cameras to search for Jon. He also looked like he had seen a ghost. He didn¡¯t see anyone except the traffic¡­ The cars¡­ Ian suddenly thought of something. His fingers quickly tapped on the keyboard. He quickly captured all the surveince footage of the northen team, the time of the shot and the siege. He pulled James and Ryan to check them one by one. A white and green garbage truck appeared in their vision. In the video, the officers were conducting a routine check. But the sheriff then sent everyone over to form a second circle. They just let the garbage truck passed. After that, no vehicles came in or out. The three of them looked at each other after watching the video. Everyone knew what was going on. Jon must have used the garbage truck to escape back to the city! James immediately sent the video to the sheriff. He asked him to organize a team to return to the city quickly. It was a waste of time to search here now. The robber had already escaped this ce! The sheriff watched the video Ian sent. He listened to their analysis with a defeated expression. He couldn¡¯t help but give himself a hard p. He actually let Jon escaped for the second time! He felt extremely regretful! But it was useless to regret now. Now he had to find a way to go back and search! He just hoped it wasn¡¯t toote¡­ A whole night of searching. When the sheriffpletely ignorant of the rules and regtions, he used manpower and visited all the hotels and inns in the suburbs. But he found nothing. And¡­ Because it was night, it was even more difficult to search in the city. One night was fruitless. In the temporarymand room of the sheriff. The sheriff sat at the table in themand room, and touched the cigarette case on the table with his eyes nkly. But the smoke inside had already been exhausted. The ashtray on the desk was already filled with countless cigarette butts. The sheriff¡¯s eyes were already filled with red blood. But he stillmunicated with the threemanders in the police station. Until now, the sheriff hadpletely surrendered to Jon. Not only did he do things in a circle, but he was also very good at digging holes. Up until now, he had been led by the nose by the other party in this drill. Not only that, he was also d that Jon was not the real robber. Otherwise, the consequences would be unimaginable. In the morning. The police officer brought breakfast to the sheriff from the fast food restaurant. ¡°Eat some!¡± ¡°We probably lost this drill.¡± The team leaders walked in from the outside. It was already early in the morning. There were only a few hours left. The police officers were all mobilized. There was not a single piece of news after an entire night of searching. Although they did not want to admit it, the odds of the police winning now could be said to be very low. ¡°Do you have a cigarette?¡± The sheriff didn¡¯t even look up and asked the persons-in-charge. The persons-in-charge looked at each other. The person-in-charge of the northern team took out a cigarette from his pocket and put it on the table. ¡°Phew.¡± The sheriff lit a cigarette and took a deep puff. ¡°This kid is really smart. He seems to have predicted what we are doing every step.¡± The sheriff said slowly. As soon as he finished speaking, he had already finished a cigarette. He put out the cigarette butt and finished the cigarette. The sheriff picked up a piece of breakfast and ate it. ¡°Do you want to get the brothers to set up a search?¡± ¡°It¡¯s only ten o¡¯clock now. There are still a few hours left. Maybe there¡¯s still time.¡± The persons-in-charge looked at the sheriff and said. ¡°There¡¯s no need. Get the brothers to withdraw.¡± ¡°Everyone is tired after one night.¡± ¡°We¡¯ve already lost sincest night when I made the wrong decision.¡± ¡°However, isn¡¯t this exercise very interesting?¡± The sheriff, who had finished his breakfast, said to the persons-in-charge. ¡°We can¡¯t lose the entire police force just because of one exercise.¡± ¡°We¡¯re wrong. We have to admit as we¡¯re not people who can¡¯t afford to lose.¡± Looking at the bustling New York City, many ordinary people didn¡¯t know what they had experiencedst night. Jon, a name that was about to write a legend. Although it was just a drill, they would never forget this lesson for the New York Police Force. ¡­ Chapter 36

Chapter 36: Stop? No! Go On!

Ten o¡¯clock in the morning. Jon woke up from his sleep. He looked at the strange surroundings. He subconsciously checked his surroundings. He felt something heavy on his arm. His eyes gradually shifted to the side. Arge number of white scenery suddenly appeared in front of him. Mary, the stripper bar attendant. The girl he had identally saved in the alley yesterday. Because of fear, he pulled himself to her rental house. As soon as he entered the door, Mary kissed him fiercely before he had time to observe. The graceful figure made Jon lose control. The magnificent chest made Jon almost suffocate. Mary threw him on the bed crazily. Then it was hard to remember. Jon had amnesia. All he remembered was a crazy nightst night. They almost shook the bed apart. He shook his dizzy head and pulled his arms out of the snowy skin. He pulled the covers back and got out of bed. Jon straightened his back. He was a little sore. He found the remote and turned on the TV. The news about Jon was being broadcast on the TV. There was a big mistake at the police stationst night. They mistook the homeless man for Jon. When the sheriff was interviewed by the media about where Jon was now, the sheriff stammered his answer. ¡°It¡¯s not clear at the moment.¡± ¡°Our police are doing their best to pursue him.¡± Then, he was escorted back to the police station by the police officers. The performance of the sheriff made all the audienceughed. ¡°This sheriff gathered the media and promised to arrest Jon. Why is he hiding from the reporters now? Hahaha!¡± ¡°Jon is really amazing. Yesterday, I thought he was going to be arrested and brought to justice!¡± ¡°Yeah, I also thought that Jon was going to be arrested by the police, but I didn¡¯t expect that it would be a hobo pretending to be him. You don¡¯t even know the police¡¯s final expression. It¡¯s so exciting!¡± ¡°There are still a few hours left. Will they still be able to find Jon?¡± ¡°Impossible. If the surveince cameras in the city can¡¯t capture him, then the police won¡¯t be able to search them one by one.¡± ¡°A few hours left, just hide in any small warehouse. I can think of it. I don¡¯t believe that Jon can¡¯t think of it.¡± Everyone¡¯s discussion continued. The heat continued from yesterday to today. The heat continued to be very high throughout the United States. ¡°Jon is still escaping.¡± This search was always at the top of the list. The news was always at the top. But Jon himself didn¡¯t notice. He simply took a can of beer from the refrigerator. He opened it and took a big gulp. Under the cold stimtion, Jon instantly sobered up. There were still a few hours left. He wasn¡¯t worried about a police raid at all. No one knew he was sleeping in a woman¡¯s house. Looking at the scenery in the distance, he seemed to have made up his mind. He took out his cell phone from his trouser pocket and made a call to the director. The call was picked up quickly after a few seconds. Now, Jon¡¯s phone was a private line. ording to the amount of attention on the Inte, Jon had a higher priority than the president at the FBI Director¡¯s office. ¡°Hello, Jon?¡± There was some confusion at the other end of the line. There were still a few hours before the end of the exercise, so why was he calling? ¡°It¡¯s me. Are you satisfied with this exercise?¡± Jon¡¯s tone was calm, but it didn¡¯t seem like he was talking to his superior. The director also sensed that something was wrong. ¡°Jon, just say what you want to say. This is my office. There¡¯s no one else here.¡± The director said this to Jon so that he could feel that he was in a rxed environment. ¡°Director, I want the files from three years ago.¡± Jon¡¯s tone was a little nervous. He knew that the director could fulfill this request. The director was silent for a moment. ¡°Jon, you know that incident. It¡¯s all in the past¡­¡± ¡°It will never be in the past!¡± Jon looked at the phone with agitation and growled. ¡°I won¡¯t. My brothers who died won¡¯t!¡± Listening to the agitated tone on the phone, the director was immersed in memories, too. Three years ago, Jon had retired from the SEALs and transferred to the FBI. He had looked for countless people just to find that file. Now he was finally asking for his help. ¡°Jon, is that why you joined the drill?¡± The director was a little helpless. Jon didn¡¯t say anything. He knew it wasn¡¯t the right time to say that. He just wanted to know if he could get his hands on that file from three years ago. The director smiled. He was worried about how to motivate Jon. His voice suddenly became deliberately low. ¡°Jon, do you know that there are a lot of big shots paying attention to this exercise?¡± ¡°So, some people are willing to see things get bigger and bigger.¡± ¡°Do you understand what I mean, Jon?¡± The director¡¯s voice had some deeper meaning. Talking to smart people did not need to be soborious. Big shot? Making a scene? Jon immediately felt like he was at the center of a conspiracy. But Jon didn¡¯t care about that for now. His goal had always been that matter. ¡°That means the bigger the matter, the better, right?¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Jon quickly hung up the phone. He took a deep breath. He still had to continue this cat-and-mouse game. His stance with the police would change again. This time, it wasn¡¯t the police who attacked him. It was him who attacked them. There were a few hours left. Time was running out. But a n had already appeared in his mind. He had secretly activated thework on his phone when he had just spoken¡­ ¡­ New York Police Force. Right after the sheriff said those words, several officers reacted differently. The one in charge in the north had the most aggrieved expression. He was now Jon¡¯s scapegoat. The sheriff even asked him if he had any private contact with Jon. After all, if there was a mole, then there was a reason the bust failed. Of course he wasn¡¯t. Afterwards, the three homeless men also testified for him. Even though he cleared the air, he still had a problem. Even though the sheriff said he lost, he wasn¡¯t convinced. It just so happened that he and Ian were good friends. He contacted Ian in private. He asked him to keep track of Jon¡¯s signal. As soon as he showed up, called him. Ian was the best programmer in the department. He left a back door for himself when he first tapped the director¡¯s phone. This back door, although it can¡¯t directly steal phone records, it could locate both sides of the call. Ian was watching these two phones at all times. As soon as they made contact, he immediately¡­ At this time on hisputer, the program showed that the director and Jon were talking on the phone. Ian also immediately began to search. Sessful positioning! He immediately sent a message to the person-in-charge of the location. After all, the sheriff had not slept all night and was resting in the lounge. Given it to the team leader, all the police forces in the vicinity were mobilized! Chapter 37

Chapter 37: Jon! There He Was Again!

Last night, the man in charge of the northern team was named Rum. He had just celebrated his 32nd birthday. He thought the days would pass just like this. Until yesterday¡­ He met the man who had fooled the police twice, Jon. Not only had he given the wrong information, but his colleagues had mistaken him for a mole in the police force. Thanks to the three homeless people who testified for him, he was able to clear his name. Although many of his colleagues said sorry to him, he could not swallow it. Rum asked Ian to tell him as soon as he had any news about Jon. He wanted to personally arrest the other party. Thinking of this¡­ Ding ding ding¡­ His cell phone rang. The sensitive Rum immediately picked up the phone. ¡°Is it Rum? It¡¯s Ian. There¡¯s news from Jon.¡± The sound of typing came from the other end of the phone. ¡°Ian, you¡¯re really my lucky star. Tell me where he is!¡± Rum¡¯s sleepiness was instantly swept away. He couldn¡¯t wait to capture Jon! ¡°Hey, I¡¯m still trying to locate him. Go to the location I sent you first.¡± Just as he finished speaking, Rum received a message from Ian. Was it here? Rum immediately went out and started a police car. ¡°Rum! Don¡¯t go alone! Call the surrounding police forces to surround him first!¡± In order to prevent his old friend from losing his mind, Ian kindly reminded him. ¡°Ian, help me inform the nearby police forces first. I owe you one!¡± Rum had already fastened his seatbelt and started the ignition. He did not have time tomand a group of police. He wanted to end this quickly. The police still had a few hours left. He could not waste his time on this. ¡°Alright, Rum, I will inform the police nearby to rush to your ce. You have to hurry. The sheriff will wake up at any moment.¡± Ian was a little helpless. This old friend of his was really wronged, and he urgently needed to prove himself. He could only do his best to help him. After quickly transmitting the location of Jon¡¯sst signal to the nearby police, he organized the information and handed it over to the sheriff. As for when he saw it, he didn¡¯t know. ¡­ After Jon turned on his signal, it was turned off again within ten seconds. He was trying to create a sense that he identally leaked his location. After all, he was only a few hours away from victory. Sometimes there was a sense of expansion. The police can¡¯t even tell Jon¡¯s motives. What if Jon was on top of it? No matter what they thought, they couldn¡¯t. This was because of the request made by Jon to continue this cat-and-mouse game. When he was in the abandoned factory, he knew there must beputer experts in the police station. The habit of every expert was to leave a program for every device he hacked. Maybe he would never hack this device again but he had to leave a back door that only belonged to him. Jon believed that the other party had already detected his position. He also needed to prepare now. ¡°Jon, are you leaving now?¡± Mary opened her eyes with difficulty. Last night had been too crazy. The traces Jon left on her body were still vivid in her mind. ¡°Baby, my identity is still a fugitive, so I have to go back and do my job.¡± Jon turned around and said to Mary with a smile while enjoying the beautiful scenery early in the morning. ¡°Can¡¯t you hide in my ce for a few hours?¡± Mary bit her finger. Her eyes were full of temptation. Jon almost lost control. But he knew that the most important thing now was to escape, not a woman. So he could only spread his hands and apologize but Mary didn¡¯t let him go. She crawled over. He wanted to give Jon an unforgettable experience before he left¡­ ¡­ Rum drove the police car through the streets like crazy. He had to make every second count. This was his only chance. He called Ian and told them to surround the vicinity with all the police forces. This was a residential area. The terrain wasplex and crowded. It was extremely difficult to capture Jon by himself. Coupled with Jon¡¯s cunning personality, he was not confident that he could catch him by surprise. This was one of the worst neighborhoods in Brooklyn. He instinctively stopped and wanted to wait for reinforcements. Suddenly, he heard a conversation. ¡°Did you know? Yesterday, that person was as scary as satan and knocked me unconscious.¡± ¡°You don¡¯t even know his gaze. I froze in an instant. It must be magic!¡± ¡°If we had more brothers yesterday, we definitely wouldn¡¯t have let him go back.¡± A few gang members chatted about what they had seen and heard yesterday in a nearby alley. One of them had a bandage on the back of his head. He was obviously injured. This was a topic that he usually didn¡¯t care about but it had suddenly aroused his interest. He reversed the police car and rolled down the window. He asked them, ¡°I don¡¯t want to cause any trouble, but I¡¯m interested in that satan you¡¯re talking about.¡± ¡°Do you mind talking to me?¡± ¡­ Ianmanded the police force in the police station. As one of themanders of this operation, he could still practice his power. When all the police forces in the vicinity were transferred over, Ian also sighed deeply. ¡°Rum, you really have to rely on yourself this time.¡± He had already done everything he could. As a counter-reconnaissance expert, Jon did not appear on the surveince cameras once. This made him felt very frustrated. The electronic products that he usually thought had miraculous effects were just for show now. It shook his heart. He was a believer in technology. He thought he could solve crimes with technology. But now he met Jon, who smacked him in the face. How a master reconnoiter who didn¡¯t use electronics at all made him blind. It taught him a lesson. It made him paid attention to things he didn¡¯t normally pay attention to. Unconsciously, everyone was summarizing their problems. Rum was analyzing what his problems were. Because he was too indecisive, he decided to strike decisively this time. If he had led his men to break through earlier, he wouldn¡¯t have given Jon a chance to escape. He wouldn¡¯t have made the same mistake this time. As they were making their own moves, the sheriff slowly woke up. He was so tired that he had only rested in his chair for an hour or two. He was now fully recovered. He rubbed his temples. Looking at the news that had been handed in, he lost most of his interest. Although he said it beautifully, no one was happy about it. He casually flipped through the documents and a message came into his sight. ¡°The robber, Jon, has appeared in a residential area in Brooklyn!¡± The sheriff¡¯s spirits were lifted. Chapter 38

Chapter 38: I Wanted to y A Bigger Game With the NYPD!

The sheriff was wide awake. Jon was on the move! The first thing the sheriff thought¡­ It was a trap! This sneaky Jon must have something waiting for him. But¡­ The sheriff was confused as there were only a few hours left and Jon was about to win, what else was he going to do. After thinking for a long time, he still couldn¡¯t figure it out. Then, he called Ian over. Soon, Ian arrived at the office. ¡°What¡¯s this news?¡± The sheriff knocked on the document in front of him and asked directly. ¡°Sheriff, when I was monitoring the director¡¯s cell phone, I left a back door.¡± ¡°As long as both of them talk again, the location will be shown.¡± ¡°This time, it¡¯s shown directly in a residential area in Brooklyn. I think it is probably Jon¡¯s carelessness.¡± After listening to the news, the sheriff pondered for a moment. ¡°What if the other party misled us?¡± ¡°Sheriff.¡± Ian paused. ¡°No matter what, this is ourst chance.¡± ¡°Whether it¡¯s a trap or not, we have to try!¡± Ian actually admired Jon a little. It was too unbelievable that a robber could contend the police to this point. The sheriff was silent after hearing it. There was really no other way after things had developed to this point. They were like hungry wolves. Even if they knew that the smell of blood ahead was risky, they had to go take a look first. They couldn¡¯t let go of every chance. He really didn¡¯t want to lose. The sheriff immediately asked, ¡°Is anyone nearby now?¡± ¡°Rum is there. There are already dozens of police officers.¡± Ian took a look at his equipment. A few red dots were rushing over to the location where thest signal was sent. These red dots were the police officers who went to arrest Jon. The sheriff had his eyes fixed on Ian¡¯s equipment. ¡°Connect to Rum¡¯s equipment! Keep in touch with him at all time!¡± The sheriff could only ce all his hopes on Rum. ¡°Yes!¡± Ian immediately responded. ¡­ Brooklyn neighbourhood. Rum learned from the gangsters that the satan they were talking about should be the escaped Jon. Regardless of the body shape or equipment, they were pretty much describing Jon. On top of that, he learned something else. The woman he savedst night was Mary, the waitress at the striptease club. She lived right around here! ording to the location provided by Ian, this ce is highly coincident with where Mary lives! Rum was clueless at the first ce and could only slowly search the area Ian gave him. He didn¡¯t expect to find his target so quickly. His intuition told him that Jon was hiding in this woman named Mary¡¯s house. ¡°Careless because lying in a woman¡¯s den?¡± Rum licked his lips. His gaze was extremely serious now. It was like a shark smelt blood. He was ready to open his fangs at any moment. He got into the police car. Taking out the walkie-talkie, he shouted to all the police officers in the vicinity. ¡°Everyone gather there!¡± ¡°Residential area, Building 3, #303¡± ¡°Jon will probably be there!¡± With that, Rum hung up the walkie-talkie and quickly drove to the destination. His eyes were extremely serious. This was his chance to wash himself clean. He must seize it! ¡­ Jon had just finished a big fight while Mary had fallen back asleep. Jon was smoking outside the window. It was as if the exercise just now hadn¡¯t affected him at all. An hour had passed since his phone call. He still hadn¡¯t seen any police officers nearby. He put out his cigarette and shook his head at the speed of the NYPD. He would have to be careful if he wanted something big. In fact, Jon had wronged them here. After a night of rounding up, most officers were exhausted. Jon had slept through the night, thus, his energy was naturally much better. And it was impossible for the sheriff to pull out all the police forces who were maintaining the urban city. That was why there were so few responding officers. And this was a residential area. Its traffic was very inconvenient. The current location was the territory of several gangs in the neighborhood. Once a police car appears in the neighborhood, it will cause amotion, making the pursuit even more difficult. Time passed by minute by minute. Jon thought about it. He was going to y the big one this time. He picked up Mary¡¯s cell phone and turned on the live stream. He was going to broadcast the escape to all the viewers. He kept the director¡¯s words in mind ¨C the bigger themotion, the better. But if he wanted to make a big scene, he had to involve the whole nation. Who wouldn¡¯t want to watch a show? After getting the live stream room ready, Jon turned on the camera. The live broadcast room was called ¡°The day Jon escaped.¡± This seemingly ordinary title was like a deep-water bomb which detonated silently. It was 10 o¡¯clock in the morning. Although it was work time now, many people were still paying attention to Jon. After all, this robber was really too interesting. Not only did he rob the bank and broadcast the whole thing live, he also escaped from the police¡¯s pursuit many times. It had provided them with countless pleasures. ¡°ck! Did you see that? There¡¯s a live broadcast room owned by Jon here?¡± ¡°It¡¯s probably fake. He¡¯s still on the run. How could he still be broadcasting?¡± ¡°Who¡¯s fake, right? You want to take advantage of this wave of poprity? Let me go in and report him!¡± ¡°F*ck,e and see. It¡¯s really Jon! It¡¯s not fake!¡± ¡°What? Jon is really broadcasting! Where??¡± Jon¡¯s broadcast was instantly discovered by theizens. Without a doubt, Jon was too popr. Many people relied on Jon for their livelihood. Arge number ofizens rushed to Jon¡¯s broadcast room. At this moment, Jon was half naked and leaning against the balcony. His strong muscles were exposed. The scars on his body were disyed to the public without reservation. Anyone with a discerning eye could know it immediately that this man was a veteran who had experienced real battles. Under the sun, his firm jaw lines made him looked like a god. ¡°My God! This man is too sexy! If there¡¯s a chance, I¡¯m willing to go on the run with him!¡± ¡°Bring me along! I want to go on the run with this man all over the world! He¡¯s too sexy!!¡± ¡°Look at the scars on his body! These are all men¡¯s medals!¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t Jon about to win? Why is he broadcasting at this time?¡± ¡°Maybe he knows that we¡¯re too bored and wants to y something more exciting?¡± Other than admiring Jon¡¯s figure, moreizens expressed their doubts because they didn¡¯t know either the reason Jon choose to start the live broadcast at this time. They saw Jon slowly sitting in front of the screen. The muscles on his body shook, like an armor on his body. He smiled at the camera. ¡°I want to y something bigger with the New York Police.¡± Chapter 39

Chapter 39: Did He Know Magic?!

¡°Jon wants to y a bigger game with the police?¡± ¡°My God, Jon is about to win, and he still wants to y these dirty tricks?¡± ¡°What does Jon want? Is it because he wants to humiliate the police?¡± ¡°No matter what his goal is, I only know that there will be a good show today.¡± The discussion of countlessizens caused Jon¡¯s live broadcast room to be topped again on the homepage. Everyone was anticipating a magical escape from Jon again. On this boring day, many people were bored. Jon¡¯s appearance allowed them to find new entertainment. In this era of entertainment for the masses, Jon was just adapting to the times. He fixed Mary¡¯s cell phone viewpoint to the window sill. He would live broadcast how he escaped the police here. About 10 minutes after Jon started the broadcast,a police car appeared in front of Jon¡¯s building. A man stepped out of the car. It was Rum, who had found the building. He slowly took out his pistol from his waist and strode to the front door of the building. He wanted to guard the building first and wait for the other police officers toe and support him. Although he was impulsive, he was still intelligent. He would not easily do something rash. And this scene was also seen by Jon¡¯s live broadcast room. Many of the audience were sweating for Jon. They gave their opinions one after another. ¡°Jon, to be honest, you¡¯re already stuck here. If you want to leave, you might as well leave now.¡± ¡°The police are all downstairs, don¡¯t you want to run? You¡¯re obviously throwing a game, Jon!¡± ¡°Jon, is there any higher-up threatening that you have to be arrested? If there is, you can say it. We¡¯ll help you protest!¡± Theizens went on and on. Obviously, they thought that Jon had received pressure from the higher-ups of the government, which gave him no choice but to be caught by the police. Jon smiled at the camera. ¡°Looks like the New York police are smart after all.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t panic, everyone. I¡¯ll show you how to escapeter.¡± ¡°I need to prepare something, too.¡± With that, Jon kept the camera focused on Rum downstairs. Many of the audience immediately protested as they wanted to see Jon¡¯s perfect figure, not this bullsh*t cop. But in fact, Jon did not want everyone to see Mary in bed. Though there weren¡¯t any rules stating he couldn¡¯t sleep with women during the mission, but overall, he was still not used to exposing his private life to the public. This broadcast was just to make a bigger impact. After all, this is the easiest way for him to make a scene right now. It was to show everyone how to escape from a police siege. The escapest night was broadcasted by the media in cooperation with the police. It could be as impressive as it sounded, but there was no live footage of Jon. So people didn¡¯t have much reaction to this. This time he was going to broadcast it live to everyone. He already put the money in one of his safe housesst night. After all, carrying it with him now would seriously affect his speed. He was trying to reduce the weight on his body. He wouldn¡¯t bring anything else, except a pistol and a cell phone. By the time Jon had all his equipment ready, there were already four or five police cars parked downstairs. Rum and a dozen people were about to enter the building to arrest Jon. At this time, Jon was found leaving the house from the bullet screen. ¡°Is Jon ready to set off? But the police officers have already entered. How is he going to escape?¡± ¡°It¡¯s definitely impossible to go down now. Jon is probably nning to go up.¡± ¡°But what shoud he do after going up? It would be a dead end up there!¡± Many of the audience were also extremely anxious. The reason for their anxiety was very simple as everyone knew that this escape waspletely different from the previous one. Thest time when the police surrounded Jon, Jon¡¯s mission was to escape. But this time, the audience felt that Jon would be pressured and directly captured by the police. ¡°They can urately locate Jon every time. Did they put a detector on Jon?¡± ¡°The police are too powerful. How does this work? Can anyone exin why they can determine Jon¡¯s location?¡± ¡°As a former police officer, I may exin. During the police press conference, Jon spoke to the director of the FBI on the phone. It¡¯s very likely that he has been bugged. There¡¯s a high probability that he has been imnted in the background program. So, as long as Jon uses the phone to contact the other party, the source of the signal that was used tomunicate with the director would be urately located. After analyzing it, they will be able to quickly find the location of Jon¡¯s phone.¡± ¡°F*ck! After hearing what you said, if I escape in the future, I can¡¯t even touch my phone?¡± ¡°Brother upstairs, your idea is very dangerous. I suggest you turn yourself in.¡± At this time, Rum had already arrived at the door of 303, which was Mary¡¯s rental house. The distance was less than half a meter. Rum couldn¡¯t care too much. A foot directly kicked up! And the door was directly kicked open. He then raised the gun in his hand high. Chapter 40

Chapter 40: a Miraculous Escape!!

¡°Magic?¡± Rum and all the police officers looked at each other. They didn¡¯t understand what Jon was saying at all. At this time, the phone which was broadcasting the scene was put aside by Jon. Now the audience was like watching a movie in a movie theater. On a huge screen, Jon was on the left, standing on the edge of the rooftop. And the police was on the right, blocking the passage of the rooftop. Both sides were in a confrontation on the rooftop. The distance was less than ten meters. Everyone believed that it was impossible for Jon to escape at current situation. ¡°He¡¯s finally going to be caught. No matter what happens next, Jon won¡¯t have a chance.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t believe there¡¯s no conspiracy. Jon must have received a threat. We must protest!¡± ¡°After Jon is caught, can he act in a movie? So that we may enjoy.¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t you hear what Jon said? He wants to show us what magic is?¡± ¡°There¡¯s no magic in this world. Stop dreaming. It¡¯s just a lie to you kids.¡± Most of the bulletments thought that Jon would definitely lose this time. It was just a matter of time. Although the audience thought so, Rum still looked nervously at Jon on the edge of the rooftop. He had already pushed Jon to the edge. But before he was arrested, Rum was still a little worried. Jon had not only performed many magical escapes when he was chased by the police. Deep down Rum¡¯s heart, Jon was exposed at this hour as if a professor had missed an elementary school exam. It seemed he did this on purpose. But as Ian persuaded the sheriff, they had no choice as the initiative was entirely in Jon¡¯s hands. Even if it was a trap, the police had to follow Jon¡¯s lead. It was killing the NYPD, so was Rum. All Rum could do was calling everyone up to block all the way down and leave Jon with no other way out. Rum¡¯s hand holding the gun was already sweating a lot. He could feel his heart was beating violently. At this time, new viewers kept pouring into Jon¡¯s live broadcast room. Most of the neers came in and saw Jon was face-to-face with the police on the rooftop. They couldn¡¯t help but exim in excitement. ¡°Is¡­ is this really not a movie? Did I enter the wrong live broadcast room?¡± ¡°What is this? Jon has already been caught by the police? Can anyone answer?¡± ¡°Jon is currently confronting the police. Although he hasn¡¯t been caught yet, it should only be a matter of time.¡± ¡°Thank you for your answer, but I have a question. Isn¡¯t the name of the live broadcast room escape? Why has he been caught?¡± ¡°Just now, Jon said that he knew magic, so he would be able to escape under such circumstances. He really treats us like three-year-old children.¡± ¡°Magic? I¡¯m really looking forward to it. Haha, to be honest, Jon has already conquered me a few times. I think he can do it as he says.¡± At this moment, Jon, who was standing on the rooftop, turned around. He looked at Rum opposite him. Rum immediately raised his pistol nervously. ¡°Jon, you can¡¯t escape anymore. I hope you surrender now.¡± Rum was no longer angry, but nervous in front of Jon. ¡°Is everyone here?¡± Jon did not seem to hear the question at all. He counted the people. He did not care about his current situation at all, and it was extreme dangerous. Rum saw that Jonpletely ignored him. A wave of hostility rose in his heart. ¡°Your story should end here. Don¡¯t try to resist. I¡¯ll count to three. If you don¡¯t surrender, I¡¯ll shoot immediately!¡± ¡°One!¡± As soon as he said that, Rum began to count down. He did not want to give Jon any time to think. But Jon ignored him and continued to count the number of people. ¡°Two!¡± ¡°Crack!¡± It was the safety of the pistol. Rum had already turned it on. He wanted to prove that he was not joking. The bulletments were even crazier. ¡°Omg! The police are really serious this time! They even used their guns!¡± ¡°This is the rooftop! If Jon is shot by the bullet, he might fall down!¡± ¡°Forget about being hit by the bullet, I would fall down even if I stood up and looked at it!¡± ¡°What is Jon trying to do?! Hurry up and surrender!¡± ¡°What is he waiting for? Magic? Isn¡¯t that a lie?¡± At this moment, Jon seemed to be relieved. ¡°It seems that everyone is here, then we can begin.¡± Jon smiled. He opened his hands. His confident and calm expression seemed to have never changed. He was like a magician ready to start casting magic. ¡°Three!¡± Rum gave Jon the final countdown! He couldn¡¯t hold it in any longer. Just as he was about to go forward and handcuff him, Jon made a move that no one in the audience had expected. They saw him face up and had his hands fell naturally. With his eyes closed, he fell directly behind the roof. This was the ninth floor?! He would die if he fell like this! Jon¡¯s action directly scared countless people. In the eyes of the audience, Jon was definitely going to die! Even Rum, who had been a police officer for many years, was frightened. He had never thought that Jon would choose this method to escape the chase. He stood rooted to the ground, stunned by Jon¡¯s action. Bulletments filled with screens. ¡°What is Jon doing? Why did he choose tomit suicide?! Isn¡¯t this a drill?¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be? Is this the magic Jon is going to perform? I can¡¯t ept it!¡± ¡°I¡¯m too sad. I can¡¯t continue watching. This will be the shadow of my day.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t believe Jon wanted to die this way. He must have a way to escape!¡± ¡°This isn¡¯t the magic I want. The police forced Jon to die!¡± Not only were the bulletments eximing, there were also countless cursed bulletments. There were even some who threatened the police officers, thinking that they were murderers. Although there were rational bulletments in the middle, they were quickly drowned by the other bulletments. At this moment, everyone could not ept the fact that Jon had jumped off the building. Just as everyone was still immersed in their emotions¡­ ¡°Buzz buzz¡­¡± The sound of a car engine ignition suddenly came. ¡°Didn¡¯t you evacuate the crowd? What¡¯s going on!¡± Rum¡¯s expression was a little distorted as he shouted at the other police officers. ¡°We have indeed evacuated the crowd and even set up a cordon.¡± A police officer reminded him in a low voice. ¡°Then who else didn¡¯te up?¡± Rum was a little puzzled. ¡°After receiving the order, everyone came up to capture Jon.¡± ¡°Then who¡¯s down there?¡± Rum was a little stunned. The audience was also a little stunned. Just as everyone was stunned, a police car downstairs suddenly started. It drove out in front of everyone¡¯s eyes. In their eyes, Jon leaned out from the driver¡¯s seat and greeted Rum upstairs. He was waving his hand, as if he was dering victory. At this moment, everyone was shocked! Chapter 41

Chapter 41: n B Started!

¡°How did he get downstairs?¡± Rum¡¯s tone became a little strange. This time, Jon actually disappeared right under his nose. It refreshed hismon sense as a police officer for more than ten years. All these years. He had met countless criminals. But other than being a little cunning and a little fierce,. He couldn¡¯t be arrogant in front of the overwhelming advantage of the police. But this man in front of them waspletely different from the others. Rum held his head with his hands. He suspected that he was hallucinating. Looking around, he saw that everyone¡¯s eyes were as confused as his own. He was sure that this was not an illusion. This was really happening! This man really knew Magic! In an instant, the police force fell into a group of confusion. After learning that Jon didn¡¯t die after jumping off the building and escaped in a police car,. The bulletments increased exponentially. Most of the people in this live broadcast room were here to see Jon¡¯s final arrest. Jon¡¯s final escape from death, in their eyes, was a st of entertainment. This chase was no longer a police exercise. It was a reality show for Jon. It was a close-to-best actor performance. It was even more exciting than David Copperfield¡¯s reality magic show. Many people in the live broadcast room cheered. If there were ratings at this time, Jon¡¯s show would blow up all the TV stations¡¯ratings records. Many media personnel were keenly aware of this opportunity. They called thepany to request the dispatch of a helicopter. The police car chase was definitely the main attraction for the homeless. Jon got everyone high. Someone quickly cut up the video and posted it online. The video, which wasparable to a magic show, quickly went viral. There was no other reason. It was just two words: ¡°Real!¡± This video was taken out of the country by the real New York Police, a real chase, a real escape. From the beginning when the police surrounded the floor, to the top floor. A strong sense of oppression can be felt from the screen. Until we see Jon on the top floor facing off with the Rum Brigade. See the muzzle of the gun pointed at Jon standing on the edge of the roof. Everyone thought the tide had turned. Everyone was regretting the end of the series. Who knew, Jon jumped back, shocking countless people. What would happen if the male lead of the TV series died? No one knew. Then, with the police looking dumbfounded, Jonnded perfectly and drove away in a police car. The whole process was as smooth as silk. The final reversal made this Jonpletely explode. He instantly became number one on the YouTube video hot list. Countless people watched this video at the same time. Even the inte speed was fluctuating. Youtube¡¯s server was directly carrying almost 120% of the workload. Countless people were busy working for Jon. Team Rum had no idea that they had made a fool of themselves on the Inte. He told all the team members to hurry downstairs and continue to chase Jon! He came to the edge of the rooftop alone. He didn¡¯t believe that anyone could jump from this floor without getting hurt. Before he reached the stairs,. Rum was stunned. He had only taken a few steps. When he realized. There was a lower floor behind the roof. There was a cushion on top of the floor. From this height, it wouldn¡¯t be a problem even if he fell on his back. Rum then looked to the sides. There was a huge hose nearby. This hose could directly reach the underground passage. Jon used this passage to quickly reach the ground. ¡°SH * t!¡± Rum smashed the railing angrily. At that distance, as long as they got a little closer, they would be able to sense the other party¡¯s n. But he was stunned by Jon. Or rather, he was stunned by his acting. At that moment, he was even a little ashamed. Because at that moment, his heart wavered. He suspected that magic really existed in this world. He took out his walkie-talkie and told everyone what he had discovered. Rum sensed that everyone present was relieved. That scene was too shocking. The pressure on the young policeman was too great. When they heard that they were not fighting against some mysterious power. But real people, most people were relieved. As long as Jon didn¡¯t know magic, there must be a way to deal with him. Rum¡¯s words were not only for the young policeman. They were also for the audience watching the live broadcast. But this exnation made the discussion in the live broadcast room even crazier. Because they were following Jon¡¯s point of view the whole time. Before the police arrived, Jon had already calcted how he would escape. He had to carry out his n perfectly every step of the way. So that the final target could see. This was no longer an act of courage, this was aplete gamble. He was betting that he would not make a mistake. He was betting that the other party would not be miscalcted by him. In the end, he seeded in his gamble! This could not be done without luck, but it had to be said that sometimes, Luck was also a person¡¯s hard strength. ¡°Now, I just want to see what else Jon Can Do. This is too exciting.¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s driving me crazy. Let¡¯s do it a few more times!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. There¡¯s still a car chase after this. Jon stole the police car, Hahaha.¡± ¡°Why are the New York police like pigs? They¡¯re being chased around by Jon!¡± ¡°The operation is normal. There are still a few hours left. I guess they still won¡¯t be able to catch Jon.¡± ¡°Look, the helicopter is on the move. This is really going to be a big show.¡± ¡°I really don¡¯t know how Jon Will Dodge this time. He can¡¯t just make the ne disappear, right?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t say. Even if Jon says he¡¯ll make the ne disappear, I¡¯ll believe it¡­¡± Jon, who was on the run, could not see such bullet screens. He already had a n for the next stage in his mind. He estimated that he did not have much time left. Driving a police car to escape looked cool. But it was actually a stupid thing to do. First of all, every police car had a locator, and second of all, it was highly recognizable. If there was a ranking of the worst vehicles used by robbers,. The police car would definitely be at the top of the list. ording to Jon¡¯s own experience, although the police car was the most difficult vehicle to escape,. It also had some of his advantages. The first was confusion. Driving a police car during this period of time could confuse some police who hadn¡¯t received the news in time. It would buy him more time. Since it was going to be a sensation. It was definitely going to use some real weapons. Jon turned on his cell phone. He dialed a phone number he had memorized. He held the steering wheel with one hand. After the call was connected, he said directly. ¡°Activate n B, the usual ce.¡± With that, the other party hung up. Jon didn¡¯t care at all that the other party didn¡¯t reply. This was their way ofmunicating. The representative had received it. He now needed to buy them time. He had to deal with the police. In order to meet them at the final location,. Chapter 42

Chapter 42: Jon Stole a Police Car!

On a wide street. A police car is slowly surrounded. It is the same police car with the license te number 64233 that rum was in. The police lights are shing. Sirens are ringing. The doors of the police cars open all around at the same time. All the police officers get out of the car together and point their guns at the police car that rum was in. At the same time. A roar came from the sky. Then, a strong wind blew in this area. Many helicopters flew over from afar and hovered in the sky. A few of them belonged to the police station. The police officers sitting on them also aimed their guns at the police car that rum was in. They were surrounded from all directions! ¡°Is this the police car that Jon robbed? Oh My God, he¡¯s actually surrounded now?¡± ¡°Impossible, impossible, there¡¯s something fishy about this.¡± ¡°Fishy? What¡¯s Fishy? If it wasn¡¯t Jon, who else could make the police surround him like this? In the police car, it¡¯s probably Jon himself.¡± ¡°But with the strength that Jon disyed before, he definitely wouldn¡¯t be surrounded. Then what¡¯s going on now?¡± ¡°If it really is Jon in the car, then it can only mean one thing. He was deliberately surrounded.¡± ¡°If this is really the case, it means that he still has a way to escape in this desperate situation!¡± ¡°Escape in this situation? I don¡¯t know how to escape.¡± ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to him showing his so-called ¡®magic¡¯again and shocking the world!¡± The scene of the police car being surrounded. It was shown in front of the audience through the live broadcast. Due to the earlier footage of Jon forcing a police car to escape. It was filmed from a distance. Therefore, the audience did not see the license te number of the police car that he robbed. Simrly, except for rum and the other police officer in his police car. All the other police officers did not know that this moment was kept in the dark. The audience discussed. While the police officers at the scene were tense. Although, in their eyes, Jon was already in a police car. But¡­ After several failed arrests,. The police officers were more or less traumatized. They knew that this was strange. It was too easy to surround Jon. There was no chase. Jon stopped the police car and didn¡¯t seem to want to run anymore. It was weird. They couldn¡¯t figure out what Jon was doing. The only exnation was¡­ He had a backup n. The officers didn¡¯t know what it was. So they had to be careful. As the officers surrounded them¡­ The door of the car opened. Rum got out. The police officers were dumbfounded. They didn¡¯t surround Jon, but Rum? After rum got down. He looked at the shing police lights. He looked extremely helpless. These cars were originally arranged to chase Jon. But now, because they received orders from Jon, they surrounded him instead. This would definitely waste a lot of time. ¡°Sir, why is it you?¡± A police officer asked. Rum¡¯s tone was quick as he said, ¡°Jon took my police car, and through the authority given to me by the police chief, he gave you the order to surround my police car. Now, Jon is already heading north, quickly go after him!¡± ¡°Okay.¡± The police officer who asked the question nodded. He was about to ask his teammates to follow Rum¡¯s instructions and continue chasing after Jon. But at this moment, another officer raised his gun. He aimed the muzzle at Rum¡¯s forehead. This action caused everyone present to be puzzled. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, sir.¡± The officer said, ¡°We¡¯ve all seen Jon¡¯s makeup. He can disguise himself as almost anyone, and no one can see through his disguise. Now I suspect that you¡¯re the real Jon!¡± After he said this. All the police officers present were shocked. That¡¯s right. Jon¡¯s makeup was too amazing. No one could see a trace of it. He could escape from their eyes. When they thought of this, the atmosphere froze again. When he saw that the police officers in front of him did not trust him, the anger in Rum¡¯s heart rose again. He could not help but curse in a low voice, ¡°Fuck!¡± This sentence was more directed at Jon. ¡°Now, please raise your hands and let us examine you.¡± The police officer said. When rum heard this, he cursed in his heart again. But in order not to continue wasting time, he gave Jon a chance to run further and further away. He still did it. A police officer walked over. After a careful inspection, he did not find any traces of makeup on rum¡¯s body. ¡°Sorry, sir.¡± When these police officers saw that the person in front of them was really rum, they immediately understood. This time, they had been fooled again. In front of the American media. A cat-and-cat drama had been put on! These cats, who were part of the capture team, let the mice of the captured team. Once again, they were toyed with! ¡°SH * t!¡±A police officer shouted angrily, ¡°Continue to chase!¡± Because the signal of the previous police car had been blocked by Jon. Naturally, rum would not continue to ride. After changing to a police car. Rum continued to pursue. At the same time, he contacted the sheriff and reported the matter. After knowing the cause and effect of the matter, the sheriff was naturally furious and cursed repeatedly. He immediately canceled the authority granted to Jon¡¯s car. And when this scene fell into the eyes of the audience¡­ It caused a heated discussion. ¡°So that¡¯s how it is. Amazing. Jon is too amazing.¡± ¡°Good Man. He let the cat catch the cat, and then he easily escaped when the cats were fighting among themselves.¡± ¡°I told you that with Jon¡¯s ability, he wouldn¡¯t be surrounded so quickly. So that¡¯s his goal.¡± ¡°Actually, I was hoping that Jon would be surrounded and perform a shocking reversal when he was in a desperate situation.¡± ¡°Haha, I thought so too. It¡¯s a pity that I didn¡¯t see it this time.¡± While theizens were discussing. They had already arrived near the predetermined location. And it was at this time. Through the broadcast. The sheriff¡¯s voice was heard. ¡°So you¡¯re Jon. So I¡¯ve been talking to Jon just now.¡± ¡°Yes, Sheriff.¡± At this moment, Jon finallyughed out loud and said, ¡°The police officers really cooperated with me and stopped rum¡¯s police car.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s rxed tone, the sheriff¡¯s expression became more and more angry. At the same time, he felt a sense of powerlessness. Was Jon really that powerful? Could he really not be caught? ¡°By the way, sheriff, there are less than two hours until the end of the show. I¡¯ll give you another surprise.¡± Surprise? The sheriff¡¯s pupils constricted. In front of him, on the screen. Ian had already pulled up the position of the police car that Jon was driving. A red dot appeared and stopped at the corner of a street. Chapter 43

Chapter 43: Cat and Cat Game!

Jon was driving the police car and considering which route to take. ¡°Rum, are you there?¡± ¡°You are now ready to head to the residential area of Brooklyn to be responsible for capturing Jon!¡± After a series of electronic noise, the sheriff¡¯s voice suddenly appeared in the police car. Ian¡¯s operation in the police station finally connected the signal to the police car. But what he didn¡¯t expect was that. The person sitting in the police car wasn¡¯t the rum they were looking for. It was their target, Jon! Jon didn¡¯t make a sound. The only response he got was the sound of wheels and sirens. After a few seconds. The sheriff¡¯s voice sounded again. ¡°Are you already on the way?¡± ¡°We¡¯ve already sent out the helicopters. You just need to guard the surrounding intersection.¡± ¡°Also, don¡¯t expose your position!¡± The sheriff said in a serious tone. It was as if his arrangements were foolproof. At this moment, Jon covered his mouth and almostughed out loud. He did not expect that snatching a police car would have such an effect. In this cat-and-mouse game, the cat could take the initiative to send him information? It even reminded him not to expose his position. Jon was having a hard time holding it in. But he wanted to hear more information. He tried his best to control himself and not make any other sound. ¡°Rum, listen, there are a few formations heading your way right now.¡± ¡°They will cooperate with you. You can give the order first.¡± ¡°You will temporarily be the temporarymander. I will release your authority.¡± The sheriff¡¯s orders came down. Ian released his authority to Rum¡¯s police car. Now he could start broadcasting at will, rying orders to nearby police cars. This news seemed to open the door to a new world. At this time, Jon¡¯s mouth curved into an interesting arc. He thought of something interesting. ¡­ Rum came down from the top floor. Many people had already gathered around to watch. Rum felt the gazes around him. He felt a little embarrassed. This encirclement had failed again. Even his own police car had been snatched away by Jon. Rum felt extremely aggrieved. This time, it was really embarrassing. ¡°Everyone! Stop Jon!¡± Rum roared and gave orders to everyone. Just as the others set off. He got into another police car. The driver was a rookie who had been in the police station for less than a year. Seeing the gloomy face of the person in charge, he sensibly started the car. He chased after Jon. Just as rum was sitting in the passenger seat thinking about his life. A deep male voice came from themunicator in the car. ¡°Attention, everyone. I Am the temporarymander of the police force.¡± ¡°Attention, all units. Robber Jon has robbed a police car and is fleeing at high speed.¡± ¡°All police cars, set up a checkpoint to stop him.¡± ¡°Police car number: 64233!¡± ¡°I repeat.¡± ¡°Police car number: 64233!¡± ¡°Robber Jon is good at make-up and acting! Everyone, be careful not to be fooled!¡± ¡°No matter what you say, don¡¯t believe it!¡± Then, themunicator hung up. Hearing the low male voice on themunicator, rum was stunned. The police station sent a temporarymander? Who was so fast! The order was just given. Jon did steal a car. He didn¡¯t remember anything else, but he remembered the police number. Because it was his car that was taken. But he remembered his police car number. It shouldn¡¯t be 64233, right? Was this interimmander mistaken? ! Rum was wondering. ¡°Who is this unlucky guy who was reported?¡±. He turned to ask the new police officer beside him. The police officer¡¯s trembling voice sounded. ¡°Reporting¡­ 64233 is our police car number¡­¡± ? ? ? ? ¡°Are you sure?¡± Rum¡¯s eyes instantly widened like copper bells. Why is it our police car number? Instantly, the two people in the car fell into deep thought¡­ Thismander made a mistake! Rum instantly picked up the car¡¯smunicator. ¡°Reportingmander, are you mistaken? Jon didn¡¯t Snatch 64233, but another police car!¡± ¡°Reporting over.¡± Ordinary police cars could only call in one direction. Jon¡¯s car, which had been given permission, could only choose to call in one direction and all directions. Jon Heard Rum¡¯s voice in the car and smiled. He opened the one-way channel with rum. ¡°I didn¡¯t make a mistake. I caught you.¡± Jon¡¯s low voice appeared in Rum¡¯s police car channel with a hint of a smile. This voice sounded familiar to rum. It sounded like he had heard it not long ago. Suddenly, a bolt of lightning shed across his brain. Wasn¡¯t that Jon! How could he have ess to the global channel? Rum¡¯s heart instantly turned cold. If Jon had this kind of ess at this time¡­ It would be a disaster for the police. For the police. Just as rum was in a daze¡­ His police car¡¯smunicator rang again. ¡°You can do your best to escape. Buy Me More Time.¡± Jon¡¯s words were like a curse. Rum felt many police cars¡¯signals suddenly appear around him. ¡°I F * cking¡­¡± Rum knew that he had been yed by Jon. Once again! Rum angrily smashed themunicator in his hand on the car door. ¡°Everyone, pay attention! Robber Jon impersonated themander and gave the wrong order!¡± ¡°The robber¡¯s car is another car! Not Here!¡± He had toe out and exin. At this time, the situation was no longer up to him and Jon to tangle with. Now, their identities had already been swapped. If he did not handle it well, he would really have to take the me for Jon for a period of time. How could he tolerate this? He was a police officer who was chasing, but he suddenly turned into a robber? If this matter were to spread, it would be a huge joke. He was still making his final effort. But as the channel spread,. He realized that there was no response at all. ¡°Damn it! He blocked my signal!¡± What he could think of, Jon had already thought of it. There was nothing rum could do. Hisst hope was to get in touch with the sheriff as soon as possible. Ask him to revoke his police car privileges. And quickly. He saw the shing lights around him. He wondered if he could hold out until the sheriff came to his rescue. ¡­ After Jon said hisst words to rum,. He quickly identified rum¡¯s car as a suspect. And blocked the signal. This should buy him some time. Before he left, he had memorized the license te number of the car. He didn¡¯t expect it to be the other car. What a coincidence. Jon¡¯s route was north, to meet him at the ce he had agreed. Through the police car¡¯s permission. All avable cars to the south, to intercept rum for him. So, a cat-cat fight. It was rare. If it wasn¡¯t for the rush to his destination,. He wanted to make a video to remember. He looked at the route nearby. It wasn¡¯t far from the destination. Chapter 44

Chapter 44: Crazy! the Bank Was Robbed Again!

When he heard that Jon was going to give him a surprise,. The sheriff¡¯s nerves tensed up instantly. This sentence meant that the matter was not over! Now. Less than two hours had passed since the drill time ended. Within these two hours. If Jon deliberately hid. The police really wouldn¡¯t be able to find him. However, he had no intention of hiding. He still nned to do something. As for what he was going to do, no one knew. However, it was bound to be something that would cause a stir in society. ¡°No matter what you¡¯re going to do, I¡¯ll arrest you before the time is up!¡± The sheriff said in a deep voice. ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to it, Mr. Sheriff.¡± Jon smiled and stopped talking to the sheriff. He left the police car. Jon grabbed a car from the side of the road and drove a few miles. He got out of the car. He avoided the cameras. He came to a house. ¡°Oh, my friend, you¡¯re here.¡± There were already four people in the house. They were:. The demolition expert, Sean. The makeup artist, Leo. The prop master, Alyssa. And¡­ Super Racer Bucky. It was Shawn who spoke. After saying that, he hugged Jon. ¡°We¡¯ve all seen your deeds through the Inte. You¡¯ve been in the limelight for the past two days.¡± Alyssa walked over. She was a very beautiful woman. She wore a light blue Greek chiffon dress that outlined her hot figure with undting curves. There was a pearl ne around her neck. Her hair was long and beautiful, curling around her waist like seaweed. Jon smiled at him. ¡°After all, my character is a robber. If I don¡¯t show off, it would be a shame for this drill.¡± ¡°Besides, there will be more sensational things toe.¡± ¡°The things you want are here to help you seed.¡± Sean pointed to a ck backpack on the table. Jon walked over and opened the backpack. Inside was a half-meter-long Mickey Mouse Doll. Jon knew it. It wasn¡¯t just a Mickey Mouse Doll. It was a container filled with explosives. He put all the TNT left in it. And let Sean process it. In addition, there were a few masks. Headphones, a mini camera, aputer, and a tape recorder. ¡°Thanks.¡± Jon picked up his backpack and walked out of the door. Then he found a car that they had prepared for him. He drove away. This time, Jon¡¯s destination was blue bank! And the reason he wanted to go to Blue Bank. Was, of course, to rob another bank. The second bank robbery was naturally not a spur-of-the-moment idea. Before the exercise, he had prepared the blueprints for two banks. One was the bank designated for the exercise. And the second bank was Blu Bank. The reason why he considered robbing two banks. Of course, because the system rated him ording to his performance. The higher the score, the higher the bonus. He only robbed one bank. He wasn¡¯t sure he could get all the bonus of 5 million, so to be on the safe side, he nned to rob a second bank. Moreover. When he contacted the director earlier. The director said that someone would like to see things get bigger. Then, robbing a second bank would naturally make things bigger. It could satisfy the system¡¯s rating requirements and also achieve the results that some people wanted to see. It was killing two birds with one stone. Jon gave an inexplicable smile. It was also one red street light away from the bank. Jon steadied the car. He changed his clothes and changed his ck coat and hat to brown. Then he put on the mask Leo had prepared for him. In an instant. Jon was like a different person, from a young man in his twenties to a middle-aged man in his forties. He got out of the car with his backpack and walked to Blue Bank. It was already noon. It was time for lunch. But Jon was not in the mood for lunch. At this time, there was still an hour before the end of the exercise. He had toplete the robbery of the bank and sessfully escape within an hour. Jon carried his backpack to the door of Blue Bank. He did not expect to meet an acquaintance here! Sunny! .. Sunny looked better today. He was much better than when he was taken hostage yesterday. In fact, sunny was in a good mood. Although the drill yesterday had scared him to death. But after a night of rest, the shadow in his heart had faded a lot. And in order to not meet Jon again, he applied for a transfer, and his superiors agreed to transfer him to Blue Bank. This bank had more beautiful girls than the previous one. Not long after. He chatted passionately with one of them. Now, Sonny invited the girl he chatted passionately with to have lunch with him. On the spacious street. Sonny and Jon brushed past each other. Naturally, they did not see Sean, who was disguised as a middle-aged man. Seeing Sonny, Jon smiled happily. His n needed an executor. Undoubtedly, Sonny was the most suitable. ¡°Hi, Sonny.¡± After brushing past each other, Jon turned around and shouted. ¡°? ? ?¡± When Sonny heard this voice, he immediately stopped in his tracks. This voice was too familiar to him. It was like a nightmare in his heart. If he didn¡¯t hear it again, it would be fine, but time could slowly erase it. But now, he heard it again. Oh, my God. When sunny turned around, what he saw was not Jon¡¯s face, but a middle-aged man. At this moment, he didn¡¯t dare to confirm. This person was obviously not Jon. Was it because of what happened yesterday that made him hallucinate? Just as he was doubting himself. Jon smiled and said, ¡°My old friend, how long has it been since west met, and you can¡¯t recognize me?¡± There was no hallucination! The person in front of him was Jon! Although he did not look like Jon, he knew how to disguise himself. Coupled with his figure and voice, there was no doubt that he was Jon. Instantly, Sonny¡¯s expression became extremely interesting. If there was anyone that Sonny did not want to see, it was definitely Jon. ¡°Big¡­ Big Brother?¡± Sonny¡¯s voice trembled slightly. Jon did not speak. He only looked at the woman beside Sonny with a hidden gaze. Although Sonny bullied the weak and feared the strong, he had a good eye. He said to the woman beside him, ¡°Laura, I¡¯m afraid I Won¡¯t be able to have lunch with you. Another Day.¡± Laura did not ask anything. She just nodded and left. ¡°This is not the ce to talk.¡± As Jon spoke, he walked to a cafe nearby. Sonny followed him in. After the two sat down, Sonny asked with trepidation, ¡°Big Brother, the police are still chasing you. Why are you here?¡± ¡°I¡¯m here for another robbery.¡± Jon said slowly. Chapter 45

Chapter 45: The Operation Began!

¡°Another, another¡­ robbery?¡± Sunny was stunned. It had been less than an hour since the end of the drill. He was going to carry out another robbery in such a short time? Moreover, the target of this robbery was still his own bank? Sunny suspected that Jon was targeting him. ¡°In fact, before the drill, I had already nned the second robbery, and I had already chosen Bru Bank. I didn¡¯t expect it to be so coincidental.¡± Jon said. Hearing this, Sonny was extremely depressed. So Jon had nned it before the drill. Then his luck was really bad. ¡°Big Brother, how should I cooperate this time?¡± Sunny did not waste any time and asked directly. Since Jon had found him, he naturally had to cooperate. Jon nodded. This person was quite smart. He took the backpack. At this time, there was only the Mickey Mouse doll with TNT in the backpack. All the other things had already been taken out by Jon. Then, he handed the backpack to Sunny. ¡°Carry it.¡± Sunny hesitated for a moment and put the backpack on. He did not know what was inside, but he still did it. ¡°Inside is TNT. The remote control is with me. As long as you press it, it will explode.¡± ¡°Hiss!¡±Sunny¡¯s face turned pale when he heard that. Then, Jon took out two things and handed them to sunny. He said, ¡°This is the earphone and the pinhole camera. I will control you here. Your mission is to go to Blue Bank and withdraw a million dors.¡± ¡°Remember, I¡¯m a robber now. You¡¯re a hostage under duress. Do As I say.¡± Sunny left the cafe, trembling. He came to the bank. He was about to go and get it himself. From the earphones, Jon¡¯s voice came, ¡°You don¡¯t have to go personally. Ask the staff to take it out. Tell them that this is a drill and that they can call the police. Robbery is only interesting when it¡¯s under the eyes of the police.¡± ¡°Okay¡­ Okay.¡± Sonny swallowed a mouthful of saliva. He came in front of a few staff members. ¡°Manager?¡± These staff members saw that there was something wrong with Sonny¡¯s expression. They were a little puzzled. ¡°You should know that the FBI is conducting a police and bandit drill this time.¡± Sonny said. These staff members nodded. This drill was different from the previous ones. It was a procedural drill. It had already shocked the entire United States. ¡°Now, the exercise is not over. The robbers are nning to rob the Second Bank, and the target is our Blue Bank. I am currently being held hostage by the robbers. I have TNT on my back, so we all have to cooperate with him.¡± Sunny exined the current situation simply. ¡°Rob the Second Bank? Explosives?¡± The atmosphere in the bank lobby was suddenly silent. These employees didn¡¯t think Sunny was joking. One of them subconsciously asked, ¡°How much did you Rob?¡± ¡°One million dors, go get it!¡± Sunny gave her the key to the vault. ¡°Okay.¡±The employee took the key and walked to the vault. ¡°You can call the police.¡± Sunny saw that the other employees were still stunned, so she reminded them. Immediately, someone called the police. ¡°What? Blue Bank, he¡¯s going to carry out a second robbery?¡± When he received the report, the sheriff waspletely stunned. He had never expected that Jon would be so crazy. He actually wanted to rob a bank again at this time? One had to know that he was now a fugitive. He was already being closely watched by the police. Was this the surprise that Jon was talking about? ¡°The target is at Blue Bank. He¡¯s going to carry out a second robbery. Quickly arrest him and bring him to justice!¡± The police chief quickly gave the order. At the same time, the major media outlets also received the news. They also released an announcement. ¡°Oh my God, he¡¯s going to rob a bank? Isn¡¯t this too crazy?¡± ¡°I really have to hand it to this person. There¡¯s not much time left until the end of the drill. If it was an ordinary person, in this situation where they could win as long as they were not found, they would have long hidden.¡± ¡°But he refused. He had to do one shocking thing after another.¡± ¡°Tomit a crime while escaping? An ordinary person wouldn¡¯t even dare to think about it. It¡¯s too crazy. It¡¯s indeed too crazy.¡± ¡°However, after this robbery, how is Jon going to escape unscathed? is he going to use the hostage to threaten the police and then forcefully drag out the time for the drill?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. This kind of behavior is a little low-level. I think that in less than an hour after the drill ends, since Jon is going to carry out another robbery, he must have aplete escape n.¡± When they learned of Jon¡¯s next move. Theizens were shocked beyond words. But after the shock, intense discussions began again. Less than an hour before the end of the exercise, Jon decided to rob a bank again. It was really out of everyone¡¯s expectations. In this time, how could he sessfully rob and escape? Is it really the remaining time of the exercise, to take hostages and threaten to confront the police? Although. After the end of the exercise, the police did not catch Jon, even if Jon won. But after seeing Jon¡¯s heavy escape,. The audience felt that this kind of dying behavior was not sophisticated enough. So some people also thought. Jon would sessfully escape after the robbery in a way that no one could have imagined. After all, he had too many tricks. It was simply magical. Not long after, the clerk was carrying a backpack, which was a million dors and weighed 23 pounds. The staff handed the backpack to Sunny. Sunny opened it and saw that it was full of banknotes. ¡°Very good. Next, let all of them enter the safety door and throw the ess cards out of the window.¡± Jon¡¯s voice sounded through the earpiece. Sunny nodded and said, ¡°Now, all of you enter the safety door and throw the ess cards out.¡± The bank staff did as they were told. At this moment, the police sirens outside the door sounded. The police had arrived. And some police officers had already entered with guns. ¡°The police have arrived. You can tell them my location. Next, carry your backpack and go out.¡± Jon¡¯s voice was heard through the earpiece. Sunny did as he was told. Under the watchful eyes of the entire crowd, he walked step by step to the door. ¡°What exactly happened? Where¡¯s Jon?¡± Rum walked in front and asked Sonny in a serious tone. ¡°He was at the coffee shop across from the bank.¡± Sonny said. Then, under everyone¡¯s watchful eyes, he walked towards the bank¡¯s door step by step. When he walked out of the door, the sunlight shone on Sonny¡¯s face, making it a little dazzling. And Sonny, who was still at the bank, also understood the details of the matter through the mouths of the other employees. That is. Jon wanted to rob the bank, but he didn¡¯t do it himself. He threatened Sonny. Chapter 46

Chapter 46: Jon¡¯s Strategy

¡°Didn¡¯te yourself but borrow someone else¡¯s hand to rob?¡± Rum sneered, ¡°Since you¡¯re still nning to rob at this time, it means that you must personally get the one million in cash. Otherwise, there¡¯s no point in robbing. I¡¯d like to see how you¡¯re going to get it!¡± Following that, Rum said to the other police officers, ¡°A team of people, go and surround the cafe at the opposite immediately. But now, it¡¯s very likely that Jon isn¡¯t there anymore, so search the surroundings of the cafe carefully.¡± ¡°The other team will follow me and keep an eye on Sunny. I want to see how Jon gets his hands on this million dors.¡± A team of police officers quickly went out and entered the cafe. At that moment, there was no sign of Jon in the cafe. There was only aputer with a picture of Sunny and a tape recorder. Jon¡¯s voice came from the tape recorder, ¡°Next, walk to the overpass.¡± Seeing this, a police officer immediately reported to Rum, ¡°Sir, Jon is no longer in the cafe. The one controlling Sunny is a tape recorder. Jon recorded it in advance, and now Sunny is going to the overpass!¡± ¡°Overpass?¡± Rum paused. It was no surprise that Jon was no longer in the cafe. ¡°Leave two people in the cafe. The rest of you, head to the overpass!¡± Rum said. Everyone¡¯s attention was on Sunny. At this time, all the major media had also arrived. They managed to get the details of what had happened in the shortest time. Then, they sent out an announcement to inform theizens. ¡°Good guy. Jon just stole a million dors without showing up this time?¡± ¡°But, how is he going to get that million dors and escape?¡± All theizens were guessing and curious. ¡°I believe that Jon will perform another magic trick this time. We¡¯ll wait and see!¡± While theizens were discussing, Sunny had already arrived at the overpass. He looked around, but he did not find Jon. Not far behind him were the police officers who had followed him as well as the major media in the United States. There were also some passersby who were watching the show. In fact, at this moment, Sunny himself was also curious. Under such circumstances, how would Jon take the one million dors in his hand with everyone staring at him? Then, he heard a voiceing from the earpiece, ¡°Then, hand over the one million dors to the police officers who are following you, and hand over the explosives on your back to them. Then, you can go back to work.¡± Although these words were not loud, it was earth-shattering, rumbling in Sunny¡¯s ears. It was so loud that he almost thought he heard it wrong. Gave the money to the police? Were you kidding? With less than an hour before the end of the exercise, Jon chose to rob a bank again just to give the money to the police? Obviously, there must be a purpose. As for what purpose, he didn¡¯t know. He just had to do it. Under everyone¡¯s gaze, Sunny slowly walked up to Rum. Under thetter¡¯s gaze, he handed over the backpack with a million dors in cash to Rum. He also handed over the backpack with the TNT explosives on his back to another police officer. At this moment, everyone was stunned. ¡°No, no, what happened? Sunny handed the money and the explosives to the police. What¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°I feel that my brain is a little confused. Since Sunny decided to cooperate, he will definitely cooperate to the end. In other words, this was Jon¡¯s instruction?¡± ¡°But why did Jon give the money to the police?¡± ¡°Yeah, what¡¯s the point of doing that? Even if he kidnapped Sunny after he got the money and stalled for time on the overpass, he could still win. But why did he give the money back?¡± Rum was also stunned. He looked extremely shocked. He carried the backpack which was heavy, and his heart felt unreal. It shouldn¡¯t be. Jon had spent so much effort to snatch the money from the bank. It shouldn¡¯t have been given to them so easily. ¡°Could it be that he realized that it would be difficult to take the money away and gave up at thest moment?¡± The moment this thought appeared, Rum rejected it. Although he had only dealt with Jon for less than two days, in his eyes, Jon was a person with powerful means. It should not be possible for him to give up at thest moment. However, a million dors in cash was in his hands. Something was wrong. Something was extremely wrong. Also¡­ Jon wasn¡¯t at the cafe or the overpass. Then where could he be? Suddenly, something shed through Rum¡¯s mind. He quickly handed the backpack in his hand to another police officer and said to themunicator in his hand, ¡°Ian, pull up the surveince footage of Sunny withdrawing money from Blue Bank and send it to me. Quick!¡± Ten secondster. Theputer expert sent the surveince footage to Rum¡¯s phone. Rum stared at the video carefully without blinking. When he saw Sunny took the backpack with a million dors in cash, he heard Sunny said, ¡°Now, all of you enter the security door and throw out the ess card.¡± Then, in the surveince footage, everyone listened to Sunny¡¯s words. Under themand of the security guard, they entered the bank¡¯s security door one by one. Looking at this scene, Rum clicked pause. Then, he pointed at the blurry figure of a man on the screen and said, ¡°This person, does he look like Jon?!¡± The surrounding police officers looked over. When they saw the figure on the screen, everyone took a deep breath. At this moment, they could confirm that person was Jon. When Sunny confirmed it, he felt a chill run down his spine. Rum¡¯s mind was in a trance. ¡°Jon won, he had won.¡± Even though he was unwilling to ept it, Rum still had to say it wholeheartedly. Jon was too strong. His strategy was beyond everyone¡¯s expectations. ¡°He can disguise himself. His disguise is not easy for people to see through his ws.¡± Rum mumbled, ¡°And for this operation, he first found a hostage and used the hostage to withdraw money from the bank, attracting everyone¡¯s attention.¡± ¡°Then, everyone would subconsciously think that Jon would take a million dors in cash from the hostage. So, everyone was guessing what method Jon would use to sessfully escape after taking the money in front of everyone.¡± ¡°When everyone¡¯s attention was focused on this, Jon had sneaked into the bank without anyone noticing.¡± After watching the video and listening to Rum¡¯s analysis, everyone present understood at this moment. ¡°That is to say, after Sunny left the cafe with the explosives, Jon followed Sunny into the bank. Then, using Sonny¡¯s words, he followed everyone into the bank¡¯s internal working area.¡± ¡°That is to say, it is possible that he is robbing inside the bank now?¡± Someone analyzed. Chapter 47

Chapter 47: Jon Had Won!

Hearing this man¡¯s analysis, some people gasped. How dared he! When Sunny entered the bank, Jon had already disguised himself as a passerby. Then he used the pre-set recording to make use of Sunny to carry out the robbery. Jon was among the bank¡¯s customers and staff members. After Sunny received the money, he followed the instructions of the recording and had everyone entered the bank work area through the security door. He also had someone threw the ess card out of the window. In other words¡­ The bank¡¯s staff only thought that Jon was controlling Sunny from the outside to carry out the robbery. They didn¡¯t know Jon¡¯s real purpose so they didn¡¯t know that the real robber had been taken into the bank by them. ¡°So, from the beginning, Jon never thought of taking the one million in Sunny¡¯s hand?¡± ¡°He made use of the situation where everyone was focussing on Sunny, and then stole another one million without anyone knowing. Oh my God, isn¡¯t he too scary?¡± ¡°Also, you have to pay attention that all the instructions werepleted through the recording.¡± ¡°That is to say, before the recording, he had alreadypletely deduced this process and calcted urately the time needed for every step to bepleted.¡± ¡°Hiss, now that you mention it, I feel that he¡¯s even more amazing!¡± The media at the scene began to broadcast live. And through the images here, theizens also learned about the cause and effect of Jon robbing the bank. They were all shocked. ¡°Oh my God, I was wondering how he got the one million, but it turns out, he got it this way?¡± ¡°It¡¯s really too amazing. Jon didn¡¯t even show up for this robbery.¡± ¡°Terrifying psychology analysis, terrifying time calctions, terrifying deductions¡­ Magic, it¡¯s really magic, it¡¯s unbelievable.¡± ¡°This man is close to a God!¡± At this moment, Rum was filled with bitterness. At the same time, he understood why Jon had asked them to call the police, and why he had asked Sunny to tell him that he had been in the cafe. It turned out the arrival of the police would not only not affect Jon¡¯s progress in his n, he could also use their arrival at the scene to show how powerful Jon¡¯s methods were! ¡°F*ck!¡± Rum growled. But in his heart, he was already convinced. If such a person was really an opponent, then he was simply too terrifying. The surveince footage on themunicator was not turned off. Rum continued watching. He saw that when Sunny left with the backpack containing a million dors, almost everyone¡¯s gazes were on him. This was also the most rxed time for the bank staff because ording to human psychology¡­ People subconsciously thought that Sunny took the money so that he could give it to Jon outside. People subconsciously thought that the first half of the bank robbery was over. Since it was the end of the robbery, then it was between the robber and the police. Once the police recovered the stolen money, or when the drill was over, everything would be over. At this moment, everyone let their guard down. But no one thought that the real robbery had just begun. When the security guard inside took out the spare safety door key from the safe and prepared to let everyone out, a figure wearing a coat suddenly took out a gun from behind. At the same time, one of his hand scratched his face and removed the disguise mask, revealing his original face. ¡°Jon!¡± Seeing this face, Rum subconsciously opened his mouth. In the scene, everyone was shocked by this sudden scene and didn¡¯t know what to do. After they reacted, they all revealed shocked and even respectful looks. Then, at Jon¡¯s instruction, the staff put another million dors into a ck backpack. Then Jon took the only key to the security door and walked out of the work area. He put the security card and key on the front desk. Then, Jon looked at the monitor and smiled. The smile was like a sneer in Rum¡¯s eyes. After doing all this, Jon put on his mask again and left. The entire process only took a few minutes. No one paid attention to this ce. Even though the police had arrived, they didn¡¯t send any police officers to guard this ce. Everyone¡¯s gaze was on Sunny. And this scene was shown on the live broadcast through the media¡¯s cameras. Theizens were once again in an uproar. ¡°I give up, I really give up. Neither arrogant nor impatient, neither fast nor slow, using one person to attract everyone¡¯s attention while secretly carrying out a robbery in a ce where no one is paying attention.¡± ¡°If I were the police, I would probably have a mental breakdown when I saw such a powerful opponent.¡± ¡°Now that the drill is about to end, the police probably won¡¯t be able to find Jon. Jon has already won.¡± ¡°I would never have thought that watching a drill would be more exciting than watching a police film.¡± ¡°This bank robbery has really refreshed my understanding. I reckon that a movie based on this incident will be released soon.¡± ¡°He¡¯s too smart. His IQ is simply superior to everyone else.¡± ¡°If such a powerful viin really appeared in this society, how scary would that be? Fortunately, Jon isn¡¯t.¡± ¡°My mom asked me why I was kneeling, and I said that I met someone I looked up to.¡± ¡°Wonderful! Impressive! Jon is awesome!¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a pity that the drill is about to end. We will never see such a powerful robber again.¡± ¡°I feel that if this drill is bound to cause a huge reaction, there will be a second and third drill. By that time, Jon will very likely be invited again.¡± ¡°Looking forward to the next drill.¡± ¡°Looking forward +1.¡± Shock. An iparable shock. And after this shock, theizens were conquered by Jon¡¯s robbering methods one after another. They wanted to see him perform even more brilliantly. And after that, various major media began to take action to interview Rum one after another. ¡°Hello, may I ask, as the person in charge of the hunt for the robber this time, the robber could be said to have sessfully snatched a million dors and escaped unscathed under your nose. What kind of mood are you in now?¡± Chapter 48 - ystem Rewards!

Chapter 48: System Rewards!

The reporters¡¯ questions were like sharp knives, stabbing into Rum¡¯s heart. It made his already awful face even gloomier. What kind of mood was he in? Did you still need to ask him? ¡°I didn¡¯t consider the robber¡¯s intentions and allow him sessfully rob and escape under the nose of the police is my negligence. After the drill is over, I will reflect deeply.¡± ¡°However, the most important thing now is to capture the robber before the drill is over!¡± Rum spoke. ¡°Then, it has been a long time since the robber escaped, and the police have not grasped the robber¡¯s escape route. In less than half an hour, the drill will end. In such a short time, is there still a chance to capture the robber?¡± Another media asked. ¡°We willunch arge-scale manhunt. We will try to find the robber in the shortest time possible and capture him,¡± Rum said. ¡°As the drill progresses until now, the robber has always relied on his own means to escape again and again the police¡¯s pursuit in the face of so many police officers. It can be said that the robber has won the drill. Is there any meaning to the arrest?¡± The third media asked. Rum was silent for a moment. A serious look appeared on his face. ¡°It is meaningful. As long as time is not over, we will continue to target the robber and continue to pursue him¡± ¡°This is no longer a drill. This is actualbat.¡± ¡°Perhaps at the beginning, everyone had the mentality of a drill. Everyone thought that capturing the robber would not waste too much time.¡± ¡°However, as the situation evolved, the robber escaped from the pursuit again and again, and we had our people died in battle, this was no longer a child¡¯s y. The police only had one life.¡± ¡°Fortunately, this was a drill. Otherwise, they would have really died in battle.¡± ¡°But this drill brought us a deeper meaning than actualbat because this drill allowed us to find our own shorings. Here, I would like to pay tribute to the actor ying as the robber, Mr. Jon.¡± Rum said. .. Temporarymand room. The sheriff sat in a daze and his eyes was somewhat listless. He recalled what Jon had said earlier. Jon had said that he wanted to give him a surprise. A surprise, it was really a surprise. He had snatched a million dors without his appearance. It was amazing. The n was too perfect. In this n, Jon had disyed the perfect deductive ability, psychological conjecture, and disguising ability. It was simply amazing. How did he think of doing this? The sheriff was convinced. The sheriff smoked a cigarette and said to Ian, ¡°Immediately pull up all the surveince cameras around Blue Bank after Jon left the bank!¡± Ian quickly operated theputer. A minuteter, he pulled up all the surveince scene and there were more than ten surveince footage. Theputer screen was instantly covered. The sheriff watched carefully, but in his heart, he did not have any hope for the surveince footage. After all, with Jon¡¯s ability, evading the surveince footage was as easy as flipping his hand. It was impossible for him to ignore the surveince cameras. He should not have expose himself. As expected, there was no trace of Jon in any of the surveince footage. The sheriff rubbed the space between his eyebrows, he gave the order, ¡°Then use Blue Bank as the center and search the area within a five-kilometer radius. There¡¯s another ce ¨C the rental house where he lives and the area around it. If we don¡¯t capture Jon within half an hour, he¡¯ll win.¡± Actually, at this point¡­ Jon had already won. What could they do without any information on Jon within half an hour? Even if Jon found a random ce and stayed there for half an hour, the police wouldn¡¯t be able to find him. But the drill wasn¡¯t over yet, so their actions naturally couldn¡¯t be stopped. Jon drove slowly down the street. He drove aimlessly. There were still more than ten minutes until the end of the drill. The radio in the car was ring, almost all of it was about the exercise. Needless to say, the exercise had already shocked the entire United States. And through the media reports, he also knew that he had attracted a terrifying amount of attention as the actor who yed the robber because he disyed all kinds of high IQ schemes and amazing operations. It could be said that he was already more popr than most celebrities in the United States now. And now¡­ Everyone was paying attention to how this popr exercise would end. Jon didn¡¯t care how it would end. What he was most concerned about was the rewards from the system. As he thought about it, Jon opened the system panel. On the virtual system panel, the time was counting down. There were ten minutes left until the end of the drill. Six minutes. One minute. Thirty seconds¡­ twenty seconds¡­ ten seconds¡­ The drill was over! At the same time, Jon¡¯s phone rang. ¡°Jon, the drill is over. You won. Now we¡¯re all at the entrance of Blue Bank. Come over.¡± The director¡¯s voice came from the other end of the phone. Although this drill ended with the defeat of the police and made all the police lose face, the director didn¡¯t show any dissatisfaction. He was very satisfied with Jon¡¯s attitude towards this drill. And in this drill, the ability Jon had disyed made him even more surprised. The director couldn¡¯t help but think of what Jon had said to him before the drill. Jon had said that he would regret his decision of choosing him. Well, now the results were out. Regret? The director didn¡¯t have any regrets in his heart. However, choosing Jon was indeed the best decision he could make. ¡°I¡¯ll be there right away,¡± Jon replied absent-mindedly and hung up the phone. At this moment, all his thoughts were on the system. ¡°Ding, missionpleted. Do you want to receive the reward now?¡± The system¡¯s voice was a little cold, but Jon felt that it was very pleasant to hear. ¡°Receive it now!¡± Without the slightest hesitation, Jon said directly in his heart. ¡°In this exercise, host¡¯s performance as the robber can be said to be perfect. In the end, you have obtained victory and an S grade rating!¡± ¡°You are rewarded with 5,000,000 USD! The money is currently stored in the system store. Host can withdraw it at any time.¡± ¡°Obtained reward: vigor of ying as a police (low rank).¡± ¡°Obtained reward: God level lock-picking technique (low rank).¡± ¡°Obtained reward: 5 attribute points!¡± ¡°Obtained reward: 500 points!¡± ¡°Skill:bat technique raised to master level.¡± ¡°Skill: gun mastery upgraded to master level.¡± ¡°Skill: robber¡¯s aura upgraded to beginner level.¡± The system notifications kept ringing out. Although the system¡¯s voice was very cold, Jon felt that it was very pleasant to hear. Chapter 49 - The Highly Anticipated Jon!

Chapter 49: The Highly Anticipated Jon!

Jon felt that the S rating was obviously not low. Even though he didn¡¯t know the system¡¯s rating, when he was still a former Navy SEALs, the S rating was already the highest. And for this rating, the system rewards were abnormally generous. Not only did it give him two new skills, his previous skills ¨C robber temperament acting andbat skills had been upgraded. Most importantly, the system reward of five million USD, which was promised when the task was released, had already been credited. It was ced in the system store and wasn¡¯t directly transferred into Jon¡¯s bank ount. This made Jon feel that the system was very humane. As the most idle person in the bureau, his sry was not much. If 5 million was transferred to the ount at once, it would certainly attract some attention. If it was really investigated, Jon would not be able to exin it clearly. After all, the existence of the system was listed as the most top secret in his mind, he would never tell anyone. After looking at the reward given by the system, Jon entered the system store. Although five million dors had been deposited into the store, Jon still wanted to see if it could really reflect it. Otherwise, he would feel a little uneasy. He found a grid in the system interface. The grid disyed the banknote pattern, and it was marked with five million dors. ¡°System, withdraw ten thousand dors,¡± Jon said in his heart. Then, he saw the note in the small grid changed from 5 million dors to 4.99 million dors. At the same time, the system¡¯s cold notification sounded. ¡°Ding, 10,000 dors has been transferred to host¡¯s ount. Please check.¡± The phone in Jon¡¯s pocket rang, and he took it out to take a look. ¡°Dear customer, your bank card ending in 3030 has received US $10,000, with a bnce of US $15,630.¡± With the appearance of this message, Jon was finally slightly relieved. The system did not cheat him. The money in the store could not only withdraw in cash, it could be transferred in seconds. It was more efficient than any other money transfer agency in the United States. After testing if he could withdraw money, Jon put away his phone and brought up his attribute interface. [Host] : Kirby Jon [IQ] : 120 (average person is 100) [Physical fitness] : 130 (average person is 100) [Points] : 500 [Skills] : Fighting skills (master level), gun mastery (master level), robber¡¯s aura (beginner level), police acting aura (beginner level), God level lock-picking skills (beginner level) [Attribute points] : 5 It was a familiar attribute interface. Jon¡¯s unique personal interface. However, there were two additional skills, 500 points, and 5 attribute points this time. ¡°System, what is the use of attribute points?¡± Jon asked with some confusion. ¡°It can increase the host¡¯s intelligence or physical fitness. The attribute points given by the system can be freely allocated by the host.¡± The system¡¯s voice sounded. Jon took a look. As expected, on his attribute interface, there was a small plus sign at the back of the intelligence and physical fitness attributes. Its color was a little light. If one did not look carefully, it would really be difficult to notice. Obviously, the five attributes points he had now could be added to these two attributes. Jon thought for a moment and added all five attributes points to his intelligence. After all, to him, it was good enough for his physical fitness to be 130,bat and firearms proficiency as master level. What he needed more was an increase in his IQ. After adding points, his IQ of 120 had be 125. At this moment, Jon felt his mind was clear, his vision unprecedentedly distinct, and his brain was abnormally active. He was very satisfied with this change. After all, intelligence was something that couldn¡¯t be bought with money. After the system reward was received, it was then the time to go to Blue Bank and return the one million dors he had stolen, thus ending this exercise. Jon turned around and drove towards Blue Bank. At the door of Blue Bank, the director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the sheriff, the head of the chase, Rum, and some other police officers were already waiting. But among these people, none of them looked too good except the director. After all, this exercise was different from all the previous ones. In previous drills, the police, who represented the good side would definitely arrest the robbers, who represented the evil side. And they usually made the arrests effortlessly to show the efficiency of the police. But this time it waspletely different. In this exercise, Jon, who yed the robber, taught the police a lesson. His unexpected actions and miraculous strategies pped the police in the face. This was aplete disgrace to the police. Apart from these people, there were also some media personnel and countless reporters standing there with cameras in their hands. And all theizens could see the situation through the live broadcast. In addition, there were also many people surrounded this ce. After all, who wouldn¡¯t want toe and watch a show. Moreover, it was a show where the police were defeated. These people waited eagerly. Theirmon goal was naturally the absolute protagonist of this exercise, Jon. Jon¡¯s car slowly drove over and stopped at the intersection outside the bank in the midst of everyone¡¯s anticipation. Jon carried a ck backpack and walked down. ¡°Look, Jon is here,¡± someone shouted in the crowd. At this moment, everyone¡¯s eyes turned to Jon. ¡°Is he Jon? He¡¯s even more handsome than on the screen.¡± ¡°The sensible ones are already getting wet. The insensible ones are still watching.¡± ¡°No way, bro. If you were a girl, I could still ept you getting wet. But you, a guy, getting wet after seeing Jon makes me doubt your orientation.¡± ¡°Be more confident, bro. Don¡¯t doubt it. It¡¯s exactly what you think.¡± ¡°F*ck¡­ I need to stay away from you.¡± Jon¡¯s appearance immediately caused amotion in the crowd. The media personnel pointed the cameras in their hands at Jon. As for the onlookers, some of them had already taken out their phones and started filming. And the purpose of the filming was naturally to send it to the tform to attract poprity. This was the era of small videos. There was no threshold for small videos, everyone could upload them to attract poprity. And Jon had attracted so much attention as he was now even more popr than most celebrities. The onlookers naturally wanted to share some of thoserge amount of traffic. Jon slowly walked over in the eyes of the crowd. Chapter 50 - Jon taught them a lesson!

Chapter 50: Jon taught them a lesson!

In fact, Jon was not surprised with the media and onlookers in front of Blue Bank. He did not show any unnatural expression in the face of so many cameras. Although he was not a public figure before and was a little invisible in the unit who didn¡¯t attract much attention, his psychological quality was naturally very strong as a former member of the Navy SEALs. As he approached, he was yet to have time to talk to the director and others but had been surrounded by some media reporters. It was quite a bit of a scramble. After all,pared to the spectators, they were very eager for news. For the bystanders, taking pictures, taking videos, and uploading them to the Inte was the best way to attract people. If they couldn¡¯t, it was just for fun. But for the media, they relied on the news for a living. And in order toplete their work, the reporters naturally hoped to dig out some explosive news from Jon. ¡°Hello, Mr. Jon. Before the drill, what were you thinking when you learned that you were going to y the role of the robber?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, previous drills always ended with the robber being quickly caught by the police. This can be said to be the first drill where the robber won. How do you feel now?¡± ¡°Also, Mr. Jon, why did you let the robber win this time? Was it an arrangement from the higher-ups, or was it a spur of the moment idea of yours that you decided to confront the police?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, your methods of robbing the Blue Bank can be said to be amazing. How did youe up with this n?¡± ¡­ Many media began to ask questions one after another. Some of the media¡¯s questions were already a little sensitive. He did not say anything. He knew that at this time, someone would naturallye forward. ¡°Everyone, calm down. Now is not the time for Jon to ept an interview. Later, we will arrange a special interview about him. Everyone cane and participate,¡± The director stepped forward at this time. Then, a few police officers came forward to maintain order. Then, the director brought Jon to an RV that acted as a temporarymand center. ¡°I¡¯m afraid that before this drill began, you have never thought that you would be so popr. Now, your peaceful life is about to end¡­ I know that you are a person who doesn¡¯t like trouble,¡± The director poured a ss of water for Jon and said. ¡°I feel that you¡¯re gloating?¡± Jon drank a mouthful of water to moisten his throat. ¡°I¡¯m not. But during this exercise, you didn¡¯t disappoint me. You did a lot of things that people didn¡¯t expect.¡± ¡°But, because your performance was too outstanding, the police was a little embarrassed. This time the police had embarrassed themselves in front of the entire United States,¡± the director said slowly. Jon said, ¡°Then this has nothing to do with me. I¡¯m just thinking about how to act as a robber. As for what the police will do, it¡¯s not within my consideration.¡± After all, the police and the robber were opposite. When a robber¡¯s performance was amazing and became more and more brilliant, it would set off the police¡¯s ipetence and embarrass the police correspondingly. This was inevitable. ¡°So now, do you regret it?¡± Jon asked. ¡°Regret it¡­ at least I made the right choice.¡± The director drank a mouthful of water and said slowly, ¡°Look at them. Each and everyone of them treated the exercise as a joke.¡± ¡°No one thought of doing this properly. Everyone was acting perfunctory. Even when a hostage was killed in the beginning, many people didn¡¯t realize how serious the matter was.¡± ¡°But now, you¡¯ve made them lose all their face. You¡¯ve taught them a lesson.¡± ¡°Based on this, I know that my choice is right! It¡¯s so right!¡± ¡°Cough.¡± The sheriff heard the director¡¯s words. He couldn¡¯t hold back his expression and coughed lightly to ease the tension. Rum also heard it, but he could only pretend that he didn¡¯t hear it. What else could he do? The director¡¯s words were not wrong. Before the start of the drill, each of them had a perfunctory attitude. Later on, they were continuously pped in the face by Jon. They were not as good as him, so they could not say anything to refute him. ¡°Although the drill this time caused the police to lose face, but correspondingly, they also found many problems. The purpose of the drill can be considered to have been achieved.¡± The director stood up and said, ¡°Let¡¯s go. Let¡¯s return to the Bureau of Investigation first. Now that you have be a celebrity, who knows how many reporters are waiting to interview you.¡± ¡°Can I reject it?¡± Jon rubbed the space between his eyebrows. In the end, he was still a person who was afraid of trouble. epting an interview from a reporter was definitely a troublesome matter. If this matter could bring benefits, it would be fine. But what benefits could it bring by letting a reporter interview? Fame? He didn¡¯tck fame at the moment and didn¡¯t really care about these so-called fame. As they spoke, the two of them had already left the RV. There weren¡¯t many people following them from a few meters away. ¡°epting an interview with a reporter will also allow the aftermath of this drill to spread even wider. At the same time, it will also allow the situation where the police was ashamed to exert its greatest impact. This is something that some of the big shots in the higher-ups are very happy to see.¡± ¡°Are you sure you don¡¯t want any interview?¡± The director lowered his voice and said. Higher-ups? Big shot? At this moment, Jon¡¯s nerves tensed up slightly. His brain was spinning rapidly. Behind this exercise, there was a game going on among the higher-ups. Some people were happy to see the police lose face, but correspondingly, there were also people who were not happy to see it. The attitude of people who are happy to see it cannot bepletely certain. However, those who were not happy to see it might already see him as a thorn in their side. Jon narrowed his eyes and said, ¡°Then, are the big shots satisfied with my performance this time?¡± ¡°Of course they are.¡± The director said, ¡°However, there is a chance to make them more satisfied now. Why not doing that?¡± Making them more satisfied also meant making the other group of people more disgusted or even hateful. Since he was involved in the high-ups game, he would not be able to escape so easily. However, Jon did not n to think about this for the time being. He only wanted the file from three years ago. ¡°Then, the file?¡± Jon asked. The director was silent for a moment. He sighed and said, ¡°Even if you don¡¯t let the reporters interview, I will still give it to you.¡± Hearing this, Jon also went silent for a moment. He nodded and said, ¡°I¡¯ll go.¡± An hourter¡­ FBI conference room. As a member of the FBI, Jon naturally hade to the conference room countless times. Chapter 51 - Another Real Show?!

Chapter 51: Another Real Show?!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio But this time, it was different from before. Now, not only was he a member of the FBI, but he was also a very popr public figure. ¡°Hello, everyone. I¡¯m Jon, who yed the role of the robber in this drill.¡± Jon sat on the main seat of the stage and looked at the reporters below the stage. He said calmly. The director, sheriff, Rum, and others sat on either side of him. In the audience, a few police officers were maintaining order. This time they were conducting an interview in the FBI. It was very formal. In such an asion, the media that wanted to enter naturally had to be screened. Some unscrupulous media simply could not enter. This time the reporters from the city television station were among them. They had started their live broadcast now. Many people across the United States were watching this live broadcast. The number of viewers in the live broadcast room was a total of ten million. It was obvious that Jon¡¯s poprity did not drop even after the drill. ¡°I see Jon again. Ahhh, he¡¯s still so handsome. I can¡¯t take it anymore. I¡¯ll wet myself first.¡± ¡°Good guy, I call him good guy. Do you eject when you¡¯re wet?¡± ¡°F*ck, what are you guys doing? You want to show off here? A bunch of old perverts.¡± ¡°I¡¯m new here. May I ask if this is the robber¡¯s impersonator, Jon? He looks different from the rough and fierce-looking robber I remember.¡± ¡°Don¡¯tpare those ordinary robbers to Jon. Jon is a highly intelligent robber. He¡¯s not someone who can be ckmailed.¡± ¡°But because of this drill, Jon is famous. I saw that in the past two days, all the major television stations and the Inte have been reporting on this matter.¡± ¡°Not only that. Its coverage isn¡¯t that small. Not only in the United States, but oversea media had started reporting it.¡± ¡°I also heard that the process of Jon robbing Blue Bank has been studied by the police in many countries. It has even been listed as a textbook.¡± ¡°That time when he robbed Blue bank? It was too shocking. I¡¯m still a little shocked when I think about it.¡± ¡°This exercise is over. When will be the next one? I can¡¯t wait.¡± ¡°Yeah, I hope that the relevant departments will start next exercise as soon as possible. I want to watch Jon¡¯s various shows.¡± ¡°I want to watch +1.¡± The bulletments in the live broadcast room were very lively. One of the views was very popr: the audience had not seen enough. They hoped that Jon would participate in another drill and act as a robber. Regarding this kind of call, the officials from other ces in the United States had also taken note of it. After many considerations, some officials had already started to post on Twitter, indicating that they wanted to invite Jon. Just as the audience was in a heated discussion, the director said, ¡°Now, dear reporters, you can raise your hands and ask questions.¡± The director¡¯s voice was transmitted through the microphone to every corner of the conference room. As soon as he finished speaking, the reporters present raised their hands. Next, it was time for the Q&A session between Jon and the reporters. After all, those unscrupulous reporters had already been screened out. Those who could enter had some professional ethics and knew what to ask and what not to ask. And when he answered the questions, Jon also disyed his high IQ and high EQ. After the reporters from the major media finished asking questions, it was the turn for the reporter from the city television station. The reporter asked, ¡°Mr. Jon, theizens are saying that they haven¡¯t seen enough and want to see you act as a robber again.¡± ¡°Moreover, the police or even some government in several ces have already posted on Twitter that they want to invite you to participate in the drill.¡± ¡°Will you participate in another drill and act as a robber?¡± The reporter was very beautiful, and her voice was very gentle. Hearing this question, Jon fell silent. If it was before, he would answer without hesitation that he would not participate in any drill and would not act as a robber anymore. However, the system binding made his choice change. After all, who would be willing to go against the system reward? And at this moment, a ¡®ding¡¯ sounded in his mind. ¡°Mission received: participate in next drill and act as a robber. Afterpleting the mission, the system will give out rewards based on the host¡¯s performance score. The higher the score, the more generous the reward,¡± the system¡¯s cold voice sounded. At this moment, Jon¡¯s blood surged. Even though he already had five million US dors and didn¡¯t care much about money, but the reward forpleting the system mission would not just be money. It might include all sorts of skills, attribute points, and points that couldn¡¯t be bought no matter how much money one had. No matter who it was, not even politicians from all walks of life, higher-ups of financial groups, or even the president of the United States could buy it! Jon had already made a decision in his heart at this moment. ¡°A real drill will be able to discover many problems, allowing the police to avoid making the same mistakes in actualbat.¡± ¡°I can¡¯t say that this drill is meaningful because of me. However, I can guarantee that my serious attitude towards the drill will not change when I have the opportunity to participate in another drill again in the future!¡± ¡°If the police or some local government invites me to participate in second drill, I will agree and participate seriously,¡± Jon faced the camera and spoke these words righteously. Instantly, apuse rang out from the audience. The director, sheriff, Rum, and others also pped their hands from the bottom of their hearts. Jon¡¯s words received their approval and the approval of everyone present. At the same time, he also received approval of theizens in front of the screen. ¡°Oh my God, is this Jon? Not only is he handsome, but he¡¯s also so good at talking. How did his tongue grow? I really want to experience it properly.¡± ¡°D*mn, if my guess is right, the earlier ones is turning lustful again. Pay attention to the asion.¡± ¡°This is a person with high IQ. His summary is really urate.¡± ¡°Not arrogant, not impatient and modest. Good job, Jon.¡± The bulletments were full of praise. As time passed, the interview with Jon finally came to an end. Then, Jon followed the director to his office. The director took out two stacks of US dors and ced them on the table, ¡°This 20,000 US dors is yourbor fee. You deserve it.¡± Seeing this, Jon did not decline and epted the money. Although he was not short of money now, this was what he deserved. So, why not? He epted the 20,000 US dors. Jon looked at the director and did not say anything. The director sighed. He took out a file from the drawer. ¡°This is the file you wanted.¡± Jon reached out to take the file. The file was not heavy, but when it fell into Jon¡¯s hands, he felt like it weighed a thousand pounds. Jon¡¯s throat moved involuntarily. In a trance, the time went back to three years ago where he was on a mission with his brothers. Chapter 52 - Information Erased, Investigation Interrupted!

Chapter 52: Information Erased, Investigation Interrupted!

They had nned the mission for a month before it was carried out. During that time, they had made almost perfect preparations. The preparations they had made, no one could find fault with them in any way. It could be said that they had made no mistakes! But when they actually acted¡­ It was a fiasco. It was the only mission he hadn¡¯tpleted since joining the SEALs. When performing that mission, the opponent seemed to have insight into all their ns in advance and dug a hole for them to jump into one by one. As a result, all his brothers were killed, and he, too, barely escaped with his life. He knew that there was a mole on his side. The mole told the target of their n, thus led to their defeat. And the mole was not one of his brothers. It was a high-ranking official who was involved. He told the leader about the mission n. There were many high-ranking officials who knew about the mission n, but he did not know who betrayed them. That was why he wanted to investigate. The real reason he wanted this file was he wanted to start investigation from the very beginning. After that, Jon opened the file in the director¡¯s office. The moment he opened it, his heart sank. The first thing he saw were a few long ck blocks. A lot of information in this file had been erased. And the parts that had not been erased were the process of their mission and the results, which were not important. He suddenly raised his head and looked at the director. At this moment, he even felt that the director had deliberately tampered with it. The purpose was to stop him from continuing to investigate. The director seemed to see through Jon¡¯s thoughts and shook his head, ¡°I don¡¯t need to do that. It¡¯s not as simple as you think. Since the person behind it has betrayed you, he won¡¯t stupidly leave the relevant information and wait for people to investigate.¡± ¡°Erasing some important or not-so-important information to eliminate some potential risks is perfectly normal.¡± Jon¡¯s heart sank to the bottom. He stared nkly at the document filled with ck blocks. He was extremely unwilling. ¡°All I can do is give this document to you. I can¡¯t do much else.¡± The director said slowly, ¡°But through this exercise, your performance has entered the eyes of some big shots. They have seen your value and praise you.¡± ¡°Next, these big shots will arrange another exercise soon. If you continue to perform to their satisfaction, they may provide you with the information you want.¡± ¡°Next, I¡¯ll give you two days off. Go back and rest well.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Jon nodded and didn¡¯t say anything else. The director of the FBI might be a very high position in the eyes of some people. But in the eyes of the real big shots, he was only a low-level official. So, there were many things that the director didn¡¯t have the authority to know. Jon ced the document on the director¡¯s desk and turned to leave. Along the way, his colleagues looked at him with surprise, baffle, envy, jealousy, disdain, and so on. Jon did not care. He returned to his rented house. Jon nned to study his system. In addition to the skills, money and attribute points awarded by the system, there were also 500 points. And these 500 points could be used to buy things in the system store. The system store had a lot of goods, from daily necessities to all kinds of guns, and even medicine. It could be said that everything was avable. And the points had another use, which was to level up skills. Of course, different skills and levels required different points. Different amounts were required, for example, though both were low-level skill, 1,000 points were required to upgrade the god-level lock picking skill while 1,500 points were required to upgrade the aura of a police. And Jon could not upgrade any skills with his current points. However, he did not n to upgrade his skills for the time being. After all, he didn¡¯t need to upgrade his skills now, and the points might be useful. As time passed, just as Jon was about to go out for dinner¡­ Bang! There was a knock on the door. It wasn¡¯t his old friends as they wouldn¡¯te at this hour. And even if they did, they would contact him beforeing. And his social situation was terrible. Other than his old friends, no one woulde. So, who was the one knocking on the door? Jon became slightly cautious. ¡°Who?¡± He asked. ¡°Mr. Jon.¡± A familiar voice sounded from outside the door. Jon was stunned. He remembered this voice. It was the female reporter from the city television station who had interviewed him. Jon opened the door and saw the beautiful woman standing outside. Unlike her previous attire, the woman was not wearing work clothes. She was wearing a thin beige jacket and tight jeans, which entuated her sexy figure. Her blonde hair was not tied up. It fell naturally to her slender waist. Her eyes were bright and her fair face was covered with exquisite makeup. This woman was indeed very beautiful. She was not even inferior to some celebrities. The woman smiled when she saw him. It was not a professional smile during the interview. Instead, she appeared very rxed, as if she was treating a friend. ¡°Why are you here?¡± Jon was a little puzzled. The interview was already over. Why did this reporter stille over? ¡°It¡¯s¡­ It¡¯s the director who told me that you live here. Um¡­ Can i¡­ buy you a meal?¡± The woman stood at the door and looked at Jon. Her expression was a little awkward, and it was very different from the image of apetent reporter in the afternoon. ¡°Meal?¡± Jon was slightly startled. Obviously, he did not expect this woman to actually treat him to a meal. Then, he smiled and said, ¡°Sure.¡± Anyway, he was prepared to go for a meal. Furthermore, from the look in the woman¡¯s eyes, it seemed like she was interested in him, so he did not mind making contact with her. The two of them walked on the sidewalk. ¡°Um, do you know because of your serious attitude, the live broadcast of this drill that I broadcasted has already broken the live broadcast records of all the television stations in the country?¡± The woman had to raise her face when she Spoke as Jon was a head taller than her. Under the streetlight, Jon saw that the woman¡¯s eyes were shing with excitement. ¡°Is that so? Then congrattions.¡± Jon smiled. ¡°How long have you worked at the city television station?¡± Jon found a topic to ask. They were just chatting. Even if there was no topic to talk about, he had to find a topic. Otherwise, the atmosphere would be awkward. ¡°It¡¯s been three years. After graduation, I entered the city television station,¡± the woman replied softly. ¡°Three years¡­ three years¡­¡± Jon¡¯s thoughts flew out again. During that time, he and his brothers should be making n for that mission three years ago, right? At that moment which was three years ago¡­ He and his brothers did not realize at all that the next mission they were going to carry out had almost killed them all! Chapter 53 Beautiful Female Reporter! 53 Beautiful Female Reporter! "You seem to be very sad?" As a reporter, a woman''s senses were naturally very sensitive. Moreover, through the slight change in Jon''s gaze, she noticed that he was sad. Jon smiled. "I remember something from many years ago." He did not confide his feelings to the woman in front of him. Because the two had only juste into contact. He could not tell her everything. The woman naturally knew that Jon was a man with a story through his eyes and the change in his expression. This kind of man somewhat fascinated her. And made her curious. At this moment, the woman had an urgent impulse to go into Jon''s heart and find out what was going on. But in the end, she just nodded. She did not ask anything else. Since he was not willing to say anything more, an understanding person would know what question shouldn''t be asked. "Oh right, I still don''t know your name?" Jon asked softly. Perhaps the past had touched his heartstrings, but at this moment, his voice was full of warmth. "Gal Gadot, just like that actress from our country." The evening wind blew through Gal Gadot''s hair. She tucked a strand of hair behind her ear that blocked her view. Jon lowered his head slightly to look at her and said, "But you''re prettier than her." Gal Gadot was slightly stunned, as if she did not expect him to say such apliment. For a moment, she felt a little happy. In fact, the reason why she went to the director to ask about Jon''s address was she apparently had a good impression of him. Otherwise, she had interviewed so many males, and other than Jon, she had never asked about anyone''s address. Even before this, she had very little personal contact with guys. When she was in school, there were many people who pursued her. After graduation, she entered the television station, and her fame gradually rose, and her social circle became wider. There were many suitors. Some of them were the rich kid of rich families. But Gal Gadot was indifferent to them and rejected all the suitors. Until she met Jon this time. Jon''s performance in the exercise and his response in the interview were deeply imprinted in her mind. She couldn''t get them out of her mind. So, she came here and nned to treat Jon to dinner. Gal Gadot was not as lively as most American women. She was even a little shy. She had mustered up a lot of courage toe in front of him. Slowly, a smile appeared on the corner of Gal Gadot''s mouth. "Thank you." Jon smiled as well. "Since you''re treating today, you can decide on the ce." "How about a steak?" Gal Gadot smiled. Jon nodded. "Any food is fine. I''m not picky." In the Navy SEALs, when Jon was on a mission, he would usually take food from the ground. Sometimes, when there was nothing left to eat, the bugs could still be eaten. Even though he was living in the city now and had received the five million USD reward from the system, he did not have to worry about food and clothing. He was far from eating bugs, but he was indeed not picky. Then, under the lead of Gal Gadot, the two of them came to the door of a western restaurant. The restaurant was very high-end, beautifully decorated, and of ssy style. There were a few homeless not far from the door. Seeing the two of them, their eyes lit up, and they walked over one after another. "Please do us a favor, handsome sir, beautifuldy, we haven''t eaten for a few days." Following the arrival of the few vagrants. The air was filled with the faint stench of body odor. The few homeless were a little hunched. Their beards were long, and their hair was messy. It was obvious that they had not cleaned up for many days. "Let''s go in." However, Jon did not seem to have heard what the homeless said. He could tell that although these people were hunched, they were all faking it. They did not have any problems with their legs. Moreover, they were around forty years old. In this society, no matter what they did, it was better than begging. But they chose to reap without sowing. Moreover, they were very clever. They knew that people who came to this kind of restaurant were all rtively rich, and generally wouldn''t care about the money given to the homeless. Jon usually hated such people the most. "They''re very pitiful." Gal Gadot couldn''t bear it. She wanted to take out some money to give to the few homeless men in front of her, but she was pulled by Jon''s wrist. He was pulled into the restaurant. Outside the restaurant, the few homeless men were in a daze, as if they did not expect that they would not get the money this time. The few of them stared at the two people in the restaurant for a while. One of the homeless men spat angrily and said, "Sh*t!" western gods. 16:50 Then to the Middle Ages, the Age of Discovery, modern times and so on. In the restaurant. Jon and Gal Gadot sat in front of each other. Gal Gadot ordered a steak and a bottle of red wine. The waiter served the red wine. Gal Gadot opened the bottle and poured two sses. "Did you feel that my behavior just now was a little cold?" Jon took a sip of the red wine and said softly. Gal Gadot shook her head. "I didn''t think that way. It was in your head." Jon said, "These people are very healthy, and they are only about forty years old. They can work and can obtain money throughbor. But they chose to beg." "Actually, I just feel that they are pitiful, so I have the idea to give them money. I think you are right." Gal Gadot said. "Are they pitiful? Maybe." Jon said, "There is an old saying in the east, that a hateful person must have something pitiful." "PFFT." Gal Gadot pursed her lips and chuckled. She corrected him, "A pitiful person must have something hateful. Do you like the eastern culture very much?" Jon nodded gently. "That country in the east has walked through the long river of history. Although it has experienced many ups and downs, there has never been a fault. It can be said that it has been glorious for thousands of years. It is indeed fascinating enough." "Yes, I also like that country very much. I had nned to visit that country when I had the time." The two of them changed the topic from the homeless without a trace. The restaurant was a high-ss ce. It should be romantic for a man and a woman to get along. If the topic was all about the homeless, it would be more or less a killjoy. While chatting, Gal Gadot thought of the scene in front of the restaurant again. She was thinking, if it were those men who pursued her, they would certainly show their gentlemanly manners at that time, right? Giving money to the homeless and then talking to them to show their manners? But Jon did not do that. He did not deliberately show anything in front of her, everything was so natural. His temperament was real, not pretentious. The two ate for a full two hours during the meal. And during the meal, the conversation between the two did not stop. Their topics ranged from eastern culture to eastern mythology, and then from eastern mythology to western gods. Then to the Middle Ages, the Age of Discovery, modern times and so on. They had very good chemistry. Chapter 54 - Evil Homeless Men, Master-level Fighting Technique!

Chapter 54: Evil Homeless Men, Master-level Fighting Technique!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The steak was finished, and the red wine was finished. Gal Gadot paid the bill. Jon did not rush to take the bill. This meal was originally meant to be treated by Gal Gadot. Of course, he was not that ungentlemanly. There would always be a chance for him to treat Gal Gadot to a dinner in the future. The two of them left the restaurant. ¡°Then I have to go back.¡± Gal Gadot said softly. Under the streetlight, her face was flushed because of alcohol. ¡°Okay.¡± Jon nodded. When Gal Gadot said this, it naturally meant that there was no further progress between the two of them tonight. However, he didn¡¯t care about this. Gal Gadot was different from the Mary he met previously. Jon nned to go to the street and stop a taxi for Gal Gadot. However, he was surrounded by a group of people before he could go far. It was those few homeless men. ¡°Bastard, your actions make us very unhappy.¡± These homeless men stood in front of the two of them. They were holding wooden sticks in their hands, and their figures were no longer stooped. They were all tall and sturdy. Under the moonlight, they gave off a great sense of oppression. One of the homeless men looked at Jon with a cold smile on his face. Seeing this, Gal Gadot was a little scared, and her hands couldn¡¯t help but grab Jon¡¯s arms. Jon looked at these homeless men. His eyes narrowed slightly. This group of homeless was definitely not to be underestimated. Although they didn¡¯t work, they would cause many troubles. In the United States, they have the highest crime rate. On the surface, they may seem pitiful, but they are found in every city, day and night, year in and year out. They are out in the cold, they are out in the heat. But behind closed doors. In ces where most people can¡¯t see, some of these peoplemit crimes. They would rob a family, smash and burn certain things, and even rape women who walked alone at night. But now, these homeless had provoked him. ¡°B*stard, didn¡¯t you hear me? If you kneel down and kowtow immediately and take out all your money, we might let you go.¡± The homeless who had spoken earlier spoke again. There was a long scar on his face, and it was terrifying. ¡°Are you sure you want me to kneel down and kowtow, and then take out my own money?¡± Jon said, feeling that the homeless man¡¯s idea was extremelyughable. ¡°HMM?¡± The scar-faced man¡¯s expression was somewhat surprised, because he did not see any fear or fear on Jon¡¯s face. It seemed that Jon was very confident. He did not understand where this confidence came from. He felt that Jon was pretending to be calm, pretending to be mysterious. Thinking of this, the scar-faced man grinned, tugging at the scar on his face, making his face look even more ferocious. He said, ¡°Kid, I gave you a chance just now. Now, not only do you have to kneel down and take out the money, but you also have to leave yourdy friend here. She is so beautiful, and her body must be very gorgeous.¡± He looked at Gal Gadot, with a perverted look on his face. At the same time, the other homeless men also stared at Gal Gadot. Their gazes were extremely aggressive, and they wanted to eat her up. Seeing this, Gal Gadot¡¯s body slightly trembled, and she even tightly grabbed Jon¡¯s arm. Even her chest was pressed against Jon¡¯s arm. ¡°Are you sure that if I do this, you can let me go?¡± Jon said, as if he waspromising. ¡°Let you go? Of course.¡± The scar-faced man said. As soon as he finished speaking, the other homeless all let out a lowugh. It was impossible to let him go. Because this kid made them very unhappy. Not only would they not let him go, but they would also torture him to death. And this woman. They were going to toy with her to death. After all, these homeless had killed more than one person. Two more wouldn¡¯t be a big deal. And here, the location was remote and there were no cameras. After killing the two of them, and then dump the bodies, who would find out? Even if they were investigated. At most, they could escape New York and live in another city. That would be great. These homeless men did not intend to let Jon off. The reason they said they would let him off was to toy with Jon. ¡°Very good.¡± Jon closed his eyes, just as scar-faced man thought he would kneel down in the next moment. The next moment. Jon raised a foot. He kicked scar-faced man in the chest. This kick caught him off guard. The scar-faced man did not think that Jon would dare to make a move. He did not even have the time to react. ¡°Bang!¡± The scar-faced man was sent flying several meters away by this kick. He crashed heavily into a tree, and blood seeped out of the corner of his mouth. He coughed violently, as if he wanted to carve his lungs out. ¡°Sh*t, cough... son of a b*tch... attack him, cough cough... kill him for me.¡± The scar-faced man felt that a few of his ribs had been broken by this kick, and the pain was spreading throughout his body. His eyes were filled with intense hatred. At this moment, he only wanted Jon to die. ¡°Kid, you had a chance to live, but you brought it on yourself.¡± The other homeless men gripped the wooden stick in his hand tightly, and then smashed it down on Jon¡¯s head. Jon easily blocked the stick attack. He grabbed the wooden stick with force and swung it at the top of the homeless¡¯s head. Bang! The homeless was hit by the wooden stick until he was dizzy, as if his brain was about to shatter. He lost his bnce and fell to the ground, twitching. He could not even get up. This stick really stunned the other homeless men who wanted to make a move. They did not expect Jon to be so skilled, and they also did not expect him to be so ruthless? The rod hit his head. He was going for his life! ¡°Sh*t! Cough cough... What are you standing there for... Cough... all of you, attack him and kill him!¡± Seeing this, the scar-faced man covered his chest and stood up, shouting angrily. The few homeless men looked at each other and roared, attacking Jon and Gal Gadot together. ¡°Ah!¡± When Gal Gadot saw this scene, she was so scared that she immediately closed her eyes. In the end, she was just a young reporter, a little girl. Even though she had seen some of the world, she had never experienced such a life-threatening scene. She was very scared at this moment. And when she closed her eyes, she only heard a few bangs around her, and then the sounds of fighting disappeared. There were only painful moans. Gal Gadot tried to open her eyes, and the scene before her stunned her. She saw a few homeless men lying on the ground, writhing in pain. Painful moans came from their mouths! Chapter 55 - Teach the Homeless Men A Lesson

Chapter 55: Teach the Homeless Men A Lesson

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Gal Gadot was stunned. This... This was all done by Jon? This was too unbelievable. Gal Gadot could hardly believe what she had seen. Through the drill, she knew that Jon was a highly intelligent person. It could be said that he nned everything meticulously. And the scene in front of her made her realize that not only was Jon highly intelligent, but hisbat skill was also very good. After all, he had single-handedly taken care of a few homeless men with a wooden stick. And he only used one hand. His other hand... was still wrapped in her arms. Only then did Gal Gadot realize that she was hugging Jon¡¯s arm because the situation just now was too dangerous. When she hugged Jon¡¯s arm, it was a subconscious action that even he did not realize at that time. But now, after the danger was over, Gal Gadot naturally noticed her action. Looking at her chest being squeezed by the man¡¯s arm and almost bursting her clothes, Gal Gadot¡¯s face turned even redder. She quickly let go of his arm. Jon instantly felt his arm be lighter, and the wonderful feeling on his arm instantly disappeared. This made him feel slightly regretful. Jon¡¯s gaze swept over the group of homeless men. ¡°Gentlemen, the next time you want to attack someone, you must take a careful look to see if the other party is tough.¡± If he had met this group of people before, he would have been able to deal with them. After all, his years in the Navy SEALs team had not been wasted, and he had learned a whole set of fighting skills. However, it would have been very difficult for him to deal with this group of people before he joined SEALs, and he might have been injured. After all, these were a group of people with strong bodies. However, after receiving the system¡¯s reward. Hisbat skills had been upgraded to master level. Now, dealing with this group of people was just a warm-up for him. Then, he came in front of the scar-faced man and teased, ¡°You seem to be a little unwilling?¡± ¡°No, sir, I¡¯m very willing. I¡¯ve realized my mistake. You taught me the right thing. I promise I won¡¯t take revenge on you.¡± The scar-faced man hurriedly lowered his head, not letting the hatred in his eyes be detected by Jon. But in his heart, he was thinking that he must take revenge, and he must take revenge ruthlessly. ¡°Hehe.¡± Jon could naturally sense his thoughts. In the next moment, without warning, he kicked the scar-faced man¡¯s chest again. This kick was heavier than the previous one. Since the other party wanted to kill him, Jon would not hold back. If he did not have this fighting technique, then this night would definitely be very miserable for him. Moreover. Just because Jon did not want to give his money, this group of homeless men dared to kill him without second thought. They were the scum in society, so it was better to teach them some cruel lessons. A heavy kick. The scar-faced man fell a few meters away. He could not even let out a scream. He struggled a few times but could not get up. Then, Jon ignored these people. He came in front of Gal Gadot and said, ¡°Let¡¯s go, ma¡¯am.¡± Gal Gadot followed behind Jon. Her eyes kept looking at him. Her eyes shed like the stars in the sky. She felt that this man was full of charm. Simrly, walking beside him gave her an unprecedented sense of security. Soon. Jon hailed a taxi by the roadside. Gal Gadot hesitated for a moment and said, ¡°Do you want to send me off?¡± Jon thought for a moment. It was already sote, and there were very few people. Moreover, Gal Gadot had drunk some alcohol and was a little tipsy. The taxi driver was also a man. It was indeed not safe to let her go home alone. ¡°I¡¯m happy to help.¡±, Jon said with a smile. They came to the residential area where Gal Gadot lived, and the two walked to the downstairs of Gal Gadot¡¯s house. ¡°Jon.¡± Gal Gadot called out to Jon, who had turned around to leave. Jon turned around and was a little puzzled. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Gal Gadot suddenly came in front of him. The next moment, in his slightly constricted pupils. Gal Gadot put her hands around Jon¡¯s neck. She kissed him. After she reacted, Jon gave her a warm response. His hands were also moving restlessly. Just as his hands were about to reach into Gal Gadot¡¯s clothes. Gal Gadot suddenly let go of him and took a few steps back. ¡°I... I¡¯m going back.¡± Gal Gadot lowered her head, not daring to look at him. After all, her personality was not as passionate and unrestrained as most American women. To be able to take the initiative to kiss Jon, this was the boldest move she had made in more than twenty years. It was also because of the effects of alcohol messing up her brain, and she had just experienced a near-death experience. She was somewhat impressed by Jon¡¯s performance. After all, women worshiped heroes. ¡°Good night, then.¡±, Jon said. ¡°Good night, Jon.¡±, Gal Gadot said, then quickly went upstairs. Then Jon left as well. He only took a few steps before he was stopped again. ¡°Jon.¡± Jon turned around again. Gal Gadot stood under the streetlight, looking a little helpless. ¡°I forgot to bring my keys when I went out, so I couldn¡¯t open the door. I called the lockpickingpany, and they said that they would be here in half an hour. Can you stay with me for a while?¡± ¡°You forgot to bring your keys?¡± Jon walked back and said, ¡°Let me have a look.¡± ¡°Ah?¡±, Gal Gadot was stunned, not understanding what he meant. ¡°I know some lock-picking skills. Maybe I can help you open it,¡±, Jon exined. ¡°You know how to open locks?¡± Gal Gadot was a little surprised. ¡°Well, after all, during the drill, I yed a robber. How could a robber not know how to open locks? So I learned some lock-picking at that time.¡± Jon said. ¡°You¡¯re really dedicated, Jon.¡± Gal Gadot said. Then, she brought Jon to his house. Jon looked at the door lock and said, ¡°I can open it. One minute.¡± Jon squatted down and opened the system store at the same time. He used one point to buy a piece of iron wire. After all, he was not a god. Even though he had low-level l lock-picking skills, he could not open locks out of thin air. To pick a lock, one needed a tool. Then, under the watchful eyes of Gal Gadot, Jon reached into his pocket and took out a piece of iron wire. In reality, he had taken out this piece of iron wire from the system store, and the reason why he put it in his pocket was naturally a smokescreen. Otherwise... If a piece of iron wire appeared out of thin air in his hand... It would be a little hard to exin. Then, Jon took the iron wire and started to fiddle with the lock. In less than a minute... ¡°Ka!¡± A crisp sound came from the lock. The door opened. Gal Gadot was a little surprised. He actually seeded in picking the lock. And it only took less than a minute. There was once when she forgot to bring the key and called the people from the lock-pickingpany. They took more than ten minutes to open it. Inparison. The people from the lock-pickingpany werepletely defeated by Jon! ¡°Your lock-picking skill is simply too amazing. Now I even suspect that you¡¯re a great thief.¡± Gal Gadot said. Then, he invited Jon in and poured him a ss of water. ¡°This kind of lock is not difficult to open. What is really difficult to open is the safe in the bank.¡± Jon replied. Chapter 56 - Commissioner鈥檚 invitation

Chapter 56: Chapter 56: Commissioner¡¯s invitation

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Gal Gadot was slightly taken aback. Yes,pared to the safes in the bank, the locks in her own house were nothing. After all, Jon had learned lockpicking skills for the bank robbery. But then again, it only took him three days to prepare. In the meantime, he not only perfectly nned the bank robbery, but also learned a lockpicking skill? That was amazing. This man was amazing! If Jon managed to open the lock, then he should go. In fact, Gal Gadot did not want Jon to go back, but if he stayed, it would be inevitable that something would happen to the two of them. Gal Gadot could only reluctantly watch Jon leave. Before Jon left, she asked Jon out to hang out tomorrow. Since it was the weekend, she didn¡¯t have to go to work, so she could freely allocate her time. The next day. The two of them strolled around together for a day, leaving their footprints at the amusement park, the yground, and a certain scenic spot. During the strolling, the rtionship between the two also quickly heated up. Physical contact also increased, but they didn¡¯t make the final step. Jon and Gal Gadot parted, and when they returned home, it was already midnight. Even though his physical fitness was different from ordinary people, he felt a little tired at this time. After a simple wash, Jony on the bed and fell into a deep sleep. The next morning. Jon came to the FBI. Before he arrived at his office. He was called over by the director. In the director¡¯s office. ¡°How was your rest?¡±, the director asked. ¡°How should I put it? It would be even better if you gave me two more days off.¡± Jon yawned and replied. ¡°I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t give you two days off for the time being.¡± The director sipped his tea slowly and said, ¡°Ever since your drill became popr, many local police departments want to invite you to helpplete a drill and point out the problems for them.¡± ¡°Yesterday, themissioner of the Pennsylvania State Police Department personally called me and said that he woulde to see you. He should be here in the morning.¡± ¡°He said that he wanted to see you, but in fact, the purpose is obvious. They want to carry out a drill and invite you to act as a robber.¡± ¡°But you agreed at the press conference if there¡¯s a chance to act as a robber again, you¡¯ll do it. There is one now.¡± ¡°And...¡± At this point, the director paused and nced at Jon. Jon focused. ¡°And the big shots of the higher ups definitely hope that you can continue to embarrass the police. Since you want to investigate the incident three years ago, I suggest you take this opportunity.¡± Jon nodded slowly, indicating that he knew what he was doing. He walked out of the director¡¯s office. Jon returned to his office. He did not know themissioner of Pennsylvania, so the purpose of meeting him was very obvious, just as the director said. If it was for a drill, he could not refuse the invitation that was about to arrive. First, he wanted to investigate the incident three years ago and find out who leaked the information, causing them to be almost wiped out. But now, the important information on the files that he had ess to had already been erased. With the resources that he currently had, he could no longer continue to investigate. And if he wanted to continue investigating, he had to get the help of certain people. And those important people were not rted to him, so what right did they have to help him? He could only show his worth. Secondly, the system released a reward for him to y the role of a robber afterpleting the mission. Although he did not know what it was yet, the reward from the system was definitely extraordinary. He could not refuse it at all. After thinking carefully, Jon gave Gal Gadot a call. ¡°Hi, Jon?¡± On the other side, Gal Gadot¡¯s voice carried some doubt. ¡°Themissioner of Pennsylvania ising this morning. He invited me to participate in a drill. You shoulde as well.¡± Jon did not waste any time and said directly. Themissioner¡¯s personal invitation was definitely big news. Since it was going to be exposed sooner orter, it was better to give this news to Gal Gadot. ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll go over now.¡± Gal Gadot instantly understood Jon¡¯s intention. Before Gal Gadot arrived, themissioner of Pennsylvania had already arrived. The director invited him to his office. Naturally, Jon was also in the director¡¯s office. ¡°I used to see Jon on the screen, but today I saw him in person. He¡¯s indeed dignified.¡± Themissioner said with a smile. ¡°You tter me, sir.¡±, Jon said, his attitude neither servile nor overbearing. As he spoke, his eyes were sizing up themissioner. He was about the same age as the director, but he was a little thinner than the director. After exchanging pleasantries for a while. Gal Gadot sent a message to Jon, indicating that she had arrived at the entrance of the FBI. ¡°Director, I invited reporter Gal Gadot just now. She is now outside the door.¡± Jon said. The director was stunned for a moment, then an inexplicable smile appeared on his face. ¡°Two days ago, Miss Gal Gadot asked me for your address. Today, you¡¯re going to give her such a big piece of news. What happened during this period?¡± Jon looked at the director¡¯s expression, which was as if he wanted to know some gossip and rubbed his be. How could he tell what exactly happened to the director? Of course, that was impossible. ¡°Let her in.¡±, the director said. Jon sent a message to Gal Gadot, who quickly came in. No one felt that it was inappropriate for this reporter from the city television station toe in. In any case, this news was bound to spread sooner orter. Even themissioner of Pennsylvania agreed to let Gal Gadot stay here. After all, he wanted to spread the news that he had invited Jon to practice as soon as possible. Of course, the prerequisite was that Jon agreed to the invitation. So, it wasn¡¯t a big deal to give this exclusive to Gal Gadot. Moreover, he could see that Jon¡¯s rtionship with this woman wasn¡¯t simple. Letting Gal Gadot stay here would also increase the chances of Jon agreeing. This was killing two birds with one stone. ¡°Alright, now, let¡¯s get to the point.¡± They exchanged pleasantries for a while. Themissioner slowly said, ¡°I think you all know the purpose of my visit this time. I¡¯m here to invite Jon to Pennsylvania to assist the police in conducting a police drill.¡± ¡°The drill that our police department conducting is bigger and more realistic in every aspect than this one.¡± ¡°And this time, we n to assign three teammates to you. You can choose any of them among the police officers. After all, there can¡¯t be only one robber in a real robbery ¡°After the drill is over, we will give you a 100,000 dor no matter what the result is.¡± ¡°What do you think, Mr. Jon?¡± Chapter 57 - Accept the Invitation And Start Picking Teammates

Chapter 57: ept the Invitation And Start Picking Teammates

Jon epted the invitation. He epted it immediately. The moment he said he was willing to participate, themissioner slowly smiled. This trip had not been in vain. Now, Jon was a big star. There were many ces in the United States that wanted to invite him to participate in the drill, and many ces had already made their voices heard through Twitter. Fortunately, he was one step ahead of them. He had personally rushed over before anyone else could make a move. And now¡­ He had also achieved his goal. ¡°I hope that when you face our Pennsylvania State police, you won¡¯t be careless.¡± Themissioner smiled. ¡°That¡¯s natural. I¡¯ll take it seriously.¡±, Jon nodded. The Pennsylvania state police, regardless of their quality, staffing, or training intensity, were better than here. Therefore, going to Pennsylvania for a drill was definitely much more difficult than going here. ordingly, Jon had to be more prepared. ¡°Haha, I¡¯m relieved. Jon, bring it on. It¡¯s best if you can give us a good lesson. As for the drill, the more problems you find, the better. This way, we can avoid them in actualbat!¡± Themissioner said, ¡°As for the details of this drill, as well as your teammates, equipment, and other issues, I¡¯ll give them to you when you arrive at our police station.¡± ¡°Also, if you have anyments or suggestions regarding this drill, you can bring them up. We¡¯ll take them as we see fit.¡± Themissioner¡¯s words were very serious. Inviting Jon to assist in the drill was naturally because of his high IQ. As for the problem of Jon performing perfectly during the drill and damaging the reputation of the police force, themissioner did not care too much about it. They were not afraid of losing face. Even if Jon tortured them to death during the drill, it would not be a problem as long as they could find the problem. Only by finding the problem could they solve the problem. Thus, they could avoid these problems in actualbat. ¡°Then, the drill should be set in ten days. I need to understand it in detail and make a n of action?¡±, Jon thought for a moment and said. Any robber with a bit of brains would know to observe all aspects before the operation. For example, the situation of the bank, the police station, the situation of the streets, the distribution of surveince cameras, and even the weather¡­ There were too many things need to be considered. As for Pennsylvania, he was almostpletely unfamiliar with it, so he naturally had to spend quite a bit of time to prepare. ¡°Then it¡¯s a deal!¡± Themissioner nodded. After all, if they were to conduct arge-scale drill, not only would the robbers, but the police would also have to make preparations. They would have to prepare a lot of things. Ten days of preparation time would also allow both sides to be prepared. ¡°After that, I will get someone to send the information of the police officers who are serious and self-disciplined to the FBI. At that time, you can choose your teammates inside.¡±, themissioner said again. ¡°Okay.¡± Jon nodded. Themissioner was quite thoughtful to allow him to choose his teammates at will. After all, teammates were extremely important in a team crime. Even if they were in the same ce, the abilities of the police officers would definitely be uneven. If the police department assigned him to a pig-like teammate, he would have nowhere to cry. Even if he had a system and a high IQ, he could not afford to be dragged down by stupid teammates. Then, themissioner made a phone call and ordered someone to send over the information of those police officers. This required a certain amount of time. It was impossible that the person on the other side could send it over immediately. After that, themissioner said, ¡°Miss Gal, now that Jon has epted our invitation for the drill, you can send out this news.¡± ¡°Also, regarding the live broadcast of this drill, I¡¯ll invite you toe as well.¡± Gal Gadot was a little surprised. She knew how explosive the live broadcast of thest drill with Jon was. For every journalist, being able to participate in such a live broadcast was an opportunity and honor. The benefits were unimaginable. And because thest drill was in this city, as a reporter of the city television station, she was invited by the director, so she could naturally get first-hand information. And she had also be the reporter who had benefited the most from the previous exercise. And this time, the drill would be carried out in Pennsylvania. Logically speaking, it should be carried out live by the local media. After all, the local resources were naturally given to the locals. But now, themissioner had given this opportunity to her. ¡°Then thank you,missioner. I will do my best to carry out the live broadcast.¡± Gal Gadot thanked him. ¡°Hehe, you don¡¯t have to thank me. If you want to thank me, thank Jon.¡± Themissioner said. The reason why he invited Gal Gadot to broadcast was not because of her ability, but it was because of Jon. There were many people with such ability in the world. There were many of them in Pennsylvania. He took this opportunity to express to Jon that he had given Jon enough face. He could even hand over such a huge profit cake to Jon¡¯s friend. In return, Jon naturally had to do his best in the drill. Jon obviously knew his intention. Gal Gadot turned to look at Jon, with a sweet smile on her face. Before the live broadcast of Jon¡¯s drill, she had stayed in the television station for three years, and she had achieved nothing. Not only did she have to endure the scolding of her boss, but she also had to be ridiculed by her colleagues for her ipetence. But all of this had changed after the live broadcast of Jon¡¯s drill. Now that she hade to work, her boss had smiled at her, and her colleagues had be friendly. Her career had changed dramatically because of Jon. After a few minutes, the Pennsylvania State Police Department sent over the information of some of the police officers. Jon, the director, and themissioner began to look through the information on theputer and select Jon¡¯s teammates. Gal Gadot, on the other hand, was organizing the notes she had just taken down. She wanted them to be articles so that they could be easily published. As for the information of the police officers, as a reporter, she could not look at it carelessly. There was a total of fifty copies of the information on theputer. 50 police officers. These were the best after screening, and they were serious and meticulous. Before looking at the files, Jon¡¯s mind was racing. What kind of team did he want? He needed someone who was proficient in explosives. He needed a good driver. He needed aputer expert. Just like his old friends. But¡­ What else did he need? A make-up artist? He had learned the technique himself. Jon decided to look at the officers first. His eyes scanned the 50 files. Soon. Jon selected three officers. Chapter 58 - Four Teammates And Breaking News

Chapter 58: Four Teammates And Breaking News

Number one: Leon Evans. Aputer genius. While he was still in college, he hacked into Google with the permission of the Googlepany itself. Heter turned down Google¡¯s invitation to be a police officer. Number two: Will Smith. Explosives expert, bomb disposal expert, who blew up his own toilet with an M-80 when he was 10 years old. Number three: Brown Williams. Super racer, who used to race the streets of Pennsylvania in order to catch a criminal. He showed off all sorts of tricks, then he was filmed and posted online, and unwittingizens thought it was a scene from a movie. These three, theputer genius, explosive expert, super racer, just like his old friends. In addition, he could choose another teammate. Since he and the first three were all men, thest teammate had to be a woman. Sometimes, it was convenient to do a lot of things with a female teammate in the team Finally, Jon¡¯s gaze fell on a document. Venus Alice. His fourth teammate was twenty-three years old youngdy. Although she was young, there was no one in the entire police force who could shoot better than her. These four people, together with him, were about to form a team. Although the power of this team might not beparable to Jon and his old friends, it was enough. In ten days, their performance would shock the entire world. Jon was confident! ¡°You have good taste.¡± After seeing that Jon had selected the police officers, themissioner couldn¡¯t help but praise. The four teammates that Jon had selected could be said to be the most outstanding among the police officers. Then, themissioner asked, ¡°When do you n to leave for Pennsylvania after ten days of preparation time?¡± Jon thought for a moment and said, ¡°In two days.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Themissioner nodded. ¡°Jon, you have to prepare well in the next few days. After all, the uing drill is different from thest one. It¡¯s much more difficult than thest one.¡± ¡°Whether it¡¯s manpower or equipment, there will be a big difference. Moreover, the people under me are not ordinary.¡± Jon smiled. ¡°I will not underestimate any opponent.¡± Over the years, no matter what mission Jon carried out, he had never underestimated any target. He had always been 120% focused. Even when victory was in his grasp, he was still tensed up until the mission waspletelypleted. Otherwise¡­ Any underestimation of his opponent could result in a rollover, resulting in a crushing defeat. He deeply understood this principle. ¡°Alright, from now on, you can go back and prepare.¡± The director said. Jon and Gal Gadot left the FBI together. ¡°Shall I send you?¡± This time, Gal Gadot came in a TV station car. Jon naturally wouldn¡¯t refuse. On the way. ¡°Where are you going now?¡± Gal Gadot asked him. She nned to send Jon to where he wanted to go first, then return to the TV station herself. ¡°Actually, I don¡¯t have anywhere to go now. The reason I said I¡¯m going to Pennsylvania in two days is because I want to have a good time for two days. After all, this opportunity is too rare.¡± ¡°And to prepare for the drill, eight days is enough.¡± Jon looked at the traffic ahead and leaned backfortably. His expression was a littlezy. It was rare. It really was the precious two days. He could have a good time. Hearing this, Gal Gadot¡¯s eyes lit up and said, ¡°Then I¡¯ll apany you for these two days?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t need to go to work?¡± Jon turned his head and looked at her with a puzzled look. ¡°I have a holiday.¡± An unnatural look appeared on Gal Gadot¡¯s face. Of course, she did not have a holiday, but she could take a leave. Last time, she had carried out a live broadcast of Jon¡¯s drill, which had brought huge profit to the television station. Taking a leave was naturally nothing. ¡°Okay.¡±, Jon smiled and said. ¡°Then now, I¡¯ll first give this news to the television station. Then, shall we go for lunch?¡±, Gal Gadot suggested. ¡°Sure, I¡¯ll treat you this time.¡± At the city television station. Gal Gadot returned and handed the news of Jon¡¯s uing coboration with the Pennsylvania Police Department to the station manager. ¡°Oh my god!¡± After the station manager heard the news, he was so shocked that he was speechless for a long time. If not for Gal Gadot taking the video and photos as evidence, he would have thought that this was fake news. This was definitely big news. With Jon¡¯s poprity now, even if it was just about his daily life, it could be considered news. Not to mention that he was going to cooperate with the police in the drill. The heat from thest drill had not dissipated yet, and many people were still talking about Jon. And now, the news of the next drill had already reached him. As for the next drill, it could be said countless people were eagerly waiting for it. Countless people were hoping that Jon would be able to participate in another drill. The hype could only be higher than the previous one! ¡°This news, what channel did you use to get it?¡± After the shock, the station manager was somewhat puzzled. ¡°When I went out today, I went to the FBI, themissioner of the Pennsylvania State Police Department. I personally went to talk to Jon about a coboration.¡± ¡°This news is approved by themissioner.¡± Gal Gadot said. ¡°Good! Good! Good!¡± The station manager said ¡°Good¡± three times in a row. His eyes were fixed on the news that Gal Gadot brought. He could not move his eyes away. ¡°Oh right, boss, I want to take two days off.¡± Gal Gadot said again. ¡°Good, good. It¡¯s really tiring for you to follow the live broadcast recently. I¡¯ll give you a week¡¯s leave, and your sry will be paid as usual.¡± The station manager immediately agreed. If it was before she broadcasted Jon¡¯s drill, forget about taking leave, it would already be a good thing to not let Gal Gadot work overtime. However, it was all in the past. Gal Gadot had brought a lot of profits to the television station. Therefore, she naturally had the right to take paid leave. ¡°It doesn¡¯t need to be a week. Three days will be enough.¡± ¡°Themissioner from Pennsylvania has appointed me as the official live broadcaster for this drill. I will be rushing to Pennsylvania in two days.¡± Gal Gadot didn¡¯t want to spend most of his leisure time. ¡°Okay, you can¡­ What? What did you say?¡± The station manager¡¯s voice suddenly stopped. He turned his head and looked at Gal Gadot with a face full of disbelief. Gal Gadot knew that the station manager did not believe it for a moment. This was understandable. In fact, if it was not for Jon¡¯s sake, she would not have believed that the burden of official live broadcaster would fall on her. Gal Gadot could only repeat, ¡°I said, I am the official live broadcaster of this drill. Themissioner of Pennsylvania personally appointed me.¡± Chapter 59 - Terrifying Popularity, Arriving in Pennsylvania

Chapter 59: Terrifying Poprity, Arriving in Pennsylvania

At this moment, the station manager heard what Gal Gadot said. For a moment, his heart was overwhelmed by shock. During thest live broadcast of the drill, the highest number of people watching the live broadcast at the same time, was 50 million. This was before Jon waspletely popr. And the next drill, it could be said it was long awaited. Jon once again participated in the drill and was broadcasted live. The station manager could not imagine how much poprity he would receive. Looking at the station manager who was stunned on the spot, Gal Gadot said, ¡°Then I¡¯ll go back first. I¡¯ll be back in two days. This time, I¡¯ll go to Pennsylvania for a live broadcast. I¡¯ll definitelyplete the mission sessfully.¡± ¡°Alright, alright. I¡¯ll get the finance department to transfer some bonuses to youter. You should rest well for the next two days.¡± The station manager quickly agreed. The attitude he had towards Gal Gadot today waspletely different from before. Even the station manager¡¯s tone was a little cautious. He was afraid that his tone would be too high and cause Gal Gadot to be unhappy. There was nothing he could do. The person who created great profit for the unit would deserve any nice treatment. Even the station manager had to treat her well. Under the manager¡¯s gaze, Gal Gadot slowly walked out of the unit. She had lunch with Jon. There was a bonus in her bank card. Not much, but it¡¯s certainly not a small amount. More than she¡¯s made in thest three yearsbined. For her, it was a small windfall. Young workers, men and women, in the workce today. What would they most like to see? Money, of course. All the time she was thinking about getting rich. Now, when she became a little rich, she was still a little groggy and felt unreal. She knew it was all because of Jon. Without Jon, she still be a reporter with nothing to show for it. You want a day off? You want a bonus? No way. But now, not only was there a generous bonus, but it was also followed by fame. Now, Gal Gadot had be a popr reporter at the television station. Not only had her previous live broadcast set a national record, but now she had received a big task. So at this moment, Gal Gadot was very happy in his heart. Looking at Jon beside him, she did not hesitate to wrap his arms around his neck and kiss him. ¡­ At the city television station. After the station manager received the news that Jon and the Pennsylvania State Police Department were going to cooperate. He didn¡¯t release it immediately. Because most of the people were at work during the day. If he released it now, the impact wouldn¡¯t spread to the greatest extent. And the most ideal time to release it was naturally the prime time at night. That night came. After the city television station released the news. The inte was instantly in an uproar. ¡°F*ck, is this for real? Jon is going to participate in the drill again?¡± ¡°The report is so grand, and there are also pictures and videos of Jon and the Pennsylvania State Police Departmentmissioner exchanging ideas. It shouldn¡¯t be fake news.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not fake news. I have a media friend who has confirmed this.¡± ¡°Goodd. Jon¡¯s role as the robberst time caused the police to lose face. I wonder what will happen this time?¡± ¡°The quality of the Pennsylvania State Police Department is on a whole new levelpared to thest time. I guess there will be a fair fight between the two sides.¡± ¡°I think so too. I¡¯m already looking forward to it.¡± ¡°Looking forward + 1.¡± It was the prime time after work. This night, almost everyizen who went online found out about this news. During thest drill, everyone saw Jon¡¯s seriousness, rigorousness, and high IQ. However, that drill onlysted for less than two days, and it ended quickly. No one had enjoyed watching it yet. And at this time. The news of Jon¡¯s next drill broke out all of a sudden, causing a terrifying amount of hype. Countless people were looking forward to it. They wanted to see what kind of shocking move Jon would make again. And because of this news, the city television station¡¯s viewership ratings also broke the station¡¯s previous viewership records. It even directly surpassed CBS. On the inte that night, all the tforms¡¯ trending lists were filled with Jon¡¯s name or figure. That night, the news of Jon¡¯s second drill was leaked by the city television station. The other media outlets also followed suit and wanted a piece of the pie. This was already a phenomenal level of poprity. In the United States, there were only two or three global superstars with this level of poprity in history. It could be said that Jon¡¯s poprity had now surpassed almost all the celebrities. And this was only because of a drill. While the outside world was having a heated discussion, Jon, as the person involved was very rxed. For two days, he and Gal Gadot ate, drank, and yed leisurely. And on thest night. The two of them finally hit the home run and had sex. After enjoying the night, Jon took a ne to Pennsylvania. Gal Gadot didn¡¯t go with Jon. She found there was a lot to do, and she had to sit down and prepare. The drill wouldn¡¯t start for another eight days. There was no hurry. In the afternoon, Jon arrived in Pennsylvania and got off the ne. He didn¡¯t bring much with him for the drill. He only had a few changes of clothes in his backpack. Although there were a lot of things to prepare for the drill, Jon didn¡¯t have to bring them from home. He could just buy them here. The system had rewarded him with $5 million, and he wasn¡¯t short on money. Then, he took a look at the crowded airport. Jon put on his ck cap and sunsses. He knew how popr he was. He¡¯d been popr since thest drill, and word had gotten out that he was going to work with the Pennsylvania State Police Department. He¡¯d been more popr than he¡¯d ever been. He¡¯d been spotted two days earlier when having fun outside with Gal Gadot. At that time, it took a lot of effort to run out of the crowd. So, he prepared a hat and sunsses to cover his face. Just like some celebrities. Otherwise, if he was recognized now, he probably wouldn¡¯t be able to walk out of the airport today. In fact, Jon was helpless about this. He was a person who didn¡¯t like trouble, and naturally didn¡¯t want to show off too much. But he had no choice but to participate in the exercise. Outside the airport, Jon took a taxi to the police station. When he arrived at the police station, he gave his name to the guard at the door. The guard didn¡¯t ask for instructions and took Jon directly to themissioner¡¯s office. After all, Jon and Pennsylvania were about to start working together. This matter was almost universally known. The guard naturally knew. So, there was no need to waste time for all the hassles. Chapter 60 - Gold Robbery, Four Teammates

Chapter 60: Gold Robbery, Four Teammates

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°You¡¯re here, Jon. Please have a seat.¡± Themissioner seemed to be in a good mood, and his attitude was very passionate. ¡°You¡¯re so eager for me toe. After the drill, don¡¯t regret it.¡± Jon put his backpack aside, then sat down on the sofa and said with a smile. Themissionerughed. ¡°If you can make me regret it, that would be the best thing.¡± Looking at themissioner in front of him, Jon could not help but think of the director of the FBI. He had said the same thing. Before the first act, Jon had also said the same thing to the director that he could not regret about the decision of choosing him. The director¡¯s answer at that time was the same. Regret at least proved that his decision was right. The director and themissioner. Although the two had different official positions, they were the same type of people. They were people who took things very seriously. Such people were actually very worthy of respect. ¡°What do you want to drink? Latte or coffee, Jon?¡± Themissioner asked. Jon did not stand on ceremony and said, ¡°Coffee. No sugar.¡± Themissioner made two cups of coffee and said, ¡°Then let¡¯s not talk nonsense from now on.¡± ¡°Thest drill was actually not too difficult. In order to increase the difficulty, this time, your goal is not cash.¡± ¡°Not cash?¡± Jon frowned slightly. ¡°Then, it¡¯s gold?¡± Themissioner was somewhat surprised by Jon¡¯s reaction. As expected of a FBI agent, Jon¡¯s thinking was indeed fast. Themissioner nodded. ¡°That¡¯s right, it¡¯s gold. We stored 100 kilograms of gold bars in the bank¡¯s safe this time, and your goal is to rob this batch of gold bars.¡± ¡°The difficulty is much higher than cash. What do you think?¡± Themissioner arranged it this way because, first of all, during Jon¡¯sst drill, he had robbed banknotes twice. If it were still banknotes this time again, there would be nothing new. Moreover, Jon would definitely be very good at robbing banknotes. Secondly, banknotes were traceable, so it was not easy to spend them after they were obtained. On the other hand, the gold could be melted and then recast, who could find out its origin? Therefore, many real-life robbers were more willing to rob gold. And this was the thing that had taken ount from the actual robbery. ¡°I have no problem.¡± Jon nodded and replied. Regarding the difficulty of the drill, he obviously felt that the higher the better. The higher the difficulty, the more interesting it would be to confront the police, and the more likely it would be to get the information he wanted to investigate. Moreover, he could also get a higher score from the system, which would give him a higher reward. Killing two birds with one stone. ¡°Very good.¡± Themissioner smiled. At this moment, there was a knock on the office door. ¡°Come in.¡±, themissioner said. The door was opened, and four people in police uniforms walked in. Three men and one woman were the teammates that Jon had chosen. He had seen their photos on the information before, so he recognized them at a nce. ¡°Let me introduce to you. This is Jon, the famous actor who ys the role of the robber in the drill on the inte.¡± After the four people came in, themissioner said slowly, ¡°I told you a few days ago that our police department will prepare a drill next, and the four of you will y the role of the robber with him.¡± As they spoke, Jon stood up and observed the four of them. ¡°Nice to meet you, Jon.¡± After themissioner¡¯s introduction, the four of them shook hands with Jon and introduced themselves. ¡°Hello.¡±, Jon replied with a smile. After greeting them. ¡°Next, I want to say something first.¡± Jon spoke slowly. Although he was still smiling, his tone was no longer as easy-going as before. Instead, there was a hint of toughness in his tone. ¡°No matter what group it is, there has to be a backbone. The same goes for the robber group. This way, there will be no conflict at the crucial moment ¡°And this backbone will be taken up by me. In this drill, your task is to listen to my orders and strictly carry out my n.¡± As soon as he said this, the four of them were stunned. ¡°Sir, you mean that in this drill, you are the boss, and we all have to listen to you?¡± ¡°But... Why?¡± ¡°Because you escaped from the police during thest drill and gained a lot of fame?¡± A middle-aged man with a strong figure and a bit of a ruffian looked at Jon. He was obviously not convinced. In his opinion, Jon was a little young. How could he be their leader at such a young age? Moreover, even though Jon had performed well in thest drill, especially the final robbery of the Blue Bank, they were also a little surprised by his methods. However, they still thought that the police had performed too poorly in the drill. The escape process, which was stunning in the eyes of the world, was also somewhat wed in the eyes of these elites. A few of the elites from the Pennsylvania department thought after repeated deduction. If they were the pursuers of the drill, they would have had at least three chances to capture Jon before he robbed. They would not have given Jon the chance to rob Blue Bank. ¡°You need your brain to rob a bank.¡± ¡°You, Will Smith, have been a policeman for more than ten years. You have indeed caught many criminals, but as for your brain...¡± As Jon spoke, a hint of contempt appeared in his eyes. These contemptuous looks. It made Will Smith frown, his expression somewhat angry. Without waiting for him to speak, Jon continued, ¡°In fact, I can still handle this drill by myself. As for your existence, all you need to do is listen to the instructions.¡± Jon raised his forehead slightly. He looked unusually arrogant. Themissioner had already seen through Jon¡¯s intentions. When Jon saw these four people, he made it clear that he was going to be the leader of the team. Then, he provoked and belittled those who did not submit to him. In the end, he even put on an arrogant posture. The reason was that Jon knew from the beginning that these four people would definitely not submit to him. Even if some people did not show it, they did not take Jon seriously in their hearts. After all, these were all elite members of the police force. Each of them could lead a team. And now... A young man had appeared and said that he wanted to lead them. How could they ept this? Even if there were orders from the police force, it was still not enough. And during the drill, when there were differences in opinions or choices, if Jon could not make these people obey, it would be very easy for things to go wrong. Therefore, Jon provoked, belittled, and acted arrogantly from the beginning. He wanted topletely stir up the dissatisfaction in their hearts and force them to let it all out. Then, he would suppress it. Only then would they be convinced and easier to manage. They were indeed intelligent people. However, it was up to Jon to suppress the four of them. Chapter 61 - Choosing Equipment

Chapter 61: Choosing Equipment

¡°Kid, you¡¯re not old, but you¡¯re very arrogant. Come, Let¡¯s have a fight.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s words, Will Smith was furious in an instant. He rubbed his hands together, as if he would attack at the slightest disagreement. He had always been a troublemaker. He had contributed a lot, but he had been punished more. Now that Jon had provoked him, he was going to attack, regardless of the asion. ¡°Oh, will, are you really going to do it in my office?¡± Just as Will Smith was about to make a move¡­ A deep shout suddenly sounded in the office. The moment Will Smith heard the voice, he was shocked and his aura weakened. Although he was a troublemaker, Will Smith was still a little afraid of themissioner. To be fair, themissioner was really nice to him. There were a few times when he caused too many problems, and it was themissioner who saved him. Otherwise, he would have left the police station long ago. ¡°I¡­ I just want to have a friendly match with Mr. Jon, Hehe.¡± Will Smith scratched his head and said with a smile. ¡°Listen up, I personally invited Mr. Jon. This show will be conducted with him as the center of gravity.¡± ¡°All of you are his chosen teammates, so he is your leader. Do you understand?¡± Themissioner said solemnly. There was only so much he could do. He could give the four of them orders to listen to Jon. But whether they could really listen to him or not, it would depend on Jon¡¯s ability. ¡°Understood,missioner.¡± The four of them answered together. Even though they were still unconvinced of Jon, they did not show it on their faces. In fact, Will Smith even gave Jon a mean look, full of provocation. Seeing this, Jon smiled slightly. He naturally knew that these people were still unconvinced, but there were still eight days before the start of the drill. He had plenty of ways to make these people obey him. In fact, if he wanted them to obey, Jon had a simple way. That was to take out some of the mission records that he had carried out when he was in the Navy SEALs team and put it in their faces. Those resumes were his true glorious history. Any mission that he took out would shock these so-called elites and make them dumbfounded. This shock would automatically turn into respect and obedience. But he didn¡¯t do that. Because he felt that doing this was too low-ss. If he couldn¡¯t even tame four police officers, then he would have lived all these years in vain. ¡°Let¡¯s go, I¡¯ll take you to see the equipment first.¡± Themissioner¡¯s gaze swept over the few of them one by one. After saying this, he turned around and left. Following themissioner, the few of them came to a room with many weapons. ¡°LR5 high-precision sniper rifle!¡± The few of them had just entered when they heard a cry of surprise. This cry of surprise was made by Venus Alice. Her gaze was fixed on a sniper rifle. Her gaze was somewhat greedy. As a sharpshooter, the allure of a high-precision sniper rifle was too much. ¡°Commissioner, can this gun be used for a drill?¡± Venus Alice asked, her voice excited. It was rare toe into contact with this kind of gun. ¡°All the weapons in this room can be used for a drill, but we have to let Jon make the arrangements.¡±, themissioner said, intentionally helping Jon to tame these people. Otherwise, if Jon had no way to make these people obey, they would have a disagreement during the actual drill and end the drill hastily. Then this drill would be meaningless. This was something he did not want to see. So, when there was an opportunity, themissioner naturally had to help Jon. Venus Alice heard themissioner¡¯s words and frowned slightly. She was not convinced by Jon, but now, the decision of whether she could use this sniper rifle was in Jon¡¯s hands. Jon walked over and looked at the sniper rifle. There was a magazine beside it. It was nk cartridge. ¡°nk cartridge?¡±, Jon muttered to himself. Themissioner said, ¡°During thest drill, although you used real bullets, this also indirectly restricted your actions. You can¡¯t use real bullets to shoot people, right?¡± ¡°Moreover, considering that this time¡¯s scale is evenrger, and the number of weapons used will be even more, it¡¯s even less suitable to use real guns and bullets.¡± Jon nodded. What themissioner said was indeed reasonable. Real guns and bullets were not child¡¯s y. They could make people nervous, but the danger was too great, and the restrictions were too great. For example, if they encountered a situation where they were shooting from a long distance. A sniper rifle, a nk cartridge, and a sharpshooter. Hitting the opponent with a nk cartridge meant that the opponent had already died and was directly eliminated. But if they were holding real bullets, what should they do? Use real bullets to kill the opponent? They definitely couldn¡¯t do that. Otherwise, they would probably be court-martialed the next day. But if he didn¡¯t kill the target, how would he eliminate the target? Therefore, using real bullets in a drill would cause a lot of limitations. Although it had enough deterrence and shock, it could also make one¡¯s blood boil. However, it was not suitable for a drill. Since it was a drill, then it should use special equipment for the drill. ¡°These nks are newly developed and specially used for drills. They don¡¯t have much power. When they hit a person¡¯s body, they will only feel a slight pain and won¡¯t hurt them.¡± Themissioner exined. This was something that Jon was naturally aware of. ¡°Now that you robbers have met and your weapons and equipment are ready, you can take your equipment and leave. Go back and prepare for the drill.¡± ¡°We¡¯ll meet again in eight days. Jon, don¡¯t let me down on this drill.¡± Themissioner patted Jon¡¯s shoulder and said in a serious voice. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t let you down.¡± Jon said. Then, he picked up some equipment in the room and put them into the backpack that the director had prepared for them. Five 92 pistols, five G36-C assault rifles, an LR5 sniper rifle, twenty fake grenades, twenty fake bombs, and arge number of nks. Guns were not prohibited in the United States. These things could even be obtained by real robbers. ¡°Then,missioner, I¡¯ll see you in eight days.¡± He shook hands with themissioner. Jon returned to themissioner¡¯s office, put his backpack on, and left with four people. An hourter. Five people appeared around the bank. This drill had attracted the attention of the whole country before it had even begun. Therefore, the police department¡¯s choice of the bank was naturally very serious. The selected bank was a local bank headquarters in Pennsylvania. Its location was in the central area of Pennsylvania. Chapter 62 - Jon鈥檚 Abilities

Chapter 62: Jon¡¯s Abilities

¡°What do you n to do next?¡± Will Smith looked at Jon, who was walking at the front, and could not help but ask. Although he was very good at catching robbers, it was his first time being a robber. For a moment, he did not know what to do. ¡°Find a ce to settle down first, at the Hilton Hotel.¡± Jon said as he walked. ¡°Hilton Hotel?¡± Hearing this, not only Will Smith, but the others¡¯ faces changed as well. ¡°Oh my god! We¡¯re already robbers now. The police know our identities. If we stay at the Hilton Hotel now, the police will know our location in less than ten minutes.¡± ¡°How can we do the drill at that time? You don¡¯t even understand the most basicmon sense of these things. Do you still want to be our leader?¡± Will Smith said unhappily. ¡°Two days ago, I studied the map of Pennsylvania and found three ces that are most likely to be used for the drill.¡± ¡°One of them is here. So, two days ago, I already used someone else¡¯s ID to book a room.¡± ¡°Even if the police investigated, they wouldn¡¯t think that I used someone else¡¯s ID to book a room. So, you can rest assured about our location information.¡±, Jon said unhurriedly. Will Smith opened his mouth when he heard that, but he could not say a word. Had it been prepared two days ago? It seemed to be quite professional. Not only him, but the other three were also surprised. The way they looked at Jon could not help but change. ¡°Even if the location information can¡¯t be exposed, with your current poprity, you can be easily recognized on the streets. It will also increase the chances of us being exposed. Do you n to wear sunsses and a hat all this time?¡± Venus Alice could not help but say. Although she was not convinced by Jon, she had to admit that his poprity was too high. He was already more popr than many celebrities. Under such circumstances, he was easy to be recognized. ¡°Are you worried about this?¡±, Jon said. At this time, they had already walked into an alley. There were no other pedestrians around. Jon took off his hat and sunsses and unzipped his backpack by twenty centimeters. He reached in. He took out a transparent item. Then he wiped his face and turned around to ask, ¡°What about now?¡± The four of them had jaw-dropping face. The person standing in front of them now looked like aplete stranger. Disguise! The disguise on Jon¡¯s face was too good. Even though they were standing face to face and so close to each other, the four of them still couldn¡¯t see any ws. One had to know that they were all elites of the police force. Their eyesight was naturally not something that ordinary people couldpare to. But even so, they still couldn¡¯t see anything wrong. His disguise was too perfect. Even though they had long known through the live broadcast that Jon could disguise himself, seeing him disguise himself as another person at such a close distance. They were still in shock. Under Jon¡¯s lead, the group arrived at the 15th floor of the Hilton Hotel. Jon suddenly stopped in his tracks. ¡°What are you thinking about? Open the door quickly. I¡¯m tired from carrying so many weapons.¡± Will Smith shouted. ¡°No keys.¡± ¡°ording to the rules of the Hilton Hotel, there are two keys in the room and one at the front desk. So now, if you want keys, you can only go to the front desk. You need to take your documents to get them.¡± Jon spoke calmly. Will Smith could not help but ask, ¡°So, after talking for so long, we still have to expose our identities?¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need.¡± Jon naturally knew that they were dissatisfied, and this was the result he wanted. If he wanted to tame this group of people, he definitely had to show some of his true strength. He squatted down. Under the dissatisfied expressions of the four people, he took out a piece of iron wire and started fiddling with the door lock. ¡°You want to use iron wire to open the lock?¡± Will Smith¡¯s expression was dumb, and then he said disdainfully, ¡°Do you think this is a game? This is the door of the Hilton Hotel. If you can open it with a piece of iron wire, then¡­¡± He didn¡¯t finish his words. There was a click sound. The door was unlocked. Jon pushed the door open while the four people were stunned. ¡°You didn¡¯t finish what you said just now. What is it?¡± Jon turned around and asked Will Smith. Will Smith was speechless. What could he say? At first, he said that Jon couldn¡¯t open the door. The next moment, he was pped in the face instantly. Jon did not wait for his reply and entered the room by himself. There were five separate bedrooms in this room, which he had deliberately chosen when he booked the room. After entering the room, Jon put down his backpack and took off his disguise mask. He looked through all five bedrooms at once. ¡°Even if you want to pick the room first, you should rx, as if you¡¯ve never stayed in a hotel room before.¡±, Will Smith could not help but say. He thought that Jon wanted to see which room had better lighting so that he could live morefortably. ¡°Pick the room first?¡± ¡°The reason why we¡¯re staying here is to make it easier to monitor the bank. In eight days, we¡¯re going to rob a bank. Before that, we naturally have to understand the various aspects of the bank.¡± Jon looked through all five rooms, then looked at will Smith and said calmly. Will Smith was instantly stunned. Obviously, he had not considered this aspect. The others naturally had not considered it either. ¡°If I didn¡¯t know that you work for the FBI, I would really suspect that you¡¯re a robber.¡± Will Smith said, ¡°But you¡¯re an agent. Why are you so professional about robbing?¡± At this time, although Will Smith was still a little unconvinced, he had already lightened up a lot. It could be heard from his tone. ¡°Since you¡¯re going to y the role of a robber, then you should put yourself into the role. Do you know what a bank robber should be like?¡± As he spoke, Jon activated his Basic Robber Aura. In an instant, Jon¡¯s aura underwent a huge change. His expression was ice-cold, and his eyes were filled with ruthlessness. His entire person exuded a cruel aura that seemed to have substance. Although Jon¡¯s appearance did not change, his aura waspletely different. The four of them were stunned to his instant change of aura. They felt that they were facing a real robber. And this robber was more ruthless than any of them had ever faced before. Will Smith¡¯s throat rolled. At this moment, all the contempt and disapproval in his heart had disappeared. It was reced by a sense of respect. And the other three were the same. They had disapproved of Jon because they felt that he didn¡¯t have much ability. But after getting out of the taxi, he arranged everything very well. Moreover, there were his disguise and a lockpicking skill. And now, he disyed such a fierce aura. This meant that Jon was a person with real ability. ¡°Two keys. One for me and one for Will.¡± ¡°Now, you all pack up. In ten minutes, go downstairs and eat.¡± Jon put away his Robber Aura and said to the others. They didn¡¯t object and began to pack up. Chapter 63 - The Robbing Team, Led By Jon

Chapter 63: The Robbing Team, Led By Jon

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Ten minutester. Jon led the four persons downstairs for dinner. It was already evening. ¡°You seem to be ready to fight in themissioner¡¯s office today. How about we had a match real quick?¡± Jon said to Will Smith as they passed a park. Although the four persons¡¯ attitudes toward him had changed, he could sense it. However, what could be more effective than the intimidation of a fight? He had to convince the four of them as soon as possible so that he could continue his preparations in other areas. ¡°A match? Sure.¡± Will Smith was stunned at first. He obviously did not expect Jon to make such a request. The next moment, he revealed a smile. Jon¡¯s request was exactly what he wanted. ¡°I¡¯ve been in the department for more than ten years. I¡¯ll be the champion every year.¡± ¡°But don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t hit you too hard. Otherwise, it¡¯ll be bad if you can¡¯t get out of bed tomorrow.¡± As he spoke, Will Smith moved his wrists, fingers, and neck. There were cracking sounds. The other three people retreated to the side and watched this scene with interest. Just as Will Smith said, he had been in the police force for more than ten years and had won the fighting championship every year. Moreover, he had won the second ce with overwhelming force. Had a match with him. How did Jon dare to do that? Whoosh! When both of them were ready. Will Smith took the lead and threw a punch at Jon. Will Smith did not use his full strength because he felt that Jon would not be able to withstand his full-strength punch. It would not be good if Jon was injured. And this punch also used 70-80% of his strength. He felt that it was enough to deal with Jon. But it was this punch that filled him with confidence. The next moment, Jon directly took his punch. Jon held his fist with one hand, raised his eyebrows and said, ¡°Didn¡¯t you eat? That¡¯s all your strength? Oh sorry, you really haven¡¯t eaten yet. Why don¡¯t we start after you finish eating?¡± Hearing this, Will Smith was instantly aroused. He roared and nned to withdraw his fist and attack again. However, he didn¡¯t expect that Jon still held his fist tightly under his strength and didn¡¯t move at all. He used almost all of his strength and barely escaped from Jon¡¯s palm. ¡°Jon is not simple.¡± Will Smith¡¯s expression became serious. He realized that Jon was not weak. However, he was not weak either. This time, he punched with all his strength. He did not expect that Jon would still take it. Then, Jon let go of him and said calmly, ¡°I take two punches from you, and you take one from me.¡± Then, a burst of aura erupted from his body. He threw a punch. The momentum was extremely fast, and the wind was blowing. At this moment, Will Smith¡¯s expression was extremely grave, and he crossed his hands in front of his chest. Bang! With a muffled sound, Jon¡¯s punch was powerful and heavy, forcing Will Smith to take a few steps back uncontrobly. Then, Jon took a step forward and directly put Will Smith on the ground. Then... He pressed him down and hit him. ¡°I lost, I lost.¡± A minuteter, Will Smith, who was covered in dust, shouted. Jon stopped. Will Smith stood up shakily. He felt pain all over his body. Some parts of his body were probably swollen. He found it hard to believe this. Not only could he not beat Jon, but he could not even take one punch from his opponent. This made him doubt his life. Now, not only was his brain inferior to his opponent¡¯s, even his strength could not bepared to Jon¡¯s. As for the other three people, they were equally shocked. They really did not expect that Jon, who looked even thinner than Will Smith, would actually beat Will Smith to the point where he could not even retaliate. This was simply... a little unreal. ¡°Let¡¯s go and eat.¡± Jon dusted off the non-existent dust on his body and said to the others. He randomly found a restaurant. He ordered a table full of dishes, and then Jon ordered a bottle of red wine. ¡°About this drill, listen to my instructions the entire time. Do you have any objections?¡± Jon held his wine ss and looked at the four of them. ¡°I don¡¯t have any objections.¡± The first to speak was Will Smith. Even though his entire body was in pain from Jon¡¯s beating, he waspletely convinced. Will Smith said to Jon, ¡°Brother Jon, I¡¯ve offended you before and thought that you didn¡¯t have any real abilities, but your performance has convinced me. As for you be the leader of the team, I absolutely have no objections.¡± ¡°I have no objections either.¡± This time, it was Leon Evans who spoke. This man looked to be in his thirties. He wore sses and looked a little refined. He was aputer expert. Rtively speaking, he had the lowest sense of presence in the team. ¡°No objections.¡± Another voice. It was super driver Brown Williams. Being able to lead a team was one thing but being willing to lead was another. He did not want to be a leader in the first ce. Before, he just felt that Jon was too young to lead them. Now that Jon had shown his strength, he could naturally be their backbone. Among the four of them. Three of them had expressed their opinions. The remaining one, the only woman in the four, had not expressed her opinion. A few of them looked at Venus Alice in unison. Venus Alice was a little embarrassed. She looked at Jon and said, ¡°If you can let me use the LR5, I will support you.¡± Everyoneughed when she said that. Jon had brought the LR5 sniper rifle from themissioner for her to use. ¡°Okay.¡± ¡°Since you all have no objections, I hope that from now on, we won¡¯t have any argument.¡± ¡°Moreover, from now on, all of you will be like me. The robbers who participated in the bank robbery will temporarily forget their identity as police officers.¡±, Jon raised his wine ss and said. At this moment, the team of robbers for the show had been formed. He used an afternoon to convince the four thorny elites of the police department and establish his position as the leader. ¡°Klink.¡± With a crisp sound, the five wine sses clinked together. The few of them chatted as they ate, and soon, they slowly became familiar with each other. After finishing this meal, it was already veryte. The five of them returned to the Hilton Hotel. Jon divided the rooms for them, and then the few of them went to wash up and rest. Chapter 64 - Before the Drill, the Live Broadcast Started

Chapter 64: Before the Drill, the Live Broadcast Started

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Early the next morning. Jon woke the four of them from their sleep. From this day forward, Jon would assign them tasks to begin preparing them for the drill. The first is Venus Alice. Jon assigned her a room facing the bank, and her task is to monitor the bank in her room every day, recording all the important things that happen to the bank¡¯smuters. Then there was Brown Williams. The super-driver, who had once raced down the streets of Pennsylvania in search of a criminal. He was filmed and the video was posted online, and unwittingizens thought it was from a movie. It spoke volumes about his driving skills. And he could drive not just cars, but yachts and even helicopters. He could track and escape. His job was to go out and check the surveince cameras on the road and work out the most covert and secure escape route. Finally, there was Will Smith and Leon Evans. These two were technicians, an explosives expert and aputer genuis. Jon arranged for them to disguise themselves as customers of the bank, and then go to the bank. He asked Leon Evans to draw up as many blueprints of the bank as possible, and a map of the surrounding terrain. As for Will Smith, he wanted to see if there was a need for a bomb, and if so, where it was appropriate. As for Jon himself, he wanted toe up a detailed n for the robbery and to prepare something that might be used in this drill. A team of five robbers. Under the arrangement of Jon, the division of workload was clear, and his thinking was clear. This made his four teammates admire him. After the division of jobs, everyone did their jobs. Jon first used two days to buy all the things needed for the drill. Then he bought a car and drove it to the bank 500 meters away and parked it. Since the system had given him five million dors after thest drill, Jon naturally didn¡¯t care about the money for the car. And afterpleting this drill, if he got a high score, he could also receive a generous reward from the system. For the remaining few days. Jon disguised himself as another person and strolled around the bank, memorizing all the buildings and the terrain nearby. On the ninth day. Based on what he knew and the information that his four teammates had told him, he made a detailed operation n. On the tenth day, Jon spent the rest of the day frantically trying to figure out if there were any ws in the n. And what might have happened during the bank robbery. And based on that, he drew up another n. To make sure the robbery and escape were safe. On thest night, Jon led the five of them to a delicious meal. Now, everything was ready. They were just waiting for tomorrow. ... The next day. The day the drill started. Early in the morning, many media outlets had gathered in front of the Pennsylvania State Police Department. The news that Jon was going to cooperate with the Pennsylvania State Police Department in the drill had already spread 10 days ago. In these 10 days, the news of the drill spread on the inte and became more and more popr. However, until now, themissioner did not reveal which bank was involved in the drill. Naturally, the reporters did not know and could only surround the entrance of the police station. They waited for the police officers to act and followed them to report. However, what the media did not know was that, even the police officers who participated in the drill this time also did not know which bank was about to be robbed. Because themissioner did not tell them. This was also out of the fairness of the drill. Otherwise, the police officers would definitely guarding the targeted bank. This was a little unfair to the robbers. After all, when the real robbers intended to rob, they would not tell the police which bank to rob. So, as for which bank was going to be robbed, it was only known to the robbery team, themissioner, and the senior management of the bank. Moreover, themissioner specifically instructed that all the insiders must not disclose it to the public. For the official live broadcast reporter appointed for this drill, Gal Gadot need to arrive at the police station early. Her treatment was much better than other media. When other media outlets could only gather at the entrance of the police station, Gal Gadot had already been invited in and waited for the police officers to move out. She would report along with the car. At this time, although the exercise had not officially started, Gal Gadot had already started the live broadcast. In an instant. Manyizens entered the live stream. In less than a minute, there were already 500,000 people watching online simultaneously. And the number was still rising. This phenomenon surprised Gal Gadot. She had livestreamed many times, but this was the first time such a phenomenon had appeared. At this moment, she was sure that this live broadcast would definitely break the record she had set ten days ago. After all, she had special privileges. She had received the official live broadcast appointed by themissioner. She was destined to receive thergest number of views. And all of this was because of Jon... ¡°Finally starting the live broadcast? I¡¯ve been able to do it for a long time. I almost wanted to do it.¡± ¡°Me too. Last night, my girlfriend took off her clothes and flirted with me for half an hour. I didn¡¯t even get hard. When my girlfriend asked me what was wrong, I said that I didn¡¯t want to do anything other than watch the drill.¡± ¡°F*ck! Bro, it might not be that you don¡¯t want to do it. It might be a sexual dysfunction. I suggest you go to the hospital for a check-up.¡± ¡°What the f*ck, isn¡¯t this the live stream for the drill? What kind of weird things are you guys discussing?¡± ¡°They¡¯re just a bunch of old perverts. Ignore them.¡± ¡°But then again, I heard that in this drill, other than Jon, there were also a few other police teammates. It turned into a gang robbery. Is that true?¡± ¡°Police officers? No way. They won¡¯t steal the spotlight from Jon, right? I¡¯m here to see Jon. Don¡¯t let us down.¡± ¡°That¡¯s impossible. Jon¡¯s performance in thest drill was great. I¡¯m worried that these teammates will hold him back.¡± ¡°I think so too. If his teammates don¡¯t hold him back, I believe that with Jon¡¯s strength, he will definitely be able to kill randomly in this drill.¡± ¡°But no matter what, I still hope that Jon will be able to get serious this time. In this drill, he will give the audience a wonderful performance.¡± ¡°Yeah, I hope that he will put on another police film for us. After all, it¡¯s free.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go to thement section and spam. The content is: Jon, the god of police and robbers.¡± ¡°Jon, the god of police and robbers + 1.¡± Chapter 65 - The Robbery Begins!

Chapter 65: The Robbery Begins!

After theizens entered the live stream, they started discussing on thement section. After all, after the first drill, the audience had high expectations for Jon¡¯s performance this time. How would this highly intelligent robber perform in thisrger drill? This was something that the audience was very curious about. As they discussed crazily, the police officers were all on standby at the police station. The live broadcast hadn¡¯t even started yet, but it had already received so much attention. This also made the hearts of the police officers tense up. No one thought that this drill was a child¡¯s y and could just casually deal with it. After all, there were so many people watching all over the country. If they didn¡¯t perform well, they would damage the reputation of the Pennsylvania State Police Department. And they would lose face in front of the entire United States. No one wanted to lose face. Therefore, in the eyes of all the police officers, this was not a drill but a real battle. And now, the person that was going to have a serious headache was none other than the police leader of this operation. The leader had seen the live broadcast of thest drill and all kinds of information. He found that Jon was very difficult to deal with. And if he, the leader, made any mistakes in this drill, it would be a real headache. Meanwhile, the bank was getting ready. This was a main bank. It was not small, but there were not many customers doing business today. It was because the higher-ups knew that the bank was going to face a robbery today. Hence, they had already restricted the number of customers from this morning. To ensure that there weren¡¯t too many customers in the bank, it would be easier to disperse them when the drill started. In the afternoon a two o¡¯clock sharp, four people came to the bank. ¡°Dear sir and madam, our bank is no longer handling business today due to maintenance. You cane back tomorrow.¡± The security guard saw the four people walking over and quickly stopped them. As themissioner did not allow the people who knew about it to reveal that they were going to conduct a drill in this bank, the informed bank executives did not spread the news of the drill. And the security guard naturally thought that there were so few customers today because of the regr maintenance, just as the higher-ups had informed them. ¡°Tomorrow? No, no, no, we nned to enter the bank today. Wouldn¡¯t we be dyed tomorrow?¡± The man at the front of the four said. Their footsteps did not stop. These four people were obviously the robbery team. Will Smith. Brown Williams. Leon Evans. Venus Alice. As the core of this drill, Jon did note with them. He still had other things to do. Seeing that the four people did not stop, the security guard became alert. A hand reached behind his back and touched the baton. ¡°I¡¯ll say it again. The bank has limited services due to the maintenance. We are going to close soon. You cane over tomorrow to take care of your business.¡± The security guard said in a serious tone. As a professional security guard, this person was naturally tall and burly. Moreover, he had been a soldier for a few years. He had a pretty neatbat skill. Therefore, even if he was facing four people, he was only a little bit tensed up and did not scare at all. ¡°Sir, what if I have to go in?¡± Will Smith raised his head and looked at the security guard. At this moment, he had his hairbed back and looked shiny. He had his sunsses on and was holding a cigar in his mouth. From the looks of it¡­ He waspletely dressed like a gangster. In addition to the ruffian smile on his lips, this made the security guard even more convinced that Will Smith was not a good person. He pulled out the baton behind him. He held it tightly. ¡°If you insist on breaking in, don¡¯t me me for being impolite.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± The smile on Will Smith¡¯s lips became even wider. Then. His hand reached to his waist, took out a 92 pistol, and loaded it. ¡°Oh my god!¡± The security guard s movements suddenly stopped. Looking at the ck muzzle of the gun, fine beads of cold sweat quickly appeared on his face. He did not dare to make any movements for a moment. A thought shed through his mind. Robbers! They wanted to rob a bank. This security guard had worked in a bank for so long. This was the first time he had encountered a bank robbery. He did not know what to do for a moment. ¡°Now, do as I say and chase all the customers out.¡± Will Smith said with a cold face. Under Jon¡¯s influence, they also immersed themselves in the role of robbers. Moreover, through these few days of preparation. Whenever the four of them had time, they would ask Jon for advice on how to y a real robber. Jon was not stingy and told them his experience. After so long of deliberate training, the four of them now looked like real robbers. ¡°Yes¡­ Sir.¡± The security guard quickly agreed. He ran into the bank and began to disperse the customers. The four of them showed their guns at the bank¡¯s entrance This was Jon¡¯s n. After all, no matter what, this was a drill. As robbers, they could not stop the bank staff or others from reporting the case. Besides, the police were definitely on standby. As soon as they got a report, they would be there. Jon had carefully studied the distance from the police station to the bank, which was ten minutes away. This was when there was no obstruction. Pennsylvania was a big economy state, and this was the center of it. There were a lot of cars. Even if we take the emergency response channel, it cannot be unimpeded. So, the police needed at least another 15 minutes to arrive. 25 minutes time in total. Too little time. It was not enough to let the robbers get the gold and then leave. In that case, it is better not to run, make a big show of it. So, there is no need to hide anything. They just had to rob the bank in daylight. ording to Jon¡¯s n, the four of them came to the bank, drove the customers out of the bank, and then took control of the bank staff. He did not choose to take the customers and staff together as hostages. Because there was no point in taking too many hostages. But now, there were nine staffs in the bank, enough to be used as hostages. Under the watchful eyes of four people, the security guards dispersed the customers. But the process was not smooth, some customers did not know the truth and did not want toe out. It was not easy to do business in the bank. You had to pick a specific time. You had to draw a number to line up. Some people waited in line for a long time, when it was finally their turn, of course they refused to leave. Will Smith, who was at the door, also noticed the situation. He recalled what Jon had said when he arranged the operation. ¡°At the beginning of the robbery, some unwitting customers are not easy to disperse. At this time, you need to shoot at the ceiling to intimidate them.¡± Chapter 66 - Get Into Character!

Chapter 66: Get Into Character!

Will Smith walked into the bank and pointed his gun at the ceiling. ¡°Bang!¡± A gunshot was heard. Even though it was a nk cartge, the effect of the shot was exactly the same as the real one. ¡°Gunshot, there¡¯s a gunshot!¡± ¡°Is this person trying to rob a bank?¡± ¡°F*ck, no way. I haven¡¯t been to a bank in 800 years, and now that¡¯s a bank robbery. Why am I f*cking unlucky?¡± The bank was suddenly in chaos. ¡°Now is the time for the robbery. Customers, I hope you can quickly leave, and the bank staff, alle out.¡±, said Will Smith after he fired. Hearing that they could leave, the customers all let out a sigh of relief. After all, it was naturally the best if it didn¡¯t implicate them. This group of customers ran away in an instant. As they ran out, the bank staffs also came out of the counter shakily. And when one of the staffs walked out, he pressed the rm bell. Instantly, an ear-piercing rm sounded in the bank. ¡°Who opened it? Turn it off!¡± Will Smith heard the sound and frowned. He pointed his gun at one of the staffs and shouted. He ordered them to turn off because it was irritating. The rm had to be turned off sooner orter, so it did not matter who pressed it. The bank staff who had been pointed at trembled and quickly went over to turn off the rm. He still didn¡¯t know whether it was a drill or a real robbery. The Pennsylvania State Police Department had been working with Jon on a drill, and everyone in America knew about it. So did the bank staff. But for a moment, he was confused. The four persons looked like real robbers, and Jon was nowhere to be seen. And in America, bank robberies were notmon, but they were not new. There were a few every year. So, the staffs thought they were real robbers. But the staffs had to cooperate with the robbery team no matter they were the real deal or not. If they didn¡¯t cooperate, it would be fine if it was a drill. At most, they wouldy down after taking a nk cartge If it were a real bank robbery, he would die in vain if he took a real bullet. After the staff turned off the rm bell¡­ Outside the bank, a van drove over and stopped at the bank¡¯s entrance. The next moment. Jon, who was wearing a disguise, jumped down from the driver¡¯s seat. He ordered the three people who were still at the bank¡¯s entrance, ¡°Remove all the things in the car.¡± The three people heard him and quickly went over to remove a few big bags and a box from the car. These were the things that Jon had prepared for the past few days. ¡°These are?¡± Will Smith also came over to help. He was a little puzzled when he saw these things. Jon nced at him and said, ¡°These are all useful things. You¡¯ll know in a while.¡± They moved all these things into the bank. Jon looked at the time. Ten minutes had passed since the rm sounded. ¡°Venus, go and see if there¡¯s anyone else in the bank.¡± ¡°Will, close all the ss doors and electronic doors.¡± ¡°Leon and Brown, take care of the hostages.¡± After checking the time, Jon quickly gave the order. These tasks were assigned to them when he was making ns. The few of them did as Jon said. ¡°Ladies and gentlemen, please cooperate obediently, or the gun in my hand might go off.¡± Will Smith said as he controlled the bank staffs. ¡°Well¡­ are you here for a drill?¡± ¡°The higher-ups know about today¡¯s drill and gave some of the staff a holiday, but I didn¡¯t leak the news. The reason for the holiday is because of the bank¡¯s overhaul.¡± ¡°Now, among those who know, I¡¯m the only one who works here.¡± In the crowd, a middle-aged man in a suit said. He was the manager of this bank. At this moment, he spoke with some uncertainty. Because this group of people looked fierce, as if they were real robbers. Jon nced at the manager, took off the disguise mask on his face, and revealed his true appearance. ¡°Since you know this is a drill, then please cooperate with us.¡± ¡°Because we treat this drill as a real battle. If anyone dares to mess around, we will act without hesitation.¡±, as Jon spoke, he activated the Robber Aura. Now, his Robber Aura was already at the beginner level. Naturally, his power was a level higher than when he was at the low level. His cold tone, coupled with the terrifying gaze and the fierce aura around him, scared the manager so much that he shivered on the spot. The manager felt like he was facing a murderer at this moment. And not an ordinary murderer. Because ordinary murderers did not have such a gaze. Jon¡¯s gaze was more like that of someone who had walked down from the battlefield and experienced the scene of hell. The manager hurriedly nodded. ¡°Yes, yes, we¡¯ll cooperate.¡± As he spoke, he touched his forehead, which was already covered in cold sweat. ¡°He¡¯s Jon? The famous robber impersonator recently?¡± ¡°It¡¯s him. I¡¯ve watched his live broadcast before, but he looks even more handsome in person than on the live broadcast. I can¡¯t help but get wet now.¡± ¡°No way, sister. You can get wet even with this? This is a drill, and look at Jon¡¯s imposing manner and gaze. He¡¯s practically about to eat someone up. It¡¯s too scary.¡± ¡°Wouldn¡¯t it be better if he ate me? Hehe.¡± ¡°¡­ Please treat the drill seriously and not make it dirty.¡± ¡°But then again, since the police department has decided to conduct a drill in our bank, then we must cooperate and treat it as a real robbery.¡± ¡°Yes, I agree.¡± ¡°I agree + 1.¡± The moment Jon took off his disguise mask. The employees of the bank naturally recognized him. After all, Jon was too popr. It was hard not to recognize him. However, even if they recognized Jon and knew that this was a drill and not a real bank robbery,the nervousness in their hearts did not diminish in the slightest. It was because the scene in front of them was too real. A few people with guns looked more like robbers than robbers. Especially Jon. His aura and gaze were too terrifying. ¡°Oh,dies.¡± ¡°What are you whispering about? From now on, please keep quiet because this is a robbery. If anyone says another word, the bullet in the muzzle of my gun will hit you in the next moment. I promise.¡± Will Smith heard the exchange of the staff members. He immediately opened his mouth fiercely. The gun in his hand spun in front of the eyes of the staff members. Although they knew that the bullet was not real, they were still extremely nervous when the gun pointed at them. Seeing this, smile appeared on Jon¡¯s face. He knew that Will Smith had already into the character of being a robber. Chapter 67 - Arrogant Robbers!

Chapter 67: Arrogant Robbers!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Jon looked at the time again. Eight minutes had passed. In other words, the police would arrive in seven or eight minutes. ¡°Now, everyone, start changing.¡± Jon opened a ck backpack that had been moved in and poured out all the clothes inside. He made the hostages wear the exact same clothes as the robbers. He had used this trick in thest drill and he was going to use it again. Of course, the effect of this trick was very good, and it was very practical. It was a very practical trick, so he had to continue using it. This time, the clothes that Jon had prepared were uniform, hooded camouge clothes, masks, and boots. If everyone wore these clothes, it would cause visual problems for the police. Even if they managed to get into the bank, it would be impossible to find the robbers from the crowd dressed in the same clothes. Then, Will Smith took the men and Venus Alice took the women to the bathroom to change. Jon, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans were in the corner of the hall. When everyone changed their clothes. Seven or eight minutes had passed. Outside the bank, the sound of sirens could be heard. The police had arrived. The moment they heard the sirens, all the police officers in the police station, who were ready to fight, became alert. They knew that the drill had begun. The robbers had already acted. Although it was a drill, this drill was watched by countless people across the country. They needed to treat this drill as a real battle. They needed to raise their spirits 120%. Then, under themand of theleader, the police officers responded in an orderly manner, and more than a dozen police cars set off from the police station. And seeing this scene, the media waiting outside also raised their spirits. They knew that this drill had really begun. The police were about to meet the robbers. So, this group of media followed closely behind the police cars. Everyone wanted to do the first live broadcast. However, there was one person who was faster than them. That was Gal Gadot. As the official live broadcast reporter appointed by themissioner, Gal Gadot followed the police car directly to the square in front of the bank. When the police arrived at the square outside the bank, the first thing they did was to maintain order. Because there were so many people here. Not only were there many media outlets, but there were also some onlookers. If they didn¡¯t maintain order, the scene would be in chaos. The police set up a cordon, separating the media personnel and the onlookers from the cordon. This was not the treatment of Gal Gadot. As the official live broadcaster appointed by themissioner, Gal Gadot upied the best live broadcast location. It made the other media outlets envious and jealous, but there was nothing they could do. After all, Gal Gadot was the official live broadcaster designated by themissioner, so what could they do. Gal Gadot and the cameraman from the city television station quickly set up the live broadcast equipment. Then, they immediately started filming at the bank. ¡°Hello, everyone, I¡¯m your today reporter, Gal Gadot.¡± ¡°This is the scene of a drill organized by the Pennsylvania State Police Department and the bank. For this drill, the team of the robbers is made up of the familiar Jon and the four police officers from the police department.¡± ¡°This drill isrger in scale, and the police force sent more manpower. As for the robbers, this intelligent robber Jon has four teammates ¡°Under such circumstances, can the police catch Jon? Let¡¯s wait and see.¡± Gal Gadot entered the camera and gave an opening speech to the audience in the live stream. The poprity of the live broadcast was more than ten times higher than when the live broadcast had started. By the time Gal Gadot finished her opening remarks, the number of viewers in the live stream had already reached 10 million. The record she had set during thest live broadcast was that the highest number of online viewers watching at the same time was 25 million. This time, at the start of the live broadcast, there were already 10 million viewers. And as the live broadcast continued, the number of viewers would continue to increase. Therefore, Gal Gadot was confident that this live broadcast would definitely surpass the record of 25 million people watching online at the same time. That was to break her own record. And once she broke the record again, Gal Gadot would definitely be famous throughout the country as a reporter. After all, she had already gained a lot of poprity and fame through the live broadcast of thest drill. And all of this was because of Jon. She was able to gain a lot of fame, gain the envy of her colleagues at the city television station, gain the attention of the station head, and be able to stand within the cordon line to shoot the live broadcast today. All of this was all thanks to Jon. Thinking of this, she couldn¡¯t help but look at the bank. Inside the bank, Jon was holding a G36-C assault rifle. He was standing behind the ss door, calmly observing the situation outside. He seemed to have noticed her gaze. Jon looked over as well. Their eyes met. Jon smiled slightly. Gal Gadot also smiled. As the two of them looked at each other, thements in Gal Gadot¡¯s live stream had already exploded. ¡°The opening is about to begin. The robbers are robbing, and the police are here. The two sides have officially confronted each other. The good show is about to begin.¡± ¡°We¡¯re not blind to see what¡¯s going on in the scene above. We can see it all. You don¡¯t have to remind us. You¡¯re making me suspect that you¡¯re just spamming¡± ¡°Brother, be bold. Remove the word ¡®suspect¡¯. He is spamming.¡± ¡°But then again, looking at the scene, I have a feeling that my scalp is numb. I feel that the confrontation between the robbers and the police must be very exciting.¡± ¡°Of course. Don¡¯t you see who the leader of the robbers is? That¡¯s Jon. If Jon can sessfully escape from this drill, I¡¯m willing to call him the strongest robber in history.¡± ¡°Actually, I don¡¯t really care about who wins or loses. As long as Jon performs well enough, to put it bluntly, I¡¯m here to watch a police film.¡± ¡°Good man. Instead of going to the cinema to watch a police movie, you came here?¡± ¡°It¡¯s all because in recent years, the quality of movies of this genre was too poor. Now, I can only ce my hopes on Jon.¡± ¡°But are you all focused on Jon? I think this reporter is very good-looking. I think her name is Gal Gadot?¡± ¡°It¡¯s her. I noticed it when they were broadcasting Jon¡¯s drill livest time. The reason I didn¡¯t say anything was because I didn¡¯t want you guys to find out. I didn¡¯t expect it to be exposed.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be? It can¡¯t be? It can¡¯t be that there¡¯s really someone here to watch a group of men carry out a drill, right? I¡¯m only her to watch beautiful women.¡± ¡°Watch beautiful women + 1.¡± Chapter 68 - The Robbers Did Not Block the Camera!

Chapter 68: The Robbers Did Not Block the Camera!

¡°Oh, fuck, this b*stard is actuallyughing? Is he provoking me?¡± As Jon and Gal Gadot looked at each other, themander of the police force was also observing the situation inside the bank. When he saw Jon¡¯s smile, the anger in his heart was immediately ignited. At this time, he could still smile in front of the police. If it wasn¡¯t provocation, then what was it? So, he cursed at Jon. And in the bank, Jon seemed to sense that his gaze was looking over. When he saw the angrymander, his smile became even wider. He even raised the assault rifle in his hand and aimed at themander. Themander took a deep breath. It was indeed a provocation. He had worked in the police department for so many years, but this was the first time he had met such an arrogant robber. Then, under themand of Jon, the electric curtains of the bank slowly closed. It blocked the sight of both parties. ¡°Was Jon provoking the police just now? What a man¡± ¡°He was just about to give them the middle finger. Of course it was a provocation.¡± ¡°He¡¯s too arrogant. I can¡¯t take it anymore. If I am the police, I have to arrest him and crush his arrogance no matter what.¡± ¡°You? Brother, it¡¯s not that I¡¯m looking down on you. If you go, you¡¯ll definitely be tortured to death by Jon.¡± The chat in the live stream exploded again because of Jon aiming at the policemander. Themander watched as the curtains slowly closed. He turned around and prepared to deploy the police who were participating in this drill. The temporarymand center of the police for this drill was set up in a RV. The RV had all kinds of equipment. They were all ready to use. Inside the temporarymand center, a few technicians from the police force were on the operating table, trying to ess the bank¡¯s surveince. Facing the situation of the bank being robbed, the first thing the police had to do was to maintain order at the scene after they arrived. Then, they had to try to connect to the bank¡¯s surveince camera to confirm the situation in the bank. ¡°Sir, we sessfully connected to the bank¡¯s surveince camera.¡± Themander walked over and looked at the screen. On the screen, there was a total of nine images. They were the images captured by the nine cameras in the bank. This scene made themander frown slightly. ¡°The robbers didn¡¯t intend to block the surveince cameras?¡± ording tomon sense, when robbers robbed a bank, they needed to block the cameras. This was beneficial to the robbers¡¯ actions. Moreover, themander had also studied Jon. During thest drill, Jon had directly destroyed the cameras. This made it impossible for the police to get information from the bank at first. It could be said that any robber would do something like covering the camera. But this time, Jon didn¡¯t cover the camera. ¡°Did he forget?¡± Themander in charge muttered. Then he thought it was impossible. Jon was so meticulous, how could he forget something as important as covering the camera? Obviously not. It was intentional. But what was the purpose of doing this? Themander couldn¡¯t figure it out. While themander was deep in thought, Gal Gadot was also broadcasting live in themand room with the cameraman. Because the windows and ss doors around the bank were blocked by the curtains, the situation inside the bank couldn¡¯t be seen from the outside. Therefore, they could onlye to themand room. Through the surveince footage obtained, the audience in the live stream could see what was happening inside the bank. ¡°Good lord, the same clothes, hats, masks, boots, the same routine, the same style.¡± ¡°During thest drill, Jon used this trick to make the police confused. It doesn¡¯t matter if it¡¯s a clich¨¦ old trick, as long as it works.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not easy for a robber to find someone dressed like this in the crowd.¡± ¡°But what I¡¯m thinking is, why didn¡¯t Jon cover the camera? Have he forgotten?¡± ¡°How could he have forgotten? With Jon¡¯s high IQ, he wouldn¡¯t have forgotten such an important thing.¡± ¡°So, it can only mean that he did it on purpose, but why did he do it on purpose? I really don¡¯t understand.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t understand either. After all, how can we think of the ideas of highly intelligent person? Let¡¯s just continue watching.¡± The audience saw the scene in the bank. They also began to discuss it. The familiar operation of having the robbers and hostages change into the same clothes made the audience call it an old trick. As for why Jon did not cover the bank¡¯s surveince cameras, the audience did not understand. ¡°First, monitor the situation in the bank. Then, determine how many hostages are in the bank, how many robbers, and what equipment the robbers have.¡± ¡°Then, bring up the scene before the robbers entered the bank.¡± Themander could not understand why Jon did not cover the cameras, so he simply stopped thinking about it. After all, it seemed that the surveince cameras were not covered, which was extremely beneficial to the police. Maybe it could even be a breakthrough point. After giving the order, themander came to a small ckboard and hung Jon¡¯s photo in the middle of the ckboard. Then, he picked up the chalk and began to write on it. ¡°Jon, cautious, fierce, highly intelligent, and has robbed banks twice. He is a habitual offender.¡± He was studying Jon. At the same time, he was trying to find a way to bring him into Jon¡¯s perspective through what he had studied. He needed to understand his opponent, let himself be his opponent, and used his opponent¡¯s thoughts to think, then he might be able to defeat his opponent. He didn¡¯t act rashly, because there were many hostages in Jon¡¯s hands. He had watched the previous drill roughly ten times from start to finish. He knew Jon very well. Jon had killed several police officersst time because of their reckless actions. Naturally, he would not make such a mistake again. Therefore, he had to figure out the number of hostages, the number of robbers, and the equipment of the robbers before making a decision. Before this drill, in order to be fair and just, themissioner had been preparing. As themander of the police force for this drill, he could not participate in the preparation. Therefore, he did not know what kind of teammates themissioner had arranged for Jon. He also did not know what equipment themissioner had given Jon. If he wanted to investigate, he would definitely be able to find it out with his authority. However, doing that was meaningless. In his heart, he was very serious about this drill that almost all theizens in the country were watching. Moreover, he really wanted to have a fair match with Jon once. So, he didn¡¯t use his position to prepare anything. Moreover, he didn¡¯t know that the target of Jon¡¯s robbery was the gold that themissioner put in the safe. In this drill, themissioner tried his best to be fair and just. So, in this current situation, themander was basically facing a real bank robbery. Chapter 69 - Jon鈥檚 Arrangements!

Chapter 69: Jon¡¯s Arrangements!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio In the bank. The hostages were squatting on the ground with their heads in their hands. The scene was silent. ¡°Leon, your mission is to go to the bank¡¯s surveince room and use the cameras outside the bank to monitor the police¡¯s every move ¡°If they make any moves, let me know immediately.¡± Jon took out a wireless walkie-talkie from his pocket and handed it to Leon Evans. There were cameras in the bank, and there were also cameras at the front and back doors. The police could check the situation inside the bank by connecting to the cameras inside the bank. Jon could also monitor them by connecting to the cameras outside. ¡°Okay.¡± Leon Evans adjusted his sses and said on the walkie-talkie. Then he went directly to the surveince room on the second floor of the bank. Through the preparation of the past few days, the robbery team had already figured out the structure of the bank, so they naturally knew where the surveince room of the bank was. ¡°Will,e with me.¡± Jon picked up a backpack from the ground and called Will Smith. He walked to the back door of the bank. Then, in the passage of the back door of the bank, Jon took out a few practice bombs from his backpack. That¡¯s right. He came here to surprise the police at the back door. The back door was the entrance for employees to go to work and rest. It involved employees¡¯ privacy, so there were no surveince cameras here. Jon¡¯s every move here would not be monitored by the police outside. And Will was an explosives expert, so he naturally knew the tricky spots to hide the bombs. A few minutester, Will Smith had already ced three practice bombs here. They were pulled by a very thin fishing line, so they were very difficult to find. If one identally touched the fishing line, the bombs would immediately detonate. Of course, there were some bomb disposal experts in the police force. There was a high probability that the three bombs that Will Smith had set up would be quietly defused by the police. After all, this was a ce that the surveince cameras could not detect. The police would naturally pay close attention to it. This was also a possibility. Therefore, Jon did not expect the three bombs to be able to stop the police¡¯s attack. And his final step was to set up an rm. This was a highly sensitive rm that Jon had bought from the system store for 10 points. If the police attacked from the back door, they would dismantle the bomb after they found it. And if they dismantled the bomb, they woulde to the side of the rm. At that time, the rm would make a sound. It would expose the police¡¯s tracks. And since Jon had hostages, the police could only attack quietly. After exposing their tracks, they would definitely choose to retreat. Otherwise, if they attacked forcefully and angered Jon, the hostages would be in danger. After arranging all this, Jon brought Will Smith back to the bank hall. At the same time in the temporarymand room, themander stared at the surveince screen. ¡°They went to the back door? They should have arranged something to prevent us from attacking from the back door.¡± Themander pondered. The moment Jon called Will Smith to go to the back door, the technician called him over. From the moment the two disappeared into the hall until they came back, themander saw everything. Even though themander didn¡¯t see where the two went with his own eyes, but with his many years of police experience, he quickly guessed it. ¡°Sir, we¡¯ve already found the surveince footage of the robbers entering the bank and the bank¡¯syout.¡± Just as themander was thinking, the police officer beside him said. ¡°Show me the surveince footage now.¡±, themander nodded and said. The technical police officer showed the footage of the robbers entering the bank. From the four of them swaggering over, to Will Smith taking out his gun and threatening the security personnel, to Jon driving the car, pulling a few big bags and a box, these scenes were all seen by themander. ¡°How arrogant.¡± Themander couldn¡¯t help but frown when he saw it. When others robbed a bank, they were all very careful and tried not to rm too many people. This group of robbers waspletely opposite. It was like they were afraid that others wouldn¡¯t be able to see theming and basically told everyone that they were going to rob the bank. Themander felt that his mind was in a mess. He didn¡¯t understand what was going on in Jon¡¯s mind. However, after looking at the surveince footage, he at least knew who the robbers were. After all, he knew all of them. Then, themander looked back at the current bank surveince footage. All the robbers and hostages were dressed the same. The only difference was the robber had a gun in his hand, but the hostages did not. He could only tell who the robber was and who was the hostages through this difference. And now, there were only two people in the bank lobby with G36-C assault rifles in the footage. They were talking to the two people who had returned from the back door. In other words, there were now four robbers in the lobby. Then, themander took theyout of the bank and looked at it. He guessed that the person who had left at the beginning had gone to the surveince room on the second floor. At this point, he had found the tracks of the five robbers. ¡°There are a total of five robbers. Four of them are in the lobby, and one is in the surveince room on the second floor. It seems that these robbers were prepared before they took action.¡± ¡°But from the surveince, they haven¡¯t gotten the money yet.¡±, themander said. At this moment, in the surveince screen. A robber pointed at the camera and said something to another robber. Themander could imagine it. This robber should be asking his partner for advice on whether to cover the camera. In the footage, another robber shook his head. He indicated that it was not necessary. He even looked up. But because these robbers were wearing masks and the surveince footage was not clear, themander did not recognize who was who. However, he had a strong premonition. The person looking at the camera was Jon! If the camera had not been covered before, it could be exined as Jon¡¯s negligence. But now, with his partner¡¯s reminder, Jon still did not cover the camera. This meant that he must have done it on purpose. He must have had some sort of n. But as for what Jon was thinking... Themander could not figure it out, and his expression gradually turned serious. At the same time, the audience in the live stream saw this scene as well. Thements surged again. ¡°See, I told you that Jon would not forget to cover the camera. The reason why he did not cover the camera was obviously for a purpose.¡± ¡°But what was the purpose? If he did not cover the camera, the robbers¡¯ every move would be monitored by the police.¡± ¡°Dude, if you can guess Jon¡¯s n, then you can be the police¡¯smander. Can¡¯t you see that the current policemander e is a little overwhelmed?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. The police and robbers have just started their confrontation, and the police¡¯smander already looks like he¡¯s having a hard time. Haha, we¡¯ll see what happens next.¡± Chapter 70 - Access to the Safe!

Chapter 70: ess to the Safe!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio While themander was struggling. Inside the bank. Jon was ready to make his move again. First, he arranged for Venus Alice to stay in the lobby and watch the hostages. Then, he took one of the hostages with him. He had Will Smith and Brown Williams pick up the big box they had brought in earlier. They head to the area behind the bank counter. Behind the bank counter was a very important part of the bank. That was where the bank¡¯s safe was. Themissioner had arranged for 100 kilograms of gold bars there. It would be very difficult to get into the safe area. With Jon¡¯s lockpicking skills, there was no way he could get to the doors outside the safe. Therefore, before Jon took action, he brought the highest-ranking manager among the hostages. The manager was a high-ranking staff of the bank. He obviously could open the bank¡¯s safe. ¡°Now, take us to the gold.¡± Jon brought the few of them to the first door, pointed the gun in his hand at the manager, and said coldly. Combined with his low-level Robber Aura, the manager trembled in fear. Even though he knew that this was a drill and Jon wasn¡¯t a real robber, he couldn¡¯t help but feel fear in his heart. At this moment, he was really afraid that these people would enter the safe and really rob the gold. Then, Jon would use his high IQ to slip away under the eyes of the police. After escaping from the pursuit, he would leave the United States and live a carefree life. The more the manager thought about it, the more he felt that his imagination was possible. After all, that was 100 kilograms of gold. In US dors, that was 10 million US dors. It was enough for a few people to spend their entire lives. No one couldn¡¯t be bought by the money. Even the manager himself would asionally have the idea of robbing a bank. But he knew better. His ability was not enough. Robbing a bank? He would go to jail. But the people in front of him were intelligent people. They could really steal the gold. When that time came, they would just leave. Then he would be implicated. If Jon knew what he was thinking, he would definitely scoff. Not to mention, afterpleting thest drill, the system had rewarded him with five million dors. This time, if he waited until the end of the drill and performed a little better, he would definitely get a high score. At that time, the system might even give Jon at least a few million dors. Why would he snatch these gold bars recklessly? ¡°Hurry up, sir. Otherwise, this heavy gun might very well hit on your head.¡±, Will Smith saw that the manager was still not moving, so he tightened his grip on the gun in his hand and spoke to him. ¡°Although this is a drill, the robbers will definitely use all avable means to snatch the gold inside. After all, the money inside is not yours, but if you get beaten up because of this, then it¡¯s totally not worth it.¡± Brown Williams also spoke. This sentence made the manager could not help but shiver. He was right. In order to steal the gold, although the robbers could not really kill him, it was very likely that they would beat him up and force him to submit. But when he really got beaten up, his face would be bruised and swollen. Who wouldpensate him then? Moreover, the money inside was not his after all. There was no need to argue with these robbers for other people¡¯s money. Besides, although this was a drill, it was also treated as a real battle. If it was a real battle, the robber pointed a gun at him and asked him to open the safe, would he still hesitate? Obviously not. Just a little hesitation, the irritable robber might use a real gun and blow his head off. When the manager came to his senses, he shakily took out the key from his own body. Jon was not only surprised to see this scene. When he was changing his clothes, Jon had already asked his teammates to take the hostage¡¯s belongings. It was cell phones, wallets, keys and the like. But the key to the safe was not found. It was obvious that the manager had used some kind of method to hide the key. He was quite good at hiding. Click. At this moment, the manager opened the first door. Jon immediately took out his walkie-talkie and ordered Leon Evans, who was in the surveince room on the second floor, ¡°Leon, cut off the signal to all the cameras heading to the vault immediately.¡± ¡°Roger.¡± Leon Evans¡¯s voice came through the walkie-talkie. Jon smiled slightly. Leon Evans was aputer expert. When he was in college, he hacked into Google with the permission of the Americanpany Google. This ability was not something an ordinary person could do. In the entire police force, in the field ofputers, If Leon imed he was the second ce, no one dared to say that they were the best. Once he cut off the surveince signal from the surveince room, the police outside would naturally not be able to connect to the surveince footage. Then, Jon led everyone into the first door. After walking about 15 meters, there was another door in front of him. This door could only be opened by fingerprint identification. Without waiting for Jon to speak, the manager walked forward and pressed his right thumb on the fingerprint identification area. After thinking it through, the manager decided to cooperate with the robbers. Therefore, facing this door, he didn¡¯t hesitate and immediately went forward to open it. He had to open it sooner orter. If he turned side, maybe the robbers would treat him better, so that he wouldn¡¯t be beaten up if they were unhappy. ¡°Fingerprint identification sessful. Pleasee in.¡± Inside the fingerprint identification area, a cold notification sounded. Everyone entered. They walked another ten meters. A third door appeared. This one was a retina lock. Seeing this, Jon frowned slightly. Obviously, he did not expect this bank to have such high security and a retina lock. He knew that in all the banks in the United States, there were many vault doors that did not have such locks. Not to mention the door to the safe. But when he thought about it, this was the head office of a bank. He was relieved. It was a head office. The security of the head office was definitely much better than the ordinary branch. The manager went forward and aimed his left eye at the retina identification camera. Soon, another cold voice sounded. ¡°Retina identification sessful. Pleasee in.¡± Following this voice, the door slowly opened to both sides, and an empty space slowly appeared before everyone¡¯s eyes. ¡°In front is the safe. The gold is ced in the center.¡± After the door opened. The manager looked at Jon and said carefully. Jon escorted the manager and two of his teammates into the room. They saw a pile of shinning gold bars in the empty space in the middle of the safe. Under the light, the gold bars emitted a faint golden light. It was dazzling. Chapter 71 - Think From the Opponent鈥檚 Perspective And Prepare In Advance!

Chapter 71: Think From the Opponent¡¯s Perspective And Prepare In Advance!

Jon looked at the pair of gold bars in front of him. He could not help but squint his eyes. He could tell at a nce that these gold bars were not normal gold bars. If they were normal gold bars, the volume of 100 kilograms would not be much. But these were all specially made. This pile of gold bars was all hollow, so in terms of volume, it was more than twice the size of a normal 100 kilograms gold bar. ¡°Oh, my god.¡± Will Smith noticed that something was wrong. He walked over and casually grabbed two gold bars. It was not as heavy as he had imagined. It was much lighter. He immediately knew that themissioner had done something to it. Such arge pile of gold bars, even if all the backpacks were used to store it, they might not be able to fit them all. ¡°This is within logic.¡± Jon looked at Will Smith, whose expression had changed slightly, and spoke slowly. ¡°When themissioner told me to rob the gold, I knew that things weren¡¯t that simple.¡± ¡°I originally thought that it would be 100 kilograms of normal gold bars. This way, the five of us can share the weight and transport it out.¡± ¡°But these specially made gold bars are empty inside. They are more than twice the size of normal gold bars. It will be difficult to take them away again.¡± ¡°Looks like themissioner has put in a lot of effort to create problems for the robbers in this drill.¡± Even though Jon said so, he didn¡¯t show a long face. His expression was still very rxed. It was like everything was within his expectations. ¡°You don¡¯t seem to be surprised by this situation. Do you have a way to get these things away?¡± Will Smith could not help but ask when he saw Jon¡¯s rxed look. He could not believe it in his heart. After all, although Jon was intelligent, he was not a god. How could he predict the future? ¡°Open the box and take a look.¡± Jon said and came to the side of the gold bar. This sentence made Will Smith¡¯s eyes widen. He did not really prepare for this situation, right? Then, Will Smith quickly opened the big box that they carried in. Inside the box was a small-scale gold furnace and more than ten two-centimeter-long hollow tubes. Will Smith was stunned. ¡°You¡¯re really prepared for this?¡± He looked at Jon in disbelief, his eyes full of shock. ¡°Actually, from themissioner¡¯s perspective, it¡¯s easy to imagine that in this drill, they definitely can¡¯t let the robbers take the gold so easily. Then, if I were themissioner, how would I increase the difficulty of the robbery?¡± ¡°It means to tamper with the gold, but the weight of the gold cannot be changed. We agreed on 100 kilograms in advance. If they put 200 kilograms during the real drill, it means they¡¯re cheating and it¡¯s not fair.¡± ¡°So, they can only tamper with the volume of the gold. If they make the gold hollow, the volume will increase, and the difficulty of the robbers¡¯ transportation will be greatly increased.¡± ¡°Robbing a bank? Of course, I must think of all the possible things that could happen, and then find a corresponding solution.¡± ¡°To say the least, even if themissioner did not prepare this trick, I would still prepare in advance to deal with it, it would not be a loss.¡± Jon analyzed slowly. Listening to this logical analysis, Will Smith¡¯s heart could not be more shocked. Jon putting himself into the opponent¡¯s perspective and thought about how to deal with himself! Oh my god! Jon was too strong. As expected of someone with a high IQ. At this moment, Will Smith suddenly have felt lucky. He was not Jon¡¯s opponent in this drill. Otherwise, how could he able to capture Jon? Jon already guessed what the police would do next in his mind. Jon had thought of ways to deal with the robbers in the police¡¯s perspective. He had thought of everything, not a single drop of water would be missed. How could the police capture them? ¡°Next, melt this pile of gold, put it in a hollow tube, and take it out.¡±, Jon walked around the pile of gold and said. The melting point of gold was 1,064.43 degrees Celsius, and the maximum power of this small furnace could reach 1,500 degrees Celsius. Therefore, this furnace couldpletely melt the gold. And after melting the gold, there would be no loss. Real gold was not afraid of fire. However, this furnace was not big. To melt the 100 kilograms of gold, it would take time. Therefore, Jon¡¯s most important task now was to stall for time with the police to make enough time to melt the gold. ¡°Okay.¡± Will Smith and Brown Williams nodded. The two of them admired Jon more and more. Jon could think of anything, as if there was nothing he couldn¡¯t do. Then the two of them began the melting process. And Jon walked out of the safe. Now, only Venus Alice was watching the hostages in the hall. If he didn¡¯t show up for a long time, it would easily create an opportunity for the police. Jon couldn¡¯t let the police know what he was doing. If the police didn¡¯t know where the robbers were going and why, they didn¡¯t dare to act rashly. In the temporarymand room, the technicians tried many times but were still unable to connect to the signal in the safe area. They could only give up helplessly. ¡°Sir, we are unable to connect to the surveince signal in the bank¡¯s safe. The robbers cut off the signal and don¡¯t want us to see the situation in the safe.¡± Themander was here. Looking at the screen that was shing with snow, his expression was extremely grave. Had he entered the safe? He did not want the police to see the scene in the safe. What was Jon trying to do? And this scene was captured by the live broadcast camera and appeared in Gal Gadot¡¯s live stream. ¡°Good god, he entered the safe just like that? The robbery was just the beginning.¡± ¡°It¡¯s a pity that we weren¡¯t able to see the scene inside. I don¡¯t know what kind of exciting scene it was.¡± ¡°I really hope that this time it will be like thest time. Jon will set up a live stream and show us his wonderful operation.¡± ¡°There should be a chance, but it¡¯s not the time yet. If the real climaxes, he should stream by himself.¡± ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡± ¡°But to be honest, even though I¡¯m not the one robbing the bank, I¡¯m very excited when I think of the bank was being robbed.¡± ¡°After robbing the bank, will Jon still be able to escape this time?¡± ¡°If it were me, I definitely wouldn¡¯t be able to film it. But the robber is Jon. I believe that he will be able to escape no matter how.¡± ¡°I believe that too.¡± Thement section in the live stream was very lively. Many of the viewers were discussing it, and it was very hyped up. Chapter 72 - Jon鈥檚 Plan!

Chapter 72: Jon¡¯s n!

At the bank, Jon came to the door of the safe, took out his walkie-talkie, and said to Leon Evans, who was in the surveince room on the second floor, ¡°Leon, cut off all the surveince signals in the bank. Open it again after you receive my order.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± Leon Evans responded and temporarily cut off all the surveince cameras in the bank as requested. At the same time, in the temporarymand room, all the screens and surveince cameras disappeared in an instant. Then, snowkes shed on the screen. Themander fell into deep thought again. This behavior. It meant that they could see the surveince cameras in the bank before, and it was Jon who deliberately let them see it. But now, Jon didn¡¯t want them to see it anymore. So, what exactly did he want to do? Themander pondered for a moment, looked at the technicians, and said, ¡°Can we confirm the number of hostages now?¡± He had just given this order. After such a long time, he should be able to confirm it. ¡°Sir, from the surveince footage, there are a total of nine hostages.¡± ¡°Although all the hostages are dressed the same as the robbers, they are all in the hall, so it¡¯s easier to confirm.¡±, a technician replied. At this time, they were staring at the surveince screen. After double checking, the results should not be wrong. Themander raised his eyebrows. Since the drill began, they had only confirmed how many robbers and hostages there were. The progress was a little slow. However, Jon told everyone in the bank to wear the same clothes, so themander did not dare to give the order to attack. Otherwise, the hostage would be in trouble. When all the surveince signals were blocked, Jon walked out of the safe area. He took the bank manager to the lobby. Then, Jon walked to the bathroom on the second floor of the bank. He went to the bathroom¡¯s storage room. He opened the door. There were two people inside. They were tied up and their mouths were glued shut. They were the bank security guards. Earlier, Jon had Will Smith tie up the two bank security guards and lock them in the storage room. The two security guards were confused. They were tied up for no reason. Because they didn¡¯t fight back. They were cooperative the whole time. But they were still tied up. After Jon opened the door, he tore off the tape on their mouths. Then, he took out two practice bombs from his backpack. ¡°These two are remote-controlled bombs. The remote control is in my hands.¡± ¡°Later, I will put these two things on your bodies. If you don¡¯t listen, I will detonate the bomb. At that time, you will be blown to pieces with a bang.¡±, Jon said with a cold smile. In fact, these were not remote-controlled bombs. They were two practice bombs. They had no lethality. The reason why he said they were remote-controlled bombs was to deceive these two security guards. Coupled with Jon¡¯s fierce temperament, the security personnel had already believed that these were real remote-controlled bombs. They were so scared that their legs were trembling. Then, Jon tied the two bombs to the two of them. Then, he put on the same clothes and masks as himself. Then, Jon took them to the hall on the first floor. The two security guards had no intention of resisting. Jon let the two security guards sit in front of the hostages, while he took the G36-C assault rifle and sat next to them. ¡°Leon, reconnect the surveince signal except for the safe area.¡± Then Jon took out the walkie-talkie and said to Leon Evans in the surveince room. ¡°Roger.¡±, Leon Evans immediately followed Jon¡¯s instructions. At the same time in themand room, the screen that was shing with snow showed the surveince footage again. When the technician saw this, he quickly said, ¡°Sir, the surveince footage in the bank is connected again.¡± Themander rushed over. He saw that the footage was restored. He immediately said, ¡°Zoom in on the surveince footage of the hostages.¡± The technician did as he was told. Themander counted the hostages. There were nine of them. None of them were missing. Then he looked at the scene where the robbers were. Three robbers were sitting in the chair opposite the hostages. One robber was standing aside. Two of the robbers had G36-C assault rifles in their hands. Another two robbers had no guns in their hands. It was exactly the same situation as before they entered the safe. This scene made themander somewhat uncertain. The same people. The robbers and the hostages did not change. Then. During the period when the surveince signal was cut off, what did Jon do? Could it be that he did not do anything? Something was wrong. If it was Jon who had the surveince image cut off, but he did not use this time to do anything, it did not make sense. Could it be that the surveince signal was not cut off by Jon? ¡°Other than being cut off by the robber, was there any other situation where the surveince signal was cut off by something else?¡± Themander pondered for a moment and asked the technician. ¡°Yes, sir. Since we are using awork connection to monitor the situation, there are many situations where the connection would be affected.¡±, the technician said. Themander nodded. In other words, the situation where the signal was cut off just now was not done by Jon? At this moment, he noticed that there was a ck backpack next to Jon. The backpack was bulging, and it was obvious that there was something inside. It should be the target of the bank robbery. In other words, when the surveince signal was cut off just now, it wasn¡¯t Jon¡¯s doing, and he didn¡¯t do anything else. During the time the surveince signal was cut off, he just robbed the money and came back. This exnation made sense. Because from the surveince footage, everything was normal. It was a normal robbery process. From entering the bank, to taking hostages, to threatening the manager to open the bank and take the money out. This process was too normal. Moreover, the technician reported the number of hostages was nine, and the number of robbers in the hall was four. There was no change in the current situation. It was a perfect match. Although the two security guards were slightlyrger than Will Smith and Brown Williams, they were wearing loose clothing, and the two of them were sitting in chairs with their backs to the camera, so the difference in size was not easily seen. At this moment. Through the live stream, the audience also saw the scene in the bank. ¡°It looks like Jon has already robbed the money. Next, he should think of a way to escape. The face-to-face confrontation between the police and bandits is about to begin.¡± ¡°Do you guys think that this time, Jon will be able to sessfully escape?¡± ¡°I never doubt that Jon will be able to escape. I¡¯m just curious what method he will use to escape.¡± ¡°Hopefully, it will bring us a shocking escape.¡± At this moment, everyone including themander, the police officers in themand room, and the audience in the live stream. They all thought that Jon had already gotten the money, and now it was time for him to think of a way to escape. Chapter 73 - The Police Were Confused, the SWAT Team Were Here!

Chapter 73: The Police Were Confused, the SWAT Team Were Here!

They didn¡¯t see it at all. There were two robbers in the hall who were disguised by the security guards. And the two real robbers were in the safe, melting the gold with a furnace. Only themissioner found something wrong. After all, the specially made gold was not small. It was impossible to fit in such a backpack. However, even though themissioner found something wrong, he did not provide information to themander. After all, he was the referee in this drill. In order to be fair and just, he would not provide information to the police officers. In the bank. At this time, Jon had already started his next n. ¡°Venus, take four hostages to the conference room on the second floor. If the police attack the first floor, you will directly kill one hostage, give the warning at the surveince camera.¡± Jon said to Venus Alice who was beside him. The hostages were divided into two groups. Five were left in the hall on the first floor, while the other four were taken up to the second floor by Venus Alice. This way, the hostages would be scattered, and it would bring a lot of pressure to the police. This way, even if the police wanted to attack, they would have to attack the first and second floors together. Otherwise, no matter which floor they attacked, the robbers on the other floor would attack the hostages. ¡°Roger.¡± Regarding Jon¡¯s orders, Venus Alice did not have any doubts. She brought the four hostages upstairs. In the temporarymand room. ¡°Sir, the robbers have made a move again.¡± Looking at the surveince footage, a technician immediately reported the situation. Hearing that, themander immediately walked over. Looking at the surveince footage, he saw a robber with a gun leading a few hostages to the second floor. Themander¡¯s expression became solemn once again. Jon really did not rest for a moment. Every move could make it more difficult for themander. As themander of the police, He naturally knew that Jon¡¯s goal was to make it more difficult for the police. However, he didn¡¯t understand. Why would Jon scatter the hostages after robbing them? Shouldn¡¯t he be nning how to escape now? However, Jon didn¡¯t seem to have any thoughts of escaping. Could it be that he wanted to stay at the bank and confront the police? If that were the case, it would be disadvantageous to the robbers. After all, there were many police officers, and they couldpletely surround the bank in shifts. As time passed, the robbers¡¯ spirits would be greatly diminished, and they would be exposed. In other words, the longer the confrontation with the policested, the less likely the robbers would be able to escape. Themander looked at the surveince footage. One of the robbers brought four hostages to a conference room on the second floor. There were surveince cameras in this conference room. The police could still monitor the situation in the conference room through the surveince cameras. ¡°What should we do, sir? Should weunch an attack?¡± A police officer asked. ¡°They have too many hostages. If weunch an attack now, it will easily threaten the lives of the hostages.¡± ¡°The best way is to let the robbers leave the bank and reduce the number of hostages. Then, we¡¯ll think of a way to capture them in one fell swoop.¡± ¡°Wait for the SWAT team toe over, and have their negotiators go and negotiate with the robbers to see if they want a means of transportation.¡± Themander spoke. ¡°Yes, sir.¡±, the police officer responded. The he nodded. He could not guess what Jon was thinking at all. For example, deliberately letting them see the surveince footage. For example, when he was about to escape, he wanted to confront the police. It had been less than two hours since the start of the drill. Since the robbers had hostages, they were still in a tense state at this time. It was not a good time for the police tounch an attack. At this time, the only thing they could do was to let the negotiatormunicate with the robbers first to appease the robbers¡¯ emotions. ording to psychology, under the circumstances of being surrounded by the police, the psychological pressure of the robbers would be greater and greater. As time passed, their high vignce would slowly tire. The longer the confrontation, the easier it would be to reveal ws. Moreover, many robbers would not be able to bear the mental breakdown and directly surrender after their mental strength was exhausted. Therefore, in bank robberies, when the police surrounded the robbers, they would slowly waste time and wear down the robbers¡¯ mental strength. However, themander did not want to surround the robbers in the bank for a long time. Because he found that Jon seemed to be trying to stall for time. With Jon¡¯s behavior, there must be some kind of n. Of course, he couldn¡¯t let the other side get what they wanted. So, he was going to send a negotiator to see if he could find anything. In the bank, Jon was sitting in a chair. Beside him were the two trembling security guards. Jon looked up at the time. It was 3:40 in the afternoon. When they started, it was 2:00 sharp. From the moment they had attacked until now, only an hour and 40 minutes had passed. At this moment, from Jon¡¯s walkie-talkie, Leon Evans¡¯s voice rang out. ¡°Boss, the SWAT team has arrived.¡± He was on the second floor monitoring the police¡¯s movements. When the SWAT team arrived, he had immediately noticed and reported to Jon. ¡°Got it.¡±, Jon replied, but he didn¡¯t do anything. He still sat quietly. He knew very well that with the current situation, even if the SWAT team came, they wouldn¡¯t dare to attack rashly. After all, he had nine hostages in his hands, and he had scattered the hostages. It would be too difficult to attack rashly. But the bank staff didn¡¯t think so. Among them, the SWAT team a group of very powerful people. Now that the SWAT wasing, perhaps they would be rescued soon. Therefore, after hearing the arrival of the SWAT team, they were more or less felt relieved. However, they were still under Jon¡¯s control. Even if they rxed a little, they did not dare to show it too obviously. After the SWAT team arrived, they began to deploy. The snipers upied the advantageous sniping spots nearby, while the remaining SWAT team members were fully armed and ready for orders. ¡°Sir, what¡¯s the situation now?¡± The SWAT team leader came to the temporarymand room and asked themander about the situation. After all, he had just arrived and did not know the situation yet. ¡°There are five robbers. One is an explosives expert, one is aputer expert, one is a sharpshooter, one is a super driver, and the other is a highly intelligent robber.¡± ¡°Now they control nine hostages and split them into two groups. Four hostages are in a conference room on the second floor, and the remaining five hostages are in the hall on the first floor.¡± ¡°These hostages are all guarded by armed robbers.¡± Themander briefly described the current situation. As he spoke, the SWAT team leader looked at the surveince footage. Chapter 74 - Negotiator!

Chapter 74: Negotiator!

After themander finished speaking. The SWAT team leader said, ¡°These robbers are really smart. They even know to change all the hostages into the same clothes as themselves. However, why didn¡¯t the robbers block the cameras? Did they forget?¡± ¡°It was intentional. His aplice warned him before, but he still didn¡¯t block the cameras.¡± ¡°All the surveince footage inside the bank that we can see is what he wanted us to see.¡± Themander¡¯s tone was a little weak. After all, up until now, Jon had been leading them by the nose. ¡°Interesting.¡± The SWAT team leader smiled. Of course, he knew Jon. A high IQ robber indeed lived up to his reputation. The SWAT team leader was filled with anticipation when he dealt with such a highly intelligent person. At the same time. The audience in the live stream saw the arrival of the SWAT team and started to discuss animatedly once again. ¡°The arrival of the SWAT team means that the manpower of this drill has been upgraded. Whether it is thebat ability or the actualbat experience of the SWAT team, they are definitely better than the police officers.¡± ¡°This SWAT team should be very powerful. Look at them standing there like javelins, emitting sharpness aura.¡± ¡°Now that the SWAT team has arrived, I don¡¯t know how long Jon can hold on.¡± ¡°I hope Jon can hold on for a little longer. Otherwise, we¡¯ve been looking forward to this drill for more than ten days. If they¡¯re caught in less than two hours, that would be very disappointing.¡± ¡°Two hours? You¡¯re underestimating Jon too much. I think even if the SWAT teames, they¡¯ll have to expend a lot of energy to catch him. After all, Jon is a highly intelligent robber.¡± ¡°Looks like none of you are optimistic that Jon will win? I think Jon will be able to escape sessfully.¡± ¡°Yeah, I also think that the final winner will be Jon. His performancest time was too eye-catching.¡± ¡°Last time will be the same as this time? Let me put it this way. It¡¯s only a matter of time before Jon is captured by the SWAT team.¡± The audience was discussing fervently. Seeing the arrival of the SWAT team, many people did not think highly of Jon. They all thought that he would be captured by the SWAT. After all, the SWAT was not like the police. With Jon leading four teammates, there was almost no chance of winning. And now, everyone only hoped that Jon would be able to hold on for a little longer and not get caught. After all, they had been looking forward to this drill for a long time. If it ended hastily, they would really be disappointed. Therefore, the audience hoped that Jon would be able to hold on for a little longer. And thesements, Gal Gadot also saw them. This made her inwardly snort softly. They all didn¡¯t think highly of Jon. Just wait and see. When the time came, he would definitely surprise the audience. She was very confident that Jon would be able to escape. Just as Gal Gadot was thinking about this, the SWAT team leader spoke, ¡°Sir, have you made a n now?¡± As themander was themander-in-chief of this drill, the SWAT team leader still had to ask for his opinion. Thinking about it. Themander had been in a stalemate with the robbers for more than an hour. He had a better understanding of the situation and should have made a n. ¡°After the robbers got the money, they didn¡¯t have the intention to escape immediately. Instead, they divided the hostages into two groups, showing the intention of confronting the police.¡± ¡°Obviously, they are stalling for time.¡± ¡°I think the robbers must have some other n, so I n to ask you to send a negotiator to the bank to negotiate with the robbers and see if you can find some useful information.¡± Themander said with a slight frown. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± The SWAT team leader nodded and did not question the decision-making of themander. After all, he was themander-in-chief in this drill. Moreover, based on the current situation, it was impossible to force an attack, so they could only send a negotiator first. Therefore, the SWAT team leader also agreed with the decision-making of themander. Then, the SWAT team leader immediately made arrangements. ¡°Right.¡± As if he suddenly thought of something, themander said, ¡°If the robber asks the negotiator to enter the bank to negotiate, this won¡¯t do.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The SWAT team leader responded. He naturally knew why themander said this. In thest drill, Jon had asked the negotiator to enter the bank to negotiate. When the negotiator entered the bank, Jon tied him up. An extra hostage for Jon. In the bank. ¡°Boss, the negotiator from the SWAT team hase out. It looks like he wants to negotiate with you.¡± Leon Evans reported the information to Jon in a timely manner. Negotiator? Jon raised his eyebrows. Then, he heard someone outside the bank. ¡°Listen up, robbers inside. I¡¯m a negotiator with the SWAT team. I¡¯m here to help you negotiate.¡± The negotiator was five or six meters away from the bank¡¯s door. He spoke through the loudspeaker. This was amon opening line for a negotiator. He stated his identity and emphasized that he had no ill intentions. He was here to help the robbers. This way, he could lower the resistance of the robbers. Jon stood behind the curtains of the bank. He did not open the curtains, nor did he show his head. He knew that there were at least two snipers on the rooftop opposite the bank, ready to fire. If he opened the curtains at this time, he would be a living target. ¡°Now that the police have surrounded you, it¡¯s futile for you to resist in the bank. As long as you don¡¯t harm the hostages, you can ask for anything.¡± The negotiator continued. He first put pressure on the robbers, then let them make demands. It was also to deal with the robbers psychologically and let them know their situation. ¡°I want a helicopter with full fuel.¡± ¡°Also, it¡¯s going to be night soon. In an hour, prepare dinner for the hostages and the robbers and send it to the bank.¡± Jon took out a loudspeaker from his backpack and shouted at the outside of the bank. As he shouted, he moved his position at the same time. It was so that the sniper outside would not aim onto him. The first request was very unreasonable. The police could not do it at all. As for the second request, Jon did not just randomly say it. He did not specify how many hostages there were. He just wanted to see if his trick of using security guards to impersonate the robbers had been seen through. This step was crucial to his overall n. If it had not been seen through, it would have been even better for him. If it had been seen through, he would have been able to adjust his n in time and make another arrangement. Otherwise, if the police had seen through this trick, but he had not known in time, it would have dyed the adjustment of the n. At that time, he would force to act passively. Chapter 75 - Planes And Rockets, Prepare to Kill the Negotiator!

Chapter 75: nes And Rockets, Prepare to Kill the Negotiator!

¡°A fully fueled helicopter? Did I hear wrong? How dare he make such a request?¡± Outside the temporarymand room. The SWAT team leader stood next to themander and said in disbelief. Since Jon was standing behind the ss door and shouting through the loudspeaker, he could be heard clearly from the temporarymand room. ¡°You didn¡¯t hear wrong.¡±, themander frowned and said. ¡°This request is nonsense. Even a real robber wouldn¡¯t make such a request, right?¡± The SWAT team leader also frowned. ¡°Jon really dares to make such a request. To say the least, even if he did get a helicopter, would he fly it?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think he has any intention of negotiating, so he made such a random request.¡± This was definitely not the way to negotiate. The real negotiation was based on the agreement of both sides. And now, for the Jon¡¯s first request, it was obviously impossible for the police to do it. With Jon¡¯s brain, he naturally knew that the police could not do this request. So, in other words, Jon did not have any sincerity in negotiating at all. ¡°That¡¯s right, the robbers just don¡¯t want to negotiate. At first, I thought that Jon had some purpose, but now it seems that he just wants to stall for time.¡± ¡°But if they want to stall for time, they should cherish this opportunity to negotiate, right?¡± ¡°After all, through negotiation, we can offer something that we can do, but we have to spend time to prepare. Wouldn¡¯t that be better to achieve the goal of stall for time?¡± Themander rubbed his temples. He felt that his mind was a little confused. The robbers had already gotten the money, why didn¡¯t they leave? Why were they still stalling? It didn¡¯t make sense. They must have missed some details. Or was it that Jon didn¡¯t want to escape at all, but was stalling in the bank until the end of the drill? It was possible, but it wasn¡¯t very likely to happen. From what he knew about Jon, he felt that Jon wouldn¡¯t do such a low-level thing. At the same time, in the live stream. When the audience heard Jon¡¯s request, they all began to buy gifts in the live stream. [ My Focker gifted a ne. ] [ Mamahaha gifted two nes. ] [ Come To my Room Tonight And Feed Me gifted a rocket. ] Not long after, in the official live stream of Gal Gadot, more than 400 nes and dozens of rockets were received. ¡°Tell Jon that there are no helicopters here. There is no need for a helicopter when that¡¯s a ne that is more advanced. The ne has already been sent out, but I don¡¯t know if it has been fully refueled.¡± ¡°Me too. I also gifted a ne because I was afraid that one ne would not be enough.¡± ¡°Now, a conservative estimate is that we have gifted more than 400 nes. It should be enough for the robbers to fly until the end of the drill. Haha.¡± ¡°If it really can¡¯t be done, I have even sent a rocket. It wouldn¡¯t be a problem for it to reach the moon directly. However, it might be a little troublesome to arrest the robbers when the timees.¡± ¡°Jon: Good guy, have you filled up the rocket fuel?¡± ¡°Jon: You might not believe it, but I just wanted a helicopter to escape from the bank. In the end, someone wanted to send me out of earth?¡± ¡°Sorryrades, I broke through the defense, Hahaha.¡± ¡°Good god, you guys are so hrious. This was supposed to be a serious drill, but you guys turned it into a variety show.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t want to, but seeing someone take the lead, I couldn¡¯t help but follow the flow.¡± ¡°But back at the club, Jon¡¯s ability to attract money is also very scary, right? He received so many gifts in a short period of time.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. After all, more than 20 million people are watching Jon¡¯s drill online. He has to show some face.¡± The chat in the live stream surged wildly. As the official live broadcast reporter, Gal Gadot naturally paid attention to the situation in the live stream at all times. When she saw the screen filled with nes, rockets, andments, she could not help but burst outughing. Originally, as a journalist with good professional qualities, Gal Gadot would notugh no matter how funny things were. But this time, she really could not hold it in. ¡°What are youughing at, Ma¡¯am?¡± Beside her, themander and the SWAT team leader were still having a headache over Jon¡¯s conditions. They suddenly heard augh. They all turned to look at Gal Gadot. Themander asked curiously. ¡°Ahem.¡± Gal Gadot looked a little embarrassed. She cleared her throat and handed the tablet that showed the live broadcast to themander. When themander saw the screen full of gifts and overflowingments, three ck lines appeared on his forehead. On the other side, the negotiator heard Jon¡¯s request. It was impossible to get a helicopter. Even if he could, he could not give it to the robbers. Escaping in the air was not like onnd. As long as he was given a helicopter, he could fly to a ce where the police could not see him immediately. It was basically impossible to catch him again. He held the loudspeaker and said, ¡°You want a helicopter filled with oil. We can¡¯t do that at all. Can you change your request, for example, a car filled with oil?¡± ¡°As long as we can do what you want, we will try our best to satisfy you.¡± ¡°If you can¡¯t get a helicopter, don¡¯t waste my time.¡±, in the bank, Jon held the loudspeaker and said coldly. He was now ying a bank robber, but from the starting of the drill until now, he had not truly show how a real robber was supposed to like. It was time to put some pressure on the police. Even though his current goal was to stall for time, it was getting too boring. While he was putting pressure on the police, he was also increasing the difficulty of the drill. ¡°Venus, kill this negotiator.¡± Jon held the walkie-talkie and gave orders to Venus Alice, who was guarding the four hostages in the meeting room on the second floor. ¡°Roger that!¡± Venus Alice did not ask why after receiving Jon¡¯s orders. Even though the order of killing the negotiator was out of the blue, she did not question it at all. Since the four of them already regarded Jon as theirmander, they could only carry out Jon¡¯s orders. Although killing a negotiator was a little ridiculous, she knew that Jon must have his own ns. Venus Alice took out her backpack and took out her LR5 sniper rifle. Then she found a hidden ce. As a sharpshooter and professional sniper, Venus Alice naturally knew the perfect sniper position outside the bank. She also knew where the police sniper was lying in wait. So, she needed to hide herself, not to appear in the police sniper¡¯s scope. After hiding her position. She aimed the LR5 sniper rifle¡¯s muzzle at the negotiator. Chapter 76 - The Negotiator Was Shot!

Chapter 76: The Negotiator Was Shot!

The negotiator was a member of the SWAT team and wore a SWAT uniform. He had a helmet on his head and a bulletproof vest on his body. Venus was aiming at the negotiator¡¯s helmet. The power of the LR5 sniper rifle was too great. Within a distance of less than 10 meters, even wearing a helmet was useless. When Venus Alice was aiming at the negotiator, the police sniper who was monitoring the bank on the opposite floor discovered Venus Alice¡¯s gun barrel sticking out of the window. ¡°Reporting, the robber on the second floor of the bank has a sniper rifle in her hand. She is now aiming at the negotiator. Request the negotiator to evacuate immediately!¡± The police sniper reported the situation. The moment the SWAT team leader heard the report, his face froze. He hurriedly said to the microphone, ¡°The robber has a sniper rifle in his hand. Evacuate quickly! Evacuate quickly!¡± But obviously., it was already toote. When the negotiator received the order from the SWAT team leader, he was stunned for a moment. Obviously, he did not expect that the robber would actually n to attack him. Weren¡¯t they afraid that this move would anger the police? After being stunned, the negotiator turned around and wanted to leave. On the second floor of the bank. Venus Alice pulled the trigger. With a bang, the nk hit the negotiator¡¯s helmet, causing red smoke to rise. The negotiator was killed. Because the nk cartge used in the drill didn¡¯t have much effect on the body. For determination, themissioner had installed induction equipment on all the police officers. If they were hit, the induction equipment on their bodies would immediately emit smoke. In other words, they were eliminated. ¡°The negotiator has been killed and will withdraw from the drill.¡± Seeing the red smokeing out of the negotiator¡¯s body, themissioner, who had been silent, announced. ¡°Sniper, can you lock onto the robbers on the second floor?¡± Seeing that the negotiator had been eliminated, the SWAT team leader asked the sniper into the microphone. ¡°Sniper No. 1 can¡¯t aim at the target!¡± ¡°Sniper No. 2 can¡¯t aim at the target!¡± ¡°Sniper No. 3 can¡¯t aim at the target!¡± ¡°Sniper No. 4 can¡¯t aim at the target either. The robber is very conscious, and her body is blocked by the load-bearing wall.¡± The four snipers responded to the SWAT team leader in turn. The SWAT team leader had a serious look on his face. The robber had already fired, and the snipers on his side couldn¡¯t see her? It seemed that this group of robbers was really not easy to deal with. ¡°Your position is most likely exposed. Quickly change positions.¡± The SWAT team leader spoke to the four snipers. To be able to urately hide in a ce where the four snipers couldn¡¯t aim and fire, it meant that the robbers already knew the sniper¡¯s position. Staying in the original position was no longer of any use. At this time, it could change to another position. In the bank. ¡°Boss, the negotiator has been killed.¡± Venus Alice put away her sniper rifle and looked at the four hostages who were trembling in fear. She reported the situation to the walkie-talkie. ¡°Well done.¡±, Jon said with satisfaction. Jon was very satisfied that Venus Alice acted decisively without asking for the reason. Eight days before the drill, he had been training them on how to be a qualified robber. Now, he saw that they were all invested in it. At this time, the use of nks was shown. If they used real guns likest time, what should they do if they wanted to eliminate the negotiators? Take a real shot? That was obviously impossible. At that time, they might be put in a passive position because of the use of real guns. Then, Jon picked up the loudspeaker and shouted to the outside of the bank, ¡°Killing the negotiator is just a warning. You¡¯d better do as I ask. Otherwise, wait to collect the bodies of the hostages in the bank.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s cold voice, themander and the SWAT team leader felt a headache. They shot at the SWAT team member meant that the situation in this drill had escted. In the live stream, as the sound of gunshots rang out, the chat surged crazily. ¡°It¡¯sing, it¡¯sing. The robbers have shot and killed the police officers. The real confrontation between the police and the robbers has begun.¡± ¡°That¡¯s what makes it interesting. If it¡¯s just a boring stalemate and confrontation, then it will be boring.¡± ¡°The shooting of the police officers has escted. What will the police respond to it next?¡± ¡°Should we continue the stalemate, or should we arrange a helicopter ording to the robber¡¯s instructions?¡± ¡°But no matter what, the ruthless robber fromst time has returned. Jon is as serious about this drill as he wasst time.¡± ¡°Yeah, he¡¯s ruthless. He kills people at the slightest disagreement. That¡¯s how charming Jon is. He matches his character as a violent robber.¡± The audience discussed Jon killing the negotiator. They were all guessing how the police would react. At this moment. The number of people watching the live broadcast had already reached 30 million, breaking the record set by Gal Gadot not long ago. This number was basically not something that any media live stream could reach. For Gal Gadot¡¯s career, it had already reached a peak. At this moment, other than Gal Gadot, there were also many other media outlets broadcasting live. However, they were all outside the police cordon. They couldn¡¯t get any information about the police or the robbers at all. Therefore, even though this drill was very popr, the number of views they received was pitifully small. In the temporarymand room. ¡°We can basically confirm that there are three robbers and five hostages on the first floor. One of the robbers is holding a G36-C assault rifle, and the rest of the weapons are unknown. As for the other two robbers, the surveince shows that they are not armed.¡± ¡°In the conference room on the second floor, there is a robber and four hostages. The robber is armed with a G36-C assault rifle and a high-precision sniper rifle.¡± ¡°In the surveince room on the second floor, there is a robber who is observing the situation around the bank through the surveince.¡± Themander told the SWAT team about the current situation they had. The SWAT team leader nodded as he thought about countermeasures. Their negotiator was killed. This was an extreme provocation from the robbers, so they didn¡¯t feel good. Now, they were prepared to take some measures. ¡°The robbers divided the hostages into two groups to prevent us from ambushing them. At first, I thought they were trying to buy time, but judging from the gunshots of the negotiator, they didn¡¯t seem to have any intention of buying time.¡± ¡°The robbers killing the negotiator is a provocation to the police.¡± Themander continued to speak with a serious and solemn expression. It looked like what he was facing now was not a drill, but a real battle. ¡°Do you have any good suggestions for the current situation?¡± After themander finished talking about the situation, he asked the personnel in themand room. Although he was themander, this was the time to brainstorm. The people standing here were also the leaders of this drill, so themander also had to ask for their opinions. Chapter 77 - The Police Are Preparing for a Raid

Chapter 77: The Police Are Preparing for a Raid

¡°Why aren¡¯t these two robbers armed?¡± At this moment, the SWAT team leader looked at the surveince footage in the bank lobby and couldn¡¯t help but ask. What he asked was naturally the two security guards disguised as robbers. ¡°I¡¯m not too sure. Maybe the guns aren¡¯t enough, or maybe Jon deliberately set up a diversion to confuse the public.¡± Themander said. He had naturally discovered this situation a long time ago. But he had never understood Jon¡¯s intention. With Jon¡¯s intelligence, he would not do something without a purpose. The reason why he did not give the two robbers guns was naturally for a purpose. As for the specific purpose, he did not know. The SWAT team leader nodded and temporarily put this question down. He said, ¡°The robbers are vicious, and they don¡¯t seem to be following any moral code. No one knows what they will do next.¡± ¡°I suggest that before the robbers attack the hostages, two teams attack the bank. One team will attack the second floor from the roof while the other team will enter from the back door. The robbers will be caught unprepared.¡± The SWAT team was best at raiding. As long as the n was well-nned, the SWAT team leader felt that the SWAT team could enter the bank without the robbers noticing. ¡°The robbers have nine hostages, and the hostages are dressed the same as the robbers. Under such circumstances, even if we can enter the bank, we won¡¯t be able to confirm who is the hostage and who is the robber.¡± ¡°Also, the robbers had tampered with the passageway at the back door of the bank when the drill started.¡± ¡°There¡¯s an explosives expert among the robbers. They should be in the passageway at the back door of the bank, filled with bombs, waiting for us to take the bait.¡± Another police officer spoke up. He did not rmend a raid. The sess rate of a raid was not high. Moreover, if it failed, it might anger the robbers and directly threaten the lives of the hostages. Therefore, if the raid failed, the consequences would be very serious. ¡°Although the raid is difficult, this is also an opportunity for the police to take the initiative. Otherwise, we will be led by the nose by the robbers.¡± ¡°Moreover, this is not the first time this robber has participated in a drill. From his previous drill, it seems that he has a well-nned escape n ¡°Although we don¡¯t know why the robbers didn¡¯t leave after they took the money, this is definitely part of the robbers¡¯ n. It is for the better escape in the future.¡± ¡°If we don¡¯t take action after a long time, we will let the robbers carry out their own n. The final result is very likely that the robbers will escape from our eyes.¡±, another police officer analyzed the situation clearly. A raid might not be a better method, but if they didn¡¯t take action, they would bepletely on the passive side. Themander listened carefully and said, ¡°First of all, this is still a drill. What is the purpose of the drill?¡± ¡°The purpose is to let us discover the problem and try to prevent it from happening again in actualbat ¡°If we don¡¯t dare to identify our mistakes during the drill, then what should we do if we really face such a situation one day?¡± ¡°Moreover, it seems that the robber has no intention of escaping. We can¡¯t guess what the robber wants to do now, but he is a highly intelligent robber, so he must have a detailed n. Our retreat will only allow his detailed n to proceed in the direction he wants.¡± In the beginning, his idea was to stall the robber for time for the safety of the hostage. Then, he would wait until the robbers showed signs of weakness before taking action. However, on second thought¡­ Jon was not an ordinary robber. How could an ordinary robber use all kinds of shocking methods in the first drill? How could an ordinary robber rob the Blue Bank without anyone noticing? He was too smart. Every step he took was unpredictable. If this continued, the situation might bepletely out of the police¡¯s control. Indeed, the risk of a raid was too great, but if it was a real battle? What should he do in such a situation? ¡°From now on, prepare for a raid. I want to see a detailed raid n within half an hour.¡± ¡°Also, ording to the second request of the robbers, order 14 dinners and deliver them within half an hour.¡±, themander looked around and said. They could not be yed by Jon all the time, so no matter how risky it was, they had tounch a raid on Jon. No matter what the final result was, this raid should at least be able to disrupt Jon¡¯s n. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± A unified response sounded from the temporarymand room. Following that, the SWAT team leader began to formte the raid n. This was because the SWAT teams were the ones to carry out the raid, so naturally, he would be the one to formte the n. And as themander decided tounch a sneak attack, the live stream¡¯s chat once again surged wildly. ¡°¡±If we don¡¯t dare to identify our mistakes during the drill, then what should we do if we really face such a situation one day? This sentence is too good.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. Is a drill afraid of making mistakes? Not really. After all, the purpose of a drill is to discover mistakes. As long as they can treat it seriously, making mistakes during the drill is nothing.¡± ¡°Themander has said too much. If they are still restricted during the drill, that would be too sullen. Let¡¯s go and have a big fight with the robbers.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The robbers have already killed a police officer. How can they still be timid? Who cares if the chances of failure are high? Let¡¯s attack them first.¡± Because of one sentence. Themander had attracted a lot of fans, and it resonated a lot in the live stream. The police decided tounch a raid in half an hour. In the next half an hour, they had to stabilize the robbers first. All the police officers stood at the same ce, not daring to act rashly even when they were focused. In the bank. Jon sat on a chair, picked up the walkie-talkie, and said to Will Smith, who was still in the safe, ¡°Will, when will the gold be melted?¡± It had been nearly an hour since the gold furnace had been moved into the safe area. After such a long time, even if the furnace was a little small, it should be almost done. ¡°There are still seven or eight rounds left.¡±, Will reported the situation to Jon. ¡°Okay.¡± Jon replied and put away the walkie-talkie. Seven or eight rounds took about half an hour. In other words, it would take another half an hour to bring the gold away. However, there were many police officers outside. It was not easy to leave. Even though his n was very thorough, there were a total of five people in the robbery team. A team of five robbers was too big of a target. Chapter 78 - Before the Raid!

Chapter 78: Before the Raid!

Jon¡¯s n could only attempt to get two people to leave. The remaining three people still needed to attract the firepower. However, if two of the robbers managed to leave with the gold, it would be considered a victory for the robbers. Therefore, Jon still needed to discuss with the four people in a while to see who would leave with him. As for the remaining three, they could only sacrifice themselves for the team¡¯s victory. Time slowly passed. During this period, both the police and the robbers were waiting. The police were waiting for the ambush n to bepleted beforeunching a raid. As for Jon, he was waiting for the smelting furnace to finish smelting all the gold. The audience in the official live broadcast room felt a sense of calm before the storm. Although there were fewerments spamming at this time, the hype did not cold down. The audience was looking forward to the first face-to-face confrontation between the police and the robbers. On the inte and on the forums, posts about the drill also appeared one after another. ¡°Shocking! During the Pennsylvania drill, the robbers killed the negotiator in an instant.¡± ¡°Ridiculous! They killed the police officers without any restraint during the drill. Aren¡¯t the robbers afraid that they won¡¯t be able to escape in the end?¡± ¡°During the drill, themander actually made such a decision. The drill will end, or he will be punished!¡± The posts on the inte were all very eye-catching. These contents. Themander also roughly read through them. A portion of them were talking about his decision tounch a raid. With so many people in the United States watching this drill, any decision he made would attract public opinion. However, the order tounch a raid had to be given. After all, Jon held hostages who could threaten him, but he did not have any bargaining chips in his hands. If they were kept ying by Jon in the palm, then the police would definitely lose this drill. ¡°Do you feel a lot of pressure?¡± Just as themander was frowning, themissioner came behind him and patted his shoulder. Themissioner was the referee for this drill. Naturally, he was also at the scene, but he did not show his face. ¡°Of course it¡¯s big. The entire United States is watching this drill.¡± Themander smiled bitterly. Just the official live stream alone had 30 million people watching it. Many people who did not watch the live broadcast were also paying attention to this matter. If he made a mistake, he would immediately be a trending topic. Even many foreign media outlets were paying attention to this matter. ¡°You¡¯re right. If we don¡¯t dare to verify whether the decision was wrong during the drill, then what should we do during actualbat?¡± ¡°As long as you treat this drill seriously, then this drill will have meaning. The police department isn¡¯t afraid of losing face. As long as we ensure that the mistakes that urred during the drill will not be repeated during actualbat, then it will be worth it.¡±, themissioner said with a smile. He felt very gratified by the words of themander. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± Themander saluted themissioner. Commissioner¡¯s meaning was obvious. He wanted him to do it without any worries. At this moment in the temporarymand room. On the control panel¡¯s disy screen, a few scenes in the bank disappeared, and snowkes shed once again. The technician did not dare to dy and hurriedly reported, ¡°Sir, the surveince footage in the bank have disappeared again.¡± When themander heard this, he quickly came over to check. Sure enough, all nine images disappeared. ¡°Try again to see if you can connect.¡±, themander quickly said. ¡°I can¡¯t connect. It should be cut off from the bank¡¯s surveince room.¡± The technician tried a few times but could not retrieve the surveince signal. This had happened once before, but the robber did not act rashly, so themander temporarily determined that there might be other reasons for theck of signal. But this time, it happened again. If it were a problem like thework, it could not have happened twice in a few short hours. Therefore, it was almost certain that the break in the surveince signal was the work of the robbers. Jon hadpletely cut off the surveince signal, so the police could not see the situation in the bank. This probably meant that they were about to take action. As for what action, it was unknown. Then, themander said to the SWAT team leader, ¡°How¡¯s the raid n going?¡± The SWAT team leader looked up and said, ¡°It¡¯s done, but we need a certain amount of time to deploy.¡± ¡°We canunch the raid in ten minutes.¡± Themander nodded and thought for a moment. Then, he said to a few technicians, ¡°Check the phone number in the bank.¡± There were fixed phones in the bank, and this number could be found on the inte. Soon, the technician found the bank¡¯s phone number. Themander stared at it for a moment, then used his cell phone to dial the number. In the bank, Will Smith and Brown Williams had already brought out the melted gold. Because they had sessfully melted 100 kilograms of gold, Jon had Leon Evans on the second floor cut off the bank¡¯s surveince. This scene could not be seen by the police outside the bank. At this moment, Jon was picking up a few tubes filled with gold to check. At this moment, the bank¡¯s phone rang. ¡°Phone? It should be a customer of the bank.¡±, Will Smith looked at the phone and said. ¡°No.¡± Jon shook his head. ¡°It¡¯s not a customer of the bank. It should be themander of the police.¡± Not long after he asked Leon Evans to cut off the surveince, the phone rang. It meant that themander hade to inquire about the situation. Will Smith asked, ¡°Do you want to answer it?¡± ¡°Of course, why not?¡± Jon smiled. He came to the phone and picked it up. ¡°I¡¯m themander of this drill¡­¡± The phone was picked up, and themander introduced himself directly. However, before he could finish his sentence, he was interrupted by Jon. ¡°I know who you are. Tell me, why are you calling?¡± Themander paused for a moment and said, ¡°I¡¯m just telling you that 14 dinners have been prepared. How can I send them to you?¡± As for whether the dinner was ready or not, he did not know. The reason he called was to stall for time. After all, the SWAT team leader needed some time to deploy the raid, and the surveince cameras in the bank had been cut off. He was worried that Jon would do something, so he called. He tried to stall for time to prepare for the next raid. Hearing themander¡¯s words, Jon narrowed his eyes and felt that something was not right. However, he did not show his doubt. His tone was the same as before. ¡°Just send someone to send it over. By the way, have you arranged the helicopter?¡± Hearing that, themander felt a headache. ¡°Arranging the helicopter is beyond my ability. I can¡¯t do anything about it. You can change your request. As long as it¡¯s within my ability, I can try my best to satisfy you.¡± Chapter 79 - Prepare for the Raid, the Situation Is Not Right!

Chapter 79: Prepare for the Raid, the Situation Is Not Right!

Jon paused and said, ¡°Since that¡¯s no helicopter, then prepare a bus that can seat fourteen people. If you dare to y tricks, I can¡¯t guarantee that I won¡¯t attack the hostages.¡± After that, Jon directly hung up the phone. On the other side, themander was stunned. He wanted to stall for more time. Then he went outside to see how the SWAT team leader was preparing for the raid. Jon had given up on the helicopter and wanted a car. This meant that he already had ns to escape. Originally, the escape could reduce the number of hostages in Jon¡¯s hands, which was beneficial to the police. However, Jon wanted a bus. It was obvious that he had no ns to give up the hostages. Jon¡¯s action made themander even more determined in his heart about his raid n. At this moment, the SWAT team leader was already making his final arrangements. ¡°Team one and team two, when you arrive at the designated location, stand by and wait for my orders.¡± ¡°After receiving my orders, move together. Team one will enter the meeting room through the broken window on the roof.¡± ¡°Team two, attack from the front door.¡± ¡°Remember, the hostages are dressed the same as the robbers. Therefore, the ones who attack you with guns are the robbers. After confirming the identity of the robbers, kill them on the spot.¡± ¡°As for the hostages, rescue them immediately to prevent the robbers from blending in with the hostages.¡± ¡°Do you understand?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± More than ten SWAT team members spoke at the same time. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± As the SWAT team leader gave the order, more than ten SWAT team members split into two teams. Team one was in charge of the robbers on the first floor, and the team two was in charge of the robbers in the conference room on the second floor. As for the robbers in the surveince room on the second floor, the SWAT team leader did not care about them. That was because he did not have any hostages in his hands. When the time came, as long as the hostages were rescued, then dealing with this robber would be as easy as catching a turtle in a jar. The two teams began to move, carefully using the crowd to conceal themselves, trying to get close to both sides of the bank. There were cameras at the front and back doors of the bank, but there weren¡¯t any on both left and right sides. The two teams sessfully got to the side of the bank. Although the bank was in the central area, it was still an old-fashioned building, a two-story small building. Climbing up such a small building was a piece of cake for the SWAT team. And they were at the side of the bank, which were several rooms away from bank lobby and the second-floor conference room, the monitoring room. So, even if there was a little noise, the robbers will not notice. Next, team one served as adder for team two. Team two¡¯s members climbed to the top of the building. They found the location of the office on the second floor, fixed the traction rope, and prepared to use the rope to slide down at any time and break through the window on the second floor. The remaining team members waited on the spot. Because the camera at the bank entrance was basically 360 degrees with no blind spots, so they could only wait on the side. After the SWAT team leader used the surveince camera jammer to cut off the surveince, they started to move. After the two teams were ready, the SWAT team leader took a deep breath. Although this was only a raid in a drill, the whole country was watching them. He couldn¡¯t help but feel a little nervous. ¡°Is there any problem with the deployment of this raid?¡± Themander looked at the SWAT team leader, handed him the jammer, and asked. ¡°No problem, and there are four snipers on the opposite floor to assist. We should be able to sessfully capture Jon.¡± In his opinion, the ambush that he had deployed could already be said to be perfect. As long as there were no idents during the operation, they should be able to capture Jon. Themander nodded. Regardless of whether the deployment was perfect or not, he could only ce all his hopes on the squadmander now. After all, the surveince footage in the bank had been cut off. If the raid failed, he could only wait for the robbers to escape before looking for an opportunity. ¡°Sir, the dinner that the robbers wanted has arrived.¡± At this moment, the police officer who was preparing lunch also brought the dinner over. There was a total of 14 portions and threerge bags. The SWAT team leader took the bags and said, ¡°Then I¡¯m ready to take action.¡± Then, he carried the dinner and walked towards the bank. Seeing this, Gal Gadot quickly got the cameraman to point the camera at the special police captain. She nned to record this raid. At this point in the drill, the police were ready tounch a raid on the robbers. It was already at the climax. The robbers were about to face them head-on. At this time, the hype of the live stream was also gradually rising. It had once again broken through a new high. Now, there were already 35 million viewers watching it. At this moment, it was an extremely terrifying poprity. Normally, there might not be this many people on the entire tform. But now, so many people were in the same livestream. As the poprity gradually increased, thements were also surging crazily. ¡°Is the raid finally about to begin? This is the first time we¡¯ve seen a direct confrontation between the police and the robbers.¡± ¡°It looks like the SWAT team¡¯s deployment is very perfect. Every SWAT team member is well-trained. Why do I feel like Jon won¡¯t be able to survive this time?¡± ¡°I think so too. After all, this drill is much more difficult than the previous one. Moreover, Jon still has four teammates. He will definitely be arrested soon.¡± ¡°If it ends like this, isn¡¯t it a little too fast? After all, we¡¯ve been looking forward to it for ten days.¡± ¡°I hope Jon can survive this time. As long as he can survive the surprise attack of the SWAT team, in my heart, he will win.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need to be so pessimistic. With Jon¡¯s IQ, he will definitely think that the police willunch a surprise attack. Since he can think of it, do you think he will not be prepared?¡± ¡°It feels a little difficult. After all, the SWAT team seem to be too professional.¡± The audience crazilymented on thement section. Arge portion of the audience thought that Jon wouldn¡¯t be able to escape in this raid. After all, judging from the deployment of the special police captain just now, the n was too thorough and perfect. It was almost wless. The SWAT team leader held the surveince camera jammer in his hand and was ready to turn it on at any time. He came to bring the bank¡¯s door. Looking at the tightly locked shutter door, he said, ¡°Dinner has been delivered. Open the door and take it.¡± After about a minute, the sound of the lock being unlocked came from the bank¡¯s door. ¡°Ka¡­¡± The shutter door slowly rose. The SWAT team leader¡¯s nerves tensed up, but he was not in a hurry to press the surveince camera jammer in his hand. There was a robber guarding the bank¡¯s surveince room. If he turned on the jammer now, the surveince footage would immediately be turned off. When the time came, the robber watching the surveince footage would definitely report the situation to Jon immediately. So, he had to wait until the shutter door waspletely opened. Then he would press the jammer. Even if Jon heard the report, he would not have time to close the door. The SWAT team member guarding the side of the bank would be able to quickly rush through the door. ¡°Ka¡­¡± The shutter door waspletely opened, and behind it was a ss door blocked by curtain. So, the SWAT team leader still could not see what was happening inside the bank. However, because he was close. He could clearly see a figure standing behind the curtains. Could this person be Jon? The SWAT team leader¡¯s nerves were tensed, waiting for an opportunity. At this moment. In themand room. When themander saw this scene, he slowly frowned. ¡°Something¡¯s not right. Something¡¯s not right.¡± ¡°What¡¯s not right?¡± The technician asked curiously. ¡°He walked over with dinner. In order to get dinner, the robber opened the door of the bank. It seems quite normal.¡± ¡°However, if it¡¯s just to get the dinner, is there a need to raise all the shutter doors? Let alone Jon, even if it¡¯s any other robber, if it¡¯s just to get dinner, they only need to open the shutter doors to the extent that they can bring in the dinner.¡± ¡°However, now that all the shutter doors have been raised, I feel that it¡¯s looking like a trap.¡± Themander pointed at the surveince footage from the mini pinhole camera on the SWAT team leader¡¯s body on the console and analyzed it carefully. The technician nodded when he heard that, but themander¡¯s analysis made sense. Logically speaking, taking a dinner shouldn¡¯t have opened all the shutter doors. But now, Jon had done so. It looked like he had done it on purpose. And at this time in the livestream, the audience also heard the analysis of themander. Thinking carefully, it really was true. The shutter door of the bank was wide open. This looked too abnormal. ¡°There¡¯s a mole. Stop the transaction. Commander, quickly evacuate!¡± ¡°Good guy. A drill had the feeling of the infernal affairs.¡± ¡°Themander is right. No matter how you look at it, it looks like Jon did this on purpose. Didn¡¯t you want toe in? Then I might as well open the door and let you in.¡± ¡°So, does that mean that Jon has already noticed that the SWAT team leader is going tounch a raid?¡± ¡°That¡¯s for sure. Otherwise, do you think that his title as a high IQ robber is for nothing?¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be. Even if he has a high IQ, it can¡¯t be that easy to guess, right? Could there really be a mole in the police force?¡± ¡°Dude, don¡¯t make conspiracy theories. It¡¯s just an act. How could there be a mole? Is it so hard to admit that Jon is good at everything?¡± The audience was discussing intensely. At this time, themander felt that something was really wrong. He picked up the walkie-talkie and said to the SWAT team leader, ¡°The situation is not right. This is very likely a trap set by Jon. Please evacuate immediately. Evacuate immediately!¡± Chapter 80 - Ambush! Team One Died!

Chapter 80: Ambush! Team One Died!

At the entrance of the bank. The SWAT team leader, who was standing guard, immediately heard the order from themander. Jon¡¯s trap? Whether Jon had a trap or not, he didn¡¯t know. But now, it was a perfect opportunity for an ambush. Because the person behind the curtain had already stretched out his hand. The person signaled for him to pass the dinner. Once this opportunity was missed, it would be difficult to grasp it again. At this moment, themander¡¯s brain spun rapidly, and several thoughts shed through his mind. It might be a trap, but what if it wasn¡¯t? Finally, the SWAT team leader gritted his teeth, exerted force in his hand, and turned on the jammer. At the same time, he turned his head slightly and said to the microphone on his shoulder in a deep voice, ¡°Move!¡± He gave the order to his team members tounch a surprise attack. This deployment had taken so long. If they gave up just like that, wouldn¡¯t their efforts be wasted? As he gave the order, his hand grabbed the hand that stretched out from behind the curtain. His other hand took out a smoke bomb and threw it into the bank lobby. All the SWAT team members started to move in. Members of team one on the first floor immediately appeared from the side of the bank and entered the bank lobby through the main door. At the same time, the members of the team two on the second floor slid down the rope and broke through the windows on the second floor, entering one after another. ¡°Oh, my god.¡± Seeing the SWAT team member begin to move, themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows. Now, he was almost certain that this was a trap. Because the process of the SWAT team members entering the bank was too smooth. During the action, the robbers did not resist at all. Was this normal? It was obviously not normal. This meant that the robbers were ready to be ambushed. They did not care about being ambushed by the SWAT team. They even opened the bank door and let the SWAT team in. If this were not a trap, what else could it be? However, SWAT team members had already started to move. It was toote to order them to withdraw. Now, they could only hope that they could be prepared in time to confront the robbers. ¡°Sir, there are no signs of the robbers and hostages on the second floor.¡± At this moment, a voice suddenly came from the headset of themander. He hurriedly looked at the surveince footage on the helmets of the SWAT team members on the second floor. The meeting room on the second floor was now empty. There was no one there. And in the bank lobby on the first floor, because the SWAT team leader had thrown a smoke bomb inside, they couldn¡¯t see what was going on at all. The SWAT team members with goggles could only look at the location of the robbers ording to their memories. They seemed to see a figure standing in the thick smoke. This discovery made the SWAT team members tense up and carefully walked over. They wanted to see if this figure had a gun in his hand. After all, all the hostages and robbers were dressed the same, so they could only rely on whether or not they had guns to distinguish whether they were robbers or hostages. However, while the SWAT team members were moving forward, they did not notice that not far ahead, five centimeters above the ground, there was an extremely thin fishing line. ¡°Pu¡­¡± A barely noticeable sound was heard. One of the SWAT team members stepped onto the fishing line. Instantly. ¡°Bang!¡± An explosion sounded from under the stools beside the SWAT team members. At this moment, all the SWAT team members were stunned. Then, they reacted in a hurry. Bombs. At this moment, the bombs used for the drill were naturally harmless. It couldn¡¯t even destroy the stools. However, since the bombs exploded beside them, it meant that they were all dead. ¡°God!¡± At the entrance of the bank, the SWAT team leader directly pressed the person who had brought the dinner to the ground. He heard the sound, even though he couldn¡¯t see what was happening inside clearly, he could tell that it was the sound of the practice bomb exploding. ¡°No, No!¡± His heart violently thumped a few times as he prayed in his heart that it could not be what he had thought. The next moment, the voice of a team member came through the earpiece. ¡°Sir, team one¡¯s members has all died.¡± The voice was a little depressed and a little unwilling. They had originally wanted to capture Jon easily. They did not expect that they would be killed by the explosion before they could even see anyone of the other party. ¡°Sh*t!¡± The leader¡¯s heart sank when he heard the report. All of them were killed! He did not expect that Jon would set up such a trap. How did he set up a bomb in the bank lobby? Moreover, there was also the smoke bomb that he threw. He originally wanted to distract the robbers, but he did not expect to harm his own team members. In the temporarymand room. Themander had naturally heard the report of the SWAT team, and his expression was very gloomy. From the moment the raid had beenunched, he had known that something was going to happen. Now, something had indeed happened. And it was a serious matter. All of the SWAT team members from team on had all died in battle. And at this time, through the images transmitted from the helmets of a few of the SWAT team members who had died in battle, they could clearly see the figure in the thick smoke. This figure was not a person. It was a billboard in the shape of a person. In other words, Jon knew from the beginning that SWAT team members would drop a smoke bomb or something that could confuse their vision before raiding the bank. Then he yed along. He ced a billboard in the shape of a person here to lure the SWAT team members over. The SWAT team members¡¯ attention would be attracted by the billboard, so they wouldn¡¯t notice the fishing line on the ground and the bomb ced under the stool. As a result, a SWAT team was wiped out. It could be said that this n was extremely thorough. However, the leader couldn¡¯t figure out when Jon started setting up these things. Because¡­ Just ten minutes ago, the temporarymand room still had surveince footage of the bank¡¯s lobby. At that time, everything was normal. There was also the second floor. Now, there were no robbers or hostages. Where did they go? Besides, was Jon¡¯s insight that sharp? Had he guessed the n of the SWAT team ahead of time? At this moment. On the second floor of the bank, the remaining six SWAT team members held their guns and carefully searched for the robbers and hostages in the other rooms on the second floor. Because the SWAT team members on the first floor were already dead. So now they were very cautious. At the bank entrance, the SWAT team leader¡¯s mood was very heavy. Less than three minutes before the raid started, the SWAT team members of team one had all been killed. In other words, half of the SWAT team members had been killed by robbers in just one encounter. No. They hadn¡¯t even seen the robbers, and the team two on the second floor still hadn¡¯t found the robbers. Although team two was still in action, the SWAT team leader had given up hope. Jon was so smart, it seemed like he¡¯d figured out their n already, and he¡¯de up with a n to fight them. Chapter 81 - Annihilated? !

Chapter 81: Annihted? !

However, it wasn¡¯t a total loss for the SWAT team leader. At least, he managed to control the person who came to pick up the dinner. The SWAT team leader thought as he looked down at the person he arrested. ording to Jon¡¯s arrangements, the person he controlled was most likely not Jon. After all, how could he personallye to pick up the dinner after setting up such a trap? Then, it should be another robber. Then, the SWAT team leader took off the mask on the person under him. When he saw the person¡¯s face clearly. He was slightly stunned. This person was not a robber. He was the manager of the bank. At this moment, the manager¡¯s mouth was taped with a gag, so even though he was subdued by the SWAT team leader, he could not make a sound to reveal his identity. ¡°F*ck!¡± The SWAT team leader was furious. He thought that he had caught at least one robber. He did not expect that he was arrested a hostage. Had Jon nned this from the beginning? He felt that he had underestimated Jon. The SWAT team leader tore the gag for the bank manager. ¡°Phew¡­¡± The bank manager gasped for breath. When he was being controlled by the SWAT team leader, his chest was pressed against the ground, and it was difficult for him to breathe. ¡°Where are the five robbers now?¡± The SWAT team leader looked at the bank manager who was breathing heavily and asked. He wanted to get some valuable information from him. ¡°They are, on the second floor.¡± The bank manager¡¯s breathing became slightly smaller as he said. The second floor? The SWAT team leader frowned, and then quickly said into the microphone, ¡°Team two, pay attention. The robbers are upstairs now. Team two, pay attention!¡± He wanted to remind the team members of team two. After all, the robbers were in the dark, and team two could fall into the robbers¡¯ trap at any time. If team two fell into the trap, then they would be totally wiped out. However, just as his voice fell, the voice of team two came from the earpiece. ¡°There¡¯s a grenade, take cover!¡± Then, there was a loud explosion. Hearing this explosion, the leader¡¯s mood sank to the bottom. This meant that the team two was also wiped out. The raid ended with the total annihtion of the SWAT team! In the temporarymand room. Themander looked at the image on the helmets of the team two members, his face was very grim. The members of team two were carefully moving forward, looking for the robbers on the second floor. Because they were afraid of more bombs, they had to observe every possible ce around them. But. Just as they were about to pass a corner. On the other side of the corner, three grenades were suddenly thrown out. The SWAT team had no time to hide. These three grenades exploded, killing the entire team two. And at this time, themander saw a small mirror in the corner. The mirror was very small, and if one didn¡¯t pay attention, they wouldn¡¯t be able to notice it. However, through this mirror, Jon saw every move of the SWAT team. He only threw out three grenades when they were about to reach the corner. In such a narrow passage, the grenade explosion was more than enough to wipe out the team two. The SWAT team leader had spent a long-time nning and deploying this raid, but after the operation began¡­ Both teams had been eliminated, in less than six minutes. This raid was a crushing defeat to the police and the SWAT team. When this scene fell into the eyes of the live broadcast viewers, thements exploded once again. ¡°D*mn, what happened??? The SWAT team died in battle?¡± ¡°I really didn¡¯t expect that in just a few minutes, the well-deployed and well-equipped SWAT teams were all killed.¡± ¡°This is too amazing. Two teams, twelve SWAT teams, and they were all killed just like that? Unbelievable.¡± ¡°The police suffered heavy losses in this raid.¡± ¡°I feel like I¡¯ve been pped in the face. Before the SWAT teamunched the raid, I thought that Jon would definitely be arrested.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve been pped in the face + 1. I really thought Jon was really done for, I didn¡¯t expect that the SWAT team wouldn¡¯t be able to fight back.¡± ¡°D*mn, I thought that this drill was about to end. Now it seems that there¡¯s still time.¡± ¡°I¡¯m suddenly d that Jon isn¡¯t a real robber. Otherwise, who would be able to arrest him?¡± ¡°But then again, Jon probably doesn¡¯t know about the SWAT team¡¯s surprise attack n. Then why would he be able to set up such a trap and wait for the SWAT team to jump in?¡± ¡°It feels like there¡¯s a mole.¡± The audience discussed crazily because the oue of this raid was too unexpected. While everyone praised Jon¡¯s high IQ and strong nning ability, they were also curious about how Jon knew about the SWAT team¡¯s raid n. After all, if he didn¡¯t know about the police¡¯s raid n, why would Jon set up such a trap. Or was he already prepared and just happened to be ambushed by the police? Everyone was making wild guesses. The hype was also building up. The number of people watching the official live broadcast had reached 40 million! This was an unprecedented achievement! In the bank. The SWAT team leader was upset and angry when he received the news that the team two had all died. Right now, he only had a pistol on him. After all, he was here to deliver dinner on the surface. His main intention was to jam the cameras at the bank entrance. Naturally, he would not be equipped with heavy weapons. And among the robbers, the only heavy weapons that could be confirmed were two G36-C assault rifles and an LR5 high-precision sniper rifle. Moreover, there were an unknown number of grenades and bombs. With such a configuration on the robber side, he had no chance of winning. If the SWAT team leader was killed or captured by the robbers during the drill, the impact would be huge. Moreover, he still had a hostage beside him. Therefore, the SWAT team leader could only leave quickly with the bank manager. He could save a hostage, which meant that the raid was still effective. In the temporarymand room. On the monitor screen of the control panel, Jon¡¯s image suddenly appeared. Everyone quickly surrounded him. At this moment, on the second floor of the bank. Jon stood in front of a disqualified SWAT team member. Jon had his earpiece on and used his helmet to shoot at himself. ¡°Your raid failed.¡± Jon looked at the camera and said with a smile. ¡°How did you know that we were going tounch a surprise attack?¡± In themand room, themander looked at the smiling Jon. As the saying, ¡°The joys and sorrows of human are not interlinked¡±. Themander was very frustrated and wished he could clench his fist and punch Jon in the face. The question he asked. It was not only a question that he could not figure out, but also a question that the audience was curious about. ¡°How did you know? Care to tell me?¡± Jon said with a smile, but his expression became serious. Chapter 82 - Jon鈥檚 Insight!

Chapter 82: Jon¡¯s Insight!

Hearing Jon¡¯s words, themander was stunned for a moment. When did he tell Jon that the police were going tounch a raid? And because of Jon¡¯s words, the live stream was once again in a frenzy of discussion. ¡°It can¡¯t be, themander is actually a mole? I¡¯mughing.¡± ¡°Good guy, I didn¡¯t expect that a guy with thick eyebrows and big eyes like you would also betray.¡± ¡°I always suspected that there was a mole in the police force, but it shouldn¡¯t be themander. If themander-in-chief of the police force is a mole, then what¡¯s the point of this exercise?¡± ¡°I¡¯ve always thought that the guy in the front was smart from the beginning of the drill. He immediately came up with an idea.¡± ¡°Haha, use your brain before you speak. How could themander be a mole?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t bother about these people. These people arepletely brainless.¡± ¡°Just listen to Jon¡¯s exnation.¡± At that moment, themander had already calmed down. In this raid, the most direct contact he had with Jon was to stall for time over the phone. Could it be¡­ Thinking of this, themander was slightly stunned. But what had he leaked from the previous call? ¡°When did I tell you?¡± Themander asked in a deep voice. ¡°It was the call you made earlier. As themander, you personally called the robbers and didn¡¯t ask about the hostage¡¯s situation, nor did you talk about the terms, just to tell me that dinner was ready?¡± ¡°I guess you wanted to call to confirm my location because the surveince footage was suddenly cut off, so you could stall for time for the uing bank raid.¡± ¡°So, I casually made some preparations.¡± Jon said unhurriedly. The previous call from themander had indeed made him feel that something was wrong. However, the possibility of the police would raid the bank was his rough guess. And in the end, the facts proved that his guess was correct. The police had indeedunched a raid. Before the policeunched a raid, Jon had arranged all of this. As for the hostages, including the hostages on the second floor, they were all transferred to the bank counter by Jon. The counter was bulletproof ss, which could ensure the safety of the hostages. In order to prevent the hostages from taking advantage of the raid to escape, Jon also asked Will Smith and Venus Alice to stay at the counter to watch over them. After hearing Jon¡¯s words, themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows. It was really because of that phone call. Just because he wanted to stall for time, and Jon was able to sense that the police were about tounch a raid? This kind of countersurveince ability was too terrifying. ¡°Just because of a phone call to stall for time, he was able to guess that the police were going tounch a raid and then make a n to wipe out the entire assault team. This is too strong.¡± ¡°His sense of smell is too sharp. He¡¯s practically a natural-born criminal.¡± ¡°As expected, Jon didn¡¯t disappoint us. We can still continue to watch this drill.¡± ¡°Sigh, I thought that with the strength of the police department, it would be too easy to capture Jon. I didn¡¯t expect it to fail as well.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not the special police¡¯s fault. It¡¯s Jon who¡¯s too powerful. He¡¯s too smart.¡± ¡°But I¡¯m very curious now. What method will Jon use to escape from the bank this time?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. Although Jon wiped out the entire assault team this time, it¡¯s still a very troublesome matter to escape from the bank.¡± ¡°This time, the raid has failed. The police shouldn¡¯t make any moves for the time being. They can only wait until Jon escapes before making a move.¡± ¡°I look forward to the follow-up!¡± At this moment, the audience was discussing crazily in the live stream. However, even if Jonpletely annihted the assault team, there were still quite a number of people who thought that Jon would not be able to escape and would eventually be captured by the police. They were not optimistic that Jon would eventually be able to obtain victory in this drill. After all, there were too many police officers outside. Furthermore, Jon had relied on disguise to escape under the eyes of the policest time. This trick obviously didn¡¯t work now. Then, what new method would he use to escape? At this time, on Twitter, Facebook, and other major social media tforms, there were also many posts about this matter. ¡°Ridiculous! The assault team waspletely wiped out. Is there actually a mole in the police?¡± ¡°Shocking! The Pennsylvania drill, the robbers are operating with high intelligence now!¡± ¡°Sheesh, the reason why Jon¡¯s IQ is so high is because he eats this kind of food every night.¡± All sorts of posts about the drill flooded the tform. Among the top ten trending searches, seven or eight were posts about the drill. From this, one could see how popr it was. In the temporarymand room. ¡°Where¡¯s the fully fueled bus I asked for?¡±, Jon spoke to the camera again. The bus was a request made by Jon when themander called to stall for time. ¡°We¡¯ll go and prepare it immediately.¡±, themander replied. Because they were preparing for a raid previously, if the raid was sessful, there would be the end of this drill. Therefore, he did not arrange for the police officers to prepare the bus. But now that the raid had failed, there was no other way. He could only prepare a bus ording to the robber¡¯s request. ¡°I¡¯ll give you 20 minutes. After 20 minutes, if I can¡¯t see the bus, I¡¯ll kill a hostage every 10 minutes.¡± After saying that, Jon smiled coldly at the camera. This smile made the people who saw it feel a terrifying and eerie feeling in their hearts. Then, Jon turned off the camera. Seeing the surveince screen disappear, themander¡¯s face turned a little ugly. He turned around and ordered, ¡°Do as what the robber requested, arrange a bus.¡± ¡°In twenty minutes, you must drive to the bank¡¯s entrance.¡± His tone was a little helpless. At this moment, there was still nothing he could do. He could only satisfy the robbers¡¯ request and ask them not to hurt the hostages. In the bank. Jon said to the twelve SWAT team members who had gathered together and were already dead, ¡°Now that you have been killed, you can go and stay in your office. I hope that you can respect this drill and don¡¯t y any little tricks.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± The SWAT team members nodded one after another. Although they were unwilling to ept the fact that they had been defeated in the battle, they could not help it if they were not as skilled as the robber team. In their hearts, they were also very serious about this drill. In addition, there were so many people watching from the outside, so they naturally wouldn¡¯t make any small moves. Next, Jon arranged for Brown Williams to take the dead SWAT team members to the office and lock them up. Then, Jon went to the first floor. He asked Will Smith to go to the door to get dinner. Will Smith¡¯s figure quickly appeared at the bank¡¯s door, and he did not hide it. And this scene was witnessed by the four snipers on the opposite floor. ¡°Sir, we have locked onto a robber. Do you want us to shoot?¡± One of the snipers put his finger on the trigger, as if he could pull the trigger at any time. Chapter 83 - Jon Wants to Take Venus Away!

Chapter 83: Jon Wants to Take Venus Away!

¡°Don¡¯t shoot. All police officers, stay alert. Don¡¯t act rashly and wait for orders!¡± Themander picked up the walkie-talkie and ordered all police officers not to act rashly. After all, the previous raid had not seeded and had already angered the robbers. If they shot and killed another robber this time, Jon would definitely take action against the hostages. They had already lost 12 SWAT team members and a negotiator. If the robbers killed the hostages again, the situation would be very bad. Therefore, themander could not give the order to shoot. And Will Smith naturally knew that the police would not dare to do anything to him. Therefore, his attitude was very arrogant. He even deliberately walked a few more rounds at the entrance of the bank. Then, he pointed his middle finger in the direction of the opposite building. The four snipers looked at the scene and stared at the scope, wishing that they could blow his brain out. But they couldn¡¯t shoot without orders from higher up. Will Smith picked up the dinner and returned to the hall. The shutter door of the bank slowly closed again. The police lost the information in the bank again. After bringing the dinner in, Jon first checked whether there were any bugs. After confirming that there were no bugs, he distributed the dinner to the hostages. Because the police only knew that there were 14 hostages, so there were also 14 portions of dinner. However, Jon hid two security guards, so there were actually 16 people in the bank. And just now after the bank manager was rescued by Jon. There were still 15 people left. One portion of dinner was missing. Jon distributed the dinner while he took out the bread from his backpack. He had prepared this bread beforehand. ¡°After this, we should leave. But if five people leave together, we definitely won¡¯t be able to leave, so I can only take one of you with me.¡± Just as everyone was eating, Jon chewed on the bread and slowly spoke. The moment he said that, the four of them were stunned. They subconsciously looked at Jon. But Jon had already turned around and was staring at the curtains of the bank. It was as if he did not know that the four of them were looking at him. The four of them did not say a word. They were each eating their own dinner. The atmosphere was a little tense. ¡°We¡¯re robbers. For the sake of profit, it¡¯s normal for us to give up a few people. After all, there are quite a number of robbers who kill each other because the loot is not evenly distributed.¡± ¡°As long as we can bring the gold out, this drill will be our victory.¡± ¡°Therefore, three of the four of you must be sacrificed.¡± ¡°You guys decide.¡± Jon said. In this drill, Jon wanted to win. If he won, he would receive a higher reward from the system. The four of them raised their heads to look at Jon. ¡°You¡¯re the leader of this drill, and we only need to listen to your arrangements. Why do we have to make a decision now?¡± ¡°You make the decision. Whoever you tell to leave will leave.¡± ¡°Speaking of which, I really admire you for this drill. If it weren¡¯t for you, we would have been wiped out by the whole SWAT team during the raid.¡± ¡°Now, even if you want me to go out and die, I won¡¯t have any objections.¡± Will Smith said. These were all sincere words. At the beginning, he wasn¡¯t convinced, but now, he was convinced. Jon used his high IQ and strong strength to change Will Smith¡¯s attitude towards him. He had the ability to be the leader. ¡°You make the decision. I have no objections.¡±, Leon Evans said. ¡°I have no objections either.¡±, Brown Williams said. ¡°Me too. I have no objections.¡±, Venus Alice said. Jon nodded slightly when he heard their words. He thought that these people would argue over who should be sacrificed. He did not expect it to be so smooth. ¡°How about this, Venus will leave with me. The rest will stay behind. I need Venus¡¯s help.¡±, Jon thought for a moment and slowly said. He had no selfish motives in choosing Venus because she could maximize his chances of winning. She was a sharpshooter. He needed the help of a sharpshooter to escape. ¡°Okay.¡±, Venus Alice replied. The others did not say anything about Jon¡¯s choice. After Venus Alice finished eating, Jon arranged another task for her, which was to go to the second floor of the bank. He wanted to see how many police officers were guarding the back door of the bank. After all, the moment the police arrived, they had surrounded the bank. Naturally, there were police officers guarding the back door of the bank. As for Jon, he needed to know the number of police officers at the back door. More than ten minutester, the bus that Jon requested had been prepared by the police and could seat twenty people. After parking the bus at the entrance of the bank, themander did not rush to inform Jon. After all, there were still a few minutes left before the time set by the robbers. During this time, he needed to make some preparations. Themander first sent four people, divided into two teams, and hid around the bank. After hiding, he made sure that he could use binocrs to spy on the bus without any blind spots no matter where the robbers got on the bus. Themander had to make sure that he had a certain number of people on the bus. This way, he could make sure that Jon would not let some of the robbers escort the hostages onto the bus while he hid in the bank to avoid being caught. And¡­ While preparing the bus, themander had already arranged for police to be on the route that the robbers might escape. This was to ensure that they could stop the robbers¡¯ car at any time. Everything that themander could be thought of had already been deployed. This drill had already sacrificed twelve SWAT team members and a negotiator. So no matter what, they couldn¡¯t let the robbers escape sessfully. Moreover, under the situation where the whole country was paying attention, if they still let the robbers escape after sacrificing so many SWAT team members, then it would absolutely damage the reputation and image of the police department. Although the police department was not afraid of losing face in this drill, the robbers were definitely had to be caught. After the deployment waspleted, themander picked up the loudspeaker and slowly came to the bank door. Originally, SWAT team leader had nned to rece themander with this shout. After all, Jon was a vicious robber. If he were to shoot themander to death at this time, that would cause a serious trouble. If themander were shot to death during a drill, it would definitely spread throughout the entire United States in a short period of time. At that time, the police department would be truly embarrassed. However, themander refused the request of the SWAT team leader. ¡°Listen up, robbers inside. I have already prepared the bus that you wanted. I filled up the gas ording to your request and parked it at the entrance of the bank.¡± The loudspeaker spread themander¡¯s voice and the entire square reverberated. At this moment, all the media outlets were filming this scene. And the audience, was tensed up. Now. The robbers wanted the vehicle and began to prepare to escape. This drill was about to enter the climax! Chapter 84 - Deception, Confusion!

Chapter 84: Deception, Confusion!

¡°Very good. Now, all police officers retreat ten meters, including you.¡± Inside the bank, Jon was also shouting through the loudspeaker. Themander heard Jon¡¯s voice and said after a moment of silence, ¡°We can do as you say, but in exchange, can you release a hostage?¡± Themander was thinking of ways to reduce the number of hostages Jon had. As long as Jon had one less hostage, it would be less difficult for the police to rescue all the hostages. ¡°Are you negotiating with me, officer? You don¡¯t have any right to negotiate with me now. Release the hostage? I can shoot a hostage to death and then release him.¡± Jon¡¯s voice was cold. Themander took a deep breath when he heard that. Jon was right. He did not have any bargaining chips to negotiate with him now. ¡°Okay, as long as you don¡¯t hurt the hostage, I¡¯ll do as you say.¡± Then, he ordered his subordinates, ¡°All police officers, retreat ten meters.¡± When he gave the order, he also slowly retreated. Six minutester, the bank¡¯s door slowly opened. A group of people dressed in the same clothes walked out of the bank. All of their waists were tied together by the same rope, as if they were tied together. Obviously, this was a countermeasure taken by the robbers for fear that the hostages would escape aftering out. With this tying, it would be difficult for the hostages to escape. Themander looked at the hostages with a serious expression. These people formed a human wall. The robbers only needed to hide behind the hostages to avoid the snipers on the opposite building. In fact, the robbers didn¡¯t have to avoid the snipers. After all, there were five robbers. Under such circumstances, the snipers would not shoot at will. Because if they couldn¡¯t kill all of the robbers at the same time, the remaining robbers would make things worse. Looking at the peopleing out of the bank, themander began to count silently in his heart. In the current situation, it was very important to determine the number of people getting on the bus. After counting three times, themander confirmed that the number of hostages was eight. There was no mistake. ¡°Report the number of robbers.¡± Because the robbers were all hiding at the behind of the hostages, and they were even bowing. From the point of view of themander, it was a little hard to see clearly. He picked up the walkie-talkie and said to the police officer who was arranged at the side of the bank. The position at the side could be seen very clearly. ¡°Sir, there are a total of five robbersing out of the bank!¡± ¡°Two of the robbers are holding G36-C assault rifles, two robbers are holding 92 handguns, and the remaining robber is not holding a gun.¡± ¡°There was no heavy sniper rifle, but one of the robbers was carrying a backpack with a simr sniper rifle box.¡± A police officer reported the situation he had observed. Themander nodded slowly. The information that the police officer had observedpletely matched the scene he had seen in the surveince footage. Two of the robbers were armed with 92 handguns, and two of the robbers were armed with G36-C assault rifles. As for the high-precision sniper rifle, it was not convenient to leave with it in hands. It made sense to put it into boxes and put into backpacks. The eight hostages and five robbers all came out. ¡°The police officers at the back door of the bank are ready. You guys hurry to the Freedom Road intersection to set up defenses and be ready to intercept the robbers¡¯ vehicles at any time.¡± ¡°The robbers¡¯ license te number is 14332. When you arrive at the Freedom Road, report immediately if you see the robbers¡¯ vehicles. You are not allowed to intercept them without my order.¡± The robber and the hostage were slowly walking toward the bus. Themander quickly picked up the walkie-talkie and gave the order to the police officers guarding the back door of the bank. Now that the robber had chosen to escape through the front door, it was no longer useful to guard the back door. ¡°Roger!¡± The police officers guarding the back door heard the order of themander and responded. All the police officers quickly got on the bus and headed to Freedom Road intersection. In the bank, Jon and Venus Alice, who were hiding in the back door passage, saw this scene. They looked a little happy. Just now, Jon was still preparing how to deal with these police officers, but he didn¡¯t expect them to suddenly leave. This saved a lot of trouble. He and Venus Alice naturally didn¡¯t go out with the hostages. He used two security guards as the robbers for this part of the n. He had two security guards pretend to be robbers and follow the hostages out while they hid in the back entrance of the bank. However, he tied a bomb to the two security guards and gave the remote control to Will Smith. The two security guards were so scared that they did not dare to act recklessly. Moreover, before they left the bank, Jon gave the two security guards a gun each. After all, they were robbers. It would be ridiculous if they did not have weapons. With the guns in their hands, they could make themander even more sure that they were the robbers. However, Jon took out the bullets from the two guns. After all, no one could guarantee that the two security guards would open fire directly under the tension. Taking out the bullets was also to let them know that they were only holding a useless metal product in their hands, so they should not have any funny ideas of confronting the robbers. The robbers had to run away, and themander confirmed that there were no problems with the number of people walking out of the bank. At this time, the attention of all the police officers was naturally on the robbers. Originally, Jon had nned to wait until Will Smith drove away and the police chased after him, then he and Venus Alice would take care of the few police officers guarding the back door. But he did not expect that before the robbers got into the car, the police officers at the back door had all been transferred away. ¡°Change your clothes.¡± Seeing that the police officers at the back door of the bank had been transferred away, Jon hurriedly took out the clothes that the two of them had changed into. Because they were still wearing the same clothes as the hostages, if they walked out in this outfit, they would probably be recognized after escaping not far away. Therefore, it was very important to change into casual clothes. After taking the clothes, Venus Alice directly took off her clothes in front of Jon, leaving only her close-fitting clothes. Jon was a little stunned. He did not expect her to not avoid him when she changed. However, he had to admit that Venus¡¯s figure was really good. At that moment, Jon did not say anything and also changed his clothes there. After changing, he threw the camouge suit into the bank. After all, the fact that he and Venus were no longer on the bus would be exposed sooner orter. By then, themander would be able to guess how they escaped. There was no need to destroy their traces. After changing his clothes, Jon took out the bank manager ID card that he had prepared earlier. He opened the back door. Then, the two followed the route that they had already nned and began to escape. A hundred kilograms of gold. After it melted, there were a total of twenty hollow tubes. The total weight was about 103 kilograms. Jon carried thirteen tubes, Venus carried seven tubes, and she also carried the high-precision sniper rifle. Among the robbers that had gone out before, the person only carried an empty box. The real sniper rifle was still with Venus. Jon thought that they might put it into use and agreed to let her keep it. Chapter 85 - Escape!

Chapter 85: Escape!

At this moment. At the entrance of the bank, the robbers and the hostages boarded the bus under the gazes of the police, the media, and the crowd. Then, the door was tightly shut. The bus slowly drove out of the bank. Not far away, themander looked at the bus that was joyfully driving out with a solemn expression. He had already set up arrangements on the road that the robbers might pass. He could intercept the bus at any time. However, at this stage of the drill, the police gave the bus to the robbers to evacuate, which was already a very shameful thing for the police department. Now he only hoped that the robbers would not go wild on the road. Otherwise, if the drill obstructed the traffic, the social impact would be even greater. Of course, themander also knew that this kind of situation, which the robbers did not act rashly, was unlikely to happen. That was because the driver was Brown Williams. He could say that he knew this person very well. Once Brown got into the car, it could be said that he would turn into a daredevil showing off his crazy driving skill. It was not an exaggeration at all. It was somewhat too naive to hope that he would not affect the traffic. After the bus drove out, the police car followed it. It kept a certain distance from the bus. Themander and the SWAT team leader did not follow the police car. After all, they were in charge inmanding the operation and not involved in the action. Therefore, they stayed in the temporarymand room. As for Gal Gadot and the other media reporters, they followed the car and broadcast live. After all, the audience was looking forward to the following scene of the robbers and the police chasing each other. And now, the audience in Gal Gadot¡¯s livestream had reached 50 million viewers. Comments and chat were filled up the screen. This was already a phenomenal level of poprity. Although before the drill, Gal Gadot had a hunch that this drill would be very popr and that the live broadcast would break the record. But when she saw 60 million people watching online at the same time. She was still a little shocked. At this moment, all the viewers in the live stream were curious. Would Jon fall into the? The current situation could be imagined. Although the police gave the robbers a bus, they would definitely not let the robbers go so easily. They would definitely set up defenses on the sections of the road that the robbers might pass through. However, what the viewers did not expect was that Jon was not on the bus. ¡°Hello, everyone. I am the reporter from the official live broadcast of this drill, Gal Gadot. Right now, we are following and filming in the police car.¡± ¡°It is now 7:50 pm. More than five hours have passed since the drill. At this moment, the robbers started to flee in the bus after they left the bank.¡± ¡°Currently, the robbers have eight hostages. This is not good news for the police. Even if they have set up defenses on the road where the robbers might escape, the robbers have so many hostages. The police would not easily intercept this bus.¡± ¡°One of the factors is the robbers are too vicious, and the other factor is the police who are afraid of taking action when the robbers still holding hostages. We will wait and see who will win this drill.¡± In the live stream, Gail Gadot temporarily got into the camera scene to exin the current situation to the audience. And her appearance this time also caused the livestream¡¯s chat to surge. ¡°The reporterdy has finally appeared. Thest time she left the scene was when the drill started.¡± ¡°Thisdy is too pretty. With her temperament, looks, and figure, I admit that I¡¯m craving for her.¡± ¡°No way, no way. You guys didn¡¯t reallye here to watch a man¡¯s drill, right?¡± ¡°Haha, who¡¯s watching the drill? I told you that I¡¯m here for thisdy.¡± ¡°The sensible people are as hard as iron and have begun to use traditional way. The insensible people are still crazily spamming thements.¡± ¡°Good man, you can even masturbate like this?¡± ¡°I won¡¯t tell you that I¡¯m typing with one hand, and I won¡¯t tell you that I¡¯m done. I hope miss can be on the camera scene more often.¡± ¡°You stinky men, what are you talking about in the live broadcast of the drill? There are so many police cars following you. How can Jon run away?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not easy to run away. In such a situation, it¡¯s better to stay in the bank. If he stays in the bank, Jon can rely on his knowledge to drag it out until he wins.¡± ¡°If it was as you say that he stays in the bank until victory, where¡¯s the fun?¡± ¡°Yeah, I think that since Jon has rushed out, he must have nned an escape route. Maybe he can really escape.¡± On thement section, some of the audiences were discussing Gal Gadot, while the others were still paying attention to the drill. ording to thement section, a considerable portion of the audience did not think that Jon could escape. Although Jon was about to get to the bus and began to flee, the police were stationed at every intersection. And there were so many police cars following him. How could he escape? No matter how smart Jon was, under certain circumstances, IQ could not solve the problem. On the other side, after Jon left the bank through the back door, he put on a mask and a hat, and brought Venus Alice to a crowded ce after walking a few streets. The more people there were, the easier it would be to blend in and the safer it would be. However, with Jon¡¯s current poprity, he would definitely be recognized quickly if he walked on the streets openly. Therefore, he put on his cap and mask. There were many people dressed like this, so Jon did not have to worry about being the only one who was looked conspicuous. Moreover, he also turned off the Robber Aura. After all, the Robber Aura had its own aura. People who were close to him would naturally feel that he wasn¡¯t a good person. If he was targeted because of this, it would be a bit troublesome. So he turned off the Robber Aura. Now, he looked like an ordinary person. Each of them carried a backpack and walked quickly through the crowd. From the speed of their walk, it was impossible to tell that they were carrying a hundred pounds. After all, both of them had good physical fitness. Especially Jon. Although he had left the SEALs team, he did not drop the intensity of his training. He trained almost every day. As for Venus Alice, although she was a woman, her physical fitness was definitely better than most men. After all, sharpshooters were highly trained. They walked through the street. They didn¡¯t speak. Venus Alice didn¡¯t know where they were going. But she didn¡¯t ask. She just walked behind Jon on the left. Because she knew Jon had a n. She didn¡¯t have to ask. She just had to follow him. In fact, Jon did have a n. During the first eight days of preparation, he spent three days wandering around the bank. From the Hilton Hotel to the bank, he knew all the routes. At the same time, he also knew all the ces that had cameras and without cameras. Chapter 86 - Escape Route, Surveillance Avoided!

Chapter 86: Escape Route, Surveince Avoided!

Jon, who had found out all that he could, would naturally be able to avoid all surveince. By then, even if the police found out that Jon wasn¡¯t on the bus, they wouldn¡¯t be able to find him from the surveince. Of course, if they brought up all the surveince cameras around the bank within seven days, it was still possible for the police to find him although Jon put on a different disguise every time he went out. However, the amount of work was too big and it required a lot of manpower and time. The person in charge probably wouldn¡¯t do that. The straight distance from the bank to the Hilton Hotel was only 300 meters. But Jon took Venus and walked around for half an hour, passing through several alleys. As the two walked through the streets, Venus gradually realized that there were no surveince cameras around them. After all, as a sharpshooter and an elite of police officers, her perception was very sharp. Along the way, she did not find any cameras. This discovery made Venus admire Jon again. Back to the hotel, the two did not enter through the front door because there were cameras at the front door. There were no blind spots, so Jon chose to enter through the back door. Although there was a surveince camera at the back door, there were blind spots. Simrly, in order to avoid being caught by the surveince camera, they did not take the elevator. Two people carrying a hundred pounds of weight climbed up the fifteenth floor step by step. There was also a blind spot on the 15th floor, which was the distance between the door of Jon¡¯s room and the staircase. Therefore, from the time Jon came out of the bank to the room in Hilton Hotel, he was not caught on the surveince cameras. When the two of them arrived at the room, they were already panting. After all, no matter how fit they were, it was very exhausting to carry a 100-pound weight up to the 15th floor. The two of them took off their backpacks and sat on the sofa to rest. ¡°Escaped.¡± Venus Alice took a few deep breaths. This exercise could be said to be one of the most exciting things she had ever experienced. It was because of Jon¡¯s infection that she had also thrown herself into the role of a robber. There were even asional moments when she thought of herself as a real robber. Now, as a robber, she had escaped from the police¡¯s pursuit. Thinking about it, she felt a sense of aplishment. ¡°The drill is not over yet. If the police find out that we have escaped, they will ask for a certain amount of time to hunt us down,¡± Jon was also panting heavily. Now, he suddenly felt that out of the two attributes given by the system, not only was intelligence important, but physical fitness was also equally important. If he had added 5 attribute points to his physical fitness back then, he probably wouldn¡¯t be so tired now. ¡°Then if the police arrested us then, wouldn¡¯t we be in danger?¡± Venus Alice heard Jon¡¯s words and said with some worry. After all, this ce was only 300 meters away from the bank in a straight line. Once the police found that the two were not on the bus, they would likely conduct an investigation from the nearby area of the bank. Then hiding here would appear to be very risky. Hearing that, Jon shook his head and said, ¡°Actually, this is the most ideal hiding ce.¡± ¡°The so-called most dangerous ce is the safest ce. We are now only 300 meters away from themand center in a straight line. It¡¯s very likely that they won¡¯t think that we are hiding here.¡± ¡°After all, ording to the mentality of ordinary people, once they temporarily hid from the police, they will definitely run as far away as possible. ¡°Moreover, after we left the bank, we were not caught on any surveince cameras along the way. Moreover, this is Hilton Hotel, where the upancy rate is very high.¡± ¡°The police probably won¡¯t guess that the robbers are so rampant and hiding under the eyes of many people.¡± ¡°So, it¡¯s impossible for the police to find our tracks.¡± From the moment they arrived, Jon had already regarded this ce as the best ce to hide. After all, the more dangerous the ce, the safer it was. Moreover, on the way back, there weren¡¯t any cameras that could capture them. They could also observe the police¡¯s movements at any time while hiding here. If they found anything wrong, the two of them would also have enough time to react. From there, they could make ns. Now, they only needed to wait for the director to inform them how much time the police needed for hunting them during this exercise. Then, when the time was over, the exercise would be over. He would be able to receive the reward from the system. Moreover, he might also be able to start investigating the incident three years ago. Listening to Jon¡¯s clear analysis, Venus¡¯s eyes were no longer filled with respect only, there was also a hint of admiration. Amazing. This man was really too strong. From the exercise until now, he seemed to have nned every step. Every step was meticulously nned. It could almost be said that he was toying his opponent. From the drill until now, it was all Jon who led the pace and the police could only be led by the nose by him. Such a terrifying ability. Throughout Venus¡¯s growing up, she had only seen it in Jon. If such a person was really a robber, probably no police in the world could catch him. ¡°Up until now, the police are probably still in the dark and didn¡¯t realize that we had escaped from behind the bank. This makes me feel that the police have lost face,¡± Venus Alice smiled and said. ¡°However, it¡¯s still because your n is perfect enough that the police won¡¯t be able to find out for the time being.¡± ¡°Are all of you people with high IQ so terrifying? You n step by step.¡± ¡°If you n an affair, your girlfriend will definitely be kept in the dark. As long as you don¡¯t say it, she will never know,¡± she said in a joking tone. After all, the two of them did not speak and was observing their surroundings while on the way back to the hotel from the bank. They were very quiet on the way. And now that they had arrived at a temporarily safe ce, there was no need to make the atmosphere so tense. So she made a joke to ease the tension. ¡°Oh, Ma¡¯am, you¡¯re using my IQ for an affair. It¡¯s a bit underemployed.¡± Hearing that, Jon smiled and said in a joking tone. ¡°Indeed, I am saying you are a sledgehammer to crack a nut.¡± Venus Alice agreed. With his intelligence, other than a drill, there were many areas that could allow him to show his intelligence without restraint. If it was only used to n cheating, it was indeed underemployed. ¡°By the way, do you have a girlfriend?¡± Venus asked casually. Jon looked at her. She did not avoid his gaze. Her eyes were filled with admiration and a strange look. Jon averted his gaze. Chapter 87 - Polices Action!

Chapter 87: Police¡¯s Action!

¡°Girlfriend?¡± He was unfamiliar with the term. In fact, he had slept with quite a number of women. During his years as a Navy SEALs, he would have sex with some women in order to do a mission sometimes. It would be a night of partying. And when he was frustrated, he would find some perfect prey in bars. Recently, he had had sex with two women. One is Mary, a waitress at a strip club, and the other is Gal Gadot, a reporter for city television station. However, no one was officially having a rtionship with him. None. He didn¡¯t say anything. Venus Alice was also very sensible and didn¡¯t continue to ask. She vaguely guessed the answer from Jon¡¯s expression. That was he did not have a girlfriend now. This discovery made her a little excited. In this world, there were not many outstanding men and there were very few outstanding men like Jon. During this exercise, Jon was very confident from beginning to end and this confidence made Venus feel that he was very attractive. The next moment, Venus stood up and boldly sat beside Jon. She looked at him with fiery eyes. As long as Jon was willing, the two of them could definitely do something. However, at this moment, Jon stood up and went to the window to look into the distance because now was not the time to let down his guard. He could naturally feel Venus¡¯s attitude towards him. It would be a lie to say that he did not have any thoughts towards a beautiful woman. However, the night before he came to Pennsylvania, he had already had sex with Gal Gadot. And now, she was still broadcasting from outside with the car. If he had sex with another woman at this time, wouldn¡¯t he look like a scumbag? So this time, Jon ran away. And Venus, seeing Jon run away, was slightly stunned. Then a smile appeared on the corner of her mouth. It seemed that this outstanding man was not so easy to conquer. But, this was what made it interesting. .. On the other side, Brown Williams was driving. And not far behind, there were more than a dozen police cars. As for the nervous and exciting police chase scene that the audience was looking forward to, it didn¡¯t happen. That was because the bus didn¡¯t show any signs of fleeing. It didn¡¯t speed up to escape from the sight of the police. Instead, it drove at a leisurely pace. It didn¡¯t look like fleeing at all, but more like¡­ sightseeing? This scene made the person-in-charge of themand center a little dumbfounded. ¡°What are the robbers trying to do?¡± The person-in-charge looked at the surveince footage from the road surveince in the control center. He couldn¡¯t help but frowned. The bus was not moving very fast. It did not look like it was running for its life. Furthermore, he had just looked at the route map of the city. The route that the bus was traveling was not the route to leave the city. So, the robbers did not have any intention of leaving the city? Furthermore, not only did they not want to leave the city, they seemed to be going in circles. It seemed like they wanted to go in circles before returning to the bank. What was going on? ¡°The robbers seem to be fleeing aimlessly. Has Jon not nned his escape route?¡± The SWAT team leader looked at the surveince footage and his face full of suspicion. The person-in-charge rubbed the space between his eyebrows and said, ¡°With Jon¡¯s IQ, it¡¯s impossible for him to not n his escape route in such a long time.¡± Even the police¡¯s surprise attack n could be carefully nned by Jon within a few minutes. Then¡­ The escape route after the bank robbery should have been nned before he acted. But driving around aimlessly with the police, it didn¡¯t seem like he had a n. ¡°Police officer at Sam Junction, please respond if you receive.¡± The person-in-charge stared at the monitor for a while, picked up the walkie-talkie and spoke in a deep voice. Themunication range of the police walkie-talkie was very far. Because of the support of the radiowork, themunication range could reach up to 20 kilometers. Therefore, the person-in-charge gave order in themand room through the walkie-talkie, and the police officers who were far away could also receive it. ¡°Received at Sam Junction. Please speak, sir.¡± The reply of the police officer quickly came through the walkie-talkie. ¡°Please immediately set up a roadblock at Sam Junction to force the robbers to changenes in front of Sam Junction.¡± ¡°I repeat, set up a roadblock to force the robbers¡¯ vehicles to changenes.¡± The person-in-charge gave the order. Although he did not know what the purpose of the bus driving at a leisurely pace was, he was sure that Jon had some sort of objective. Even though he didn¡¯t know what Jon¡¯s objective was, he couldn¡¯t let the other party continue like this. And¡­ It was time for the police to take the initiative to attack. After all, the person-in-charge had deployed manpower at many intersections. So, he could force the robbers to follow the route he wanted at any time. ¡°Roger.¡± A reply came from the walkie-talkie immediately. Sam¡¯s intersection¡­ After receiving the order from the person-in-charge, the police immediately set up a roadblock in the middle of the road to ensure that the robbers couldn¡¯t pass through here. The intersection here was a human-shaped intersection. One led to the road that was told, and the other led out of the city. The chief captain had set up defenses on this road because there were not many vehicles on the highway from this intersection. And the robbers were taking this route that had very little traffic. Setting up a barricade here could first stop the robbers from the highway, and it could also not affect the defenses at the intersection. A few minutester, the robbers¡¯ bus drove over. From afar, Brown Williams could already see the roadblock. ¡°Looks like the police are going to make a move on us. We¡¯ve dragged out enough time. I hope Jon and the others are safe.¡± Looking at the roadblock, Brown Williams smiled. As a police officer, he was naturally very clear about the police¡¯s methods. Without thinking, he knew that the roadblock was set up by the police. Facing so many roadblocks, it was impossible to force his way through. Otherwise, the only oue would be a car crash and death. Therefore, even if Brown knew that this was the police¡¯s method, he had no choice but to obediently changenes and follow the route that the person-in-charge had prepared beforehand. Temporarymand room¡­ The person-in-charge looked at the robbers¡¯ bus and saw that it was heading towards the road he wanted. His furrowed brows finally rxed a little. Jon, on the other hand, could be smart. It was not an exaggeration to say that he was a genius. However, the chief captain had spent so much manpower to surround and intercept the robber. Even if Jon was a genius, he should have been arrested by now. The chief captain took out the traffic map of the city andid it on the table. Chapter 88 - Ambush!

Chapter 88: Ambush!

It was time to make a decision and stop the group of robbers at a specific location. This exercise hadsted for six to seven hours and it was time to end it. The person-in-charge scanned the traffic map. Then, he marked a point on the map and said to the squad leader, ¡°Let your men set up here in advance. After we lure the robbers¡¯ vehicles here, quickly control the robbers.¡± On the map, the spot marked by the person-in-charge was near a crematorium. There were very few carsing and going there. Starting an operation here would ensure that it would not affect other cars. ¡°Roger that.¡± Looking at the spot marked by the person-in-charge, the SWAT captain nodded. Then, he quickly turned around and left the temporarymand room. He called his men and informed them to deploy near the crematorium. After the SWAT captain left, the person-in-charge put the map in his hand in front of a few technicians. He asked them tomand the police officers who had already been deployed to force the robbers¡¯ vehicles to head to the destination. After all this was done, the person-in-charge stood in front of the console and looked at the monitor screen. He muttered to himself, ¡°Jon, you won¡¯t be able to escape this time!¡± If the SWAT couldn¡¯t control the robbers in the first ce, then the worst oue would be a chaotic battle. And at that time, no matter how many sacrifices were made, the robbers had to be taken down. Of course, what he hoped the most was to arrest the robbers without any losses. After all, more than a dozen police officers had already died in this drill. The chief captain didn¡¯t want any more sacrifices. After receiving the orders from the person-in-charge, the technicians in front of the control panel continuously gave orders to the intersection in front while tracking the robber¡¯s vehicle. After receiving the orders, the police officers also quickly set up roadblocks, forcing the robber¡¯s car to continuously changenes. This process was very perfect because arge number of police forces had been deployed beforehand. ¡°Sir, the deployment isplete.¡± At this moment, the SWAT captain walked over from outside. ¡°We will throw t tires with nails to stop the bus before the robbers arrive here.¡± The person-in-charge nodded, ¡°Very good.¡± This had already been cast. Whether they could catch all the robbers in one go would depend on the performance of the police officers. At this time, the person-in-charge looked at the time. It had already past nine o¡¯clock in the evening. In other words, this drill had alreadysted for more than seven hours. And a drill that hadsted for more than seven hours was already an unusually anxious drill. This also meant that the high IQ robber, Jon, did live up to his name. This time, the person-in-charge could be considered to have seen his ability. Brown Williams drove the car. He had already changednes many times. There was no other way because the police had set up roadblocks, not changingnes would only result in the destruction of the vehicle and the death of people. Helplessly, he could only follow the route that the police wanted him to drive. After all, he was in a drill with so many people in the bus. As a police officer, even if he was so engrossed in the robbery, Brown would not risk his life to break through the roadblocks. After constantly changingnes, he was getting more and more unfamiliar with the scene in front of him. He had never been to this ce before because this route had already deviated from the nned route. He had never been to this part of the road before him. ¡°If my guess is right, the police should be about to make a move against us.¡± Will Smith came to the driver¡¯s seat and looked at the unfamiliar road in front of him. ¡°That¡¯s the end of our scenes.¡± ¡°But you don¡¯t have to tell me. This exercise was really wonderful. It¡¯s a pity that it ended like this,¡± he lit a cigarette as he said that. Later, he thought about it. There seemed to be a rule in the bus that no one was allowed to smoke. But on second thought, now that he was a robber who dared to rob a bank, why would he care about the rule against smoking? He took a puff and exhaled a puff of smoke. Of the four people, he was the only one who talked a lot. The others didn¡¯t talk much. Now, Venus Alice followed Jon and went away. Brown Williams drove the bus without any intention of speaking. Leon Evans sat in the back with his eyes closed and did not speak. Soon, the bus entered the area nned by the person-in-charge. ¡°What is this ce? Why are there so few cars? There are no other vehicles outside of us?¡± Will Smith finished smoking a cigarette and threw it out of the bus. He looked around. There were only one bus on this road. Even the police vehicles that had been following behind the bus had disappeared. There was a dense forest on both sides of the road. In this silent night, there was an indescribable sense of strangeness. When the wind blew, the forest on both sides rustled, as if something would pounce out at any time. ¡°There¡¯s a crematorium nearby, so there are very few cars,¡± Leon Evans, who was sitting at the back, answered him. ¡°Crematorium?¡± Will Smith was stunned, ¡°Why did the person-in-charge force us here? Could it be that he lost face this time and wants to burn us down?¡± He lit another cigarette and said jokingly as he smoked. This time no one answered him. The temporarymand center¡­ Where the robbers were now had less surveince cameras. Therefore, the control panel could notpletely rely on the cameras and the tracking the police cars. The disy screen only showed the movements of the bus intermittently. ¡°Sir, the robbers¡¯ bus is expected to reach the designated road section in four minutes.¡± When the robbers passed by a certain camera, a few technicians hurriedly reported to the person-in-charge. ¡°Three minutes.¡± The person-in-charge murmured and then looked at the SWAT leader said, ¡°Let your people start to arrange it.¡± Then the person-in-charge picked up the walkie-talkie and gave the order to the police officers following behind the robbers, ¡°All police officers following the robbers¡¯ vehicles, pay attention to keep a distance. The SWAT in the road ahead will arrest the robbers. We must not alert them.¡± The distance had to be maintained. Otherwise, even if the robbers¡¯ bus had a t tire, the robbers would not get out of the bus to check. In that case, even they had intercepted the robbers¡¯ bus but the robbers would not get out of the bus and they would only control the hostages in the bus. Then, it would be another stalemate. ¡°Roger!¡± The police officer¡¯s response was quickly heard from the person-in-charge¡¯s walkie-talkie. At the same time, the SWAT captain also made a call to the SWAT team, telling them to get ready to move. The SWAT team hiding on both sides received the order. They quickly made their move and covered a section of the road with puncture nails. Then, they hid in the bushes on both sides of the road, ready to attack at any time. They waited for about three minutes. Headlights were seen in the distance. Chapter 89 - Jon, caught?!

Chapter 89: Jon, caught?!

The robber¡¯s bus drove over. At this moment, all the police officers on both sides of the road hunched over. As it was already past nine o¡¯clock at night, the sky was very dark and the trees on both sides of the road were very dense. Under such circumstances, even if one paid attention, one might not be able to see the person hiding in the middle of the trees. Moreover, the robbers were still in the state of a bus. The situation on both sides of the road was basically swept by. It was impossible to find the police officers hiding in the bushes. Brown Williams drove the bus and looked straight ahead. Suddenly, he opened his mouth. ¡°I keep feeling that something is wrong. The police spent a lot of effort to force us here. They should be about to make a move.¡± ¡°I think so too,¡± Will Smith agreed. If they weren¡¯t going to make a move, why did they spend so much effort to force them to this road section? Was this a joke? It was obviously impossible. The attitude of the police to make a move was already very obvious. They just didn¡¯t know when exactly they would make a move. At this moment, everyone in the vehicle heard a bang. Then, the bus drove five or six meters forward and stopped. The bus ran into a t tire nail. A solid triangr nail. If this nail was inserted into the tire, it could instantly cause the tire to burst and stop the bus. It was worth mentioning here that the police would use t tires nails, which were hollow, in most cases. When this type of nail was inserted into the tire, the tire would not burst immediately. Instead, the tire would dete and the car could still travel a long distance. However, this time the reason they used a solid t tire nail was because Jon had eliminated more than ten SWAT members. This made the SWAT captain very unhappy. Therefore, he used a solid t tire nail to stop the bus. ¡°A tire puncture?¡± The three robbers on the bus frowned when they saw the situation. As the elites among the police officers, they all sensed that something was wrong. This should not be an ident, but the police took action! Just now, they were still discussing when the police would take action. The police answered them with deeds and actions. Now! After all, the person-in-charge had forced them to drive to this section of the road for so long, and there weren¡¯t many cars passing by this ce. It was a good ce to strike. Will Smith first looked at the situation through the rearview mirror. However, because it was too dark now and there wasn¡¯t any light behind, so nothing could be seen in the rearview mirror. He pricked up his ears again to listen. There was no sound outside either. Will Smith lit another cigarette. In the hazy smoke, his eyes flickered. He was not in a hurry to get out of the bus. As long as he did not get out, even if the SWAT came, they would not dare to act rashly since there were so many hostages in the bus. A few minutes passed, the SWAT members who were hiding on both sides did not hurry to appear, too. After all, they were very clear how cunning this group of robbers was. Moreover, the SWAT captain had also instructed that before the robbers got out of the bus to check the tires, they could not take any action. Another few minutes passed. ¡°Why don¡¯t I go and check on the situation?¡± Behind them, Leon Evans said. The tires had burst. They should not continue wasting time like this. ¡°Wait a little longer,¡± Will Smith said. Ten minutes passed. ¡°The two of us will go down. Brown will take care of the hostages in the bus.¡± Will Smith put out his cigarette. It had been so long. The police didn¡¯t make a move. Perhaps it really was an ident. Moreover, if this dragged on, the police behind would catch up. At that time, they wouldn¡¯t be able to escape even if they wanted to. The two of them got out of the bus. Brown Williams opened the window to get some fresh air. At this moment, the SWAT members hidden on both sides of the road began to move. It was a distance of about ten meters. They moved very slowly and tried their best not to make a sound. Moreover, they were all wearing ck clothes, which was just enough to blend into the night. ¡°How¡¯s the condition of the tires?¡± Brown Williams waited for a while, but he didn¡¯t hear his partner talk about the situation, so he asked. No one answered him. He sensed that something was wrong, so he picked up a pistol and was about to poke his head out. A ck muzzle was pressed against his head. At the same time, the SWAT members who had alreadye to the two sides of the bus door, raised their guns and got on the bus one by one. ¡°Don¡¯t move, police!¡± ¡°All of you, put your hands on your heads!¡± One of the SWAT member shouted. Now that they had already controlled three robbers, logically speaking, there should be two more on the bus. On the bus¡­ As he shouted, everyone immediately panicked, but they quickly reacted. They all put their hands on their heads and their actions were strangely consistent. After all, this was not the first time the hostages had encountered such a situation. They had already experienced it once when the robbers robbed the bank. It was just that this unanimous action surprised the SWAT. They thought that the two robbers hiding among the hostages would use the hostages to confront them. Unexpectedly, they also covered their heads. At this moment, all the police were focused. After all, this group of people were all dressed the same. It was impossible to tell who they were. However, the SWAT were sure that the two robbers were in the middle of this group of hostages. And their way of determining the robbers was only when the robbers took out their guns. Thinking of this, several SWAT members held their guns tightly in their hands and stared at everyone in the car. They wanted to prevent the robbers hiding among the hostages from making any movements. As for the other SWAT members, they made everyone in the bus walk down with their hands on their heads. However, what surprised them was that no one took out their weapons. There wasn¡¯t even anyone who resisted. The people in the bus were very obedient. They got out of the car obediently and were inspected one by one. Could it be that the remaining robbers knew that they couldn¡¯t escape and had given up resisting? ¡°Sir, the scene has been controlled. We have arrested three robbers and the remaining robbers are still being investigated.¡± After everyone in the bus got off, a SWAT member quickly took out his walkie-talkie to report the situation. In the temporarymand room, the person-in-charge¡¯s gloomy face finally showed some signs of improvement after hearing the report from the SWAT member. He even revealed a smile. He had finally managed to control everyone. Was Jon finally captured? ¡°How many people are there at the scene?¡± The person-in-charge slowly asked. What he needed to confirm now was whether any of the robbers had run away. After all, there were many blind spots on the path to the crematorium. Moreover, in order not to alert the enemy, the person-in-charge had already ordered the police cars behind them to widen the distance between them. Therefore, even if there were robbers who abandoned their bus and fled during this period of time, the police would not be able to discover them. ¡°There are a total of thirteen people!¡± Very soon, reports came from the other side. Hearing this, the smile on the person-in-charge¡¯s face became even more brilliant. Originally, the number of hostages in the bank was nine. However, after a surprise attack wasunched, the bank manager was rescued after the surprise attack failed, and the number of hostages was reduced by one. Now, there were five robbers and eight hostages. There were a total of 13 of them, no more, no less. When they got into the bus, the number of people they found was also 13. Jon had finally been caught! It had been eight or nine hours since the drill started. That highly intelligent robber, Jon, had finally been caught. He had finally been caught! Even though the police had lost more than a dozen SWAT members, they still obtained the final victory of the drill! At this moment, the police were very excited. Jon had yed them for so long and they thought that they had finally caught the other party this time. The facts proved that Jon¡¯s invincible legend was going to be shattered! However¡­ When they checked on the hostages, they found out! Chapter 90 - There Was No Jon! All of Them Were Hostages!

Chapter 90: There Was No Jon! All of Them Were Hostages!

¡°Police officers following the bus of the robbers, please pay attention. The operation has been sessful. Immediately go and assist the SWAT in identifying the robbers.¡± Then, the person-in-charge picked up the walkie-talkie and issued an order. Now, the SWAT members had controlled the robbers. However, the SWAT did not have a picture of the robbers, nor had they seen the robbers. It was difficult to identify the robbers among so many hostages. It was difficult. Therefore, the person-in-charge asked the police officers with photos of the robbers toe to the rescue. The faster they could find Jon among the hostages, the better. By controlling him, they could also prevent him from using any other tricks. Three minutester, more than a dozen police cars whizzed by. The lights on the police cars shed and sirens sounded. Dozens of police officers got out of the cars. They quickly went in front of the hostages. Gal Gadot, who had been following the polica car live, also got out of the car to broadcast the police arrest. Jon had been arrested. This was the news that Gal Gadot had just learned. She could not believe that the man known as the high IQ robber had been arrested just like that? At the same time, she was also a little disappointed because she naturally hoped that the winner of this exercise would be Jon. But even though she was feeling down, she could only bury it in the bottom of her heart while facing so many viewers in the live broadcast room. ¡°Good evening, dear viewers. It¡¯s now 9:30 pm. Seven and a half hours have passed since the beginning of the exercise.¡± ¡°And after the robbers tried to escape from the bank by the bus, they were finally captured by the police.¡± ¡°This is the scene of the police¡¯s arrest.¡± ¡°Although Jon was arrested by the police, he did not disappoint the audience. Hepleted the exercise with a serious and well-knit attitude. He showed the side of a high IQ robber and created a lot of difficulties for the police during the exercise.¡± Gal Gadot entered the screen again with the microphone. The exercisested seven and a half hours. During the police chase, the poprity of the live broadcast had reached a new peak. After all, only Galgado, who was an official live broadcast, was qualified to follow and report on this chase. Now, in her live broadcast room, it naturally gathered all the audience who were interested in the exercise. Moreover, it was now past nine o¡¯clock, which was the peak of the evening traffic. Everyone had a busy day, so now they had time to watch the live broadcast. As a result, the number of people watching the live broadcast in Gal Gadot¡¯s live broadcast room had already reached 70 million at that time. This figure was something that no other media could reach. If it was 30 million people, they might be able to reach it. If it was 40 million people, they might be able to reach it if they worked harder. But 70 million people, this number was enough to make any media in the United States despair. However, even if other media were envious, there was nothing they could do. After all, Gal Gadot was the official live broadcast that the director had set up. ¡°Jon has been caught. Is this true? Why does it feel like it¡¯s a little hard to believe?¡± ¡°What¡¯s so hard to believe? Isn¡¯t it within expectations that Jon has been captured?¡± ¡°Yeah, with so many police officers and even more than a dozen SWAT members, it would be strange if they couldn¡¯t arrest Jon.¡± ¡°To be able to hold on for so long during the drill was amazing. It¡¯s already been more than seven hours. It¡¯s not a short period of time.¡± ¡°Yeah, not only that, he even eliminated more than a dozen well-equipped SWAT members. That¡¯s already very impressive.¡± ¡°I just didn¡¯t expect that Jon would be arrested just like that. I thought that he would be able to obtain the final victory.¡± ¡°Although he was caught, Jon can still be considered the strongest robber in history.¡± ¡°However, this reporterdy has appeared on camera again. The sensible me has already started charging again.¡± ¡°Hey, you up there, didn¡¯t you just charge in the afternoon?¡± ¡°But my brother is thinking about it again. Sigh, actually, I don¡¯t mind when the timees, but no matter how bitter it is, it can¡¯t let my brother suffer.¡± ¡°Shameless!¡± ¡°Hey, yourments are as if you have never seen a woman in your entire life. If you want to cause trouble, go out the door and turn left. This is the live broadcast room of the drill.¡± ¡°The drill is about to end. Wash up and go to sleep.¡± In the live broadcast room, the bullet screens were surging wildly. When they heard that Jon was arrested by the police, most people thought it was within expectations because these people didn¡¯t think that Jon would be able to escape. And hearing that he was arrested, obviously, this was a very normal thing because justice would eventually prevail over evil in this world. And some people thought that it was already very good for Jon to be able to do this. After all, he had created a lot of difficulties for the police in the bank. Moreover, he had eliminated more than a dozen SWAT members. That was already very impressive. A very small number of people felt that it was a pity. They thought that Jon would be able to escape from the police likest time. While the audience was discussing in the live broadcast room, the police were holding photos of the robbers and confirming their identities. Around them were SWAT members with guns. Even at this moment, the SWAT members did not dare to rx. They were focused on preventing the robbers from making a final counterattack. After all, Jon was a fierce bandit. Such a person would not be willing to be arrested. Even in such a situation where it was almost impossible to escape, he might not let go of hisst hope. The police checked them one by one. The first one was not. The second one was not. The third one¡­ The fourth one¡­ ¡­ The eighth one was not. At this point, there were only two people left in the group of hostages. The hostages and the robbers made a total of 13 people. Among them, three robbers were already under the control of the SWAT. The remaining two robbers were hiding among the eight hostages. And now all the hostages had been found. The remaining two could only be robbers. At this moment, the atmosphere became solemn. The police officer in charge of the investigation also held his breath. The SWAT member with the gun also held the gun in his hand tightly. Simrly, the audience in the live broadcast room also held their breath when they saw this scene. There were even quite a number of people who had stop sending bullet messages. They were waiting for what was going to happen next. This was what everyone was waiting for. The police officer took off the mask of one of the two remaining people. It wasn¡¯t the robber! At this moment, everyone was stunned. What was going on? Why were they still hostages? Weren¡¯t there only eight hostages left? There were nine hostages in the bank, but when the policeunched a surprise attack, the SWAT captain had already saved one of the hostages. There were only eight hostages left. But now, what was going on? The police checked the photo carefully, but it was clear that the hostage was not one of the five robbers. Chapter 91 - Where Did Jon Go? !

Chapter 91: Where Did Jon Go? !

Then the police officer quickly went to confirm the identity of thest person. This time, everyone was looking forward to it. After all, if this person was still not Jon, then the drill that everyone thought was going to end would have to be extended. The police took off the mask of thest person. It was still not Jon. At this moment, everyone could not believe their eyes. Jon was not here? Jon was not in the bus! Then, where did he go? ¡°The robbers are very cunning, and they know how to disguise themselves. It¡¯s also possible that they disguised themselves as another person we don¡¯t know. We have to check carefully.¡± At this moment, a police officer spoke. When he said this, not only the other police officers, but the SWAT team officer also nodded. After all, before participating in this drill. They all knew Jon. They knew that he was proficient in disguise. If he disguised himself as a stranger, it would be hard to find him. So, the police officer took the photo again and checked the hostages for a second time. This time, he checked them very carefully. However, he didn¡¯t find any traces of disguise on the ten hostages. In other words, all ten of them were real hostages. None of them were robbers. Jon and Venus Alice weren¡¯t here! No one could figure out where they went if they weren¡¯t here? The number of hostages and the number of robbers were confirmed from the beginning. Why were there two more hostages and two less robbers all of a sudden? At this moment, everyone at the scene was dumbfounded. And in the livestream, thement section was exploded. ¡°Can anyone tell me what happened? Why isn¡¯t Jon around but there are two more hostages?¡± ¡°Howe there are more hostages and why there are robbers missing?¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t they say that there were only nine hostages in total? After they manage to save one hostage why there are still ten of them? I really don¡¯t get it.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t get it either, but I think Jon is really awesome. When no one was optimistic about him, he just disappeared in front of the entire nation¡¯s audience?¡± ¡°How did he disappear? is he someone with a high IQ? Damn it, I realized that with my IQ, I don¡¯t deserve to watch this show.¡± ¡°Jon is really strong. He¡¯s too strong. I¡¯mpletely in awe of him now.¡± ¡°Do you think that the two extra hostages were prepared by Jon before the drill?¡± ¡°I think so. Now that the two robbers have escaped, the drill must continue. I can watch it again.¡± ¡°A minute ago, I was thinking that if the drill ended like this, it would be too boring. I didn¡¯t expect Jon to give me a surprise.¡± ¡°What a twisted turn. Jon is the strongest robber in history, no doubt.¡± Thements were surging crazily. Just a few minutes ago, everyone thought that Jon had already been caught and this drill had also entered the end with his capture. But who would have thought that things would turn around. Jon wasn¡¯t here! At this moment, all the audiences were discussing. With 70 million viewers, even if each person only sent onement, the server wouldn¡¯t be able to handle it. Fortunately, the live broadcast tform had already predicted that this drill would be very popr, so they had already made preparations. They had already set up a server before the drill. Now, it came in handy. Thements nowpletely filled up the livestream screen. If they didn¡¯t turn it off, then they wouldn¡¯t be able to see the live broadcast. Gal Gadot stood beside the cameraman and watched the police officers confirm their identities one by one, but in the end, they did not find Jon. She was also stunned. But after the shock, a bright smile appeared on her face. She knew that Jon would definitely be able to escape. ¡°Sir, the identities of everyone at the scene have been confirmed. The three robbers captured are Will Smith, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans.¡± ¡°But at the scene, Jon and Venus Alice were not found. As for the two extra people, they are hostages.¡± At this moment, the SWAT team members could only pick up the walkie-talkie and report the situation. In the temporarymand room, there was only silence. It was so quiet that no one spoke. In fact, before the SWAT team reported, they had seen everything that happened from the beginning to the end through the camera on the SWAT team¡¯s helmet. Seeing this scene, the smile on the face of themander disappeared and was reced by an extremely gloomy expression. This time, they did not capture Jon! This result made him very angry. While he was angry, he also felt puzzled. Where did Jon go? He did not make any ws. Every step could be said to be under his control. In the bank, when the surveince cameras were not cut off, he had confirmed it many times. But now, how could two more hostages appear out of thin air? Themander frowned. In his mind, he recalled the scenes from the start of the drill until now. There were some details that he had overlooked. When the police arrived. Jon pulled the curtains down so that the police officers could not see what was happening inside from the outside. However, what was unusual was that Jon did not block the camera. At the beginning, it could be exined that the robbers had forgotten. Butter, a robber deliberately reminded Jon. Jon still did not block the camera. This meant that Jon had deliberately let them see the scene in the bank. ¡°The problem is very likely to appear here.¡± Themander muttered, his brows furrowed. He was a little frustrated now. Because he had overlooked an important factor in this drill, which caused Jon to escape. Jon¡¯s was too smart. His n could be said to be extremely thorough and interlinked. As long as he ignored any small problem, this w would be enough for Jon to escape. ¡°Sir, what did you find?¡± The SWAT team leader could not help but ask when he heard themander mutter to himself. Up until now, he still did not realize that there was a problem. ¡°Previously in the bank, Jon did not block the camera. Why didn¡¯t he block the camera?¡± ¡°He could have blocked the camera so that we couldn¡¯t see what was going on in the bank. This was more beneficial to them.¡± ¡°And he wanted us to use the camera to monitor his every move.¡± Themander said slowly. ¡°Is this what Jon wanted?¡±, the SWAT team leader asked. They had discussed this before. Jon didn¡¯t block the camera because he had forgotten, but he deliberately let the police know about what happened in the bank lobby. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s what he wanted us to see. He¡¯s too smart. He must have hidden two hostages from the beginning, in our blind spot.¡± ¡°He didn¡¯t cover the camera because he wanted us to determine the number of hostages from the surveince footage.¡± Chapter 92 - Return to the Bank Square!

Chapter 92: Return to the Bank Square!

In the temporarymand room. Themander looked helpless and said in a faint voice, ¡°Do you remember asking why the two robbers didn¡¯t have guns in their hands?¡± ¡°It¡¯s very likely that at that time, these so-called two robbers were the hostages arranged by Jon.¡± ¡°And the reason why Jon didn¡¯t give them guns was also very easy to exin. If he handed the guns to the hostages and if the hostages fired under pressure, then his n would be ruined.¡± ¡°He¡­ from the beginning, he had nned to use the two hostages to escape.¡± If he had thought of this earlier, Jon wouldn¡¯t have escaped so easily. Hearing themander¡¯s words, the SWAT team leader slowly nodded. At the same time, themissioner also nodded. Because he was the referee, themissioner knew much more than themander. In fact, themissioner had noticed this from the beginning. But because he was the referee, he couldn¡¯t help either side, so he didn¡¯t speak. In the bank, themissioner left a pile of gold, the gold was almost impossible to take away. It was to test the intelligence of the robbers to see the robbers could sessfully steal the gold from the bank or not. He wanted to see Jon take the gold away during the confrontation with the police. However, after Jon entered the safe area, he came out very quickly. The number of robbers and the number of hostages did not have any changes on the surveince screen back then. But Jon was already stalling for time. In such a short time, how could Jon take care of so much gold? It was obviously impossible. Therefore, at that time, themissioner had already thought of the two people who followed Jon out of the safe area, they were not the real robbers. From that moment on, themissioner was also silently observing the surveince footage. When he discovered that Jon hade out of the safe area. He had nevermunicated with the two ¡°robbers¡±. Moreover. Although the three of them were sitting together, the two of them were obviously a little afraid of Jon, and their bodies couldn¡¯t help but deviate in the opposite direction of Jon. They obviously didn¡¯t want to get close to him. At that time, themissioner had already guessed that these two people should be the two hostages that no one knew about. Jon had prepared this n beforehand. However, because themissioner himself was the referee, he couldn¡¯t help either side in the drill. So, he naturally wouldn¡¯t tell the police this clue. He just hoped that they would find it. But now, themander had found it, but it was over. Now, the hostage disguised as the robbers, attracting all the attention of the police. From the time they drove the bus, to the time they were stopped by the SWAT team near the crematorium. It had been several hours. And in these few hours, Jon and the other robber were probably long gone. Even though three robbers had already been caught, but Jon was not arrested, which meant that the drill was still not over. However, it was very difficult to catch Jon now. ¡°Sir, what should we do now?¡± After listening to themander¡¯s words, the SWAT team leader felt that his analysis should be correct. He naturally had to ask for instructions on this matter. ¡°Bring back the three robbers and the hostages now. The only good news for us now is that all the hostages have been safely rescued.¡± Themander slowly said, ¡°Although Jon has escaped, we will definitely be able to capture him!¡± Actually, when he said this again, he did not have much confidence in his heart. That was because Jon was too smart. If what he had analyzed was true, it wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to say that this was a perfect crime. And he had thoroughly experienced Jon¡¯s methods. How could such a cautious person would still be caught if he had enough time to escape? It was unrealistic to think about it. The drill wasn¡¯t over yet. He would do everything to arrest Jon! ¡°Yes, sir.¡±. After the SWAT team leader heard themander¡¯s words, he hurriedly instructed his team members to bring back the hostages and robbers. Ten o¡¯clock. All the police officers who went out to chase Jon, as well as the police officers who set up roadblocks at the intersection were all returned. In the square outside the bank, headlights were set up all around. Nearly a hundred police officers gathered here. At this time, the bus carrying the hostages wasing, and it stopped in the square. The tires of the bus had been reced with brand new ones. Although, they did not capture Jon in this operation, three robbers were arrested, and ten hostages were sessfully rescued. It was also a pretty good result. Under everyone¡¯s gaze, the bus door opened. The hostages walked out in an orderly manner. As for thest, it was the three robbers. They were already in handcuffs. ¡°Thank you for your hard work, officers.¡± Even though Will Smith was in handcuffs, facing so many officers, he still had a rxed look on his face. He even swaggered and whistled. Hearing this whistle, themander standing in front of the temporarymand center had an ugly expression on his face. Too arrogant. Will Smith¡¯s attitude now was like he was not a robber, but a police officer who was arresting the robbers. At this time, the SWAT team officers brought the three robbers to the front of the temporarymand center, saluted and said, ¡°Sir, the three robbers have been arrested.¡± Themander nodded and looked at the three robbers. He didn¡¯t say anything. At this moment, Gal Gadot, who was broadcasting in the car, also returned. As an official live broadcast reporter, she naturally wanted to interview the robbers after they were arrested. She hadn¡¯t had the chance to interview them when she was near the crematorium just now. Gal Gadot once again got on the camera scene in the live stream. ¡°It¡¯s 10:10 pm now. All the police officers who are tracking the robbers and those who have set up roadblocks at various junctions have all returned to the square outside the bank to gather.¡± ¡°This police operation has captured three robbers and rescued ten hostages. It¡¯s already a considerable achievement.¡± ¡°As for Jon and the other robber, Venus Alice, they are still on the run.¡± ¡°Now, we n to go and interview them. Let¡¯s start with the captured robbers.¡± Then, the camera moved. Gal Gadot brought the cameraman to Will Smith¡¯s side. ¡°Hello, Mr. Will. May I interview you?¡± Hearing the voice, Will Smith raised his eyelids, looking reluctant. But he still said, ¡°What do you want to ask? Just ask quickly.¡± ¡°As a robber, you have already been arrested by the police. May I asl what is your feeling right now?¡± ¡°Feeling, I. . .¡± Chapter 93 - Analysis! How did Jon Escape!

Chapter 93: Analysis! How did Jon Escape!

Will Smith was just about to casually answer Gal Gadot¡¯s question, when he remembered that this was a drill and that there were many people watching in front of the camera. So he said, ¡°To tell you the truth, I was feeling very heavy at first. I felt that my actions had an extremely significant negative impact on the country, the society, and the people ¡°I¡¯m now deeply aware of my mistakes, and I intend to devote myself to correcting them and be a useful person to society.¡± Hearing this answer, the audience in the livestream called him a good actor. Heavy-hearted? Devoted to correcting? If they hadn¡¯t seen his mischievously smile, the audience would have almost believed him. ¡°Then how do you feel about your performance in this drill?¡± Hearing Will Smith¡¯s answer to the first question, Gal Gadot alsoined in her heart. But as a professional journalist, she still hid her emotions very well, so she asked the second question. ¡°Actually, I thought my performance was not bad. At least, I created the image of a fierce robber. But the one who performed the best was our boss, Jon.¡± ¡°What a great man. When I saw my boss, I thought that he was too good in acting as a robber. No, he was indeed a real robber.¡± ¡°And his intelligence, strategy, nning ability, and leadership abilitypletely convinced me.¡± Will Smith spoke with confidence. When he spoke, a hint of admiration appeared on his face. It was not difficult to see that his admiration for Jon came from the bottom of his heart. When themissioner saw this scene, he could not help but smile. Thinking back to nine days ago, when Jon first met the four of them, Jon said that he wanted to be their leader. The four of them were unconvinced at that time. But now, it seemed that they werepletely convinced. At this moment, themissioner could not help but admire Jon. In just a few short days, he had taken care of the elites among the few police officers. At the same time, in the livestream. ¡°Good man, he keeps calling Jon ¡®boss¡¯. Are you sure he is a police officer and not a robber?¡± ¡°He said that he acted as a vicious robber, but I don¡¯t think so. I feel that he is like a dumbhead.¡± ¡°So true. If he were in a movie, he would be the type of person who would joke around.¡± ¡°Haha, there¡¯s no need for that. After all, he is very serious in answering the reporter¡¯s questions, but I can¡¯t help it.¡± ¡°Did you guys notice that he is talking about our boss, Jon? Does that mean that Jon is the leader of this team?¡± ¡°It should be. It should be because Jon¡¯s personality is too charming. With just a shake of his body, he made these police officers and elites submit.¡± The audience in the livestream was amused by Will Smith¡¯s interview. Thement section was also filled with a cheerful atmosphere. While they were discussing, Gal Gadot had also finished asking thest question. Then, themander said, ¡°These three people have been arrested, which means that the three of them have been eliminated. Take off the handcuffs on their hands.¡± After all, this was a drill. After being arrested, they would be disqualified. If they were not really arresting the robbers, there was naturally no need to extort a confession. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± When a SWAT team officer heard this, he hurriedly took off the handcuffs on the hands of the three people. ¡°Good Lord. I¡¯ve been a police officer for so many years, but I¡¯ve always been the one to handcuff others. This is the first time I¡¯ve been handcuffed. Not to mention, I still miss it.¡± After the handcuffs were removed, Will Smith stretched his hands and joked. ¡°What does it feel like to be a robber?¡±, themissioner walked over and asked. ¡°It feels really good, especially when it¡¯s an official robbery. You do whatever you want without any scruples.¡±, Will Smith replied. This was also his true feelings. ¡°However, what shocked me the most was Jon¡¯s ability. If he really was a robber, I would definitely be fooled by him.¡± Fooled? Themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows. He had the same feeling. After Gal Gadot finished interviewing Jon, she asked the cameraman to adjust the camera lens and point it at themander. After all, themander was themander-in chief of this drill. Although Jon had not been caught yet, everyone was curious about where he had gone As for clues, they could only ask themander to see if the police had found anything. ¡°Hello, Sir. Although the operation this time captured three robbers and rescued all the hostages, Jon was not still nowhere to be found.¡± ¡°Moreover, the police said that there were five robbers and nine hostages, but when the SWAT team leader already rescued one hostage, and the hostages increased to ten instead.¡± ¡°What exactly is going on? Can you exin it?¡± Gal Gadot asked the question that the audience was curious about. How did Jon escape? This was something that the audience did not understand. ¡°Jon has an extremely intelligent and is meticulous in his work. Every step he takes is already nned. Therefore, when faced with the various actions of the police, he is always able to respond at the first moment.¡± ¡°His escape n was also prepared at the beginning of the drill.¡± ¡°From the moment they took the hostages, they had already secretly hidden the two hostages. Later, when the police arrived at the scene, he didn¡¯t block the surveince cameras, which meant that he deliberately let us see the surveince footage.¡± ¡°He deliberately let us assume that the number of hostages was nine, and the two hostages he hid were outside the surveince cameras.¡± ¡°Therefore, the police received the wrong information. They thought that the hostages were nine, but in reality, the total number of hostages was eleven.¡± ¡°Jon used this method to escape.¡± Themander slowly said. This was originally just a guess, but just now, the SWAT team leader went to the bank and found two camouge clothes from the back door. These two clothes confirmed themander¡¯s guess. In the livestream, the audience also heard themander¡¯s words. ¡°So that¡¯s how it is, so that¡¯s how it is. Praise Jon, the god of robbery.¡± ¡°Just like how he robbed Blue Bankst time, I didn¡¯t expect him to use such a method to escape. Amazing, too amazing.¡± ¡°When I saw that Jon didn¡¯t block the camera, I thought he had forgotten. So, he had prepared such a move?¡± ¡°How could such an intelligent robber forget such an obvious thing? We are all lowlings in the underground, and Jon is the god flow in the atmosphere.¡± ¡°I think Jon is ying a big chess game, using a drill as a chess game. The hostages and the police are all chess pieces in this game.¡± ¡°Such a view of the big picture and his ability is amazing.¡± ¡°With Jon and the other robber escaping, the police should soon start a new round of arrest operations. It¡¯s now past 10 o¡¯clock. It looks like we¡¯ll have to stay up all night.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll stay up all night. I¡¯ll watch all night too. This drill is too exciting. It¡¯s even more exciting than a movie. I can¡¯t even bear to sleep.¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m going to stay up all night too.¡± ¡°All night + 1.¡± Chapter 94 - There Were Still 24 Hours Left Until the End of the Drill!

Chapter 94: There Were Still 24 Hours Left Until the End of the Drill!

The audiences in the livestream were amazed by Jon¡¯s operation. Without the exnation of themander, the audiences in the livestream would never have thought that Jon would prepare to run away from the start of the drill. Moreover, this big game of chess was interlinked, and it was even more exciting than the movie. It really amazed all the audience. At the door of the temporarymand room. When Gal Gadot heard the words of themander, she was also surprised. She didn¡¯t expect Jon to escape in this way. However, no matter what, Jon sessfully escaped, she was obviously very happy. Because this was the ability of the man she liked. Moreover, Gal Gadot could feel that Jon took every victory of the drill very seriously. Perhaps it was because Jon put a lot of effort into nning and investing in every drill before it began. When one tries very hard to do something well, one is especially concerned about winning or losing. For Jon, he could not lose the drill. So she was happy to see Jon escape, even if only temporarily. However, the interview with themander was not over yet, so Gal Gadot picked up the microphone again. ¡°Now that Jon and the other robber have escaped, do the police have any clues about their next move?¡±, Gal Gadot asked again. It had been more than two hours since they left the bank. The police did not have any clues. Only if Jon exposed his location himself, then the police would have the chance to capture him. ¡°When we searched the bank, we did find a lot of things. This time, the robbers were well prepared and brought a lot of things into the bank ¡°But because there were too many things, and there were only two robbers who escaped, a lot of things were left behind. All of these became our clue.¡± Themander said slowly. Then, he waved his hand, and a few police officers moved an item over. The cameraman adjusted the camera in the corridor and pointed the camera at the item the police officers moved over. ¡°Many people may not have seen this thing before. It¡¯s called the smelting furnace. As for its function, it¡¯s used to melt gold.¡± ¡°This is also one of the tools that the robber, Jon, brought into the bank tomit crimes.¡± ¡°As for why Jon brought the furnace into the bank this time, ording to our understanding, the thing that the robber took from the bank was 100 kilograms of gold ¡°When the robber robbed the bank, he pretended to confront the officers. Two robbers had already used the furnace to melt the gold in the safe into small pieces, so that they could take it away when they escaped ¡°At that time, the robbers should have already let the two hostages pretend to be robbers. That¡¯s why the police didn¡¯t find anything unusual.¡± Themander told the details of the robbers during the drill. As for the information about the gold, he already asked themissioner for permission before revealing it. Now, the robbers had run away, and the gold had been taken away. After all of these, themissioner could tell themander what the robbers had robbed. It was not considered to be a vition of fairness. When the audiences heard themander¡¯s words, the livestream exploded again. ¡°Good god, I thought that the robbers were going to rob money this time. I didn¡¯t expect it to be gold!¡± ¡°Afraid that it would be difficult to move the gold, Jon actually brought a smelting furnace? Fortunately, the gold can be melted. Otherwise, the losses in this drill would not be small.¡± ¡°Themander said that there are 100 kilograms of gold in there. If converted into US dors, it would be 10 million US dors. F*ck, robbing a bank really brings in money quickly.¡± ¡°Yeah, robbing gold not only brings in money quickly, but it¡¯s also very easy to sell. It¡¯s not like notes that has a code. After the gold is melted and reforged, who knows the origin of the gold?¡± ¡°10 million US dors. I¡¯m so envious that saliva flowed from the corner of my mouth.¡± ¡°Brothers, I suddenly have a bold idea.¡± ¡°Upstairs, please put away your idea, or you will be punished by thew!¡± ¡°Haha, let¡¯s guess, Will Jon take the gold and run away, or even leave the United States, and then find a ce that no one knows about and live happily for the rest of his life?¡± ¡°I suddenly feel that it¡¯s possible. After all, with so much money, no one can earn even one-tenth of it if they work hard for their whole life.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know about Jon. If it were me, I would take the risk ofmitting a crime and put all this gold into my own pocket. I would be so free and unrestrained. So what if I was caught? I feel that being poor is more painful than dying.¡± ¡°Yeah, being poor is more painful than dying. If it were me, since I brought all the gold out, then it would naturally belong to me.¡± ¡°Good lord, a drill actually blew up so many potential criminals. Bro, don¡¯t think too much. Living is more important than anything else.¡± In the livestream, the audience was discussing crazily. However, this time, the focus of the discussion was not on Jon. Instead, it was on the 100 kilograms of gold that he had stolen. After all, the attraction of gold was too great. Some people were already crazily thinking about Jon, fantasizing about what would happen if they were the ones who had stolen the gold. On the other side. After Gal Gadot let the audience discuss for a while, she picked up the microphone again and asked onest question. ¡°So, is the drill not over yet? What will the police do next?¡± ¡°Also, how long will this drillst?¡± After all, this was only a drill. Jon was not a real robber. The police could not keep on catching him endlessly. There had to be a time limit, just like a match. Themander thought for a moment and said, ¡°This drill is indeed not over yet. There are only two robbers who escaped, and each of them carries 100 kilograms of gold. It is very inconvenient to escape like this.¡± ¡°Next, we will formte a search and arrest n that will expand with the bank as the center. After discussing with the referee, we have finally set a 24-hour time limit for this drill ¡°In other words, if we can¡¯t find Jon within 24 hours, this drill will be the robbers¡¯ victory.¡± Themander said slowly because the number of audiences for this drill was very high. It could even be said that the entire country was watching. Therefore, the arrest time was set to be within 24 hours. After hearing themander¡¯s words. The audience in the livestream were all quite happy. After all, as long as Jon wasn¡¯t arrested, this drill could continue for another 24 hours, and they could watch until this time tomorrow. After the interview ended, themander hurried into the temporarymand room and began to prepare for the search. This was thest chance. If Jon wasn¡¯t captured within 24 hours, then the robbers had won. And the police department would lose face in front of the entire United States. Themander was under a lot of pressure. Chapter 95 - Bank Surveillance!

Chapter 95: Bank Surveince!

Hilton Hotel. 15th floor. Jon, who was in his room, was holding a binocrs and observing the situation at the bank¡¯s entrance. Since the bank and Hilton Hotel were visible as there weren¡¯t any tall buildings, his position allowed him to see everything at the bank¡¯s entrance through the binocrs. This was also the reason Jon chose to stay here before the drill. Furthermore, he hid a bug on the smelting furnace. The reason he hid this bug was because he thought that the person-in-charge would take it away after discovering it. He wanted to see if there was a chance to monitor the situation in the temporarymand room. He didn¡¯t expect it to seed. Of course, if Jon turned on his phone, it would be easier to watch the live broadcast of Gal Gadot. However, one of the rules of the drill was that the robbers could not watch any live broadcast of the drill. This was because the live broadcast might reveal the police¡¯s n. After all, if it was a real battle, there would not be such a live broadcast. Although no one would discovered it, even if Jon watched the live broadcast, no one would know. But he was a person of principle. He treated this exercise very seriously, and naturally, he would follow all the rules of the exercise. Moreover, by watching the live broadcast, he could obtain information from the police. Even if he won, it would affect the system¡¯s score. If he wanted to get a high score, he could not cheat in any way. ¡°What¡¯s the situation?¡± Just as Jon was using his binocrs to observe the situation in the square outside the bank, the bathroom door opened and Venus Alice walked out while drying her hair. After all, the two of them had carried a hundred pounds and walked around the bank several times before arriving at Hilton Hotel. They took the stairs and climbed up to the fifteenth floor. Not only were they tired, but they were also covered in sweat. As a woman who loved cleanliness, Venus Alice did not allow herself to be wet and sticky. So, she took a shower in the bathroom. After asking a question, she did not wait for Jon to reply and sat down directly by the bed. After all, this was her bedroom. Jon assigned this room to Venus Alice because this ce had the best view and could clearly monitor the bank. ¡°The police have begun their search for us. The deadline is 24 hours. If the police don¡¯t find us within 24 hours, we will win this drill.¡± Jon held the binocrs in his hand and pulled them out of his sight. But he did not turn around. What greeted his eyes was the night view of Pennsylvania. The streets below were filled with traffic. The entire city was lit up by three thousand lights. He could still ept the twenty-four-hour search time. If it was any longer, it would be a little time-consuming. ¡°Twenty-four hours? The police really won¡¯t be able to find this ce within the time?¡± Venus Alice wiped her hair until it was half dry. Then, she came to Jon¡¯s side and looked out with her eyes. A breeze blew past the window. Venus Alice¡¯s body fragrance, along with the scent of the shower, rushed into Jon¡¯s nostrils. It made his body slightly hot. In order to divert his gaze, Jon used his binocrs again to observe the situation at the bank entrance. ¡°It¡¯s precisely because I¡¯m not very sure that I want to monitor them. In addition, I¡¯ll be monitoring them by the window for the next 24 hours. If you don¡¯t mind, you can bring your crazy bedding to my room to rest.¡± Jon said slowly. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. You¡¯re monitoring the bank, not me.¡± Venus Alice looked at Jon and said with a smile. The night wind blew her hair, and some of it tickled Jon¡¯s face. Then Venus Alice got up and took out two bottles of wine from the refrigerator in the hall. She opened them. One bottle for herself and one bottle for Jon. Jon held the bottle in one hand and the binocrs in the other. He pulled a tall stool over from the side. As the evening wind blew, he looked at the bank square across from time to time. However, even when he was not looking at the bank square, he did not look back at Venus Alice. This woman was very beautiful and had a good figure. She was only wearing a pajamas. Most importantly, she was interested in him. He was afraid that he would not be able to control himself if he looked at her. If something happened to the two of them and they did not manage to get the police in time, they would find this ce. Then it would be a big deal. When Venus Alice saw Jon¡¯s ¡°heartless¡± look, she could not help but rolled her eyes at him from behind. Buzz! At that moment, Jon¡¯s phone rang. He picked it up. ¡°Jon, this is the director.¡± The director¡¯s voice came from the other side of the phone. Jon did not look surprised at all. He said calmly, ¡°Director, you called at this time. Is there any news you want to tell me?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The director slowly replied, ¡°Although you have already escaped with the gold, the person-in-charge said that he would try his best to catch you. He requested 24 hours of arrest time from me. What do you think of this time?¡± After all, Jon was not his subordinate. His tone was not that of an order, but of a discussion. ¡°Twenty-four hours, I have no objections.¡± Jon replied, ¡°Then, director, I¡¯ll enjoy the night view of Pennsylvania. Goodbye.¡± With that, he hung up the phone. After all, this director was not too familiar with him, and he could not think of anything to talk about. He might as well hang up the phone. On the other side, the director listened to the busy tone on the phone and smiled, ¡°Enjoy the night view of Pennsylvania? Good boy, you¡¯re in the mood. Don¡¯t you know that outside, the police are extremely busy trying to capture you?¡± From Jon¡¯s tone, he could only hear calmness, not any nervousness. It seemed that Jon had a n in mind. In the square outside the bank, Will Smith, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans had already withdrawn from the exercise. Now they could move freely. The three of them came to a police car and ordered some kebabs and beer. They ate happily. Although the three of them had been eliminated, they were not worried about Jon at all. After all, with Jon¡¯s IQ, it was almost impossible for the police to catch him after he had escaped from the bank. In the temporarymand room, the person-in-charge stood in front of the table and stared at the map on the table. Jon was not from Pennsylvania. He had no family or friends here. It had only been nine days since he had arrived in Pennsylvania. So where could he have gone? Chapter 96 - Focus On the Search!

Chapter 96: Focus On the Search!

Moreover, the two robbers each carried a hundred kilograms of weight on their backs. Would it be the first ce they chose to escape a ce they had spent eight days preparing. But, where did they stay during these eight days? The person-in-charge was having a headache. Jon was too high up, and he didn¡¯t y by the rules. Where exactly would he be? The city was so big, and the person-in-charge didn¡¯t know where to look for him. However, he had already sent people to find all the surveince cameras in the vicinity of the bank within five hours, especially the back door. The person-in-charge felt that since he could not find the direction, he should be able to find a way that Jon used to escape. After all, it was impossible for him to fly out of the city. However, the person-in-charge also knew that it was impossible for someone as cautious as Jon to find him with the surveince cameras. Therefore, his main purpose of investigating the surveince footage was to determine Jon¡¯s direction of escape. Ten minutester¡­ ¡°Sir, we found Jon¡¯s trail,¡± the technician who was checking the surveince footage said. The chief captain quickly went over to take a look. It was the surveince camera at the back of the bank. The surveince footage showed that it was 7:55 pm. In the picture, Jon, who was wearing a cap, walked out of the back door of the bank with Venus Alice. He looked around as if to make sure there were no police officers around. Then the two of them walked to the right. The technicians kept switching between the surveince cameras nearby at that time ording to the direction Jon was heading. Finally, they pieced together Jon¡¯s escape route. After walking for a few blocks, Jon arrived at a crowded street. This was a pedestrian street. There would be many vendors at night and there would be a lot of traffic every night. The footage was traced here. The person-in-charge frowned. Sure enough, with Jon¡¯s cautiousness, how could he not be on guard against the surveince cameras. After he came out of the bank, he did not deliberately avoid the cameras in order to draw the police¡¯s attention here. Such a huge flow of people. Even if there were many surveince cameras on the pedestrian street, it would take a lot of time and manpower to find out where Jon disappeared from. Moreover, the traffic in this ce was in all directions, and there were countless types of public transportation, eg. buses and taxis. As long as Jon avoided the cameras and went to a random ce, it would be impossible to find him. ¡°Continue to investigate. Check the surveince cameras near the pedestrian street and see if you can find Jon.¡± The person-in-charge looked at the surveince footage of the pedestrian street and gave an order to a few technicians. Then, he returned to the table and marked a red dot at the location of the pedestrian street on the map. His brows were tightly knitted. No one knew what he was thinking. Then, he said to the SWAT team leader, ¡°Send someone to check the nine-day rental information of all the hotels, inns, and rental houses near the pedestrian street.¡± ¡°See if you can find the identities of the five robbers.¡± ¡°Focus on the day Jon came to Pennsylvania.¡± The SWAT captain nodded. He had a strong premonition now. That was, the ce Jon was hiding was the ce where they had settled down before the attack. After all, Jon was a person with a meticulous n. He should have chosen a good hiding ce before the attack. Moreover, the two of them carried a hundred kilograms of weight together. They should not have walked too far. Thest ce they appeared was the pedestrian street, so they had to search the surroundings with the pedestrian street as the center. Just as they were about to respond to the person-in-charge, something suddenly shed through the head of the SWAT team. ¡°Sir, given Jon¡¯s intelligence and caution, could it be that he deliberately drew our attention to the area around the pedestrian street? After all, there are a lot of people here, so it¡¯s very difficult to investigate.¡± ¡°And the ce where he¡¯s hiding, could it be that he¡¯s not at the pedestrian street at all, and that he¡¯s doing this just to distract us?¡± The person-in-charge nodded, ¡°It¡¯s very possible, but Jon has always disliked ying by the rules.¡± ¡°He must have known that we would think that way, so he used our mentality to directly hide in the pedestrian street area.¡± ¡°We can¡¯t think too much when fighting with people like Jon. Otherwise, we¡¯ll feel suspicious everywhere.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± The SWAT captain nodded and didn¡¯t say anything else. He turned around and started to deploy manpower to check the hotels near the pedestrian street and all kinds of short-term rental houses. In the temporarymand room, Gal Gadot and the cameraman were also there. The words of the person-in-charge were transmitted to the ears of every audience through the live broadcast. ¡°Wow, this thinking is amazing. It seems quite reasonable.¡± ¡°However, no matter how reasonable it is, it is already very difficult for the police to catch Jon.¡± ¡°The probability of catching him is basically infinitely close to zero.¡± ¡°Yeah, the time is too short and the difficulty of the investigation is too great. I am also not optimistic that we can catch Jon within 24 hours.¡± ¡°After all, Jon has already passed the most difficult stage. He left the bank in a situation that no one expected. It¡¯s like a tiger returning to the mountain and a dragon soaring into the sea. They can¡¯t catch him anymore.¡± ¡°It¡¯s actually good that they can¡¯t catch him. This way I can watch the live broadcast until tomorrow.¡± ¡°Now that this drill hase to this point, Jon¡¯s chances of winning are already very high.¡± ¡°First, he won the town council¡¯s exercise, and now he¡¯s going to win the police station¡¯s exercise. I¡¯m willing to call Jon the strongest robber in history. Does anyone have any objections to give him this title?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t have any objections.¡± ¡°I¡¯m all for it.¡± ¡°But no matter what, this robber is extremely popr. Look at the poprity of the live broadcast room. Now, there are 73 million online viewers. It¡¯s simply too popr.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not just the live broadcast room. Look at the trending searches on all the major tforms. Look at Twitter and Facebook. Out of ten trending searches, seven to eight of them are rted to Jon.¡± The audience discussed crazily in the live broadcast room. At first, this group of viewers did not think that Jon would be able to escape from the police¡¯s pursuit. They thought that Jon would definitely be caught by the police. But now, they did not think that the police would be able to catch Jon. The reason the audience guessed that the wind would change like this was because Jon had escaped the police¡¯s sight. To catch him now was like finding a needle in a haystack. It was too difficult. The pedestrian street¡­ The officers arranged by the SWAT team leader had begun to carefully search the nearby hotels and inns. They checked all the check-in records for the past nine days. And, at the behest of the person-in-charge, the check-in records for the day Jon arrived in Pennsylvania were checked. Chapter 97 - Jon Was Going To Be Arrested Again?!

Chapter 97: Jon Was Going To Be Arrested Again?!

In the temporarymand room, the person-in-charge didn¡¯t have much hope for the results of this investigation. Right now, he was staring at the map, thinking about how to expand the scope of the search. At this moment, his walkie-talkie rang. ¡°Sir, when searching for Toronto Hotel at 49 Pedestrian Street, we found Jon¡¯s registration record at two o¡¯clock this afternoon.¡± On the other end of the walkie-talkie was a report from his subordinate. When he heard this, the person-in-charge¡¯s blood boiled and a smile appeared on his face. He had guessed that after escaping from the bank, Jon would hide in the Pedestrian Street. He did not expect that his guess was right. ¡°Quickly seal the scene. We will rush to support. We must not let Jon run away again!¡± The SWAT team leader was also very excited. He quickly gave an order to the walkie-talkie. There were not many police officers investigating the Pedestrian Street so the person-in-charge would need to bring people over to support. Moreover, Jon had caused a lot of trouble to the police today. Naturally, he had to personally arrest him to vent his anger. Then, the SWAT team leader put on a bulletproof vest and said to the person-in-charge, ¡°Sir, do you want to go over personally? See how Jon was arrested?¡± The person-in-charge smiled and said, ¡°I won¡¯t go. But you must remember that Jon is very cautious and cunning. You must be very careful when you capture him.¡± ¡°You mustn¡¯t let him escape again. If you let him escape this time, you won¡¯t know where to capture him next time.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll definitely handcuff Jon and bring him here.¡± The SWAT captain nodded, looking a little impatient. Then, he left themand room and began to dispatch the SWAT members to join him in the capture operation. Because he was afraid that too many people would attract Jon¡¯s attention in advance, the SWAT captain only brought two teams of SWAT elites. After all, there were only two people in Jon¡¯s team. Without alerting the other party, the strength of the two SWAT teams was enough to sessfully capture them. At the back, Gal Gadot and the cameraman quickly followed the SWAT captain and got into the police car. They were ready to go to the scene of the live broadcast. In the police car, Gal Gadot once again appeared and introduced to the audience in the live broadcast room, ¡°Hello, everyone in the live broadcast room. It¡¯s 10:50 pm now.¡± ¡°The temporarymand center has received news that they have found Jon¡¯s room records. The SWAT are preparing to rush to the scene in order to arrest Jon.¡± ¡°We will also live broadcast the final arrest upon the arrival of the SWAT.¡± ¡°This time will the SWAT able to sessfully arrest Jon? We¡¯ll wait and see.¡± With a professional smile, Gal Gadot spoke in fluent English. ¡°What the f*ck? Jon is going to be arrested again? Strange, why am I saying so much again?¡± ¡°My God, I¡¯ve already taken off my pants and nned to stay up all night. You¡¯re telling me that Jon is about to be arrested? What are we still watching?¡± ¡°Something¡¯s wrong with you up there. Why did you take off your pants after staying up all night watching the live broadcast?¡± ¡°I would get wet when I see Jon. In order to avoid spoiling my pants, I took off my pants.¡± ¡°F*ck. A man like you saw Jon and get wet? I suddenly felt my scalp go numb.¡± ¡°For those in the front, be serious. This is a live broadcast of a drill. Jon is about to be arrested by the police! Please take it seriously!¡± ¡°Sigh, in order to watch the live broadcast tomorrow, I¡¯ve already asked for sick leave. Now that Jon is about to be arrested, I feel terrible.¡± ¡°Me too. even if my wife is about to give birth tomorrow, I stuffed it back in for him. I didn¡¯t want to dy and miss the live broadcast. The situation now makes me extremely autistic.¡± ¡°Hey, even when your wife is about to give birth, you can still stuff it back in?¡± ¡°Oh, my wife is intable.¡± ¡°F*ck me. I¡¯ll have to trouble miss reporter to permanently ban this person from speaking. Otherwise, I¡¯m afraid that I¡¯ll hit him.¡± ¡°Be more serious. Do you think that this time Jon will be able to escape from the police?¡± ¡°How can he escape? With two SWAT teams and the police officers who were investigating the Pedestrian Street, it¡¯s basically impossible for him to escape under such circumstances.¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon is still too confident. He was directly guessed by the person-in-charge.¡± ¡°But even so, why would he dare to use his identity information to book a hotel? Doesn¡¯t anyone think that there¡¯s something strange about it?¡± ¡°What could be strange about it? It¡¯s just that his cleverness was mistaken.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Jon won¡¯t be able to hold on for much longer. Everyone is tired after watching for a whole day. Let¡¯s wash up and go to sleep.¡± In the live broadcast room, because of the action of the SWAT, the bulletments exploded once again. It was different from the previous direction. Now, the audience all didn¡¯t think highly of Jon. They felt that he would be sessfully arrested by the police because Jon actually used his identity information to check into a hotel. This was a fatal mistake for someone with a high IQ! Not to mention a high IQ robber, even an ordinary criminal knew not to leave his identity information in ces like hotels. Otherwise, it would be too easy to find out. Therefore, the audience felt a little disappointed with Jon this time. Because of the disappointment, some of the audience sneered at Jon. On the other side, after the SWAT captain confirmed the SWAT team with him, five cars moved at the same time, heading toward No. 49 Pedestrian Street. At this moment, all the SWAT members in the cars were in high spirits, even though it was alreadyte at night and they had participated in seven or eight hours of drills. But now, they were still in high spirits because they felt that they could finally capture Jon. Capturing Jon meant that this drill, which was quite frustrating for all the police officers, could finally end. And it ended with the police¡¯s victory. This was something that made all the police officers vent their anger! However, what all the police officers didn¡¯t know was that their every move was clearly seen by Jon in the Hilton Hotel. ¡°This time I¡¯ve let you guys make a wasted trip again.¡± Jon watched the police cars move out, and a smile appeared on his face. He was mumbling to himself! Beside him was Venus Alice holding a bottle of wine, even though she didn¡¯t use a binocrs, she could also see with her eyesight five police cars moving out of the square outside the bank with shing police lights. She heard Jon mumbling to himself. She couldn¡¯t help but smiled and looked at Jon with admiration and infatuation in her eyes. Since Jon said that the trip of the SWAT would be in vain. Then, they would definitely be in vain! Chapter 98 - No Way Out, No Escape?

Chapter 98: No Way Out, No Escape?

¡°The SWAT team is already on the move,¡± Venus Alice looked at Jon and said. ¡°Yes, they are on the move, but they are noting towards us. Before we robbed the bank, I conveniently used my identity to get a room in Pedestrian Street when I went there to prepare things.¡± ¡°They followed the surveince cameras to Pedestrian Street and started to search around Pedestrian Street. Finally, they found the room records.¡± ¡°Now, the SWAT are going there to catch us.¡± Jon said with a smile. He knew that the police would conduct a search of the surrounding amodations because it was difficult for two people to walk with a weight of 100 kilograms. The best way was to live somewhere nearby. So, he conveniently set up a trap. And what happened next was not unexpected. The police did investigate near Pedestrian Street and just happened to find his check-in record. Once they found his check-in record, the police would definitelye to arrest him. At that time, it would be a waste. This trap could y a big role. As long as the person-in-charge stepped in and found that Jon was not in the room, he would probably think that Jon had run far away. Then, he would expand the search area and not focus on the area around the bank. At that time, it would be the real thing. The more dangerous the ce, the safer it would be. ¡°I didn¡¯t think that one of the things you did would attract the attention of the police,¡± Venus looked at Jon admiringly. In her heart, she couldn¡¯t help but praised Jon¡¯s ability was too terrifying. A small trap, just a room booking information, had attracted the police¡¯s attention. This not only wasted the police¡¯s manpower, but also wasted their time. On Pedestrian Street, the SWAT team and the police officers who had been investigating here had already surrounded Toronto Hotel. Now, not to mention humans, even a mosquito could not fly out. ¡°Sir.¡± When they saw the SWAT team leader, a few of the squad leaders quickly went forward. ¡°How is it? During this period of time, no one has entered or left the hotel, right?¡± The SWAT team leader asked the few of them. ¡°No, sir. After receiving your orders, I surrounded the hotel. Until now, no one hase out and no one has entered.¡± One of the police squad leaders reported. As a police officer, he had found Jon¡¯s room records here. He naturally knew what it meant. It probably meant that he could capture Jon and the other robber in one fell swoop. Therefore, when he received the SWAT team leader¡¯s order, he naturally followed it strictly. Even though Toronto Hotel was a big hotel and it was located in such a bustling ce like Pedestrian Street, naturally, there were many guests staying there. But even so, the police still did not let anyone in or out. The SWAT captain nodded. Just as he was about to deploy the operation, he suddenly thought of something and asked, ¡°Did the hotel reception see Jon arrive?¡± Because Jon had booked a room in the afternoon, and the time he escaped from the bank and walked to Pedestrian Street was around 8:10pm, he asked the front desk if they had noticed him and also to make sure that Jon was in the hotel. ¡°The front desk said that they didn¡¯t care because there were too many peopleing and going. Other than the customers who needed to register, she didn¡¯t pay special attention to the registered customers who came and went.¡± There were too many customersing and going in this type of hotel. It was normal for them not to notice that Jon had returned. After the SWAT captain heard the report from the police captain, he began to deploy. ¡°You guys, guard the back door of the hotel. You guys continue to guard the surroundings of the hotel. As for the rest, follow me to arrest him.¡± After the order was given, everyone acted ording to the SWAT captain¡¯s instructions. Then, the SWAT captain led them into the hotel and went upstairs to arrest him. Seeing this, Gal Gadot and the cameraman quickly followed and carried out a live broadcast. In the hotel, when the front desk saw the SWAT entered, she quickly stood up. Because the squad leader hadmunicated with her just now, she did not have much of a reaction. Under the instructions of the squad leader, she did not call the hotel manager over. After all, this was a drill, there was no point in calling the manager or other hotel higher-ups over. The SWAT captain led eight SWAT members, Gal Gadot and the photographer to the fifth floor. Room 508. This was the room number that Jon had checked-in. The SWAT captain had also gotten the spare key from the front desk. He stood at the door of Room 508. The SWAT captain¡¯s footsteps were very light. He tried not to make a sound. First, he gestured for the SWAT members to split into two sides. One team was on the left side of the door, and the other team was guarding the right side of the door. Then, the captain of the SWAT team gently inserted the key into the keyhole, which was also done very quietly. The other eight SWAT members were guarding the two sides of the door, waiting for the right timing. At the same time, the cameraman held the camera in his hand, and Gal Gadot held the microphone in her hand tightly. She stared at the door, imagining what would happen when the door opened. What would happen inside? The atmosphere was extremely tense. At the same time, in the live broadcast room¡­ ¡°Good job. The atmosphere is getting tense. My blood is boiling after watching this. Why don¡¯t theypete with the Beastmen?¡± ¡°It¡¯s here, it¡¯s here, it¡¯s finally here. Now, I announce that this drill is about to reach its climax!¡± ¡°It should be the climax. The police and bandits had a heavy fight. Then, Jon was sessfully captured by the SWAT. The drill is over.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s discuss rationally. Under such circumstances, what are Jon¡¯s chances of escaping from the SWAT?¡± ¡°After all, do you still remember thest drill when Jon faced Rum? He performed a magic trick for us and carried him away from the rooftop. I was shocked at that time. Will there be a simr operation this time?¡± ¡°Not even ten percent. Last time, there was a pipe on the rooftop that led to the ground. What¡¯s on the fifth floor of the hotel this time? Now, Jon¡¯s escape route is only through the window. But there are police officers guarding the bottom of the window. How can he escape?¡± ¡°Unless he grows wings and flies out of the window. That might work.¡± ¡°He can¡¯t escape. Jon¡¯s capture is already a foregone conclusion. Everyone, get ready to wash up and sleep.¡± ¡°Ah, no way. I was thinking of staying up all night. Is there really no chance?¡± ¡°There¡¯s no chance. The current Jon is already doomed.¡± Seeing that the SWAT were about to enter, the discussion among the audience reached another peak. Now, everyone felt that Jon had no way out. He was definitely going to lose. After all, with so many SWAT members and guns, how could Jon escape? Chapter 99 - Reversal Of Limits, You Were a Step Too Late!

Chapter 99: Reversal Of Limits, You Were a Step Too Late!

Toronto Hotel. At the door of Room 508. The atmosphere was extremely tense. A few SWAT members, reporter Gail Gado and the cameraman were all prepared. After the SWAT captain inserted the key into the keyhole, he raised a hand and stretched out three fingers, starting the countdown. ¡°Three.¡± He signaled the SWAT members to get ready. ¡°Two!¡± ¡°One!¡± As the countdown ended, the SWAT captain twisted the key and pushed the door open. The SWAT members who had been prepared rushed in from outside the door. ¡°Don¡¯t move!¡± The SWAT members shouted in a deep voice and entered the door with guns in their hands. No one was found. They nced around and looked at the bed. The nket was blugy. There should be someone lying under the nket. Eight SWAT members came to the bed with guns and stared at him. Then the SWAT captain and Gal Gadot entered the room. The cameraman pointed his camera at the bed in the room. Now, although Jon didn¡¯t show his face, it seemed like he was hiding under the nket. However, what about the other robber? The SWAT captain looked around, but he did not find another ce to hide. He decided to ignore it for now and capture the person under the nket first. The SWAT captain was a little excited. He slowly came to the side of the bed, grabbed one end of the nket, and lifted it up, ¡°Jon, you can¡¯t escape!¡± However, when he lifted the nket. The scene in front of him stunned everyone. There was no one under the nket. Instead, there were two pillows and a hot water bottle. These things were piled up into the shape of a person and covered with the nket, so it gave people the illusion that someone was hiding under the nket. The SWAT captain was a little stunned. What was going on? Where was Jon? Just as he was stunned, a SWAT member noticed that there was a half-exposed note under the hot water bottle at the end of the bed. The SWAT member quickly picked up the piece of paper and handed it to the SWAT captain. ¡°Captain, there¡¯s a piece of paper here.¡± The SWAT captain quickly took it and looked at it. At the same time, the cameraman pointed the camera in his hand at the piece of paper. There was only one sentence on it. ¡°I¡¯m still a little surprised that you guys could find this ce, but unfortunately, you guys are a step toote.¡± The ck handwriting was unusually eye-piercing, and the SWAT captain gritted his teeth. It was obvious that he had been fooled by Jon again. In the live broadcast room¡­ ¡°D*mn it, you guys are a step toote. Why do I feel like this is a taunt?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t feel like it. This is a taunt. If you want to run, then run. You even left a note. Isn¡¯t that a taunt?¡± ¡°I knew during this time the current atmosphere was not suitable forughter, but I still couldn¡¯t help butughed out loud. It¡¯s too difficult to be a SWAT captain.¡± ¡°Yeah. First, his own team members were blown to death by Jon, and then it was his turn to be yed by Jon. Who would be able to stand it?¡± ¡°My heart aches for the SWAT captain. Haha.¡± ¡°Hey you up there, your heart aches for him, but what do you mean byughing?¡± ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I really couldn¡¯t hold it in. I felt that the scene was too funny. Look at the SWAT captain¡¯s face, it waspletely dark. He gritted his teeth and wanted to eat Jon alive.¡± ¡°But this time the SWAT team still failed. I didn¡¯t expect it. Wasn¡¯t the hotel surrounded by police officers? How did Jon escape?¡± ¡°So, how did Jon get qway? In this situation, no matter how you look at it, Jon should have been arrested.¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s IQ is so high. It¡¯s normal for him to notice something in advance.¡± ¡°Maybe Jon noticed and ran away when the police officers were checking the area.¡± ¡°I think Jon wasn¡¯t here from the beginning. The so-called hotel record was just a diversion.¡± ¡°It shouldn¡¯t be. When the SWAT team came in, the room was still lit up.¡± ¡°No matter how Jon ran, the drill won¡¯t end now. I can continue watching.¡± ¡°Haha, where are the people who thought Jon couldn¡¯t escape? Come out and get pped in the face.¡± ¡°The audience who thought Jon couldn¡¯t escape: the good clown is me?¡± The audience saw that Jon was not in the room. The bulletments exploded again. Before this, arge portion of the audience thought that Jon could not escape this time. But they did not expect such a reversal. Now, the audience¡¯s curiosity was once again piqued. How did Jon escape? After all, when they first found out that Jon was staying here, the police had already surrounded Toronto Hotel. In this case, Jon couldn¡¯t escape. So the only thing that made sense was that Jon had escaped before the police surrounded the hotel. This drill had been going on since 2 pm. Everything that happened had been reversed. Every time the police, the audience, almost everyone thought they could catch Jon, the police had missed every single time. It¡¯s like every time the police did something, Jon set up a trap for them, waiting for them to jump in. They were being yed by Jon. It was okay if they were in the bank. After all, the robbers have hostages there. In order not to hurt the hostages, the police had to be led by the nose by Jon. But now, Jon had escaped the bank and there was no hostage to threaten the police. But even in this case, the police were still led by the nose by Jon. It was like they were being yed by Jon all the time, the feeling is terrible. The SWAT captain smashed the note in his hand into pieces and threw it into the garbage bin. Once again, Jon escaped. He was still excited just a moment ago, still excited that he could finally capture Jon. But now, he was as disappointed as he was excited just now. But even though he was very disappointed, the SWAT captain still checked the room to see if he could find some useful clues. Then, the SWAT captain took out his walkie-talkie dispiritedly and reported the situation to the temporarymand center. ¡°Sir, this operation is still a failure. Jon is not in the Toronto Hotel room.¡± ¡°Also, he left a note in the room. The content of the note was¡­ I¡¯m still a little surprised that you guys could find this ce, but unfortunately, you guys are a step toote.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no temperature in his bed. If Jon stayed here, he would have been gone for a long time.¡± ¡°However, the items in the room showed no signs of being used. I think Jon hasn¡¯te back since he checked-in.¡± On the other side, the person-in-charge was still waiting for him to bring Jon back. But this time, he was destined to be disappointed. The SWAT captain reported the situation truthfully. There was no water stain on the sink in the room and there were no traces of disposable shower gel, shampoo, toothbrush, toothpaste and other items. So the SWAT captain suspected that Jon had just set up a trap in the room, but he had never lived here. But why did he pile up a human figure on the bed? The SWAT captain¡¯s mind raced and he was lost in thought. Chapter 100 - In the End, It Was All for Nothing!

Chapter 100: In the End, It Was All for Nothing!

Furthermore, Jon had left a note under the nket? If he had not returned after checking in, could it be that when he checked in, he had already expected the police officers toe here? After the SWAT team leader reported, there was no reply from the other end of the walkie-talkie. In the temporarymand room. After themander heard the SWAT team leader¡¯s report, his originally smiling face instantly darkened. His mood was extremely terrible. He wasn¡¯t even in the mood to respond to the SWAT team leader. The SWAT team leader put down the walkie-talkie and walked around the room again. Then, he came to the corridor outside the door and saw that there were two cameras on the walls on both sides. The SWAT team leader turned around and gave an order to a SWAT team officer, ¡°Find someone to check the surveince records.¡± ¡°See if Jon has been back in thest two hours. Also, look at the surveince footage of the time Jon stayed in the room.¡± ¡°Yes, Sir!¡± The SWAT team member heard this and saluted, then quickly went to do it. The SWAT team leader walked out of the hotel and squatted at the door, lighting a cigarette with a dispirited look. In fact, the SWAT leader was trying to quit smoking. Under normal circumstances, he wouldn¡¯t smoke once in a few days, and the cigarette in his pocket was just for the sake of pretending. But now, he couldn¡¯t help but smoke one. Because he was in a terrible mood now. It was too frustrated. He was fooled by Jon again and again, but this time, they didn¡¯t lose any SWAT team members unlike the raid in the bank. However, the current situation was even more ridiculous than that in the bank. Because no matter what, in the bank, Jon had hostages that restrained the police, but this time, Jon had nothing. Just like that, the police were still fooled by him. It was really annoying. When the police captain outside saw the SWAT team leader, he knew that the operation was still a failure. Jon was still not caught, so the SWAT team leader was undoubtedly in a bad mood. Therefore, the police captain was very tactful and did not ask anything. A few minutester, the SWAT team leader smoked two cigarettes in a row, threw the cigarette filter on the ground, and stepped on it with the tip of his foot. He used a lot of force. It was like there was not a cigarette under his foot, but Jon. Then, he turned around and returned to the hotel. ¡°Sir, in the past two hours, Jon has not been seening back. This is the surveince footage from when Jon was staying at the hotel.¡± Seeing the SWAT team leader walked over, the two police officers who were checking the surveince quickly reported the situation. Even though the hotel had a lot of people and it was not easy to find their target, the technical police officers still quickly checked the surveince footage. They did not miss anything. After listening to the reports of the two police officers, the SWAT team leader sighed and could not help but shake his head. The surveince cameras did not capture Jon returning, which meant that Jon really had note back. Because in this hotel, whether it was the front door or the back door, there were 360-degree surveince cameras, not a single blind spot. Since the surveince cameras couldn¡¯t find Jon, it meant that Jon had nevere back. Since he didn¡¯te back, then why did he specially book a room? Was it to wait for the police to find out and mock the police? He couldn¡¯t figure it out. The SWAT team leader couldn¡¯t figure it out no matter what. Since he couldn¡¯t figure it out, he might as well not think about it. Coming to the surveince screen, he prepared to look at the video of Jon booking the room. Seeing him take out his identity information and check in with the help of the front desk, he took the key and went upstairs. It took about four or five minutes to enter Room 508. Jon came out again, locked the door, and was about to leave the hotel. But before he left, Jon suddenly looked up at the monitor and stared at it for a few seconds. Then, Jon revealed a mysterious smile. He lowered his head and walked away. Seeing this scene, the SWAT team leader frowned. What did he mean by that smile? Could it be that he knew that he or the other police officers would look at the camera? Did he deliberately smile for them to see? However, although he did not know what Jon¡¯s smile meant, the SWAT team leader could now confirm that Jon had indeed not returned after leaving the room. Because all the items in the room had not been used. As for the bed in the room, the items piled up into a human shape under the quilt, as well as notes, and the light that was on. It should have been done by Jon within a few minutes of entering the room. ¡°Retreat! The robbers aren¡¯t here. We¡¯ve all been fooled.¡± After watching the surveince video, the SWAT team leader said helplessly to his team members. He looked at his team members¡¯ expressions and was also disappointed and dejected. He sighed in his heart. After all, he was extremely excited when he joined the drill. He thought that he would definitely be able to sessfully capture Jon this time. However, no one expected that it turned out to be like this. Not only did he not capture Jon, but he also didn¡¯t even see his face. He was even ridiculed by the note that Jon left behind. This unexpected turn made him and the members of the SWAT team shocked. It was already early in the morning. 12:10 am. Although there were still more than 20 hours before it ended, there was no breakthrough at all for the police. If they could not find any valuable clues in the next 20 hours or so, the police officers would be like headless chickens. They couldn¡¯t do anything and waited for the drill to end, watching the robbers win. Temporarymand room. This time, themander did not look at the map or the surveince cameras. He came to the back where the headlights could not reach. He lit a cigarette. In the darkness, the me flickered. His face waspletely hidden in the darkness. No one knew what he was thinking. After smoking three cigarettes in a row, themander walked out of the darkness and returned to the temporarymand room. Looking at the map, his eyes were a little stiff. It was quite a blow. This was because since the start of the drill, the police¡¯s actions had basically all ended in failure. There wasn¡¯t a single time when they sessfully arrested Jon. Instead, they were tricked again and again. It would have been fine if they were tricked one or two times. But if it had been too many times, anyone would be mad. Even themander, who had been in the police force for many years, felt a little frustrated. Ten minutester, the SWAT team leader came back. He took off his bulletproof vest and threw it aside. He entered the temporarymand room, poured himself a ss of water, and gulped it down. After finishing the ss of water, the SWAT team leader said angrily, ¡°That kid, Jon ids really an annoying brat. He¡¯s just ying with us.¡± ¡°From the beginning until now, the police have notpletely taken the initiative. We have been tricked by him over and over. This feeling is really terrible.¡± Chapter 101 - Still Nothing!

Chapter 101: Still Nothing!

The SWAT team leader was indeed very angry. He had been a police officer for more than twenty years. When had he ever been so angry? Now he didn¡¯t even know where Jon was. He waspletely mad with nowhere to vent his anger. As he spoke, he lit another cigarette and began to smoke. ¡°Didn¡¯t you want to quit smoking?¡± Themander looked at him and said slowly. Although the two of them were superiors and subordinates, they had been in the police station for so many years, and they had a good personal rtionship. He naturally knew that the SWAT team leader wanted to quit smoking. ¡°Speaking of which, I have to thank Jon for making me give up on quiting smoking.¡± The SWAT team leader said hatefully, ¡°How many years have I not been so sullen?¡± ¡°After the drill, you have to bust Jon and let him treat you to a meal.¡± Themander¡¯s expression gradually rxed as he said with a smile. ¡°We have to let him treat us to a meal, but now, we have to think about how to arrest him.¡± As the SWAT team leader said this, he looked at themander with a strange look. ¡°You were fooled by Jon a few times. Why don¡¯t you look angry?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t tell me you know where he¡¯s hiding now?¡± Themander shook his head. ¡°I don¡¯t know where he is, but what¡¯s the use of being angry?¡± ¡°If being angry can let Jon get caught right away, it wouldn¡¯t be a problem for me to flip the hell out. The key is that being angry won¡¯t let Jon get caught. Instead, it will affect my judgment.¡± ¡°That makes sense.¡± The SWAT team leader nodded thoughtfully. That was indeed the truth. Everyone understood the this, but he still couldn¡¯t help but be angry. Themander didn¡¯t say anything else. He put the map on the table and looked at it again. In the temporarymand room, there was silence for a moment. Unlike the quiet atmosphere in the temporarymand room. In the live broadcast room, thements were surging crazily. ¡°Good god, when I saw the conversation between the two most senior officers of the police force during this drill, I somehow felt likeughing. What¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°But themander¡¯s words are also quite right. When people are angry, other than harming their own bodies and affecting their own judgment, it has no other effect.¡± ¡°But if youpare the angry expression of the SWAT team leader, the contrast between their faces is interesting no matter how you look at it.¡± ¡°I suggest miss to interview them now. What kind of feelings do the two of them have after the failure of the operation to capture Jon?¡± ¡°Dude, can¡¯t you see that they are pissed? People like you are typical of people who are not afraid of stirring up the trouble.¡± ¡°Funny, I just want to watch the show. As for whether they¡¯re mad or not, what does it have to do with me?¡± ¡°Oh my god, this kind of person is too disgusting. However, if miss reporter interviews them now, the program¡¯s effects will be hrious.¡± ¡°Haha.¡± In front of the screen, Gal Gadot naturally looked at thesements. When she saw that some people were urging her to interview the two police leaders, she couldn¡¯t help but feel speechless. What kind of people were these? Really, if she were to interview them now, wouldn¡¯t she be walking right into a gun. She wouldn¡¯t do such a stupid thing. Looking at the now silentmand room, themander and the SWAT team leader didn¡¯t make a sound. Naturally, she wouldn¡¯t make any noise either. Thements in the livestream continued to surge. ¡°But it¡¯s already 1 am. Isn¡¯t everyone sleepy?¡± ¡°Not at all. It¡¯s like watching a movie. There¡¯s no boring scene in the car. As long as we keep our spirits up, we won¡¯t feel sleepy anymore.¡± ¡°Yeah, but this drill is much more exciting than the movie. If he can act until tomorrow night, I¡¯ll definitely be able to see until tomorrow night.¡± ¡°Good lord. A drill that makes countless people to watch until midnight. This drill is definitely unprecedented.¡± ¡°It was, but I haven¡¯t seen Jon for a long time. I haven¡¯t seen him since the surveince cameras in the bank were cut off.¡± ¡°Sigh, I missed Jon on the first day I couldn¡¯t see him.¡± ¡°Wow, I suspect that the person upstairs is taking the opportunity to confess. But he¡¯s a man.¡± ¡°A man confessing to a man, this is too showy.¡± ¡°If you guys want to stay up all night, prepare to stay up all night. If you want to confess, continue to confess. I can¡¯t take it anymore. I¡¯m going to sleep.¡± ¡°I¡¯m going to sleep too. I¡¯ll watch it tomorrow.¡± It was already early in the morning. Some of the viewers had already gone to sleep. However, the poprity of the livestream was still very high. At the same time, the number of viewers online was still over 70 million. This meant that the poprity of the drill was really terrifying. However, it was not only in the livestream. The posts about the exercise on the major online tforms, such as Twitter and Facebook, still upied almost all the major tforms. ¡°Shocking. The special police swarmed in, and these things were actually ced under the nket!¡± ¡°Does Jon really have a pair of wings? Why is he able to escape?¡± ¡°The truth is, Jon is able to run so well because he¡¯s wearing a pair of Nike. With a pair of Nike, he can disappear with a single step.¡± ¡°During the Pennsylvania drill, the police were led by the nose by highly intelligent robbers. The SWAT team leader was fuming with anger.¡± Such posts were everywhere on all the major tforms. Even the top ten trending topics on Twitter were all dominated by this drill. And a considerable portion of these were posted by the unscrupulous media. What they wanted was poprity. As for how to quickly umte poprity, that was to let the headlines attract attention. That was to say, the SWAT team leader did not see these posts about the failed arrest. If he saw them, he would probably be furious. In the temporarymand room. After themander studied the map on the table, he then rubbed the space between his eyebrows. Because there was not enough time left for the police, he had to formte a new search and arrest operation in the shortest time possible. ¡°Have you found any traces of Jon on the surveince cameras?¡± Themander looked at the few technicians who had been checking the surveince cameras and asked. ¡°Not at the moment, sir.¡±, the technician turned his head and said. Themander nodded slowly. This was within expectations. He did not have much hope for the surveince cameras. After all, Jon was very cautious. If he did not want the police to know where he was, then he would definitely avoid the surveince cameras. Then, on the way to this ce, he would definitely pay attention to avoiding the surveince cameras. Then, themander opened his mouth and said, ¡°Keep checking. Especially look for the surveince cameras within half an hour of Jon leaving the pedestrian street.¡± Even though themander did not have much hope. However, he could not give up. ¡°Yes, sir.¡±, the technician replied. Then, he began to check the surveince footage one by one. However, he found nothing. Then, themander drew on the map and circled a few ces. Chapter 102 - A Brief Romance!

Chapter 102: A Brief Romance!

He turned to the SWAT team leader and said, ¡°Take some people to rest first. Come back tomorrow morning to continue the operation. Leave some people behind to work overtime tonight and check these ces out.¡± The SWAT team leader heard him and walked over to take a look. On the map, the ces circled by themander were some old residential areas in the city. A few of them were going to be demolished. ¡°Do you think that Jon is hiding in this ce?¡±, the SWAT team leader frowned and asked slowly. Themander nodded. ¡°These are all old residential areas. There are very few cameras in these residential buildings, and the cameras are only installed outside the street to monitor the general situation of the residential area.¡± ¡°Like in the staircase and corridor, there are basically no cameras installed.¡± ¡°If we encounter a theft case in such a neighborhood, it is usually more difficult to catch the thieves.¡± ¡°For Jon, these ces must be a good hiding ce. It is very likely that he has been hiding here for the past few days.¡± ¡°So, when the timees, let the squads ask the security personnel in these neighborhoods to see if there are any strangers whoe and go frequently.¡± ¡°Remember to bring pictures of Jon and the other robber. It wille in handy.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± The SWAT team leader thought about it carefully. What themander said made sense. After all, these ces with few cameras were definitely the best hiding ces for the robbers. Then, the SWAT team leader turned around and left the temporarymand room to make arrangements. However, it was already early in the morning, so it would be difficult to search everywhere. Therefore, he followed the instructions of themander and let arge group of officers to rest. Then, he led two teams and began to go to the residential areas that themander had pinpointed. After they left, the temporarymand room returned to silence. Themander walked out of the temporarymand room, rxed his body, and his expression changed again. Hopefully, there would be good news this time. But what themander didn¡¯t expect was that. Just 300 meters away, the robber that he wanted to capture, Jon, was sitting in front of the window with a telescope, looking at him. In the Hilton Hotel, Jon put away the telescope. He drank a mouthful of wine. He ced a bug on the smelting furnace, so he could hear the words of themander and the SWAT team leader After hearing themander¡¯s n, Jon knew that they did not focus on searching the vicinity of the bank tonight. Then, Jon drank all the wine in the bottle in one gulp and turned around to go back to his room to sleep. No matter what, the police still had more than twenty hours to catch him. After such a long time, Jon had to get some sleep to prepare for the police operation tomorrow. ¡°You done spying on them?¡± Venus Alice asked when she saw Jon getting ready to leave. Jon had been in front of the window for more than two hours, and during this period, Venus Alice had not fallen asleep. Jon looked at the bank, and she looked at Jon. The more she looked, the more she felt that Jon was handsome. Not only was he intelligent and skilled, but Jon was also good-looking. In all these years, Venus had never fallen for any man. Jon was an exception. ¡°No need to continue monitoring them. The focus area of the police¡¯s search is not around the bank.¡± ¡°They¡¯ve already gone in the wrong direction. We¡¯ll sleep here today. It¡¯s very safe.¡± Jon said as he walked out. But just as he was about to walk out of the bedroom¡­ Venus Alice stepped in front of him. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Jon was a little confused. He thought something was wrong with Venus. But the next moment, Jon was stunned. Venus Alice wrapped her arms around Jon¡¯s neck and kissed him. A sweet scene entered his nose. The fire that Jon had been suppressing for hours was suddenly ignited. Venus Alice was not like Gal Gadot. She was rather bold. As she kissed Jon, her hands moved restlessly. She quickly touched Jon¡¯s back. She touched Jon¡¯s lower body. At this moment, little Jon was extremely hard. Just as his lustful desire was burning more and more vigorously, Jon regained his senses. He ced his hands on Venus Alice¡¯s shoulders and slowly pushed her away. ¡°The drill isn¡¯t over yet. Rest well. Good night.¡± Then, Jon turned around and left. He also closed the bedroom door. Venus stared at the door for a moment. She licked her lips and revealed a smile. After Jon returned to his bedroom, he took a shower with cold water to calm himself down. Then, hey on the bed and quickly fell asleep. Back to the temporarymand room. Themander was still standing in front of the table. The map with the with the pinpointed location had been taken away by the SWAT team leader. Now, in front of him was a brand new map. Although he felt that the ces he had marked on the map were all good hiding ces, he did not think that he would be able to find Jon in these locations. After all, with Jon¡¯s intelligence, he would definitely be able to think of anything. Therefore, themander started to n the next step. Expanding the scope of the search. However, it was very difficult to carry out the searching operation at night. Therefore, themander still looked forward to the arrival of the day. Executing the operation under the bright day light would be many times more convenient. The live broadcast was still continuing. However, because it was not a tense time, the view had slightly decreased. At this time, Gal Gadot had already gone to rest. Even if they could not catch Jon tonight, she still had to be on the camera tomorrow. As for the cameraman who was still staying upte to shoot the live broadcast, he would be exchange with another cameraman. 2:30 am. Themander yawned and got up to stretch his muscles. He said to a few technicians, ¡°Since we haven¡¯t found him after searching for so long, it seems that it¡¯s basically impossible to get any information about Jon from the surveince footage.¡± ¡°You guys go and rest first.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡±. the technicians replied. They had been working for twelve hours since they arrived at around two o¡¯clock in the afternoon. They were very tired. After the technicians left, only themander and the cameraman were left in the temporarymand room. Chapter 103 - Is the Police Going to Lose? !

Chapter 103: Is the Police Going to Lose? !

At 4:30 am, themander was exhausted. He was so tired that he fell asleep on the table. The cameraman beside him was still carrying the camera. He was still filming the temporarymand room. He also filmed the situation outside the bank. In the square outside the bank, there were more than 20 police cars. These police officers didn¡¯t go home to rest but stayed in the cars to deal with the night. After all, the police force was much more difficult than other professions. Sometimes when they were on duty, it wasmon for them to fall on the ground and sleep. Being able to sleep in the car was a better treatment. In addition, there were also a few police officers standing guard, in case something unexpected happened. Even though it was already past four o¡¯clock in the morning, it was the time when most people slept like a log. But at this moment, in the live stream. There were still eight to nine million people watching the live broadcast online. ¡°Bros, aren¡¯t you all going to sleep?¡± ¡°I feel that the biggest climax has passed. Now it¡¯s time for the end, although the ending time is quite long.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s wait a little longer. Maybe Jon will take advantage of the night to wipe out the entire police force. When the timees, the climax will bepletely detonated.¡± ¡°My God, this is a robbery drill, not a military drill. Jon¡¯s mission wasn¡¯t killing all of the police forces.¡± ¡°Furthermore, Jon is not a terrorist. He¡¯s just a greedy robber. Jon won¡¯t raid the temporarymand room. It¡¯s too ridiculous.¡± ¡°If he doesn¡¯t raid, what is he doing now?¡± ¡°What else can he do? Sleep. After all, there are still about 20 hours before the end of the drill. Jon has to make up for his sleep and be in a good mental state to deal with the police¡¯s operation.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think the police will be able to find him. After all, the city is so big and there were only two robbers. Moreover, he¡¯s a highly intelligent man. How can they find him?¡± ¡°However, after daybreak, the difficulty of the search will be greatly reduced. Hopefully, the police will be able to work harder.¡± At this moment, the audience was still discussing on thement section. They were discussing the direction of this drill and the final oue. Very soon, the sky gradually brightened, morning arrived. In this city filled with tall buildings, the first ray of sunlight of the day greeted them. At seven o¡¯clock. The SWAT team leader came back with his subordinates. As expected, he found nothing. He didn¡¯t even get any traces of Jon. So¡­ The SWAT team leader looked extremely depressed. When he came to the temporarymand room and found that themander was still asleep, he subconsciously slowed down his footsteps. Just as he was about to leave and light a cigarette, themander woke up. He looked at the sky and then at the expression of the SWAT team leader. He knew that there was no result from this search operation. Themander said slowly, ¡°It¡¯s been a hard night. You and your brothers who operate at night are also tired. Go and rest. Come back at night.¡± Even though there was no breakthrough in the search, they were still human beings after all. They were not made of iron. How could they not be tired? ¡°I get angry whenever I think of Jon. I¡¯ll find a car to sleep for a few hours. Let the brothers rest first.¡± ¡°There are so many pairs of eyes watching this drill. I must catch Jon with my own hands.¡± The SWAT team leader was a person who was obsessed with winning the drill. Jon¡¯s performance was so eye-catching, which also aroused his rebellious mentality. In his current state, he wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep even if he went home. It would be better to find a car to take a nap. ¡°Suit yourself.¡± Themander naturally knew the SWAT team leader¡¯s temper and said helplessly. At eight o¡¯clock in the morning. The police officers who took turns to restst night had all returned. A new round of search and arrest operations began. Themander also formted a brand-new search and arrest n. The scope of the searching area was expanded. But the main searching locations were the hotels and other ces that could hide the room records in the past nine days. The police officers followed the n of themander. With the photos of the five robbers, they visited and searched. To see if they could find some useful information. The police operation, like a big, almost spread out in the surrounding ten kilometers. However, this huge that seemed to be able to catch all the robbers in one fell swoop missed the areas a few hundred meters around the bank. In fact, it wasn¡¯t so easy for Jon to escape this huge. However, the police found Jon¡¯s room records in the pedestrian street yesterday. Although Jon didn¡¯t go back to the pedestrian street, this created an illusion for themander. That was, Jon deliberately created a pretense in the pedestrian street, but he and the other robber had already run far away. Therefore, when themander cast the, he subconsciously ignored the area around the bank. Time slowly passed in the police officers¡¯ search. Morning passed. Noon passed. Afternoon passed¡­ This search and arrest operation basically had no effect at all. Night fell again. Themander stood at the door of the temporarymand room. He looked at the vast night sky. He lit a cigarette. His expression was dejected. After a whole day of searching, he still couldn¡¯t find any information about the five robbers. This result was extremely depressing. ¡°We¡¯re going to lose this drill.¡± Themissioner also walked out at this time. He looked at the lights in the distance and slowly said. Themander looked at his watch. There were still more than two hours left. After all these times, if they still hadn¡¯t captured Jon, it meant that the police hadpletely lost this drill. In his heart, he absolutely didn¡¯t want to lose. No matter if entire country was paying attention to this drill, even if no one paid attention, even if only the robber and the police knew about this drill, he doesn¡¯t want to lose. No one wants to lose. Besides, they are the police, the police that represented justice, when faced with the robber of evil, how could they give up so easily? How could they lose? But there was no way. This robber was too strong. Jon was different from all the criminals they have met before are different. This guy was smart, he was meticulous. He was invincible. They did not have the ability to catch him. And that smart guy was going to win this drill. Now, in the official broadcast, the record was broken again. There were 80 million people. Eighty million people across the United States were watching the robbers won, and the police suffered their failure. As the drill was nearing its end, the officers who had gone out to search for Jon returned one after another. The square outside the bank was filled with police officers. And outside the cordon, there were many media and people. They were all here to witness the results of the drill. Chapter 104 - The Drill Is Over!

Chapter 104: The Drill Is Over!

Themander stood at the door of the temporarymand room. He looked at the audience and the media in a gloomy mood. There was only one more hour before the drill was over. He had no intention of continuing the search. The police officers that were sent out also came back one after another, although there were still a few teams that were still investigating. However, there wasn¡¯t much hope left. This drill was about to end. ¡°Hello, everyone. It¡¯s now 8:50 pm. There¡¯s only an hour and twenty minutes left until the drill ends.¡± ¡°And now, the police still haven¡¯t catch Jon. Moreover, we can see that the police officers that went out to search for Jon have returned one after another.¡± ¡°At this point in the drill, the robbers can basically be said to have won.¡± ¡°And in the next hour and twenty minutes, whether the police canunch a desperate counterattack and sessfully capture Jon, we¡¯ll wait and see.¡± At this time, Gal Gadot got on the camera. She exined the situation at the scene for the audience. From the start of the live broadcast until now, the number of viewers online had also reached a new peak. 85 million viewers! This was another new record. ¡°In this world, is justice still unable to defeat evil? I instantly felt like my faith had copsed, and I felt terrible.¡± ¡°The police can¡¯t catch Jon, just like I can¡¯t catch you. If the police didn¡¯t meet Jon, if I didn¡¯t meet you, would our ending still be like this?¡± ¡°The rain drenched the sky, and the sky was dark¡­¡± ¡°That¡¯s enough. It¡¯s not even 12 o¡¯clock at night, and you¡¯re already depressed?¡± ¡°Good god, they¡¯re all a bunch of talented people. I was a little upset when the police couldn¡¯t catch the robbers during the drill, but when I saw thements, Iughed.¡± ¡°Although¡­ I still want to say that the police can¡¯t beat the robbers, so I think I can¡¯t beat you in bed.¡± ¡°? ? ?¡± ¡°Oh, report that the person.¡± ¡°Dude, next time you fight, you can call me. I don¡¯t believe that the two of us can¡¯t defeat him.¡± ¡°This is a livestream with a serious intention. What are you doing?¡± ¡°But where is Jon hiding? Why is there no news at all after the police searched for more than 20 hours?¡± ¡°He should have left the city a long time ago. After all, he asked the hostages to pretend to be robbers. The time he took the bus was enough for him to drive out of the city.¡± ¡°Yes, there¡¯s a real possibility of him leaving the city. Otherwise, it wouldn¡¯t be so hard to find him, right?¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I feel that the robbers are not being fair if they leave the city. Why don¡¯t they leave the country? That way, it would be harder for the police to find them.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no point in talking about this now. After all, this drill is about to end. Before the next drill starts, let¡¯s make some suggestions.¡± ¡°Yeah, but this drillsted for more than three hours. It feels very satisfying.¡± ¡°It¡¯s still because Jon can hold on for so long. Otherwise, we would have washed up and gone to sleep a long time ago. We have to thank Jon for this.¡± ¡°Thank you, Jon, the strongest robber in history!¡± ¡°The strongest robber in history!¡± The words ¡®the strongest robber in history¡¯ flooded thement section. While the audience flooded thement section, they were also discussing the fact that the police had been searching for him for more than 20 hours. However, there was no news of Jon at all. Many of the audiences were curious about where Jon had gone. Many viewers suggested on the chat to make the exercise more difficult. After all, after robbing a bank, it was too easy for Jon to hide for 24 hours with his things. At this time. The 80 million viewers in the livestream were not the only ones watching the end of the exercise. There were alsoizens who were discussing enthusiastically on various tforms. There were even quite a number of foreign viewers who were very interested in the oue of the exercise. After all their country did not have such arge-scale drill that required so much manpower. The social impact of this drill could be said to be veryrge. And more and more people knew about Jon. 9:30 pm. There was less than an hour left until the end of the drill. Most of the teams that had been searching outside had returned and did not bring any news. Theirst hope had been destroyed. ¡°Should we end it early?¡± Themissioner stood beside themander and looked at the police officers who had returned. It was already this time. In less than an hour, a miracle would not happen. Unless the robber turned himself in. But was it possible a robber who was already got away but decided to turn himself in? So many people were looking forward to the oue. But they already knew the final result, it was better to waste thest hour. After all, this drill hadsted for so long. It was time to end it. Hearing this, themander¡¯s heart sank. He nodded slowly. Although he didn¡¯t want to see such an oue, he had to admit that the police had no chance to turn the situation around in this drill. Then, themander took out his walkie-talkie and ordered the two teams that were still searching outside, ¡°All teams, retreat. This drill is over. We have failed.¡± This drillsted for a very long time. The brothers were all very tired. It was time for them to return and rest. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± On the other end of the walkie-talkie, there was a moment of silence before a reply came. Obviously, the police officers could not ept that they failed, but there was nothing they could do. ¡°Announce the results,missioner.¡± Themander put down his walkie-talkie and said to the chief. After the drill ended, they would know where Jon was. Then, they would be able to verify their deduction skill and find out where they were wrong. ¡°Okay.¡± Themissioner nodded and took out a loudspeaker from the temporarymand room. He announced to the square, ¡°Now, I announce that this drill has ended early. The final winner is Jon!¡± A resounding voice spread across the square. The cameraman beside Gal Gadot also quickly filmed this scene. More than 80 million people across the United States had witnessed it. Upon hearing this announcement, all the police officers did not say a word. Right now, through the live broadcast, the entire United States was watching, and they had lost. They had lost the face of the police department, and at the same time, they had also lost the face of every officers. Since the end of the drill had been announced and Jon had won, themissioner naturally had to inform the winner of the drill, Jon. The director took out his cell phone. He dialed Jon¡¯s cell phone and turned on the loudspeaker. Gal Gadot saw this and quickly put in a microphone. The call was quickly connected. Chapter 105 - Jon Wins. The Commander Doubts His Life

Chapter 105: Jon Wins. The Commander Doubts His Life

¡°Hey, Jon.¡± Themissioner smiled. Even though the police department had its reputation in this drill, he could not take it out on Jon. And Jon was already very serious about this drill. He had put in a lot of time and effort. Not only could themissioner not me Jon, but he also even had to thank him. ¡°Let me guess. Did the drill end early and I win?¡± Jon¡¯s voice came from the phone. ¡°How did you know?¡± Themissioner looked a little surprised. ¡°I called you to inform you about this.¡± Of course, he was just a little surprised. Themissioner was not too surprised that Jon could tell the purpose of his call. After all, as a referee, he would not call a robber for no reason. Moreover, it was almost time for the drill to end, so he called him. So, it was really obvious that they were ending the drill earlier, and Jon already guessed it. ¡°Particrly, I heard every word of your conversation.¡± On the other end of the phone, Jon¡¯s voice slowly sounded, ¡°Themander was also a little careless. Can you not check the evidence that was confiscated?¡± ¡°At the entrance of the temporarymand room, there is a hiddenyer behind the smelting furnace. There is a bug inside.¡± Jon¡¯s voice was very calm, as if he was talking about a trivial matter. Right now, the director¡¯s phone was on speaker mode. Jon¡¯s words could be heard directly by the audience in the livestream. And they heard it clearly. There was a bug in the smelting furnace that was seized by themander! What did this mean? This meant that the robbers could hear every order given by themander, and they could know the movements of the police officers in real time! Under such circumstances where the opponent could control their orders and movements at any time, if the police were still able to capture Jon, then that would be a miracle! Although they knew that Jon¡¯s ability toy out a n was extremely throughout, the trick of installing a bug on the furnace still shocked everyone. After all, it had always been the police who monitored and listened to others. Who would have thought that the robber would actually turn around and spy on the police? His meticulous and perfect n seemed to be tricking the police from the beginning to the end. Too amazing! Too powerful. After themander heard Jon¡¯s words, he hurriedly ran to the door of the temporarymand room to check the furnace. As expected, behind the furnace, there was ayer that was not easy to discover. And there was a bug in theyer. Jon was not lying. The moment themander saw the bug, he was so angry that he almost vomited blood. He had stayed up all night to n a search operation, but he did not expect that Jon had heard every word and knew everything of his n. If there was any movement in themand room, Jon would be able to hear it immediately. How was he supposed to do? At first, he felt that it was a pity to lose. Now, he understood that it was not a pity to lose. The police had clearly lost this drill. They had already ced the bug in themand room. How could they still catch the robbers? Even if it they did not end the drill earlier, if they continued to search, it would still be the same result. Even if they knew where Jon was, there was nothing they could do. With the existence of the bug, as soon as he gave the order, Jon would immediately hear it. They would then escape. At the same time, in the livestream. The audience was in an uproar, and thements exploded. ¡°Badass, he¡¯s so badass.¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s operation is too bold and unconstrained. Putting the listening device in themand room is awesome.¡± ¡°Yeah, not only did themander not expect it, even the tens of millions of viewers did not expect it. Who would have thought that a robber would actually turn around and listen to the police?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a lesson. This move of Jon¡¯s not only taught us a lesson, it also taught the police a lesson.¡± ¡°Yeah, the police were unwilling to lose. After all, Jon had been eavesdropping on the police¡¯s actions. How could he lose?¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s move was really spectacr. He made traps everywhere and waited for the police to step on them. Is this a high IQ robber?¡± ¡°From the beginning of the drill, from not blocking the cameras, to the two hostages pretending to be robbers, to the bus attracting the attention of the police, to the room records, to the bug in the furnace, Jon¡¯s chess game is too awesome.¡± ¡°This n is meticulous and interlinked. I really doubt if Jon¡¯s brain is human. How did he do it?¡± ¡°Perhaps he was too smart. When themander¡¯s IQ reaches Jon¡¯s level, he should be able to find out.¡± ¡°The strongest robber in history. I¡¯m impressed.¡± The audience was extremely shocked. If Jon had not exposed his trump card himself, no one would have thought that Jon would use such a method to nt a bug at inside the temporarymand room. For other robbers, when they were running away, they just focused on running away. But for Jon, he even bugged the police¡¯s temporarymand room when he was running way. ¡°Goodd, you actually ced a bug at themand room. Not bad.¡±, themissioner smiled and said. Even though this matter had angered themander quite a bit. But didn¡¯t Jon also sound a warning bell for them. Themander must have learned his lesson in this drill and would avoid the mistakes in the actualbat. ¡°Actually, it was all thanking to themander for not checking the seized evidence carefully. Otherwise, how could this little trick of mine escape his eyes?¡± On the other end, Jon said with a smile. He sounded a little modest. However, when themander heard this, his expression instantly turned dark. Jon was simply too much. Was Jon mocking him already? ¡°Alright, let¡¯s not talk about this now. Where are you now? The drill is over. It¡¯s time for you toe back.¡± ¡°There are still many media outlets here waiting to interview you.¡± ¡°Where¡¯s your current location, is it far? If it¡¯s far, I¡¯ll send someone to pick you up.¡± Themissioner quickly changed the topic so that themander wouldn¡¯t be too embarrassed. Even though themander¡¯s performance in this drill wasn¡¯t very good, it was also because Jon was too strong. Themissioner also didn¡¯t want to lose to Jon in this exercise and have any impact on themander. ¡°There¡¯s no need to pick me up. I¡¯m not far from the bank. I¡¯m staying at the Hilton Hotel opposite the bank. I¡¯m looking at you guys right now.¡± Jon¡¯s words rang out again. After his voice fell. The entire square was silent! Everyone was stunned at this moment. In the neighborhood opposite the bank? What was going on? Themander had almost turned the entire city upside down, but now, Jon said that he was about 300 meters away from the bank? In fact, at the beginning. Themander had thought that Jon would be around the bank. After all, the most dangerous ce was usually the safest ce. So, he asked the police to go to the pedestrian street to look for him. As a result, Jon set a trap there, so themander temporarily dismissed the idea. But¡­ Jon was still nearby the bank now? ? ? He was only 300 meters away from him! Themander was already beginning to doubt his life. Chapter 106 - Hes Not Running Away, Hes On Vacation!

Chapter 106: He¡¯s Not Running Away, He¡¯s On Vacation!

Just as themander was doubting his life, in a room of the Hilton Hotel across the street, a bright shlight suddenly lit up, and it was shaking. At a distance of 300 meters, no matter how bright the shlight was, it couldn¡¯t reach to the square. But because of Jon¡¯s words, everyone in the square at the bank¡¯s entrance looked in the direction of the Hilton Hotel. In the darkness of the night, they could still see the swaying strong shlight. Themander quickly took a telescope from the temporarymand room and looked in the direction of the strong shlight. Then, he saw Jon sitting on the stool behind the window. The most annoying thing was that he was still holding a ss of red wine. It was as if he knew that themander was going to look at him through binocrs. He even raised his hand and made a toast to themander across the air. Themander suddenly felt his blood pumped all over his body, and he felt terrible. He thought about what he had been doing for the past two days. Setting up a n overnight and searching for Jon overnight. Then he looked at what Jon was doing now. He was staying in a big hotel, enjoying the evening breeze and drinking red wine while watching the police¡¯s every move from afar. The more themander thought about it, the angrier he got, and he almost flipped over the table. Beside him, the cameraman quickly adjusted the camera and aimed it at the direction where the shlight was lit. However, because of the distance, the camera could not capture Jon from the square. At this moment, themissioner handed over a high-precision telescope and ced it in front of the camera, filming Jon in the hotel opposite. The 80 million viewers in the livestream were also very curious about what was going on. As the telescope was ced in front of the camera, the figure of Jon was captured. However, when the viewers saw Jon¡¯s rxed state, thement section instantly exploded. ¡°I always thought that running away would be difficult, but look at Jon, I realized that I was a fool.¡± ¡°If I didn¡¯t know the situation, I would have thought that Jon was ying the role of the police. It¡¯s not a runaway, he was on vacation!¡± ¡°Massive chad. The police are making ns to capture him overnight. But the robbers are enjoying life under the eyes of the police?¡± ¡°I¡¯m already kneel down. My mom asked me why I was kneeling to watch the livestream, and I said that Jon was too strong.¡± ¡°I¡¯m already wet. My girlfriend asked me what¡¯s going on, and I said that I¡¯m done.¡± ¡°F*ck, can you not make dirtyments while watching a livestream?¡± ¡°This is what we called the most dangerous ce is the safest ce? Who would have thought that Jon was just 300 meters away?¡± ¡°Not only can he monitor themander¡¯s every word, but he also monitors every move of the police. Awesome, too awesome. Under such circumstances, the police have no way of winning.¡± ¡°Haha, I feel that themander has already vomited blood. If it were me, I definitely wouldn¡¯t be able to stand it. I would definitely beat up Jon.¡± ¡°Sigh, Jon won again. Thinking back, many audiences didn¡¯t believe that he could win.¡± ¡°Yeah, at that time, many people thought that Jon would be caught by the police. Now, Jon executed a perfect n. With a hearty victory, he smacked the faces of those who didn¡¯t think highly of him.¡± The audience was amazed. Jon was too amazing. They thought that during these 24 hours, Jon should have made himself nervous and hide. But unexpectedly, not only was he not nervous, but he was also even enjoying life in the Hilton Hotel opposite the bank. He was too strong. ¡°Alright, Jon,e back quickly. Everyone is waiting for you.¡± Themissioner said with a smile. There was a hint of appreciation in his tone. Jon had performed very well in this drill. After hanging up the phone, Jon and Venus Alice also started to pack their things. Carrying 100 kilograms of gold and weapons, they walked towards the bank square. When the media outside the cordon saw Jon walking over, they quickly pointed their cameras at him. After all, they didn¡¯t have many chances to film Jon during this drill. After Jon entered the cordon, they didn¡¯t have the chance to film him anymore. Needless to say, after Jon went through this drill, his poprity would definitely rise again,pletely surpassing arge portion of A-list celebrities. In the past, an A-list celebrity might be able to make the trending searches even if they were slightly injured. But now, the trending topics were basically dominated by Jon and this drill. Even if the celebrities spent money to buy the trending topics, it couldn¡¯tpare to this drill. Therefore, if they could film Jon, they could basically get a share of this huge amount of views. They weren¡¯t taking pictures, they were taking money! Amidst the countless shes, Jon walked past calmly and came to the door of themand room. ¡°Thank you for your hard work, sir.¡± Jon smiled at themander. In this drill, themander was definitely the one who had the hardest time. Especially during thest twenty-four hours, he was using up both his mental and physical strength. When themander heard what Jon said, he felt like he was being ridiculed. He felt bad, but he couldn¡¯t show it on his face. Themander forced a smile and said, ¡°It¡¯s not hard. It¡¯s just my job.¡± ¡°You did well in this drill. Let¡¯s go for a midnight snackter?¡±, themander said. There was nothing wrong with what he said. However, coupled with the meaningful smile on the face of themander, no matter how one looked at it, this midnight snack did not seem to be that delicious. It was rather like a trap. The audience in the live broadcast room also joked around and refused to let Jon go. Otherwise, they were afraid that Jon would not be able toe back. After all, themander would definitely be holding a grudge in his heart right now. Jon smiled and said, ¡°Don¡¯t say that for now. I saw that you guys didn¡¯t sleep wellst night. Now that the drill is over, you should rest first. Next time when you¡¯re free,e to New York, I¡¯ll treat you guys to a big meal.¡± Now, themander and the SWAT team leader were both staring at a ck eye. Moreover, their eyes were bloodshot. It was obvious that they didn¡¯t rest well. After all, they had only slept for three or four hours in order to catch Jon. It wasn¡¯t much different from not sleeping. The SWAT team leader stood aside, listening to Jon¡¯s words, and felt that he was showing off. After all, he had tormented the two police officers. The SWAT team leader was a little angry now, if it wasn¡¯t for the livestream, he was about to have an 1v1 with Jon. Chapter 107 - The End of the Drill!

Chapter 107: The End of the Drill!

Although, the conversation between Jon and themander looked like a conversation between friends, no matter how one looked at it, it didn¡¯t sound right. Therefore, themissioner hurriedly came over to interrupt them. ¡°Jon, the thing I put in the bank, your goal, to steal 100 kilograms of gold, you should have done it, right?¡± Jon nodded and said, ¡°It¡¯s all here.¡± Then, he put the backpack on the ground and signaled Venus to put it on the ground as well. He opened the zipper of the backpack. More than 20 tubes, all the gold were melted and injected into it. ¡°Not bad, not bad.¡± Seeing this scene, themissioner nodded repeatedly. ¡°Before the drill, I set you such a difficult problem. I really didn¡¯t expect you to melt the gold and take it away.¡± ¡°As expected of a highly intelligent robber like you.¡± Themissioner¡¯s tone was filled with admiration. Jon was indeed smart. From the beginning to the end, this drill had been nned meticulously and meticulously. Furthermore, he could even lure the police into his traps. This was not something that an ordinary person could do. Themander and the SWAT team leader were still pissed off. But they agreed that Jon was an intelligent robber. When they saw hisst drill on the Inte, themander and the SWAT team leader didn¡¯t have such an intuitive feeling. But this time it was a real fight with Jon. They experienced what it meant to be a real intelligent robber. He was a real high IQ robber. Now, the robber team had won. As robbers, Will Smith, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans had been eliminated. They had already quit the drill. But at this time, they were still called to the door of themand room. ¡°Boss, well done. We really won.¡± Will Smith said, ¡°You should have seen it from the room in the hotel across from us. In these 24 hours, themander and the SWAT team leader had a hard time. Haha.¡± Will Smith was very happy. After all, even though he had been eliminated. But in the end, the robbers had won. So, he could also bask in the glory. ¡°Cough, cough, cough.¡± When the SWAT team leader heard this, he couldn¡¯t help but cough a few times. Will Smith¡¯s words were like a knife stabbed into their wounds. Moreover, Will Smith was a police officer. He said this in front of more than 80 million people in the livestream. He did not give any face to the SWAT team leader and themander at all. It was irritating, very infuriating. The five robbers who had won the drill this time all came to the front of the temporarymand room. Gal Gadot hurried over to prepare for an interview. She pointed the microphone at Jon and asked with a smile, ¡°Mr. Jon, you¡¯ve won the battle again. How are you feeling now?¡± This smile was different from the professional smile she usually showed during interviews. This smile was like a woman¡¯s expression when she saw her lover. This made Venus Alice, who was beside her, realize at a nce. There was something going on between the two of them! ¡°I¡¯m very happy that I was able to achieve victory in this drill. After all, I wasn¡¯t the only one who participated in this drill. There were also outstanding police officers from the police department who were involved.¡± ¡°It wasn¡¯t just my effort. It was the result of the cooperation of five people.¡± Jon smiled at the camera. He spoke in a pretentious manner. ¡°The audience is very satisfied with your wonderful performance in this drill. What do you think of your opponent, themander who is themander-in-chief?¡± A mischievous look appeared in Gal Gadot¡¯s face. She asked a rather tricky question. Jon looked at her and smiled. ¡°In fact, the oue of this drill is not important. What is important is the attitude towards the drill.¡± ¡°During this drill, be it the few police officers who cooperated with me, themander, the special police captain, or every police officer present, they all treat this drill with a very serious attitude.¡± ¡°I think that¡¯s enough.¡± His words gained the praise of the audience in the livestream. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s just an act. Winning or losing is not important. What¡¯s important is the serious attitude in participating the drill.¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s words can also be considered to have saved the police from failure. It¡¯s very good.¡± ¡°During the drill, he was fully immersed. At the end of the drill, he said such wise words again. I have fallen in love.¡± ¡°But is this drilling to an end after this interview? I really can¡¯t bear to part with it.¡± ¡°Yeah, my heart felt empty. I still want to continue watching Jon¡¯s performance.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, there will be a next time.¡± Most of the audience in the livestream were praising Jon. After all, his answer could be said to be perfect. They could not find anything to be picky about Jon. He did not brag about his victory, nor did he belittle his opponent. When themander and the SWAT team leader heard this, their expressions eased up a lot. After all, everyone loved to hear good words. Inparison, they were too little narrow-minded. Venus Alice, who was standing next to him, also looked at Jon with admiration in her eyes. ¡°Alright, everyone is tired today. Go back and rest first. Tomorrow, our department will hold a conference about this drill. If anyone has any questions,e and ask tomorrow.¡± It was almost midnight. It was veryte. The exercise started at two o¡¯clock yesterday afternoon. It had been going on until now. Whether it was the police, the robbers, or the live broadcast reporters, they were all very tired. It was indeed not suitable for them to conduct an in-depth interview with Jon now. Hearing this, Gal Gadot silently retreated to the side and did not ask any more questions. Immediately after, themander told the police officers to start withdrawing. This drill, which was apanied by the withdrawal of the police, hadpletelye to an end. It was already midnight. The drill had alsoe to an end. However, on the inte, the poprity of this drill had already reached an explosive level. All the major intepanies and major tforms were full of posts about this drill. ¡°Shocking. The Pennsylvania drill hase to an end, and the winner is actually Jon?¡± ¡°Jon didn¡¯t disappoint us in the end. He won the drill.¡± ¡°I¡¯m so angry. So, did evil win over justice this time? When will the side of justice be able to stand up?¡± ¡°I was at the scene. Just when the police were searching for Jon overnight, he was doing this?¡± Chapter 108 - The generous rewards of the system

Chapter 108: The generous rewards of the system

Even in the middle of the night, there were still several millions of people searched for this drill, and even the highest reached close to ten million. It was enough to show the poprity of this drill. It was enough to show the poprity of Jon. After the exercise was over. Themissioner had originally nned a ce for Jon but he refused. What was so good about a ce arranged by themissioner? He might as well find a high-end hotel himself, but he called Gal Gadot over. Jon found a ce that was even more upscale than the Hilton Hotel. He booked a suite. He went to the hotel room, went to the bathroom, filled the bathtub with warm water, and then Jon took off his clothes andy in the bathtub. Eight days of preparation and nearly 48 hours of drill, even Jon was a little tired after all the hassle. So, he took a bath to relieve his fatigue. Then, he picked up his cell phone and called Gal Gadot, ¡°Hey.¡± ¡°Good evening, Jon.¡± A gentle voice sounded on the other end of the phone. ¡°You¡¯re not asleep yet?¡± ¡°The moon is too bright. I can¡¯t sleep.¡± Jon could not help but smile. The moon was too bright? He could never think of such a reason. ¡°I can block the light of the moon here. Why don¡¯t youe and sleep here?¡±, Jon asked. ¡°Sure.¡±, Gal Gadot quickly replied. ¡°Gold Grand Hotel, room 2305.¡± Jon told Gal Gadot the room number. The two chatted for a while before hanging up the phone. At this moment. ¡°Ding, the role-ying mission has beenpleted. Would you like to receive your reward now?¡± The system¡¯s voice rang out. ¡°Receive.¡± After receiving his reward once, Jon appeared much calmer this time. Regarding this drill initiated by the Pennsylvania State Police Department, what kind of rating the system would give and what kind of reward it would give. Jon was looking forward to it. After all, ording to the specifications of the drill and his performance in this drill, the reward given should be more generous than the previous one. The system¡¯s voice continued to ring. ¡°In this drill, the host yed the robber perfectly and won in the end, obtaining an S + rating!¡± S +? Jon was slightly surprised. He had thought that S was the highest rating, but he did not expect it to be S + this time. Needless to say, an S + rating and the system reward was definitely much better than an S rating. ¡°Obtained reward: 10 million USD! The money is currently stored in the system store, and the host can withdraw it at any time.¡± [ Reward: Godly Medical Skill (beginner-level)] [ Reward: Aura Concealment Skill (beginner-level)] [ Reward: Breezy Breeze (middle-level). Note: This skill is a passive skill. it allows the host to think calmly and unhurriedly in any situation. ] [ Reward: 15 attribute points! ] [ Reward obtained: 3,000 points! ] [ Skill: the Robber Aura has been raised to intermediate level. ] [ Skill: Godly Lockpicking Skill, raised to low level. ] As the system¡¯s voice rang out, all the rewards that Jon had obtained this time appeared on the system interface. The rewards that the system had given him, regardless of whether it was money, attribute points, or skill points, was much more generouspared to thest time. Moreover, there were also a few new skills. Godly Medical Skill, Aura Concealment Skill, and a passive skill, Breezy Breeze. As for Breezy Breeze, it was an intermediate skill. Every time Jonpleted a mission from the system, the system would give him a reward. Furthermore, it would help Jon upgrade a few of his existing skill levels randomly. However, the new skills that the system gave him were basically at beginner level skills. After randomly upgrading a few skills, the remaining skills would need to be upgraded. All of them required points. Moreover, the points required were not cheap. Even the cheapest skill required 1000 points to upgrade. Moreover, the other skills required even more points. However, the new passive skill, Breezy Breeze, was already an intermediate skill when the system rewarded it. This situation made Jon pleasantly surprised. ¡°It allows the host to think calmly and unhurriedly in any situation.¡± Jon silently read the skill¡¯s description. In other words, it could keep him calm at all times? Improve his mental strength? It looked good. As a former Navy SEALs team member, he had experienced some rough times. But sometimes when he faced with a major event, there would be some instinctive panic, which affected his thinking. Took the mission three years ago. When he was told that his n had been fully learned by the opponent, he was a little panicked. Due to his panic, he did not make the best decision. Otherwise, he might have brought out apanion. It was also because of his panic that the entire team was wiped out. And he was only lucky enough to survive. However, with this skill, that terrible situation should not happen again. As for the Godly Medical Skill, this skill was also quite handy. Of course, during the two drills that Jon participated in, no one was injured. It might not be used during the drills. However, during the actual mission, injuries and even death weremon. And in cases where the injuries were rtively minor, Jon could use some equipment to treat himself or save others. This would save him the time he needed to go to the hospital. As for the third skill, Aura Concealment was much important and useful. Overall, the rewards from the system were very great, and Jon was very satisfied. In the system store, Jon¡¯s cash had already reached more than 19 million. Although this money could not be directly transferred to the bank card. But who was Jon? He was a former Navy SEALs team member, an FBI agent, and he could think of at least dozens of ways tounder money. Putting everything else aside, just a trip to the casino would clean up the money. After all. No one could find out where the money came from. Jon browsed through the rewards given by the system, and then opened the system interface. [ Host ] : Kirby Jon [ IQ ] : 125 (average person is 100) [ Physical fitness ] : 130 (average person is 100) [ Points ] : 3,430 [ Skills ] : Combat Arts (master level) , Firearms Expert(master level) , Robber Aura (intermediate level) , Police Acting Aura (low level) , Godly Lockpicking Skill (beginner level) , Aura Concealment Skill (low level) , Godly Medical Skill (low level) [ Passive skill ] : Breezy Breeze (intermediate level) [ Attribute points ] : 15 Chapter 109 - Live Gift Sharing

Chapter 109: Live Gift Sharing

The familiar stats panel appeared. Because he had received a lot of rewards this time, his stats panel looked richer than before. Then, Jon looked at his stats. Then he looked at his two stats, IQ and stamina. He gradually fell into deep thought. Now his IQ seemed to be enough. As for his physical strength, even though it was already 130, but he felt that it was not enough. For example, when he was carrying a weight of 100 pounds, he could clearly feel that he was panting. Of course, this was under the condition that his physical strength was rtively strong. If he were an ordinary person, carrying a weight of 100 pounds, he would probably not be able to walk far and would be too tired to move. However, to him, his current physical strength was indeed a weakness. Therefore, Jon nned to add his attribute points to his physical strength. Jon pondered for a moment and added all 15 attribute points that the system had rewarded to his physical strength. He would now increase his physical strength. As for his intelligence, it was enough for now. Moreover, as long as hepleted the system¡¯s missions in the future, he would definitely give attribute points to him. At that time, he would consider raising his intelligence. As he added all his attribute points to his physical strength, his physical strength rose from 130 points to 145 points. Almost in an instant, Jon felt his body undergo a slight change. A power was born from his flesh and blood. As this power was born, he felt his entire body warm. Even the tiredness he had umted during the drill was dispelled at this moment, and he felt extremelyfortable. This was definitely not because he was soaking in the bathtub. He felt that. If he were to carry another 50 kg of things from the bank to the Hilton Hotel, he would not be panting heavily. This was the increase of 15 attribute points! After that, Jon closed his stats panel, closed his eyes, andyfortably in the bathtub, enjoying the hot bath. Not long after. ¡°Ding.¡± The doorbell of the suite rang. Jon opened his eyes, wrapped himself in a towel, and walked over to open the door. The person who came was obviously Gal Gadot. ¡°You¡¯re taking a bath.¡± Gal Gadot saw Jon wrapped in a towel, and her face was covered with a faint red color. She seemed to have recalled something and was a little shy. If an outsider were to see this scene, they would be shocked. Because Gal Gadot was beautiful, there were many male colleagues in thepany who pursued her openly and secretly. As she broadcasted Jon¡¯s drill live, she went on the camera a few times. She also relied on her beautiful face to gain arge amount of poprity. The current Gal Gadot was no less popr than a second or third-rate star. She was regarded as a goddess by many people. Of course, most of these people were perverts. If they were to see their goddess revealing a shy expression in front of another man¡­ These people would probably suffer from insomnia collectively. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m taking a shower.¡± Jon could not help but smile when he saw Gal Gadot avoiding his gaze due to her shyness. At this moment, he could not help but think of Venus Alice. If it were Venus Alice who saw him wrapped in a towel, she would probably look at him boldly. She might even couldn¡¯t resist and touch Jon¡¯s sexy figure. However, Gal Gadot¡¯s personality was different from hers. ¡°Come in quickly.¡± Jon held her hand and pulled her into the suite. At this moment, Gal Gadot was still wearing a business suit. She wore a tight ck dress with ck stockings and a white suit. It looked very nice. Almost as soon as the door was closed, Jon stroked the back of Gal Gadot¡¯s head and kissed her. ¡°HMM¡­¡± Even though the two of them had done everything, Gal Gadot was still a little shy. She hurriedly pushed Jon away and said while panting, ¡°I, I want to tell you something.¡± Jon looked at her. Since she was already here, Gal Gadot could not escape tonight, so he was not in a hurry. The two sat on the sofa. Gal Gadot drank a mouthful of water to moisten her throat, she looked at Jon and said seriously, ¡°The maximum number of people watching the live broadcast of this drill online is close to 90 million. The audience gave a lot of gifts, more than 40 million. After deducting the tform¡¯s share, there is still 20 million left.¡± ¡°Our station manager has already consulted themissioner. He said that the purpose of the drill is to find problems for the police, not to benefit them.¡± ¡°And now, their purpose has been achieved. Moreover, these gifts were given to you because of the audience¡¯s love for you.¡± Hearing Gal Gadot¡¯s voice, Jon nodded slightly. He did not expect that after the drift, the livestream would receive so many gifts. More than 40 million! This was several times more than the reward given by the system. Of course, the system¡¯s reward was more important, such as skills and attribute points. This was something that the livestream could neverpare to. However, for a drill to have more than 40 million gifts. This was very ridiculous. Thinking about it, it actually made sense. After all, this drill was extremely popr, and it wasn¡¯t every day that there was a drill. This was a drill that had been anticipated for a long time. Most of the audience would buy send some small gifts. With so many audiences watching, even if everyone only bought a single gift, it was still very scary. ¡°So?¡± Jon did not know the purpose of Gal Gadot¡¯s words. However, since she told him, then it must be rted to him. ¡°Our station manager said that if you return to New York, he will let me take you to the station to sign a contract to split the revenue live broadcast of this drill.¡± ¡°90% for you, 10% for the station.¡± Gal Gadot said. The ie from this live broadcast could be said to be very shocking. Even if it was only 10%, it was still a few million dors. She had set another live broadcast record for the station, directly turning the station¡¯s livestream into a top-notch streaming channel. Therefore, a portion of this 10% would be her bonus. ¡°Oh?¡± Jon raised his eyebrows. He did not expect the station head to be willing to give him a 90% share. Although Jon was the main character of the live broadcast, this was the revenue generated by the livestream. Even if the station manager gave Jon a small amount of share to Jon, he wouldn¡¯t mind at all After all, it was their livestream. What could he do? However, under such circumstances, the station manager was still willing to give 90% of the revenue to Jon. It was probably because he wanted to work with Jon again. After all, Jon was too popr. Compared to that, these gifts were just a tiny drop of water from the sea. It had to be said that this station manager had a long-term vision. Jon nodded. ¡°Sure.¡± When Gal Gadot saw him nod, he smiled and said, ¡°When we get back, I¡¯ll take you to the station.¡± Chapter 110 - More Profitable Than Robbing A Bank!

Chapter 110: More Profitable Than Robbing A Bank!

¡°None of this is important. It¡¯s already sote. We should get down to some serious business.¡± The corners of Jon¡¯s mouth curled up. How could Gal Gadot not know what Jon was thinking? Her face turned red and said, ¡°What serious business? It¡¯s already sote. Sleeping is the real business. I¡¯m going to wash up and sleep.¡± As she said that, she got up and was about to leave when Jon grabbed her wrist. He pulled her back onto the sofa again. A hand reached in from Gal Gadot¡¯s cor and caressed her curvy breast. ¡°You have to wash up, but you have to wait for a while to sleep.¡± as Jon said, he turned off the lights in the room. The mind of Jon was dominated by his sexual desire. His evil urge had been aroused by Venus when he was with herst night. He had been holding it in for a whole day. Now. He naturally had to release it all on Gal Gadot. In the pitch-ck room, the noises and moans of pleasure lingering through the night. ¡­ The next day, at 7:30 in the morning. Jon was woken up by the ringtone of his phone. It was themissioner calling. Jon answered the phone with his sleepy eyes. Yesterday, the two of them did not go to sleep until 5 am. They had only slept for two and a half hours. Although Jon had opened his eyes, he was still notpletely awake. He was still light-headed. ¡°Good morning, Jon. The interview for this drill is scheduled for 9 am. You are the absolute protagonist of this interview. Don¡¯t bete.¡± Themissioner¡¯s voice sounded. ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll be there on time.¡± Jon replied. The interview was considered the end of the drill. After the interview, he could return to New York. Jon yawned and looked to the side. There was no one there. He got up from the bed and saw that Gal Gadot had finished washing up. She had put on her makeup and walked over. ¡°Beautifuldy, the way you walk is a little strange.¡± Jon said with a smile. Gail Gardo red at him. ¡°Isn¡¯t it all because of you?¡± Last night, the two of them had been making love for three to four hours. After such intense exercise, it would be strange if her walking posture was normal. However, her strange walking posture was not very obvious. If one did not observe carefully, they would not be able to notice it. Jon smiled and kissed her. ¡°Themissioner just told you about today¡¯s interview, right?¡± Gal Gadot packed her bag and asked. Jon nodded. ¡°Then get ready. Don¡¯t bete. I have to go over first.¡± Gal Gadot smiled and said. After all, she was the live broadcast reporter appointed for this drill. Naturally, she could not miss this interview. Therefore, she also had to prepare. The audience was still looking forward to the interview after this drill. The audience¡¯s anticipation showed that there was still a lot of poprity. Naturally, Gal Gadot would not let go of this opportunity. ¡­ Morning, 8:40 am, Jon came to the police station. ¡°Boss, you¡¯re here. Themissioner said to see you before the interview starts. He told me to wait for you here.¡± Will Smith stood at the door. When he saw Jon walking over, he immediately came up to wee him. Actually, the drill had already ended. He didn¡¯t need to call Jon boss anymore. However, this guy seemed to have blurted out the word ¡°Boss¡±. Jon nodded. ¡°Okay.¡± He followed Will Smith into the police station. Since themissioner wanted to see him before the interview began, there must be something going on. After Will Smith brought Jon to themissioner¡¯s office, he left. After all, themissioner¡¯s office was a ce where one would feel extremely stressed after staying for a long time. After Will Smith left, themissioner stood up from his chair and smiled. He called out to Jon ¡°Don¡¯t stand there. Sit down.¡± ¡°Or coffee without sugar?¡± ¡°Okay.¡±, Jon nodded. Themissioner made two cups of coffee, one in front of Jon and one in front of him. Then he sat on the sofa. Jon picked up the cup and took a sip. He asked, ¡°Commissioner, you specially asked Will to bring me to the office. Is there something you need?¡± Jon was not a person who beat around the bush. So, he asked directly. He naturally did not think that themissioner had asked Will to wait for him at the door just to make a cup of coffee for him. ¡°The police department¡¯s drill this time should be pretty good, right? I heard about it yesterday. You participated in a live broadcast of the drill, and the gifts sent by the audience have already reached tens of millions of dors.¡± ¡°You¡¯re making more money than robbing a bank.¡± ¡°Are you interested in participating in another drill?¡± themissioner said with a smile. Participating in a live broadcast was making more money than robbing a bank. Even though this matter sounded a little ridiculous, but it was very true, Jon was the one who made it happened. When he participated in a live broadcast of the drill, the gifts that gave by the audience in the livestream were more than 40 million dors. Some of this money was given to the tform. After giving the tform a share, there was another $20 million. And he had heard that the television station was willing to give 90% of the $20 million to Jon. 90% of the $20 million. That was $18 million! And the gold in the bank was only worth $10 million in total. Jon only participated in a drill, and he received $18 million. Wasn¡¯t this better than robbing a bank? Moreover, these money was clean, legal, and could be spent at anywhere. Jon raised his eyebrows and said, ¡°From what you mean, you want to continue the drill?¡± Hearing that, themissioner quickly said, ¡°No, no, my men have been almost tortured by you. If we have another drill, I¡¯m afraid they will break down.¡± Through this drill, themissioner had basically achieved his goal. Naturally, he could not start another drill. Otherwise, wouldn¡¯t the police force be embarrassed again? ¡°Today, I received five or six calls from other states¡¯ police forces. All of them wanted to invite you to participate in the drill.¡± ¡°Actually, they have been thinking of inviting you to participate in the drill for a long time. Butst time, I acted quickly and was ahead of all of them.¡± ¡°Now that the drill is over, and they know that you¡¯re here, they called me.¡± ¡°I just wanted to ask for your opinion.¡± themissioner said. After the drill in New York, many local police had their eyes on Jon. They even posted on Twitter that they wanted to invite Jon. However, themissioner of Pennsylvania was one step ahead and directly went to the FBI, sessfully inviting Jon. This time, the scale of the exercise was evenrger and had a wider impact. The police departments that had originally intended to do so naturally began to contact him by phone early. Hearing themissioner¡¯s words, Jon fell into deep thought. Although he didn¡¯t like trouble, because of the existence of the system, he obviously couldn¡¯t live his life ording to his own ideas. Chapter 111 - Interview!

Chapter 111: Interview!

However, it was not necessary to rob a bank every time. If it were a bank robbery again, it would be a little too boring. After all, this system was a god-level acting system. And he did not stipte that he had to y the role of a bank robber every time. Therefore, it was not impossible for him to challenge others. ¡°Do you have any ideas, Jon?¡± Themissioner could not help but ask when he saw that he was deep in thought. Jon was very popr now. There were so many police departments waiting to snatch him away. If he had any ideas, he could naturally bring them up. As long as it was not too excessive, he believed that some of those police departments would be willing to ept it. ¡°Commissioner, now that I have won two bank drills, I want to give myself a little more challenge when I have the chance.¡± ¡°So, I want to go to the next drill to make it more difficult.¡± After a moment of silence, Jon slowly said. The reward given by the system was judged by the difficulty of the drill and the score he hadpleted. Now, Jon¡¯s score was already S +. It would not be easy to improve his score. Hence, the best way to get a higher system reward was naturally to start from the difficulty of the exercise. ¡°Goodd, I didn¡¯t expect you to have such a challenging spirit. I will pass on your thoughts.¡± ¡°I will inform you if they have any response. How about it? The drill has just ended. You should rest for a few days and think about it.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Jon replied with a smile. Themissioner looked at the time and said, ¡°The time is almost up. The interview should be almost ready.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s not waste time. Let¡¯s go to the venue now.¡± ¡­ The interview this time would be held in a conference hall of the police station. The interview would amodate a total of 20 media. It was even bigger than the previous interview. When themissioner and Jon arrived. The 20 media outlets were already waiting in the conference hall. There were also the four people who yed the robbers this time, as well as themander, the SWAT team leader. Themissioner sat in the middle, and Jon sat next to him. On the other side of Jon were the other four people who yed the robbers. Venus Alice was looking at Jon with a smile on her face. On the other side of themissioner were themander, the SWAT team leader, and a few other police officers. After themissioner sat down, he nced around and said, ¡°Now, the interview for this drill can officially begin. If any of you have any questions, you can raise your hands and ask.¡± Immediately, the people below the stage raised their hands. ¡°This gentleman.¡± themissioner casually pointed at one of the people in the crowd. The reporter who was chosen quickly stood up and said, ¡°Hello, Mr. Jon. Right now, there are many police stations on the inte that have expressed their desire to invite you to cooperate in the drill.¡± ¡°Then, have you already chosen a partner for your next drill? When will it begin?¡± This question, it could be said that all the audience members were looking forward to it. Hearing that, Jon picked up the microphone. ¡°Thest drill just ended yesterday. Although I¡¯ve already received a portion of the invitations, I haven¡¯t made a decision on the next drill.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve already won two drills. I¡¯m looking forward to the next drill to increase the difficulty of the robbers.¡± After saying that, Jon sat down. This interview was naturally broadcasted live because themissioner had already announced it yesterday. Although the interview had just started, there were already quite a number of viewers in the livestream. When Jon said that, thements in the livestream immediately surged. ¡°What a guy. He actually took the initiative to increase the difficulty. Is he crazy?¡± ¡°The main request is to raise the difficulty. This is the first time I¡¯ve seen such a request.¡± ¡°Arrogant, this is too arrogant. He¡¯s just a robber. This request is practically standing on top of the police. Can the police hold it in?¡± ¡°Can the police hold it in? In any case, I can¡¯t hold it in. If Jon said this to me, I would definitely teach him how to be a person in bed.¡± ¡°F*ck, if you want to teach him how to behave, then teach him how to behave. What¡¯s the hell with being in bed?¡± ¡°Jon is too arrogant. I can¡¯t stand it anymore. Come to the police station and give him a beating.¡± ¡°I think Jon is very charming at the moment. After all, Jon is the winner of the drill. The winner has the right to be arrogant. Support Him!¡± ¡°Haha, look at the expressions of themander and the SWAT team leader. Their expressions keep changing like chameleons.¡± ¡°Commander: Does Jon think that we are too weak and not challenging?¡± ¡°SWAT team leader: * * * * * * * * * *.¡± ¡°Good God, the SWAT team leader was blocked from the live broadcast because his words were too intense.¡± ¡°You people really know how to spice up things.¡± The audience heard Jon offer to make the drill more difficult. They all thought he was nut. After all, what kind of robber asks for more difficulty? The average robber would love to have a drill run as easy as possible. For a time, the chat of the livestream was asking the U. S. police departments to give Jon a lesson. Even though everyone liked Jon, the highly intelligent robber, but seeing how arrogant he was, they also wanted to see Jon lose once. In the meeting hall, the interview continued. The next reporter stood up. ¡°Hello,mander. As themander-in-chief of the police this time, you failed in this drill. What do you think?¡± When themander heard this, he picked up the microphone and replied in a deep voice, ¡°The drill failed, and 13 SWAT brothers were sacrificed. I feel very heavy on losing the drill.¡± ¡°Of course, even though it was a failure, the experience of this failure is very important to the police department.¡± ¡°Because through this drill, we discovered a lot of problems.¡± Themander¡¯s reply was somewhat vague. After all, the drill had just ended, and he didn¡¯t have time to make a conclusion. The interviewsted for about an hour. Most of the people on the stage were asked questions. At the end of the interview. Gal Gadot also raised his hand and asked with a smile, ¡°Mr. Jon, if the full score is 100, what is your score for your performance in the exercise?¡± Jon thought for a moment and said, ¡°70 points.¡± ¡°Even though we won the drill, I did not do it perfectly. In order to escape, I even sacrificed three of mypanions.¡± ¡°So, I gave myself a 70 at best.¡± Chapter 112 - Will鈥檚 Invitation!

Chapter 112: Will¡¯s Invitation!

As soon as he finished speaking, the livestream immediately went into an uproar. ¡°He¡¯s a f*cking badass. He only gave 70 points after tormenting the police like this?¡± ¡°After all, he¡¯s a highly intelligent person. He has very high expectations of himself.¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s understandable. We can¡¯t measure Jon ording to our thoughts. He¡¯s very outstanding, so he naturally has high expectations of himself.¡± ¡°Look at themander and the police captain. I can¡¯t help butugh at their expressions.¡± ¡°Why do I feel like these two people have nothing left to live for? Can someone exin to everyone what these two people are thinking right now?¡± ¡°Commander: Listen, listen to what the f*ck you¡¯re saying? You¡¯re still not satisfied after torturing us like this, and you¡¯re only giving yourself 70 points?¡± ¡°SWAT team leader: Are you only satisfied when I¡¯m dead. jpg.¡± ¡°Commander and special police captain: Numb.jpg.¡± ¡°Haha, LMAO.¡± ¡°F *ck, you guys are talented and hrious. I won¡¯t watch this Christmas party without you guys.¡± ¡°Sigh, no matter what, this drill hase to an end here. I¡¯m still a little reluctant.¡± ¡°I request Jon to quickly perform another drill.¡± ¡°Request + 1.¡± The audience couldn¡¯t wait to see Jon¡¯s third drill. Of course, this time, the audience wanted to see Jon lose. After all, Jon was not satisfied with his own performance. The audience felt that Jon was too arrogant. Someone needed to teach him a lesson. Hence, they started to petition in the livestream, as well as on Twitter, Facebook, and other major tforms. At the same time, on various major online tforms, posts rted to this interview were immediately trending. ¡°Shocking, Jon dared to speak so arrogantly in the interview!¡± ¡°Arrogant, a robber is contemptuous of the police, this is too arrogant!¡± ¡°Good guy, Jon said this in front of the entire United States police, can the police tolerate this?¡± ¡°Petition of the people! Please invite Jon to participate in the drill, send him a failure!¡± ¡°Dear all police departments! Please invite Jon to participate in the drill, let Jon grows stronger.¡± In the trending posts, there were some about the interview. There were some who wanted the local police to invite Jon to participate in the drill and beat him. Many people even came to the official Twitter of the various state police departments toment. This naturally also attracted the attention of the authorities. After the interview was over, Jon was brought back to the office by themissioner. The two of them talked for a long time as if they were friends. For a full hour. Then, themissioner gave Jon the 100,000 USD that they had agreed on beforehand. Jon didn¡¯t refuse. After all, he deserved it, so why not take it. Then, Jon left the police station. Just as he reached the door, he was stopped by Will Smith. ¡°Hey, Will?¡± Jon raised his eyebrows. He didn¡¯t know why the other party was looking for him. To be honest, he got along quite well with these four people from the police station during this drill. Moreover, the five of them spent eight days in the same room before the drill. To Jon, these people could be considered friends. ¡°Boss, are you going back to New York tomorrow?¡± Will Smith asked. Jon nodded. ¡°Once you go back, we don¡¯t know when we¡¯ll be able to see each other again, so I made a reservation at the Hyatt Hotel. It¡¯s seven o¡¯clock tonight. Don¡¯t bete.¡± ¡°Also, Venus said to bring Miss Gal Gadot. Don¡¯t forget.¡± ¡°Hyatt Hotel? Looks like you¡¯ve spent a lot of money.¡±, Jon smiled. Hyatt Hotel¡¯s branches were all over the United States. The area closest to the police station was in the center of the city. The building was huge, and it was very expensive. ¡°Of course. I¡¯m treating Boss to a meal. How can I be stingy? Oh right, bring Miss Gal Gadot along when youe.¡± Will Smith said. Although Will didn¡¯t know why Venus asked Gal Gadot toe over, he was just passing on the message. As for this situation¡­ Jon didn¡¯t really understand. Could it be that Venus found out about his rtionship with Gal Gadot, so she wanted to meet her? Or was there some other reason? If he couldn¡¯t figure it out, he might as well not think about it. They would talk about it when the timees. After Will Smith left, Jon walked out of the door of the police station. Gal Gadot was waiting for him. Gal Gadot had alreadypleted all the live broadcast tasks for the drill. She was supposed to report to the station. However, she took a leave of absence so that she could go back with Jon. For the current Gal Gadot, the station manager wanted nothing more than to worship her. Asking for leave was a simple matter, she could even ask for 360 days of leave for 365 days a year. She only needed to broadcast a record-breaking drill livestream for the remaining five days. But now, Gal Gadot had already raised the live broadcast record to a very high level. She didn¡¯t know whether she could break it or not. ¡°You two men actuallymunicated for an hour. It¡¯s simply unimaginable.¡± When Gal Gadot saw Jon walk out, she could not help butugh. ¡°Perhaps themissioner appreciates me more, so he did not allow me to leave. He chatted for a long time.¡± Jon joked. As he spoke, he walked to Gal Gadot¡¯s side. Gal Gadot held his arm, and the two of them walked along the street for a few steps. For this mission, Gal Gadot had taken a car from the television station. Now, the car had been driven back by the cameraman. The two of them could only take a taxi back to the hotel. Jon stopped a taxi by the roadside and the two of them got into the taxi. ¡°Are you free tonight?¡± Jon asked. ¡°I¡¯ve asked the station for a leave of absence. I¡¯ll be free for the next few days.¡± Gal Gadot replied. Jon nodded. ¡°Come have dinner with me tonight. It¡¯s with my four friends who yed the roles of robbers. They want to meet you.¡± Although he did not understand why Venus wanted to meet Gal Gadot, since she had brought it up, there was nothing for him to hide. ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll prepare myself when I get there.¡± Gal Gadot leaned on Jon¡¯s shoulder and replied. ¡­ 6:50 pm. Jon arrived at the Hyatt Hotel. At this moment, he was wearing casual clothes. However, he had shaved his beard and washed his hair before going out, which could be considered as tidying himself up. Meanwhile, Gal Gadot had spent half an hour dressing up. She was wearing a ck one-piece dress with exquisite makeup on her face. She was beautiful. The two of them held hands and appeared at the Hyatt Hotel. Chapter 113 - A New Drill Invitation!

Chapter 113: A New Drill Invitation!

¡°Dear Mr., Dear Miss, have you made a reservation?¡± The staff dressed in formal clothes saw Jon and Gal Gadot enter and immediately went forward to ask. ¡°Room 5.¡± Jon replied. Will Smith had already sent Jon the room number by text message. ¡°This way, please.¡± The waiter bowed slightly and made an inviting gesture. After all, it was a high-end hotel, so the waiter¡¯s attitude was very good. Jon nodded and replied. Gal Gadot held Jon¡¯s arm, and the two of them arrived at Will Smith¡¯s private dining room under the guidance of the waiter. The private dining room door opened. Will Smith had already arrived. They sat at the table one by one. ¡°Isn¡¯t this the reporter who was broadcasting live?¡± Other than Will Smith and Venus Alice, the other two were a little surprised. Why was this reporter here? In fact, at the beginning, Will Smith also didn¡¯t understand why Venus invited Gal Gadot over this time. They also didn¡¯t know the rtionship between Jon and Gal Gadot. But now, looking at Gal Gadot holding Jon¡¯s arm, they understood. They were dating. No wonder, why the official broadcast of the Pennsylvania Drill was handed to New York City reporters. So, it was because of Jon. But Jon and Gal Gadot¡¯s rtionship was not simple. What did this have to do with Venus Alice? Why did she specially invite Gal Gadot over? They could not figure it out. ¡°Hello, I am Gal Gadot.¡± Gal Gadot formally introduced herself to the few people. As for the names of the four people, she naturally remembered them. After all, as an official live broadcast reporter, she naturally had to remember the names of the robbers at the first moment. ¡°Hurry up and sit down. We¡¯re friends now. Don¡¯t be too restrained.¡± Will Smith said with a smile. At this moment, Venus was looking at Gal Gadot, and no one knew what she was thinking. Jon was very outstanding, and Gal Gadot was equally beautiful. The two of them looked verypatible. Although Jon did not explicitly say that Gal Gadot was his girlfriend, looking at the intimate appearance of the two of them, it was obvious they were in a rtionship. At this time, Venus couldn¡¯t help but think of that night. Her actions could be said to be tantly seducing Jon. Even so, he still restrained himself. If it were another man, he would have already jumped on her. This man was really fascinating. The reason why she invited Gal Gadot this time was that when she was at the door of the temporarymand room, she noticed that there was something wrong with the way they looked at each other. She knew it. The rtionship between Jon and Gal Gadot was not simple. Therefore, the purpose of this invitation was simple, it was just to confirm her guess. She wanted to meet the woman who was intimate with Jon. Buzz! Jon and Gal Gadot had just sat down, and before they could order, his phone began to vibrate. Jon raised his eyebrows and took out his phone to take a look. It was themissioner calling. Jon guessed that news from the other police stations hade back, and themissioner wanted to tell him. After all, the two of them had only been drinking coffee in the office for an hour. If themissioner had nothing to do, he wouldn¡¯t have called in such a short time. ¡°Oh, boss, we¡¯re having a party now, we can¡¯t y¡­¡± Will Smith said with a smile, his eyes ncing at Jon¡¯s phone. When he saw the word missioner¡¯ on the screen. His voice stopped abruptly. Then heughed, ¡°Business is more important.¡± Damn it, themissioner personally called Jon. If he didn¡¯t let him pick up, what would happen? Jon smiled and picked up the phone. ¡°Hey, Jon.¡± Themissioner¡¯s voice sounded from the other end. ¡°Commissioner,¡± Jon replied. ¡°Are you back in New York Now?¡± Themissioner asked. ¡°Not yet, I¡¯m still in Pennsylvania.¡± ¡°Where is the exact location?¡± ¡°Hyatt Hotel. I¡¯m having dinner with Will Smith and the others,¡± Jon replied. ¡°Oh, the few of you are having dinner together and you didn¡¯t call me? Isn¡¯t this a little inappropriate?¡± Themissioner¡¯s voice carried a hint of a smile. It was just a joke, and he did not really mean to scold them. After all, why would a subordinate invite a leader to a meal with his friends? When the time came, not only would the subordinate be ufortable, but the leader would also be ufortable. ¡°We haven¡¯t ordered yet. Why don¡¯t youe over? We¡¯ll wait for you.¡± Jon smiled in response. Since themissioner had said so, he had to respond. ¡°I¡¯m going over. This meal is on me. This time, it¡¯s not because I want to freeload, but because the chief of the Florida Police Department came to see me and insisted on seeing you.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll bring him over now.¡± After themissioner finished, he did not give Jon a chance to respond and directly hung up the phone. Listening to the blind voiceing from the phone. Jon couldn¡¯t help butugh. The Florida police chief went straight to the Pennsylvania Police Department. He must have learned from the Pennsylvaniamissioner¡¯s experience, which was why he acted so quickly. However¡­ Jon had just finished thest drill not long ago and was nning to rest more. However, he didn¡¯t expect the invitation to the new drill to arrive so soon. There was no time for him to rest at all. Moreover, he was an FBI agent, and now he had be the official viin of the drill? It was a little funny when he thought about it. ¡°Boss, is themissionering over?¡± He watched Jon put his cell phone into his pocket. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Will Smith asked. Following his question, the hearts of the other three people, Venus Alice, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans, suddenly sank. After all, one could not brag without scruples when having a meal with a leader. They felt a little ufortable. Jon looked at their expressions and felt a little helpless in his heart. ¡°The Florida police chief wanted to invite me to participate in the drill, and now he hase to Pennsylvania in person.¡± ¡°Themissioner ns to bring him along to exchange ideas. This meal is on me. You don¡¯t have to pay for it.¡± The chief of the Florida State Police Department came all the way here to look for him. He couldn¡¯t just not meet him. ¡°Since boss is treating, then I can¡¯t say anything.¡± ¡°Boss, I have to eat to my heart¡¯s content today. I have to rip you off.¡± Will Smith said with a smile. The other people alsoughed when they heard that. Twenty minutester. The door of the private room was opened. In the box, everyone¡¯s eyes looked towards the door. They saw themissioner walking over with a middle-aged man. Chapter 114 - Escapiong Drill!

Chapter 114: Escapiong Drill!

This middle-aged man looked a little thin. However, from the way this person walked and stood, Jon could tell that this person was not simple. He should also be from a special force unit. This person was obviously the Florida State Police Chief. ¡°Goodds, a few people secretly came here to eat without telling me? What, the judges can¡¯t attend the robber¡¯s celebration banquet?¡± Themissioner walked in and spoke with a serious face. But his tone was naturally joking. Hearing this, the people at the table all smiled. ¡°Look at what you said. How could we dare to forget you? Aren¡¯t we afraid of wasting your time because you¡¯re busy?¡± Will Smith quickly got up and called themissioner and the middle-aged man to sit down. The private dining room that Will Smith booked was not small. Even if there were two more people, they could still sit down. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s cut the crap. Let me introduce you. This is themissioner of the Florida State Police Department, Raymond.¡± ¡°He came here this time to meet the five robbers.¡± After themissioner sat down, he did not say any more nonsense. After all, it was not appropriate to say any nonsense on this asion. He directly stated his purpose, and everyone could ept it. He first introduced the middle-aged man, and the middle-aged man nodded and smiled at everyone. Then, everyone greeted him. The middle-aged man, Raymond, smiled. ¡°I¡¯ve basically watched the entire drill that the few of you participated in. I really admire your attitude towards this drill. You¡¯re all serious and dedicated.¡± ¡°Especially Jon. The robber that you yed caused a great reception.¡± ¡°Now, there are quite a few police stations that want to invite you to participate in the drill. Otherwise, I wouldn¡¯t be in such a hurry toe here.¡± Hearing this, Jon smiled. ¡°Mr. Raymond, are you also nning to invite me to participate in the drill this time?¡± This question actually had the meaning of asking the obvious. After all, before this, neither party was the other. Raymond hade all the way here, and if he did not invite Jon to participate in the drill, was he going to invite him to dinner? Actually, Jon also knew it was a dumb question. The main reason he asked was to take the initiative to bring up the topic of the drill. ¡°Yes, I dide to invite you to participate in the drill. Speaking of which, it has been a while since the Florida State Police Department had a drill.¡± ¡°Our original n was to have a drill today. Coincidentally, you showed up at this time.¡± ¡°The people have high expectations of you. If we had a drill, you would naturally be the best candidate to y the role of a robber.¡± Raymond nodded and said seriously. Indeed, the Florida State Police Department had already nned to carry out a drill today a few months ago. Originally, they had nned to hold this drill at the end of the year. But at this time, Jon suddenly appeared. He became the strongest robber in history. Now, the official Twitter feed of the Florida State Police was full ofments asking them to invite Jon to participate in the drill. With so manyments and the drill n that was already in ce. Therefore, Raymond rushed over overnight. Hearing that, Jon nodded but did not say anything. He frowned and thought about something. ¡°On the way here, I also learned that you wanted to increase the difficulty of the drill. Such spirit is worthy of respect, and our state can meet your request.¡± ¡°And before I came, I also spoke to your director of the FBI on the phone and expressed my intention. Your director said that as long as you agree, you can participate in the drill.¡± ¡°And if you wanted to, you could also participate with your gang of robbers.¡± Raymond looked at Jon and continued to speak slowly. Right now, who knew how many police stations wanted to invite Jon to participate in a drill. It was normal for Jon to have some requests. If they couldn¡¯t meet Jon¡¯s request, someone would naturally be able to do it. Why would Jon choose the police station that couldn¡¯t do what he asked, when that was one that could fulfill all his request in front of him? No matter how he thought about it, he wouldn¡¯t. Raymond could understand this point. ¡°Then, Mr. Raymond, can you give us a general idea of what¡¯s different about the drill that you guys initiated?¡± Jon thought for a few seconds and asked. When Raymond said that he could invite the entire team of robbers, Will Smith and the other three were clearly a little excited. After all, thest drill, even if they included the preparation time, was only a short eleven days. The few of them were obviously not satisfied. Hearing that there was still a chance, they were naturally excited. Raymond organized his words and said, ¡°Let¡¯s put it this way. The two drills that you participated in before were focused on the confrontation with the police officers.¡± ¡°Actually, in a bank robbery, the robbers have hostages. This is a headache for the police officers.¡± ¡°And for the robbers, the real difficulty is how to escape after robbing the bank and abandoning the hostages.¡± ¡°And this time, our focus is on escaping. The increase in difficulty that you asked for can also be increased in terms of escaping.¡± As Raymond spoke, his eyes were sizing up Jon. Since he was here, Raymond naturally did not want to make a wasted trip. Since he wanted to reach a cooperation, then Raymond had toe up with a n that would satisfy Jon. Jon¡¯s mind was thinking, focus on escaping? It could be done. The hardest thing was indeed not a confrontation with the police but escaping. After all, when the robbers had hostages, the police officers directly lost the initiative. ¡°What are the specific rules?¡± Jon asked. ¡°In fact, in real bank robberies, most experienced robbers would make a n to leave the scene before the police arrived.¡± ¡°And the situation of staying in the bank to confront the police mostly happened because the robbers had no choice.¡± ¡°In other words, not every police officer can arrive at the scene at the first moment.¡± ¡°And this time, we will simte such a situation.¡± ¡°I will give you a certain amount of time. During this time, I will not inform the police officers. At that time, you will take your team and try to snatch the money and leave before the police officers arrive.¡± ¡°If you can manage to escape from the city during the pursue, the robbers will win.¡± ¡°What do you think?¡± Raymond said slowly. This rule was more realistic to the actualbat. After all, real robbers rarely confronted the robbers in the bank. Most experienced robbers would make a n in advance and then stay at the bank. They would leave as soon as possible after robbing the money before the police arrived. Because they still had important things to do. That was tounder the stolen money and divide it up. They were not going to stay in the bank and confront the police. Confronting the police was something they had to do when they were out of choice. Chapter 115 - Accept the Mission! Jon鈥檚 Plan!

Chapter 115: ept the Mission! Jon¡¯s n!

Jon was deep in thought. With the police setting up roadblocks and conducting a search, escaping from the city was not an easy task. Compared to the previous two drills, it was even more difficult to win. Of course, the more difficult the drill was, the higher the reward would be if he won. At this moment, A ¡®ding¡¯ sounded in his mind. ¡°Mission obtained: Participate in the next drill and win. Afterpleting the mission, the system will give out rewards based on the host¡¯s performance score. The higher the score, the more generous the reward.¡± The system¡¯s cold voice sounded. At this moment, Jon¡¯s expression changed. Even though, he didn¡¯t really care about money at the moment, but the reward was more than just money bypleting the system¡¯s mission. All sorts of skills, attribute points, and points were rewards that couldn¡¯t be bought no matter how much money one had. No matter who it was, the politicians, the higher-ups of financial groups, and even the president of the United States couldn¡¯t buy it! However, the mission that the system released this time was different from before. In the previous two missions, when the system released the mission, it explicitly asked him to act as the robber. But this time, it didn¡¯t. This time, the system didn¡¯t assign him to participate in any kind of role. And the mission of the system was only to participate in a drill and win. In other words, he could y either side of the police or the robbers in this drill. Then, Jon nodded slowly. ¡°Okay, Commissioner Raymond, I¡¯ll take over the Florida drill. As for the teammates, I¡¯ll have to trouble you to borrow some people from the Pennsylvania department.¡± He had already decided to participate, and since it was a team drill. Then, Jon naturally hoped that his teammates would still be Will and the others. After all, they were already very familiar with each other, and Will Smith and the others recognized him. So, he did not need to spend time to get used to a few new people. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the smile on Raymond¡¯s face became even wider. ¡°Since you agreed so readily, then I¡¯ll borrow these four people for you no matter what.¡± As he spoke, Raymond looked at themissioner of Pennsylvania. ¡°Don¡¯t you agree,missioner?¡± After all, Jon¡¯s four teammates were Pennsylvania State police officers. Therefore, whether they could go to Florida to participate in the drill depended on the Pennsylvania Commissioner¡¯s opinion. ¡°Alright, since that¡¯s the case, I¡¯ll lend these four people to you for a drill. But after the drill, Chief Raymond, remember to return them to me.¡± Themissioner nodded in agreement. Lending a few people was naturally not a big deal. ¡°Oh right, Chief Raymond, there¡¯s another request.¡± At this moment, Jon thought of something and said with a smile. ¡°Go ahead.¡± Raymond nodded in response. As long as it was not an excessive request, he could agree to it. ¡°Let me introduce you. This is our New York City television station¡¯s reporter, Gal Gadot. For the previous drill, she will be the official live broadcast reporter.¡± ¡°Therefore, I hope that the news regarding this drill and the official live broadcast can be handed over to her. Mr. Raymond, this request of mine shouldn¡¯t be too much, right?¡± Jon said slowly. This time, due to the increase in difficulty of the drill and his growing fan base, he might be even more popr than before. And Gal Gadot was already her woman. Therefore, he would naturally fight for this opportunity for her. When Gal Gadot heard Jon¡¯s words, she looked excited. After all, Jon¡¯s live broadcast of the drill could bring massive number of guaranteed views. She knew it clearly. If she could be the host of the official live broadcast of the drill this time, then the impact it would have on her would be too great. It was entirely possible for her to be a first-ss host. Gal Gadot looked at Jon with a sweet gaze. He had brought too many things to himself. Raymond looked at the two youngsters and smiled. At this moment, he could naturally tell that Jon¡¯s rtionship with this reporter was not simple. It did not matter to Raymond who would broadcast the news of this drill live. Although he knew how much benefits there were, most of these benefits were brought by Jon alone. Moreover, all he wanted was for the drill to go smoothly. He didn¡¯t care about that. Moreover, Gal Gadot had already acted as a live broadcast reporter for Jon¡¯s drill. She had some experience. ¡°Of course, there¡¯s no problem with that. Then, it¡¯s settled. Just like before, I¡¯ll give you ten days to prepare. The drill will begin in ten days, how about that?¡± The Florida drill was settled just like that. Just like Pennsylvania, it was set to begin in ten days. Jon nned to use three days to return to New York to prepare. In three days, he would head to Florida and meet up with Will Smith and the other three. They would go to find Raymond, and he would give Jon the details of the drill and the robber¡¯s weapons. The only difference was that in the previous drill, he only needed to escape the bank, and give the police some time to search, and if the police couldn¡¯t catch the robber. That would be the robber¡¯s victory. And this time, the robber¡¯s mission was to escape the police with the loot. For the robber, the difficulty increased by more than a little bit. The dinner was very enjoyable and ended veryte. At noon the next day. Jon and Gal Gadot took a ne back to New York. There was plenty of time, so there was no need to rush back. However, Jon did not forget the incident three years ago. This drill had once again embarrassed the police. could he get what he wanted? Gal Gadot also had to return to New York as soon as possible to settle the matter of the live broadcast of the next drill. After all, Gal Gadot felt that the number of gifts for the uing drill might be evenrger. Naturally, she had to settle it quickly. At one o¡¯clock in the afternoon, the two of them arrived in New York. After leaving the airport, Gal Gadot brought Jon to the city television station¡¯s car. The television station had specially sent a car to pick up Gal Gadot. After all, she was no longer an ordinary reporter. Furthermore, this time, she brought Jon to the television station to sign the contract. The station manager naturally attached great importance to it. Upon arriving at the city television station. The station manager naturally had already prepared the contract. Jon looked at it. There were no problems with the contract, so he signed his name. After signing the contract. Jon said to the station manager, ¡°Let¡¯s continue with this contract for the next drill.¡± Chapter 116 - If You See What鈥檚 Inside, There鈥檚 No Turning Back!

Chapter 116: If You See What¡¯s Inside, There¡¯s No Turning Back!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°The next drill?¡± The station manager was shocked. Then, his face was full of smiles. If Jon still chose their television station for the next drill, it did not matter if they if the station didn¡¯t get a share of the profit. The station head was very happy. ¡°The next drill between me and Florida has already been decided yesterday. The drill will begin in ten days. This time, the official live broadcast host for this drill will still be Gal Gadot.¡± ¡°However, we chose Gal Gadot and not the television station. You have to understand this.¡± Jon exined slowly. Gal Gadot did not expect Jon to say this. She could not help but look at him, her face turned red. When the station manager heard this, he was first stunned. Then, he looked at Gal Gadot. At this moment, he understood. There was something going on with the two. ¡°I understand,¡± the station manager replied. After the matter of the gift sharing was settled, Jon would not stay at the television station. And Gal Gadot also left with Jon. Before they left, Gal Gadot also gave the station manager the press release for Jon¡¯s uing joint drill with the Florida State Police Department. The station manager was naturally extremely excited. After leaving the television station, they came to the FBI, he parked the car in the parking lot outside and got out. While Gal Gadot stayed in the car and waited for Jon. After all, this time, it was Jon who had something to do with the federal investigation. And Gal Gadot had nothing to do. Naturally, he did not have to go over. Along the way, some colleagues greeted Jon one after another. The current Jon was no longer the old Jon. The current Jon was rich and famous. It could be said that he was a winner in life. As for them? With the title of a federal agent, they looked shy, butpared to Jon, they were nothing. This situation made many colleagues jealous. They were FBI agents as well, but why there was such a big gap between them? Some of his colleagues who did not have a good rtionship with Jon did not say anything when they saw Jon return. Jon directly ignored them. He came to the director¡¯s office. ¡°Oh, the strongest robber in history. I don¡¯t have any money here.¡± Seeing him return, the director smiled and said. Jon also smiled. ¡°Money is something that you can¡¯t bring with you after death. What¡¯s the point of having more money? It¡¯s just a pile of paper.¡± The director¡¯s mouth twitched. He felt that Jon was showing off to him. After all, Jon had earned fame and fortune through these two drills. Not only he was famous all over America, but he also got a cut of over $10 million gifts on livestream. It was more money than a bank robbery. Jon indeed was a millionaire now. Naturally, money was less appealing to him now. ¡°If you continue to show off to me, I will let you leave my office immediately.¡± the director said. Jon grinned, then his smile gradually disappeared, and his expression became extremely serious. ¡°So, this time, can I get something I want?¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the smile on the director¡¯s face slowly disappeared, and he sighed helplessly. ¡°Your obsession is too strong, Jon.¡± Jon had been holding on to that matter. Indeed, his obsession was too strong. However, this was also what the director admired about Jon. Otherwise, he would not have help Jon in many things. Jon was a person who valued friendship very much. Otherwise, he would not have continued to investigate the matter from three years ago. That was too many parties involved in that matter, it even involved some personnel in the White House. If Jon were an ordinary person, after the mission failed and saved himself, he would have long forgotten about this matter. As for the dead people, who cared who they were, as long as he didn¡¯t die. After all, the implications were too great. However, Jon didn¡¯t think so. He had to get an exnation for his dead brothers. In Jon¡¯s words, if they didn¡¯t find the person who betrayed them, their brothers wouldn¡¯t feel at ease even if they died, and he wouldn¡¯t feel at ease even if he lived. The director knew that he could not stop Jon from investigating. He took out a file from the drawer and ced it on the table. ¡°During this drill, the Florida police have lost face in front of the entire United States. The big shot on top is very satisfied with your performance. Last night, he gave me this document.¡± He looked at the document on the table. Jon¡¯s pupils contracted slightly. He had investigated the truth for three years. Was it finally going to be revealed this time? ¡°However, don¡¯t have too much hope. To those big shots, your value has just been revealed. They can¡¯t let you know the truth now.¡± the director looked at Jon¡¯s expression and said. Jon regained hisposure. A hint of mockery appeared on his lips. That¡¯s right. His value had just been revealed, and the big shots above wanted to squeeze out all of his value. How could they let him know the final truth? He reached out to pick up the document on the table. The director pressed a hand on the document. ¡°Jon, once you read the contents, there¡¯s no turning back.¡± ¡°Thest time I let you see the document that was smeared, it wasn¡¯t a big deal. If you continue to investigate, your world might turn upside down.¡± Without hesitation, Jon pressed his hand on the document and looked at the director. ¡°I have a reason to investigate.¡± The director stared at Jon for a while, nodded, and removed his hand from the document bag. Jon picked up the file and opened it. He took out the contents. There was only one photo, or more urately, a portion of it. Not even a quarter of it. At the bottom of the photo, there was a pair of feet in ck boots. These were the men¡¯s boots, about size 43. At the time of the photo, the man was standing. Further up, he was wearing a pair of trousers on his calves. The edges were neat, as if someone had cut it off with scissors. Jon sneered. Sure enough, it wasn¡¯t that easy for him to find out the truth. Jon looked at the photo again. There were five steps of staircase in the background, and there were traces of water on the steps, but no raindrops could be seen from the photo. It must have rained not long ago. The traces of water on the steps reflected a faint golden light. ording to this, the source of the light should be a golden light. From the photo, only this information could be seen. ¡°Is that all, director?¡± Jon looked at the director and asked unwillingly. The director nodded and replied seriously, ¡°That¡¯s all, Jon.¡± Chapter 117 - Final Tenderness! Mission Begins!

Chapter 117: Final Tenderness! Mission Begins!

Naturally, the director would not tamper with the photo. If it was to stop Jon, he would only use words to stop him. There was no need to tamper with it. Furthermore, he knew that he could not stop Jon. ¡°I want to take this photo with me.¡± Jon said. For a moment, he could not see any other information. He needed to take it back and study it carefully. He needed to see if there was any hidden information. At the very least, he needed to find out where this picture was taken. ¡°Okay.¡± the director nodded. Since the higher up had given him this picture, it meant that it could be given to Jon. As for the higher up, there was definitely more than one picture. Then, he said, ¡°Yesterday afternoon, themissioner of the Florida State Police Department called me and said that he wanted to invite you to participate in the next drill. I didn¡¯t refuse.¡± ¡°After you guys settled down, Raymond specifically called me and said that you were still acting as a robber.¡± ¡°Since there¡¯s another opportunity to embarrass the police, and you want to continue investigating, then you should seize it. If you still perform well this time, perhaps they will give you the second part of the photos.¡± as the director spoke, he sighed. The situation was a littleplicated. The higher ups were ying a game. Some of the higher ups used the truth from three years ago to make Jon do something embarrassing to the police. In order to know the truth from three years ago, Jon had to follow the orders of the higher ups. Jon wanted to investigate the truth, and some people definitely did not want him to continue investigating. Between the higher ups, they might not be able to do anything to each other. But those people could do something to Jon. If Jon continued to investigate further, it was hard to say what would happen. So, this was also the reason why the director didn¡¯t want Jon to continue investigating. ¡°This feeling of being led by the nose, it¡¯s terrible.¡± Jon sighed. Although he didn¡¯t have the higher up¡¯s request, he would participate in the drill himself. But now that he was in the whirlpool of a conspiracy, it made him feel a little ufortable. ¡°I have to go back and prepare, director.¡± Jon said goodbye to the director. After leaving the FBI, he returned to the car. ¡°Where are we going now?¡± Gal Gadot asked gently. She didn¡¯t ask Jon what he was doing at the FBI. He could have directly gone to prepare for the next drill without going back to the FBI, but Jon still went back. This meant that he must have something important. If Jon wanted to talk about it, he would. If he did not, she would not ask. Jon was silent for a while and said, ¡°Let¡¯s go to Blue Bank first.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Gal Gadot nodded. Ten minutester. The car arrived at the parking spot at the entrance of Blue Bank. Jon got out of the car and walked into Blue Bank. ¡°Jon?¡± The bank manager, Sunny, happened to be in the lobby at this time. When he saw Jon Walk in from the entrance, he was immediately dumbfounded. He had no choice. He had left a deep impression on Jon. And it was the kind that could not be erased. After all, Jon¡¯s first robbery was at the bank where he was at. At that time, he was held hostage by Jon and had a real gun pointed at his head. He was so frightened by Jon¡¯s imposing manner that his heart was beating wildly. The second time he robbed a bank, he met Jon again. This time, it was even more outrageous, Jon made him carry a bomb on his back. If he were not careful, he would end up in pieces. These were all the horrifying traumas in Sunny¡¯s heart. The pain that needed time to slowly fade away. However, before the pain faded away, he met Jon again. At this moment, Sunny was deep in thought. Should he continue to work in another bank? Otherwise, was it a good idea to always meet Jon? ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. I¡¯m not here to rob.¡± Jon said with a faint smile. After all, it was not the time for the robbery in the drill, and there was no deep hatred between him and Sunny. Therefore, there was no need to act like a robber. Hearing his words, Sunny finally let out a sigh of relief. ¡°Then why are you here?¡± Jon did not waste time. He immediately took out a bank card and said to sunny, ¡°Help me withdraw 300,000 dors.¡± ¡°Okay, okay.¡± Sunny took it with both hands. ¡°Mr. Jon, you sit here and wait for a while. I¡¯ll go and get it now.¡± Sunny was very efficient. He quickly took out the money and knocked it into a ck backpack. He handed the backpack and the bank card to Jon. ¡°Take care.¡± Sunny said with a bow. Jon left Blue Bank and returned to the car. He said to Gal Gadot, ¡°Go to the Bronx, Saint Glory District.¡± Twenty minutester. Jon arrived at Saint Glory District. ¡°Do I have to go in with you?¡± Gal Gadot parked the car outside and turned his head to ask. Jon nodded. ¡°Yes.¡± Jon carried the backpack with the money on his back and brought Gal Gadot into the neighborhood. First, he bought some fruits downstairs, then he entered one of the buildings. He went up to the sixth floor. He knocked on the door of 605. The door opened very quickly. It was a middle-aged woman in her fifties, but her hair waspletely grey. ¡°Jon?¡± When the middle-aged woman saw Jon, a smile appeared on her face. She quickly called the two of them in. In the living room, a middle-aged man was watching television. When he saw Jon, he smiled and said, ¡°It¡¯s been a long time since you¡¯ve been here.¡± Jon looked at the middle-aged couple. Guilt could not help but appear on his face. This couple were the parents of his brother, Adrian. Adrian did not return three years ago when he was on that mission. Whenever he faced this couple, Jon felt very sad. Because he was the one who took their son away, but when he sent their son back, he became an ice-cold corpse. Even though this couple never med him. ¡°Uncle, I¡¯ve been a little busy recently, so I didn¡¯te over.¡± He looked at the middle-aged man and replied. Jon put his backpack and fruit aside and sat on the sofa with Gal Gadot after the middle-aged woman invited them to go in. The middle-aged man, Leo, smiled and said, ¡°It¡¯s true that I didn¡¯t have time. After all, you¡¯ve participated in two drills during this period of time. We¡¯ve watched your drills, and your performance was pretty good.¡± ¡°My daughter saw that you¡¯ve be a star. She told us to wait for you toe over next time and ask you for ten autographs.¡± ¡°She didn¡¯t say why she needed so many autographs, I know that she wants to show off in front of her ssmates.¡± Leoughed out loud. Jon alsoughed and said, ¡°Then I¡¯ll give her twenty so that she can show off a little more.¡± Leo shook his head and said, ¡°She¡¯s too young to have such a show-off mentality.¡± Then he looked at Gal Gadot. ¡°This is?¡± ¡°My girlfriend, Gal Gadot, ¡°Jon said. Both of them had already had sex, so it was okay to say that they were girlfriends. ¡°Hello, uncle.¡± Gal Gadot greeted with a sweet smile. Chapter 118 - Arriving in Florida!

Chapter 118: Arriving in Florida!

Leo smiled and nodded in response. Then he asked Jon, ¡°Is there going to be another drill?¡± Although Jon and themissioner of the Florida State Police Department had already reached a cooperative rtionship. Gal Gadot also gave the news to the station manager. The station manager had no choice but to release the news as soon as he received it. After all, it was daytime now, and most people were hiding at work during the day. Very few people had the spare time to go online and watch the news. So, the station manager had to wait until the evening, when all the people at work were off duty, before releasing the explosive news. With the previous two drills, this time, Jon¡¯s third drill, as long as the information was released at a prime time, it would definitely cause an explosive discussion. Therefore, Leo¡¯s family did not know about this. ¡°The third drill will be held in Florida ten dayster. Last night, themissioner of Florida personally came over.¡± Jon nodded in response. At this time, the door opened and a sixteen or seventeen-year-old girl walked in. When she saw Jon, her eyes lit up and she hurriedly walked over. ¡°Hey, brat.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be rude!¡± Before Jon could reply, Leo had already scolded the girl. The girl did not care about Leo¡¯s scolding and made a face at Leo. ¡°It¡¯s okay.¡± Jon did not really care about this. Although he was much older than the girl, he did not care about what the girl called him. The girl was the daughter of the couple, the sister of hisrade who had died in battle. Her name was Elina. She was in high school. Elina looked at Gal Gadot and asked, ¡°Jon, is this your girlfriend?¡± ¡°Yes, you can call her Gal Gadot, ¡°Jon smiled. Alina smiled and greeted Gal Gadot, ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± She was not an impolite person. The reason why she called Jon brat was because she was very close with Jon. But she was not familiar with Gal Gadot. She still had to be polite. Gal Gadot responded with a smile. Elina sat on the sofa at that moment and put the backpack she was carrying in her arms. She unzipped it and took out a stack of small cards from the backpack. Then she said, ¡°Hey, Jon, I want ten of your autographs.¡± ¡°Are ten enough?¡± Jon naturally wouldn¡¯t reject Elina¡¯s request. Elina thought for a moment. ¡°There are only a few people in my ss who actually hanged out with me. I won¡¯t give the autographs to those who aren¡¯t close with me, and I won¡¯t give them to the boys. Ten autographs, that¡¯s about it.¡± After saying that, she said, ¡°I seem to have revealed the purpose of asking for autographs?¡± Everyoneughed. Jon wrote a few autographs for her and then stayed at Leo¡¯s house for more than an hour. Before he left, he ced his backpack in front of Leo and said, ¡°Uncle, this is the government¡¯s pension. I¡¯ll leave 500,000 dors here.¡± He withdrew 500,000 dors from the bank. Naturally, it was to give it to Leo¡¯s family. After all, their son¡¯s ident had something to do with him, and they were on such good terms. It was only right to help a little. Before, Jon did not have much money, so he could not help them. Now that he had money, he wanted to help the family. Leo looked at Jon. ¡°When you lie to us, you look a little ufortable. I can see that this money is not a pension from the government.¡± ¡°It¡¯s yours, right? We can¡¯t take it.¡± Jon said, ¡°Uncle, you know, it¡¯s because of me, Adrian¡­¡± Leo interrupted him. ¡°When I sent Adrian to join the army, I thought that there would be a day. This is because someone betrayed him, not because of you. We don¡¯t me you.¡± Leo and his family were reasonable people. They knew that the mission three years ago was a high-ranking person who betrayed Jon and hisrades. That was why their son died in the war. And Jon¡¯s life was also saved. How could Leo me him. And the money was Jon¡¯s. Although Jon was now famous and had the ability to make a lot of money, it was still Jon¡¯s money, so how could they ept it. Jon was silent for a long time. He looked up at Leo and said, ¡°If you don¡¯t ept this money, I¡¯m afraid I won¡¯t be able toe here in the future.¡± Leo looked at him and sighed for a long time. In the end, Leo¡¯s family epted the money, and Jon left with Gal Gadot. ¡°This is myrade¡¯s home. At that time, the few of us were carrying out a mission together. The higher-ups informed us of the mission¡¯s objectives, causing us to fall into a desperate situation. The rest of us all died in battle.¡± In the car, Jon spoke slowly. Gal Gadot listened quietly. She knew that Jon was willing to share this matter with her. This meant that she was very important to Jon. ¡°It¡¯s all in the past, Jon,¡± sheforted him. Jon did not say anything. He looked out the window at the traffic. What was past was only time. As for the people who betrayed them, he did not dare to forget them. For the next three days, Jon and Gal Gadot spent their time in New York. Three dayster. Jon packed his luggage alone and took a ne to Florida. The next seven days were the preparation time. Jon needed these seven days to figure out everything in the city and find a perfect escape route. The ne flew for three hours. Jon arrived in Florida. As soon as he got off the ne, he turned on his phone and saw more than a dozen missed calls. These calls were all from Will Smith alone. This meant that the four of them should have arrived early. After getting off the ne, Jon lowered the cap on his head, put on his sunsses, and walked out with his backpack. As he became more and more famous, Jon was more likely to be found walking on the street. If he were recognized by somebody, he would be asked to take a photo with them. If he was found, it might affect the traffic in the airport. If that happened, others would be in trouble, and he would be in trouble too. And Jon was the person who hated trouble the most. Therefore, he had to disguise himself. He had to try his best not to be recognized by anyone. After disguising himself, Jon took out his cell phone and dialed Will¡¯s number. ¡°Hey, boss.¡± Will Smith¡¯s voice soon rang, ¡°Have you gotten off the ne? The four of us are outside the airport now. Where are you now?¡± He spoke rather quickly and seemed to be in a hurry. Will Smith was indeed an impatient person. Otherwise, he would not have be an explosives expert. ¡°I¡¯m heading out now. I¡¯ll be out soon.¡± Jon replied and hung up the phone. Chapter 119 - Inconvenient to Move Around!

Chapter 119: Inconvenient to Move Around!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio As soon as he left the airport, he saw Will Smith waiting for him outside the road. At this time, Will Smith was also wearing sunsses and had his hair slicked back. He had a ruffian look on his face, which made the passing crowd avoid him. After all, with the way Will Smith was dressed, he didn¡¯t look like a good person at first nce. It was better to stay away from him. Otherwise, they thought they might get into trouble. ¡°Boss, why are you sote? We¡¯ve been waiting for you for almost three hours.¡± Will Smith saw Jon and kept nagging, making Jon want to take something to gag him. ¡°Something happened on the road, causing the ne to be stuck on the flight path. Otherwise, I could have arrived a few hours earlier.¡± Jon said with a smile. Will Smith¡¯s face was filled with disbelief when he heard this. He said, ¡°Boss, do you think I¡¯m stupid? The ne is stuck on the flight path. I can¡¯t believe you made such excuse. I would believe you even if you said you were stuck in traffic on the way to the airport.¡± ¡°You have suchmon sense?¡± Jon was a little incredulous. Will Smith, ¡°...¡± ¡°Where are the three of them?¡± Jon looked around and asked. There was only Will Smith here. He did not see the other three. Logically speaking, they were all from Pennsylvania, they should have taken the same flight. ¡°They are in the parking lot. Let¡¯s go. I¡¯ll take you there.¡± Will Smith replied. Soon, the two of them arrived at the parking lot of the airport. Will Smith opened the door of a car, and the other three people were already sitting inside. This was a ck business car that could amodate seven people. Now, Brown Williams was sitting in the driver¡¯s seat. And Venus Alice and Leon Evans were sitting in thest row. ¡°Boss.¡± The three of them greeted Jon one after another. They were also influenced by Will Smith. ¡°Hey,dy and gentlemen.¡± Jon responded with a smile and sat in the passenger seat. ¡°Boss, where are we going now? Or should we hide the car first and use it when we escape?¡± Brown Williams, who was in the driver seat, asked. He knew very well that he was ying the role of a driver this time. ¡°Where did this care from?¡± Jon didn¡¯t answer but asked a question in return. Looking at the license te, it wasn¡¯t Pennsylvania¡¯s number, but Florida¡¯s. Then obviously, it shouldn¡¯t have been prepared by these four people. Brown Williams replied, ¡°This was sent bymissioner Raymond. When we got off the ne, there were people from the police department waiting here. After they picked us up, they gave us this car.¡± Jon nodded. It was what he expected. Raymond had said before that this time, the focus would be on escaping. Since it was escaping, it was reasonable to arrange a car for the robbers. ¡°Then now, let¡¯s go to the Florida Police Department. The focus of this drill is on escaping, not hiding. Therefore, the existence of this car will be discovered sooner orter. Even if it is hidden, there isn¡¯t much meaning.¡± Jon responded. The reason why they had to hide informationst time was that the police officers could not find too much useful information within seven days. It was because the focus of thest drill was to hide. This time was different. The ultimate goal of this exercise was to escape the city. Therefore, the robbers did not need to hide their tracks. In these seven days, they could totally swagger around Florida. ¡°Understood.¡± Brown Williams nodded in response and then drove to the Florida police department. Florida State Police Department. The area of Florida was more than twice the size of Pennsylvania. The overall economy was also much higher than Pennsylvania. The size of the police department was naturally much more luxurious than the Pennsylvania Police Department. And the manpower of the Florida police force was more abundantparable to the Pennsylvania police force. However... A drill would not use all the manpower of the police force. But the police force had more manpower, which also meant that the Florida police force could mobilize more manpower than the Pennsylvania police force. Even if it was just the same drill, it would be more difficult for Jon. Moreover, this was not the same drill as before. This time, the focus was on escaping. Under the situation where Florida could mobilizerge-scale manpower. Under the situation where the police surrounded and intercepted. They sessfully took out the downtown area. Therefore, this time,pared to the previous two drills, the difficulty was not just a little bit. ¡°Boss, the size of the Florida State Police Force in this drill is muchrger than our Pennsylvania state. I¡¯m afraid the difficulty of this drill is not small.¡± Venus Alice was also sizing up the police station in front of her at this moment, and she walked to Jon¡¯s side. A faint body fragrance filled Jon¡¯s nostrils. ¡°It¡¯s more difficult, and it¡¯s more challenging for us. We still have seven days to prepare, so it shouldn¡¯t be a problem.¡± Jon turned his head and nced at Venus. Venus was wearing a long dress and a pair of five- to six-centimeter-high heels. And she had exquisite makeup on her face. It was quite different from her previous appearance. ¡°Your style of dressing today is a little different from before.¡± Jon smiled. Perhaps it was because Venus was a professional, but her style of dressing was cool and handsome. Jon had never seen such a style before. Venus looked at Jon and smiled. ¡°Isn¡¯t this the drill that hasn¡¯t started yet? I usually dress like this.¡± Hearing her say this, Will Smith, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans, who were behind her, all held back theirughter. They were all colleagues from the same police department. Although their departments were different, they were all elites from their respective departments. They knew each other very well. They had never seen Venus wear something like this before. ¡°Is that so? It¡¯s fine when you wear it now. Just remember to change it during the drill. After all, it¡¯s not very convenient.¡± Jon replied with a smile and walked towards the police station. Venus Alice gritted her teeth when she heard Jon¡¯s words. She was wearing this to attract Jon¡¯s attention. After all, this was what Gal Gadot had been wearing thest time they had dinner. Otherwise, Venus would not have been willing to wear such ufortable clothes. However, she did not expect that she would only get one sentence from Jon, ¡°change it during the drill.¡± She looked at Jon¡¯s back and gritted her teeth. Man, just you wait. Then she followed him. A few minutester. In themissioner¡¯s office. ¡°You guys are finally here. I¡¯ve been waiting for you guys for an hour.¡± Chapter 120 - Get Down to Business! Choose Your Weapon!

Chapter 120: Get Down to Business! Choose Your Weapon!

In the office. Raymond had been waiting here for a long time. ¡°Take a seat.¡± Raymond gestured for them to sit down. They didn¡¯t stand on ceremony and sat down on the sofa. ¡°Because I don¡¯t drink coffee, I don¡¯t have coffee here either. have some tea.¡± Raymond said. ¡°Anything is fine,¡± Jon replied politely. Then Raymond quickly stood up, took out his precious tea leaves from the cupboard, and made tea for the few of them. After all, these people were invited by him after spending so much effort. Naturally, he had to treat them well. Raymond poured a cup of tea for each of them, then pulled over a chair and sat down across from the coffee table. ¡°Since everyone has traveled for a long time, I won¡¯t say anything unnecessary. Let¡¯s get straight to the point and talk about this drill.¡± Raymond took a sip of tea and said with a smile. He looked quite amiable. ¡°Good. You¡¯re quite busy. We won¡¯t waste your time. Just get straight to the point.¡± Jon nodded. He was a person who didn¡¯t like trouble, so he naturally didn¡¯t like small talk. Because he felt that small talk was meaningless, he might as well get straight to the point. Raymond¡¯s straightforward personality was also more to Jon¡¯s liking. ¡°Alright, if this is a drill, I¡¯ll choose this bank.¡± Raymond said as he took out a few photos from a file. Jon took it and looked at it. These were photos of different locations of the same bank. The address of the bank was written on the back of the photos. From the look of the photos, this bank wasn¡¯t that big. It should be a local bank branch. Such a bank wouldn¡¯t be in a bustling ce like the city center. For Jon, this was advantageous to him. ¡°This is a branch of our bank in Florida. Because the location is not very good and there are not many customers, the reason why we chose this bank is mainly to allow you to sessfully escape after the robbery.¡± ¡°After all, your focus this time is to escape.¡± ¡°Of course, under real circumstances, many robbers would choose such a bank to rob.¡± ¡°After all, although there isn¡¯t much money in such a bank, it is rtively safe to rob. When the robbers were in action, they would close the door and it would be difficult for the police to find them in time.¡± Raymond exined slowly. During these three days, Raymondpared several banks and finally decided on this one. The reason why he decided on this bank was also based on practical considerations. Because there were very few bank robberies where the robbers would choose a bank in the city center to rob. Although bank located in the city center might have more money in it, it wasn¡¯t easy for them to escape. The city center was extremely bustling, and the traffic was annoyingly high. If they were not careful, they would be blocked. It would be difficult for the robbers to escape. ¡°Since Mr. Raymond has already decided, then I have no objections.¡± Jon nodded and spoke. Jon did not have much of an opinion about the choice of the bank. In his eyes, any bank would be fine. Because they would leave the bank immediately after they got the money. ¡°In this bank, I have prepared ten million US dors. This is your goal. Snatch this ten million US dors and escape from the city. This is your mission for this drill.¡± ¡°There is no time limit for this drill. In the end, you will either escape from the city and the robbers will win, or you will be captured by the police in the city and the police will win.¡± ¡°Of course, you can also surrender. Both sides can surrender.¡± ¡°Thest thing is that you cannot know the actions of any police officers through the live broadcast.¡± ¡°Is that okay?¡± Raymond spoke about the rules. There were rtively few rules. Compared to the previous two drills, the biggest difference this time was that there was no time limit. In other words, as long as the robbers couldn¡¯t escape, the police officers would continue to pursue them. As for surrendering, this was something that Jon had never thought of. Not to mention, the system wanted him to win. Only when he won and embarrassed the police, the higher ups would be willing to give him what he wanted. Since Jon had decided to participate in the drill, it was impossible for him to choose to surrender. ¡°No problem.¡± Jon nodded and answered. ¡°Very good. Since there¡¯s no problem, then let¡¯s go take a look at your weapons this time. In terms of weapons configuration, it definitely won¡¯t be worse than thest time.¡± As he spoke, Raymond got up, led Jon and the others out of the office, and walked towards the depths of the police station. After walking through a long corridor, they took the elevator to the second floor and passed through a few doors. They arrived at an empty room. There weren¡¯t many facilities inside, but there were quite a few targets. It was obviously an indoor shooting range. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect there to be such arge indoor shooting range in the Florida police station. It¡¯s magnificent.¡± Will Smith looked at the shooting range and couldn¡¯t help but praise. Not every police department could equip such arge shooting range. Hearing Will Smith¡¯s words, a smile appeared on Raymond¡¯s face. The configuration of his police department was indeed higher than that of the Pennsylvania Police Department. ¡°Your weapons are all there. Go and choose.¡± Raymond pointed to a corner of the shooting range and said with a smile. Everyone looked at the ce Raymond pointed to. There were a few tables with all kinds of weapons on them. Pistols, rifles, automatic rifles, submachine guns, sniper rifles, grenade bombs, and other weapons were all there. A few people came to the table and looked at the weapons on the table. Venus Alice did not hesitate at all and directly picked up an LR5 high-precision sniper rifle on the table. As a sharpshooter, she naturally had her eyes on this sniper rifle early on. LR5 high-precision sniper rifle. It was more than one level higher than CF/LR4. This rifle could be said to be the dream of every sniper in the world. Just this one gun was worth 400,000 dors, and the bullets were 100 dors per round. During thest drill, themissioner of Pennsylvania also took out the same type of sniper rifle. Venus did not put it down until she left the bank. ¡°You have good taste. Are you a sniper?¡± Raymond saw Venus Alice pick up the LR5 sniper rifle and asked with a smile. Although he had already borrowed them over, the information of these four people had not been sent over from the Pennsylvania Police Department, so he did not know much about them. ¡°Yes, I am a sniper.¡± Venus Alice nodded and replied. Chapter 121 - Shooting Practice!

Chapter 121: Shooting Practice!

¡°Not bad.¡± There was a hint of admiration in Raymond¡¯s tone. It was not easy to be a sniper. Not only did it require talent, but it also required a lot of hard training. Under this kind of training, many men might not be able to endure it. But this girl in front of him was actually able to be a sniper in the police station. This was naturally worthy of admiration. There were many guns on the table. Jon looked and only took a 96 automatic rifle and a 93-automatic rifle. Will Smith chose a 90 pistol. And Brown Williams chose the same as Jon. Finally, Leon Evans chose a KP/VS submachine gun and a 90 pistol. When they finished choosing the guns, each of them took six more grenades and prepared a lot of bombs for Will Smith. As for the nk cartridge for the drill, they took 60 for submachine guns, 300 for automatic rifles, 300 for handguns and 30 for sniper rifles. The number of bullets was not much. Raymond had intended to give more to Jon. However, Jon did not want it. The guns and ammunition they chose now weighed quite a lot. When they were escaping, they would have to bring 10 million dors, which was the mission to rob a bank. One million dors in 100 bills was 22 pounds, and 10 million was roughly 220 pounds. There were five of them. If they needed to walk, just the US dors would mean that each of them would have to carry 46 pounds in their stomachs. With the addition of guns and ammunition, each of them would have to carry a weight of more than 80 pounds. Even if they needed more ammunition, they would only be a burden. Moreover, the focus of this drill was to escape. It was not arge-scale battle with the police, so there was no need to take too much ammunition. ¡°Alright, now that you¡¯ve received your weapons, do you need to practice in the shooting range first?¡± Raymond looked at the few of them and asked with a smile. ¡°Such a big shooting range. Since we¡¯re already here, wouldn¡¯t it be a pity not to try?¡± Will Smith said with a smile. ¡°I¡¯ve already prepared it for you. Let me say this first. Each of you will have ten bullets. Once you¡¯re done, there won¡¯t be any left.¡± Raymond said with a smile. Then, he kicked over a box and ced it on the table. After opening it, there were five magazines inside. The magazines were not nks, they were all real bullets. When everyone saw that Raymond was ready, they did not stand on ceremony. As Raymond had prepared bullets for the 90 pistol, they all changed to pistols. ¡°Boss, I admit that I¡¯m not as smart as you, but this marksmanship, Hehe, you might have to learn it from me.¡± Will Smith¡¯s expression was a little smug. After all, as an explosive expert, he must be very familiar with guns as well. Jon smiled and did not say anything. He would just show off his skill. ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang¡­¡± After loading the bullets, Will Smith did not waste any more words. He picked up the gun and fired ten shots at the target. He got 85 points. ¡°Boss, what¡¯s the result? Shall wepete?¡± After Will Smith finished firing the bullets, he looked at the numbers on the screen. He was quite satisfied with the result. ¡°Not bad.¡± Jon looked at it and spoke. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, Will Smith blew at the smoke on the muzzle of his gun and said proudly, ¡°That¡¯s right. In our police station, although my shooting skill isn¡¯t that ridiculous, it¡¯s still¡­¡± Jon didn¡¯t listen to Will¡¯s bragging. He raised his gun and aimed at a target twenty meters away. Bang Bang Bang.. Ten bullets were fired in one go. The disy screen beside him quickly disyed his results. ¡°One¡­ one hundred points? ? ?¡± Will Smith came over to take a look and was instantly stunned. ¡°So you can hit the bullseye with every bullets? Boss, your shooting skill is ridiculous?¡± At this moment, Will Smith was doubting his life. He was an elite police officer, but his marksmanship was still inferior to Jon¡¯s. This was a blow to him. Of course, the one who was shocked was not will smith. Even Raymond, Venus Alice, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans, these four people were all shocked. ¡°After all I used to serve in the Navy SEALs Team.¡± Jon said with a faint smile. Then, the remaining three people also used up all their bullets. The best result was Venus Alice. As a sniper, she scored 96 points, another 4 points to a full score. The aim of a pistol was different from a sniper rifle. It was already very good for Venus to be able to achieve such a result. As for Brown, Williams, and Leon, Evans¡­ Their results were not very good. Their results were 79 and 63 respectively. After each of them had shot out all ten of their bullets. The few of them also began to pack their things and nned to leave the police station. Raymond prepared a ck backpack for each of them. After loading the guns and ammunition, he left with a few people. ¡°Alright, from now on, it will be your preparation time. After 1 pm on the seventh day, you can start.¡± ¡°The difficulty of this drill will definitely be much higher than before. Good luck to your team.¡± Raymond looked at the few people and said with a smile. ¡°We never rely on luck to win. Even if our luck is not on our side, we will still rely on our strength to win.¡± When Jon heard this, a smile appeared on his face, and within that smile was an iparable confidence. Every time he performed a drill, he would have a detailed n. The reason why he was able to win was because of a detailed n, not luck. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the smile on Raymond¡¯s face became even wider. He patted his shoulder and did not say anything. Jon and the others did not stay any longer. Carrying their guns and ammunition, they went out from the back door to the parking lot and watched the car leave the police station. ¡°Boss, what do we do next? Did you book a hotel this time? Where are we going to stay?¡± while Brown was driving, Will Smith asked. During thest drill, Jon had already used other people¡¯s identities to book a hotel beforeing to Pennsylvania. And he had nned everything. This time, in Will Smith¡¯s eyes, he naturally listened to Jon¡¯s arrangements. ¡°Go to the biggest hotel in the city. I¡¯ll take you to the presidential suite these days.¡± Jon answered. When he said this, everyone was stunned. ¡°Wow, Boss, you¡¯re not joking, right?¡± Will Smith asked. Venus also looked at Jon and said with some uncertainty, ¡°Won¡¯t staying in a hotel expose our whereabouts for the next few days?¡± After all, thest time they stayed in a hotel, they had to avoid the cameras even when they went out. This time, the presidential suite? Chapter 122 - Before the Third Drill!

Chapter 122: Before the Third Drill!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°We don¡¯t need to hide this time, because our goal is to escape from the city after the robbery. So, the more frequent and brazen the activities these days, the easier it will be for us to escape.¡± ¡°So, in these few days, we¡¯ll act boldly.¡± Jon said with a smile. Escape and hiding were two different concepts, so this time, there was no need to do the same asst time. ¡°Since boss has said so, then I won¡¯t stand on ceremony.¡± Will Smith said with a smile. Then, Brown turned on the navigation and followed the navigation to the hotel. Las Vegas hotel. A global chain five-star hotel. The car drove here, and a few people got out of the car with ck backpacks. They went to the front desk. Jon booked five suites directly. Each room was 8,888 dors. They stayed for six nights and spent more than 200,000 dors. This money, of course, was nothing to Jon. After all, there was the ie from the live broadcast of the previous drill, plus the system¡¯s reward. Seeing Jon get a room and hearing the terrifying price, the four of them widened their eyes. The cost of staying in a hotel for a few days was close to $300,000. This was almost their annual sry. They had once suspected that Jon had really robbed a bank. The room was on a very high floor. In the room, one could overlook the entire city. So, Jon had his own reasons for booking such a room. He could see the downtown area. This was somewhat helpful when Jon was making ns. After entering the room, he began to use the hotel¡¯sputer to look up a map of downtown Florida. Although he couldn¡¯t go to the bank that Raymond had appointed, Jon still had to look up the surrounding environment and buildings on the map. At eight o¡¯clock in the evening. Venus came over and asked Jon toe downstairs for dinner. He stood up from theputer, stretched his muscles, and walked out of the room. After dinner, they yed for a while. Before they went back to their rooms to rest, Jon told everyone to get up at seven tomorrow and meet at the hotel reception at 7:30 am. After all, they were not familiar with the Florida city. From tomorrow on, they would start to spin around the city and understand everything about the city. The difficulty of the drill had increased, so the robbers had to be familiar with the city. They had to make a careful n. Otherwise, it would be difficult to win the drill. The next day. At 7:30 in the morning, when Jon arrived at the hotel lobby, Will Smith and the other three were already waiting there. After all, the four of them were the elites of the police force and had received special training. Since Jon had asked them to meet at the front desk at 7:30, they would not bete. Today, Venus Alice had resumed her previous outfit. She wore sports shoes with jeans and shorts, and her pair of white long legs were particrly eye-catching. She was wearing a white short-sleeved shirt with her blonde hair tied up and light makeup on her face. When Jon saw this, he could not help but take a second look. Venus had been paying attention to Jon, so she naturally noticed Jon¡¯s gaze. She could not help but feel a sense of pride. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Jon gave the order, and the five of them left the hotel, got into their cars, and drove away. Their goal today was to drive around the city. They would now drive around the entire city a few times. Of course, they weren¡¯t just driving around. Every ce they passed, Jon would mark on the map he bought where there were cameras and which road had the highest traffic. They also predicted which ces the police would set up obstacles that wouldn¡¯t affect the traffic too much to find the perfect escape route. Of course, they had to walk the left and right routes a few times. The next day, Jon still let brown drive around the city, but this time it was offline as he had organized it. The third day, Jon took four people to buy some things that might be useful. He also bought a used car and parked it in an abandoned factory on the escape route that Jon had nned. The fourth day, Jon and the others went to the practice bank to observe. On the fifth day, Jonid out a n. On the sixth day, Jon outlined the n to the four of them. Also, he thought about the problems that he might encounter in each step, wrote them down one by one, and made corresponding countermeasures, constantly perfecting the n. On the seventh day, Jon didn¡¯t get up until nine o¡¯clock today. Once the drill started, he didn¡¯t know when he would get a good night¡¯s sleep again. Whatever. He needed a good rest. Noon. Jon brought a few people to check out at the front desk. They left the hotel. Each of them was carrying a ck backpack. They went to the parking lot. They put all their guns and ammunition in the car and drove to the bank of the joint drill. At Jon¡¯s request. The four of them put on their caps and sunsses. After all, they had gained some recognition from thest drill. Although they couldn¡¯tpete with Jon, they were still easy to be recognized. So, they needed to dress up. They drove across the street from the bank. Jon told Brown to park the car here. He didn¡¯t do it directly. Jon looked up at the weather. It wasn¡¯t a good day. There were dark clouds and no sunlight at all. Jon had been looking at the weather forecast for this period of time before he made his n. Starting today, there would be four to five days of torrential rain in Florida. This rain was extremely beneficial to Jon. To make a perfect n, one had to take into ount the right time, ce, and people. Therefore, this heavy rain was naturally part of Jon¡¯s n. And now, he was waiting for the heavy rain to fall. Of course, as a qualified robber, there must be more than one n. If the rain didn¡¯t fall, Jon also had a n B. But, rtively speaking, n B wasn¡¯t as perfect as the main n. Jon looked at his watch. It was two o¡¯clock in the afternoon. Raymond had said that they could start after one o¡¯clock. However, all the police officers did not know about this time except Raymond. Therefore, if Jon did not start now, he did not have to worry about the policeing. The police officers naturally knew that the drill would start today. However, ording to the rules of the drill, Raymond would not tell the police officers about the bank that involved in the drill and the time when the robbers would start. Therefore, the officers would only be called out. Jon had plenty of time to wait. And he looked extremely calm. In contrast, the other four were a little nervous. Although, this was not their first time acting as robbers. However, thest time they were acting as robbers on their own territory, they were not nervous. But this time the situation was a little different. Florida, they were unfamiliar with this ce. They weren¡¯t sure if they could win in the end. At this moment. ¡°Boom!¡± Chapter 123 - Exercise begins, live broadcast begins! Thunder rumbled in the sky.

Chapter 123: Exercise begins, live broadcast begins!

Thunder rumbled in the sky. Not long after, heavy rain poured down. The world outside the car was in an uproar from the rain. Some people on the road had brought umbres and quickly opened them. However, under such heavy rain, an umbre definitely could not protect thempletely. In just a few seconds, their legs were wet from the rain. The pedestrians without umbres quickly found shelter from the rain. ¡°Take out the raincoats in the trunk, we¡¯ll change into them.¡± Jon turned his head to look behind and said slowly. Because the storm had been included in the n, when Jon bought items, he prepared the raincoats as well. Leon, who was sitting at the back, quickly took out the raincoats. He divided the five raincoats into five people¡¯s hands. Then they changed in the car. A few minutester, the five people put on their raincoats and masks. ¡°Venus, Will, Leon, the three of you go in with me. Brown is monitoring the situation outside.¡± ¡°For this drill, we try to avoid confrontation with the police. After we get the money, we run immediately. Also, after we enter the bank this time, we must control the hostages immediately to prevent anyone from calling the police.¡± Jon gave the order. ¡°Understood!¡± The few of them replied. ¡°Let¡¯s Go!¡± Jon said. He had originally wanted to wait for the rain. Now that the rain hade, he naturally had to start taking action. The five of them got out of the car. The five of them walked in the rain, carrying a few ck backpacks as they walked in the direction of the bank. This was because the location of the bank was already a little remote. Furthermore, it was currently raining heavily. The streets were deserted. There were no new customers in the bank, so the security guards were sleepy. ¡­ In the Florida police station. The police officer was speechless when he saw the heavy rain outside. He didn¡¯t expect that that was a rain during the drill. He had seen the weather forecast just now and knew that this rain wouldst for four to five days. This was an escape drill. Such a heavy rain would make it more difficult for the police to catch them. Right now, his heart was cursing Raymond for choosing this day with such weather. However, even though he was ridiculing, he did not dare to tell Raymond. However, if it was a real battle, the robbers would very likely choose this weather to rob. Therefore, this drill naturally could not be dyed because of this rain. And now, all the police officers were ready. Although they did not know which bank was going to be robbed, the police officers were geared up. As long as themander gave the order, they would set up roadblocks in the entire city. Although, the drill had not officially started. Themander had already made such preparations, and his methods were somewhat roguish. After all, when a robbery actually happened. No one would ask the police to arrange this in advance. However, this was something that couldn¡¯t be helped. Jon, who yed the robber, was really too smart. The person in charge had naturally seen his two previous drills. Jon was smart and cautious. If he hadn¡¯t been prepared, Jon would have been long gone by the time he got to the scene. After receiving the message from the bank. And he wouldn¡¯t have had time to block the intersection. Jon would have been able to escape the city very quickly. By then, the drill would have ended in an hour or two. And it would have ended with a victory of the robbers. That would have been embarrassing, the Florida State Police would lose its reputation. After all, thest time the drill was broadcast live, so many people watched it. Since the news broadcast on New York City Television, people had been anticipated for 10 days. So many people followed the live broadcast. If the drill were ended with robbers¡¯ victory in just two hours, the Florida State Police Department would be a national joke. Hence, the chief had to resort to rogue tactics. He had prepared in advance. Moreover, this matter was done with the approval of themissioner. This drill attracted a lot of media. It was even more than thest time. The live broadcast benefits from thest drill had almost been eaten up by the Gal Gadot, the remaining media outlets had only received a little bit of traffic. But now, they had also increased the viewership quite a bit. In other words, with the poprity of the Jon¡¯s drill, even if they only received a little bit of traffic, they would still earn quite a lot of views. Under such a trend of interest, even if the official live broadcast of the exercise was still scheduled for Gal Gadot, there were still dozens of media outlets rushing over. At this moment. These media were still likest time, waiting outside the police station. After all, outside the police station, they had no other ce to go. And Gal Gadot, of course, was different from all the media. She was currently in the police station. Because it was a 24-hour live broadcast. Hence, this time, the television station assigned two cameramen to Gal Gadot. And the official livestream had started. ¡°Hello everyone, I am the official live broadcast reporter of this Florida State Police Station drill, Gal Gadot.¡± ¡°Now, we are already in the Florida State Police Station, waiting for the official start of this drill at any time.¡± ¡°However, this time is different from the previous two times. The weather has changed. This drill is in the rainy season in Florida, so it has started to rain heavily.¡± ¡°ording to the weather forecast, this storm willst for five days. Such heavy rain will definitely affect the drill.¡± ¡°However, because the drill will start with actualbat, the drill will continue even if it rains heavily.¡± ¡°Now, you can see that the police officers in the police station are all ready to move out at any time.¡± ¡°And on the other side of the drill, are the robbers yed by Jon starting to take actions?¡± ¡°This time, the drill will focus on escaping. I believe that it will test the ability of the police officers to catch them even more ¡°In this drill, will the final victor be the robbers or the police? Let¡¯s wait and see!¡± After the live broadcast started, Gal Gadot took the microphone and left the country. She gave a long opening speech. Although the live broadcast had just started, there were already many viewers waiting in the livestream. It was only when Gal Gadot said this opening speech. After she finished her opening speech, the entire livestream had already reached five million viewers. Moreover, this number was still rising rapidly. From this number, one could see the poprity of this drill. After all, this drill was different from the previous two. Chapter 124 - Robbery Begins!

Chapter 124: Robbery Begins!

In the first two drills, Jon¡¯s character focuses on confronting the police. He confronted the police in the bank. This time, the focus of the drill changed. The focus of the drill was on the robber¡¯s escape. This time, the audience might not see the robber used the hostage to confront the police in the bank. Because the robber needed to flee away right after they got the money. This was also a brand-new attempt for Jon. After all, his previous two drills were focused on confronting the police, and this time, he fled. When he fled, the police would certainly set up roadblocks on the road. They surrounded and blocked the robbers. In this case, it is a more difficult thing for them to sessfully escape from the city. After all, if the police set up roadblocks at all the intersections, the robbers would have hard time to try to break through police¡¯s defense line, they couldn¡¯t put wings on the car and fly over the roadblocks, right? So, once the robbers found that escaping by car was not working, they were likely to abandon the car and flee. At that time, there would be a good show to watch. If a few robbers who abandoned the car and ran away met with the police who were chasing and intercepting them, what would happen? Would Jon still be able to win this drill this time? The audience was filled with anticipation for the results of this drill. The poprity even higher than the previous two drills. ¡°It¡¯s this prettydy again. I¡¯m craving for her.¡± ¡°Hehe, the noobs are still typing with both hands. The legends are already typing with just one hand.¡± ¡°Then what are you doing with your other hand?¡± ¡°Guess what I¡¯m doing with my other hand?¡± ¡°But I¡¯m just saying. This prettydy is so beautiful. It¡¯s worth a try.¡± ¡°F*ck¡­¡± ¡°But why is she the host of the official live broadcast of this drill? She was the official live broadcast of thest Pennsylvania drill, and she is still the official live broadcast of this Florida drill.¡± ¡°Yeah, herst live broadcast had a maximum of more than 80 million viewers at the same time. This live broadcast might also break the record.¡± ¡°This youngdy should have a backer. Otherwise, how could she have be an official live broadcast reporter twice in a row?¡± ¡°I feel the same way. Without a backer, who would give her such a good job?¡± ¡°Good god, you guys are here to watch the drill. Who cares who is broadcasting the drill? Just watch the drill, simp.¡± ¡°Ah, are you all here to watch the drill? I, I am here to watch the goddess.¡± ¡°Haha, No way, no way. There can¡¯t really be a bunch of people watching a few men¡¯s drills, right?¡± ¡°But in the past few days, there has been a rainstorm in Florida. Can this drill continue?¡± ¡°Sir, are you deaf? The youngdy has already said that the drill will continue even if the weather is bad. Didn¡¯t you hear her?¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t you listen to the youngdy¡¯s opening speech at all?¡± ¡°I heard it. Isn¡¯t that uncertain?¡± ¡°Dumb head.¡± In the livestream, thements were surging wildly. Arge portion of the audience was curious when they saw that the official live broadcast reporter was once again Gal Gadot. They were all very curious, wondered if Gal Gadot had a backer. After all, the drill had been moved from Pennsylvania to Florida, but the official broadcast livestream was still on the samework as the host. So, they were curious, what was the background of this TV station, and why could it get such a resource. However, the audience did not figure out that it was something to do with Jon. However, it did not matter if it was Gal Gadot. After all, Gal Gadot was beautiful and very pleasing to the eye. Among the many audiences in the livestream, there was also a portion that was dedicated to Gal Gadot. The majority of the audiences did not have much reaction to the fact that Gal Gadot was the official reporter of this live broadcast. After all, they were here to watch the drill. It did not matter to them who was the host of the official live broadcast reporter. While the audience in the live broadcast room was discussing, on the other side, Jon and three people had already taken advantage of the heavy rain to start fighting. Four people were wearing raincoats, masks, and ck backpacks in their hands. They had already arrived at the bank entrance. It was half past two in the afternoon. The bank staff had just finished their lunch and were sleepy. Because the bank was in a remote area, there were not many customers even on normal days. Not to mention the heavy rain, there were not even a single customer. The staff looked at the deserted bank, and some people had already started to fall asleep. After all, it was the time to be sleepy. At this moment, the bank¡¯s door opened. Even though the sound of the rain outside could be heard from inside the bank, the sound of the door opening was very faint. But the bank manager, who was sitting in the lobby resting, still noticed it. He quickly got up, thinking that a customer hade. He walked over to them with a smile on his face and was about to greet them politely. ¡°Don¡¯t move now, it¡¯s a robbery!¡± A cold voice came from Jon¡¯s mouth, apanied by the sound of thunder outside. It was very intimidating. As soon as he said this, the atmosphere in the bank instantly became tense. A security guard who was dozing off shivered. As soon as he opened his eyes, he saw a ck muzzle in front of him. Instantly, the security guard was jolted awake. The drowsiness on his body immediately disappeared. ¡°Sir¡­ sir¡­¡± The security guard was extremely nervous at this moment. He subconsciously raised his hands above his head, not even daring to take a deep breath. Although he was a security guard and had worked in the bank for more than ten years. But where had he seen such a situation? For a moment, he did not know what to do. All he could do was to be careful and try not to anger the robbers. Otherwise, if he were to be shot, it would not be good. ¡°Ah!¡± At this time, the few employees at the counter were a little flustered. One of them even screamed. ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!¡± Seeing this situation, Jon fired three shots consecutively. The sound of the shots drowned out the sound of the rain and sounded in the bank. Only then did the panicking employees quieten down. Their bodies trembled, but they did not dare to make any more sounds. ¡°From now on, if anyone moves or screams again, I will shoot him to death.¡± ¡°Now, all of you, put your hands behind your heads ande out from the counter. Don¡¯t even think about pressing the rm. As soon as the rm goes off, all of you will die here.¡± After controlling the scene, Jon¡¯s voice was still cold and cruel. Chapter 125 - Loading Money!

Chapter 125: Loading Money!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Before entering the bank, he had already activated the Robber Aura. At this time, whether in tone or temperament, he was like a fierce robber. It made people not doubt the authenticity of his words at all. Moreover, although the two shots that Jon fired just now were nks, the sound and the spark appeared on the muzzle were no different from real bullets. Also, for the sake of the authenticity of the drill, Raymond had discussed with the manager of the bank. He did not tell the staff about the drill. Therefore, the staffs still thought that they were experiencing a real robbery. Therefore, all the staffs did not dare to act rashly. They followed Jon¡¯s request and put their hands on their heads. They slowly walked out of the counter. The bank was not big. There were only five counters, which meant that there were five employees. There was also a manager and a security guard. When the five employees walked out, Jon aimed his gun at them. Under such circumstances, the five employees naturally could not make any small movements and could not press the rm. ¡°Good!¡± Jon nodded in satisfaction. ¡°As long as you do as I say, I guarantee that your lives will not be harmed.¡± He rushed the bank employees and the security guard to the waiting area. His tone was a little gentler than before. Even so, the few employees were still so frightened that their bodies trembled. ¡°Venus, go and find out if there are other people in the bank. Leon, close the door. Wille over to control the hostages.¡± After controlling the staff, Jon turned around and gave the order to the three of them. ¡°Okay.¡± After hearing Jon¡¯s words, the three of them nodded in response, and then quickly did as Jon said. Immediately after, Venus searched the other areas of the bank to see if there was anyone else. Leon went to the door, closed the shutter door in half, and then went out. He stuck a piece of paper on the shutter door. It written, ¡®Bank under maintenance, services will not be avable.¡¯ This was what they had prepared before. After all, this robbery had to be done without much attention, the more hidden the better. This preparation was also to prevent a robbery when someone suddenly came. It was a rainstorm now, people rarelye to the bank, but they did it in case. So, Jon prepared for it. Put up a sign at the bank entrance. That way, even if a customeres in, sees the bank door closed and sees the sign, they wouldn¡¯t suspect much about it. After all, bank overhauls were normal. After that, Leon went back to the bank, closed the doorpletely, and drew all the curtains in the bank. When Leon finished all this. Venus had brought out a middle-aged man from the bank. ¡°I... I am the executive of this branch. Excuse me, excuse me, are you here to participate in the drill?¡± When the middle-aged man spoke, his voice was trembling, and his body was trembling. As the executive of this branch, he naturally knew about the drill. However, looking at the situation in front of him... The middle-aged man¡¯s mind was in a daze. This situation was too real. No matter how he looked at it, it didn¡¯t seem like a drill. Even though the few of them were wearing masks. But the way they looked at them was filled with a fierce aura, and their robber style. He thought they might shoot him if he angered them. How was this like a drill. This was practically a real deal. ¡°Where is the ten million USD?¡± Jon did not respond to the executive¡¯s question. Instead, he asked coldly. His cold tone and the fierceness in his eyes caused the executive to shiver uncontrobly. ¡°It¡¯s... It¡¯s in the safe at the back.¡± Cold sweat broke out on the executive¡¯s face. However, even though Jon did not directly respond to him, he could clearly say that there was ten million USD in the bank. Then it should be a drill. It was just that, after realizing that they were the robbers in the drill, the bank executive saw that these people looked fierce. The bank executive was still panicking. ¡°Take us to get it.¡± Jon spoke. Putting the money in the bank¡¯s safe, there was no need to think about it. It must have been arranged by the Raymond. This was also to make the drill more simr to the real robbery. After all, in a ce like a branch, money was always kept in the safe. Many people felt that money should be kept in the vault. In fact, not all banks had vaults. Generally, only banks of the size of a branch or above would have vaults. Even quite a number of branches did not have vaults. For example, the bank in this drill, although it was also a branch, was located in a remote area. It was also very small in size. Naturally, it was impossible to have a vault. The money from this kind of bank would be delivered by an armored car every morning, and then at night, it would be transported by an armored car. When it stopped in the bank, it would be ced in the safe. ¡°I... I¡¯ll bring you there right away.¡± The bank executive hurriedly nodded, not daring to have any thoughts of resisting. Moreover, Raymond had also said that as long as someone came to rob them, it would be fine to just give them the money. Actually, before this. When Raymond had told him that he was going to hold a drill here. The bank executive¡¯s heart was still unconcerned. After all, a drill, no matter how real it was, it was still just a drill. Just a drill. But after experiencing it first-hand, the branch executive had already changed his previous view. This drill was no longer a drill. It was a real robbery. It was too real. The robbers were too engrossed. They followed the branch executive, Jon and Leon, to the safe. The branch executive quickly opened the safe with his key. Then they saw a big pile of paper money in the safe. Ten million US dors. This was the money that the robbers were going to take away during the drill. ¡°Oh, my god, ten million dors is so much. It¡¯s really hard to take it away.¡± Looking at the money in the safe, Leon could not help but said. Ten million banknotes were not small. ¡°Hurry up and put the money into the backpack. We don¡¯t have enough time.¡± Jon ordered. Then he took the ck backpack and started to put the money in it. Ten million USD was about 300 pounds. Putting it in four backpacks meant that each backpack weighed 70 pounds. For the robbers, it was not a small weight. At this moment, the Florida police station Themissioner was anxiously waiting. He looked at the watch on his wrist. It was already three o¡¯clock, but no one called the police. Could it be that the robbers hadn¡¯t made their move yet? Or could it be that the robbers had already made their move, but they controlled the hostages so that they couldn¡¯t call the police? He didn¡¯t know this information, so he could only be anxious. In the livestream. The number of people had soared to 20 million. However, there wasn¡¯t much content in the live broadcast room at the moment. They couldn¡¯t let the audience keep waiting. So, Gal Gadot had to go on the camera and tell the audience about the situation in the police station. Chapter 126 - Police Received Report ! Police Deployed!

Chapter 126: Police Received Report ! Police Deployed!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°What¡¯s going on? Why hasn¡¯t the drill started yet?¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s been almost an hour. The police haven¡¯t deployed yet. I¡¯m not in the mood to continue watching.¡± ¡°Although Gal Gadot is very good-looking, I want to see Jon rob a bank.¡± ¡°Could it be that Jon saw that it was raining today and decided to cancel the bank robbery at thest minute?¡± ¡°Wow, thed upstairs is a genius. He said he wouldn¡¯t rob the bank. Do you really think he¡¯s a real robber? This is a drill.¡± ¡°Jon should have made his move, but he managed to control the hostage, so there¡¯s no way to call the police. So, the police haven¡¯t received any information yet.¡± ¡°Look at his guess, and look at the moron again. Oh My God.¡± ¡°However, if this drags on, if the police don¡¯t receive any news, they won¡¯t be able to mobilize the police force. What if Jon escapes from the city at this time?¡± ¡°This situation is not unheard of. As long as Jon makes it a little more covert and doesn¡¯t let any hostage report to the police, the robbers will secretly escape from the city.¡± ¡°In that case, what¡¯s the point of this exercise?¡± ¡°If Jon is going to escape like this, then the Florida State Police Department will be humiliated. I think themissioner will vomit blood when that happens.¡± ¡°Haha, it¡¯s true when you think about it. If Jon is going to leave like this, then not only is he the strongest robber in history, but he¡¯s also the fastest robber in history.¡± ¡°You said he is ¡®fast¡¯, are you¡¯re saying what I think?¡± ¡°? ? ? You said ¡®fast¡¯, what kind of fast? Don¡¯t tell me it¡¯s some weird thing.¡± ¡°We¡¯re in their official livestream. Can you say something meaningful?¡± ¡°But it can¡¯t be true. The police department hasn¡¯t been able to get the information of the situation, and when they receive the situation, oh my God, Jon and the others are already waiting outside the city? Wouldn¡¯t that happen?¡± ¡°No, if that¡¯s the case, the drill would be meaningless, and Jon wouldn¡¯t do that either.¡± ¡°After he robs the bank, he should ask the hostages to call the police. At that time, the drill focusing on escaping would finally start.¡± ¡°Actually, I think the police can be mobilized now. After all, if the robbers don¡¯t let the hostages call the police, it would be over when they run out of the city.¡± ¡°The sand morons have finished appraising. The purpose of the drill is to prepare for actualbat.¡± ¡°Although the police encountered a bank robbery today during this exercise, what if it¡¯s in actualbat? Do you expect the robbers to tell the police that I¡¯m going to rob a bank?¡± ¡°But I still hope that Jon can get someone to call the police as soon as possible. Otherwise, we¡¯ve waited for more than ten days. If he wins directly and lets this drill end like this, then it¡¯ll be meaningless.¡± The livestream had already been open for almost an hour. But the scene was still in the police station. Many viewers were already bing irritable. Some viewers even started toin. Gal Gadot watched, but there was nothing she could do. After all, she could not control the progress of this drill. While the audiences were discussing enthusiastically in the livestream, Jon and Leon finally put all the money into their backpacks. The two of them walked out with their backpacks. Because Venus and Will were controlling the hostages in the hall, therefore the hostages were rtively quiet, and no one said a word. Jon left a backpack and divided the other three backpacks to three people. They carried the backpacks on their bodies and nced at these people. ¡°Very well, thank you very much for your cooperation.¡± Then, they opened the shutter door and walked out of the bank. It was still raining cats and dogs outside. However, the backpacks that Jon bought was waterproof, so they didn¡¯t have to worry about the money in the backpack getting wet from the rain. Jon and the other three just walked out of the bank. The bank executive quickly went to the counter and pressed the rm. The bank rm was connected to the police department, so as long as they pressed the rm, the police department would be able to receive the alert in time. It was more convenient than a phone call. Because this way, they didn¡¯t need to spend time exining the location and the incident. As long as the rm rang, the police department would receive the address and urately find which bank it was. When the branch executive pressed the rm, the police officers who received the news immediately reported the news to themander. When themander received the news, he immediately perked up and quickly picked up the walkie-talkie and gave the order to the police officers. ¡°All police officers, listen up and set off immediately!¡± With this order, the police officers who had been waiting for a long time quickly got into the car. Naturally, Gal Gadot quickly got into the car and followed the live broadcast. Soon, one by one, police cars with shing lights and sirens started to drive out of the police station. Ten minutester. When the police cars arrived at the bank, Jon and the others had already left and disappeared without a trace. Themander got out of the car and entered the bank to check the situation. He also asked the branch executive how much money the robbers had taken. Because in this drill, themissioner¡¯s role was to be the referee, so he naturally wouldn¡¯t reveal any information to the police officers. Therefore, themander didn¡¯t know how much money the robbers had taken. ¡°Attention to all teams blocking the intersections. The robbers took ten million dors from the bank and have now fled the bank.¡± ¡°Then I will send the information of the robbers and the vehicles they were driving to all teams.¡± ¡°The teams that block the intersections must investigate strictly. We must not let the robbers leave the city!¡± Themander took out his walkie-talkie and gave the order to the police officers who were already guarding the intersections. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± ... The replies of the teams soon came through the walkie-talkie. Then, themander asked someone to retrieve the surveince footage from the bank and the surveince information near the bank. At the same time, Gal Gadot and the cameraman were also broadcasting live in the bank. The cordon outside the bank had already been set up. Now. Other than Gal Gadot, the official designated reporter for the live broadcast, there was no other media outlet. Then, Gal Gadot exined the situation to the audience. ¡°Right now, we are at the United Bank.¡± ¡°Unlike thest time, when the police arrived at the scene, the robbers had already escaped and did not stay at the bank to confront the police.¡± ¡°This is also the focus of this drill, to test the ability of the police to arrest.¡± ¡°Previously, from the branch executive, we learned that the robbers took 15 million US dors, and the weight of these banknotes is about 300 pounds.¡± ¡°It¡¯s a big burden for the robbers to run away with such heavy cash.¡± ¡°Now, the police have set up posts at all the intersections in the city. With such heavy cash, it¡¯s almost impossible for the robbers to escape from the city.¡± Chapter 127 - The Game Begins. Jon鈥檚 Plan!

Chapter 127: The Game Begins. Jon¡¯s n!

As Gal Gadot¡¯s voice fell. Thements in the livestream surged wildly. ¡°Haha, I knew Jon had already made his move.¡± ¡°Jon robbed a bank. The police have arrived at the scene. The show has officially begun.¡± ¡°We¡¯ve finally gotten to the main dish. I¡¯ve been waiting for an hour. I¡¯m so bored.¡± ¡°Jon took 10 million. I really want to rob a bank with Jon.¡± ¡°Wake up. Even if they rob a bank, they still have to return the money after the drill. Do you think it¡¯s yours just because you took it?¡± ¡°It¡¯s fine even if we return it. After all, I¡¯ve never seen so much money in my life. It¡¯s good to have a look and touch it for fun.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, dude. Now that you mention it, I also want to rob a bank, even if it¡¯s just for fun.¡± ¡°I want to go + 1.¡± ¡°We can suggest that when the next drilles, we act as Jon¡¯s teammates.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. It doesn¡¯t matter whether we rob a bank or not. The main thing is to help Jon share the burden in time.¡± ¡°Are you trying to help Jon share the burden? You¡¯re just greedy for the money, you¡¯re dumb!¡± ¡°However, do you think the robbers will be able to sessfully escape from the city with a weight of 300 pounds?¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. This is the time to test Jon¡¯s IQ.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think Jon will be able to escape. After all, there are police stationed at every intersection, and they are carrying such a heavy amount of money.¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯m telling you, it¡¯s not toote to let the bullets fly before making a conclusion. If you make a conclusion so early now, you¡¯ll be pped in the face.¡± The audiences in the livestream crazily sent bulletments. The number of viewers in the livestream had already reached 35 million. When thest drill had just started, the poprity had already increased way too much. Moreover, only an hour had passed since the start of the drill. Now, the gifts in the livestream had reached three million dors. At this time. The police checked the nearby surveince cameras ording to the time of the crime, and soon identified the car that the robber was driving. Themander quickly asked the technicians to send photos and information of the robber, as well as the information of the car, to all the teams that had set up posts. Calcting the time, it had been nearly half an hour since Jon had escaped from the bank. In such a short time, it was impossible for them to leave the city. And once the robbers didn¡¯t leave the city now, it would be difficult for them to leave the city again. Because arge that was enough to cover the loss had been set up. At the same time, on a certain road in the city. Brown Williams was driving. In this half an hour, Brown went around the city twice ording to Jon¡¯s request. And the routes he drove were mostly routes with surveince cameras. After driving aimlessly for twops. Jon let Brown drove the car to the route that he had originally nned. ¡°Boss, where are we going now?¡± Brown drove the car and asked Jon. The route to escape had already been nned, and they had already gotten the money. For Brown, the most important thing now was naturally to escape from the city. It wasn¡¯t just Brown, the other three also thought so in their hearts. After all, if they escaped from the city early, they would win. And if they stayed in the city for an hour longer, the chances of catch up by the police would increase. ¡°Who said we were going to escape?¡± Jon looked at the pouring rain outside the window and said unhurriedly, ¡°Go and change a car first, then stay in the city for two days.¡± As soon as he said this, the other four were slightly stunned. Now that they had the money, instead of thinking of a way to leave the city quickly, but they need to change their car and try to stay in the city for two days? ¡°Boss, why¡­ Why we¡¯re doing this?¡± Will Smith asked carefully. Although he had listened to Jon¡¯s arrangements for the entire drill, he was still very curious. ¡°You all think that after the robbers get the money, they should run away and leave the city as soon as possible. So, the other party also thinks so.¡± ¡°Now that the drill has just begun, all the police officers are naturally full of energy and treat this drill strictly and seriously.¡± ¡°After all, there are so many people watching the live broadcast of this drill.¡± ¡°Therefore, the police must be very strict with the arrangements. If we want to sessfully escape from the city in this situation, it is obviously impossible.¡± ¡°We will go back and stay for two days. When the police officers are exhausted, we will start to escape.¡± Jon exined slowly. Hearing Jon¡¯s exnation, the four of them came to a sudden realization. As police officers, under such circumstances, their first reaction was that the robbers would escape as soon as possible. Therefore, the focus of the police would definitely be on the security of the various exits in the city. And with Jon¡¯s n, the police officers would not be able to react in time. It was a waste of manpower. Venus was sitting in the back, looking at Jon through the rear-view mirror. Her eyes were full of admiration. The longer she stayed with Jon, the more she felt that he was too charming. Not only was he intelligent, but he was also strategic and charismatic. She was deeply attracted to Jon. ording to Jon¡¯s route, Brown was driving on the street. Because these roads were rtively remote, there were no cameras at all. They drove to an abandoned factory, where the used cars that had been prepared beforehand were parked. Because this ce was abandoned, no one usually came. It was not easy to find a car. ¡°Boss, I keep feeling that the space of this car is too small. We¡¯re carrying so many things, how can five people sit in it?¡± Will couldn¡¯t help but speak again as he looked at the car. The four bags of money were already very big, not to mention that they also had things like guns, plus five people. This four-seater car obviously didn¡¯t have enough space. ¡°If you think this way, the police officers who arrested us will also think this way. We have a lot of things, and there are five of us. Even if they find the car we abandoned, the focus of their investigation will definitely be on the seven-seater car.¡± ¡°A four-seater car like this is easy to overlook. It¡¯s very beneficial to us.¡± Jon exined slowly. As he spoke, he opened the trunk of the car and ced his backpack and firearms and ammunition in the trunk. Although the space of the car was not big, it was not small either. These things were just enough to fit inside. Chapter 128 - Disturbing the Judgement of the Police!

Chapter 128: Disturbing the Judgement of the Police!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio After Jon¡¯s exnation, everyone else understood. These people werepletely convinced. Jon had almost thought of everything. This drill was different from before. It was a drill that focused on escaping. For the robbers, the difficulty had increased a lot. The four of them weren¡¯t sure if they could win this drill. But now... Because of Jon, the other four were confident. They packed up. Jon let Venus sat in the passenger seat. He sat in the back with Will Smith and Leon Evans. It was a four-seater car, but it was not a problem for three people to sit in the back seat. After getting into the car, Brown Williams started the car precisely, but was stopped by Jon. ¡°Wait a minute.¡± Jon said, and then, without waiting for the crowd to ask questions, he said, ¡°If the police don¡¯t fall for the trap and lock onto our car, then they can deduce how far we have gone from the time when our car disappeared from the surveince camera to the time when this car appeared in the surveince camera ¡°This way, after they conduct an investigation, it will be easy for them to find this abandoned factory and find our abandoned car.¡± ¡°So, we have to stay here for a while longer to disturb their judgment.¡± When the four of them heard Jon¡¯s words, they thought for a moment and understood. Jon¡¯s words made a lot of sense. Ever since the robbery started, Jon had calcted every step. This made the four of them very impressed. If it was up to them, they would never have thought of such things. An hourter. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s go.¡± Jon looked at the time, then pointed at a dot on the map and said, ¡°Go here.¡± ¡°OK!¡± Brown Williams turned the car around and drove towards the location Jon pointed. At this time, next to the bank, the temporarymand room built in the RV was ready. Because of the continuous rain these days, the police officers also set up a awning outside the bank. Of course, it was impossible to mobilize all the police officers for a drill. The police station still needed enough manpower to function normally. Therefore, the drillmand center could not upy the normal operation of the police. They could only set up a temporarymand room. In the temporarymand room, there were a few technicians sitting in front of the control desk. They began to connect the inte to the surveince cameras near the bank. Themander pulled a table under the awning and spread out a map on the table. It was a map of downtown Florida. On the map, he marked the manpower he had to set up defenses at various intersections. Meanwhile, Gal Gadot and the cameraman were broadcasting the situation at the scene. This was because this was a drill that focused on capturing the robbers who was on the run. Unlike a confrontation, the livestream could not follow up on the situation of the robbers in real time. Therefore, under such circumstances, they could only let Gal Gadot got on the camera more often and exined the situation in the form ofmentary. ¡°Now, we can see that the temporarymand room of the police has been set up. On such a rainstorm day, the police officers are still very serious about the drill.¡± ¡°And now, it has been almost an hour and a half since the robbers escaped from the bank.¡± ¡°Although the police officers have set up defenses at all the exits in the city, there is still no news of the robbers.¡± The cameraman was recording the situation at the scene, while Gal Gadot was exining the situation at the scene. ¡°I feel that the Florida police force should be much stronger than the Pennsylvania police force.¡± ¡°That¡¯s for sure. After all, Florida has a developed economy, so the police force is naturally stronger than the Pennsylvania police force.¡± ¡°You can even see from the temporarymand center that it was built in such a short time.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be so dumb. It¡¯s just a temporarymand center. How long do you think it will take?¡± ¡°Let¡¯s guess, how long will Jon be able to hold out without being caught this time?¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. After all, the Florida police department is heavily guarded. They¡¯ve set up sentries at all the roads out of the city. It¡¯s not easy for Jon to go out, but he¡¯s an intelligent robber after all. He should be able tost for two days.¡± ¡°Two days? I say twelve hours, no more. The police department has set up sentries at all the exits. How will Jon win? Will he fly out from the sky?¡± ¡°I recognized that moron. Thest time when the drill started, he didn¡¯t think highly of Jon, but in the end, he was pped in the face by Jon.¡± ¡°Now he¡¯s starting again.¡± ¡°Haha, after all, the drill has just started. Let¡¯s make a conclusion so early. Let¡¯s wait and see.¡± ¡°Yeah, thest time, he also said that Jon couldn¡¯t win, but in the end, Jon won. This time, he thought that Jon couldn¡¯t win, so he¡¯s looking forward to being pped in the face.¡± Seeing that the police officers were acting so efficiently and in such a timely manner, there were many audiences didn¡¯t think that Jon had a chance to win this time. After all, this wasn¡¯t a confrontation at the bank. There were no hostages for Jon to threaten the police. This time, they were escaping. With the police setting up roadblocks at all the exits, they thought that Jon wouldn¡¯t be able to win. It was only a matter of time before he was caught. However, there were still some viewers who chose to believe in Jon. After all, Jon had never let anyone down. Now, the number of viewers in the live broadcast room had reached 40 million. And the value of the gifts sent in the live broadcast room had reached 8 million. This meant that, this drill which was focusing on escaping was very well received by the viewers. From the looks of it, the hype was iparable to the previous drills. Of course, it was partly because of Jon¡¯s rise in poprity following the previous two drills. ¡°Have you found the surveince footage of the robbers escaping?¡± Themander looked at the map for a while, then came to the console and asked a few technicians. Gal Gadot and the cameraman also hurried over to carry out the live broadcast. ¡°We did find it, but...¡± A technician heard the voice and said, ¡°But the robber¡¯s escape route is a bit strange.¡± ¡°Strange?¡± Themander raised his eyebrows, then looked at the surveince screen. ¡°At three o¡¯clock sharp, the robber passed by Alexander Road, and then disappeared on the road without any surveince cameras.¡± ¡°But at 3:10, the robber appeared again at the intersection of Alexandria. This means that the robber didn¡¯t seem to be fleeing but was going in a circle.¡± The technician brought up the two surveince cameras. The surveince cameras at the same intersection at different times. It seemed like the surveince cameras were ten minutes apart. One was the robber¡¯s car leaving. The other was the robber¡¯s car driving back. It seemed like they were going in circles. ¡°Interesting.¡± Themander looked at the surveince camera and said, ¡°As expected of a highly intelligent robber. This is him deliberately disturbing our monitoring. Don¡¯t bother about him. Just follow the surveince camera footage of him in circles and find thest ce they disappeared.¡± Chapter 129 - Increase the Workload of the Police and Stay In A Hotel!

Chapter 129: Increase the Workload of the Police and Stay In A Hotel!

¡°Yes, Sir!¡± A few technicians responded when they heard themander¡¯s words. They continued to look at the surveince footage. It was easy to see the purpose of Jon¡¯s actions to make the cars circle the police. It was to distract the police. However, his purpose was not to deceive themander. He did it to add to the police¡¯s workload. Jon let Brown Williams drove around the town twice. There were no security cameras in some parts of the road. So, from the security footage, when the police were tracking the robber¡¯s escape route, there was often no sign of the robber¡¯s car in the next security footage. At this time, the police need to look at all the surveince video in the adjacent area, to search. It will take a lot of time to find the ce where the robber¡¯s car appeared. And they had to look at every frame carefully. After all, at the intersection that lost sign of robbers¡¯ car may be thest ce where the robber¡¯s car disappeared. In this way, it was a huge workload for the few technicians in charge of checking the surveince. At the side, themander was watching, and the walkie-talkie never left his hand. After all, with so many ces set up for inspection, the robber¡¯s car could be found at any intersection at any time. At the side, the cameraman recorded this scene. It was broadcasted through the live broadcast room. ¡°Is Jon going to start his own n again? Even if he¡¯s not in the bank, even if there are no hostages, it feels like Jon is still ying the police in his palm.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need for that. The police just haven¡¯t determined Jon¡¯s escape route yet. Once the police find out the robbers¡¯ escape route and narrow down the encirclement, Jon won¡¯t be sofortable then.¡± ¡°Hehe, that¡¯s easy for you to say. After all, Jon is a highly intelligent robber. How could it be so easy to obtain his escape route?¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon has a detailed n for every drill. How could it be so easy to deal with?¡± ¡°There¡¯s a lot of gossip. After Jon became popr, there were also a lot of haters. This drill has just begun, and they can¡¯t wait to see Jon get caught.¡± ¡°I still believe in Jon. This time, he will definitely win.¡± The chat in the livestream discussed crazily about the chances of Jon winning the drill. At this moment. In downtown Florida, a ck car appeared. This car was heading towards a vige in the city. The police¡¯s main force was ced on all the exits in the city, but there were no police forces in the city. Therefore, the car of the robber could be said to be unimpeded in the city. ¡°Boss, your move is really good. I guess everyone now thinks that we want to escape from the city, but they didn¡¯t expect us to change to a four-seater car and swagger out in the city.¡± Looking outside the venue, Will Smith couldn¡¯t help but exim in admiration. Jon¡¯s operation had already achieved an unexpected effect. By the time the police reacted, it would take at least one or two days. Too good! Jon smiled slightly, his expression calm. All of this was under his control. His n had slowly begun. The next step was to take the lead in this drill and continue to fool the police. Not long after, Brown Williams drove to the urban vige in the city that Jon had chosen. In ces like Florida, there were many urban viges in the city. After all, there were many migrant workers in this ce, and the urban vige in the city was the first choice for migrant workers to live in. Where there was demand, there was existence. And the urban vige was not only densely popted, but the good and bad people lived together, and it was very difficult to manage. Hiding in such a ce was a good choice. In the urban vige, Jon randomly found a hotel that looked pretty good. ¡°Boss, the Florida police are arresting us now. Once we register our identity in the hotel, won¡¯t we be found very quickly?¡± Will Smith saw Jon walking into the hotel. He couldn¡¯t help but stop him. Now. The identity registration system of some state hotels was connected to the police system. As a prosperous state, Florida had naturally poprized this technology. Therefore, the situation in Florida and Pennsylvania was different. The police in Pennsylvania still needed to go to the hotel to check the hotel staff. But in Florida, as long as the police entered Jon¡¯s identity information into the system, they would be able to find their hotel records. Therefore, once Jon used his identity information to check in, he would immediately be discovered. When that happened, the police would arrive very quickly. ¡°If I use my identity card, I can stay in a hotel. If I don¡¯t use my identity card, I can also stay in a hotel. Otherwise, why do you think I chose to stay in a urban vige?¡± Jon smiled and walked in. ¡°Ma¡¯am, we¡¯re from another city. We lost our ID. Can you get us a few rooms? We¡¯ll stay for a few days. When the recement ID arrives, we¡¯ll Leave?¡± Jon came to the counter. At this moment, he had a simple and honest smile on his face. He looked like an honest man. This scene stunned the four of them. His acting skills were really superb. He did not look like a vicious and intelligent robber? He was simply a simple and honest foreigner. ¡°With an identity card, 60 dors a day. Without an identity card, 100 dors a day and a deposit of 200 dors.¡± Behind the counter was a middle-aged woman in her fifties. She was watching a drama while eating sunflower seeds. She did not even look up at Jon and the others. ¡°Madam, can you give us a discount? 100 dors is too expensive.¡± When they heard this woman¡¯s words, Will Smith and the others were happy and were about to take the money. However, Jon had already bargained. This scene puzzled them. After all, a few days ago, they had stayed in a suite for ten thousand bucks. At that time, Jon did not even blink. He had happily opened a suite for everyone, and they stayed for six nights. But now, he was bargaining for a room that cost 100 dors. However, even if they thought it was strange, the four of them would not ask at this time. As for why Jon was bargaining, he naturally had his own thoughts. After all, if he agreed to such a higher price without hesitation, it might arouse suspicion. This was because there were cases where fugitives did not use their identity information to get a room. ¡°No bargaining, sir. If you don¡¯t want to stay, you can go out and turn left.¡± The middle-aged woman raised her head and nced at Jon. Her expression was clearly a little impatient. ¡°Alright, Alright. Give us five rooms and we¡¯ll stay for two days.¡± As Jon spoke, he took out crumpled bills from his pocket and gave them to the middle-aged woman. Chapter 130 - The Search Team Is On the Move!

Chapter 130: The Search Team Is On the Move!

¡°Two dayster, return the key and get back the deposit.¡± The middle-aged woman ced the key on the counter. After collecting the money, she continued to watch the drama with her head lowered. She did not want to pay any attention to Jon and the others. Jon picked up the key and gestured for them to follow him. Then, he went straight upstairs. A small hotel like this naturally did not have an elevator, and Jon¡¯s five rooms were on the fifth floor. When they went up to the fourth floor, they discovered that there was an iron door at the stairway. There was a lock on the iron door, but it wasn¡¯t locked at the moment. ¡°Why is there another iron door here?¡± Will Smith looked at the iron door and was a little puzzled. After all, there wasn¡¯t such an iron door at the stairway below. ¡°This means that this hotel should only be legal with the first four floors. The fifth floor should be an illegal expansion. Customers without identity registration are all arranged on the fifth floor.¡± ¡°If the policee to inspect the hotel, lock this iron door directly. The police won¡¯t be able to check the people without identity registration.¡± ¡°After all, if they find that there are guests staying in the hotel without registration, the owner of the hotel will also be punished. They are more afraid of being found out by the police than we are.¡± Jon slowly exined to the dour of them. Will Smith and the others were police officers, they would sometimes enter and leave the urban vige to handle cases. However, they did not know about the unspoken rules of the hotel. When Jon was on a mission in the past. He had been hiding in the vige for a period of time, so he knew more about these things. After hearing Jon¡¯s words, the four of them were shocked. They didn¡¯t expect Jon to know so much. Then, Jon handed out the keys to them, but no one had a room. Then, he took the keys and opened the door of 501. The room was not big, and the facilities inside were very old. It waspletely different from the presidential suite from before. But since it was a hotel in the urban vige, Jon didn¡¯t expect it to be very good. As long as he could stay there. ¡°Boss, do we still need to bring the money in the car?¡± While Jon was checking the surroundings in the room, Will Smith came to the door and asked. Guns and ammunition. They carried them on their backs. After all, items were very important. If they were lost, the consequences would be very serious. However, the money in the backpack was still in the trunk of the car. ¡°No need. The money is too heavy. It¡¯s not convenient to move it around. Don¡¯t wait for it to attract other people¡¯s attention.¡± Jon responded. Although there were all kinds of people in the urban vige, it was not so chaotic that it was easy to break into a car. There was no need to worry too much. In the temporarymand room. After the constant efforts of a few technicians, they finally figured out the escape route of Jon and the others through the surveince camera. They also determined thest ce where Jon and the others disappeared. Themander looked at the surveince screen and the time showed that it was 3:40 pm. It was already 6:30 pm, which meant that after Jon and the others disappeared from this intersection, almost three hours had passed. Themander came to the table and marked a red circle where Jon and the others disappeared. Then, he marked an area ording to the direction Jon was heading. He took out his walkie-talkie. ¡°Teams near the pyramid area, the robbers were in the area you deployed three hours ago. Be careful!¡± ¡°The robbers are very cunning. They may be hiding in any vehicle. Be careful.¡± After giving the order, there was a response soon. After doing these things, themander came to the control panel. ¡°On thest road that the robbers disappeared, check the surveince footage of other routes that intersected with this road.¡± Themander gave the order to a few technicians. The road that the robbers disappeared on wasplicated and could lead to several main roads. Therefore, after the robbers disappeared, there were many ces that could be essed from that road. It was quite difficult to investigate. However, there were only so many clues in the hands of the police. Even if it was difficult, they had to continue investigating. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± a few technicians replied. Then, they quickly investigated the surveince ording to what themander said. At this moment, themander brought the walkie-talkie to his mouth again, ¡°Capture Team A, listen up. Immediately rush to North Freedom Road and search for the robbers¡¯ cars and robbers along North Freedom Road. If you find any information, report immediately.¡± ¡°Yes, Sir!¡± the capture team replied. The search team, which had been waiting for a long time, also began to appear. They followed the road where the robbers disappeared for thest time and searched to see if Jon was hiding nearby. The capture team was made up of the Florida State Police¡¯s SWAT team. Team A was led by the SWAT team leader. Including the SWAT team leader, there were a total of eight people. After everything was arranged, themander came to the table and looked at the map on the table. He was deep in thought. In the livestream. ¡°Now, the police have only discovered the whereabouts of Jon and the others three hours ago?¡± ¡°Is this still useful? Even if they send people over, by the time the police arrive, the robbers will have already escaped.¡± ¡°Whether it¡¯s useful or not, the police can only go there now. After all, this was the only information those police currently had about these robbers.¡± ¡°The drill has already been over four hours, and the police has only found traces of Jon three hours ago. This is not optimistic for the police.¡± ¡°Yeah, look at themander frowning and thinking. He feelspletely yed by Jon.¡± ¡°What about those people who said that Jon won¡¯tst more than a few hours? Why aren¡¯t they talking now?¡± ¡°Hehe, the drill has only started for four hours. What¡¯s the rush?¡± ¡°Three hours have passed. Is Jon already heading another way?¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. I can only say that it¡¯s very possible. What if he¡¯s really looking for an opportunity on this road?¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, the search team has already moved out. In other words, there are police sentries in front of Jon and the search team behind him. Jon won¡¯t be able to run for long.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be? Jon is going to be arrested?¡± ¡°I¡¯m just saying in case. After all, with Jon¡¯s IQ, since he has shown his face on this road, he definitely won¡¯t continue to stay.¡± The audience was discussing crazily. Whether or not the capture team could make a difference was something that everyone was very concerned about. Themander sat in front of the table. His expression was solemn, and his brows were tightly knitted. The current situation was that the road ahead was blocked, and there was a search team at the back, one at the front and one at the back, hoping to bring some good news. Chapter 131 - Clues? The Abandoned Vehicle!

Chapter 131: Clues? The Abandoned Vehicle!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Time passed slowly. In front of the control panel, a few technicians were looking for surveince footage. They had checked many surveince cameras, but they did not see the robbers¡¯ vehicle again. This was good news for themander. After all, the robbers¡¯ vehicle did not show up in the surveince footage in the vicinity. This meant that there was a high probability that the robber¡¯s vehicle was still being around the North Freedom Road. Then, the probability of the capture team being able to catch the robber was also increased. In a hotel in the urban vige. It was already mealtime, and everyone was a little hungry. Jon had Leon and Brown wear masks and went downstairs to bring some food up. Leon and Brown, these two people¡¯s sense of presence can be said to be very low, and in thest drill, they were not interviewed, nor did they speak to the camera. Therefore, most of the audience who saw thest drill could remember Jon, Will Smith who loved to talk, and Venus who was beautiful. But only a few people remembered Brown Williams and Leon Evans. So, they went out to buy food. It was quite safe. When they came to the vige, they did show their faces. But only when they checked into the hotel. They were seen by thedy boss of the hotel. Not many women of this age would watch the live broadcast. Moreover, the drill was currently being broadcast live, but thedy boss was watching a TV series. This also meant that she was not interested in the live broadcast of the drill. Although Jon¡¯s poprity was not low, thedy boss still did not know Jon. Moreover, thedy boss only raised her head and nced at Jon when they were booking the room. Even if she knew Jon, she might not be able to recognize him under such circumstances. That was why Jon dared to stay here. Soon, the two brought the food up, and the five of them began to eat. ¡°Boss, are we going to hide here? Do we need to do something to make it more difficult for the Florida Police?¡± Will Smith asked Jon as he ate. Even though they had only been in the hotel for less than an hour. Will Smith was already feeling a little bored. After all, as robbers, they had to follow the rules of the drill, they couldn¡¯t watch the live broadcast. They had already handed in their phones. Now, everyone only had one phone that could only make a phone call. They couldn¡¯t go online, so Will Smith felt bored. ¡°Now we don¡¯t have to do anything. If you¡¯re bored, we can y cards.¡± Jon suggested. Then he pointed at the poker cards on the side. Jon had already thought of such a boring situation, so he prepared the poker cards in advance. ¡°Wow, boss even prepared this thing. Let¡¯s y cards after dinner.¡± Will Smith looked at the cards and said with a smile. Brown Williams and Leon Evans both nodded. The two also felt bored. Venus Alice looked at Jon. She only joined because Jon was involved. If Jon didn¡¯t y, she had no interest in ying cards with the three men. After dinner, the five began to y cards to kill time. In the temporarymand room. Themander had a solemn expression. Another hour had passed, but there was no news at all. The team that set up the sentry and search didn¡¯t find the robber¡¯s car. And the search team did not find any trace of the robber. And a few technicians were still checking the nearby surveince footage. However, Jon¡¯s car did not appear again. After Jon¡¯s car entered the unmonitored road section, it seemed to have disappeared. This matter gave themander a headache. It was already past seven o¡¯clock in the evening, and the drill had already started for five hours. Because of the bad weather, it was getting dark very quickly today. Originally, it was already very difficult to search during a rainstorm, but now that it was dark, it was even more difficult. Since the start of the exercise, there was no good news at all! ¡°Sir, we found an abandoned factory near the Little Alps in the Pyramid District. The robbers¡¯ vehicles are parked in the abandoned factory.¡± Just when themander was having a headache, the voice of the police officer reporting was heard from the walkie-talkie. Themander was stunned, then a smile appeared on his face. As he stood up, he said into the walkie-talkie, ¡°Send the situation at the scene back using the video signal immediately.¡± After he finished speaking, he had already arrived in front of the control panel. ¡°Connect to the video information sent back by Team A.¡± Themander hurriedly said to a few technical officers. This was the first time they had discovered the situation after such a long time. Themander was naturally very anxious. Seeing this, Gal Gadot and the cameraman also rushed over to broadcast. The drill had been going on for so long, was there finally going to be a breakthrough? It seemed that this drill, which was focused on escaping, had be more difficult for the robbers. But for the police, the difficulty for catching the robbers had also increased. The video signal was quickly connected. On the console¡¯s main screen, an image of the abandoned factory appeared. Because it was already dark, the police officers had already turned on their shlights. The police officers were checking the situation in the abandoned car park. Since the robber¡¯s car was here, then Jon and the others were likely to leave some traces nearby. However, it had been raining heavily. Even if there were any traces, it should have been washed away by the rain. Themander stared at the surveince screen. It was indeed the car of the robbers. However, it looked like it had been abandoned here. There was nothing on the car. Ten million dors, weapons, and ammunition were all taken away by the robbers. ¡°Sir, there are no traces left by the robbers nearby.¡± After the SWAT team carefully checked the surroundings of the car, they immediately reported the situation to the leader of Team A. These words were naturally transmitted to themander through the video. When themander heard this, his face became solemn again. He thought that there would be a breakthrough, but he did not expect to miss it in the end. Now. Since the car had been abandoned here, this also meant that the robbers had long used other methods to leave. In other words, the few technicians had spent a lot of effort to search for the robbers¡¯ car from the surveince, their efforts had been in vain. ¡°Sir, the robbers¡¯ car was abandoned here, but there was no sign of it nearby.¡± ¡°It¡¯s possible that the traces were washed away by the rain, but the biggest possibility is that the robber switched cars to escape.¡± After hearing the report from the SWAT team officer, the squad leader reported the situation to themander. Chapter 132 - The Depressed Commander

Chapter 132: The Depressed Commander

This was an abandoned factory. Therefore, it was very likely that the robbers would prepare a car here in advance. They would drive the car that they had prepared when they robbed the bank. After they drove here, they would change the car that they had prepared beforehand and leave. After all, 10 million USD that weighed 300 pounds, plus the weight of the guns and ammunition, the possibility of the robbers leaving on foot was very small. ¡°Let¡¯s retreat first. The possibility of the robbers leaving the Pyramid District is very small. They must have changed vehicles and left.¡± themander ordered to retreat. After spending so much effort, it couldn¡¯t be said that they didn¡¯t find anything. At least they could confirm that the robbers didn¡¯t leave in the car used to rob the bank. However, there was another piece of bad news. This was because the police did not know what kind of car the robber had switched to. This was a huge and difficult workload for the few technicians who were checking the surveince cameras. The only situation that was beneficial to the police was that North Freedom Road was not a road with dense traffic. To find all the cars that hade out at this time from the surveince cameras, although the workload was not small, it was still a task that could bepleted. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the squad leader replied and then gave an order at the scene, ¡°Everyone, retreat.¡± ¡°Remember to bring back the vehicles that the robbers abandoned.¡± themander ordered. When the squad leader was recording the scene, themander saw that the keys were still on the vehicle of the robbers, and the door was not locked. Obviously, Jon did this on purpose. He left the car key so that when the police officers found the car, they could drive the car back. The rain was still falling. Themander was very depressed. Jon was really difficult to deal with. Right now, him could understand the mood of themanders from the previous two drills. In the livestream. ¡°I knew it. How could the strongest robber in history be so easily caught?¡± ¡°Jon is really strong. In the previous two drills, hepletely tricked the police. Now, he¡¯s leading the police by the nose again.¡± ¡°The previous two times were fine. After all, Jon has hostages. But this time, it¡¯spletely without hostages.¡± ¡°Without hostages, the Florida police still can¡¯t do anything to Jon. Jon is too strong.¡± ¡°From the drill until now, the police haven¡¯t made any progress at all. They even have to help Jon drive his car back.¡± ¡°Jon: Haha, not only did I make you unable to catch me, I also made you drive my car back. I feel inexplicably sad for the police.¡± ¡°Hmph, so what if there¡¯s no progress? Anyway, all the exits in the city have been blocked by the police. I can¡¯t think of how Jon will escape. Sooner orter, Jon will be caught.¡± ¡°Haha, seeing that Jon hasn¡¯t been caught, somebody is anxious.¡± ¡°He¡¯s anxious, he¡¯s anxious.¡± ¡°You can¡¯t think of a way because you¡¯re an idiot. Do you think that Jon can¡¯t think of a way that you can¡¯t think of?¡± ¡°No, no, no. No one would think that Jon¡¯s IQ would be the same as a shithead like you.¡± ¡°Comparing Jon to the morons is humiliating Jon.¡± ¡°Haha, so, where is Jon Now?¡± ¡°I feel that with Jon¡¯s style, he might be somewhere else right now.¡± ¡°Now that I think about it¡­ the police are investigating in the rain, but is the robbers are sleeping?¡± ¡°Good Lord, I¡¯m starting to feel bad for the police.¡± After watching the live broadcast, the audience began to discuss in the livestream. ¡°After Jon leaves North Freedom Road for half an hour, within an hour and a half, monitoring all the vehiclesing out of this road.¡± ¡°Pay special attention to vehicles with seven seats or more, and then check which vehicles are likely to be used by the robbers.¡± Themander looked at the map before speaking to a few technicians. Based on the map, from Jon¡¯s disappearance to the location of the abandoned factory, it was about half an hour¡¯s drive. Adding on the change of car and back on the road, it would not take more than an hour and a half. Therefore, themander asked the technicians to count all the cars within half an hour. However, what themander did not know was that after the robbers changed their car, the robbers stayed in the abandoned factory for another hour. It was already two hourster when Jon appeared in the surveince camera again. And¡­ Just as Jon had hoped, themander ced the focus of the investigation on cars with seven seats or more. It could be said that themander had identally cooperated with Jon¡¯s n perfectly. In the hotel at the urban vige, five people were ying poker, and the atmosphere was very lively. ¡°Boss, you said that the police found our car in the abandoned factory now?¡± Will Smith asked as he yed his cards. However, his face was now covered with notes. There were fifteen of them. Each note represented a loss. As for the other four. Brown had eight, Leon had ten, and Venus had five. As for Jon, he only had one. This meant that he had only lost one game tonight. ¡°Look at the time, it should be about time.¡± Jon looked at his cards and said slowly. If the police had not found the abandoned car by now, it meant that the Florida police¡¯s reaction was a little slow. ¡°However, finding the car is only the beginning. They will be even more troubled in the future. I reckon that in another two days, they might not be able to find this ce.¡± Jon was still very confident in his n. Therefore, from the moment he nned to stay in this hotel for two days, Jon was not worried that the police woulde looking for him in two days. In the temporarymand room. Themander looked at the map. He did not know what the next step of the n was. After all, they did not even know what kind of car the robbers escaped in, so they had no way to deploy it. Now, he could only wait for a few technicians to find the vehicle that hade out from North Freedom Road. Boom! A muffled thunder sounded. Themander looked at the heavy rain outside. He saw a person rushing over from the curtain of rain. It was the squad leader. The squad leader walked over and was silent for a moment. He took out a cigarette, handed it to themander, and said, ¡°Want to smoke?¡± Themander took it and the squad leader lit it for him. Then he lit one for himself. He started smoking. Chapter 133 - Jon鈥檚 Room Records!

Chapter 133: Jon¡¯s Room Records!

Neither of them said a word. The atmosphere was a little depressing. In the livestream. Seeing the two police leaders looking so gloomy, the audience was amused. ¡°Although the atmosphere is a little heavy, I still want tough. What¡¯s the matter? I can¡¯t help it when I see their expressions.¡± ¡°Can you have a little bit ofpassion? The two police leaders are already so miserable, and you still want to see a joke?¡± ¡°I¡¯m sorry, it¡¯s my fault, but I just can¡¯t help it. Hahaha.¡± ¡°What do you think themander and the SWAT team leader are thinking about now?¡± ¡°I think they want to capture Jon and beat him up.¡± ¡°It¡¯s been three drills. This should be the most painful thing for thismander, because up until now, he hasn¡¯t even seen Jon.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. The twomanders had met with the robbers from thest two drills, but now this newmander can¡¯t even see the robbers.¡± ¡°It seems that this time¡¯s arrest won¡¯t be short. I feel that the longer the arrest, the more advantageous it will be for the robbers.¡± ¡°Yeah, as time goes by, the police officers and the arrest team will definitely be tired. When that timees, it will be Jon¡¯s chance.¡± ¡°I have to say, Jon is really terrifying. Whether it¡¯s confronting the police at the bank or escaping, he hasplete control over the rhythm.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. He¡¯spletely leading the police by their noses. This robber is too amazing. He¡¯s indeed the strongest robber in history.¡± ¡°Right now, we don¡¯t know where Jon is resting, but the police can¡¯t ck off. Because any w could lead to the robber sessfully escaping.¡± ¡°Yeah, so this is a major test for the police.¡± ¡°The previous two drills onlysted for less than two days at most, but I think this time, it will start in at least three days.¡± ¡°And it¡¯s raining cats and dogs. The police will have to work for a few days in such weather. It¡¯s hard to even think about it.¡± The audiences were discussing animatedly in the livestream. Although there was no confrontation between the robbers and the police during this drill. Until now, the robbers hadn¡¯t even caught on the camera. But this didn¡¯t hinder the audience¡¯s enthusiasm. Everyone was still enjoying the show. It was now 10 pm. It was the time of the day with the highest number of viewers. At this time, the number of viewers in the live broadcast room had reached 80 million. This was a terrifying number. Compared to the previous live broadcast, the highest number of viewers in the previous live broadcast was over 80 million during the climax of the drill. When Gal Gadot saw this number, she was naturally very happy. The live broadcast had only started for a few hours, yet the number of viewers had already reached this number. This also meant that it was very likely that she would be able to break the record that she had setst time. A new live broadcast record would be born in her hands. Moreover, she could see from the stats that the gifts they received in the livestream had now reached 30 million. The gifts did not stop at all. At this time. Themander finished smoking a cigarette. He looked at the map and said, ¡°At this time, it¡¯s raining so heavily. If the robbers don¡¯t want to escape today, they should find a ce to stay.¡± ¡°So, our search and investigation should focus on hotels and hotels.¡± The squad leader nodded. He thought the same. But, to find where Jon was hiding now was a big problem for the police. Although all the hotels in downtown Florida had been connected to the police station to verify their identity. However, not to mention a high IQ robber like Jon, even a robber with a low IQ wouldn¡¯t be stupid enough to take his identity and check into the hotel. So, it was obviously impossible to find Jon in the identity system of the hotel. However, themander still got up and went to the console. At this time, several technicians were constantly checking the surveince footage. During this time, they were sorting out the vehicles that appeared at various intersections from North Freedom Road because the traffic on North Freedom Road was not very heavy. Moreover, it was a rainstorm. Therefore, during this time, there would be very few vehiclesing out from North Freedom Road. Until now, the technicians had already checked more than half of the surveince records and only found threemercial cars with seven seats and above. Themander looked the situation and his expression softened slightly. The fewer cars they found, the easier it would be to search. For the police, this was also good news. ¡°Check it out. There are a few people called Kirby Jon who have checked in in Florida recently.¡± Themander spoke to one of the technical police officers. Themander was not sure whether Jon had stayed in a hotel after he came to Florida. He was just trying to find out. He wanted to see if Jon had left any traces in the past seven days. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technical officer quickly replied. Then, he entered the police system and checked all the hotel registration records in the city. The technician entered Jon¡¯s name. ¡°Sir, in the past ten days, a total of five people named Kirby Jon have checked into a hotel in the city.¡± Soon, the technician reported the situation he had found. ¡°The robber Jon is among them.¡± Themander and the squad leader quickly came over to take a look. There was a total of five people named Kirby Jon who had checked into a hotel. The robber, Jon, was among them. However, Jon had checked in seven days ago and had already checked out by noon today. ¡°Las Vegas hotel? He sure knows how to enjoy himself. Staying in such a good hotel, it doesn¡¯t seem like he¡¯s here for a drill, but more like he¡¯s here for a vacation.¡± Looking at Jon¡¯s check-in record, the squad leader couldn¡¯t help but say. He obviously knew about this hotel. A five-star hotel cost thousands of dors a night. Although he knew the hotel, he had never stayed in it before. ¡°Squad leader, take Team A and go to the hotel to understand the situation. See if Jon is still hiding in this area.¡± ¡°If there aren¡¯t enough people, send search teams B and C at any time.¡± Even though the robber had checked out at noon this day. Themander still had to arrange for people to go there to check and see if they could get some useful information. After all, during thest drill, Jon hid in the ce that everyone thought was the least likely to hide. This meant that they knew if he would do the same thing this time. Perhaps, before Jon checked into the hotel or the hotel, he had already found a ce to hide next to the hotel. It was possible that after he robbed the bank, he ran in the opposite direction, he went to the abandoned factory in the Little Alps and returned in a different car, and finally he hid next to the Las Vegas hotel. Chapter 134 - In-depth Investigation!

Chapter 134: In-depth Investigation!

Coincidentally, the Las Vega Hotel and the abandoned factory were in the opposite direction. Therefore, the vicinity of this hotel had to be thoroughly investigated. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± When the squad leader heard the order, he responded and turned around to lead the team. When Gal Gadot saw this, she hurriedly called the cameraman to follow the squad leader. After all, there might not be much progress in the temporarymand room in the short term. Therefore, there was not much that could be broadcasted live. It was better to follow the squad leader to broadcast the search operation live. After all, what the audience wanted to see more was what kind of situation the search team would encounter. After they left, themander came to the table and sat down, looking at the map on the table. The technicians continued to work. Since there was not many vehicles entering the North Freedom Road, if they sped up their inspection, they would not miss anything. Ten minutester. a few technicians finally sorted out the things that themander had requested. There were only eight vehiclesing out of the North Freedom Road, seven-seater and abovemercial vehicles. The technician quickly took the data and sent it to themander. The license tes of the eight vehicles were clearly recorded including the information of where they were headed. All the vehicles belonged to Florida. This was expected. After all, it was impossible for Jon¡¯s five robbers to prepare vehicles directly from New York or Pennsylvania. Of course, it was also impossible for them to go to Florida to buy a new car. That was because, they could not register a car in such a short time. So, there were only two scenarios. One was to buy a second-hand car, and the other was to rent a car. In the opinion of themander, the second possibility was more likely the case. ¡°Check these eight cars and see if there are any cars from the car rental agency.¡± themander ordered. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technician replied and went back to the control panel to check the information of these cars. This was because the team in charge of the traffic was a subordinate team of the police department. Therefore, the police system in the temporarymand room could easily find the information of the cars. Half a minuteter. ¡°Found it!¡± the police officer said. Themander heard him and quickly went to the control panel. On the monitor screen, the information of a car was disyed. There were eight cars, and this was the only car that belonged to a car rentalpany. ¡°Check the location of this rental carpany!¡± Themander looked a little excited. As long as he found the car that the robber had changed to, he would be able to track where the robber had escaped to after the change of car. The technical staff quickly investigated the information of this rental carpany. ¡°Creek Street?¡± Looking at the location of the car rental shop, themander¡¯s expression slightly froze. During the preparation time of the past few days, the hotel that Jon and the other three stayed in was in the Mesossipe, on the west side of the city. And Creek Street was on the east side. There were a distance of dozens of kilometers between the two ces. Why did Jon go to such a far ce to rent a car? To deceive people? However, Jon must have known that no matter how far he ran, the car would still be found. It was useless to run such a long distance. Or was he deliberately setting up a trap? ¡°Check this car and see where he went after he left North Freedom Road.¡± Themander frowned and pondered for a moment before speaking to a few technicians. Although he did not know the reason why Jon rented a car so far away. But this was the only clue the police had at the moment. Themander gave an order that they had to investigate further no matter what. A few technicians heard themander¡¯s words and responded. Then, they began to investigate the surveince footage of the car after it left North Freedom Road. Heading to the section of the road. And as the surveince cameras continued to switch. Themander¡¯s expression gradually eased. Because after leaving North Freedom Road, this car had been driving towards the direction of Mesossipe. In other words, the possibility that this car was the vehicle of the robbers was very high. And at this time, the squad leader also led the search team to the Las Vega Hotel. After negotiating with the front desk, the front desk politely responded and quickly informed the hotel manager toe over. After all, the hotel would naturally cooperate with the police when they investigated, but these matters were not something that she, a receptionist, could decide. So, she could only inform the manager toe down. While the manager came down, the cameraman took a picture of the hotel lobby. It was magnificent and luxuriously decorated. In the livestream. ¡°Holy sh*t, Jon and the five robbers actually stayed in this ce for a few days. Are they rich?¡± ¡°Wasn¡¯t he just a small FBI agent before he participated in the drill? How could he afford to stay in such a hotel?¡± ¡°I seriously suspect that Jon really robbed a bank. Otherwise, this matter wouldn¡¯t make sense.¡± ¡°It should be. After all, Jon was able to enter the bank¡¯s safe. Maybe he really took some money along the way. I suggest the police investigate him!¡± ¡°Haha, he¡¯s jealous. He¡¯s jealous.¡± ¡°A normal suite at the Las Vegas hotel costs 3,888 dors per night. is that expensive?¡± ¡°Sh*t, 3,888 dors per night was ridiculously expensive. How rich are you? Does your family run apany?¡± ¡°That¡­ the daughter of my uncle¡¯s son¡¯s girlfriend¡¯s uncle¡¯s second aunt is a shareholder of Microsoft¡­¡± ¡°Lol, is he rted to Microsoft? He¡¯s a millionaire!¡± ¡°Alright, stop guessing. Jon gets a share of the profits from the live broadcast of the drill. This is his legal ie. Don¡¯t be jealous.¡± ¡°It means that the reason of Jon can afford to stay in such a hotel because of the contribution of his fans who earn 3,000 dors a month?¡± ¡°My monthly sry is 2,800 dors. Do you think I would hurt my wallet for 2,000 dors and leave myself with 800 dors for dinner? You¡¯re too na?ve, I will directly tip 3,000 dors to Jon because mypany provides food, amodation, and 200 dor for full attendance.¡± ¡°That¡¯s enough. Don¡¯t be jealous and weird. Did Jon beg you to give him gifts?¡± ¡°Your monthly sry is 3,000 dors. Don¡¯t tell me the other people have a monthly sry of 3,000 dors too? With such a small sry, why don¡¯t you think about what you¡¯re not doing well? Instead, you¡¯re being weird. You deserve the low sry.¡± ¡°Hey, let me tell the envious viewers that my family runs apany and Jon has two live broadcasts. I¡¯ve given a total of 1 million. Are you guys jealous?¡± ¡°My family is also rich. I don¡¯t care about that. I¡¯m really going to buy gifts today.¡± ¡°What are you guys doing this to those haters? Are you going to drive them crazy? Oh my God.¡± Chapter 135 - Planning to Go to the Temporary Command Room!

Chapter 135: nning to Go to the Temporary Command Room!

After the audience saw the environment of the hotel. They began to send out tons of messages. And in these messages, a few of the audiences ridiculed the people who sent gifts to the livestream. After that, the people who sent gifts were a little unhappy, and they sent even more gifts to prove their financial strength. In just a few minutes, the number of gifts in the livestream had increased by nearly 10 million. And when some viewers saw this scene, they were extremely envious and jealous, but it didn¡¯t work in the slightest. Even Gal Gadot was a little surprised when she saw this situation. ording to this situation, Jon¡¯s share of the livestream profit in this drill was probably much greater than thest time. At this moment, the hotel manager came down. The team leader sent two SWAT officers to follow the manager to check the surveince cameras. Then he took the other SWAT officers to the nearby neighborhood to search. They came to the hotel just to understand the situation. Naturally, they wouldn¡¯t think that Jon was still here. So, they wouldn¡¯t waste too much manpower here. In hotel of the urban vige. The five of them had already ended their poker game. Jon stood in front of the window, looking at the heavy rain outside. ¡°What are you thinking about?¡± Venus Alice came behind him and looked at him lovingly. She clearly showed her affection towards him. Jon did not turn around. ¡°I¡¯m thinking that I should go to the temporarymand room of the police tomorrow.¡± Venus Alice was shocked when she heard that. ¡°Why are you going to the temporarymand room?¡± Venus Alice asked in disbelief. After escaping with great difficulty, Jon actually wanted to go to the temporarymand room of the police officers. Venus could not understand this operation. ¡°Although the police won¡¯t be able to find us in the short term, hiding is not the purpose of this exercise.¡± ¡°If we want to win, we have to leave the city under the pursuit of the police officers ¡°Although we have a chance to wait until the police officers are tired after hiding here for two days, it is not enough. If we want to escape the city, we need to take some initiative. I want to know the real-time deployment of the police.¡± Jon spoke in an extremely calm tone. It was as if going to the temporarymand room of the police officers was a trivial matter. ¡°You want to go to the temporarymand room, likest time, and set up a bug to monitor the deployment of the police officers.¡± Venus Alice asked. During thest drill, Jon had used the smelting furnace to set up a bug next to the temporarymand room. He had directly monitored all the operations of the Pennsylvania State Department. And what Jon had said just now clearly showed that he had this idea again. ¡°Yes, only by monitoring the actions of the police officers can we take the initiative. So, even if this is a little risky, it¡¯s still necessary.¡± Jon said with a smile. Venus Alice stared at his side face. Jon¡¯s words did make sense. However, it would be too dangerous to go to the police temporarymand room. Venus was worried about Jon going alone. After all, Jon was the leader of the team. If anything happened to Jon, the team would have no chance of winning. ¡°Why don¡¯t I go with you tomorrow?¡± Venus Alice was silent for a while, then looked at Jon and spoke. From Jon¡¯s tone, although going to the police¡¯s temporarymand room was a bit risky, he would definitely go. If she couldn¡¯t persuade him, then she would go with him. If the two of them went together, they could back up each other. ¡°Hmm? Where are you going?¡± Venus¡¯voice was louder, which attracted the attention of the other three people who were gathered together and watching TV. Will Smith carried her away and asked. ¡°Tomorrow, I n to go to the temporarymand room of the police and find a way to install a bug and a pinhole camera there ¡°If we want to escape from the city but hiding here for two days is far from enough. I also need to know the police¡¯s deployment decision-making in real time.¡± Jon said. Originally, he did not n to hide it from his team, but since Will Smith asked so he just revealed his n. ¡°Boss, you¡¯re going to the temporarymand room?¡± Will Smith was a little stunned when he heard it. Good heavens, now that the entire city was searching for them, Jon not only did not stay here, instead, he was nning to go to the enemy¡¯s post. That was a bold idea. ¡°Yes, we can¡¯t improve our chances without taking risks. I want to win this drill.¡± Jon looked back at them, his voice determined. For every drill, Jon wanted to win more than anyone. If he won the drill, he would not only be rewarded by the system, but also got what he wanted. Therefore, victory was extremely important to Jon. ¡°But this is too risky. After all, the temporarymand room is the headquarters of the police force. If you go there, you¡¯re practically walking right into their door.¡± Will Smith spoke. In fact, he also wanted to win this drill. After all, the Pennsylvania Police Department had lost thest drill. Now, it was the same group of robbers. In order to save some face for the police department, he couldn¡¯t let the Florida Police Department win the drill. However, he couldn¡¯t take such a risk just to win. After all, if Jon was caught in the temporarymand room, the four of them didn¡¯t know what to do. ¡°Boss, how about this? Give me the bug and camera, and I¡¯ll go to the temporarymand room to carry out this mission.¡± ¡°After all, without me, our team won¡¯t have much of an impact. Without you, it would be different.¡± Will Smith suggested. He didn¡¯t have much of an impact on the oue of this battle, so he could give it a try. ¡°None of you can go. I have to do this alone.¡± Jon replied. He now had the Aura Concealment Skill. He couldpletely wander around the police¡¯s ¡®temporarymand room without being noticed. It was precisely because of this skill that Jon decided to take this risk. If Will Smith went there, he would have been discovered before he even reached the temporarymand room. Will Smith was about to say something when Jon raised his hand and interrupted him. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, since I dared to make such a decision, it means that I¡¯m confident. Tomorrow, you guys will stay in the hotel.¡± ¡°No one needs to go with me because you guys won¡¯t be of much help. You might even drag me down.¡± The four of them saw that Jon was determined and did not say anything more. After all, they had already agreed that Jon was their leader. All the action ns followed Jon¡¯s orders. Chapter 136 - Suspected Robbers Vehicle!

Chapter 136: Suspected Robbers¡¯ Vehicle!

In the temporarymand room. With the efforts of a few technicians, they finally locked onto the location where the suspected vehicle disappeared in the surveince camera. And that ce was only about a kilometer away from the Las Vegas Hotel where Jon had checked in before. This also made themander more certain that this vehicle was most likely the robbery vehicle. ¡°Search Team A, please pay attention.¡± Themander picked up the walkie-talkie and said to the team leader who was searching near the Las Vegas Hotel. ¡°Through the surveince video near North Freedom Road, we found the car that the robber had switched to. This car drove from North Freedom Road to the Mesossipe District and finally disappeared at the entrance of the underground parking lot of the Toronto Hotel next to Skrk Road.¡± ¡°Please let Team A to check immediately!¡± ¡°Suspected robber¡¯s vehicle is a ck seven-seater MPV, license te number 30221.¡± In the eyes of themander, tit was most likely the vehicle of the robbers. This could be a chance for the police to end this drill. If not for the fact that they were too far away, themander would have wanted to personally participate in the operation. ¡°Team A copy that!¡± On the walkie-talkie, the team leader¡¯s voice was a little excited. After all, after searching for so long, the police finally had some clues. Themander put down the walkie-talkie in his hand and looked at the surveince screen. He could not help but feel nervous. He thought that this time, he should be able to make some breakthrough progress. But he didn¡¯t know, he was wrong from the beginning Because, after changing cars, Jon stayed at the abandoned factory for an hour. And the time that themander gave the order to the searching team, Jon and the others drove a 5-seater car were caught on the surveince camera leaving the North Freedom Road. He just missed it! After such a lethal mistake in the direction of the search, everything that happened next was destined to be wrong. On the other side. After receiving the orders from themander, the squad leader hurriedly put away his walkie-talkie. He ordered his team members, ¡°All members, quickly get into the car, we have found the suspect vehicle!¡± All the team members hurriedly followed the squad leader and returned to the police car. When Gal Gadot and the cameraman saw this, they also hurriedly got into their car. After getting onto the car, Gal Gadot took the microphone and went on the camera, exining the current situation to the audience. ¡°Just now, we received news from the temporarymand room. There was an intel stated that a suspected robber¡¯s car was found.¡± ¡°And this car is in an underground parking lot not far from us. This is very likely to be a key breakthrough for the police.¡± ¡°And now, we are following the search team to the ce where the suspected car is parked. If this car is really the car of the robbers, then this drill might end tonight!¡± This situation had changed in a sudden. Before the audience in the live broadcast room could react, the police officers had all boarded the cars and the police cars had already started moving. ¡°They found a vehicle that looks like a robber. Have the police finally made any progress?¡± ¡°It looks like Jon has already been exposed, and the situation is not looking good.¡± ¡°Do you think that the current Jon has already fallen asleep and was captured by the police officers in his sleep?¡± ¡°It¡¯s very possible. It looks like this drill is going to end early. I still want to watch it for a few more days.¡± ¡°Since the beginning of the drill, it has been eight hours. Jon has already held on for a long time. After all, some people thought that Jon wouldn¡¯tst more than four or five hours.¡± ¡°Good lord. It seems like Jon¡¯s arrest is already a certainty ording to you guys.¡± ¡°Did you not hear clearly what happened? The police only said that it was a suspected car. It¡¯s not certain whether it was the robber¡¯s car or not.¡± ¡°These people can¡¯t wait for Jon to be caught.¡± ¡°I just hope that he will be caught as soon as possible. Why are you guys still have high hope for Jon?¡± ¡°The check-up isplete, these people are diagnosed as morons.¡± ¡°If you don¡¯t want to watch it, then get lost. Why are you still here? Please find your way out.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be angry with such a retard. It¡¯s not worth it.¡± ¡°But to be honest, I feel that the probability of Jon being caught this time is quite high. Although it¡¯s a suspected car, the police must be quite confident.¡± ¡°Sigh, do you still remember thest drill where the police found Jon¡¯s room records? At that time, you guys also said that the probability of him being arrested is quite high, but what happened in the end?¡± ¡°Ta, I think so true. I remember I was pped in the face as wellst time.¡± ¡°Haha, keep watching. The truth will be revealed very soon.¡± Because the police seemed to have made a breakthrough, therefore the live broadcast room was very lively. The viewers discussed on thement section. Many viewers thought the car that the police found was Jon¡¯s car. In their eyes, the police had a very good chance of winning. The police quickly arrived at the underground parking lot that themander said. They could have parked the car in the middle of the road after entering the entrance. In this way, when the robbers wanted to escape with their cars, the police cars parked in the middle of the road could also act as roadblocks. All the special police officers got out of their cars and gathered, ready for battle. The squad leader turned on the camera on his helmet. He allowed the temporarymand room to be able to see the situation at the scene at any time. ¡°Leave two people here to guard. The remaining two people will go in with me.¡± After the captain gave the order, he carried his gun and walked inside. A few special police officers followed. Gal Gadot and the cameraman also followed, maintaining a certain distance to carry out the live broadcast. As the police officers moved forward, there were four or five forked roads. Then, the captain signaled for the police officers to split up and search. A few minutester. ¡°Sir, we found a suspected vehicle.¡± A police officer¡¯s report was heard through the headset. The squad leader quickly went over and indeed, he saw a ck seven-seater MPV quietly parked in the parking space. The license te number was 30221! At this moment, there was naturally no one in the vehicle. The squad leader quickly picked up the shlight and shone it on the interior of the vehicle, but he did not find anything. ¡°Sir, we have found the car, but we do not see any trace of the robbers.¡± The squad leader quickly picked up the walkie-talkie and reported the situation to the temporarymand room. But there was no need for him to report. Themander also used the camera on his helmet to see the scene clearly on the surveince screen. ¡°Go to the hotel and look at the surveince video of the underground parking lot. Check the hotel upstairs and confirm if the person who got out of the car was the robber.¡± Themander gave an order to the squad leader. Since the surveince camera of the underground parking lot belonged to the hotel, the surveince video could not be checked through the police system. Chapter 137 - It鈥檚 Not Jon. Hope Shattered!

Chapter 137: It¡¯s Not Jon. Hope Shattered!

¡°Yes.¡± The squad leader replied and then led his men to the hotel to check the surveince camera. In the livestream. ¡°Did Jon run away? I knew it was impossible for him to be caught so quickly.¡± ¡°No way. Jon is not in the car, but the car is here. I think Jon should be nearby.¡± ¡°More than 200 pounds of money, the guns and ammunition aren¡¯t in the car as well. Could it be that the robbers were carrying it with them?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think this is Jon¡¯s car. If it were, why would Jon just park it here?¡± ¡°Yeah, and there¡¯s a surveince camera behind the car. Would Jon let the surveince camera capture him so easily?¡± ¡°I also feel that this car can¡¯t be Jon¡¯s.¡± ¡°The police have spent so much time and manpower. If this car isn¡¯t Jon¡¯s, then it¡¯s a waste of manpower and time.¡± In the livestream, the bulletments were still surging wildly. Now, a portion of the audience had already sensed that something was wrong. They felt that this suspected car that the police thought was probably not the car that Jon and the others had switched to. In the hotel. The squad leader sent someone to check the hotel¡¯s hotel records. There was no information about Jon and the others at all. This was as expected. After all, Jon could not have used his identity to check in. Otherwise, the police would have received the info immediately. Now, all hope was ced on the surveince video of the underground parking lot. If they could check the security footage and confirm that the person who got out of the car was the robber. Then even if the robber used fake identity information to check in, the police can still catch them. Hotel surveince room. A special police officer was essing the security footage, and the squad leader was watching nervously. Temporarymand room. Themander and a few technical personnel are also nervous. Because this surveince footage almost determined the direction of this drill. If the persons who got out of the car were really the robbers, then it meant that they had really made a breakthrough. But if this car wasn¡¯t the robber¡¯s recement car, then it meant that their efforts over the past few hours had been in vain. They started to y the surveince footage. The car slowly drove in from the door. It stopped in the parking space. During this time, everyone did not blink their eyes and held their breath as they looked at the surveince footage. Themander, the squad leader, the police officers, Gal Gadot, and the cameraman, all of them became nervous. Under everyone¡¯s gaze. The driver¡¯s seat door opened, and a young man walked out. This young man was not one of the five robbers. Seeing this scene, themander¡¯s expression changed from his anticipation and desire changed to disappointment and solemnity. The driver was not the robber. Then, a young woman got out of the car. They walked out of the underground parking lot hand in hand. It was obvious that they were a couple. Their hopes were shattered! The temporarymand room and the surveince room werepletely silent! Inparison, thements in the live broadcast room were very lively. ¡°Haha, what did I just say? I knew it was impossible for Jon to be captured so quickly. As expected, my guess was right.¡± ¡°When all of us thought that Jon was about to be captured, Jon always surprised us.¡± ¡°Is Everyone thought that Jon was going to be arrested? I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m an exception. I¡¯m not one of them. I didn¡¯t think that Jon would be arrested.¡± ¡°I¡¯m an exception too.¡± ¡°Only a portion of US thought that Jon would be arrested., but not us. We always believed in Jon.¡± ¡°Sigh, I¡¯m starting to sympathize with the police. After all, they worked so hard for so long, but in the end, it was all for naught.¡± ¡°The drill has been going on for eight hours, but now, the police have to start from the beginning again. Why do I feel a little sad?¡± ¡°The police are quite miserable. In order to focus all their attention on this suspected car, they spent a few hours and a lot of manpower.¡± ¡°Brothers, this is a drill! This is what we want to see in a drill.¡± ¡°It was five hours ago when the robbers switched cars. At this time, could Jon be preparing to break out of the city at a junction?¡± ¡°Probably not. After all, the police are still strict at every junction. Jon wouldn¡¯t do such a thing.¡± ¡°Haha, while you are still wondering if Jon will break out of the city, Jon might be somewhere, looking at the rain outside the window gloomily, sipping red wine in his mouth, and then letting out a long sigh. Being invincible is so lonely.¡± ¡°Oh my God, there¡¯s a scene. The robbers are enjoying the red wine, and the police are so busy. Why is this scene so familiar?¡± ¡°Of course this is familiar. This is what happened in thest drill, and it was rated as one of the famous scenes of the year.¡± ¡°Haha, with such a let-down, I feel that the police are really frustrated.¡± In the livestream, the audiences were still discussing intensely. Jon did not fall into the. This was obviously a very good thing for the audiences who wanted to watch more live broadcasts. However, a portion of the audience began to feel sorry for the police. After all, they had worked hard for so long, spent time and manpower, but had not made any progress. It was hard not to feel sorry for them. At this moment, the poprity of the live broadcast room had also reached 90 million. It directly broke the previous live broadcast record of Gal Gadot. And the gifts in the livestream had also increased. Temporarymand room. Themander looked at the surveince screen and fell into deep thought. Out of the few MPV cars with seven seats and above, only this one was suspicious. But why wasn¡¯t the robber¡¯s vehicle? After the robbers entered North Freedom Road, it was impossible for the robbers to disappear into thin air. What exactly went wrong? Themander¡¯s mood was very solemn. Even though this drill had been going on until now, not a single police officer had been eliminated. It was much better than the previous two drills. Right now, almost nine hours had passed, but there was still no progress. This was a very embarrassing thing. Not to mention, there were so many people in the country paying attention to this drill. The pressure was huge. Then, themander let out a long breath and picked up the walkie-talkie. ¡°Team A, let¡¯s pack up first.¡± There was a hint of helplessness in his tone. Originally, he had nned to let the search team continue to search around the Las Vegas Hotel. But it was already sote, and it was still a rainstorm. The difficulty of the search was too great. And if they kept searching the hotel, they would dy the operation of the next day. So, themander let the team came back first. Took a rest and didn¡¯t affect tomorrow¡¯s operation. Chapter 138 - Continue to Search for the Robbers Car!

Chapter 138: Continue to Search for the Robbers¡¯ Car!

¡°Roger that!¡± After receiving the order from themander, the squad leader replied to him and then ordered members of the special police force, ¡°All units retreat!¡± Although, the squad leader was very unwilling to ept this. However, there was nothing he could do. Right now, he didn¡¯t even have any information about the robbers. Even if he searched through the night, there would be no result. They might as well go back first. They would continue the operation after they had made a n. ¡°The police are going to call it a day. It looks like there won¡¯t be any progress today. This drill will not end today.¡± ¡°Based on the current situation, this drill is already developing into a protracted war.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. After all, the police haven¡¯t even found any traces of the robbers. Under such circumstances, it¡¯s obviously impossible to end the drill quickly.¡± ¡°Even though the police don¡¯t know the whereabouts of the robbers, they have already set up roadblocks at all the intersections. It¡¯s not easy for the robbers to leave.¡± ¡°The current situation is that the police can¡¯t find the robbers, but the robbers can¡¯t leave either. This can be considered a stalemate, right?¡± ¡°It¡¯s indeed a stalemate. Under normal circumstances, it¡¯s not realistic for the robbers to bring money and break through the police¡¯s roadblocks. However, the police will also be tired at times. When that timees, it might be the opportunity for the robbers.¡± ¡°Whether the robber will sessfully charge through the blocks or be arrested by the police will depend on whose skills are better.¡± ¡°Anyway, we should be able to enjoy ourselves.¡± ¡°Yeah. After all, we have also been looking forward to this drill for ten days. If it ends just like that, it would be a shame.¡± ¡°I think so too. Actually, I don¡¯t care too much about who wins and who loses between the police and robbers. As long as the process is exciting enough to bring me the enjoyment of watching the live broadcast, that will be enough.¡± ¡°Haha, the two generous viewers.¡± ¡°But this mentality is indeed very good. It doesn¡¯t matter who wins. What¡¯s important is whether the police and robbers¡¯ confrontation is exciting enough.¡± ¡°I do hope that Jon will win. I have very high expectations for Jon.¡± ¡°But this drill is different from the previous ones. Not only is the focus on escaping, but there¡¯s also a rule that everyone hasn¡¯t noticed.¡± ¡°The police and robbers in this drill can surrender. Do you think that Jon will find a ce to hide and wait until themander can¡¯t take it anymore and surrender?¡± ¡°This is a drill, and in front of so many people. Once the police surrender, they would be a disgrace to the whole country. It¡¯s impossible.¡± ¡°Yeah, the police wouldn¡¯t surrender. With Jon¡¯s character, he wouldn¡¯t be willing to hide like this. I have a feeling that he might make a move next.¡± ¡°After all, he¡¯s a highly intelligent robber. It¡¯s reasonable for him to make a move when it¡¯s difficult to break through. Everyone, look forward to the progress of the drill.¡± In the livestream, the audiences were discussed animatedly. At this time, everyone knew that the police wouldn¡¯t be able to catch Jon today. However, the police had also sealed off the entire city¡¯s exit. As long as the robbers couldn¡¯t escape, it was only a matter of time before they were caught. However, facing such a situation, Jon would definitely not sit still and wait for death. He might make some moves. As for what kind of moves, it was unknown. Temporarymand room. Themander sat at the table and looked at the map on the table. His brows were tightly knitted together. This was the current situation of the police. After spending an afternoon, they still did not find the car that the robbers had switched to. It was equivalent to doing nothing. This time, there were quite a number of police officers participating in the drill. However, there were many roads that could leave the city. Hence, the police force deployed at each intersection basically ounted for 90% of the police officers that participated in the drill. The police force that themander could deploy was only three search teams. There were about 30 people in total. If they could not determine the location of the robbers, with their own police force, they would not be able to carry out arge-scale search in the city. Therefore, the first thing to do in order to catch the robbers was to narrow down the search area. Only by doing this way, they might have a chance to be able to spare more police force to cooperate with the search team to conduct arge-scale search. Thus, they could catch the robbers. The prerequisite for narrowing down the area was to find the car that the robbers had switched to. This was because only in this way could they determine the direction of the robbers¡¯ escape route. Only then could the searching area be narrowed. Themander stood up and went to the side of the control panel. He said to a few technicians, ¡°Continue to check all the vehicles with seven seats or more that came out from North Freedom Road. The time for this inspection will be increased by one hour.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t believe that he can really disappear here?¡± It was impossible for Jon and the others to disappear. It was also impossible for the robbers to spread their wings and fly out. Therefore, themander guessed that Jon had deliberately stayed in the same ce for a period of time after he changed the car. Then, he drove away. With Jon¡¯s IQ, it was very likely that he would do that. And what he had asked the technicians to check before was all the cars within an hour and a half after entering the intersection. There was no sign of the robber¡¯s car, so themander confirmed this guess. But no matter what. There was only one road now, so themander could only increase the time for the inspection. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technicians responded. They started the hard work again. Even if they worked overtime and stayed up all night, the technicians did notin anything. After all, the entire country was watching this drill, and it was a matter of the reputation of the entire police force in Florida. As a member of the police force, the technicians also hoped that the police force would win. Moreover, Jon was so popr now, and he was called a highly intelligent robber, the strongest robber in history. He had already won two drills, if the Florida police force could defeat him this time, they could prove the strength of the police department. So, under such circumstances, overtime was nothing. Themander returned to his desk and continued to study the map. He was thinking about where Jon would appear aftering out of North Freedom Road. And where would he go? Not long after, the search team returned. The squad leader, Gal Gadot, and the cameraman got out of the car and walked over. The rest of the special police stayed in the car and were on standby at all times. ¡°Sir, where are we heading in our investigation now?¡± the squad leader sat down beside the table and asked themander. ¡°Continue to look for the car that the robber changed into. Only by confirming the car that the robber left North Freedom Road, then we can determine which was the direction that the robbers escape to and then narrow down the search area. Only then, we might have a chance to catch the robber.¡± themander replied while looking at the map. Chapter 139 - There鈥檚 A 90% Chance of Success!

Chapter 139: There¡¯s A 90% Chance of Sess!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The squad leader nodded slowly. Without saying anything, he lit a cigarette for himself and looked at the rain outside. The squad leader looked at it for a long time before saying slowly, ¡°This robber is really difficult to deal with. He¡¯s worthy of being called a highly intelligent robber, the strongest robber in history.¡± ¡°Just by switching cars in the Little Alps, we¡¯ve wasted an entire afternoon¡¯s effort and returned to the starting point.¡± There was seriousness and admiration in his tone. Jon was the most difficult opponent he had encountered in his many years as a police officer. Although, through Jon¡¯s first two drills, he had felt that Jon was not easy to deal with. So, from the beginning of the drill, he had no intention of underestimating Jon. But as the drill began and the two sides really fought, the squad leader realized that he had still underestimated Jon. The drill had already been going on for nine hours, but they still hadn¡¯t determined Jon¡¯s location. It was because the trick of Jon changed to another car at the abandoned factory in the Little Alps was too wonderful. The robbers had wasted a lot of their opponents¡¯ time and police force. They had also bought themselves a long period of time to catch their breath. Themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows and looked outside. It was already dark, and it was still raining heavily. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s a difficult opponent to deal with. This drill will not end in a short period of time.¡± ¡°Let the brothers of the search team rest now. There shouldn¡¯t be any more operations tonight. Let the brothers rest well and keep their spirits up so that they can keep their good performance tomorrow.¡± themander said slowly. At this moment, they didn¡¯t even have a clear direction to take any action. It would be a waste of manpower to let the search team stand by and wait for orders. It would be better to let them go so that they could rest up and prepare for tomorrow¡¯s operation. ¡°Okay.¡± the squad leader nodded, then stood up to give the order to the police officers. In the livestream. ¡°Themander said that there won¡¯t be any action tonight. Then there won¡¯t be anything to watch. It¡¯s time to sleep.¡± ¡°Aren¡¯t you guys going to watch the live broadcast all night?¡± ¡°There won¡¯t be any action tonight anyway. Are you going to watch the heavy rain all night long?¡± ¡°Speaking of which, the police are quite miserable. It¡¯s almost midnight now. Jon is probably fell asleep after drinking all the red wine, and the police are still here trying to figure out how to catch the robbers.¡± ¡°Yeah, look at thismander. He¡¯s smoking one cigarette after another. He should be quite frustrated right now.¡± ¡°Inexplicably sad, inexplicably frustrated, inexplicably wanting tough.¡± ¡°I can understand why people are feeling sad for no reason. But what¡¯s the meaning of wanting tough at themander? Themander is already miserable, yet you still want tough at him?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not that I¡¯mughing at themander. I just feel that the situation between the police and the robbers is a little tooical.¡± ¡°Actually, this isn¡¯tical. In a real battle, this might also be the case. The robbers are escaping while the police spend the night researching ways to catch them.¡± ¡°This group of people has worked so hard to stay at their posts. We should salute them.¡± ¡°Salute!¡± When the audiences saw this scene, they all knew that there shouldn¡¯t be any progress today. And at this time, when most of the people had gone to sleep. Themander was still under the awning in the heavy rain. Looking at the map, he was studying the possible escape routes of the robbers. At this moment, some people felt as if their hearts had been hit by something. Yes, it was these people who worked day and night to maintain the stability of this society! They were amazing! At this time, Gal Gadot was also ready to rest. After all, there was no progress at the moment. She also had to rest up, because there was still a live broadcast tomorrow. This time the city television station assigned two cameramen to Gal Gadot. Therefore, this cameraman could also go to rest, and let another person rece him. They had to guaranteed 12 hours of live broadcast uninterrupted. In the hotel of the urban vige. Will Smith and the four people had returned to their rooms to rest. Jon sat in front of the window, looking out. In his mind, he was nning to go to the temporarymand room. Although Jon had the Aura Concealment Skill, which was very helpful to his n, Jon still had to have a careful n. No matter what, the temporarymand room was the headquarters of the police. Without a n, the sess rate was definitely not high. At this moment, there was a knock on his door. The knocking was very soft, but because the hotel was not soundproof, Jon could still hear it clearly. Jon paused and looked at the time. It was already twelve o¡¯clock, and the knocking was so soft, so Jon knew it without thinking. The person outside the door should be Venus Alice. He got up and opened the door. It was indeed Venus Alice standing outside the door. The top half of her body was a loose t-shirt that covered her shorts. Her long hair was loose, and she was wearing slippers. ¡°Venus, what¡¯s the matter sote at night?¡± Jon¡¯s voice was a little puzzled. ¡°Aren¡¯t you going to let me in?¡± Venus smiled and looked at Jon. She had intended to rest, but she had not fallen asleep. She was thinking about Jon going to the temporarymand room tomorrow. So, she came over. ¡°Come in.¡± Jon nodded and turned to aside. Venus walked past, and a faint body fragrance lingered around Jon¡¯s nose. ¡°You¡¯re going to the temporarymand room tomorrow. What do you need me to do?¡± Venus looked at Jon and asked. Going to the police¡¯s temporarymand room was definitely very risky, so Venus wanted to help Jon do something. ¡°I really don¡¯t need your help. I already have a n. There shouldn¡¯t be any idents.¡± Jon smiled and replied. ¡°How confident are you? ¡± Venus asked again. Jon Thought for a moment and said, ¡°90% confident.¡± There was no such thing as perfect in this world. There would always be all kinds of idents. The 10% was subtracted due to the unexpected ident that might interrupt his n. Venus was slightly stunned when she heard Jon¡¯s words. She could not believe it. Why was he so confident? He was so confident even when going to the enemy¡¯s post? This was ridiculous! She originally thought that even if Jon had a n, his confidence would only be 50-60%. She did not expect him to be 90% confident. From Jon¡¯s expression, it seemed like he was being modest. Venus did not know what to say. Chapter 140 - Checking the Surveillance Footage Overnight!

Chapter 140: Checking the Surveince Footage Overnight!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio While Venus was in shock, the recement cameraman was still broadcasting the situation in the temporarymand room. In front of the console, a few technicians were still working hard. They were still checking the vehicles from the surveince footage. Next to the table under the awning, themander and the squad leader sat facing each other around the table. They smoked and remained silent. Themander held a red pen and frowned as he looked at the map. After a long while, he sighed. ¡°Where do you think Jon will escape to?¡± ¡°The Moses District in front of North Freedom Road? But that shouldn¡¯t be possible. After all, after Jon switched the car on North Freedom Road, he must have known that our attention would be on the Moses District.¡± ¡°And our focus is on this area. Under such circumstances, Jon would definitely not choose to break out from here.¡± ¡°So, he wants to focus all my attention on Moses District and find a chance to break through from the opposite direction?¡± Themander seemed to be talking to himself, but also to the squad leader. The squad leader looked at themander. On the map, there was a circle in each of the two districts he mentioned. The squad leader also frowned and pondered but didn¡¯t say anything. ording to the situation, Jon was most likely to attract the police¡¯s attention to Moses District, and then leave from Moses District. But, if he could think of it, Jon could also think of it too. After all, Jon was very smart. If Jon could predict police¡¯s action, would he do the opposite? Did Jon not flee to Morton or was he waiting for an opportunity in Moses? He had no clue. 2:59 am. The technicians sorted all the cars with seven seats and above that came out from North Freedom Road within the time requested by themander. They recorded them on the notebook and handed them to themander. ¡°There is a total of five new vehicles, but none of these five vehicles are from the rental carpany.¡± a technician said to themander. Themander looked at the notebook and listened to the report of the technician with a solemn expression. On the notebook, there was no problem with the vehicle information. It did not seem to be rted to the robbers. Themander had a nk look in his eyes. How was this possible? They had already checked through the an-hourter footage, but there was still no sign of the robbers¡¯ vehicle. If they still fast forward the surveince footage, it would be around the time when the search team rushed over to the abandoned factory. Could it be that the robbers had been waiting in the small Alps for more than two hours and left just before the search team arrived? If that was the case, wouldn¡¯t it be a bit risky for the robbers? ¡°Do you think it¡¯s possible that the robbers didn¡¯t take the car but left on foot?¡± Opposite him, the squad leader thought for a moment and said to themander. If they couldn¡¯t find the robbers¡¯ car, then it could only mean that the robbers left on foot. ¡°The possibility is very small. Ten million US dors is over 250 pounds. With guns and ammunition, the weight of each robber needs to carry is about 90 pounds.¡± ¡°And it¡¯s raining all the time. How far can they go on foot?¡± Themander also thought of this possibility, but he quickly denied it, ¡°Jon is such a smart person. He will definitely think that as long as we find the abandoned factory and their abandoned cars, we will increase the police force at all the junctions in Moses District.¡± ¡°He wouldn¡¯t choose to leave this way.¡± the squad leader nodded. Indeed, the robbers needed to bring too many things. Even the SWAT team members wouldn¡¯t be able to go far with a weight of 70 pounds. In a rainstorm, they wouldn¡¯t be able to go far. Jon wouldn¡¯t choose to leave this way. ¡°Everyone, work hard tonight. Continue to extend the search time. During daybreak, we must find the robbers¡¯ car.¡± themander thought for a while and said to the technicians. Since they could not find the robber¡¯s car during this period of time, they would continue to extend the search time. He did not believe that Jon and the others could really grow wings and fly away. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technicians responded and continued to work. In the livestream. Although it was already early in the morning, there were still more than ten million viewers watching the live broadcast. ¡°Guys, are you still awake? It will be dawn soon.¡± ¡°I heard that staying upte is not good for the body, so in order to avoid hurting the body, I decided to stay up until morning.¡± ¡°Reasonable, logical, and touching. The geniusd.¡± ¡°But I¡¯m quite curious. The police have searched for so long, but they still haven¡¯t found the robber¡¯s car. So how did Jon leave North Freedom Road?¡± ¡°He should have left on foot, right? After all, although their things are very heavy, didn¡¯t Jon and the other robber also carry goldst time?¡± ¡°Now that you mention it, it seems to be true, right?¡± ¡°You¡¯re all bullsh*ting. Think about it carefully. How far is the bank from the hotel in thest drill, and how far they needed to travel to leave the city this time?¡± ¡°Moreover, under the circumstances where the police put their focus here, or in a rainstorm, how far can they go while carrying such a heavy thing?¡± ¡°It¡¯s impossible. Themander said that. Are you more clever than themander?¡± ¡°Actually, I think that themander was thinking to the wrong direction. The cars that the police want to check are all seven-seater and above.¡± ¡°What if the robbers thought of this possibility and prepared a four-seater car in advance?¡± ¡°F*ck, it seems to be true. The cars that themander asked the technicians to check were all seven-seater and above. If Jon switched to a four-seater car, then the direction of the search would bepletely wrong.¡± ¡°That¡¯s unlikely, right? After all, there are five robbers and so many cash, guns, and ammunition. How can a four-seater car fit them?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. Just ten million in cash would require a lot of space, right?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think that¡¯s possible either. However, there¡¯s no sign of Jon in a seven-seater or MPV cars, so it should be a good idea to focus on a four-seater sedan.¡± ¡°I just used ten million in cash and four youngdies to do an experiment. The five of us together with ten million in cash wouldn¡¯t be a problem to put in a four-seater sedan. It¡¯s just a little crowded.¡± ¡°And the remaining space is enough to put down some weapons.¡± ¡°Sh*t, fourdies. Is this dude having a party?¡± ¡°F*ck, I don¡¯t have anydies here. The dude had fourdies in his car and he¡¯s so f*cking rich. I¡¯m jealous.¡± ¡°Bro, do youck any friend? We can be friend if you want.¡± ¡°Master, do youck pet? I can learn how to bark like Huskies, Pomeranians, German Shepherds, and other dogs. I can bark right now. Woof.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not important, it¡¯s not important. You guys are focusing on the wrong topic. What I¡¯m, trying to say is that a four-seater car can totally let Jon escape!¡± Chapter 141 - Searching Four-seater Cars. Still No Clues!

Chapter 141: Searching Four-seater Cars. Still No Clues!

¡°Awesome. Since the dude tested it himself, it¡¯s possible that Jon escaped in a four-seater car.¡± ¡°No wonder the police couldn¡¯t find the robber¡¯s car. Now that they¡¯re searching in the wrong direction, how are they going to find it?¡± ¡°Quickly remind themander.¡± The ten million viewers were discussing crazily. After so much effort, the police still couldn¡¯t find the car of the robber. Some of the viewers already felt that something was wrong. After all, it was impossible for Jon to fly away, and it was also impossible for him to disappear out of the blue. It was also impossible for him to leave on foot either. The robbers couldn¡¯t be found in cars with seven or more seats. There was only one possibility left. Jon had left in a four-seater car. After all, themander had never ced the focus of the investigation on a four-seater car. So, this possibility was very high. However, their opinions could only be posted on the chat section in the livestream. Themander couldn¡¯t see it. At this moment, he was sitting at the table, his mind still thinking about this matter. With the intelligence of the robber, after the changed the car, in order to confuse the police, Jon was likely to stay in the same ce for a longer period. This would increase the difficulty of the police investigation. However, he should not stay for too long. Because the longer he stayed, the greater the risk. After all, if he stayed for too long, the police officers might havee over and surround them. Therefore, the best duration for Jon to stay was about an hour. But themander had already asked the technicians to check the surveince footage at that time. But why was there still no sign of the robber¡¯s car? What was wrong with it? Could it be the car model? Themander rubbed his temples and gradually became suspicious. If the car that Jon had switched to was not a seven-seater MPV. Then how could they find the robber? Could it be that they were looking in the wrong direction? However, for the robbers, a four-seater car was not a very good escape tool. After all, there were five robbers, ten million dors, and those guns and ammunition. The space was too small. However, in order to confuse the police, it was not impossible for the robbers to do so. Then, themander looked at the squad leader and said, ¡°Do you think it¡¯s possible that the robbers switched to a four-seater car instead of a seven-seater car?¡± The squad leader was stunned. After thinking for a moment, he said, ¡°For the robbers, a four-seater car is a bit crowded, but it¡¯s not impossible.¡± ¡°Because this situation can exin why we haven¡¯t found the robbers¡¯ vehicle after searching for so long.¡± Themander quickly got up and went to the control panel. He asked a few technicians, ¡°When you checked the surveince cameras, there were seven-seater vehicles. Have you sorted out the information of the four-seater vehicles?¡± ¡°I only managed to get the information of the four-seater cars for the first hour and a half.¡± The technicians quickly responded. They managed to get the information of the four-seater cars during the first inspection. However, because themander did not put his eyes on the four-seater cars. Therefore, they did not check the four-seater cars during the second inspection. ¡°Then let¡¯s first check if there are any taxis or second-hand cars in these four-seater cars.¡± themander quickly said. Sorting out the four-seater cars at this time was more or less enough. Because this period was the most likely time for the robbers to leave North Freedom Road. ¡°There are eighty cars in total. It will take some time to check all of them.¡± the technician replied and immediately began to check the information of these cars. Themander looked at the technician¡¯s actions with a solemn expression. If he really found the car that the robber had reced among these four-seater vehicles¡­ Then it meant that there was a big problem with his decision-making. After all, he had wasted so much time by cing his focus on cars with seven or more seats. He was not afraid that he would be criticized because of his mistake. It was just that he had made a mistake and wasted so much time. Themander was not willing to see this. In the livestream. ¡°Themander finally realized this problem, Haha.¡± ¡°However, we were just discussing in the livestream. How did themander realize it so quickly? Why is it so coincidental?¡± ¡°Haha, the story has progressed to this point, they have eliminated all the impossibilities. So, there is only possibility when theye to the conclusion.¡± ¡°But isn¡¯t it a little toote to discover this now? After all, it¡¯s already been more than ten hours since Jon switched cars.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not toote. As long as Jon hasn¡¯t escaped from the city, as long as he¡¯s still in the city, it¡¯s not toote.¡± ¡°Not only is it not toote, but once the police have grasped the movements of the robbers, they¡¯ll haveplete control over the situation.¡± ¡°Yeah, anyway, the police have already blocked the road out of the city. Jon won¡¯t be able to get out. As long as he stays in the city, he will eventually be caught.¡± ¡°But it has been so long since he changed cars. Will Jon change his car again?¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then the police will have a lot of work to do. My God, a few technicians have already worked for more than ten hours. Let them rest.¡± ¡°Too bad, too bad.¡± Seeing themander finally realized this problem, the audiences started discussing crazily again. However, so much time had already passed. Even if the police had realized their problem, some of the audiences felt that it was toote. An hourter, the technicians checked the information of all the cars. However, after spending so much time, the information they obtained was not ideal. There were 80 four-seater cars, but none of them belonged to the rental carpany or second-hand cars. This discovery made themander¡¯s face looked bad. There was still no sign of the robber¡¯s car. Could it be that the robber had not switched to a four-seater car? However, he had already investigated all the cars at that time. There was still no robber¡¯s car. He rubbed the space between his brows in annoyance, his expression very grave. ¡°Let¡¯s eat something first.¡± At this moment, the squad leader walked in from outside, carrying some coffee and food in his hands. After all, they had been busy all night and had not eaten anything. Everyone was hungry. Themander took a sip of coffee, turned around and said to the technicians, ¡°Everyone, rest and eat something.¡± Then, he walked out and sat down at the table. When the technicians heard this, they took the food from the squad leader and began to eat. Chapter 142 - Jon鈥檚 Plan!

Chapter 142: Jon¡¯s n!

¡°If there are no vehicles that came out within an hour, why don¡¯t we extend the search time?¡± After the meal, the squad leader understood the situation and suggested to themander, ¡°After all, we already searched for the seven-seater cars for two and a half hours. There is still a high possibility that the robbers took four seaters.¡± ¡°Let them rest for a while before continuing. When the sun rises, he will bring a few people over to rece them. After watching the surveince footage for so long, they are also very tired.¡± themander said slowly. After eating some food, his emotions had already stabilized. After all, themander had received strict training. Naturally, he knew that his ability to judge would be affected if his emotions were not right. The more he was in such a situation, the calmer he had to be. ¡°Understood.¡± the squad leader nodded. Then, themander looked at the squad leader and said, ¡°You should go and rest for a while. It¡¯s already past four o¡¯clock now. There might be some action after dawn. When that timees, we still need you to lead the team.¡± Like him, the squad leader basically did not rest for the entire night. After all, he still needed to lead operation during the day, so he had to rest for a while. ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll go to the car to rest for a while. If there¡¯s anything, you can inform me at any time.¡± After the squad leader finished speaking, he got up and walked towards the police car. He also felt a little sleepy now, without any energy. After all, he was already old. Half an hourter. Themander stood up and went to the control panel again. He said to the technicians, ¡°Continue to search for all the vehicles that came out from North Freedom Road within the next hour.¡± ¡°We must find the vehicle that the robbers switched to.¡± when themander spoke, he saw that the technicians ¡®eyes were tired and bloodshot. He felt a little guilty in his heart. If he had not put focus of the search on the seven-seater cars, they would have checked all the vehicles directly, and they would not have had to re-check the surveince footage now. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technicians did not say anything and started to get busy. This time, they had to check all the vehiclesing out from North Freedom Road. Naturally, their workload had increased by a lot. Although, there were not many vehicles passing through North Freedom Road. However, because there were many forks in this road, the number of cameras that had to be checked was also not small. Then, themander came outside and patted the table, preparing to rest for a while. Because he was the chiefmander of the police force for this exercise, no one could rece him after daybreak. Therefore, he also had to sleep for a few hours to ensure that he could have a decent mental state during the day. So as not to affect his judgment. ¡­ Jon was ready to go out. Yesterday, Venus stayed in his room for half an hour before leaving, while he rested for nearly three hours. After waking up, he sorted out his n again. Looking at the time, it was almost time. It was five o¡¯clock in the morning. The reason why he chose this time because he knew thatst night, themander of the police should have stayed up all night to investigate or make a n. After one night, the time between five and six o¡¯clock in the morning was when people were most tired. Jon spected that themander would choose this time to rest and try to get some sleep. The police officer who went to rest yesterday did not wake up during the qualifying time. Therefore, going to the temporarymand room at this time was the least risky. Then, Jon left the house with a cap and a mask and an umbre. He took a taxi and came to a street not far from the temporarymand room. It was 5:50. It took him 20 minutes to pack up and leave the hotel, and half an hour to get a taxi here. And now in the temporarymand room, the technicians were still investigating the surveince footage. Themander was still sleeping on the table. Outside, there were some media outlets. Because a cordon had been set up, the media outlets could not get close to the temporarymand room. Therefore, at this time, there was no one around the entire temporarymand room. Jon stood on the street with an umbre in his hand, carefully observing the temporarymand room. Then, he went to a KFC and bought ten sets of meals. Jon carried these things and walked toward the temporarymand room. On the way, he activated his Aura Concealment Skill, pulled the cordon as if there was no one around, and went into the awning. Themander was still asleep. Jon walked toward themander¡¯s table and took out a taped bug from his pocket. He took the opportunity to ce the item on the table and taped the bug under the table. Because Jon had the Aura Concealment Skill, his movements were as light as possible. However, in the temporarymand room, a technician still sensed someone approaching and turned to look outside. At this moment, Jon had already ced the bug. He raised his head and looked into themand room. ¡°Hello, sir. Knife Fight takeout is at your service. This is the breakfast you ordered.¡± One was under the awning outside, and the other was in the temporarymand room. The sound of rain could be heard outside. The two of them were looking at each other. The atmosphere was a little tense. However, because the passive skill had worked, Jon couldn¡¯t detect anything wrong with the other party¡¯s voice. ¡°Who ordered breakfast?¡± the technician turned around and asked his colleagues. After all, he had been focusing on the surveince cameras and did not notice if someone had ordered breakfast. ¡°I don¡¯t know. It wasn¡¯t me.¡± ¡°It wasn¡¯t me either.¡± ¡°Maybe it was the captain who ordered it. Don¡¯t worry about it. As long as there¡¯s food, it¡¯s fine. I¡¯m hungry too.¡± The other staff members did not even raise their heads. They were still staring at the surveince footage. They had worked all night, even though it was early in the morning. The squad leader had bought some food, but he was not full at all. Now that there was food, they did not care who ordered it. As long as there was food, it was enough. ¡°Send it in.¡± the technician who asked the question said. Jon nodded, carried the food into the temporarymand room, and ced it next to the console. ¡°Thank you, sir.¡± the technician nced at Jon again and slowly thanked him. Then, he focused his attention on the surveince screen. ¡°You¡¯re wee, sir.¡± Jon said with a smile, taking advantage of the time when the technicians were not paying attention. He gently took out another bug and casually stood in a hidden ce in the temporarymand room. Originally, Jon had prepared a pinhole camera, but he thought about that the camera was easy to be discovered, and it was not very practical. Being able to hear the police¡¯s ns was enough for the police. As for whether or not they could see the scene in themand room, it did not matter much. At the side, the cameraman recorded everything that Jon had done. After all, there wasn¡¯t much to film at the moment, so when the delivery man arrived, the cameraman naturally aimed the camera at Jon. It was seen by nearly ten million viewers in the livestream. Chapter 143 - The audiences Were Shocked! ! That Was Jon? !

Chapter 143: The audiences Were Shocked! ! That Was Jon? !

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Look at this delivery guy. Why do I feel that his behavior is a little strange?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a little strange. Did he put something under the table while he was putting down the food?¡± ¡°F*ck, it¡¯s scary to think about it. I feel that this person is definitely not as simple as a delivery guy. Otherwise, there¡¯s no way to exin his actions.¡± ¡°If he¡¯s not a deliveryman, then... could it be one of the robbers?¡± ¡°No way, no way. You guys are thinking too much. Did you guys think the robbers dare toe to the temporarymand room at this time?¡± ¡°Jesus Christ, if that¡¯s the case, then things will be interesting. The police spent the night investigating the robbers, but they didn¡¯t expect the robbers to appear right in front their faces.¡± ¡°Have you noticed that this person looks familiar?¡± ¡°I feel that this person is a bit like Jon. Could you really be him?¡± ¡°No way, all the police officers are after him now. Is he reallye to the temporarymand room now?¡± ¡°Whether he is or not, can¡¯t we just capture the picture and take a look? Themander, wake up quickly. The robbers areing to your base camp. Wake up quickly.¡± ¡°Good heavens, themander is still sleeping very soundly, exactly the same as my sleeping state.¡± ¡°After all, he almost stayed up all night yesterday.¡± The audiences saw Jon¡¯s movements. Although they did not see what he was ying clearly, they also felt that there was something wrong with his movements. At this time. After Jon had done all this, he had alreadye out of themand room. He looked at the silent cameraman from afar and then at the camera. Then, he raised his head slightly. He took off his mask and smiled at the camera. During this drill, the robbers could not watch the live broadcast. They even handed in their cell phones. Then, to make this drill a fair game, the police could not watch the live broadcast as well. They could not watch any content rted to the drill on the inte. Therefore, even if they exposed themselves in the livestream. It was not a dangerous for him to do that. ... As Jon took off his mask, the livestreampletely exploded. ¡°F*ck, F*ck, F*ck, is this really Jon?¡± ¡°Good heavens, after such a long time since the start of the drill, I¡¯ve finally seen Jon. It was worth it for me to watch the live broadcast all night.¡± ¡°Haha, I just woke up and watched the live broadcast. I didn¡¯t expect to see such an astounding scene when I came in.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t watch it all night, but now I see Joning to the police temporarymand room. What exactly happened?¡± ¡°Guys, the drill has ended. Jon was sessfully captured by the police. This drill is a victory for the police.¡± ¡°He was captured not long ago. You missed a very exciting chase scene. You didn¡¯t see Jon¡¯s car fly ten meters high.¡± ¡°Ten meters high my as*. Don¡¯t mislead the audience who didn¡¯t stay up all night to watch.¡± ¡°Let me exin the current situation. Right now, under the watchful eyes of the police, Jon has sessfully moved into the temporarymand room and ced something here.¡± ¡°Sh*t, the drill isn¡¯t over yet, and Jon dares toe to the temporarymand center. How dare he do that?¡± ¡°Amazing. He¡¯s really amazing. The police are looking for him right now. I didn¡¯t expect him toe to the temporarymand room on his own.¡± ¡°There¡¯s one thing I can¡¯t figure out at this time. The other robbers wanted to stay far away from the police and hide far away. But Jon was afraid that the police wouldn¡¯t know where he was, so he took the initiative toe and take a look.¡± ¡°What do you know? Jon must have his own purpose foring here.¡± ¡°Yeah, he must havee here for some important arrangement. His actions just now seemed to have nted a bug here.¡± ¡°Now that you mention it, it¡¯s really possible. After all, Jon did it thest time, but he ced the bug a smelting furnace and the police brought it back.¡± ¡°But this time, installing a bug is much more difficult than thest time. Coming to the temporary policemand room in person, he¡¯s too brave.¡± ¡°Now, Jon is the strongest robber in history, a highly intelligent robber. After today, he should have another nickname, the bravest robber in history.¡± ¡°Good guy.¡± ¡°But, if Jon really installed a bug here, the chances of the police winning are very small.¡± ¡°Yeah, after all, every move and every good n of yours can be known by the opponent. How can they win?¡± ¡°In the midst of every crisis, lies great opportunity. Jon¡¯s operation this time is indeed very risky, but the return is also very high.¡± ¡°This man is really strong. Not only does he have IQ, but he also has courage and is very chill.¡± ¡°Yeah, if it were any other person, they would have long been nervous to give themselves away in the temporarymand room. But Jon¡¯s performance was as if he really came to send someone out.¡± ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Jon, the Eternal God!¡± The moment Jon revealed himself, all the viewers were shocked. Astoundingly shocked. There were more than ten million viewers in the livestream. No one had expected that Jon would take such a huge risk toe to the police temporarymand room. After all, this action was too crazy. He was too daring. What would themander¡¯s expression be like if he found outter? Jon¡¯s action caused the number of viewers to soar. In less than a minute, the number of viewers in the livestream soared to 20 million. After all, it was only past six in the morning, and many people hadn¡¯t woken up from their sleep. However, even under such circumstances, there were still 20 million viewers. Moreover, some viewers were crazily sending the gifts in the livestream. At the same time, the major media outlets naturally discovered this matter. Posts were being posted on various major tforms. ¡°Shocking! On the second day of the Florida drill, Jon actually made such a move early in the morning?¡± ¡°The most daring robber in history has appeared, and Jon is re-enacting actions that you absolutely cannot imagine!¡± One by one, posts that attracted people¡¯s attention and were full of suspense were posted on all the major tforms. This drill instantly rushed to the top searches on all the major tforms. Jon naturally did not know about the reactions of the outside world. At this time, he had already opened his umbre again, walked past the cordon line, and slowly disappeared into the rain. The entire city witnessed this scene. From Jon bringing food over, to Jon cing a bug under the table, to Jon entering the temporarymand room, and then to Jon taking off his mask for the camera, revealing himself in front of the camera The cameraman was simrly shocked, but he didn¡¯t say a word from beginning to end. After all, he didn¡¯t belong to the robbers or the police side. He was just a cameraman in this drill. Naturally, he wouldn¡¯t help either side. Chapter 144 - Wait, Jon Is Back!

Chapter 144: Wait, Jon Is Back!

After Jon left. The temporarymand room was still quiet. No one noticed anything wrong. The police would never have thought that the robbers they were searching for would show up in their temporarymand room. Naturally, no police officers were stationed there. Besides, the time Jon chose toe was the time when everyone was tired. Therefore, his n could go so smoothly. In the hotel of urban vige. At this time, Will Smith and the other three had woken up. But now their faces were a little grim. Because they didn¡¯t find Jon when they woke up. Obviously, he had gone to carry out the n and went to the police temporarymand room. After all, this was a very risky thing to do. After all, that ce was the headquarters of the police. Moreover, Jon was also the leader of the robbery team. ¡°What should we do if the boss is arrested by the police?¡± In the room, Will Smith looked at the other three people with a worried expression and asked. ¡°Don¡¯t talk nonsense. We all know Jon¡¯s ability. Since he intends to head to the temporarymand room, it means that he has a failproof n.¡± ¡°We participated in two drills together. When have you ever seen Jon do anything that he wasn¡¯t confident in?¡± ¡°So, he will definitely not be arrested.¡± Venus Alice slowly said. Although she was also very worried now, she believed in Jon. After all,st night, Jon had said that he had a 90% confident inpleting his n. ¡°I¡¯m talking about if, just in case. After all, Boss¡¯s operation this time is so risky. I believe it, but there has to be a worst-case scenario.¡± Will Smith defended himself. ¡°Trust boss, wait for him toe back.¡± Leon Evans, who had always been quiet, said at this time. Although he didn¡¯t say much, he always trusted Jon. After all, Jon had led them to victory in thest drill. ¡°I agree with Leon¡¯s words. Let¡¯s wait first.¡± Brown Williams also trusted Jon. ¡°Okay, gentlemen anddy. Since you all said to wait for the boss toe back, let¡¯s wait first.¡± ¡°It¡¯s past six now. Let¡¯s wait until ten. If the boss doesn¡¯te back, then we need to make a n.¡± Will Smith saw the attitude of the three people and nodded. It wasn¡¯t that he didn¡¯t trust Jon, nor did he want to take the opportunity to be the leader of the team. He just wanted to win. If Jon was really arrested by the police. The four of them had to think of a way to win. As long as one of the robbers could escape the city with ten million dors, it would be the team¡¯s victory. It was also a way to win the drill when Jon was captured. So, Will Smith wanted to n ahead. The four of them waited for nearly half an hour. It was past seven in the morning. Footsteps came from the stairwell outside the door. The four of them became nervous. Will Smith leaned on the door, listening for footsteps outside. The footsteps were slow and steady. It meant that there should only be one person. Then, the door was opened. Will Smith quickly retreated so that he would not be knocked by the door that suddenly opened. ¡°What are you doing?¡± Jon saw that Will Smith¡¯s action was a little strange, so he could not help but ask. Jon was not surprised that a few people were in his room. Jon wasn¡¯t surprised. After all, when he went out in the morning, the door wasn¡¯t locked, so four people coulde in. ¡°Jon!¡± Venus Alice¡¯s eyes lit up when she saw Jone in. At the same time, she let out a long sigh of relief in her heart. After all, this operation was too risky. It was more risky than any previous operation. Now that Jon had sessfully returned, her tensed nerves were naturally rxed. The others also heaved a sigh of relief. ¡°Eat something first.¡± Jon looked at the four people in the room and said with a smile. Then, he ced the food in his hands on the table. He had bought it downstairs. Then, they began to eat. While they were eating, Jon slowly said, ¡°I¡¯ve already ced the two bugs at the temporarymand room. As for the pinhole camera, I¡¯ve given up on installing it. It¡¯s not very useful.¡± ¡°Leon, try to connect it. As long as we can keep track of the police¡¯s movements at any time, then we have a very high chance of winning this drill.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Leon Evans nodded, then immediately stood up and went to his room to get theputer. After all, as aputer genius, it was impossible for Leon not to bring aputer. Half a minuteter, Leon Evans carried aptop and returned to Jon¡¯s room. The two listening devices that Jon had set up were bought during the preparation time. Previously, Leon¡¯sptop had been connected to the bugs. So now, he only needed to open the software. Turning on theputer, Leon used less than a minute toplete the connection. Then, he picked up the earphone and put it on his head. After listening for a while, he confirmed that he could hear the sound from the temporarymand room. Then, he handed the earphone to Jon. ¡°Okay, Boss.¡± Jon nodded and took the earphone and put it on his head. Because it was still early, themander might not have woken up yet, so the environment in the temporarymand room was rtively quiet. Only the sound of typing and clicking of the mouse could be heard from time to time. Obviously, the police technicians were still searching for the surveince footage. Looking for information on the vehicle. ¡°OK.¡± After confirming that his bug was fine, Jon nodded in satisfaction. Then, he took a bite of his hamburger and said to the four people, ¡°We have to leave this ce today.¡± ¡°Today? Boss, didn¡¯t you say yesterday that the police wouldn¡¯t be able to find this ce for two days? Why are we leaving today?¡± Will Smith asked in puzzlement. ¡°When I went to the temporarymand room just now, I found a few police technicians working overnight to investigate the surveince footage.¡± ¡°Judging from their searching speed, they should be able to find our car this morning.¡± ¡°Once they find out about our car, this will be a breakthrough for the police. They will take action by noon at thetest.¡± ¡°However, they won¡¯t be able to find this ce very soon because thedy boss of this hotel won¡¯t tell the truth.¡± ¡°But the risk of staying here is too great. We can¡¯t stay here any longer.¡± Jon finished the hamburger in his hand and took a sip of his coffee. He went to the window. It was still raining outside, but it was lighter than yesterday. The four of them nodded. Since the leader of the team they must leave, they wouldn¡¯t have any problems. They just had to do it. As long as Jon wasn¡¯t arrested, they wouldn¡¯t panic. Chapter 145 - Find Out Which Car Jon Switched Into!

Chapter 145: Find Out Which Car Jon Switched Into!

7:50 am, in the temporarymand room. Themander woke up, looked up at the sky, stretched his body and yawned. He had only slept for about three hours. He was still sleepy. He rubbed his eyes to get rid of the drowsiness. There was no time limit for this drill. However, themander still wanted to catch the robber as soon as possible. After all, if the time dragged on for too long, his men would be exhausted. This situation was not good for the police. Then, he looked at the table and was stunned. Because on the map, there was breakfast. He looked at the temporarymand room. A few staff were still checking the surveince cameras. Themander touched the breakfast and found that it was already cold. Although he didn¡¯t know who bought it, themander didn¡¯t think too much about it. He took out a hamburger and ate it. Then, he ate the hamburger and walked to the temporarymand room. The technicians were still the same as yesterday. In the early morning, themander told the squad leader that he would rece these technicians when the sun came up. But now, there was no recement. It was probably because the branch leader had not woken up yet. ¡°Any progress?¡± themander looked at the exhausted technicians and asked. ¡°Sir, we have already checked all the vehicles in the time period you mentioned.¡± ¡°As for the information of the vehicles, it will take some time.¡± a technician said. Themander nodded. Just as he was about to return to the table, another technician said, ¡°Sir, we found something.¡± Themander heard this and quickly walked over. He saw the disy screen in front of the technician. It showed the information of a vehicle. ¡°This four-seater car has been posted a second-hand tform for a long time. It shows that there are transaction records a few days ago, but there is no transfer of ownership now.¡± the technician said. Looking at the disy screen, themander was a little excited. The second-hand car market, the car that had juste out a few days ago. It matched! It was very much the information of the robber¡¯s car. And the time also matched, so now, themander could confirm in his heart that this car was the car that the robber had changed to. ¡°Are there other four-seater cars, rental cars, or cars that havee out of the second-hand car market recently?¡± Even though themander had already confirmed it in his heart, he still had to ask the technical staff about the investigation. ¡°No.¡± the technical replied, ¡°We have already checked almost three-quarters of all the cars that have been sorted out. This is the only one so far.¡± Now, even the technical staff were a little excited. After all, they had worked hard all night. Now, there was a slight breakthrough. If they could confirm that this car was the robber¡¯s car, then it was worth it for them to stay up all night. ¡°Investigate the video of this car passing by the intersection.¡± themander said. A smile could not help but appear on his face. It had been nearly twenty hours since the start of the drill. Now, there was finally a breakthrough. Soon, the technician retrieved the surveince video of the car passing by the road section. ¡°This intersection is where the robbers entered North Freedom Road, right?¡± themander asked. ¡°Yes, sir. This is the surveince video of the same surveince camera about two hours after Jon and the others entered this intersection.¡± the technician replied. ¡°Two hours?¡± ¡°From this intersection to the abandoned factory, it¡¯s about half an hour¡¯s drive. Then, after Jon changed his ride, he stayed in the abandoned factory for an hour.¡± themander frowned and muttered. This spection was reasonable. The possibility of Jon changing into this car was very high. Under the control of the technician, the surveince footage began to y. Themander watched carefully. The car appeared at the intersection. Themander quickly said, ¡°Pause and zoom in.¡± When the technician heard this, he quickly pressed the pause button. Then, he zoomed in on the surveince footage. Although the surveince footage wasn¡¯t very clear, they could see that there were five people in the four-seater car. One person in the driver¡¯s seat. One person in the co-driver¡¯s seat. And in the back seat, there were three people. No more, no less, there were exactly five people! ¡°This is the robbery team!¡± Themander was extremely excited at this moment. Even though he couldn¡¯t see clearly, he could still see through the three people¡¯s body shapes. He could see that they were very fitting for the robbers¡¯ body shapes. Moreover, this car was sold in the second-hand car market, and it appeared at a reasonable time. There were also five people in the car. With this information, themander was nowpletely sure that this was the car of the robber. Hearing that, the technicians were very excited. After all, they had spent the whole night investigating, and their efforts were not in vain. They finally found a breakthrough. In the livestream. ¡°Good God, I just turned on the live broadcast and saw that the police found the car of the robber. This is a very big breakthrough. It seems that Jon is not far from being arrested.¡± ¡°Yeah, as long as they find the car of the robber and lock onto Jon¡¯s destination, the police will be on the move very soon. I¡¯m afraid that this drill will end today.¡± ¡°Haha, as a viewer of the livestream who watched the whole night, my mood did not fluctuate at all when I saw this situation. I even felt likeughing.¡± ¡°Haha, me too. If Jon had not sneak to themand room, I would have thought that this was a major breakthrough. But Jon had already nted a bug, so every move of the police was heard by Jon. How could this be considered a breakthrough?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t quite understand what you guys are saying. What do you mean Jon nted a bug?¡± ¡°Forget it. You guys just watched the stream and don¡¯t know anything. I¡¯ll exin it to you.¡± ¡°It was around six o¡¯clock this morning when Jon himself came to the temporarymand room and personally installed a bug here.¡± ¡°How was it? Was It a surprise? Was it unexpected? Was it exciting?¡± ¡°Shut up, are you guys serious? Jon actually came to the temporarymand room? And then he left unscathed? It¡¯s fake, right?¡± ¡°I strongly suspect that those who stayed up all night watching the live broadcast are trying to trick us who just opened the stream, the robber came to the police¡¯smand room. I can¡¯t believe you guys make up such a story. It¡¯s simply ridiculous.¡± ¡°Whether it¡¯s made up or not, you can go online and look at the hot searches on all the major tforms to find out.¡± ¡°D*mn, I just looked it up, it seems like it was true.¡± ¡°No way, no way. Did the robbers reallye to the police headquarters? How could they?¡± ¡°Anyway, I told you guys to go online and find out the truth. If you guys still don¡¯t believe me, there¡¯s nothing I can do.¡± Chapter 146 - Is the Drill Coming to An End? It鈥檚 Far From Over

Chapter 146: Is the Drill Coming to An End? It¡¯s Far From Over

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°I just looked it up. On Twitter, the top ten trending topics are all about Jon¡¯s arrival at the temporarymand room. The moment I saw the trending topics, I was dumbfounded.¡± ¡°I¡¯m already numb. I never thought that as a robber, how would Jon dare to do that?¡± ¡°Haha, if the police didn¡¯t let their guard down, Jon wouldn¡¯t have been able to install the bug so smoothly.¡± ¡°This Jon is too amazing. Oh my God, the strongest robber in history. He lives up to his reputation!¡± ¡°Up until now, the police have no chance of winning.¡± ¡°Yeah, perhaps without Jon¡¯s operation, the police might have won. But the robber has already ced the bug in the temporarymand room. How can they win?¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon knows every step of the police¡¯s actions and makes corresponding ns. Under such circumstances, I can¡¯t think of how the police will win.¡± ¡°Sigh, now that I see themander carefully nning and seeing the excitement on the faces the technicians, I inexplicably feel a little sad for them. All of their actions can be known by the robbers.¡± ¡°Yeah, the police are a little pitiful.¡± The audiences discussed crazily. While the police were happy to find the robbers¡¯ car, the audiences on the livestream knew that it was useless to find the car. After all, Jon had taken such a big risk in the morning toe to themand room. Naturally, he couldn¡¯t just do nothing. He must have nted a bug or something. So, even if the police could now identify the robber¡¯s car and find the robber¡¯s hiding ce through the car, it was useless. It was likely that as soon as themander gave the order, Jon would run away before the police took action. In the temporarymand room. Themander continued to give orders to the technicians, ¡°Keep tracking the movement of this car. I want to know where the robbers went.¡± Now, they had confirmed the car that the robbers had switched to. What they needed to do next was to see where the robbers went from the surveince footage. After confirming the location, it was time for the police to act. But when they sent out a search team, they would be able to catch all the robbers in one go. Themander was full of confidence. He even felt that when the police officers were deployed, it would not be far from the end of the drill. The drill would end today. Then, themander walked out of the temporarymand room and came under the awning. He took out his walkie-talkie and said, ¡°Squad leader, please take note.¡± After calling the squad leader, there was no response for a long time. Themander guessed that the squad leader should still be resting. He did not hear it. Then, he put down the walkie-talkie and took out his phone. In order to facilitate the operation, their phones all had a ringtone. This ringtone should be able to wake up the squad leader. The call was made. After a full ten seconds, the call was picked up. ¡°Now we have found the robber¡¯s car and are tracking the robber¡¯s movements. We should have a result soon.¡± ¡°Get the search team to prepare first. Once we can determine the approximate location of the robber, you will immediately move out.¡± Themander did not waste any words and directly exined the current situation. ¡°Understood!¡± On the other end of the phone, the leader¡¯s somewhat excited voice sounded. It had been nearly twenty hours, and now there was finally a breakthrough. The leader was naturally excited in his heart. Then, he hurriedly got down from the police car and began to deploy. In less than three minutes, all the special polices returned to the police car. The three search teams were ready at any time. After finishing the preparation, the team leader came under the awning again. He sat face to face with themander. Both of them lit a cigarette. In the hazy smoke, their faces were no longer as gloomy as yesterday. Instead, they were all smiling. ¡°The rain is going to stop. This drill is also going to end.¡± the squad leader smoked a cigarette and looked outside. Themander also looked over. Sure enough, the rain was no longer as heavy as before. There were signs that it was about to stop. Themander smiled. It was about to end. At this moment, Gal Gadot also brought another cameraman over. He wanted to rece this cameraman and let him rest. At night, he would switch back to the live broadcast. The cameraman who was broadcasting at night handed the camera to another cameraman who was broadcasting during the day. Then, he sneakily called Gal Gadot to the side, where there were no police officers. ¡°At around six o¡¯clock this morning, Jon came to the temporarymand room. He pretended as a food delivery guy, so the police officers didn¡¯t find out it was him.¡± the cameraman said softly. As a cameraman, he didn¡¯t help the police. However, Gal Gadot was the reporter for the official live broadcast, so he naturally had to exin the situation to her. ¡°What? Jon came to the temporarymand room?¡± Hearing this, Gal Gadot was stunned on the spot. She was extremely shocked. Then, she thought of something and quickly asked, ¡°You didn¡¯t tell the police, right?¡± ¡°We are only responsible for broadcasting the livestream of this drill. We are not on the police force¡¯s side, so how could we tell them?¡± the cameraman shook his head and said. Gal Gadot nodded and said, ¡°Alright, leave the live broadcast during the day to us. You can go and rest.¡± In the urban vige Jon and the other three had already packed their things, opened the door and walked down. When they reached the lobby downstairs, thedy boss of the hotel was still watching the drama. She saw Jon and the others walking out. She did not greet them, nor did she even ask them. After all, their deposit was still in her hands. Before Jon returned the deposit, thedy boss naturally would not ask them what they were going to do. After leaving the hotel, they came to the ce where the car was parked. ¡°Take out the money from the car and carry it away. As for the car, leave it here and give it to themander. After all, the police have been busy for a long time investigating this car.¡± Jon smiled, then picked up a ck backpack and carried it on his back. ¡°If we leave the car here, it can also affect themander¡¯s judgment.¡± When the other four people also put on their backpacks, Jon thought for a moment and continued, ¡°The drill is already on the second day, and there are still no police casualties. Isn¡¯t it a little too peaceful?¡± ¡°Will, leave some gifts for the police here. I hope they like it, and at the same time, motivate the police officers.¡± ¡°Understood, just watch me.¡± Will Smith smiled when he heard that. Then, he got into the car through the back door and hid the bomb under the backseat. This ce was not easy to find. Then, he used a fishing line to connect it to the door of the passenger seat and the driver seat. If the two doors were opened, the bomb would explode. If themander heard the explosion, what would he think? Chapter 147 - Jon Intends to Eliminate the Commander!

Chapter 147: Jon Intends to Eliminate the Commander!

Jon led four people on the narrow streets of the urban vige. There were no cameras here, so the police would not find any trace of Jon and the others. When the time came, the police would have a difficult time to find out the escape route of the five robbers. ¡°Boss, where are we going first?¡± Will Smith followed behind Jon and asked. ording to the original n, they nned to stay in the hotel for two days. However, the n had changed by Jon now. Other than Jon, no one knew what was going to happen next. ¡°This is my third drill. The focus of this drill is to escape. However, simply escaping is a bit easy, and it¡¯s not interesting.¡± ¡°So, I want to make some noise.¡± Jon¡¯s footsteps were neither fast nor slow as he spoke. ¡°Boss, what kind of noise do you want to make?¡± Will Smith asked in confusion. After all, their goal was to escape from the city. But first, what kind of noise did Jon want to make? Not only Will Smith, but the other three were also curious when they heard Jon¡¯s words. ¡°The LR5 high-precision sniper rifle that Venus is holding is a good thing, but it hasn¡¯t been used since the drill. It¡¯s a bit of a waste.¡± Jon said calmly. ¡°What do you want?¡± Venus Alice looked at Jon¡¯s side profile and asked. Actually, she already had some guesses in her heart when she asked. But more than that, she was happy, because she could finally use the sniper rifle. It would be a shame if she couldn¡¯t use the sniper rifle at all. Moreover, she could not show off her supreme shooting skill either If she waited until the drill ended, she didn¡¯t know how long it would be for her to get a hand on such excellent sniper riffle again. ¡°When I went to the temporarymand room this morning, I found that there weren¡¯t many police officers there.¡± ¡°After all, most of the police officers in this drill were sent out of the city to set up sentry posts at various junctions to surround us.¡± ¡°When the police confirm that we are in the urban vige, they will definitely send out those police officers who are still in the temporarymand room to form a hunting team to capture us.¡± ¡°At that time, there will be even fewer people in the temporarymand room. At that time, it will be our chance to make a move.¡± Jon said slowly. When he said this, everyone was a little stunned. ¡°Boss, if I understand correctly, you want to make a move on the police¡¯s temporarymand room?¡± Will Smith¡¯s expression was solemn as he asked while thinking about the feasibility of this matter. The five of them were robbers and were currently being pursued by the Florida police force. Under such circumstances, not only did Jon not want to escape, but he also even wanted to attack the police. He even wanted to attack the police¡¯s temporarymand room. He was too daring, and this n was too dangerous. ¡°While the search team is out and the temporarymand room is extremely short of manpower, we will eliminate themander. If that happens, the police will be disrupted, and our chance wille.¡± Jon turned around and nced at the four of them, then said with a smile. ¡°Oh my God!¡± The four of them were stunned when they heard that, while will sucked in a breath of cold air. They had thought that they were going to wreak havoc in themand room, but they did not expect Jon to be even crazier. Was he really wanted to eliminate themander? ¡°Boss, isn¡¯t it inappropriate to kill themander of the police?¡± Will Smith hesitated for a moment and asked. ¡°Inappropriate?¡± Jon slowly said, ¡°Is there a restriction in the rules of this drill that the robbers can¡¯t shoot themander of the police?¡± Will Smith was stunned and subconsciously replied, ¡°There isn¡¯t such a rule.¡± After all, no one would have thought that the robbers would dare to attack themander of the police during the drill. Therefore, there was no such rule. ¡°Since there is no such rule, what¡¯s wrong with killing themander of the police?¡± ¡°If this drill is purely about escaping, it will be very difficult. Therefore, we can only look for an opportunity by disrupting the police.¡± Jon said calmly. This idea came to Jon on his way back from the temporarymand room this morning. Judging from the police force deployed in the temporarymand room, Jon had a very high chance of killing themander and still being able to escape unscathed. ¡°If we really do this, the robbers will eliminate themander of the police in a drill. This is a big deal.¡± Will Smith said. As he spoke, there was a faint excitement in his heart. After all, killing themander during a drill had never happened before. ¡°Venus, is there any problem on your side?¡± Jon turned his head and asked Venus Alice. ¡°There¡¯s no problem for me. If I can find a suitable sniper position, I¡¯m confident in killing themander in one shot.¡± Venus answered. She was very confident in her uracy. ¡°Okay, then let¡¯s head to the temporarymand room now.¡± Jon nodded and spoke. Then, they continued to walk out of the city vige. Now each of them was carrying nearly 90 pounds. It was absolutely impossible for them to walk to the temporarymand room. It was inconvenient for them to take a taxi and a bus. Therefore, the best way was to rent another car. During the preparation time, Jon used the map to look around and found a car rental shop. When he arrived at the car rental shop, Jon directly used his identity and rented a seven-seater MPV. Since he was going to take the initiative to attack, Jon was not afraid that the police would find out his identity. Therefore, it was okay to rent a car with his identity. At the temporarymand room. The technicians looked very tired. After all, they had been staring at the surveince footage since the start of the drill yesterday, and it was already the morning of the second day. They had hardly rested for such a long time, so they were very tired. But fortunately, their mission was about to bepleted. Because through the surveince video, they found that Jon had entered an urban vige. ¡°Sir, the robbers¡¯ vehicle entered the urban vige and never came out again.¡± the technician reported this discovery immediately. ¡°The urban vige? Very good, squad leader, we can set off now.¡± ¡°Team A, Team B, Team C, three search teams, one operation. This time, we must sessfully capture Jon!¡± Themander immediately gave the order! Chapter 148 - Police鈥榮 Operation, Jon鈥檚 Operation!

Chapter 148: Police¡®s Operation, Jon¡¯s Operation!

¡°Roger that, sir!¡± The squad leader nodded and did not waste any more time. He quickly turned around and left the temporarymand room. He ran towards the search teams that were already on standby. This time, Gal Gadot did not let the cameraman and himself follow the car to film. After all, the two of them and the audiences in the livestream were very clear that Jon should have nted a bug in the temporarymand room. Under such circumstances, would Jon still stay where he was and wait for the police to arrest him? It was obvious that this was impossible. Therefore, this operation was doomed to fail. The police would yield no result. Instead of following the car and broadcasting the operation, it was better to broadcast in the temporarymand room. At this time, Gal Gadot took the microphone and got onto the camera, she exined the situation to the audience with a professional smile. ¡°It¡¯s already the second day of the drill. After an overnight investigation, the police finally seeded in identifying the robber. The car that they changed was a four-seater car which located at the North Freedom Road.¡± ¡°ording to the surveince cameras on the road section of the car, the police finally locked the location of the robber in an urban vige of the Saint Hillock.¡± ¡°The urban vige of the Saint Hillock is thergest vige within the city of Florida. It can be said that there are all kinds of people living here. For the robbers, it is also a very good ce to hide.¡± ¡°After locating the whereabout of the robbers, the police¡¯s search team also quickly moved out.¡± ¡°Whether the robbers will fall into the or the police ending up with failure, both scenarios can happen. What is the result? Let us wait and see!¡± In the livestream. ¡°Wow, this youngdy has appeared again. We haven¡¯t seen each other for such a long time. I really miss her.¡± ¡°Are you missing her? You¡¯re lusting after her body. You¡¯re despicable!¡± ¡°But judging from the situation, this youngdy doesn¡¯t seem to know that Jon had alreadye to themand room this morning?¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be. Jon showed his face to the camera this morning. We all saw it. How could the cameraman not see it?¡± ¡°Could it be that the cameraman didn¡¯t tell the youngdy?¡± ¡°They are colleagues. How could he no let her know? It should be because of the rules of the drill. Even if they knew, they couldn¡¯t tell it to the police. After all, if the reporters let themander know about it, then this Jon¡¯s n would be meaningless. It would be extremely unfair to them.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. Jon took such a huge risk to make a trip to themand room, but JOn didn¡¯t expose himself. Instead, it was revealed by themander of the live broadcast. Then, there wouldn¡¯t be any fairness to this drill.¡± ¡°Also, didn¡¯t you see that the live broadcast didn¡¯t follow the car to this operation?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The police car had already nned to start moving, but this youngdy and the cameraman didn¡¯t have any intention of following. This means that they knew that this police operation would be a failure, so they didn¡¯t waste time to follow the car to the live broadcast.¡± ¡°That makes sense. In other words, now that everyone knows that Jon came to the temporarymand room, the police don¡¯t know?¡± ¡°Haha, I feel that the police are so miserable, being kept in the dark by everyone.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not that the police are miserable, but that Jon is awesome. Jon took such a big risk and ced the bug in the temporarymand room. This is what he deserves.¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon¡¯s operation is too awesome. If it were me, I wouldn¡¯t even dare to think about it.¡± ¡°I wouldn¡¯t dare to say anything. I still feel sorry for themander. Look at how confident he is now. I wonder how he will feel when the timees.¡± ¡°The more you look forward to it, the more disappointed you will be. Sigh, this is also a blow.¡± ¡°If the drill is over and themander watches the live broadcast and sees that Jon came here while he was asleep, I wonder how he would feel.¡± ¡°Do any of you guys have any guesses? Now that Jon knows about the police¡¯s movements, he definitely won¡¯t wait for the police toe to the vige in the city. Then, where will the robbers go back to?¡± ¡°They should be preparing to break through at the road intersection.¡± ¡°Break through? How is that possible? Breaking through won¡¯t be so easy. Even if all the attention of the police is in the urban vige, it doesn¡¯t mean that the police officers stationed at the intersection will rx. Now that Jon has broken through, it¡¯s still too risky.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think it¡¯s impossible, but it doesn¡¯t mean that Jon also thinks it¡¯s impossible. Brother, you are you, and Jon is Jon. Don¡¯tpare yourself to Jon.¡± ¡°Haha, that¡¯s right. When the drill started, some people said that Jon would be caught within a few hours.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, brothers. Where are you? Come out and say something?¡± ¡°These big brothers were pped in the face. Naturally, they don¡¯t dare toe out now. They¡¯re just clowns.¡± ¡°For these people, it¡¯s too difficult to admit that Jon is very strong.¡± ¡°Actually, I have a feeling that Jon might be able to do something big this time.¡± ¡°Good God, the prophet is here. I remember that you were the one who said that Jon was going to do something bigst time. And the result, Jon did go to the temporarymand room.¡± ¡°Good brother, tell me, what Will Jon do this time?¡± ¡°I only predicted that Jon would do something big, but as for what it will be, I really can¡¯t guess. Everyone, just wait and see.¡± ¡°Haha, let¡¯s wait and see.¡± The audiences were crazily discussing the oue of the police operation this time. Even though all the police officers were full of confidence that they would be able to sessfully capture Jon this time. It would allow the drill to end as soon as possible. However, the audiences didn¡¯t think that the police would be able to capture Jon. After all, the audience knew everything that was going on in the drill. They already knew that Jon hade to themand room this morning and a bug bug. Hence, Jon could keep track of the police at all times. In this case, would Jon still be arrested by the police? Obviously impossible. At the car rental shop. Jon had already rented a car, and Brown Williams was driving at this time. ording to Jon¡¯s n, they were heading to the temporarymand room. Twenty minutester. Jon heard sirens. In the distance, several police cars were approaching. ¡°Boss, it¡¯s the police!¡± Brown Williams turned to look at Jon, who was sitting in the passenger seat. ¡°Roll up the window.¡± Jon looked at the police car in the distance and said to the others. Although, their car and the police car were driving in opposite directions. In the middle of the driveway, there was a flower bed blocking the view. From the opposite road, it was not easy to see the situation in the car. But to be on the safe side, it was best to roll up the window. After all, a random nce by a police officer might happen to see Jon and his team. Chapter 149 - Find the Sniping Position!

Chapter 149: Find the Sniping Position!

¡°Okay.¡± The other four nodded and rolled up the window next to them. The window of this car was covered with shades. After rolling up the window, the people outside of the car couldn¡¯t look inside the car. Soon, the police car drove over, and the two sides met through the flower beds. But only Jon noticed the police, and the police didn¡¯t notice them. The police car drove away with a siren. ¡°They¡¯re moving pretty fast.¡± Will Smith looked through the back window at the police car that was far away, turned around and said with a smile. The five people left the hotel, rented a car, and set off. They didn¡¯t waste too much time. Now, they encountered police cars on the road. The speed of the police operation was very fast, but it was destined to be in vain. Because Jon had already bugged the temporarymand room, after themander confirmed the robbers¡¯ car, Jon and the others were ready to leave. Therefore, no matter how fast the police acted, it was already toote. In the temporarymand room. The technicians were still working. Themander told them to rest, but they didn¡¯t go. After all, after such a long time of effort, they were about to capture the robbers, so they naturally didn¡¯t want to miss it. It wasn¡¯t toote to sleep to sleep after the drill was over. Themander stood in front of the control panel, looking at the situation of the search team through the camera on the squad leader¡¯s helmet. In the temporarymand room, the atmosphere was a little tense. Although they felt that they could capture the robbers this time, they were still a little worried that the operation this time would be a failure. After all, Jon had put on this kind of trick several times in the previous drills. ¡°Sir, we have arrived at the vige in the city.¡± At this moment, themander¡¯s walkie-talkie rang with the squad leader¡¯s report. ¡°Search for the robber¡¯s car first. It¡¯s a ck four-seater sedan with the license te number 30314.¡± the squad leader picked up the walkie-talkie and said. Although it could be confirmed from the surveince video that the robber¡¯s car hade to the vige within the city. But because there were basically no cameras in the vige within the city, the leader did not know what the situation was like after the car entered the vige within the city. As for whether Jon had left the vige by avoiding the cameras. Themander did not know either. Therefore, he could only search for the vehicles first. As long as the vehicles of the robbers were found in the vige, he could basically confirm that the robbers were still there and had not left. When the time came, as long as the police surrounded the vige, they would definitely be able to catch the robbers. ¡°Roger that!¡± the squad leader replied and then began to deploy. ¡°Team B, guard all the nearby exits. Team C, go and see if there are any other exits in the vige in the city.¡± ¡°Team A, follow me into the vige in the city and search for the robbers¡¯ vehicles.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the special police officers responded in unison. ¡°Start moving!¡± The order was given. All the special police officers started to move out. The team leader led Team A to the vige in the city. There were quite a lot of people in the vige. After all, arge number of migrant workers lived here. However, because it was raining, there were not many people on the road. A few people passing by with umbres saw the fully armed special police from afar and also avoided them. In the temporarymand room. Themander¡¯s heart jumped when he saw the picture sent back. This time, he had high hopes. If he failed again, it would be a big blow to themander. The rain became heavier. In the morning, the rain became lighter. He thought the sky would clear up after the rain. He did not expect an even heavier storm toe. Two hundred meters away from the temporarymand room. Brown Williams parked his car in the parking lot. ¡°Venus and I will go out to act. The others will wait here and be in charge of providing support.¡± Jon looked at the four of them and said. Because if the five of them were moving together, they would be too obvious and easily spotted. Therefore, Jon was prepared to find a sniper position for himself and Venus and find an opportunity to eliminate thismander. He let the three of them wait here. This way, even if something unexpected happened, it would be easier for the three guys to pick them up immediately. ¡°Okay, don¡¯t worry, Boss.¡± Will Smith said. Killing themander of the police was a very exciting thing. Will Smith also wanted to participate, but he could only obey Jon¡¯s order. Then Jon and Venus Alice brought backpack and umbre out of the car. Inside Jon¡¯s backpack was an automatic rifle and two magazines. And Venus backpack, of course, was the LR5 sniper rifle. Of course, in addition, they also had handguns, in case of any idents. The sniper rifle was not easy to use. After getting out of the car, the two walked towards the street where the temporarymand room was located. After arriving here, Jon observed the surrounding buildings. Opposite the bank, there was an old building that seemed to have more than 20 floors. Due to the remote location, the buildings nearby were not very tall. This old building was the tallest building. And it was facing the temporarymand room, which was a good location for sniping. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Jon said in a low voice and walked over at a moderate pace. Venus quickly followed. Following Jon into the old building, the two of them took the elevator to the highest floor. But on the stairs leading to the rooftop, there was an iron door with a lock on it. This was within expectations. After all, in a ce like the rooftop, only the internal personnel would enter. They would not allow anyone to enter. Therefore, basically all the buildings and the stairs leading to the rooftop would be locked. If it was anyone else, they might not be able to do anything against this lock. However, this naturally would not be difficult for Jon. Even if Jon¡¯s god-tier lock-picking skill was still at a low level¡­ He could still open such a lock. Not to mention that his God-tier Lock-picking skill was now at the low level. It was naturally for him to easily open such a lock. Then, Jon took out an iron wire from his pocket. He inserted it into the lock hole. In less than five seconds, a clear sound came from the lock core. The lock was unlocked. After opening the iron door, the two of them came to the rooftop. The rooftop was very big, but because no one had been taking care of it for a long time, the corner of the rooftop was already covered with weeds. The two of them came to the position facing the bank and looked in the direction of the temporarymand room. They could see it just in time. Then, Venus quickly took off her backpack and used the sniper rifle¡¯s scope to look at the temporarymand room. The trailer in the temporarymand center, the awning outside the trailer, the table under the awning and the map on the table. Everything! Chapter 150 - Bombs Explode, police Officers Eliminated!

Chapter 150: Bombs Explode, police Officers Eliminated!

¡°How is it?¡± Beside him, Jon held an umbre for Venus and looked at the temporarymand room in the distance. ¡°It¡¯s a suitable sniping spot, but the target hasn¡¯t appeared yet.¡± Venus said as she assembled the sniper rifle. ¡°The target will appear, don¡¯t worry.¡± Jon said with a smile. Since themander had built an awning in front of the temporarymand room, it meant that he would definitelye out. Furthermore, Jon had noticed it when he went to the temporarymand room in the morning, there was an ashtray filled with cigarette butts on the table under the awning. This meant that themander smoked outside, and the frequency of smoking was very high. Therefore, they only needed to wait quietly. Themander would definitelye out. At this time, Venus had already finished assembling the sniper rifle. She used a riffle stand to support the riffle on the edge on the rooftop, the long barrel of the sniper rifle extended out. Venus turned to look at Jon, then looked at the umbre above, and said, ¡°Luckily the umbre is big enough. Otherwise, with such a heavy rain, I¡¯m afraid my clothes would have been wet long ago.¡± After saying that, Venus turned around and aimed the sniper rifle at the temporarymand room. Jon did not say anything. The reason why he held the umbre was to protect them from the rain. At the same time, he had another purpose. To hide the sniper rifle. After all, it was raining. The two of them were on a high rooftop, holding a sniper rifle. It would be easy for them to be discovered. If someone called the police, they would be exposed. At that time, their operation might fail. Therefore, he used the umbre. This way, the people below would not easily spot the sniper rifle. It could achieve a hidden effect. Time slowly passed. Themander did note out during this period. Jon was not anxious. Venus naturally was not anxious. After all, as a sniper, once she entered the sniping position, she had to patiently wait for the target to appear. Themander suddenly had a bad premonition. He had an inexplicable feeling of panic. As for where this feeling came from, he did not know. Themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows and stared at the surveince screen. In the screen, under the leadership of the squad leader, the Search Team A searched for the robber¡¯s vehicle in the urban vige. At this time, they had already searched more than half of the urban vige, but they did not find anything. At this time, the squad leader suddenly found a parking lot. In this parking lot, they found the robber¡¯s car. ¡°Sir, we found the robber¡¯s car. The license te number is 30314.¡± As soon as the squad leader found the car, he immediately reported the situation to themander through the walkie-talkie. His voice was full of excitement. Through the disy screen, themander also saw the two cars. At this moment, he let out a long sigh of relief. He had finally found the car of the robber. Now, the car of the robber was still parked in the urban city. This also meant that there was a very high possibility that the robber was still in the urban city. However, although he had found the car of the robber, the ominous premonition in his heart was even stronger. What was going on? Had the robber already run away? Themander did not understand the origin of this ominous feeling, so he could only ignore it for now and give the order to the squad leader. ¡°Check this car carefully and see if the cash is in it.¡± Themander rubbed the space between his eyebrows again. If they could find cash on the car, it meant that the robber was still here. Because of the rules of the drill, if robbers did not take the cash out, even if the robbers left the city, it would not be considered a victory. Therefore, in order to win, the robbers would definitely not give up the cash. And now, they were on the run, with guns and ammunition on their backs. If they were to carry ten million cash on their backs, it would be too ostentatious. Therefore, the best way was to put the cash in the car. ¡°Roger!¡± Themander replied and then ordered the special police officers, ¡°The two of you, go check the robber¡¯s car and see what¡¯s in it. Make sure to check it carefully.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The two special police officers heard this and quickly walked towards the car. The rest of the special police officers continued to be on guard. The squad leader watched the two of them move. The image was transmitted back to themand room, and themander also watched the two special police officers move. Just as they were about to pull open the car door. The squad leader¡¯s eyelids twitched, and the ominous feeling in his heart was extremely strong. He almost blurted out, ¡°Wait¡­¡± But it was already toote. The special police officers had already pulled open the car door. At the same time. Bang! An explosion-like sound was heard, and the entire car was emitting thick smoke. The two special police officers who were inspecting the car were caught off guard. Not only was they were shocked, but their nostrils were also filled with thick smoke. They could not help but cough a few times. ¡°There¡¯s a bomb?¡± The squad leader¡¯s eyelids twitched as he looked at the situation in front of him. ¡°Yes, sir, there¡¯s a bomb. I just opened the car door when the bomb exploded.¡± one of the police officers who was inspecting the car said. He had initially tried to pull the car door open, but he did not expect that the attempt would actually be sessful. He did not expect that after pulling the car door open, there would be the sound of an explosion. They naturally knew that the bomb used for the drill had exploded. In the temporarymand room. Themander watched this scene through the surveince cameras. His face was extremely gloomy. He finally knew where the unwanted premonition came from. It was a bomb from the robber! He had never thought that the robbers had actually made such a move. After all, in the abandoned factory near the Little Alps, there was no bomb on the abandoned car. But this time, why did the robber leave a bomb in the car. Themander felt a little irritated. This was because the detonation of this bomb meant that some of the Florida State police officers had been eliminated due to their bomb. However, even though he felt extremely frustrated, he had no choice but to ept it in his responsible heart. ¡°All the police officers within six meters of the car have been eliminated. Withdraw from the drill immediately.¡± Themander ordered through the walkie-talkie. His voice was filled with unwillingness, but there was nothing he could do. The judge for this long drill was Florida¡¯smissioner, Raymond. However, Raymond was not in themand room. Currently, Raymond was in the police station. Through the live broadcast of the situation, the fairness of the drill could be maintained. Therefore, the news of the elimination of the special police could only be announced by themander. In the livestream. ¡°The drill has been going on for nearly twenty hours now. Finally, some police officers has been eliminated. The first climax of this drill has arrived.¡± ¡°Correction, the first climax should be the arrival of Jon in the temporarymand room. That is the first climax.¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon is alone in danger. That is the first climax.¡± Chapter 151 - There鈥檚 No Guarantee of Killing Him With One Shot!

Chapter 151: There¡¯s No Guarantee of Killing Him With One Shot!

¡°That¡¯s not important. What¡¯s important is that the vicious robber, Jon, has finally made his move against the police again.¡± ¡°Using a bomb to eliminate the police officers is Jon¡¯s standard operation. It¡¯s a familiar form.¡± ¡°The dude who had a premonition that Jon would make a big move,e out now and receive the praises. You¡¯re too awesome.¡± ¡°Haha, he¡¯s the strongest prophet. You¡¯re really awesome.¡± ¡°With the death of the police officers, this drill is bound to escte. The police are under a lot of pressure.¡± ¡°So what if they¡¯re under a lot of pressure? Right now, the police don¡¯t even know where Jon ran off to. How are they going to catch him?¡± ¡°But the effect of the bomb is quite realistic. The sound it makes sounds very scary.¡± ¡°This dude looks like someone who hasn¡¯t seen the world. This is nothing. A truly powerful training bomb, other than having no lethality, is almost the same as a real bomb. This bomb doesn¡¯t even have a spark.¡± ¡°Originally, the police had already ced their focus on the various roads out of the city. The search team had fewer people. Now that a few more have been eliminated, the manpower of the police force has also decrease.¡± ¡°Actually, it¡¯s just that the number of members of the search team be smaller. The actual police force isn¡¯t small at all. It¡¯s two times more than the previous drills.¡± ¡°Yeah, they still have a lot of manpower. After all, there are only five robbers.¡± The audiences were discussing intensely. Because of this explosion, the exercise had reached another climax. When the audiences saw this, they were all excited. They also started to crazily buy gifts. ¡°Oh, sh*t!¡± When the squad leader heard themander¡¯s voice through the walkie-talkie, he couldn¡¯t help but swear. Within six meters of the car, other than the two special police officers who were inspecting the vehicle, there were three other team members who were on guard. In other words, a total of five special police officers had been eliminated! Before this, there were no police officers had been eliminated in battle. Although the drill had put a lot of pressure on the police officers, the police still had a chance to catch their breath. So, the squad leader thought even if the final drill ended with the police¡¯s failure, but no police officers had died in battle, which was still slightly better than the police officers in the previous two drills. But now that five police officers had been eliminated in battle, the situation was different. The pressure on the police was even greater. ¡°The five of you, withdraw from the drill.¡± The squad leader said to the five police officers who were standing within a six-meter radius of the car. His voice was low, and he was very angry now. When the five special police officers heard this, they felt a little helpless and unwilling, but there was nothing they could do. Since they had died in battle, then they had to withdraw from the drill. ¡°Get the bomb disposal expert toe over and see if there are any more bombs in the car. At the same time, bring some people to check the nearby hotels to see if Jon is still hiding here.¡± At this time, themander picked up the walkie-talkie again and gave the order to the squad leader. After receiving the order, the squad leader responded and quickly notified the bomb disposal expert. The bomb disposal expert quickly rushed over. The squad leader left two special police officers to assist the bomb disposal expert in handling the car, while he led his men to urban city to investigate. In the temporarymand room. Themander¡¯s face was gloomy at this time. Five special police officers withdrew from the drill, which made the already small police force even worse. However, at the moment, the policemander at every intersections in the city could not rx their vignce, so themander could not divert manpower from the police officers who were on guard at the roadblocks. Manpower naturally became a headache for themander. After staying in the temporarymand room to watch the surveince cameras for a while. Themander felt a little anxious, so he nned to go out for some fresh air. He came under the awning and lit a cigarette for himself. On the rooftop. Jon saw themandering out from afar and said to Venus, ¡°Can you aim at him?¡± From Jon¡¯s position, themander happened to have half of his body blocked by the awning. His upper body was blocked by the awning. And under such circumstances, one shot might not be able to hit him, so he asked. ¡°My vision is blocked. It¡¯s very difficult to kill him with one shot.¡± As he spoke, Venus¡¯ eyes never left the aiming device. ¡°Since we can¡¯t kill him in one shot, let¡¯s wait.¡± Jon said slowly. Because she could not lock onto the vital body parts of themander, if she missed, it basically meant that the operation had failed. It was impossible to fire a second shot. This was not what Jon wanted. What he wanted was to kill themander in one shot and directly eliminate him. Therefore, without 100% certainty, he would rather wait. This time, Venus did not respond to Jon. She held the sniper rifle with both hands and observed themander¡¯s every move through the scope. ¡°Sir, we have a situation!¡± Themander finished smoking a cigarette. At this moment, the captain¡¯s report came from the walkie-talkie. When themander heard this report, he could not help but feel excited. He quickly went to the front of the console and looked at the screen. ording to the picture, the captain and the others were in a hotel. ¡°Report the situation immediately.¡± Themander spoke into the walkie-talkie. ¡°We found a hotel in the urban vige. The owner of this hotel recognized robbers through the photos we provided. She said they came here before.¡± ¡°Four men and a woman had booked five rooms ¡°Because the owner said that their ID cards were lost and they were in the process of renewing them, there was no record of them being registered, and they hadn¡¯t checked out until now ¡°However, ording to the owner, the five people had left the hotel a few hours ago and hadn¡¯te back yet.¡± The squad leader reported everything he knew to themander. They found the hotel where Jon was staying in the urban vige. Originally, the Lady Boss was afraid of being punished for not registering the identity of the guests, so she wouldn¡¯t reveal the matter. However, when she saw these peopleing over in full gear, the Lady Boss was afraid, so she told them everything. After all, if the police found out that the guests did not register their identity information, she would be most likely to be fined. However, if she was to cover up for criminals, then it would not be something that could be solved with a fine. The lesser of two evils, so thedy boss told them the truth. ¡°They left a few hours ago? And they haven¡¯te back yet? In other words, before we were about to take action, the robbers left the hotel?¡± ¡°Go to the room upstairs and check if they left with their belongings.¡± Themander quickly gave the order. Although the robbers didn¡¯t check out, themander felt that there was a high possibility that they had run away. However, why did the robbers run away in such a timely manner? They didn¡¯t run early, but they didn¡¯t runte. They ran away just before the police were about to take action? Was it a coincident? ¡®I don¡¯t think so.¡¯ Themander had seen Jon¡¯s first two drills, and before he made a move, Jon had a reason for doing it, and a purpose for doing it. He ran away just as the police were about to make a move. There had to be a reason. In other words, could he smell the danger ahead of time? Chapter 152 - The Guess of the Commander!

Chapter 152: The Guess of the Commander!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio While themander was deep in thought, the squad leader had already gotten the key and went up to the fifth floor to investigate. In the room, there was no sign of the robbers. However, there was a note on the table in Jon¡¯s room. ¡°Unfortunately, you¡¯re a step toote.¡± The content of the note was simr to the note left in the hotel during Jon¡¯sst drill. Last time, Jon had humiliated the Pennsylvania Police Department. And this time, he had humiliated the Florida Police Department. When he had seen the note on the live broadcast and how Jon humiliated the Pennsylvania Police Department, he had thought that it was because of theck of ability of the Pennsylvania police. Now, he had a taste of it too. He couldn¡¯t be more aggrieved. ¡°Sir, there¡¯s nothing left in the room by the other robbers.¡± At this time, the special police officers responsible for searching the other rooms rushed over to report the situation. A total of five robbers had entered the room. Apart from a note, there was nothing else. Guns, ammunition, and ten million dors were not in the room! The squad leader was not surprised by this result. Since Jon had left a note in the room, it meant that he had a hunch that the police would find this ce. Under such circumstances, Jon naturally would note back. Moreover, if he was just going out temporarily, there was no need to bring such a heavy amount of money with him. All signs indicated that the robber had run away. ¡°Sir, other than a note in the room, there is nothing else. The robber should have run away.¡± The squad leader could only helplessly report this matter. In the temporarymand room. Everyone saw the situation on the scene through the surveince screen. Themander stared at the words that written on the note, his face extremely gloomy. In the livestream. ¡°Good God, I guessed that Jon would leave a piece of paper or something like that. As expected, it¡¯s the same recipe, the same taste.¡± ¡°Look at themander¡¯s face. It¡¯s even gloomier than the rainy sky outside. If I were themander, I will smash the screen immediately.¡± ¡°Haha, the rain drenched the sky, he has heavy eyes? He¡¯s starting to get depressed.¡± ¡°I feel sorry for themander for three seconds. He barely slept through the night and asked the police to check the cars. The cars were found, but they got such a result.¡± ¡°Yeah, the police worked all night, and it ended up causing five people were eliminated in battle and a humiliating note. This is too cruel.¡± ¡°I guess themander now wants to rip Jon¡¯s head off and kick it like a ball.¡± ¡°Haha, just to be clear, Jon¡¯s behavior is indeed a little too much. You said you were going to leave, and you left a note. You were afraid that others wouldn¡¯t know that you wanted to provoke the police.¡± ¡°Jon must have left the urban vige by now. Although we don¡¯t know where he went, it¡¯s impossible for the drill to end today.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. If Jonpleted the test today and escaped the city, wouldn¡¯t the drill still end?¡± ¡°Themander is still suffering. Is it appropriate for you to say this now?¡± ¡°Haha, I instantly feel likeughing.¡± The audiences saw the small note that Jon left behind and once again began a heated discussion. The atmosphere was very joyous. ¡°Leave a small team to search the area near the urban vige. The rest of you, retreat.¡± Themander was silent for a long time. He gave an order to the squad leader. Based on the current situation, it was very likely that the robbers had already escaped. After all, the police had already found this ce, so it was impossible for Jon to stay here. However, with Jon¡¯s personality and intelligence, it was not necessarily impossible for him to choose to return. After all, the more dangerous the ce, the safer it was. After the police searched through the urban city, they would definitely loosen up their guards. And at this time, it still had a slight chance that Jon would utilize this chance and choose to return to the urban vige. Therefore, themander decided to leave a small team to continue the search. As for those who returned, themander would send a few people to rece a few technicians who had stayed up all night to check the surveince cameras. These few technicians had already worked for nearly twenty hours. They must be very tired. After that, the police could only continue to check the surveince cameras around the urban city to see where the robbers had gone this time. However, there was one thing that made themander very puzzled. Before the operation, the robbers seemed to have received some news and escaped in time. What exactly was going on? Themander fell into deep thought. This was a drill. Naturally, there would not be a mole informing the robbers of the situation and movement of the police force. Therefore, he could only think that there might be some method or trick from the robbers. There seemed to be only one situation where the robbers could foresee the police¡¯s movement. That was, they could know what was happening in the temporarymand room at any time. A new deduction. It meant that they were using a bug or something like that. ¡°A bug?¡± Themander muttered to himself. He recalled thest drill. Jon had used the smelting furnace to ce the bug into the temporarymand room of the police. From there, he could control every move of the police. And this time, it was possible that Jon had once again ced a bug in the temporarymand room. That was why Jon was able to leave in time before the police moved out. ¡°But that doesn¡¯t seem right.¡± While thinking of this possibility, themander shook his head again. Becausest time, Jon was indeed sessfully ced the bug in the temporarymand room, but it was not because he had used a tricky method, it was because the police had not thoroughly checked the smelting furnace. This time, the police and the robbers had not had much contact, and they had not taken anything from the robbers. How did the bug get into the temporarymand room? Could it be that bug have flown over itself? It was definitely impossible. So the robbers hade to install it themselves? This was even more impossible. How could the robbers havee to this ce? Themander, who was deep in thought, did not notice that not far away, Gal Gadot had a surprised expression on her face. She was quite surprised at themander, she didn¡¯t expect that he coulde out a deduction that Jon was using a bug. Beside her, the cameraman was holding a camera and recording themander¡¯s appearance. At the same time, he also recorded themander¡¯s soft mumbling voice. And the audiences heard themander¡¯s whispering voice, instantly, the entire livestream waspletely boiling. Chapter 153 - Still Unable to Aim At the Target!

Chapter 153: Still Unable to Aim At the Target!

¡°No way, themander actually realized Jon might using a bug?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a little sudden. I didn¡¯t notice anything at first, but he suddenly thought of a bug?¡± ¡°I seriously suspect that someone tipped them off. Quick, which of you tipped them off?¡± ¡°What the f*ck tipped them off? There¡¯s a rule in this drill. The robbers and the police can¡¯t watch the live broadcast. How are we supposed to tell the secret?¡± ¡°Actually, there¡¯s a reason why themander was able to suspect the bug. That¡¯s because during thest drill, Jon also used the bug.¡± ¡°Good god, the previousmander used his failure to expose Jon¡¯s method for thetermander. This is what we called the predecessor nted the tree, letting the next generation rest in shades.¡± ¡°What you said makes sense. After all, in thest drill, Jon had already used a bug. Now that he had quickly evacuated before the police arrived, it¡¯s normal for themander to be able to think of bug instation.¡± ¡°Although themander can think of a bug, whether or not he can find it is still a problem.¡± ¡°Yeah, after all, the bug that Jon installed is still very hidden.¡± ¡°Actually, it¡¯s not that difficult. As long as themander can confirm that there is a bug in the temporarymand room, he only needs to send a few people over and search it with a metal detector. He will be able topletely discover it.¡± ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s all I can think of. Finding the bug is not a difficult matter at all.¡± ¡°If Jon¡¯s bug is found, I¡¯m afraid this drill will be reversed again.¡± ¡°I think so too. Once the bug is found, the robbers will be deaf. The odds of winning this time are still in the favor of the police.¡± ¡°But as I said, this drill was very exciting. There were all kinds of reversals, especially when Jon descended on the temporarymand room this morning. I was extremely nervous at that time.¡± ¡°Yeah, at that time, I was sprinting while hugging someone else¡¯s girlfriend. In the end, I managed to hold on. I was afraid that I would make some noise and let Jon get caught.¡± ¡°Good guy. It¡¯s very sexy when a brother sprints while hugging someone else¡¯s girlfriend.¡± ¡°However, themander is still not sure if there is a bug here. After all, in themander¡¯s opinion, it ispletely impossible for the robbers to set up a bug here.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The reason why the robbers ced the bug in themand roomst time was because of the existence of the smelting furnace. This time, the police did not have any contact with the robbers. They would not have thought that the police would set up a bug here.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. However, if themander can confirm that there is a bug here, no matter what, he will have someone search the ce. When that timees, Jon will be exposed.¡± ¡°Even if they are exposed, at most, the police and robbers will return to the initial equilibrium stage. Both sides do not have higher odds of winning over the other.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. This drill isplicated. Whoever wins or loses, let¡¯s continue watching.¡± In the livestream, the audiences were shocked when they heard themander mutter about a bug. After all, before this, no one would have thought that themander would be able to suspect that the robbers would install a bug in themand room. If the bug that Jon installed was found by the police, then the robbers would have no advantage in this drill. It was equivalent to both sides returning to the starting point. In the temporarymand room. ¡°You guys go and rest first. When the squad leader returns, send a few people to rece you. Then you can go to sleep.¡± Themander patted a technician on the shoulder and said with a solemn expression. These people had been watching the surveince cameras for twenty hours during this drill, and they had not let down their guard at all. They had already done their best. ¡°Yes, sir.¡± the technicians replied. At this moment, other than deep fatigue, there was also a hint of unwillingness on the faces of the technicians. After all, they had been working for nearly twenty hours, and they were just about to capture the robbers. But unexpectedly, they failed again. They had been full of expectations, but all of their efforts ended up in disappointment. How could they be satisfied. They wished they could keep working until they captured Jon. But their bodies could not bear the workload. They were so tired that they could probably sleep as soon as they closed their eyes. So, they could only listen to the arrangements of themander and go back to sleep. Themander left the temporarymand room. He looked around. He was thinking. If Jon had nted a bug after the bank robbery, before he left the bank, where would he have installed it? Why before he left the bank, and not after the temporarymand room was built? Because in themander¡¯s view, he would not think or dare to think that Jon woulde here to install a bug after the temporarymand room was built. This was simply crazy. So, where would Jon install it? Because the bug could only record sound for a limited distance, if the location of the bug was too far away, it would not be able to listen to the information here. It was just that. If Jon had already installed the bug before he left the bank, then how could he be sure where the police would build the temporarymand room? Themander was deep in thought. On the rooftop. The heavy rain was still falling. Under the umbre, there were two figures. Venus was still holding the riffle, using the scope to observe the situation in the awning. ¡°What¡¯s the situation now?¡± Jon, who was holding the umbre for her, asked. Just because Venus was a woman, it did not mean her his ability as a sniper were not valued. Venus had been holding the sniper rifle for almost half an hour. But she had not moved at all. This kind of endurance surprised Jon. How much terrifying training had he gone through to have this kind of endurance. ¡°Still unable to aim at the target.¡± Venus spoke softly. At this moment, looking through the scope of the sniper rifle, the position of themander was coincidentally blocked by the cameraman who was standing behind him. Therefore, Venus was unable to aim at themander. Jon raised his eyebrows and did not speak. Through the earpiece on his ear, Jon had already monitored the situation in the temporarymand room. Themander gave the squad leader the order to withdraw the team. Before long, two search teams would return to the temporarymand room. At that time, Jon would not have the chance to kill themander. Because, once the shots were fired, Jon and Venus¡¯ positions would definitely be exposed. If they were exposed, there would be two search teams in the temporarymand room. Before Jon and the others went downstairs, the search teams would be able to reach the building where Jon and the others were. They¡¯ll be surrounded by two search teams, and they¡¯ll have less than a 50% chance of getting out of here safely. It was a big risk, and Jon did not want to take it. Chapter 154 - Kill the Commander!

Chapter 154: Kill the Commander!

Therefore, to eliminate themander, they had to act before the search team returned. Jon looked at the time. It had been five minutes since themander had given the order to withdraw the team. During this time, the squad leader couldplete the deployment and withdraw the team. It would take half an hour¡¯s drive to reach the temporarymand room from the urban vige. Jon only had 20 minutes. But Jon didn¡¯t tell Venus. Because if he did, Venus would still feel panic and a sense of urgency, no matter how good she was. It might increase her chances of failing. Under the awning. Themander was still looking around. He was thinking about where Jon might have nted the bug. He didn¡¯t realize it at all, that not far away, a sniper rifle was aiming at him. After all, in the police¡¯s subconscious mind, it was absolutely safe in their ownmand center. It was the most risk-free ce. Who would have thought that the robbers who were being hunted by the police were now preparing to attack themander at the temporarymand room? Themander looked around. Suddenly, his gaze stopped. He saw a phone booth next to the awning, and this was the most suitable ce to ce a bug. Would Jon ce a bug there? Themander looked around for a while, then walked towards the phone booth. He came to the side of the phone booth. Themanderpletely exposed himself to Venus¡¯ vision. ¡°I¡¯ve already aimed at him. I can kill the target at any time.¡± Venus tightened the sniper rifle in her hand and said calmly. This sniper ultimately needed to be stable. Not only did she need to be stable physically, but she also needed to be stable mentally. After waiting for so long, when they finally saw the target appear, most people would be more or less excited. However, snipers were not allowed to have it. Because their mentality was unstable, it was easy to increase the probability of failure. Jon looked over. At this moment, themander wasing to the side of the phone booth, checking the surroundings of the phone booth. There was no cover. This was a good opportunity to snipe. ¡°Do it!¡± Jon did not hesitate. Such an opportunity was not easy to find. If he missed it, it would not be easy toe across. Venus pulled the trigger. ¡°Bang!¡± Because the silencer was installed, the sound of the sniper rifle firing was not very loud. It was just a dull sound. But the recoil would not be canceled out like the sound. Therefore, the powerful recoil impact made Venus¡¯ body tremble. At the moment when the bullet was fired. Themander didn¡¯t notice anything wrong. He was still checking beside the phone booth very carefully. Bang! A slight sound was heard. At this moment, themander felt a slight pain at the back of his head. He subconsciously reached out to touch it. His hand was full of red liquid. Of course, this was not blood, but paint. Because the sniper rifle had a long range, it wasn¡¯t easy to tell if the target was hit with nks. Therefore, there was paint in the bullets of the sniper rifle. After being hit, the paint would instantly stain the spot where the bullet hit. Themander was stunned. Even the cameraman and Gal Gadot who were filming were stunned. Was he hit? Themander reacted. He quickly stood up and looked at the building. Because before this, themander had already looked around and knew that there was only an old building around. It was the tallest building. It was also the best position for a sniper. And now, he was obviously shot by a sniper bullet. As expected, when he looked up at the building, he saw a ck umbre appear on the roof of the building. But because of the distance and the heavy rain, themander didn¡¯t have a clear view. He didn¡¯t get a good look at Jon and Venus under the umbre. For a moment, the face of themander became very sullen. ¡°Mission aplished.¡± On the roof, Venus quickly put away her gun and said to Jon. Through the scope, she naturally can see themander of the situation. It was a headshot! Then, the two of them began to run away. Until they took an umbre and left the rooftop, disappearing from the sight of themander. Only then did themander turn around. He was scowling and clenched his fist angrily. He red at the camera lens, he said with a heavy tone, ¡°I am the Florida State Police Department¡¯s Police Chief, the policemander of this drill. I was shot by the robbers¡¯ sniper rifle just now, and now I am dead. I will withdraw from the exercise.¡± Even though he really did not want to ept this reality. However, the scene of him being shot had already been broadcast live. It was being watched by tens of millions of people across the country. He had no choice but to announce that he had been eliminated by the robbers. After all, regardless of whether he won or lost, the Florida State Police Department had to ensure the victory of this drill. If they could not even do this, this would be devastated their efforts and embarrassed the police station. After themander announced this result, the livestream waspletely exploded. ¡°Oh my god, Oh My God, themander has been eliminated? What¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°Everyone, can anyone tell me what¡¯s going on? I just kissed my girlfriend and didn¡¯t watch the live broadcast for a few seconds, but themander announced that he had withdrawn from the drill. What¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°Did themander get shot? Was it a sniper rifle?¡± ¡°He should have been shot. Can¡¯t you see that the back of themander¡¯s head is already bright red?¡± ¡°Who did it? Was it Jon? But we didn¡¯t even see Jon¡¯s face.¡± ¡°Who else could it be other than Jon? It can¡¯t be that the police killed theirmander-in-chief. My God, this is absolutely crazy. How could Jon capable of doing this?¡± ¡°F * ck, is he that arrogant? The robbers actually killed the policemander. This is too crazy.¡± ¡°F * ck, this is the first time I¡¯ve seen a robber dare to kill the policemander in a drill.¡± ¡°I thought that in this drill, the police were the hunters, and the robbers were the preys. I didn¡¯t expect Jon to directly switch their position.¡± ¡°In the morning, I saw Jon put down the bug in the temporarymand room of the police. I thought that was already a very impressive operation, but I didn¡¯t expect that an even more impressive operation was still toe.¡± ¡°It¡¯s too crazy, too bold. Jon¡¯s ideas are too wild.¡± ¡°Yeah, who would have thought that Jon would actually want to eliminate themander?¡± ¡°As expected of the strongest robber in history, he is a mad man.¡± ¡°Sure enough, there are only things that we can¡¯t think of, and there¡¯s nothing that Jon can¡¯t do.¡± ¡°There were already five special police who withdrew from the drill, and now even themander of the police has been eliminated. This robber is a madd, Hahaha.¡± Chapter 155 - Raymond鈥檚 Arrival!

Chapter 155: Raymond¡¯s Arrival!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°However, Jon did not disappoint the audience¡¯s expectations. He finally created a major scene for us.¡± ¡°Good heavens, the assassination of themander this time caused the situation to escte.¡± ¡°I want to know what themander¡¯s mood is like now. After all, he¡¯s the firstmander to be eliminated.¡± ¡°Haha, themander probably wants to have a 1v1 battle with Jon.¡± The audience was going crazy. Before themander announced his withdrawal from the drill, the audience was still in a daze. That was because they only saw themander arrive at the phone booth not long before they heard a pop sound. The back of themander¡¯s head was already stained with paint. At that time, they did not know what had happened. And when themander exined the situation. All the audiences were shocked. Because the policemander was eliminated, and withdrew from the drill, it was definitely the biggest climax of this drill. All the audience instantly boiled. Not only the special police officers, even themander was killed by the robbers. The excitement level of this drill was directly pulled to the maximum. It was noon now, which was the lunch break time for most people. Therefore, there were already many viewers in the livestream, which had already reached 90 million. And at the same time when Jon was higher than themander by shooting and killing themander, which caused the audience to shout ¡°Awesome!¡±. The audience also crazily sent gifts. The gift ie in the livestream was crazily rising. And with such an event happening, the entire inte was spreading it crazily. Everyone was watching this drill, which brought extreme hype to this drill. All the media outlets were also staring at this opportunity. Now that the opportunity had arrived, they naturally hyped it up crazily. ¡°Shocking! The policemander of the Florida Drill was actually eliminated!¡± ¡°Jon had killed themander, who was the hunter and who was the prey in this drill?¡± ¡°As the firstmander was eliminated, everyone, guess what he¡¯s feeling?¡± Such posts appeared one after another on the entire inte and on various tforms. Moreover, the drill upied the top search rankings. On the tform of the short video, the video of themander being killed was edited into various versions, apanied by music, and uploaded onto the Inte. In an instant, this matter became popr all over the inte. In the Florida State Police Department. Commissioner Raymond was sitting in his office, watching the situation of this drill through a live broadcast. When he saw that themander had been eliminated, Raymond¡¯s expression became extremely gloomy. Themander had actually been eliminated. This would have a huge negative impact on the police department. The reason Raymond wanted to hold this drill was to not to embarrass the police force, but to prove the strength of the Florida State Police Force. However, the current situation was obviously contrary to his idea! Then Raymond got up, walked out of the office, and prepared to go to the temporarymand room for this drill. He couldn¡¯t sit still anymore. However, this drill was being broadcast live, and Raymond had just seen how terrifying the hype of this drill was. ording to the current trend, it was estimated that there would be more 100 million people watching the livestream. Moreover, outside of the official livestream, there were many people watching this drill from other ces. Therefore, even if Raymond couldn¡¯t sit still, as a judge, he couldn¡¯t join the police side. He went to the temporarymand room now just to appoint a newmander. After all, the police could not do without amander. Now, themander had withdrawn from the drill because of his death. Raymond had to quickly find someone to fill the position of themander. But who should be sent up? This was a problem. Because Jon was too difficult to deal with. There were really not many people who could take on the position ofmander-in-chief of this drill and contend with Jon. On the other side. Jon had already left the rooftop with Venus. Themander looked at the rooftop with a solemn expression. No one knew what he was thinking. A few technicians from the temporarymand room had also run out. There were no other police officers besides them. Therefore, even if themander was killed by the robbers, they still knew the general location of the robbers. But now, they didn¡¯t have the ability to go and capture the robbers. Then, themander returned to the table and lit a cigarette in a depressed mood. Now he was very frustrated. Jon had participated in three drills, and he was the firstmander to be eliminated. Therefore, he was naturally more embarrassed than themander of the previous two drills. At the parking lot. Will Smith and the other two people were waiting anxiously in the car. After all, killing themander of the police force was an extremely risky action. Should they be prepared to receive them at any time? They didn¡¯t dare to rx in the slightest. Just as they were waiting, Jon and Venus slowly walked over. ¡°Boss, how was the operation this time? Did you kill themander?¡± Seeing the two of them return to the car, Will Smith hurriedly asked. As he asked, he saw that the expressions on their faces were very calm. He guessed that they did not make a move. After all, if they made a move, regardless of whether they seeded or not, the two of them should not have such expressions. ¡°Themander has been killed. Drive!¡± Jon slowly said, ¡°Now, the search team has about sixteen minutes to rush back. We have to leave this ce within this period of time.¡± When he said this, the three of them were shocked. They had actually seeded. ¡°D*mn, that¡¯s amazing. I didn¡¯t expect it to really seed. The robbers killed the policemander during the drill. Haha, this is definitely the first time.¡± ¡°The Florida Police Department has lost a lot of face in this drill.¡± Will Smith said excitedly as the car moved slowly. The other two didn¡¯t say anything, but their faces were filled with excitement. ¡°This is just the beginning.¡± looking at his excited team members, Jon said calmly. Killing themander wasn¡¯t part of the original n. Therefore, killing themander now meant that Jon was going to change the original n. For this drill, Jon wasn¡¯t going to simply run away. That would be too boring. After hearing Jon¡¯s words, everyone knew that more exciting things were still toe. The smile on Will Smith¡¯s face gradually faded. In the temporarymand room. Themander was still sitting under the awning and smoking. Grudge. He was mad at himself and holding so many regrets. Just as he was smoking, Raymond arrived. Seeing Raymonding over, themander put out his cigarette and stood up. He said bitterly, ¡°Commissioner.¡± Looking at Raymond in front of him, themander had a guilty look on his face. After all, he had notpleted his mission. ¡°Since you have already quit the drill, you should go and rest. You didn¡¯t sleep too muchst night. You¡¯re quite tired now.¡± Raymond said slowly. Chapter 156 - The New Commander-in-chief!

Chapter 156: The New Commander-in-chief!

Since themander had already died in battle, it was useless to me him. After all, themander did not wish for such a thing to happen. He had always treated this drill seriously. Moreover, no one had expected that Jon would kill themander. ¡°I¡¯ll just stay here and watch. I won¡¯t be able to sleep until the drill is over.¡± themander shook his head. He was extremely unwilling to be killed. In his current state, even if he went back, he would let his imagination run wild. He definitely wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep. Therefore, he might as well stay here and wait for the drill to be over. ¡°As you wish. Jon isn¡¯t easy to deal with. It can be seen from the victory of the first two drills. However, we still underestimated him.¡± Raymond said slowly. In this drill, the police assigned more manpower to themander than the police force in the Pennsylvania drill. However, themander focused on setting up defenses at all the road intersections that left the city. This kind of deployment wasn¡¯t too much of a problem. But up until now, the robbers hadn¡¯t even tried to escape the city. This action of the robbers caused the police force at all the intersections to be wasted. It also caused the search team to have insufficient police force and the temporarymand room to be empty. This caused the robbers to directly show up near the temporarymand room and kill themander, but there was no enough police force to capture the robbers. The chain reaction could not be med on themander. ¡°Yes, we have underestimated him. The idea of killing the enemy¡¯smander-in-chief is too bold. An ordinary person would not be able to think of it.¡± Themander said with a long sigh. In this drill, themander hadpletely understood how powerful Jon was. He first changed cars in the small Alps and waited for an hour before leaving. Moreover, he changed to a four-seater car. Just these two points had already caused themander to waste a lot of time. ¡°At this point of the drill, the face of the police department has already been lost. However, you can¡¯t let the face of the police department be lost in vain. You must conclude some problems from this.¡± Raymond said earnestly. Themissioner¡¯s expression was a little helpless as he said this. The Florida Police Department had already lost face. Saying anything now would be useless. He could only hope that themander and the others could learn something from this drill. As they were talking, the squad leader had returned. When the leader saw Raymond, he was stunned and quickly asked, ¡°Commissioner, why are you here?¡± Before this, Raymond had been in the police station. Now that he hade to the temporarymand room, the squad leader was naturally surprised. ¡°From now on, you are themander-in-chief of this drill.¡± Raymond looked at the squad leader who was walking over and spoke. As soon as he said this, the squad leader was stunned. He looked at themissioner and themander with a dumbfounded expression, not understanding what had happened. Why did the director appoint him as themander-in-chief the moment he returned? In fact, it was not impossible for themander-in-chief to be reced by someone else, for instance the circumstances where themander-in-chief made a major mistake. Even though the current results of this drill were somewhat disadvantageous to the police, themander didn¡¯t make too big of a mistake, right? Why did he make himself themander-in-chief? In the livestream. The audience saw this scene. They immediately became happy. ¡°The director¡¯s appointment was too abrupt. The squad leader didn¡¯t even react in time.¡± ¡°Looking at the confused expression on the squad leader¡¯s face, he definitely didn¡¯t know that themander had been eliminated and that he had withdrawn from the drill.¡± ¡°At this moment, the squad leader¡¯s mentality, who am I? Where am I? What do I want to do?¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯m entertained again.¡± ¡°This operation failed. After returning, he actually became themander. This guy is lucky to get an easy promotion.¡± ¡°Lucky? I¡¯m afraid he¡¯s not lucky. Facing with such an awesome robber like Jon, the position ofmander-in-chief is the most stressful. Do you think it¡¯s easy to be themander-in-chief?¡± ¡°Yeah, for the one who¡¯s in charge now, not only is it stressful, but the robber will kill him at any time. It¡¯s too difficult.¡± ¡°Hearing what you guys said, it seems that the position ofmander-in-chief is really quite difficult?¡± ¡°Of course. After bing themander, not only do he need to stay up all night to make a n, but he also he need deploy the police force carefully. His n might not even work out to capture the robbers. If he makes a mistake, he will have to bear the responsibility. Moreover, the probability of the police winning this drill is not high to begin with.¡± ¡°Where do you think Jon will go next? Won¡¯t the search team take the opportunity to catch Jon?¡± ¡°It¡¯s been almost twenty minutes. Jon has long since disappeared. Where should they capture him? It¡¯s already toote.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. After all, they were still in a state of excitement when they saw the exciting scene of Jon killing themander. Now that they saw the expression of the squad leader, they were happy again. And because themander was killed by the robbers, the matter of him quitting the drill was already known by the entire Inte. After the news spreading throughout the inte, the number of viewers in the livestream also soared rapidly. From 90 million just now, it rose to 100 million. The number of viewers in a livestream and online at the same time reached 100 million. This number waspletely unprecedented. As for whether it would never happen again, it was hard to say now. And as the number of viewers increased, the ie of gifts also soared rapidly. In just 20 minutes, the value of the gifts in the livestream had increased by 40 million US dors. Whether it was the number of viewers or the ie from the gifts, this drill had reached a new peak. ¡°Commissioner, why did I be themander of this exercise?¡± the squad leader asked. Until now, he had thought that themander had made a huge mistake, so he needed to be reced. But he didn¡¯t think that themander had been eliminated. After all, without understanding the premise, no one would have thought that themander had been eliminated by the robbers. ¡°Tell him.¡± Raymond sat at the table and said to themander. ¡°When you went to the urban vige, the robbers came to this area. I was shot.¡± Themander looked at the squad leader and said with a conflicted expression. After all, being killed by the robbers was not a glorious thing. ¡°What?¡± the squad leader stunned. He had an incredulous expression. Even though themander had said this in person, the squad leader still found it hard to believe. In the previous drills, themander had not been killed by the robbers in the temporarymand room. This was too unbelievable. Weren¡¯t the robbers too bold and arrogant? ¡°What about the robbers? Where did they shoot fire?¡± the squad leader asked. Since themander was eliminated and he was appointed as the newmander-in-chief, he had to immediately enter his role. ¡°He¡¯s already dead. The dead can¡¯t speak, so you can¡¯t learn anything from him.¡± Raymond slowly reminded the team leader. After all, Raymond was the referee, so he had to be fair and just. Moreover, now that this was being broadcasted live, there were so many people watching, so naturally, he couldn¡¯t side with the police or the robber. Chapter 157 - Location Exposed, Police Pursuit!

Chapter 157: Location Exposed, Police Pursuit!

The squad leader nodded slightly. Then he entered the temporarymand room. When themander was eliminated, these few technicians were also on the scene. The squad leader wanted to see if he could get some useful information out of them. At this time, the technicians who had stayed up all night didn¡¯t stay idle. After themander was eliminated, they hurriedly retrieved the surveince footage and tried to lock onto the location of the robbers. After all, they were police officers with many years of experience. They were all very clear of what they should do in such an emergency situation. ¡°Report the details of themander¡¯s death.¡± After the squad leader entered, he asked the technicians. ¡°Sir, the robbers¡¯ location was on the highest rooftop opposite themand room. The gun used was heavy sniper rifle.¡± ¡°After the shooting, the robber quickly left the rooftop. It has been 22 minutes.¡± One of the technicians replied. ¡°Is there any way to lock onto the robber¡¯s car?¡± The squad leader continued to ask. Twenty-two minutes was not too long. Because in such short period of time, the robber would not run too far away. To the police, this was the closest they were to the robber. ¡°There¡¯s nothing we can do now, but we have already investigated the car of the robbers. The license te number is 30205. This car was recorded on the surveince camera when it passed the intersection three minutes ago.¡± ¡°What we can confirm is that the robbers are heading towards Cologne area along South Freedom Road.¡± the technician reported. ¡°Well done.¡± the squad leader looked a little excited. Being able to roughly confirm the location of the robbers was definitely good news. Then, he quickly took the walkie-talkie and began to deploy. ¡°Attention, police officers of Cologne District. The robbers are now fleeing towards your location along South Freedom Road. The vehicle is a seven-seater ck MPV with the license te number 30205.¡± ¡°I repeat, the vehicle is a seven-seater ck MPV with the license te number 30205.¡± ¡°Increase the intensity of the search at every intersection in Cologne District. Also, send two police officers at every intersection, try your best to stop the robbers¡¯ vehicle!¡± The squad leader¡¯s tone was calm and serious. After all, he was a squad leader and once a special police officer. Hismand ability was not bad. This time, not only did he order the strict search at all the intersections, but he also ordered two police officers to surround the robbers at each intersection. This was because the search team did not have many people. It was not easy to stop the robbers in such arge area of the city. Now that the robbers¡¯ vehicles had been identified, it was only natural that additional police officers were needed to capture the robbers¡¯ vehicle. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± Then, a series of responses sounded on the squad leader¡¯s walkie-talkie. Then, the squad leader continued to give orders on the walkie-talkie, ¡°Attention, Search Team C, abandon the search operation near the urban vige and immediately head to South Freedom Road to intercept the robbers.¡± ¡°The robbers¡¯ vehicle is a seven-seater ck MPV. The license te number is 30205.¡± When they had retreated from the urban vige, the squad leader had left a search team there. It was to prevent Jon from hiding at the area near to the urban vige. Now, although Jon did not hide at the area near to the urban vige, it was just right that the Search Team C was left over there. This was because the urban vige was located very near to the South Freedom Road, which was much closer than the temporarymand room. Search Team C could reach there way faster. ¡°Team C, Copy!¡± A response was soon heard on the walkie-talkie. After giving these two orders, the squad leader stood in front of the control panel and looked at the monitor screen. A few technicians were tracking the robber¡¯s car through the monitor. Then, the team leader transferred five special police officers from Group A to rece the technicians who were still working in front of the control panel. After all, they had been working for nearly twenty hours. Now that they were extremely tired, they had to take a break. There were twelve people in Group A of the search team. When the robber¡¯s vehicle exploded, five people were eliminated. Now five people were transferred out, leaving only two people. The squad leader merged team B into Team A, and team A now had 12 people. However, there were only two search teams left. Team A and Team B. The squad leader asked Team A to stay in the temporarymand room and be on full alert. After all, the robber had just killed themander. ording to this situation, if Team A was sent out to chase the robbers¡¯ vehicles again, the robbers might just turn around ande to the temporarymand room again to kill the newmander-in-chief. Therefore, no matter how short of manpower they were now, the squad leader had to leave a small team around the temporarymand room to prevent such situation from happening again. In the livestream. ¡°Good lord, these two orders are extremely smooth. It¡¯s like eating Jell-O. Is Jell-O really that smooth?¡± ¡°Of course it¡¯s smooth. After all, this person is the special police squad leader. His ability is naturally not bad.¡± ¡°Generally speaking, the special police squad will also hold some drills. The scale may not berge, but themander of such drills is usually the special police squad leader.¡± ¡°So that¡¯s the case. I was wondering why the leader of the special police was very qualified and sopetent for this position.¡± ¡°But if that¡¯s the case, isn¡¯t Jon put himself in danger? After all, killing themander directly exposed his position.¡± ¡°Yeah, initially, the police couldn¡¯t find the robbers, but Jon insisted on killing themander. Now, he¡¯s being tracked by the police.¡± ¡°In the current situation, it¡¯s already very difficult for Jon to escape. He shouldn¡¯t have killed themander.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. As long as he hides properly, the police might not be able to find them. Now, killing themander might be very exciting, but it¡¯s not beneficial to him.¡± ¡°Hehe, there¡¯s no need to worry. Since Jon dared to kill themander, he must have thought that he would be tracked by the police. Do you think that he doesn¡¯t have a way to deal with it?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know what¡¯s going on. Once they saw that Jon was temporarily exposed, they started to look down on him. If Jon were exposed, he would definitely be arrested.¡± ¡°What¡¯s going on? Those guys were just some stupid haters. They can¡¯t stand to see Jon perform well.¡± ¡°Even if we take a step back and say that Jon was caught, they still killed themander of the police. That¡¯s pretty impressive.¡± ¡°Yeah, yeah.¡± Chapter 158 - Route To the Center of the City!

Chapter 158: Route To the Center of the City!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio In the livestream, when they saw how the squad leader was nning everything, they immediately started a new round of discussion. Obviously, no one expected the squad leader to be so skilled inmanding. After these orders were given, arge capture was immediately deployed. The robbers who were about to escape were surrounded. He seemed to be stronger than the previousmander. Because of this, the audiences started to worry about Jon. After all, the current situation was not optimistic for the robbers. At this moment, Jon and the other three were driving on South Freedom Road. In the temporarymand room, all the deployment of the squad leader was naturally transmitted to Jon¡¯s earpiece through a bug. Jon could hear some of the police¡¯s actions clearly. ¡°Turn around at the next intersection.¡± Jon sat in the passenger seat and calmly said to Brown Williams who was driving. Since the squad leader had already set up arge police force on South Freedom Road, Jon naturally wouldn¡¯t walk into the trap. ¡°Okay.¡± Brown Williams replied crisply. Then, he turned around at the next intersection ording to Jon¡¯s request. At this time, Jon held a map in his hand and looked at the route that he had nned. Before the start of the exercise, Jon had led four people and walked around all the roads in the city more than three times. On the map in Jon¡¯s hand, Jon marked all of the road with surveince cameras and high traffic. Now, Jon had a map like this, and he could keep track of the police. Even if their car were in the sight of the police, Jon was confident he could get away with it. Of course, now was the time to test Brown Williams. Before the Pennsylvania drill, Jon had chosen Brown Williams because of his strong driving ability. He was a super driver. ¡°Boss, what should we do next?¡± at this time, Brown turned to look at Jon. Jon put the map on the control panel in front of the car, pointed at one of the roads and said, ¡°Take this road.¡± Brown looked at the road and could not help but frown. Obviously, he did not expect Jon to let him take this road. Because this road was the road leading to the city center! ¡°Boss, are you sure we should take this road? This road leads to the city center. Even though it is not rush hour, there will definitely be a lot of traffic.¡± Brown asked. However, his movements did not stop. As soon as he finished speaking, he had already changed directions ording to Jon¡¯s request. After all, they had already agreed beforehand that Jon was the leader of this drill. They only needed to unconditionally obey Jon¡¯s words. However, Brown was still a little curious. ¡°Traffic jams is a two-edged sword. It¡¯s not good for us, but it¡¯s also not good for the police as well.¡± ¡°You¡¯re a super driver. Now is the time for you to show off. Moreover, you¡¯re a robber now, so you can race in the city without any scruples.¡± ¡°But the police may estimate all kinds of things, so they don¡¯t dare to race in the city. So, you can use this to overtake this situation to leave the police behind and increase their pressure.¡± Jon looked at Brown and said slowly. Escape to a section with fewer cars, this was a good choice, but it was not a suitable choice for now. This was because a section with less traffic might be conducive to the robber¡¯s escape, but it was more conducive to the police¡¯s pursuit. The police could even set up roadblocks in front of the section where the robber¡¯s car would pass, and they could also forcibly intercept the car through a tire breaker because there were very few cars on the road. Therefore, the police who pursuing the robbers from behind could also be more unscrupulous. Under the double attack from the front and the back, no matter how good Brown¡¯s driving skills were, there was a very high probability that he could not escape. Unless he could drive the car into the sky. However, the situation was different when they went to the city center where there were more cars. There would definitely be a lot of cars on this kind of traffic trunk line. The police would also be very careful when chasing after them. After all, if they were to race recklessly in the city, they might lose control and cause idents if they were not careful. The police would not be able to race recklessly like the robbers. In addition, there were too many cars on this type of road. They could not set up or barricade a tire breaker in front of the intersection. Because once they set up a barricade or used a tire breaker, they would not only stop the robbers¡¯ vehicle but also adversely affect the traffic. Therefore, after considering various aspects, Jon finally decided to escape to a busy road with more cars in the city center. ¡°Okay, boss, today I¡¯ll let you experience the pleasure of racing.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s words, Brown said excitedly. After all, as a super driver, he must be very obsessed with cars. But as a police officer, there was very few asions to let him drive the car like a racer. Moreover, even during thest drill, they didn¡¯t have a proper car for him to drive. There wasn¡¯t any chance for him to perform. Now, this opportunity had finally arrived. He was naturally very excited. ¡°Leon, can you think of a way to hack into the signal light system in the city?¡± Jon turned his head and looked at Leon Evans, who was sitting in the back row, and asked. His team of robbers were all elites of the Pennsylvania State Police Department. And Leon was aputer genius. Although he wasn¡¯t a professional hacker, Jon estimated that his IT was very capable. ¡°I¡¯ll give it a try.¡± Leon replied and then began to fiddle with theputer in his hands. ¡°Traffic lights are done using PCL. The control program needs to be written in debug mode. When it is activated, it is in the enabled mode.¡± ¡°When it is enabled, there is no way to change the time of the traffic lights.¡± ¡°And if we want to control the traffic lights frequently, the problem we need to solve is to hack into the traffic department¡¯s mainframe and switch this area of traffic lights to debug mode.¡± ¡°As long as the traffic department¡¯s mainframe is connected to the inte, I have a way to hack into their mainframe and switch the traffic lights from enabling mode to debugging mode.¡± ¡°I need some time.¡± Leon replied to Jon as he operated hisputer.¡± ¡°Boy, you¡¯ve said so much. What are you talking about?¡± Will Smith couldn¡¯t help but ask and Jon didn¡¯t respond when Leon¡¯s voice fell. Chapter 159 - Redeployment, Fifth Avenue!

Chapter 159: 159 Redeployment, Fifth Avenue!

Jon, Venus, Alice, and Brown Williams didn¡¯t know much aboutputers. But they had learned some of the IT knowledge. Plus, Leon had already exined the problem in simple words. So, the three of them still understood it. But Will Smith was a person who focused on explosives and didn¡¯t understand these things. ¡°It¡¯s okay if you don¡¯t understand. You just need to sit there.¡± ¡°Leon, hurry up and do it.¡± Jon nced at Will and said with a smile. At this time, Leon was typing on the keyboard. A string of code was disyed on hisputer screen. In the temporarymand room. Themissioner, the squad leader, and the eliminated personnel were standing in front of the control panel. ¡°Reporting, the robbers did not continue travel along South Freedom Road. Instead, they turned around from liberty south road and drove into East Freedom Road.¡± A technician immediately reported the situation after seeing the robbers¡¯ vehicle turn around through the surveince video. After the squad leader cast out therge that was used to capture the robbers, he was ready to surround the robbers on South Freedom Road and capture them all in one go. But the robbers suddenly turned around. The squad leader suddenly frowned. In the previous operation, before the police reached the urban vige, the robbers had already run away. And they had set up a bomb, as if they were waiting for the police to take the bait. Furthermore, ording to the hotel bossdy, the robbers had booked the rooms for two days, but only stayed for one night and then left. This was a little strange. ording to Jon¡¯s intelligence, he had booked the rooms for two days in advance and stayed in the urban vige for two days. This must have been nned. But in fact, he did not stay in the urban vige for two days before leaving. Moreover, this time was just before the search team was dispatched. And now, as soon as the deployment of South Freedom Road was announced, the robbers actually turned around again. Could this be a coincidence? ¡°Attention all units that are surrounding South Freedom Road, the robbers have already left South Freedom Road and entered East Freedom Road!¡± At that moment, the squad leader did not have time to think too much. He picked up the walkie-talkie in his hand and exined thetest situation. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± All the units that participated in the chase responded quickly. After the squad leader finished speaking, he did not stay idle. Instead, he quickly went under the awning and carefully looked at the map on the table. Soon, the squad leader found the location of the robber¡¯s change of path on the map. He also marked the direction of the robber was advancing. ording to the direction of the robber¡¯s current route, there were many ces on the east section of Freedom Road where the robbers could change their path. However, where was the most likely ce for the robbers to change their path? The squad leader frowned and looked at the map, lost in thought and scratching his head. The police had always tracking the robber¡¯s escape route ording to the surveince footage, they would always be passive. If they wanted to turn their passive position into active¡­ The best way was to be able to guess the robbers¡¯ next move. ¡°Sir, although there are a lot of intersections on East Freedom Road, the most likely intersections for the robbers to change their direction should be these two ces.¡± ¡°This one leads to Third Avenue, and this one leads to Fifth Avenue.¡± ¡°Other than these two intersections, the rest of the intersections are basically the ones leading to the intersections we set up. If the robbers choose these roads, they will walk into our traps.¡± At the side, the team captain of the Search Team A was deep in thought, then he voiced his opinion. Now that themander had been eliminated, the squad leader did not even have anyone to discuss it with. Therefore, he found the team captain of Team A. Even though he was only a team captain, this team captain had been by his side for more than ten years. In the previous special police unit¡¯s drill, he was also a member of themand center. He was quite a capable person. ¡°Third Avenue, Fifth Avenue, Third Avenue leads to the main road in the city center. The road is congested, and there is a lot of traffic.¡± ¡°And the traffic on Fifth Avenue is much less. It¡¯s convenient to pass through. This is a good choice for the robbers.¡± The squad leader listened to the team captain¡¯s words and found these two roads on the map. He thought carefully for a moment. Then, he used the red pen to heavily mark on Fifth Avenue. Although he hadn¡¯t spoken yet, he had already made a decision in his heart. ording tomon sense, the robbers would definitely choose Fifth Avenue. Then, the squad leader quickly took out his walkie-talkie. ¡°Attention to all police officers stationed at the intersection near Fifth Avenue. The robbers are driving along the East Freedom Road. It is very likely that they will enter Fifth Avenue.¡± ¡°The robbers are riding in a seven-seater ck MPV. The license te number is 30205.¡± Because the robbers¡¯ vehicle was moving quickly, the squad leader had to give the order as soon as possible. Otherwise, it might be toote. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± Soon, a series of responses came from the walkie-talkie. The police officers were all on the move from the guarded intersections They hurried to the Fifth Avenue. They were prepared to set up a roadblock in front. In this way, there would be a blockade in front and a pursuit behind the robbers. If the robbers really entered Fifth Avenue as the squad leader had expected, then they would definitely be arrested. Themander and themissioner stood at the side. Although one was eliminated and the other was a judge, they couldn¡¯t provide anything to the police. However, after watching the squad leader¡¯s sessive deployments, both of their solemn expressions rxed a little. They clearly agreed with the squad leader¡¯s deployment. Based on the current situation, there was still a very high possibility of capturing Jon in this encirclement operation. In the livestream. ¡°I feel that the team leader¡¯s ability is super strong. This set of deployments is really not bad. It seems that it is very likely to capture Jon.¡± ¡°Anyway, the police deployment has already gone out. Now we just have to see if Jon will fall into the.¡± ¡°Yeah, once Jon enters the Fifth Avenue, there will be encirclement in front and then chase after him. I really can¡¯t think of a way for him to escape.¡± ¡°Are all the people here an idiot? Don¡¯t you know that Jon has already installed a bug in the temporarymand room? I¡¯m afraid that Jon has already heard the squad leader¡¯s deployment.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. How could Jon still go to Fifth Avenue when he heard the squad leader¡¯s deployment?¡± ¡°Sh*t, I forgot about this. There¡¯s still a bug left by Jon in themand room. He can hear all the police¡¯s deployment. How can they y this game?¡± ¡°The squad leader¡¯s series of deployment seemed very exciting, but what he didn¡¯t expect was that the robbers knew everything.¡± ¡°The robbers broke through the defenses. The robbers were able to learn about the police¡¯s deployment. What¡¯s the use of this operation?¡± ¡°The squad leader¡¯s operations were as sharp as a glittering sword, but it will not has much effect after all. This is too tragic.¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t themander already guess that there would be a bug installed in themand room?¡± ¡°What¡¯s the use of guessing? Before he could say it, he was already killed by Jon. Now that he has been eliminated, he naturally can¡¯t tell the squad leader!¡± Chapter 160 - The Confrontation on Third Avenue!

Chapter 160: The Confrontation on Third Avenue!

¡°Good god, dear god, please send a message to the squad leader so that he can remove the bug in themand room.¡± ¡°Haha, you¡¯re so funny. I bet God will not give him any hint. The God also want to see how the police can put this off.¡± ¡°Haha, look at the police in the temporarymand room. They¡¯re all holding high hopes. It looks like it¡¯s going to be the same as before. The higher the hopes, the greater the disappointment.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. Even if there¡¯s a bug, I think Jon¡¯s chances of escaping are too small.¡± ¡°Yes, yes. After all, the police have so much manpower. There were still many police officers guarding at the intersections in the city. Furthermore, Jon¡¯s location has been exposed. Now, Jon is the prey being surrounded.¡± ¡°I believe that Jon can escape temporarily from the police, but if he wants to escape from the city, it will be too difficult.¡± ¡°You guys are right. I hope these robbers can hold on for a while longer.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. The number of people in the livestream soared after Jon killed themander. Before that, it had been growing steadily. Until now, the number of viewers was close to 105 million! Gal Gadot was very happy with such a number. After all, she had set another new record. The number of people set this record was more than 100 million. It was almost impossible to break. At the South Freedom Road. ¡°Very good!¡± Jon listened to the deployment of the squad leader through the headset and could not help but smile. Just as he had expected, the police would definitely think that they would head to Fifth Avenue, which did not have much traffic. Therefore, their deployment would focus on Fifth Avenue. However, what they did not know was that Jon had chosen Third Avenue from the very beginning, which led to the city center! ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Boss? What¡¯s good?¡± Behind them, Will Smith looked at Jon with a puzzled look and could not help but ask. Will could not be idle. When he had nothing to do, he would talk a lot. Moreover, he was on the road of escaping, which made him even more bored. ¡°The new policemander thought that we would head to Fifth Avenue, so he ced his focus on Fifth Avenue. He was waiting for us to walk right into his trap, at least he thought he did.¡± Jon tilted his head slightly to look back and said with a smile. Even though Will Smith was very talkative and asked a lot of questions, but he still had a sense of propriety. He knew what to ask and what not to ask. ¡°Even the police didn¡¯t expect us to not follow their n to head to Fifth Avenue, but to Third Avenue.¡± ¡°Boss, you¡¯re really amazing.¡± Will Smith couldn¡¯t help but say. He didn¡¯t say this to curry favor Jon. He was convinced. Because Jon¡¯s ability made Will Smith very impressed. As a police officer, he naturally met a lot of criminals. But he had never met another robber as strong as Jon. If Jon really became a criminal, he could be the most powerful criminal of the century, the robber that would never get caught by the police. But when he thought about it, why did Jon be a criminal, and why did he rob a bank? For a person like him, getting money was even more convenient than eating and drinking. After all, just thest drill, Jon had received more than ten million dors in gifts from the livestream. It was even more money than robbing a bank. ¡°Boss, I have sessfully hacked into the traffic department¡¯s mainframe. We can control the traffic lights on Third Avenue at any time.¡± At this moment, Leon spoke. After a few minutes, Leon finally sessfully hacked into the traffic department¡¯s mainframe and changed the traffic lights on Third Avenue to a debug state. Now, if Jon gave an order, he could control every traffic light on Third Avenue at any time. ¡°How long until we enter Third Avenue?¡± Jon didn¡¯t answer Leon, but asked Brown, who was driving. ¡°Three minutes, we will drive into the main road of Third Avenue.¡± Brown looked ahead and responded to Jon. ¡°Two minutester, change all the traffic lights on the straight sections of Third Avenue to green lights. After we pass, change them to red lights.¡± Jon turned to look at Leon and spoke. The police search team was now chasing their vehicle, which was about four traffic lights away. It was not a long distance, but after entering Third Avenue, they could pass through the traffic lights and widen the distance between them and the police significantly. ¡°Okay.¡± Brown nodded and replied. In the temporarymand room. Now, the police had tracked the robber¡¯s vehicle through the camera. The screen was showing the scene of the robber¡¯s car. Seeing this scene, the squad leader¡¯s breathing became much lighter, because the intersection of East Freedom Road and Third Avenue was in front. And the intersection of Fifth Avenue was still a long distance away. If the robber¡¯s car did not turn at this intersection, then it meant that there was no problem with his deployment. As long as the robber entered Fifth Avenue, it could basically be said that this drill could end with robber¡¯s failure. It ended with the victory of the police. At this moment, not only the squad leader, but everyone in the temporarymand room was extremely nervous. This was because the robber¡¯s choice of which intersection to turn at would very likely affect the development of this drill. Under the watchful eyes of countless people, the robber¡¯s seven-seater ck MPV turned directly at the intersection of Third Avenue. At this moment, everyone in the temporarymand meeting was stunned. ¡°Oh, shi¡­¡± Subconsciously, the squad leader was about to curse, but when he remembered that the situation in the temporarymand room had already been recorded by the cameras and watched by many people in the country, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a chill run down his spine. The curse that he blurted out was swallowed back. But from the movement of the muscles on his face, it could be seen that the squad leader was gritting his teeth. He did not understand what was going on. Why did the robbers not run toward Fifth Avenue, which had less traffic. Instead, they drove toward Third Avenue, which had a heavy traffic? Did Jon not know how traffic jammed Third Avenue was? Third Avenue always had a heavy traffic especially during the peak hour, the cars would be stuck for 30 minutes before even moving. But no matter what, the robbers were already heading toward Third Avenue. All the arrangements he had made on Fifth Avenue werepletely useless. No matter how angry he was, it was useless. ¡°All police officers who are pursuing the robbers, pay attention. The robbers did not choose to head toward Fifth Avenue. Instead, they are heading toward Third Avenue. The police officers who are still surrounding Fifth Avenue, head toward Third Avenue immediately.¡± ¡°Go to Third Avenue immediately!¡± Chapter 161 - The Squad Leader鈥檚 Helplessness

Chapter 161: The Squad Leader¡¯s Helplessness

The squad leader forcefully suppressed the anger in his heart and had no choice but to give another order. Now that the robbers had just changed theirnes, it was not toote to give the order. They still had a chance. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± After the squad leader¡¯s order was given, a response was quickly sent from the other side. After that. Everyone stared at the surveince screen. They watched as the robbers¡¯ car drove along Third Avenue without any obstruction. Now, everyone in the temporarymand room noticed that something was wrong. Florida was already one of the most prosperous states in the United States. Third Avenue was the road leading to the center of the city, and it was inevitable that the robbers would be stuck in the traffic congestion. However, after the robber¡¯s car entered Third Avenue, there was no traffic jam on Third Avenue. Something was really wrong. At first, the squad leader thought that the robbers were lucky that nothing to stop them driving smoothly along the way. But as the technicians kept switching the surveince cameras. The squad leader had confirmed that something was wrong! Because the robbers¡¯ vehicle did not encounter a single red light on the way. All of them were green lights. And the strangest thing was that after the robbers¡¯ vehicle passed, all of these green lights turned red immediately. This was simply ridiculous! At this time, the search team had already arrived at Third Avenue. But not long after turning into Third Avenue, the search team realized that something was wrong. Because the traffic light ahead was always red. And when the police arrived, there were already a lot of cars stuck in front of the traffic light. The most important thing was that the emergencyne had already been upied by cars. Even if the police car kept honking, they didn¡¯t make way at all. This scene made the search team feel helpless. They could only wait for the red light. But after a long time, the traffic light did not change. At this time, the number of cars congested the road increased again. They surrounded the police cars in the middle and could not move at all. ¡°Sir, after we entered Third Avenue, there seems to be a problem with the traffic light. The traffic light didn¡¯t turn green.¡± ¡°And the emergencyne has been upied. There is no way to pass now.¡± The team captain of Team B picked up the walkie-talkie and wanted to report the situation to the temporarymand room. ¡°Roger!¡± The squad leader replied and did not continue, because he did not know how to deploy the operation. The Search Team B did not receive any orders and could only wait helplessly. Right now, they were in a dilemma. In front of them was an intersection, the traffic light was always red, and the road that crossed Third Avenue was always green. Because there was a lot of traffic, there were a lot of cars on the road. Therefore, the cars on Third Avenue couldn¡¯t even run a red light. Right now, they could only pray that the robbers also encountered such a situation and couldn¡¯t get out. ¡°Oh, f*ck! What¡¯s going on with this road? I¡¯ve drive Third Avenue countless times, but there has never been such a situation. Why did it break down during the drill? Quickly ask the traffic department what¡¯s going on.¡± In the temporarymand room. The squad leader finally cursed. He was already breaking out in a cold sweat. After all, the police were about to catch up with the robbers, but the traffic light suddenly malfunctioned at this time. He could only watch as the robbers drove further and further away. How could he stand it! ¡°I¡¯ll contact the traffic department immediately.¡± a special police officer in front of the control panel saw the anger on the squad leader¡¯s face and quickly replied. Then, he used themunication device on the control panel to contact the traffic department. Two minutester, the special police officer put down themunication device and reported, ¡°Sir, the traffic control department said that their traffic light mainframe was hacked.¡± ¡°All the traffic lights on Third Avenue have been changed to debug mode. They are repairing it now, but it will take some time!¡± After hearing this report, the squad leader¡¯s face became even more furious. ¡°So, whether the traffic lights on Third Avenue are red or green, it is up to the robbers to decide?¡± The mainframe had been hacked, so it was obvious that the robbers had done it. Originally, the traffic lights, cameras, and other resources should had assisted the police to pursue after the robbers. But the traffic lights on Third Avenue were under the control of the robbers. It allowed them to travel unhindered. On the other hand, when the police search team entered Third Avenue, they were immediately stuck with the traffic lights. If they waited for the traffic department to finish repairing the traffic lights, the robbers would have run far away. The squad leader looked at the surveince footage and sighed helplessly. At the same time, he was thinking about what to do now. In the temporarymand room, all the police officers had solemn expressions on their faces. After all, it could be said that they were very close to the robbers this time. As long as they worked hard, they would be able to capture the robbers. Under such circumstances, if the robbers still escaped, then the Florida State Police Department would lose a lot of face. Up until now, the police had not been able to gain the slightest advantage in capturing the robbers. They had been led by the nose the entire time. This made all the police officers in the police station feel a shadow in their hearts. In the livestream. ¡°Good heavens, I really didn¡¯t expect Jon to control the traffic lights. If 10 is the highest score, I will give this operation a solid 9.¡± ¡°This operation is really awesome. Look at how pissed off our squad leader is.¡± ¡°I bet he never saw thising, the traffic light should have been helpful to the police. After all, in an emergency, the police could run a red light. But now, the traffic light has be the assistant of the robbers.¡± ¡°This is too f*cking annoying. I bet the squad leader is having a psychological trauma right now¡± ¡°It¡¯s really hard to tell how frustrated the squad leader is. But you can tell by looking at his face. It¡¯s probably pretty rough for him.¡± ¡°Please be a person. The squad leader is already so miserable, and you¡¯re still teasing him?¡± ¡°The poor squad leader is having a hard time. After epting the position ofmander, he finally understood how troublesome the robbers were.¡± ¡°Now it seems that although themander was killed by Jon and withdrew from the drill, now that I look at it, it doesn¡¯t seem like a bad thing for themander. At least he could break free from this.¡± ¡°What we see, themander was eliminated by the robbers. The truth, themander just didn¡¯t want to face these robbers anymore.¡± ¡°Haha, Good job.¡± ¡°But then again, is the traffic light system of the traffic department so easy to hack? Or is Jon himself aputer expert?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t you guys know? There¡¯s a person called Leon Evans in the robbers¡¯ team, aputer expert.¡± Chapter 162 - Jon鈥檚 Plan!

Chapter 162: Jon¡¯s n!

¡°Leon Evans? There¡¯s such a person? Howe I don¡¯t know?¡± ¡°Go and check it out. The official live broadcast has the introduction of the members of the robbers in this drill. Leon just doesn¡¯t show his face often. Since thest drill, he has been a member of the robber team.¡± ¡°Although Jon has escaped the police¡¯s arrest now, he has not left the police¡¯s sight. The situation is still not optimistic. Where can they run to next?¡± ¡°As I said, since Jon dared to kill themander and expose himself to the police, he must have a way.¡± ¡°Yeah, maybe Jon doesn¡¯t want to escape at all. Who knows? Let¡¯s continue to watch.¡± ¡°Just continue to watch. The two policemanders don¡¯t have an effective n against Jon. Can you think of a n? Do you think you are stronger than the policemander?¡± The audiences were discussed crazily. Jon had controlled the traffic light to escape the police¡¯s pursuit. This scene had only been seen in movies. But everyone had not expected that the robbers would do such a thing in this drill. Therefore, many of the audiences were excited. They started to buy gifts in the livestream. And its poprity had increased again. Now, the number of people watching online had reached 110 million! On the Third Avenue. Brown Williams drove the car without any obstruction. His face was filled with excitement. Although he didn¡¯t say much, people who loved cars were more wild people. He was no exception. He usually didn¡¯t have the chance to race like this, but now, with such a rare opportunity, he was naturally extremely excited. Jon looked at the rapidly shing scenery outside the window. There was a smile on his face. Up until now, everything had been going ording to his n. After passing through Third Avenue, Jon and the others would be able to shake off the pursuing police cars. However, this wasn¡¯t his ultimate goal. Shaking off the pursuing police officers was just the beginning. This time, Jon was going to do something big. From the moment he prepared to kill themander, Jon had already thought about what to do next. Killing themander-in-chief had already exposed them. Therefore, under such circumstances, it was basically impossible to run from the police¡¯s sight by escaping. Therefore, Jon would not do that. Since he was prepared to take the initiative to attack, he had to y a big game. ¡°Now head to the direction of North Freedom Road, to the abandoned factory in the Little Alps.¡± ¡°Abandoned factory?¡± Hearing Jon mention this ce, the four people were slightly stunned. Obviously, they did not expect Jon to go there. Wasn¡¯t this the ce where they changed their car yesterday? Why did they have to go there now? Could it be that they used the same trick as yesterday again? However, if they used it again, the police would definitely not be fooled. ¡°Boss, why are we going to the abandoned factory? Even if we want to escape, the North Freedom Road is not a good choice, right?¡± Will Smith could not help but ask. He was a little curious. ¡°Escape?¡± Jon smiled lightly and said, ¡°who said we are escaping? Didn¡¯t I say that this time, we will take the initiative to attack. This time, we will be at the abandoned factory in the Little Alps. We will confront the Florida Police Department.¡± ¡°Since they gave us so much equipment, we can¡¯t waste it like this. The Florida police have set up sentry posts at all the exit of the city. They want to trap us and then arrest us.¡± ¡°Then we won¡¯t go to the intersections where they set up sentry posts. We¡¯ll first disrupt them from the inside.¡± ¡°After we disrupt them, we¡¯ll be able to leave the city.¡± Jon said slowly. This time, Jon wanted to test the robber¡¯s weapon. After all, he was a robber, so he had to do what a robber should do. ¡°Boss, do you want to kill the Florida State Police¡¯s hunting team? Their hunting team should have more than ten people. Although we have enough weapons, there¡¯s a gap in numbers between us and them. Will that work?¡± After Will Smith heard Jon¡¯s words, he pondered for a moment and asked. It wasn¡¯t that he was afraid, he was just analyzing the feasibility of this operation. After all, the number of robbers and the police was too big of a gap. Moreover, the Florida State Police¡¯s police officers might not necessarily be inferior to them. Even though Jon was very strong in decision-making and nning, how could a few robbers face more than a dozen of police officers in a head-on confrontation? ¡°In terms of numbers, there is indeed a gap between us and the police. It is precisely because of this that I let you to wander around the city for so long and shake off the pursuit team.¡± ¡°Now that we have buy us lot of time, this period of time is the time we need to make preparations in the small Alps ahead of time.¡± ¡°We can use this period to set up a trap in the small Alps. When that timees, even if they have a lot of manpower, our chances of winning are still not small.¡± Jon said slowly. What Will Smith could think of, Jon had naturally thought of it long ago. Originally, after killing themander, they used another 20 minutes or so of road time to escape. Jon waspletely able to get Brown to drive to the Little Alps at the first possible moment. However, in this way, the police could easily tell Jon¡¯s destination. They could soon send out a hunting team. They could also send officers from Moses District to surround them. In that case, Jon didn¡¯t have time to prepare. So, Jon first let Brown drove around the city, making it look like they were escaping with no other motives. The police would definitely be confused and have no idea where Jon¡¯s destination was. And at this time, even if Jon revealed his purpose, even if the squad leader wanted to send people over from Moses District and other intersections to the abandoned factory, Jon already had enough time. ¡°As expected of the boss. You didn¡¯t even take a step before you are meticulously thought of a n. The Florida Police Department is unlucky to have a robber like you.¡± After hearing Jon¡¯s words, Will Smith said sincerely. Although he had long been convinced by Jon, when he saw Jon n everything step by step, his heart was still filled with shock and admiration. This person was too strong. Andpared to this drill, the Pennsylvania Police Department wasn¡¯t too embarrassed. Although the Pennsylvania Police Department had also lost many people in thest drill. This time, however, the Florida State Police Department had lost itsmander. And, ording to Jon, at least 20 officers would have to be eliminated! Chapter 163 - The Decision of the Squad Leader

Chapter 163: The Decision of the Squad Leader

In this case, if they lose the drill. Then, the Florida State Police Department would be totally humiliated. In fact, from the beginning that Jon participated in the first drill, many police departments wanted to invite Jon to participate in the drill, in order to prove the strength of their own police force. But so far, neither the Pennsylvania State Police Department nor the Florida State Police Department could prove their capability to capture Jon. Basically, from the beginning to the end of the drill, they were yed by Jon. Of course, this drill is not over yet. But as it turns out, the chances of the police winning were very small. Not only did not prove the strength of their own police, but they werepletely fooled by Jon. A drill after a drill making the police force even more disgraced. ¡°It looks like we¡¯re going to turn this drill into a real big news.¡± Venus Alice, who was sitting in the middle, could not help but speak after hearing Jon¡¯s words. In this drill, themander had been sniped and killed. If dozens of police officers were killed in battle, it would definitely be an unprecedented event. It would not be an exaggeration to say that it was an unprecedented drill of all time. If Jon¡¯s n were sessful, this drill would be the hot news of all the television stations. The television stations would broadcast this drill many times and the people would not even get bored. ¡°Since we have decided to take the initiative to attack, then we should make a big move. It would be a little too boring if we just sniped themander.¡± Jon said with a smile. In the temporarymand room. The squad leader did not know about Jon¡¯s n. In his opinion, as a robber, Jon had to run. Only by ensuring that he did not catch by the police would he be considered to have won. He had never thought that Jon would take the initiative to attack. In fact, not only did the squad leader not think about this, evenmissioner Raymond and themander did not think about it either. Otherwise, themander would definitely add more people at the temporarymand room. He would not have been eliminated by the robbers. It was because he did not think that the robbers would actually attack him. That was why themander was so negligent, resulting in his elimination. The squad leader stood in front of the control panel and pondered for a moment, but he still did not think about how to solve the traffic light problem. Because of the traffic light problem, the pursuit team was blocked by the traffic lights and the cars in front and behind. The team on Fifth Avenue had rushed over ording to the squad leader¡¯s orders. But they still had to face the traffic light problem. Right now, the only thing the squad leader could do was to constantly monitor the movements of the robbers through the surveince video. He wouldn¡¯t let them disappear under the eyes of the police. After the traffic department repaired the traffic lights, he would continue to chase after the robbers. Right now, at the intersection of East Freedom Road and Fifth Avenue, the squad leader had taken out more than 30 police officers. If he took out these policemen, it meant that the defense of these intersections would be weaker. It was very likely that they would be a breakthrough point for the robbers. Therefore, the squad leader did not dare to transfer police forces from other intersections. Otherwise, if there were too many openings. The robbers would directlye back to break through their defense and catch them off guard. It would be troublesome then. ¡°Sir, the robbers are suspected to be escaping towards Moses District!¡± Just as the squad leader was feeling gloomy, a technician in front of the control panel hurriedly reported. The squad leader immediately looked over. On the surveince screen, the robber¡¯s car had already driven out of Third Avenue, and after changingnes, they were indeed heading in the direction of Moses District. ¡°Could it be that they are preparing to break out from this ce?¡± Yesterday, the squad leader had the idea of mobilizing the police force of Moses District to other ces. But in the end, they did not implement it. So now, Moses District was still the most heavily guarded ce for the police. If Jon chose to break out from here, he would really be walking into a trap. At this moment. The blood in the squad leader¡¯s body surged, as if he saw hope once again. ¡°Attention, officers from Moses District, the robbers are fleeing in your direction. Increase the intensity of the sentry check and keep an eye on the robbers¡¯ vehicle!¡± ¡°The robbers¡¯ vehicle is a ck seven-seater MPV license te number 30205!¡± After pondering for a moment, the squad leader quickly picked up the walkie-talkie and gave an order to the police officers at the intersection of Moses District. ¡°Roger!¡± A reply was soon heard from the walkie-talkie. The squad leader put down the walkie-talkie and took the map from the table under the awning outside. Moses District was circled in red on the map. Then, he marked the location of the hunting squad. Then, he drew a circle on a few nearby areas. He pointed an arrow at Moses District. ¡°Sir, what are you doing?¡± the team captain of Group A looked at the map that was filled with circles. He couldn¡¯t help but ask. In fact, just by looking at the map, he had already guessed what the squad leader was thinking. The squad leader was nning to use all the strength of the police force to wipe out the robbers in this ce and win the victory of this drill. However, the robbers were too cunning and had very intelligent. The team captain did not think that the squad leader¡¯s decision was a good choice. ¡°The drill has been going on for 25-26 hours. We can¡¯t dy any longer.¡± ¡°Because the longer we dy, the more disadvantageous it will be for us.¡± ¡°While we still have the information of the robbers¡¯ vehicle, this is the best chance to capture them.¡± ¡°If we don¡¯t capture them now, once the robbers escape and get out of our sight, it will be very troublesome to find them again.¡± The squad leader was still marking something on the map as he replied to the team. As the leader of the special police squad, his style was not quite the same as themander. He had always been swift and decisive. The robbers were too arrogant and too smart. He did not want to waste any more time with them. Taking advantage of the fact that he still had sight on the movements of the robbers, he decided to have a final battle with the robbers in Moses District. He gathered all the police forces around Moses District. He formed a huge encirclement. He trapped the robbers inside. Then¡­ He slowly narrowed down the encirclement until the robbers were caught. This was indeed the final battle. Because his decision could only lead to two oues. Either the police won, the robbers were sessfully caught, and the police won the exercise. Or the robbers won, as long as the robbers were able to win the siege. That meant that they could easily escape from the city. In the end, the robbers won the final victory of the drill. There were no third result out of these two results. His decision was either let robbers died or the police died! Chapter 164 - The Robbers Entered the North Freedom Road!

Chapter 164: The Robbers Entered the North Freedom Road!

The team captain did not speak again. He could see that the squad leader had already decided on this matter. Even if he wanted to raise his opinion, the squad leader would not listen at all. Under such circumstances, he naturally could not say anything. Commissioner Raymond and themander were listening to the squad leader¡¯s orders. Neither of them said a word. Because the squad leader was now themander of this exercise. They could not interfere. After drawing a circle on the map, the team leader picked up the walkie-talkie. He began to set up posts in the circle on the map and gave the orders to the police officers who were stationed at all the intersection. Except for the officers from Moses District, who were standing guard in ce. The police forces of the remaining parts of the district were drawn out by the squad leaders. They surrounded Moses district from all directions. The downtown area was too big. Even if the robbers stayed in the downtown area, they could still y with the police. Now that the robbers had decided to go to Moses District. The squad leaders had to narrow the circle to the vicinity of Moses District. He wanted to see if the robbers could still cause trouble within this range. Then, he went to the front of the control panel and stared at the monitor screen with a serious expression. On the monitor screen. The robbers¡¯ vehicle was moving quickly. It was about to enter Moses District. The squad leader¡¯s expression was very calm at this moment. However, he was not as calm as he looked. That was because the order he had just given was a decisive move to the oue of this drill. If it seeded, he would be the hero. If the operation failed, then the heavy responsibility would fall on him. In the livestream. ¡°Isn¡¯t this decision of the squad leader a little inappropriate? After all, once this order is given, they either win the drill orpletely fail.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. After this order is given, it will either be a victory for the police or a victory for the robbers. There won¡¯t be a third possibility at all.¡± ¡°Leader, aren¡¯t he being too radical? Did he think about it before he give this order?¡± ¡°He definitely thought about it. I think there¡¯s no problem with squad leader¡¯s decision. If it¡¯s not broken, it won¡¯t be established.¡± ¡°I think the squad leader is very bold. After all, he has mobilized almost all the manpower that was previously deployed.¡± ¡°Yeah, other than the police officers from Moses District, the other police officers from the other intersections have been transferred here. It¡¯s a total gamble.¡± ¡°Actually, the squad leader made a very good decision. After all, they have fought with Jon before and know what kind of opponent Jon is.¡± ¡°Yes, the drill had been going on for a long time, and there was no progress at all. Now that they finally got an opportunity, they naturally had to use all their strength to catch the robbers. Otherwise, if they missed this opportunity, they wouldn¡¯t know when the next time would be.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be said that there¡¯s a problem. After all, the previousmander¡¯s personality was steady, and thismander was more radical, so his thoughts were also different.¡± ¡°The reason why you think that the previousmander was steady is because he didn¡¯t find any traces of the robbers at that time, so he had no choice but to be steady.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. After the robbers killed themander, they exposed themselves. If it were the previousmander, he would probably have made the same decision.¡± ¡°The current situation is that Jon is about to be surrounded by the police. Under such circumstances, how can Jon run away from this?¡± ¡°I can¡¯t think of a way to escape, but I think Jon must have a way to escape. After all, he has faced simr situations so many times before, but in the end, he still managed to escape.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. He¡¯s a highly intelligent robber, the strongest robber in history. It won¡¯t be so easy to catch him.¡± ¡°With so many police officers surrounding him, Jon seems to be cornered, but I hope he can make another earth-shattering reversal again.¡± ¡°Why do you guys say again?¡± ¡°Because Jon has made many earth-shattering reversals before, so this time we use the word ¡®again¡¯.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. Seeing the squad leader decide to have a final battle with the robbers at this time. At this time, there was something that no one thought of. Some people thought that the captain¡¯s actions were inappropriate. After all, their opponent was Jon, the world¡¯s strongest robber, not just any robber. The squad leader made this decision. If the police won, it would be fine. If the police failed, there would be no way to stop Jon from escaping the city. At that time, the squad leader would have to bear the heavy responsibility. However, there were quite a number of people who thought that the squad leader was very bold and that this was a good opportunity. After all, the drill hadsted for such a long time. The police had almost never confronted the robbers head-on. They werepletely led by the nose by the robbers. Now that they had finally locked onto the robbers, this was naturally a very good opportunity. ¡°Sir, the traffic department has already fixed the traffic light problem, but because of the current situation on Third Avenue, there was already a serious traffic jam.¡± ¡°If we want topletely clear up the road, we still need some time.¡± At this moment, a technician reported the situation. ¡°I understand.¡± the squad leader nodded slowly and replied with a calm expression. After being stuck on Third Avenue for such a long time, it was obviously impossible to hope that the capture team could catch up to the robbers. It was obviously impossible. So, now the squad leader did not put his hope on the capture team. But it is good news that the traffic department can handle the traffic lights. Then the squad leader¡¯s eyes continued to look at the monitor screen. In the frame. After driving for a while, the robber¡¯s car suddenly veered onto North Freedom Road. The squad leader frowned, he was confused. He had already seen that the robber¡¯s vehicle was heading towards Moses District. However, the robber once again entered Freedom North Road. This was something that the squad leader had never thought of. What was the robbers trying to do? Were they going to change their car again? The police had already been fooled once. It would be unreasonable to do this again. Jon did not think that the police would be fooled a second time, right? Moreover, with Jon¡¯s intelligence, he would not use the same method twice in a drill, right? It would be meaningless if they switched the car again. However, Jon did not like to y some ordinary trick. It was not impossible for Jon to repeat the same trick. ¡°Pull up all the surveince camera footage on the road that can leave North Freedom Road. Report immediately if you find the robber¡¯s vehicle leaving North Freedom Road!¡± The squad leader continued to stare at the surveince cameras. He gave the order to the technicians. Chapter 165 - Setting A Trap

Chapter 165: Setting A Trap

After seeing the robbers entered North Freedom Road, although he didn¡¯t know what the robber was thinking, the squad leader was still a little excited. This was because from the junction when the robber entered Liberty North Road, to the abandoned factory near the Little Alps was half an hour away. If the robbers were indeed going to change their car at the abandoned factory, it would take them 16 minutes to leave North Freedom Road. In other words, the robbers would need at least 46 minutes before they could leave North Freedom Road. With the manpower that themander had just transferred, they would be able to surround all the intersections on North Freedom Road within half an hour. At that time, no matter what vehicle the robbers changed into, they would be arrested. Regardless of whether Jon did the same trick or not, as long as the police surrounded all the intersections on North Freedom Road, the robbers would be like little fishes caught in the. It was only the area of North Freedom Road. No matter what, he had to catch the robbers. On the North Freedom Road, an abandoned factory in the Little Alps. ording to Jon¡¯s instructions, Brown once again abandoned the car in the factory. ¡°Boss, what should we do next?¡± After the car stalled, Will Smith asked. There was still plenty of time for them, after all, they had left the police far behind. However, the four of them all felt a sense of urgency. Even though they were temporarily out of the police¡¯s range, there were still so many police officers chasing after them, and they would arrive sooner orter. Therefore, Will Smith and the others were more nervous. ¡°Bring the raincoats over first, everyone changes into them.¡± Jon turned his head and said to Will Smith and Leon Evans, who were sitting in the back row. After the bank robbery, the raincoats they had worn would not be thrown away. Now was the perfect time to put them to use. The rainstorm was still falling. Since Jon wanted to ambush the police, he naturally could not use an umbre. Firstly, it was inconvenient. Secondly, it would be a little too ostentatious to use an umbre. Therefore, wearing a raincoat was also beneficial to conceal their figures. ¡°Okay.¡± When Will Smith heard this, he quickly took out the ck backpack containing the raincoat from the trunk. Then, he quickly took out the raincoat. He distributed it to everyone. Everyone quickly put on the raincoats. ¡°Will, it¡¯s time for you to show off. We still have a lot of bombs that we like. Let¡¯s use all of them here.¡± After putting on the raincoat, Jon turned to look at Will Smith and slowly said. If the bomb were used properly, it could achieve an unexpected effect. Because the destructive power of the bomb was too great. Therge-scale destructive power could directly eliminate the police officers. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s roll.¡± Will Smith nodded. Then, the few of them got out of the car and distributed all the guns and ammunition in the trunk ording to their original choices. ¡°Boss, do we still need to bring the money?¡± Will Smith took the bomb and looked at the few bags of money in the trunk. ¡°We don¡¯t need to bring this money. After all, it¡¯s too heavy, and it¡¯s not conducive to the implementation of the n. Even if we leave it here, the police won¡¯t be able to take it away.¡± Jon answered. He closed the trunk. Now, the weapons had been distributed, Jon gave all the remaining bombs to Will Smith. Previously, they had already nted a bomb in the car once. Once it detonated, it eliminated five special police officers in one go. If this method were used twice, it would not work, and the police would not be fooled the second time. So, the bomb was not ced in the car this time. Instead, Will Smith ced the bomb more than 10 meters away from where they parked the car. In this abandoned factory, there were a lot of abandoned cars. These abandoned cars were parked in the parking lot. Jon asked Will Smith to ce arge number of bombs under the two abandoned cars, and then use a fishing line to draw the two bombs together. The fishing line was in the middle of the road where they parked. Because Jon¡¯s car was not parked in the parking space, but in the middle of the road, so as soon as the police arrived here, they would see the car immediately. And once the police officers arrived, they would definitely choose to go through this road to check. And if they went through this road, they would touch the fishing line that was pulling the bombs, and once the fishing line was touched, it would detonate the bombs. This time, Jon had Will Smith ce four times the number of bombs under each car. Therger the number of bombs, therger the explosion range. And the fishing line was very thin. If it were on a sunny day, it would be easy to notice it. But now it was a rainstorm, the sky was dark, and with the rainstorm, it was almost impossible to see a very thin fishing line with the naked eye. Moreover, their car was parked in the middle of the road. When the police arrived, they would definitely be attracted to the car at the first moment, and it was even more impossible to notice the very thin fishing line below. After setting up the bomb, Jon lead the four people toward the Little Alps not far away. Since it was an ambush, they had to hide. In the temporarymand room. The squad leader looked at the surveince screen. There was no sign of the robbers¡¯ vehicle. He was a little nervous and his expression was extremely grave. It had been some time since he had given the order to lead the North Freedom Road. The squad leader was praying that the robbers would not take advantage of this time to run out of the Northern Freedom Road. However, as time passed, the grim expression on the squad leader¡¯s face gradually faded. This was because he did not notice that the robbers had appeared at an intersection that could leave North Freedom Road. And now, some of the manpower he had deployed had already arrived at the intersection of North Freedom Road. They had surrounded North Freedom Road. At this moment, the congested traffic on Third Avenue had also been cleared out. The pursuit team had sessfully left Third Avenue and was hurrying towards North Freedom Road. Everything was developing in the direction that the squad leader wanted. Things seemed to be going extremely smoothly. Themissioner and themander were watching from the side. Although they hadn¡¯t said anything, when they saw the situation on the surveince video, a smile slowly appeared on their faces. Chapter 166 - The Search Team Arrived at the Abandoned Factory

Chapter 166: The Search Team Arrived at the Abandoned Factory

In the livestream. ¡°Hasn¡¯t Jone out yet? What¡¯s he doing at North Freedom Road?¡± ¡°He¡¯s probably changing cars. He wants to use yesterday¡¯s trick again and slip away from the police.¡± ¡°He¡¯s still slipping away from the police? Don¡¯t talk nonsense. Now that the police have blocked all the intersections of North Freedom Road, how can he slip away? Do you think Jon is a God?¡± ¡°Yes, this method is no longer feasible. Moreover, in this one day¡¯s time, Jon doesn¡¯t have the time to go to North Freedom Road to prepare another car.¡± ¡°Perhaps, before the drill, Jon had already prepared two cars? One for yesterday, and one for today?¡± ¡°Haha, when the squad leader went to the abandoned factory yesterday, I¡¯m afraid he had already turned this ce upside down. Even if there was a second car, it would have been discovered long ago.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about changing cars. Even if there was a car, even if the squad leader didn¡¯t discover it yesterday, even if Jon sessfully changed cars, what can Jon do?¡± ¡°Yeah, what can he do? Now the squad leader has already ordered people to block all the intersections that can go out of North Freedom Road.¡± ¡°The decision of Jon going to North Freedom Road is an extremely bad decision in my opinion. He has sent himself into a dead end and became a fish in the of the police.¡± ¡°Yeah, the police have already sealed off all the intersections that can leave North Freedom Road. How is Jon going to escape?¡± ¡°This decision is extremely brainless in my opinion. The so-called strongest robber in history is nothing more than this.¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon is doom. This drill has already entered the countdown. The oue is naturally the victory of the police. The Florida Police Department is awesome!¡± ¡°Good God, the police haven¡¯t even caught Jon yet, and you guys already so eager for Jon to lose?¡± ¡°The Florida State Police Department is awesome? They were indeed pretty awesome. After all, themander was killed by the robbers. This had never happened in the previous drill. I¡¯m willing to call that Florida State Police Department is the strongest for this one thing.¡± ¡°Haha, that¡¯s right. This is a record. Even if the police can win in the end, themander is dead. isn¡¯t that shameful?¡± ¡°Haha, LMAO.¡± ¡°Everyone, stop arguing. Jon has already made such decision more than once or twice. Don¡¯t worry. This time, there will definitely be a shocking reversal. I guarantee it with my hardcore die-hard fan certificate.¡± ¡°Earth-shattering reversal, and Jon willpletely turn the tide. Although I also believe in Jon, I really can¡¯t think of how Jon will turn the tables in this situation.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s continue to watch. The greatest climax of this drill is about to arrive!¡± The audiences discussed crazily. After Jon entered the North Freedom Road, he did note out again. At this time, the squad leader had basically sent all the police forces to surround this ce. From the current situation, Jon was already surrounded by the police on North Freedom Road. Now, the police had shrunk the encirclement really small. Therefore, a considerable portion of the audience thought that Jon was already doomed. After all, there were only five robbers. And there were at least a hundred police officers surrounding North Freedom Road. With such a huge gap in numbers, even if Jon was a highly intelligent robber, the strongest robber in history, some of the audiences did not see any hope for Jon to turn the table. And a very small portion of the audience also believed that Jon could give them a surprise in their hearts. They believed Jon because Jon had never disappointed them, but they couldn¡¯t think how Jon would pull this off. It seemed like it was a dead end for Jon! Ten minutester, the police force deployed by the squad leader was in ce. Up until now, they still couldn¡¯t see Jon leaving the North Freedom Road. This made the squad leader, who was in the temporarymand room, let out a long sigh of relief. This operation was finally progressing ording to his expectations. He had trapped this group of difficult-to-deal robbers on North Freedom Road. Now, the squad leader could not think of a ce where Jon could break through the encirclement of the police. ¡°Attention to search team, immediately enter North Freedom Road and search for the robbers!¡± After all his arrangements were in ce, the squad leader picked up the walkie-talkie. He gave the order to the search team that had already arrived at North Freedom Road. As he spoke, he stared at the rain outside and let out a long sigh of relief. This drill should be over very soon! The search team responded. The current search team wasposed of the police forces of Group C, Liberty East Road, and Fifth Avenue. There were fifty police officers. After receiving the order from the squad leader, they entered North Freedom Road. The remaining eighty to ny police officers blocked all the intersections of North Freedom Road. They prevented the robbers from breaking through one of these intersections. Until now, it could be said that the squad leader yed his role very well. That was because North Freedom Road did not have cameras. Therefore, after the search team entered North Freedom Road, the temporarymand room could only receive the images through the cameras on the police cars. The images were a little shaky. However, at least the people in the temporarymand room could understand the situation at the scene. They searched all the way. The search team didn¡¯t find anything. At this time, there were only police cars on North Freedom Road. There were no other vehicles. After all, the rain was too heavy. Moreover, this was a remote road. The roads were not even equipped with surveince cameras. One could imagine how remote the road was. Half an hourter. The search team arrived at the abandoned factory in the Little Alps. Outside the factory, the search team stopped their car. ¡°Attention all members of the search team. The robbers are extremely cunning. It is very likely that they have set up an ambush in the factory!¡± ¡°Everyone, pay attention to your safety. I don¡¯t want to see any more casualties in this capture operation!¡± The cars had just stopped, the squad leader quickly spoke through the walkie-talkie. Since the start of the drill, five police officers had been eliminated, as well as themander. The squad leader didn¡¯t want any more casualties. After all, if the robbers eliminated one more police officer, it would put more disgrace on the reputation of the police department. After responding to the squad leader, all the police officers in the car got out of the car and began to follow themand of the squad leader. More than forty people spread out and slowly approached the abandoned factory. At the foot of the Little Alps, a hundred meters away. Jon and the other five were squatting here, watching the situation near the abandoned factory from afar. They were wearing raincoats, and there were trees covering them, so they hid in this ce. If the police didn¡¯te over, it would be impossible to find them. Moreover, the police were still within the range of the trap. ¡°Should we do it now?¡± Beside Jon was Venus Alice asked calmly, she was holding a sniper rifle. She aimed the scope at the police officers who were a hundred meters away. Chapter 167 - Half of the Officers Died!

Chapter 167: Half of the Officers Died!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio But she was still a little nervous. Although this was just a drill, there were only five people on her side against the fifty people on the other side. Venus had never encountered such a situation in a 1vs10. Not only her, but the other three also looked a little nervous. After all, even though they were the elites of the Pennsylvania State Police Department, they had never encountered such a situation before. ¡°No rush, let¡¯s wait a little longer.¡±pared to them, Jon seemed very calm. Even though the police had sent out so many people this time, and the squad leader was going to have a final battle with the robbers here, but Jon was still calm. After all, as a former SEALs team member, he was trained to be steady at such situation. Not to mention, he also had the passive skill of Breezy Breeze to calm himself. After that, no one spoke. Everyone aimed their guns at the police officers 100 meters away, ready to shoot at any time. The rain continued to fall, hitting the trees and their raincoats, making a ssh sound. The search team slowly approached the abandoned factory. All the police officers were extremely cautious at this moment. They were afraid that the robbers would set a trap here and wait for them to step in. However, nothing happened until they entered the abandoned factory. Nothing happened. After entering the abandoned factory, they immediately found the robbers¡¯ car. ¡°Sir, we found the robber¡¯s car.¡± ¡°The robber seems to have abandoned the car and fled after arriving here.¡± When the team captain saw the robber¡¯s car, he immediately waved his hand to signal for all the members to stop. Then, he used the walkie-talkie to report this matter to the temporarymand room. The squad leader looked at the image on the team captain¡¯s helmet and saw the robber¡¯s car. At this moment, his expression was very grave. After all, when the robbers abandoned the urban vigest time, they had directly set a bomb on the car. Now, the robbers had left the car at the abandoned factory, so there should be some kind of trap. Could it be that they had set a bomb on the car again? However, after the previous incident, the police obviously wouldn¡¯t rashly touch the car and set off a bomb again. But what use would it be to set a bomb in a car again? Wouldn¡¯t it be a waste of bombs? Or could it be that the robbers deliberately set up a trap to confuse them? But no matter what, the squad leader had to pay attention to it. He was afraid that there was really a bomb in the car. ¡°Get a bomb disposal expert here. It¡¯s very likely that the robbers set up a bomb in the car. You have to handle it carefully.¡± The squad leader pondered for a moment, then he gave the order. ¡°Roger that.¡± The team captain replied. Then, he called the bomb disposal expert over and asked him to bring two special police officers to inspect the car. The bomb disposal expert and the other two special police officers nodded. They raised an explosion-proof shield and slowly approached the front. The remaining police officers were on guard with their guns. Their shield was not an explosion-proof shield used by ordinary police officers. Instead, it was an expensive military explosion-proof shield. This kind of explosion-proof shield was made of alloy steel. It was expensive to make, so of course, it was even more useful. It could not only withstand part of the bullets, it could also withstand the st wave of the bomb. So, even if there was a bomb suddenly exploded in the car when they were approaching towards it, they would not be counted as eliminated as long as they were holding the explosion-proof shield to protect themselves. Under the watchful eyes of all the team members, the three men with explosion-proof shields slowly moved forward. At this moment, everyone¡¯s attention was focused on the car. No one noticed it at all. There was an extremely thin fishing line less than two meters in front of them. Soon. The explosion-proof shields in the hands of the three men touched the fishing line. ¡°Bang!¡± ¡°Bang!¡± A huge explosion sounded from the left and right sides of the police officers. Thick red smoke rose from the two abandoned cars next to them. The bomb exploded! All the police officers were stunned at this moment. They had never expected that Jon would arrange the bomb there! In the temporarymand room. After seeing this scene through the disy screen, the squad leader clenched his fist angrily and punched on the table. Damn it, he had clearly been careful, but he did not expect that he would still fall into Jon¡¯s trap. This time, Jon actually ced the bombs at other ces! The car in the middle was a bait! It caught them off guard. When the bomb exploded, a lot of police officers who were nearby were instantly eliminated. ¡°All police officers within the 16 meters radius of the explosion have been eliminated. Immediately withdraw from the drill!¡± the one who spoke was the Commissioner Raymond. He took the walkie-talkie from the squad leader¡¯s hand and gave an order to the team. At this moment, Raymond was snakingly holding the talkie-walkie, he was obviously pissed. However, he was still the judge. Even though he wasn¡¯t happy at all, he still had to announce the results. ¡°Why within 16 meters?¡± when the squad leader heard this, he was obviously a little unconvinced, because many people would be eliminated in an instant. ¡°Why? Judging from the smoke from this explosion, the robbers had at least increased the number of bombs by four times. Moreover, the bombs were nted on two cars. The impact of the explosion would definitely be able to send the cars flying and cause even more casualties. Sixteen-meter radius is very reasonable.¡± Raymond turned his head to look at the squad leader and said slowly. The squad leader didn¡¯t say anything else. In the abandoned factory, the squad leader was counting the police officers within 16 meters of the explosion. There were 25 people in total! In other words, with two explosions, the search team had lost half of the officers! The police officers wouldn¡¯t believe it, they were extremely depressed. Fifty people came to the abandoned factory, and within a few minutes, half of them died. Even the team captain was eliminated as well. Now, there were only 25 people left. A team could not be without a captain, so the team captain could only find a special police officer and make him the temporary team captain. After handing the walkie-talkie to the temporary team captain, the eliminated team captain led the other 24 dead police officers to leave the ce After all, they were considered die in this battle, so naturally, they could not continue to participate in the drill. ¡°Now, all team members immediately disperse and maintain a safe distance. Send two more people to check the vehicles abandoned by the robbers.¡± the temporary squad leader calmed himself down. He continued to give orders. Although the three bomb disposal experts were holding explosion-proof shields, the bombs did not explode in front, but on the side. They were also sted by the bomb as well. So, the three of them were also eliminated! Chapter 168 - Jon Made His Move!

Chapter 168: Jon Made His Move!

Therefore, the Team captain could only send out two more people from the special police team. Two officers picked up the explosion-proof shield on the ground and carefully moved toward the car that the robbers had abandoned. Except for these two people, the rest of the people spread out and moved more than 20 meters away. Moreover, these two people carefully moved forward while checking the situation under their feet. They were afraid that there would be another fishing line somewhere and causing another bomb to explode, directly eliminating them. However, nothing happened which was out of everyone¡¯s expectation. Until the two special police officers arrived at the robber¡¯s car, nothing happened. However, even though it seemed like nothing went wrong, the two special police did not immediately open the door of the car of the robber. After all, all the police officers knew from the lesson from the urban vige that they would never make such a mistake again. Instead, they checked the situation of the car from the outside. However, the windows of the car were all pasted with sunshades. They could not see the situation inside the car from the outside. The two special police officers could onlye to the front of the car and look at the situation inside through the windshield. Because there were a few big ck bags in the trunk, the special police officers could see them even through the windshield. Seeing this situation, the two special police officers looked a little excited. It seemed that the robber¡¯s stolen money had not been taken away, which meant that the robber was still around. This time, they finally found something! ¡°Sir, we found a few ck backpacks in the robber¡¯s car. It should be the robber¡¯s stolen money!¡± One of the special police officers quickly reported the situation to the temporary team captain. Hearing this news, all the police officers present could not help but smile. Since the stolen money was still in the car, it meant that the robber would definitelye back. Because in this drill, the robbers had to escape the city with $10 million. In order to win, the robbers would not abandon the money. But now, the robbers¡¯ money could be said to be in the control of the police. As long as they moved the money, even if they did not catch the robbers. Then in this drill, the robbers would definitely lose. Or they could just wait here for the robber toe back and get the money. When the time came, they could capture all the robbers. In short, they had found the robber¡¯s 10 million cash, it was a major breakthrough for the police. When the temporary team captain heard this, he also revealed a smile. He quickly took out his walkie-talkie and reported, ¡°Sir, we found a few backpacks in the police robber¡¯s car. There seems to be the robber¡¯s stolen money inside!¡± In the temporarymand room. When everyone received this news, they all relieved a sigh and smiled. After another 25 police officers were killed, there was finally some good news. As long as the money was in the hands of the police, it could basically be said that the police had won. In the livestream. ¡°No way, no way. The things in the car couldn¡¯t really be the ten million cash that the robbers robbed, right?¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then it¡¯s a deal with Jon.¡± ¡°It should be a loss. I didn¡¯t expect Jon for being so strong, but he f*cked up in Florida. Sigh.¡± ¡°Why is it a definite loss? The police only got the money. Did they capture Jon? Why do you say that Jon is definitely going to lose?¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t you guys understand before watching the live broadcast? This time, if Jon wants to win, he can only leave the city with 10 million, understand?¡± ¡°But even so, Jon is already very strong. After all, in this drill, he killed thirty police officers and onemander. It can be said that his battle record is already very brilliant.¡± ¡°Yeah,pared to the previous two drills, there are many police officers been eliminated. Even themander was killed by Jon.¡± ¡°Under such circumstances, the police can only win the drill to wash away the humiliations. Otherwise, the Florida State Police will really lose its reputation.¡± ¡°But, why would Jon leave the money in the car?¡± ¡°Yeah, why would he do that? How heavy is the money? Can¡¯t they take it with them?¡± ¡°How heavy is it? 10 million US dors, over 300 pounds. Plus, they have weapons. Each of them needs to carry weight about 90 pounds. How can they take it with them in this storm?¡± ¡°But if they don¡¯t take it away, once the money falls into the hands of the police, how can the five of them snatch it away? Isn¡¯t Jon bound to lose?¡± ¡°It looks like there¡¯s no hope for Jon in this drill. Under such circumstances, Jon is bound to lose.¡± ¡°Will there be another miracle?¡± ¡°There won¡¯t be. Everyone, disperse. There won¡¯t be another miracle.¡± ¡°This drill has already gone on for close to thirty hours. For Jon to be able to hold on so long and even eliminate more than thirty police officers, he¡¯s already very strong.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be so pessimistic. There shouldn¡¯t be money in the car. After all, with Jon¡¯s intelligence, it¡¯s impossible for him not to know the importance of this money. He won¡¯t leave it with the police.¡± ¡°Yeah, the thing inside is very likely to be something else. It¡¯s impossible for it to be money. Jon wouldn¡¯t be so stupid.¡± ¡°Handing the money to the police means that it¡¯s impossible for Jon. They need to win by escaping the city, with the money they stolen. These are the two prerequisites, but money is missing. So Jon wouldn¡¯t leave the money behind.¡± ¡°Yeah, how could Jon not think of something that we can all think of?¡± ¡°Keep watching. I keep feeling that things won¡¯t be that simple.¡± The audiences discussed crazily in the livestream. After seeing that Jon seemed to have left the money behind. The audiences felt that it was impossible for Jon to win. After all, the prerequisite for winning was to leave the city with ten million dors. Now that Jon had left the money here, even if he could leave the city, it would be of no use. There was only a small part of the reason. They were hoping that Jon would not be so stupid as to leave the money to the police. The rain was still pouring. At the foot of the Little Alps. ¡°Fire!¡± Just as everyone was waiting, Jon suddenly gave the order in a low voice. ¡°Bang!¡± Just as Jon¡¯s voice fell, a gunshot rang in their ears. Venus had fired. As a sniper, she was the most focused of them all, so she reacted immediately after Jon gave the order. The bullet was fired! In an instant, it arrived in front of the special police officer who was reporting the situation. the bullet hit his helmet. The power of an LR5 sniper rifle was very strong. Not to mention a helmet, even if you wear a few more helmets, the bullets could easily prate it! Chapter 169 - The Search Team Was Wiped Out!

Chapter 169: The Search Team Was Wiped Out!

The moment the nk hit the special police helmet, red paint sprayed out and dyed his helmet red. The sensor on his helmet also emitted smoke. This meant that he had been eliminated. This sudden attack made all the police officers stunned. They still had smiles on their faces. They were still excited about finding the robber¡¯s stolen money. But what was the situation now? Was there a sniper? Could it be that the robbers didn¡¯t abandon the car and escape at all? Instead, they were lying in ambush nearby, and this car was just bait? ¡°Attention, everyone, there¡¯s a sniper, there¡¯s a sniper! Take cover, take cover¡­¡± The temporary team captain saw this and quickly shouted, but before he could finish, a nk had already hit his helmet. Smoke rose. ¡°Take¡­¡± the team captain¡¯s heart sank. Seeing this, he already knew that he had been eliminated. Then, at the foot of the Little Alps, dense gunshots could be heard. The bullets were fired at the police officers who did not have time to dodge. Two submachine guns, two automatic rifles, and a sniper rifle. Because the police officers were still immersed in the joy of discovering the stolen money a moment ago, their mental states were rxed, and they had already let down their guard. So, all of a sudden, smoke rose from many people¡¯s helmets. The robbers caught them off guard! This was also the opportunity that Jon had been waiting for. Because at this moment, the policemen were very rxed, so they fired at this moment. The policemen who had already been eliminated were naturally unable to make a move. As for the other policemen who had not been eliminated, they hurriedly to find cover. However, under such intense firepower of the robbers, even if there was cover, they would still be shot. This was because they did not know the exact location of the robbers. At the foot of the mountain, Jon held an automatic rifle and aimed through the scope. Basically, he shot one person at a time. ¡°Boss, your shooting skill is amazing.¡± Will Smith could not help but exim in admiration when he took the opportunity to change the magazine. He was also holding an automatic rifle, but he had already emptied one magazine and hadn¡¯t killed many. But Jon never missed once. Jon was not only had intelligence, but also could shoot. His marksmanship was also pretty good. Compared to Jon, Will Smith felt that he waspletely crushed by the him. Jon didn¡¯t respond to him and continued to shoot. Their sudden attack not only caught the police officers unprepared, it also caught the people in the temporarymand room by surprise. The 100 million viewers in the livestream also didn¡¯t expect it. Because in the previous drill, Jon had always been on the run. And this time, when the audiences saw the abandoned cars in the abandoned factory, they naturally thought that Jon had given up the money and had run away. Therefore, they did not even think about the scene of him confronting the police. But who would have thought that not only did Jon not run away, he even took the initiative to shoot the police. In the temporarymand room. The squad leader waspletely speechless and stared nkly into the screen. Not only him, but even themissioner and themander were also stunned. This time, the search team was ambushed by Jon. They were probably going to be wiped out! Previously, there were five casualties in the city. Now, there were fifty casualties, which was ten times the number! Moreover, there was also amander who was also been eliminated! In total, there were fifty-six people! The thing was, with so many people killed, they still did not catch the robbers! They still could not end the drill! Even the stolen money in the car was going to fall back into the hands of the robbers. No, it did not fall back into the hands of the robbers. It was because the police had never controlled the money in their own hands! In other words, if the police could not control the money, the robbers could still win. With so many police officers were eliminated, this was undoubtedly very beneficial to the robbers. From now on, the Florida State Police Department would lose face. This was a disgrace! In the abandoned factory, the search team was almost wiped out. Jon picked up his gun, stood up and said, ¡°Will, follow me. The other three cover us.¡± Then he walked out. They had killed 21 people in the dense fire. ording to Jon¡¯s calctions, the hunting team was left with 25 people after the explosion of the bomb. In other words, four of them survived. Jon naturally wanted to find these four people and kill them. Since he had already made his move, he had to kill them all. No one should be left behind. In the abandoned factory, four police officers hid behind a car. They had handguns in their hands. This meant that they were ordinary police officers. Because only the special police officers would be equipped with submachine guns and automatic rifles. But now, the special police officers were all dead. Since the special police had all the big guns in their hands. So, when the shots were fired, Jon had four people deal with the special police. A few police officers hid behind the car and held their breath. They didn¡¯t dare to show their heads now. After all, although they had weapons, they were only handguns. The robbers had handguns, automatic rifles, submachine guns, and even sniper rifles. Once they showed themselves, they would be eliminated in an instant. Moreover, even if they retreated, they wouldn¡¯t have a chance, and the robbers were closing in. They could only fight to the death! The four police officers looked at each other and nodded to each other to encourage each other. Since they couldn¡¯t leave anymore, they could only keep fighting! If they happened to kill Jon, it would be a great merit. Then, the four robbers got up and were ready to shoot at the robbers who were approaching them. But at that moment, a sniper bullet hit one of the police officers¡¯ helmet. The remaining three police officers were shot three times by Jon, and all of them were killed. The police officers fired two shots, but they did not hit the robbers. Then, smoke rose from the helmets of the four police officers almost at the same time. At this point, the search team that came to the abandoned factory were all wiped out! After confirming the number of people, Jon carried his gun on his back and came to the temporary team captain. Then, under his gaze, Jon took off his helmet and took the walkie-talkie from his hand. Then, Jon looked at the camera with a smile on his face. ¡°Newmander, I¡¯m very sorry. These members of your search team have all been eliminated by me.¡± ¡°A total of 50 people, all in one ce.¡± ¡°If you still want to chase us next, you have to be careful. Who knows, the number of people who will be eliminated next time will be even more.¡± Chapter 170 - Audience Were Shocked!

Chapter 170: Audience Were Shocked!

In the temporarymand room. Jon¡¯s image appeared on the disy screen. At the same time, his voice was heard by everyone in the temporarymand room. Hearing Jon¡¯s word and looking at his faint smile in the screen, the squad leader¡¯s expression was extremely gloomy, the muscles on his face moving. He was obviously gnashing his teeth. After eliminating so many of his own police officers, Jon was now speaking to him as a victor. This was simply a provocation! This was simply showing off! The squad leader was so angry that he almost mmed the table. At the side,missioner Raymond and themander did not look happy at all. It wasn¡¯t just them. All the police officers were very angry the moment they heard Jon¡¯s voice. After all, the robbers had already eliminated another 50 police officers. Jon even provoked them. His words caused rage flowed throughout their bodies likeva. In the livestream. ¡°I really didn¡¯t expect that Jon would be able to counterattack in such a situation. It¡¯s really amazing.¡± ¡°Yeah, before this, who would have thought that not only did Jon not abandon his money to escape, but he also evenid in ambush here and caught the police off guard?¡± ¡°This is simply amazing. Before we all thought that Jon would take advantage of the encirclement of the police to think of a way to escape, we didn¡¯t think that he didn¡¯t even think of escaping.¡± ¡°This is really a jaw-dropping reversal. When the police saw the money here, I thought that the police were about to win. I reckon that the police also thought so.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. They also thought that Jon had temporarily given up on running away and then thought of a way to snatch the money back. But they didn¡¯t expect that Jon didn¡¯t run at all, and instead ambushed them here.¡± ¡°The police were careless, but that¡¯s understandable. After all, the drill had been going on for so long, and it wasn¡¯t easy to see a major breakthrough point. It was inevitable that they would get excited.¡± ¡°But it was just that excitement, and Jon directly caught their openings, and then the whole team was wiped out.¡± ¡°Actually, this is a very good lesson. We shouldn¡¯t get carried away at any time, especially when we see sess. Perhaps there¡¯s a major trap waiting for you ahead.¡± ¡°Yes, the moral of this incident is too important. We must not becent.¡± ¡°What about the people who said that Jon will definitely be in a desperate situation this time and will definitely be arrested? Why aren¡¯t theying out to talk?¡± ¡°Their faces are all swollen because there were too many ps on their faces, do you think that they still have the nerve toe out to talk?¡± ¡°Haha, the people who don¡¯t think highly of Jon are probably the same group of people. Every time Jon is in a difficult situation, this group of people will jump out like a clown. They won¡¯t think highly of Jon, and then they will be pped in the face by Jon.¡± ¡°I guess they¡¯re all f*cking hate Jon now. After all, they¡¯ve been like the clown for so long, but Jon won¡¯t let them see the result they want to see.¡± ¡°Haha, but the most ridiculous thing is that this drill has continued until now. The police have lost a total of 56 people, but none of the robbers have died.¡± ¡°Yeah, I have to say that Jon is really too strong. Without his n, the robbers wouldn¡¯t have been able to do this.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect Jon to be so strong not only in defense, but also in offense. This drill should be the first time that Jon took the initiative to attack the police. I didn¡¯t expect him to achieve such a brilliant result.¡± ¡°It seems that in this drill, it won¡¯t be Jon who capsizes, but the Florida State Police Department.¡± ¡°I guess themissioner of the Florida Police Department is also betting. After all, the reason he invited Jon to participate in the drill is to show the strength of his own police department. But he didn¡¯t expect thi oue.¡± ¡°Florida¡¯smissioner: I called you here to show the strength of our police department. In the end, you pped my face again and again?¡± ¡°Haha, Good job. I guess Mr. Commissioner is already regretting it.¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon has participated in three drills, and the police are getting more and more miserable. Do you think that after this drill, there will still be people who invite Jon to participate in the drill?¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon has already shown such strength. What if after this drill, no one will invite Jon?¡± ¡°Although the police department really wants an opponent like Jon, now that they see that Jon is too strong, they definitely won¡¯t invite him.¡± ¡°Then what are we going to watch next time? We strongly request that Jon don¡¯t push too much pressure on the police. Otherwise, no one will invite him again.¡± ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t panic. Jon has performed so well. There will always be people who are not convinced by him. Someone will definitely invite Jon to participate in the next drill.¡± ¡°I hope so. Otherwise, my source of happiness will be gone.¡± ¡°Good god, he¡¯s starting to brag. No one dares to invite Jon anymore? Wake up, don¡¯t talk silly things, like Jon has already won this drill.¡± ¡°Yeah, these people are fantasizing about anything. Now that the police have blocked all the intersections on North Freedom Road, Can Jon still escape?¡± ¡°Even if more than fifty police officers were eliminated, so what? In the current North Freedom Road, not to mention the five robbers, even a fly can¡¯t escape. How can the robbers escape?¡± ¡°Hehe, to say the least, so what if Jon ultimately fails? He has already eliminated more than fifty police officers and a policemander. That¡¯s already very strong.¡± The audiences were still discussing crazily. This reversal caught everyone off guard. After all, arge portion of the audience thought that Jon had already lost a few minutes ago. There was no chance of winning for Jon. But they did not expect that Jon would actually ambush the police here. And then directly annihte the police¡¯s search team! In just a few minutes, no one would have thought that things would turn out this way. After all, the search team had already seen the robber¡¯s stolen money. It could be said that they had grabbed the robber¡¯s throat. However, reality was so unexpected. And the audiences, who had always supported Jon, were naturally excited when they saw this scene. They knew that Jon wouldn¡¯t let them down. They knew that since Jon dared to put ten million dors here, he would definitely have a way to reverse the situation! And in reality, Jon did not let them down. He directly wiped out the opponent¡¯s team. Moreover, the bandit team did not lose a single person. And the audiences, who had been pped in the face by Jon, were acting strangely, thinking that Jon would definitely lose. At this moment, the poprity of the livestream had already reached 112 million! The new viewers were all attracted by Jon¡¯s move! Chapter 171 - Team A On the Move!

Chapter 171: Team A On the Move!

After all, it was notmon for a police team to be wiped out by a few people. Meanwhile, some of the audiences began to send the gifts. In just a few minutes, the number of gifts increased by more than 30 million. Seeing this number, even Gal Gadot was shocked. In the temporarymand room. After taking a few deep breaths, the squad leader forced himself to calm down. Staring at the smiling Jon on the screen, he picked up the walkie-talkie and said, ¡°Jon, don¡¯t be happy yet. This drill isn¡¯t over yet. We still don¡¯t know who will win in the end.¡± Even though that was what he said, but the squad leader¡¯s tone was filled with helplessness and exhaustion. Although all the intersections on North Freedom Road had been blocked by the police, these police officers were just ordinary police officers and didn¡¯t have strongbat abilities. Moreover, their equipment was all handguns. The police officers with strongbat abilities were special police officers. However, a special police team had been eliminated just now. Under such circumstances, how could the police fight with the robbers? And the police officers who surrounded the intersection of North Freedom Road, what should they do next? Fight, they might not be able to beat the robbers. Drag it out? But they couldn¡¯t afford to drag out the drill. After all, there were so many people watching this drill, so the pressure on every police officer must be very huge. Therefore, the squad leader had to end this drill as soon as possible. ¡°You¡¯re right, Mr. Squad Leader. This drill is indeed not over, but it won¡¯tst for long. and the final victory will definitely belong to us.¡± As soon as Jon finished speaking, he cut off the video signal. The surveince screen on the control panel instantly turned ck. Hearing Jon¡¯sst words, the squad leader¡¯s brows slowly furrowed. Not for long? Could it be that Jon didn¡¯t want to waste any more time? If that was the case, then the squad leader had to hurry. Because the weapons in Jon¡¯s hands were much better than the weapons in the hands of the police officers who surrounded them. In other words¡­ If Jon wanted to break out of the encirclement, he could break out from any intersection. Furthermore, Jon was so smart that it wasn¡¯t difficult for him toe up with a n to break out of the encirclement. Therefore, he had to make arrangements as soon as possible. The squad leader looked at the monitor and fell into deep thought. A momentter, the squad leader looked at the team captain of the Search Team A next to him and said, ¡°Take the entire Team A and go to the Little Alps to capture the robbers. They have heavy weapons in their hands. You must be careful when capturing them.¡± Although there were many police officers on the North Freedom Road, their weapons were far inferior to the robbers. If they were asked to catch the robbers, it would basically increase the number of casualties. And now, only 12 members of special police were remained. This was the final strength of the police force. Of course, the Florida State Police Department had more special police force. However, the number of people in the drill was decided from the beginning. They couldn¡¯t just rece the eliminated special police officers. If that were the case, it wouldn¡¯t be fair to the robbers. After all, if the number of the police continued to increase, they could win with the advantage of number of police officers. How could the robbers have a chance of winning? That was why the squad leader sent them to the Little Alps. Because the robbers were all there, there was no need for holding back anymore. ¡°Roger!¡± Hearing the squad leader¡¯s words, the captain of Team A quickly responded. Then, he turned around and walked out of the temporarymand room. He brought the special police officers of Team A to the abandoned factory in the Little Alps. At the abandoned factory. After all the police officers of the search team had been eliminated. The three people who were covering for Jon and Will also walked over. ¡°This is so great! This fight is so great! This is so great! I¡¯ve been a police officer for so many years, but I¡¯ve never felt so good before.¡± Will Smith grinned. The excitement on his face could not be hidden. Even though his shooting skill was not good, he didn¡¯t kill many people and wasted a lot of bullets during the ambush, but this did not affect his excitement. Not only him. Venus Alice, Brown Williams, and Leon Evans, the three people, also looked very excited. They sessfully ambushed the police and achieved a great victory. They had directly eliminated all 50 police officers, including the special police team! This was a truly glorious achievement. Without even thinking about it, they knew that it would cause a nationwide sensation. Hence, they were very excited. ¡°I reckon that the newmander of the police force is in an extremely bad mood. After all, we have eliminated 50 police officers this time, including a special police team.¡± Venus Alice said with a smile while holding a sniper rifle. Before this, they had only thought about how to escape and had never thought of confronting the police force head-on. ¡°Don¡¯t be too arrogant. We were careless just now and didn¡¯t have time to react, so we revealed some ws and let you seize the opportunity.¡± ¡°You won¡¯t have such an opportunity in the next operation. You will definitely be caught by us.¡± looking at the excited faces of the robbers, the eliminated team captain spoke with an unconvinced expression. Even though they were already eliminated, they were still unconvinced. Because he had not expected to be ambushed by Jon. Strictly speaking, no one had expected that the robbers would be so arrogant. Not only did they not run, but they also even dared to ambush them. As a result, the police put down their guards. Due to their carelessness, they were unable to dodge the bullets. That was why they were caught unprepared. This led to theplete annihtion of the whole team. If they really had a head-on battle, it was not certain who would win and who would lose. ¡°A dead person does not have any right to speak. Fortunately, this is just a drill, so you can still speak.¡± ¡°If this was a real battle, you would have been a corpse long ago. Did you expect the real robbers to tell you before they attacked?¡± Jon spoke slowly. Hearing his words, the team captain scowled, but he did not refute anything. Although Jon¡¯s words were harsh, he was telling the truth. If they were still acted careless during the real battle, the fifty of them would have long been dead. ¡°Let¡¯s go back. We¡¯re already eliminated from the battlefield. There¡¯s no use staying here.¡± The team captain turned to look at the other police officers and said with a downcast expression. When they had arrived, everyone had thought that this operation would be able to sessfully capture Jon and end this drill. However, things did not go smoothly as they thought! Chapter 172 - Jon Intends to Break Through!

Chapter 172: Jon Intends to Break Through!

¡°What should we do next? Should we continue to stay here?¡± Venus could not help but ask as the five of them sat in the car after the eliminated hunting team left. ¡°No, the new hunting team has arrived. If we stay here, they will definitely be more cautious. Even if weunch another ambush, it will be ineffective.¡± ¡°Moreover, if they were well prepared, not only will our ambush not be effective, but we might also even get trapped by them.¡± ¡°Moreover, the drill has already been going on for a very long time. It¡¯s time to end it.¡± Jon slowly spoke. An ambush, a few against many. Only under the premise that the police were not prepared, could it have an unexpected effect. And now, after paying the price of 50 police officers, the hunting team would definitely be more cautious. They had to be careful at all times. Therefore, it was useless to carry out an ambush. After all, there were only five of them. ¡°Boss, do you mean that we should leave the city? But now, all the intersections of North Freedom Road are guarded by the police.¡± ¡°Although their weapons and equipment may not be as powerful as ours, once they set up their guard, it won¡¯t be easy for us to break through.¡± Will Smith took over the conversation and asked curiously. He naturally knew that Jon was ready to end this drill. But they had learned that the police had set up guard at all the intersections of North Freedom Road through the bug nted in the temporarymand room. Under such circumstances. Will Smith really could not think of a way to leave the city. ¡°Actually, it¡¯s very easy. Just the fact that their weapons can¡¯tpare to ours is enough.¡± ¡°After all, even the strong and well-armed special police were eliminated by us. We can also try to fight against these poorly equipped police officers.¡± Jon said slowly. He had been listening to the temporarymand room. Therefore, Jon knew all about the deployment of the police. The police force at each intersection on North Freedom Road added up to about 90 police officers. There was a total of five police officers leaving North Freedom Road. In other words, there were about 20 police officers at each intersection. Moreover, these intersections were not evenly distributed. However, the difference in the number of police officers at each intersection was not too big, at most that was 22 person¡¯s difference. With the equipment that Jon and the others had now, the sess rate to break through the police¡¯s defense was still very high. However, Jon did not n to do so. After all, after they rushed out of North Freedom Road, they were still within the city area. If they wanted to leave the city safely, they still had to charge through the roadblock. Once they charged through once, the team leader would definitely be on high alert for the second time. Therefore, the difficulty of charging through the checkpoint the second time would be greatly increased. Therefore. Since they were charging through the checkpoint, Jon had to choose to leave the downtown intersection in one go. At the end of North Freedom Road was Moses District. There was an intersection that could allow them to leave the city. However, there must be a lot of police officers guarded there. At least, there would be more people than at every intersection on North Freedom Road. There was a certain amount of risk passing through there. However, once they charged through, they would win the drill immediately. ¡°Next, head to this intersection!¡± Jon sat in the co-pilot¡¯s seat and pointed at a location on the map. He told brown, ¡°There will definitely be a lot of police officers here. However, as long as we rush over, we will win.¡± As he spoke, the three people in the back seat also leaned their heads over. Jon turned to look at them and slowly said, ¡°This is one of the intersections that can allow us to directly leave the city. Of course, it will be heavily guarded by the police.¡± ¡°If we leave from here, it will be much more difficult than leaving from any of the junctions on North Freedom Road.¡± ¡°But once we charge through, we will win immediately.¡± ¡°So, even though there is a certain risk, I still n to give it a try. If you have any suggestions, you can bring them up.¡± This was the second time the robbery team had cooperated. Compared to the first time, the others also had a certain amount of experience. So, Jon did not intend to make this team his own. If they had any reasonable suggestions, Jon would still listen to them. ¡°I don¡¯t have any suggestions. Boss, I¡¯ll do whatever you say. If it wasn¡¯t for my poor driving skills, I wouldn¡¯t have said anything if you asked me to take over Brown¡¯s driving.¡± Jon¡¯s voice had just fallen, Will Smith immediately replied. After all, he only knew how to y with bombs. He knew nothing aboutyout, nning, and scheming, so he didn¡¯t have any good ideas. Professional things were naturally done by professional people. So, if Jon had any decisions, he just had to listen. ¡°I don¡¯t have any objections. I believe in your decision.¡± Venus looked at Jon and smiled. ¡°I don¡¯t have any problems either.¡± ¡°Me too, I have no problem with it.¡± Thest person to speak was Brown Williams. After he finished speaking, Brown directly started the car. Hearing everyone¡¯s words, Jon smiled helplessly. Asking for their opinions was a waste of time. It seemed that the next time they made a decision, all they had to do was to let them know. However, it was also a very good thing that the robbers of this team trusted Jon so much. After all, this way, at least there wouldn¡¯t be any disagreements that would affect the situation of this team. ¡°Alright, since no one has any opinions, then let¡¯s go!¡± Jon said to Brown. Time was running out, and they needed to hurry. After all, the search team sent by the temporary room had already been deployed for some time. From the temporarymand room to North Freedom Road needed less than twenty minutes. And from the entrance of North Freedom Road to the Little Alps only needed another half an hour left. In other words, the robbers only had about 40 minutes left. Therefore, their best choice was to rush to the intersection near the city within this time. They had to find a chance to break out. Chapter 173 - Team A Entering North Freedom Road!

Chapter 173: Team A Entering North Freedom Road!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio At the temporarymand room. All the officers who had gone to the abandoned factory had been eliminated. Therefore, the temporarymand room could not understand what was happening on the scene. At this moment, the squad leader was staring at the monitor screen that had no image. He was deep in thought. He was trying to figure out Jon¡¯s movements. Just now, Jon had contacted them, and he had said that this drill would notst long. So, what Jon meant was that he had a n to break through the encirclement? But, if he really had a n to break through the encirclement of the police, how could Kant tell him such an important thing? Was Jon trying to confuse him? The squad leader thought deeply. There were two possibilities. As for whether Jon was going to break through the roadblock or not... He really couldn¡¯t be sure. After all, Kant was very smart. Every step would be meticulously nned by him. Moreover, he would make some real or fake arrangements to confuse the opponent. Therefore, the squad leader waspletely unsure about what Jon would do. He couldn¡¯t guess it. This time, if Jon wasn¡¯t trying to break out of the encirclement, it wouldn¡¯t do him any good to expose his n. That was because even if the squad leader thought that he was trying to break out of the encirclement and no longer paid attention to the abandoned factory, the deployment of North Freedom Road would only be stricter. What benefits did this have for Jon? Was it just to stall for time by staying in the abandoned factory? But there was no time limit for this drill, so there was no point in stalling for time. Or was he waiting for a big move by staying in the abandoned factory? The squad leader could not figure out Jon¡¯s intention. The squad leader took the map and looked to see if there was a ce in the Little Alps that could leave North Freedom Road. However, the map showed that there was no road built on the mountain. Moreover, even if they went over the mountain, it was still within the range of North Freedom Road. In other words, the robbers would be stuck in the abandoned factory and would not be able to do anything. Therefore, given the current situation on the road, it was very likely that Jon nned to break through. And Jon words were just to confuse him. To let him think in the direction of the robbers staying in the abandoned factory. Thinking of this, the squad leader had already made some decisions in his heart. He began to study on the map. He wanted to see which intersection the robbers might choose to break out of. At this moment, his solemn expression had eased up a lot. He felt that he had already guessed what Jon was thinking. In this situation, once the deployment was done, it was not impossible to win. In the livestream. ¡°Now, have all the special forces been sent out?¡± ¡°All the special police officers have been sent out. The temporarymand room has returned to the state before themander was killed.¡± ¡°After all, Jon and the other five robbers are all in the abandoned factory in the Little Alps. It¡¯s useless to deploy so many police officers here.¡± ¡°Judging from the squad leader¡¯s rxed expression, has he thought of a way to catch the robbers?¡± ¡°Not necessarily. After all, it¡¯s tiring to frown all the time. It¡¯s better to rx and chill a bit.¡± ¡°Haha, you cracked the hell out of me.¡± ¡°Actually, I think it¡¯s better to just surround the North Freedom Road for a day or two. When the robbers don¡¯t have anything to eat, they might surrender when they can¡¯t take it anymore.¡± ¡°Good Lord, surround the road for another day or two. Do you believe that the robbers might sneak away after a few hours?¡± ¡°Sneak away? Tell me, how can Jon sneak away when all the intersections are blocked?¡± ¡°But will there be a scene of police and robbers fighting? Thest fight was so exciting.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. Jon said that he¡¯s not going to stay here. He¡¯s going to end this drill.¡± ¡°Just listen to Jon¡¯s bragging. He¡¯s surrounded by so many police officers. is he going to end this drill just because he wants to?¡± ¡°Bragging? He did so many impossible things. Are you blind?¡± ¡°He¡¯s just an idiot. Don¡¯t bother with him.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. The number ofments increased wildly. The audiences were guessing what Jon was doing and how he was going to escape from the city to win this drill. After all, all the intersections that could escape the city had been blocked by the police. It was very difficult to break through in their defenses. However, there were some people who believed Jon. After all, Jon had said that this drill wouldn¡¯tst long. Then, it would definitely be as he said. This drill wouldn¡¯tst long. In the temporarymand room. The squad leader studied the map for a while and marked out the roads that the robbers might break through. It was obviously toote to divert manpower from other ces. The only police force that the squad leader could mobilize was the Search Team A that he had just sent out. He only hoped that Jon¡¯s raid would be a little slower. He wanted to give Team A enough time to support. Then, he took out his walkie-talkie and said, ¡°Attention all the teams that are blocking all the intersections on North Freedom Road. The robbers may break through at any time!¡± ¡°All the police officers at all the intersections please be extra alert and be prepared to fight at any time. This is ourst chance!¡± This was indeed theirst chance. Because the police officers blocking all the intersections on North Freedom Road were transferred from other intersections. Now, except Moses District, all the other exits of the city were very weak in defense. If the robbers sessfully broke out of the encirclement on North Freedom Road, they would be able to easily escape the city from other intersections. At that time, no matter how the team leader deployed, the situation could not be reversed. Therefore, North Freedom Road had to be strictly guarded. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger!¡± At this time. The Search Team A that he had sent had already arrived at the intersections that the police had set up. After passing through, they entered North Freedom Road. They headed towards the abandoned factory. Not long after, Team A encountered the search team that had already been eliminated in battle. Through the surveince screen, the squad leader looked at the vehicles and could not help but frown. He remembered that during the first drill, the robbers had once escaped from the eyes of the police while wearing police uniforms. Now, would he still use this method? It was possible! The squad leader quickly picked up the walkie-talkie. ¡°Team A, pay attention. Stop the cars of the pursuit team immediately. Check the cars to see if the robbers are hiding inside.¡± ¡°Team A, copy!¡± the member of Team A replied and then stopped the cars of the pursuit team. In the temporarymand room. Commissioner Raymond and themander saw that the squad leader had given such an order. They could not help but be startled. They were impressed by the squad leader. Chapter 174 - Before the Breakthrough!

Chapter 174: Before the Breakthrough!

The possibility that the robbers were hiding in the police car of the officers who had already been killed was something they had not expected. After all, all the officers in the hunting team had already been killed, and if the robbers had taken their cars, they would not have been able to resist. And they would not have been able to report it to the temporarymand room. Although, doing so would have been a bit of a cheat for the robbers, there was no rule in the drill that said that it could not be done. So, it was very likely that Jon would take advantage of this loophole. And when the audience in the livestream saw this, they also praised the squad leader, using good words like ¡°Awesome,¡± ¡°Thorough¡± and ¡°Rigorous¡± to describe the squad leader. However, to everyone¡¯s disappointment, Jon and the other five people were not in the car. There were only eliminated police officers in the car. Some of the police officers even took photos of the robbers andpared them one by one. After careful inspection, they did not find any robbers. Moreover, there was no ce to hide people in the police car. Simrly, they did not find $10 million. They also did not find any guns or ammunition. The robbers were not in this car at all. In the end, Team A did not find any robbers in the car, so they had to let them pass. Twenty minutester. Team A arrived at the Little Alps, near the abandoned factory. All the special police officers got out of the car and bent over from a distance. They made sure that they would not be discovered by the robbers quickly. After all, no one was sure that the robbers would not set a trap in the parking lot again. They were waiting for them at a certain ce. After all, more than 50 people had been eliminated in this drill. If a few more of them were eliminated as well, the situation would be even worse. Therefore, Team A led the special police very carefully. They didn¡¯t go directly to the abandoned factory. Instead, they went to the mountainside opposite the Little Alps. This ce was exactly opposite the ce where Jon had ambushed the police officers. And from here, they could also observe the inside of the abandoned factory. After arriving here, a team captain took out a telescope. He wanted to see if he could find the robbers. In the temporarymand room. Looking at the image transmitted from the helmet of the team captain of Team A, everyone held their breaths. This was because no one was sure whether the robbers would choose to break out or stay here to continue the ambush. If the robbers were still at the abandoned factory, this would be good news for the police. This was because if the robbers did not n to break out, the police would still have time to n the arresting operation. However, if the robbers had already left the Little Alps and were looking for an intersection to break out. Then, it would be very stressful for the police. After all, the robbers had heavy weapons in their hands. The squad leader didn¡¯t dare to guarantee that the police force he had deployed at the intersection of North Freedom Road would be able to stop the robbers. Because this drill wasn¡¯t like what everyone had expected that the robbers would only run away. From the moment they killed themander, it had already indicated that the robbers would take the initiative to attack. And if the robbers could rush out of the city, it meant that the police had lost. Therefore, if the robbers were not in the Little Alps, the pressure on the police would naturally be not small. At the Little Alps. The team captain did not see the robbers through the binocrs. He also did not see the robbers¡¯ vehicle. At this moment, he could confirm that the robber had most likely run away. Because if the robbers stayed to ambush the police, there was absolutely no need for them to hide the vehicles. ¡°Sir, the abandoned factory did not find the robber or the robber¡¯s vehicle. There was also no sign of them on the small Alps. They should have run away.¡± The team captain quickly reported the situation to the squad leader. The squad leader frowned when he heard the team captain¡¯s report. Although he had expected this oue, he still felt discouraged when he found out that the robbers were not in the abandoned factory. Then, he looked at the map and guessed where the robbers would escape. He calcted the time. From the moment the hunting squad was wiped out and after the robbers cut off themunication with him, nearly fifty minutes had passed. If the robbers had stopped at the abandoned factory for five or six minutes before they set off, then it had been forty minutes since then. Forty minutes. He ignored the intersection where Team A came, because the robbers would definitely not choose to break through at this intersection. Then, there were still three intersections left. These three intersections, the furthest intersection, was only a ten-minute drive. The robbers had another forty minutes or so to get there. But until now, there was no news from these intersections. Could it be that the robbers were deliberately stalling for time? But stalling for time did not benefit the robbers. Instead, it was beneficial to the police. Jon would never do that. And there was indeed an intersection that required 40 minutes of driving. However, this intersection was not the one that left Liberty North Road. Instead, it was the exit from Moses District, the exit from the city! It was very likely that the robbers were tried to escape from here! Thinking of this, the squad leader picked up the walkie-talkie. ¡°Attention, police officers from Team A and Moses District, the robbers are most likely breaking through from Moses District!¡± ¡°Police officers from Moses District must be on high alert. Team A will go to support them immediately.¡± Judging from the time, this intersection was most likely the intersection the robbers chose to break through! But he didn¡¯t know if Team A would be able to make it to this intersection in time. He had never let down his guard at Moses. Now, there were twenty-two police officers deployed at this intersection. It could be said that there were already quite a number of police officers. However, whether these twenty-two police officers would be able to stop the heavily-armed robbers or not was still uncertain. At the intersection of Moses District. ¡°Boss, there are twenty-two police officers at this intersection. There are roadblocks and tire breakers set up at the intersection. It¡¯s not very likely that we¡¯ll be able to rush out from here.¡± Will Smith looked at them as he spoke to Jon. Jon nodded The five of them used the terrain to conceal themselves. He had observed this intersection before. There were roadblocks set up at this intersection, and tire breakers were set up behind the roadblocks. If they tried to drive their way out, it wouldn¡¯t work at all. Therefore, if they wanted to leave from here, they would inevitably have to fight with the police. Moreover, Jon had heard the deployment of the squad leader in the temporarymand room just now. He was not surprised that the squad leader had thought that they would break through from here. After all, they had chosen to break through at this intersection. Jon did not hide it. He did not even make any confusing tricks, it was a matter of time that the squad leader figured it out. Chapter 175 - Annihilate the Police Again!

Chapter 175: Annihte the Police Again!

¡°We still have thirteen minutes. In thirteen minutes, police officers from other junctions wille to support us.¡± ¡°We have to sessfully breakthrough in thirteen minutes!¡± Jon looked at the time and whispered to them. ¡°Thirteen minutes? Time is running out.¡± Will Smith frowned when he heard that. In thirteen minutes, they had to break through the heavily guarded intersection of twenty-two police officers. Moreover, there were roadblocks and tire blowers set up at this intersection. This made him feel a little urgent. ¡°Will, go out and attract the police officers¡¯ fire. Brown and Leon, cover Will. Venus will take down the three police officers in the guard box.¡± ¡°And I want to test the power of the grenades on them.¡± Jon said slowly. Twenty-two police officers, this number was not a lot. Moreover, they had better weapon than the police. Jon was confident that they could make it. Now they still had a lot of bullets left. Moreover, there were still more than ten grenades left. Moreover, in the intersection ahead. The police officers were all gathered at that intersection. Most of them were crowded at a spot A few grenades could be really convenient in eliminating the crowd. ¡°Alright!¡± ¡°You guys better cover me up. I don¡¯t want to be shot into a honeb.¡± ¡°I was eliminatedst time, I ain¡¯t gonna do that again.¡± Will Smith didn¡¯t have any objections to Jon¡¯s arrangement. However, after replying to Jon, he turned back to Brown and Leon. After all, they were the ones who escaped in the bus with the fake hostage during thest drill. They sessfully attracted the police¡¯s attention. Thus, Jon and Venus sessfully escaped. As for the three of them, they were caught by the police and could be considered to have lost in battle. When he said this, the few of them smiled. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we got you. We will cover your ass.¡± Brown said with a smile. Then, just as they were about to make a move, everyone became serious. ¡°Everyone, get ready. Whether we lose or win, it all depends on this move!¡± ¡°Three¡­¡± ¡°Two¡­¡± ¡°One!¡± ¡°Begin!¡± Jon instructed and counted down to three before starting. As soon as he finished counting, Venus sniped a police officer. The next moment, it hit the helmet of a police officer in the sentry post. In an instant, red smoke emitted from the police officer. He was eliminated. At the same time. Will Smith also walked over from the corner of the street. Then he kept shooting to the police with his submachine gun. Now, he didn¡¯t care whether he shot urately or not. He only hoped that he could quickly finish shooting the bullets in the submachine gun. Under the random firing, he actually hit a few police officers. He was even more urate than when he was carefully aim at the target. Behind him, Brown and Leon were also shooting crazily, covering Will with fire. Jon took out a grenade. He pulled the fuse and threw it at the crowd of police officers. As a former Navy SEALs team member, his throwing was professionally trained. After the grenade left his hand, it drew a parab in the air. It fell within three meters of the guard post. Then, Jon¡¯s hand did not stop. He pulled open another grenade fuse. He threw it at another guard post. Then, another one! From Jon¡¯s order, to Will Smith¡¯s rush to shoot, and then to Jon throwing three grenades. All these things were done within five seconds. It was extremely fast. Completely caught the police off guard. Even though. The squad leader had ordered them to be on high alert a few minutes ago. However, their equipment was inferior than the robbers¡¯. Moreover, they out their attentions on the robbers¡¯ vehicle. They did not expect that the robbers would get off from their car and attacked them directly. ¡°Sir, the intersection of Moses District has been attacked by robbers. The robbers have heavy weapons in their hands. We can¡¯t resist them at all!¡± ¡°Request for backup, request for backup!¡± In the midst of gunshot, a team captain quickly picked up his walkie-talkie and called for help from the temporarymand room. However, as soon as he finished speaking, he was hit by a sniper bullet on his helmet. He was eliminated. He had no choice but to put down the walkie-talkie in his hand. In the temporarymand room. The squad leader had already asked the technicians to pull up the surveince footage of this intersection during the attack of the robbers. So, before the team captain reported back, the people in the temporarymand room had already seen the situation on the scene. They saw the police officers being crushed by the robbers, and the police officers had no ability to fight back. The squad leader¡¯s face was extremely gloomy. The arresting team was still a long way from that intersection. It would take at least 15 minutes to rush there. And the police officers at the nearby intersection, even if they were the nearest police officers, would also need five or six minutes to rush there. It was toote. Judging from the robber¡¯s fearsome attack, the officers at this intersection would notst long. This time, he did not give any more orders. Because it was toote for all the deployment. He could only ce his hopes on the officers at this intersection. He just hoped that they could hold on until the backup arrived At Moses District. The battle wasing to an end. The police who had set up a post at this intersection were basically wiped out. There were only two leave to take cover. Jon didn¡¯t walk over. Instead, he used the grenade he still had. He threw it towards the intersection. After the bomb exploded, the two police officers were also eliminated. They could only helplessly walk out. At this point, the 22 police officers at this intersection were all eliminated! ¡°Will, go and count the people. Brown, go and bring the car over.¡± Then, Jon said to the two people. The two people responded. ¡°Boss, there are quite a number of people. Twenty-two of them!¡± Soon, will returned after counting the number of people. His face was full of excitement. After all, the drill had ended, but he was not eliminated in the battle. This was something to be happy about. Chapter 176 - The Drill Is Over, And the Audience Is Boiling!

Chapter 176: The Drill Is Over, And the Audience Is Boiling!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Okay.¡± Jon nodded. The drill was finallying to an end. They had very little ammunition left after this ambush. Therefore, they had to escape before the police arrived. If they waited until the police arrived, it would be hard to say who would win. After all, it was very hard to shake off the police with these little bullets. Soon, Brown drove the car. He drove towards the intersection. All the dead police retreated to the sides withplicated expressions, as they were watching the robbers¡¯ car drove past. They were speechless, they all had a sullen face. Soon, the car arrived in front of the roadblock. ¡°There¡¯s not much time left. Will, Leon,e down with me and move the roadblock away!¡± ¡°Okay!¡± The two of them responded and got out of the car together with Jon. They moved the roadblock that was blocking the intersection away. Then, the five robbers drove the car. Under the witness of the police, they drove out of the intersection and out of the city. The robbers had won! In the temporarymand room. The atmosphere was extremely depressing. Everyone¡¯s faces were extremely gloomy, including the head judge, Raymond. Because they had lost in the drill. Moreover, they werepletely obliterated. Seventy-eight police officers were eliminated in this drill. In this drill, the total police force was only around 200 people. In the end, nearly a third of them were killed by the robbers! However, not a single one of the robbers was eliminated! Not a single person from the robber side was injured. Even though only nk bullets were used in the drill, they could shoot at the robbers without any concern. However, not a single robber was injured! This was a great humiliation. The Florida State Police Department had never suffered such a great humiliation in so many years. Moreover, it was under the witness of almost the entire country. After all, this drill was much more popr than the previous two. Almost 120 million people were watching the drill! Under the gaze of so many people, the Florida State Police Department had achieved such an oue. Commissioner Raymond wore a long face. He had traveled thousands of miles to Pennsylvania to invite Jon over. When he took Jon to the police department to pick out equipment, he had never expected this was the result of this drill! Why had he traveled thousands of miles to invite Jon? Of course, it was to show off the strength of his police department. But he was humiliated in front of so many people! He was so ashamed that he almost couldn¡¯t raise his head anymore! After all, Florida was very prosperous. It could be ranked among the best in the entire United States. Logically speaking, the strength of the Florida State Police Department should be ranked at the top. However, it was almost crushed by the robbers. Luckily, Raymond was in a good health. Otherwise, he might get too mad and passed out. ¡°Alright, although the oue of this drill is not what we thought, it has already ended.¡± ¡°Go back and properly summarize the problems encountered in this drill. Fortunately, this is a drill. If it¡¯s a real battle, more than 70 police officers were killed by the robbers, who can bear the responsibility?¡± Raymond said with a gloomy expression. In fact, Raymond wasn¡¯t a strict director. He had always been a very kind person. But now, in front of so many viewers in the livestream, he had to use a angry tone. After all, the result of this drill was freaking ridiculous! Even the policemander was killed by the robbers! If in actualbat, themander was killed, the matter wouldn¡¯t be as simple as robbing a bank. It would rise to the highest level. Themander and the squad leader lowered their heads and did not make a sound. As themander-in-chief, they had to bear arge part of the responsibility for the failure of this drill. Seeing that the two of them did not make a sound, Raymond took a deep breath. He knew that if he reprimanded them now, the oue would not be reversed. Then, he picked up the walkie-talkie and gave an order to all the police officers. ¡°All police officers, this drill has ended. Please return to the temporarymand room immediately.¡± At this time, the robbers had already left the city. However, the police officers who had set up sentries at other intersections did not know. Therefore, Raymond naturally had to inform them. ¡°Roger!¡± ¡°Roger! !¡± ¡°Roger! ! !¡± A series of replies quickly came through the walkie-talkie. However, since Raymond only announced the end of the drill, he did not say who had won. Therefore, the police officers did not know that the robbers had won. In the livestream. ¡°The words of the director in the end should mean that the exercise ispletely over, right?¡± ¡°Yes, it¡¯s over. It¡¯s finally over. Although I don¡¯t it to be end yet, it¡¯s time to say goodbye.¡± ¡°It¡¯s already past seven o¡¯clock in the evening. Counting the time, the drill has alreadysted for nearly 30 hours, which is not as long as thest one.¡± ¡°I thought that as long as Jon can hold on for a period of time, the time would be extended for a period of time. I didn¡¯t expect that the police would not be able to hold on in the end.¡± ¡°Yeah, the drill is often decided by both the police and the robbers. Not only do the robbers hold on, but the police also have to hold on as well.¡± ¡°Before the drill began, who would have thought that it would end up like this?¡± ¡°Who was it again? When the drill started, there were many people who did not think highly of Jon. They all said that he would be lucky if he could hold on for a few hours without being arrested.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know why those people have so little confidence in Jon. Those people who said that Jon would definitely lose, are you still there? Did your faces hurt?¡± ¡°Those losers have been pped in the face several times. Their faces are probably swollen by now. If you let them out now, won¡¯t you be making things difficult for them?¡± ¡°The brothers upstairs are right. It was my fault for not thinking things through. But seeing Jon p those people in the face like that, I feel very great.¡± ¡°I feelfortable too. Seeing that the ending is not what those people want to see, I feel very great.¡± ¡°Hehe, there¡¯s no need for you to be arrogant. I¡¯ll leave now. Jon will definitely lose in the fourth drill!¡± ¡°Quickly look. That dude is getting anxious. There¡¯s still no news of the fourth drill, and he can¡¯t wait to see Jon lose.¡± ¡°Good god. I suggest you go to the hospital to see the brain department to see if there¡¯s anything wrong.¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a clown. Just ignore him.¡± ¡°But this drill was really enjoyable to watch. Jon was too strong. From the urban vige to nting a bomb in the car, to killing themander, to the abandoned factory, and finally to the intersection out of the city. These few battles were too beautiful!¡± ¡°Yeah, it was simply an endless climax. Even the movies were not this exciting!¡± Chapter 177 - Raymond Notifies Jon That the Drill Ended

Chapter 177: Raymond Notifies Jon That the Drill Ended

¡°Hehe, I really don¡¯t understand why you¡¯re bragging. Isn¡¯t this because Jon has the advantage in weapons and equipment?¡± ¡°Yeah, if they had the same equipment, Jon would have been captured long ago. How could he have won?¡± ¡± You guys just haters, go somewhere else!¡± ¡°You said there was a difference in equipment. Why didn¡¯t you say there was a difference in numbers? A double standard piece of sh*t¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t see the difference in both side equipment. The police had three special police squads with more than 30 people. Their equipment and resources were not inferior to Jon¡¯s.¡± ¡°Yeah, let¡¯s not talk about the difference in numbers of weapon. Did the robbers not have grenade bombs, sniper rifles, or submachine guns? Did they just randomly fire a few bullets?¡± ¡°I always thought that there were no idiots in this world until I bump into thesements. This is f*cking ridiculous!¡± ¡°Jon is awesome if he can win. He won¡¯t ept any rebuttal. The people who are ndering him now are all idiots.¡± ¡°I suddenly have a thought that if we let these haters participate in the drill, how long can theyst?¡± ¡°How long more can theyst? Let me put it this way. If they rob a bank now, the police will be mobilized in ten minutes when they receive the news. They will be arrested in twenty minutes.¡± ¡°They won¡¯t even be able to hold on for an hour. They¡¯re just a bunch of clowns.¡± ¡°Yeah, I wonder what these clowns are spouting. Do they really not want Jon to win?¡± ¡°If they don¡¯t want Jon to win, you don¡¯t have to watch. Do you really have to show off your low IQ here?¡± In the livestream. The audiences were discussing crazily. Seeing the victory of Jon¡¯s five robbers, most people still hoped to see this scene. After all, they watched the drill to watch Jon. To watch Jon, they naturally hoped that Jon would win. There were many audiences who hoped that the police and robbers could have a wonderful confrontation, they were the minority who didn¡¯t care who won or lost. However, there were also people who thought that the reason why Jon won was because he used the advantage of his equipment. However, many people refuted this statement as soon as it came out. In this drill, the special police had all the equipment that the robbers had. Moreover, the number of special police was much more than the number of robbers. However, they didn¡¯t have the chance to directly fight with Jon. Once in the urban vige, a bomb exploded in the robbers¡¯ car, and once in an abandoned factory, they were ambushed by Jon. The robbers eliminated two special police squads. As for the third special police squad, they did not have the chance to fight with the robbers. They were just ordinary police officers who did not have such powerful weapons. How could they be sure that Jon had the advantage of weapons? Therefore, as soon as the person leave thisment, many people criticized him. As the drill ended, some people also sent gifts to the livestream. In an instant, the amount of gift reached millions! Outside the city. Jon parked his car on the side of the road. At this time, the five of them were eating. They were eatingpressed biscuits. Jon had prepared these before the drill. Although he had heard from the bug that Raymond had announced the end of the drill, he did not let them go back. So, Jon waited here for the time being. ¡°Boss, I think themissioner and themander are probably really mad. They lost the drill, and so many police officers were eliminated by us.¡± ¡°Even the chiefmander of the police force was eliminated.¡± Will Smith said excitedly as he ate thepressed biscuits. ¡°You can only brag in front of us. When we get to their temporarymand room, don¡¯t say it out loud.¡± ¡°Otherwise, I¡¯m afraid they won¡¯t be able to resist take you down and beating you up.¡± Jon smiled as he spoke. Because the drill had ended, the robbers seemed to have taken off a heavy load and was very rxed. When they heard Jon¡¯s words, the other three menughed. After all, what Jon said might be true. Now, the Florida State Police Department had failed in such a humiliating way. They must be filled with anger. If Will ran up to put some salt in their wounds, they might beat him hard Only Venus could not help but worry when she smiled. After looking at Jon, she silently lowered her head. In fact, she did not want the drill to end so quickly. After all, since the drill had ended, she thought that she would have to part with Jon. She did not know if there would be another drill. Even if there was another drill, Venus did not know if they had a chance to participate the drill together. When that time came, she did not know when she would want to see Jon again. Ding Ding Ding¡­ At that moment, Jon¡¯s phone that could only make calls rang. ¡°Jon, the drill is over. You cane back now.¡± On the other end of the phone, Commissioner Raymond¡¯s voice was still rtively gentle. Even though Jon had embarrassed the police during this drill, it also meant that Jon was extremely serious about this drill and wasn¡¯t fooling him. Raymond couldn¡¯t vent his anger on Jon just because he lost. ¡°Alright, we¡¯ll go back now.¡± Jon replied and hung up the phone. At the temporarymand room. Raymond put down his phone. At this time, the police officers had already rushed back one after another. However, the police cars were parked on the street. They filled the entire street. Fortunately, there was a rainstorm, there weren¡¯t many people on this street. Therefore, the traffic wasn¡¯t affected. The police officers who returned didn¡¯t get out of the car. Instead, they waited on the car. The police officers¡¯ leaders, such as themissioner, themander, and the squad leader, were standing under the awning. Gal Gadot and the cameraman were broadcasting from the side. Many other media outlets were also outside the cordon, holding umbres as they prepared to dig up some news. After all, this drill had already ended. Very soon, all the police officers who were outside had already returned. Everyone knew that this drill was a victory for the robbers. Moreover, many police officers were defeated during the drill. They were very frustrated. Before this drill started, every police officer was filled with confidence that they would definitely win. But when in the end, the results were not ideal. Not only was it not ideal, but it was a humiliation. Because, if they had just lost the drill, it would have been fine. They could still ept it. But, on top of that, more than 70 police officers were eliminated! They even lost a policemander! Their Florida State Police Department had be the most disgraceful police department! Chapter 178 - The Return of the Robbers

Chapter 178: The Return of the Robbers

With such an oue, the police officers were naturally not in a good mood. This drill ended in such way, it would definitely be an unprecedented big news. And after the drill ended, it would be the start of a real nightmare for the Florida State Police Department. Because no media would let go of such a big news. In the eyes of all the media, this news was a cash cow that could attract attention of the viewers. Naturally, they wouldn¡¯t let go of such a big piece of news. They didn¡¯t care how the Florida State Police Department was humiliated in this drill. They only pursued profit. And under the actions of the media, the Florida State Police Department¡¯ was going to be executed twice. This was very harsh. They waited for almost an hour in this torture. Then, everyone saw a seven-seater ck MPV driving through the rainstorm from the end of the street. The group of robbers came back. All the media outside the police line rushed over. After all, they didn¡¯t have the privilege of live broadcast, and the ce where the robbers came back was the only scene where they could get close to the robbers. So¡­ Everyone wanted to take some good photos. It was a good thing that they could put something good on their headlines. But they were only beside the cars, following the robbers¡¯car and filming, and didn¡¯t dare to stand in front of the robbers¡¯ car. After all, although they wanted some good stuff for their news, they still knew the rules. They couldn¡¯t interrupt the progress of the drill. Even though the drill had ended, it wasn¡¯t over yet. Jon got Brown to stop the car by the side of the road. Then, the five of them carried ten million dors, guns, and ammunition, and got out of the car. As they got out of the car, the mood of the media became even more excited. ¡°Jon!¡± ¡°Jon!¡± ¡°Ah!¡± There were even many young female media personnel who could not control their excitement and started shouting. The cameras in their hands continued to shoot. In a few minutes, arge amount of content rted to the scene would be spread online. These people followed Jon as they handed the microphones in their hands to Jon. ¡°Mr. Jon, you¡¯ve won the third drill. How do you feel now?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, you¡¯ve won three drills in a row. What do you think of your opponents, the three police departments that participated in the drill?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, you¡¯ve been hiding from the police in the past two drills. Why did you suddenly counterattack the police this time? You even killed themander of the police. Aren¡¯t you afraid that they¡¯ll take revenge on you?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, your performance in these bank robberies has been exceptionally eye-catching and wonderful. How did youe up with these ns? Have you really robbed a bank before?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, from the New York Police Station to the Pennsylvania Police Station to the Florida Police Station, where do you n to participate in the next drill?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, I heard that you have a special rtionship with the official live broadcast reporter, Gal Gadot. Can you tell me more about your rtionship?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, what if the Florida Police Department holds a grudge against you because of your outstanding performance this time and takes revenge on you?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, did you not care about the face of the police department during the drill? How could you make them so embarrassed?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, if because of your outstanding ability, no police department dares to invite you to participate in the drill in the future, what would you do?¡± ¡°Mr. Jon, if you¡­¡± ¡°Mr. Jon¡­¡± The questions of these media people were like a barrage of bullets, starting from the moment Jon got off the car. Theypeted to ask questions. They shot like crazy. These reporters were either nice or harsh to them. Some had some basic professional ethics, knowing what to ask and what not to ask. There were also some reporters just wanted to attract attention. They asked things that were controversial and problematic. They just wanted to some hot headlines and bring in more benefits. As for professional ethics? What was that? They even made up some random questions in order to gain more topics. Facing these reporters¡¯ questions, Jon did not speak. After all, this was not a press conference. There was no need for him to respond. Furthermore, these rude reporters made him feel very annoyed. And the smart media knew that they would not be able to get anything out of him. Therefore, they turned to ask Will Smith. ¡°Mr. Will, I remember you. You are the three robbers who were eliminated in thest drill. May I ask how you are feeling now that you were not eliminated in this drill?¡± ¡°Mr. Will, as a police officer in Pennsylvania, aren¡¯t you happy to see the Florida Police Department end up in such a miserable state?¡± ¡°Mr. Will, before eliminating themander of the police department, how did the robbers make their ns?¡± ¡°Mr. Will, you usually like to talk so much, why aren¡¯t you speaking now?¡± ¡°Mr. Will¡­¡± It was rare that Will Smith, who usually wanted to talk a lot, kept his mouth shut at this moment. He didn¡¯t say a word. Why did he want to speak? Damn, what kind of questions do you think these reporters are asking? First, they dug up his scars, talked about thest time he was eliminated? Was he happy seeing that Florida State Police Department end up in such a miserable way. Of course he was very happy! After all, their police department also lost, so the Florida Police Department could not win either. Otherwise, it would make his police department look like they were too weak. But¡­ Could this sentence be said? Could he say that he was happy? Of course not. The quality of these reporters was really low. And at this time, Jon and the other five also walked past the police line. These media people could only watch unwillingly as Jon walked further and further away. ¡°With the boss¡¯s current poprity, he¡¯s probably already surpassed most of the A-list celebrities. I never knew that ying a bank robber could actually gain such poprity.¡± Looking behind, the reporters were still taking shot. Will Smith could not help but sigh. ¡°This is because Jon is strong enough. He done all kinds of impressive ns. If it were someone else, they would not be able to achieve such an effect.¡± Venus heard Will¡¯s words and couldn¡¯t help but say something. Chapter 179 - Two bugs, Shocking the Commander

Chapter 179: Two bugs, Shocking the Commander

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Indeed. Jon¡¯s poprity was because of his powerful ability. He was able to win against the police in every drill. He was able to fool the police in every drill. He created a lot of trouble for them. If it was someone else, they might not even be able to do it. Jon¡¯s strength was worthy of his poprity! ¡°Just thest drill alone has already gained more than 80 million people watching the drill. After thest drill, the poprity of this drill will definitely be higher.¡± Venus Alice continued. After thest drill, in order to understand Jon, she looked up a lot of information about Jon on the Inte. She knew how popr Jon was. Soon, five of them came under the awning. Commissioner Raymond saw theming. He shook hands with Jon and smiled. Besides the drill, Raymond was very willing to make friends with people like Jon. After all, this person was very powerful. He was known by theizens as the strongest robber in history, a highly intelligent robber. If there was a chance, Raymond even wanted to invite Jon to the Florida Police Department to give a speech. He wanted to help the police department analyze the psychology of the robber. In this way, the police could urately guess the thoughts of the robber in the actualbat. ¡°During this drill, I saw your attitude and your performance was very good. It can be said that you havepletely embarrassed the Florida Police Department.¡± Raymond looked at Jon and said helplessly, ¡°To be honest, if you gave me another chance, I would never have invited you to participate in the drill... I regret it.¡± He really regretted it. More than ten days ago, when he excitedly went to Pennsylvania to invite Jon, he wanted to use this so-called strongest robber in the world to show the strength of his police department. But he never thought that, not only did he not show the strength of his police force, he waspletely defeated by Jon instead. Seventy-eight police officers were eliminated. Among them, there was even a policemander. His invitation not only did not help the police force to show its strength. Instead, it became a steppingstone for Jon. He really regrets it. ¡°I took part in three drills now. You are certainly not the only one who regretted it, but you are the only one who said it. You are a straightforward person.¡± Jon smiled. He participated in three drills, the first of the director, the second one was the Pennsylvania Commissioner. Did they regret invited Jon to the drill? They must be. That was because the drills had made them lose face. However, due to various reasons, perhaps it was to save face, or perhaps it was because they were embarrassed, they did not say it out loud. However, themissioner of the Florida Police Department said it out loud. It was straightforward enough. Raymondughed, then pointed at the two people behind him and said to Jon, ¡°Let me introduce you. This is the chief of our police department, and this is the squad leader.¡± ¡°These are the two chiefmanders of this drill, the two people who fought with you.¡± Raymond introduced themander and the squad leader to Jon. ¡°As expected of the strongest robber in history. You¡¯re really something, not bad.¡± Themander looked at Jon and spoke. Although he said nice thing to Jon, his gaze was so fierce that it could pierced through one¡¯s soul. It was this kid who not only eliminated more than seventy of their police officers, but also shot him next to the awning. And because of that, he became the most miserable policemander since the three drills. It was simply uneptable. However, although he was unhappy, themissioner was standing there, so he could not say anything rude. He could only go up and shake hands with Jon. ¡°But the police¡¯s performance wasn¡¯t bad either. There were a few times when you almost caught us.¡± Jon had a smile on his face as he reached out to shake hands with him. Themander looked at Jon¡¯s faint smile and wished he could punch him. It was too infuriating! They almost caught him? Was Jon showing off? But even if he were showing off, themander couldn¡¯t do anything about it. After all, Jon was the victor in this drill. Under the encirclement of more than 200 police officers, he still managed to escape sessfully. Jon and his team eliminated about a third of the police officers. Even he, themander-in-chief, was eliminated by them. Jon had the right to show off. Thinking of this, he shook his head and said to Jon, ¡°Your performance was better. In this drill, I almost didn¡¯t y any role, but I was shot by you. In fact, I admire you very much.¡± Jon was a little surprised that he could say these words. It seemed that thismander was quite magnanimous. ¡°Actually, if it weren¡¯t for the two bugs, your operation in the urban vige might have caught me.¡± Jon said with a smile. ¡°Bugs? There¡¯s really a bug?¡± Themander¡¯s expression froze, and then his expression changed. When the police officers rushed to the urban vige, themander suspected that there was a bug here. After all, the timing when the robbers left the hotel was too coincidental. They left right after themander gave the order to the police officers. Therefore, he thought at that time that there should be a bug or something here. However, before he could find the bug, he was shot by Venus and left the drill. The squad leader¡¯s expression turned solemn, and he was in disbelief. Even though he had also noticed that something was wrong while the robbers were escaping, as if the robbers could guess what he was thinking. However, he did not think of the possibility of bug. Now that he heard that Jon had installed a bug here, he found it hard to believe. Jon smiled and did not say anything. After putting down his backpack, he took out the bug under the table and the eavesdropping device in the temporarymand room and ced them on the table. ¡°This! This? ? ?¡± Themander looked at the two bugs with an extremely shocked expression! He never expected that the bug would be under the table and in the temporarymand room that he was using. Therefore, when he thought that there might be a robber¡¯s bug, he only looked around and did not think that it was right under his nose. While he was shocked, he was also a little annoyed. After all, if he had thought a little more, he might be able to find the bug. At the very least, if he bent down and looked under the table, he would be able to see it. But who would have thought that Jon would put the bug here? How did he do it? Chapter 180 - Shock! Disbelief!

Chapter 180: Shock! Disbelief!

Previously, themander had only thought that the robbers might use some items to hide the bugs such as the smelting furnace likest time or something like that. So, he had only looked around for big subjects that the robbers could use. He had never thought that Jon would nt the bugs under the table and the temporarymand room. He never thought that Jon would put the bugs in these two ces. So, even if he wasn¡¯t eliminated by the robbers, he wouldn¡¯t be able to find the bug. Unless he scanned it with the equipment, he wouldn¡¯t be able to find it. However, since Jon installed the bug in the temporarymand room and under the desk, that meant that it wasn¡¯t that Jon didn¡¯t install it right after they left the bank. Instead, they came back to install it after the temporarymand room and awning were built. But throughout the drill, there were always police officers in the temporarymand room from the beginning until the drill ended. How could Jon install a bug? ¡°When did you install a bug here?¡± After thinking for a long time, themander couldn¡¯t figure out how Jon installed a bug here, so he asked. Jon smiled and answered, ¡°Do you still remember the breakfast you had this morning?¡± ¡°Breakfast?¡± Themander was stunned at first, then he suddenly realized. After being pointed out by Jon, he immediately understood. This morning, he ate a breakfast that was no longer warm. At that time, he thought that it was bought by a few technicians. Now, it seemed that Jon was the one who sent it over? ¡°I was sleeping, but a few police officers were still working in the temporarymand room. How did you do it?¡± Themander asked again. Although he was asleep at that time, the few workers were awake. How did Jon put the bug here without anyone knowing? ¡°It¡¯s not a difficult thing.¡± ¡°You guys were staying up all night, so you must be very tired in the morning, say six or seven o¡¯clock, that was when I snuck in. Moreover, no one would think that a robber would put himself in danger, so you never expect me toe here.¡± ¡°So, I put on a mask and a hat and came here as a delivery boy. No one would suspect me.¡± ¡°Also, don¡¯t forget that I know how to disguise myself. You can¡¯t guess that I¡¯me here, I can disguise myself as another person without giving myself away. It¡¯s just that I didn¡¯t use this trick.¡± Jon¡¯s tone was calm, as if doing this was a trivial matter. After hearing Jon¡¯s words. Themander felt a little bitter. In the police headquarters, the robbers came and went as they pleased? This was really a shameful thing. Moreover, if he hadn¡¯t fallen asleep in the early morning, if he hadn¡¯t slept for a few hours, the oue of this drill might not have been as it was now. It was very likely that he would have been able to capture Jon when he came to the temporarymand room! The squad leader looked at Jon with a stunned expression. He had never thought that this person would be so daring. He actually dared toe to the temporarymand room alone and nted the bugs? How big of a gut did he need? In the live broadcast room. ¡°Good God, the truth has been revealed. If Jon hadn¡¯t said it himself, themander would never have thought that he would have done such incredible thing.¡± ¡°I think thismander-in-chief has already lost his mind. After all, if it weren¡¯t for these two bugs, the oue of the drill might end differently.¡± ¡°Look at the squad leader. His face is filled with shock, as if he¡¯s already numb.¡± ¡°Squad leader: shock.jpg.¡± ¡°Looking at the face of themander, I want to ask him, sir, how was the taste of breakfast this morning? Haha.¡± ¡°You guys are so sarcastic. Themander is already like this, yet you still want to tease him?¡± ¡°I can¡¯t help butugh. I guess themander is already traumatized by breakfast.¡± ¡°Sigh, breakfast is so innocent.¡± ¡°However, the bugs were installed under the eyes of a few technicians. They did not realize it. This should be considered their negligence. Will they be punished when they go back?¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be. After all, they did not do it on purpose. Who would have thought that the robbers would actually rush to this ce?¡± ¡°Whether they did it on purpose or not, whether they couldn¡¯t see Joning, it¡¯s still their negligence. They will definitely be punished.¡± ¡°If that¡¯s really the case, the technicians will feel wronged. After all, they worked for more than twenty hours continuously to watch the surveince footage, but they still get punish.¡± ¡°Yeah, they worked so hard. Even if they didn¡¯t get any credit, theyhad contributed a lot.¡± ¡°They won¡¯t be punished. After all, this is just a drill. Just remember this oversight and learn it as a lesson.¡± ¡°Sigh, in the end, Jon is too awesome!¡± ¡°Yeah, Jon is too awesome. The strongest robber in history, the Eternal God.¡± ¡°A supercar congrattes Jon for winning!¡± ¡°Then I¡¯ll gifted a ne. Thank Jon for letting US watch such a wonderful drill.¡± ¡°Hey, let¡¯s not talk sh*t anymore. Let¡¯s be civilized.¡± ¡°Alright, let¡¯s hurry up sending the gifts.¡± In the livestream, thements were surging wildly. After Jon said that he had installed two bugs, the audience was very curious about the reactions of the twomanders. Then, they were amused by the reactions of the twomanders. Some people even started to ask themander on the chat if the breakfast was good. Luckily themander had not seen the live bullet screen. Otherwise, he would have been so angry that he would have vomited blood. At this time. A few technicians who had been watching the surveince footage all night were also at the scene. They heard Jon say that he had disguised himself as a delivery boy and entered the temporarymand room in the morning. Their faces immediately turned green. After all, it was their negligence. If they had been a little more serious and checked the delivery boy, Jon would have probably been arrested. They had been so close to Jon. In the end, they let him slip away. The more they thought about it, the angrier they got. If Jon had been arrested in the morning, would the result of this drill still be like this? Definitely not. Deep down in their hearts, they were filled with regret! Looking at the unwilling faces of themander and the technical staff, Commissioner Raymond rubbed his temples and said helplessly, ¡°Alright, the drill is over. I think you can conclude a lot of problems through this drill.¡± ¡°As long as you gain something, it will be worth it.¡± This was a constion. Don¡¯t let them be really shocked by this drill. Then, he looked at Jon and said, ¡°Jon, do you have time recently? I want to invite you to our police station to give a speech and teach our police officers how to analyze the psychology of robbers.¡± ¡°After all, you yed the robber role very well in the three drills. I think you have a lot of experience with robbers.¡± His invitation had been carefully considered. Chapter 181 - No More Bank Robbery Drill!

Chapter 181: No More Bank Robbery Drill!

¡°We¡¯ll discuss this matter when we have the chance. After this drill, I don¡¯t know if I¡¯ll have the time.¡± Jon replied with a smile. It basically meant that he refused the invitation. After all, he was a person who did not like the hassle and trouble. And the reason why he participated in the bank robbery drill was for his own purposes. There were still two purposes. As for giving a speech at the police station, there was no benefit. Perhaps Raymond would give him a reward in some form, but he was not short of money now, so he would not be interested in such a small reward. Therefore, Jon did not want to trouble himself. ¡°Alright, when you have time, you must tell me.¡± hearing Jon¡¯s answer, Raymond said with a smile. He naturally understood what Jon meant. Therefore, he did not force him. Seeing that the two of them were almost done chatting, Gal Gadot walked over from the side, picked up the microphone in her hand and asked, ¡°Mr. Jon, Hello, Can I interview you with a few questions now?¡± Gal Gadot looked at Jon with a smile. Her eyes sparkled. ¡°Yes.¡± Jon replied with a smile. ¡°My first question is, unlike the previous drills, you didn¡¯t hide away from the police this time. Instead, you chose to take the initiative to attack the police and even killed more than 70 police officers.¡± ¡°So, the audience and I are very curious. Why did you suddenly change your style?¡± Gal Gadot asked. This was the thing that many people were very curious about. In the past, after Jon left the bank, he would find a ce to hide. But this time, not only did he not hide, but he also took the initiative to counterattack the police. Hearing Gal Gadot¡¯s question, themander and the squad leader seemed to pay their attention, and they took half a step back slightly. They lowered their heads. Even though they knew that they would be criticized repeatedly after the drill, when the real moment arrived¡­ It was still hard for them to ept it. ¡°That¡¯s because the previous two drills had a time limit. We only needed to hide and not be caught by the police within the time limit to win.¡± ¡°But this time, the rules have changed.¡± ¡°This time, we need to escape from the city with the money to win.¡± ¡°And we need to escape from the exit of the city, all of which are blocked by the police. So in this situation, fighting with the police is inevitable ¡°As I yed the role as a robber, I will naturally think and n as a robber.¡± Jon replied. ¡°Then, the second question. There are still many ces that would like to invite you to participate in the fourth drill.¡± ¡°As for the next drill, when will you choose to participate? What are the conditions for you to choose the police to cooperate with?¡± This question was also the most concerned question for the audience. After all, they had not enough yet. Naturally, they were looking forward to when Jon would participate in the next drill, and where would Jon choose to participate in the drill. Jon didn¡¯t respond immediately. Instead, he fell into deep thought. What surprised him was that, in this drill, he didn¡¯t give the police any face. He managed to eliminate one-third of the Florida police officers. He even eliminated themander of the police. It was a huge loss of face for the Florida State Police. Who would still invite him to participate in the drill after seeing that Jon had ¡°massacred¡± the Florida police ? At this moment. ¡°Ding, mission received. Participate in a prison break drill. Afterpleting the mission, the system will reward the host based on his performance. The higher the score, the more generous the reward.¡± The system¡¯s voice sounded in his mind. Prison break drill? ? ? Even though he was no longer a bank robber, if he sessfully escaped from prison, he could still embarrass the police. Thinking of this, he replied, ¡°I didn¡¯t expect that police department would still be willing to invite me to participate in the drill, after we killed more than 70 police officers in this drill.¡± ¡°However, I¡¯ve already yed the role of a bank robber in three times. I feel that this was enough.¡± ¡°Therefore, this Florida drill should be thest bank robbery drill I participate in.¡± Jon smiled and answered. Since the mission given by the system this time was no longer a bank robbery drill, Jon felt that the system would no longer let him to y the role of bank robber in the future. From now on, he had to participate in different kinds of drills In the livestream. ¡°? ? ? What? Jon is no longer participating in the drill. Come on, what are we watching if he¡¯s not participating in the drill? I haven¡¯t even enjoyed watching it yet.¡± ¡°Why is he not participating in the drill? Isn¡¯t the drill bring a lot of benefit to him? Let him gain fame and fortune.¡± ¡°Yeah, fame and fortune. Do you think the Jon still needs money? He doesn¡¯t. Since he doesn¡¯t need money, why is he still working so hard to participate in the drill? Isn¡¯t it good to just enjoy his wealth?¡± ¡°Yeah, who needs to work so hard to participate in the drill when they are super rich? I thought Jon was different from us. I didn¡¯t expect him to be the same.¡± ¡°I was looking forward to Jon¡¯s next drill just now. Don¡¯t give up just like that.¡± ¡°Jon is not going to drill anymore. My entertainment is over.¡± ¡°My heart felt empty. I would rather have never seen Jon¡¯s drill. I don¡¯t want to taste the best steak knowing that I can never eat it again.¡± ¡°There¡¯s something wrong with your expression. I¡¯ll change it. I can¡¯t wait for Jon¡¯s drill anymore. It¡¯s like the wind in the South Pole can¡¯t wait for the rain in the North Pole.¡± ¡°There were two certified idiots in the chat.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s start a petition. Please don¡¯t give up on the drill, Jon. I¡¯m waiting for you. We¡¯re all waiting for you.¡± ¡°That¡¯s enough. Jon only said that he won¡¯t participate in the bank robbery drill. He didn¡¯t say that he won¡¯t participate in other drills. Don¡¯t make it seem like the sky is falling.¡± ¡°Yeah, I hope you can listen carefully before expressing your opinions. Jon only said that he won¡¯t participate in the bank robbery drill. He said that he can also participate in other drills, such as the military drill or ying the role of a mercenary.¡± ¡°It¡¯s possible. It seems that Jon only said that he won¡¯t y the role of a robber. That doesn¡¯t mean that he won¡¯t y other roles.¡± ¡°Is that so? I¡¯m happy again.¡± ¡°Wonderful, my idol will be back¡­¡± Chapter 182 - Prison Break Drill!

Chapter 182: Prison Break Drill!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio When the audiences heard Jon say that he would not participate in the bank robbery drill, thements exploded. Because a lot of people were looking forward to Jon¡¯s next drill. But they didn¡¯t see thising. Therefore, a lot of the audiences on the chat begged Jon not to give up on the drill. After all, everyone loved to watch Jon¡¯s drill. Not just the viewers in the livestream, even Raymond, themander, the squad leader, Gal Gadot, and Will Smith were shocked. Before Jon made this decision, no one had expected Jon to make this choice, because the profits of the drill were outrageous. They didn¡¯t understand why Jon wasn¡¯t going to participate in the bank exercise. Venus looked at Jon in low spirit, she had been worried that she wouldn¡¯t have another chance to cooperate with Jon. But now, her worry hade true. If Jon didn¡¯t participate in the drill, then she probably wouldn¡¯t have another chance to contact Jon anymore. She did not know when she would meet Jon again. At the thought of this, Venus¡¯ heart felt empty. She was not the only one, there was also Will Smith and the others were also disappointed by Jon¡¯s decision. After two drills, they had formed a special bond with Jon, like the bond betweenrades on the battlefield. But if Jon did not participate in the drill, then they probably would not have the chance to reunite again. However, all good things muste to an end, everyone understood this. In life, it was inevitable to part with someone that you knew. ¡°Then you don¡¯t n to participate in the drill. What are your ns from now on?¡± At this moment, Gal Gadot asked again. Actually, Gal Gadot was rather happy that Jon did not participate in the drill. That was because Jon would not be too busy and had free time. She also had the opportunity to go home with Jon every day after work. ¡°I¡¯m not saying that I won¡¯t participate in the drill, but I¡¯m going to try other types of drills, such as doing a prison break.¡± ¡°After all, the security of the prison is also very important.¡± ¡°If a prison is willing to cooperate with me in a prison break drill, I¡¯m willing to do it.¡± Jon answered. ¡°Prison break drill?¡± Gal Gadot was stunned. Everyone was stunned. In the livestream. ¡°I¡¯m dumbfounded. So, it¡¯s not that Jon doesn¡¯t want to participate in the drill, but he wants to challenge a brand-new role?¡± ¡°Good guy, the role of bank robber can¡¯t satisfy him anymore. He wants to lock himself up in the prison¡± ¡°Wow, I really don¡¯t know what Jon is thinking. Why would he want to go to jail?¡± ¡°If you think about it carefully, it¡¯s quite made sense. After all, after he robs a bank, isn¡¯t he going to jail?¡± ¡°Wow, I see, I see.¡± ¡°However, let¡¯s not bother about Jon participating in what kind of drill. As long as he will be in a drill, we can watch the live broadcast again.¡± ¡°Haha, that¡¯s true.¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s words about not participating in the bank robbery almost give me a heart attack.¡± ¡°Actually, a prison break drill sounds quite exciting. It might even more hype than a bank robbery.¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m already looking forward to it.¡± ¡°I¡¯m also starting to look forward to it. In a heavily guarded prison, I wonder if Jon¡¯s high intelligence will still be of any use.¡± ¡°It should be of no use. Do you think that a prison is a bird cage? That it¡¯s so easy to get out?¡± ¡°However, to be on the safe side, I still hope that Jon will be locked in a top-notch prison. Only then will he be able to live up to his identity as the best robber.¡± ¡°You¡¯re being too serious, but I like it. I don¡¯t think that a normal prison can hold Jon. If he wants toe, then he¡¯lle to a heavyweight prison.¡± ¡°Highly secure prison, how about the Aga Mountain Prison?¡± ¡°The Aga Mountain Prison? What is this ce? How secure is it?¡± ¡°Good lord, you don¡¯t even know about the Aga Mountain Prison?¡± ¡°Okay, then I¡¯ll exin it to everyone. The Aga Mountain Prison is a world-ss prison. It¡¯s said that the prisoners inside are all whomitted felony!¡± ¡°Please invite Jon to the Aga Mountain Prison for the drill!¡± When the audiences in the livestream heard that Jon was going to participate in a prison break drill, they were happy again. It wasn¡¯t that Jon wasn¡¯t going to participate in the drill, so they were happy to have more drills to watch. And not long after, the news had spread out. Under the official Twitter of the Aga Mountain Prison, there were a lot ofments asking them to invite Jon to participate in the drill. In the temporarymand room, after they came back to senses after being stunned by Jon¡¯s word. ¡°Boss, you have to think it thoroughly. The prison break drill is not as simple as a bank robbery drill. There are high walls and electric fence in the prison. It¡¯s not so easy to escape.¡± Will Smith quickly approached Jon and spoke. After all, a prison break was much more difficult than robbing a bank. What kind of ce was a prison? It was the ce where were all sorts of criminals were locked in there, and it was strictly guarded. Jon wanted to be in a prison break drill. Wasn¡¯t he afraid of failing? Will Smith felt that Jon was a little too impulsive. Hearing Will, Jon only smiled and didn¡¯t say anything. Since the mission given by the system was a prison break drill, then he had to try it no matter what. Whether or not he could sessfully escape, he had to try. Moreover, this time the system only said that participating in the prison break drill would be rewarded. It didn¡¯t say that he had to win. Of course, winning was the best to him. After all, it was the only way to get a higher score. Commissioner Raymond stood at the side, wondering if this kid had been blinded by sweetness of victory and way too confident that he could break out a prison. Jon needed to be locked in the jail. It was not like being surrounded by police officers. That ce was heavily guarded. How could he escape? ¡°You, you are going to participate in a prison break drill?¡± Gal Gadot calmed herself down and asked anxiously. If nothing else, a prison break drill was definitely more dangerous than a bank robbery drill. She did not want Jon to participate in it. ¡°Yes, I do have the idea to participate in a prison break drill next. If a prison is willing to invite me, I¡¯ll happy to agree.¡± Jon said with a certain tone! Chapter 183 - They Couldnt persuade Jon, Jon Was Confident!

Chapter 183: They Couldn¡¯t persuade Jon, Jon Was Confident!

Hearing Jon¡¯s confident tone, everyone knew that he was insisted in the prison break drill. Gal Gadot and Will Smith were very clear, once Jon decided on something. it would be difficult to change his mind. Moreover, Jon was saying this in front of the camera and in front of more than 100 million viewers. It was impossible to go back on his words. After all, there were so many witnesses. At this moment, Will Smith and the other three were worried about Jon. As police officers, they knew what a prison was like. A prison break drill and a bank drill were twopletely different things. This was because a bank drill wasn¡¯t too dangerous, it was just a duel between the bank robbers and the police. At worst case scenario, one of the parties would be lightly injured. But a prison was different. In a prison, there were all kinds of bad people. There were serious criminals and even death row criminals. There were many prisoners from all walks of life and even gang members. It was quite dangerous. Moreover, it was much more difficult to get out of a prison than it was to get out of the city. At that moment, Gal Gadot was holding the microphone and did not know what to say. ¡°Alright, this drill hase to aplete end. I know that the audiences will definitely have a lot of questions to ask Jon.¡± ¡°Tomorrow morning at 10 o¡¯clock, we will hold an interview at the Florida State Police Department. We will invite all our friends from the media to attend.¡± ¡°We will also select a portion of questions that the online viewers are interested in.¡± Commissioner Raymond saw that Gal Gadot did not seem to have any questions to ask, so he made an announcement. It was already almost 9 o¡¯clock in the evening. The drill hadsted until this point, everyone must be tired, so he let them go back to rest first. After saying that, Raymond turned around and entered the temporarymand room. Jon and the others followed him and returned the ten million dors and the rest of the guns and ammunition from to them. ¡°Is this the end? Sigh, I really can¡¯t bear to part with it. I feel like this drill ended too quickly.¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s only been thirty hours. The time for the drill is indeed a little short. I was very happy during the drill, but now it¡¯s ended, I didn¡¯t know what to do anymore.¡± ¡°Me too. I used to look forward to Jon¡¯s new drill every day. When Jon started this Florida drill, I didn¡¯t expect it to be ended so fast.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not bad. Although the drill didn¡¯tst long, it created more hypes and excitements than thest two drills.¡± ¡°Yeah, this drill was really wonderful. It showed us that Jon not only know how defend but also attack!¡± ¡°Amazing, amazing.¡± ¡°I really envy Jon. He earned a lot of money from the livestream of the drill. It¡¯s even more profitable than robbing a bank.¡± ¡°You¡¯re dumb. This livestream doesn¡¯t belong to Jon. What does the profit of the livestream have to do with Jon?¡± ¡°You¡¯re the dumb one. The livestream indeed doesn¡¯t belong to Jon, but the ie from the live broadcast will definitely be Jon¡¯s share, and it will be a huge share. After all, the reason why the livestream is so popr is entirely because of Jon.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. If this live broadcastpany dares to take all the money, they definitely won¡¯t have the chance to broadcast Jon¡¯s drill the next time.¡± ¡°Alright, now that the drill has ended, everyone should wash up and go to sleep. If you¡¯re looking forward to Jon¡¯s next drill, you can watch the interview with the Florida State Police Department tomorrow. Who knows, there might be news about it by then.¡± ¡°Tomorrow morning? It shouldn¡¯t be so fast, right? Moreover, it¡¯s still unknown if there¡¯s any prison willing to cooperate with Jon.¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. After all, Jon is so famous and so capable.¡± ¡°If there¡¯s any news, we can watch it tomorrow. Anyway, there¡¯s nothing else today. Go to sleep.¡± As they were entering the final transition phase, there was no live broadcast of this scene. The livestream ended, but this did not stop the enthusiastic audience. They were still discussing in thements section. After returning 10 million in cash, guns and ammunition to Raymond, Raymond wanted to arrange a residence for the five people. But Jon refused. After all, it was unknown how long it would be before he met Will Smith and the others again. Therefore, Jon was now going to bring them to enjoy themselves and have a big meal. As for Gal Gadot, she needed to organize her work. Moreover, their rtionship was not publicly announced, so Jon did not bring Gal Gadot with him. ¡°Boss, are you serious about the prison break drill? The prison break drill is much more difficult than the bank robbery drill.¡± ¡°To say the least, not to mention the difficulty, it was way more difficult than the bank robbery drill.¡± Will Smith asked Jon. Although he knew that he could not persuade Jon, he still wanted to give it a try. ¡°Will is right. In prison, your own safety is a big problem.¡± ¡°After all, it¡¯s impossible for the prison to empty all the prisoners just because they want to participate in the drill. Moreover, if you set out from actualbat, they might ask you to get in the prison as a prisoner.¡± ¡°The danger is too great.¡± Upon hearing Will¡¯s words, Venus Alice also looked at Jon and spoke. They were all against Jon participating in the prison break drill. ¡°Thanks, but don¡¯t worry. Since I dared to make this decision, I¡¯ve already thought it through.¡± ¡°When have you ever seen me do something I¡¯m not confident of?¡± Jon said with a smile. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the few of them fell silent. They could not persuade Jon. Moreover, what Jon said made sense. He had indeed never done anything he was not confident about. He always had a clear and detailed n for what he was going to do next. Even if it was a risk, he was very confident that he could ovee it! Otherwise, Jon would not have won every one of the three drills. Then, the car fell silent. No one spoke. The car drove slowly in the rain, as if it had no purpose. At that moment, Jon¡¯s cell phone rang. He picked it up and saw that it was an unfamiliar number. Jon thought for a moment and picked it up. ¡°Hello?¡± Jon said calmly. ¡°Hello, Mr. Jon. I¡¯m the director of the New York television station.¡± On the other end of the phone, a somewhat reserved and ttering voice sounded. The director of the New York television station? A middle-aged man! Chapter 184 - Split the Money, Six Million Each!

Chapter 184: Split the Money, Six Million Each!

¡°Mr. Jon. The executives of the live broadcast tform contacted us during this drill.¡± ¡°They said that they want to sign a long-term contract with us for the live broadcast of the drill. If you agree, they can modify the live broadcast share.¡± ¡°Including thest exercise, they will give you a share of 90% of the profit from the live broadcast. The livestream tform only wants 10% of the profits.¡± ¡°So, I just want to ask, what do you think about this matter?¡± The station manager¡¯s voice continued to ring out. I get 90% of the profits?¡± Jon frowned slightly. This was something that Jon had not expected. Jon alone got 90% of the profit seemed absurd but it still made sense. After all, every live broadcast that Jon participated in during the exercise was massively popr. Moreover, the number of viewers for the Florida drill had already reached 120 million! That was ridiculously number of viewers. Moreover, because of this drill, the livestream tform had attracted many newly registered users. Under such circumstances, the livestream tform had to take it seriously. After all, if they were toote to offer a generous offer to the city television station, the city television station would very likely be poached by other live broadcast tforms that offered better conditions. After all, all people were drooling over money. Even if a smaller streaming tform taken control of the live broadcast of Jon¡¯s drill, with such terrifying poprity and the ability to attract money, it was not an exaggeration to say that this small tform would grow into a mainstream live streaming tform. After all, the audience wanted to see Jon. To them, it didn¡¯t matter which tform was going to broadcast the drill. All they needed to do was to sign up a new ount, if they didn¡¯t have Jon, they wouldn¡¯t watch it. So, letting Jon live broadcast on the live broadcast tform was a sure win. Even if they didn¡¯t want to split the profit from gifts, the tform was willing to do it. ¡°Mr. Jon, if you are not satisfied with this 90%, we can still negotiate with the tform. If it is really not possible, we can also change to another live broadcast tform.¡± Seeing that Jon did not react for a moment, the station manager continued to say. ¡°I have no objection with that. But as for the specific condition, I will leave it to you to talk with the live broadcast tform. When I return to New York, I will go to the television station to sign the contract.¡± Jon said calmly. The tform was willing to give him 90% share of profit from his drill, and they were also willing to pay the share received from the previous drill to Jon. Jon was still quite satisfied. ¡°Okay, Mr. Jon. When you return to New York, I¡¯ll get someone to pick you up.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Jon replied and then hung up the phone. ¡°Boss, who called you?¡± Will Smith asked from the back seat. Actually, from Jon¡¯s conversation, it was not difficult to guess that it was a call from Gal Gadot or the television station. The reason why he had to ask was because the car was too dull. Winning the drill should be an exciting thing. The silence in the car was not fit to the asion. Therefore, Will Smith, who spoke the most among the five of them, had to break the silence. ¡°The New York City television station is calling. In order to retain right to livestream the drill, the live broadcast tform updated my share from the livestream.¡± Jon answered. He did not hide it from them. After all, there was nothing that could not be said. The few of them had participated in two drills with him. They could be considered his friends. Moreover, they knew about his participation in the live broadcast. ¡°Boss, you¡¯ve earned quite a bit from these two drills, right?¡± Will Smith said with a chuckle. Whether it was the Pennsylvania Police Department or the Florida Police Department, they all made a decision, which was not getting the live broadcast¡¯s profit share. Although in the drill, Will Smith and the other three acted as robbers like Jon, they were from the Pennsylvania Police Department. Therefore, they could not get in the share as well. Now, Will Smith asked because he was curious. He did not mean anything else. After all, Jon had spent hundreds of thousands of dors on the hotel they stayed in before the drill. He was too generous. ¡°I did earn a lot.¡± ¡°The four of you also participated in two drills with me. You did well. I can¡¯t treat you badly. I¡¯ll give each of you six million. Give me the card number of your bank tomorrow. I¡¯ll transfer it to you guys in two days.¡± Jon said with a smile. The moment he said this, the other four people lost their mind. ¡°Six¡­ Six Million? Boss, you¡¯re not kidding, right? Six million for each of us. That adds up to twenty-four million. We don¡¯t even have that kind of money when we rob banks.¡± Will Smith was shocked. His face was full of disbelief. Even if they were really robbed ten million US dors, after the division, each of them would only get two million! Now, Jon had said that he would give six million to each of them! It was three times more than robbing banks! ¡°Do I look like I¡¯m joking? Give me the bank card number tomorrow, and the six million will probably be in your bank ount the day after tomorrow.¡± Jon said slowly. Although he did not know how much money he would earn from the live broadcast of this drill. It should not be less than thest time. After all, this drill was more excited and intense than thest two drills. He had even killed the policemander! The number of gifts given by the audience would be huge. Given six million to each of them was actually not a lot. ¡°Boss, that¡¯s not what I meant. At this time, the police department will not get the share from the live broadcast. So, this is all your money. You don¡¯t have to give it to us.¡± ¡°Moreover, we can¡¯t take this money. If themissioner finds out about this, he will immediately punish us.¡± Will Smith said seriously. The reason he asked Jon was not because he wanted money. He was simply curious. This was also because he was familiar with Jon. Otherwise, randomly asking how much money a person earn was a very impolite thing to do. So, he was afraid that Jon would misunderstand and quickly exined. ¡°I¡¯m your boss. It¡¯spletely up to me to give you money. You just need to keep it.¡± ¡°As for yourmissioner, I¡¯ll talk to him.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve worked hard during these two drills. You deserve it.¡± Jon said calmly. Since he had decided to give Will Smith and the other three a share, he naturally wouldn¡¯t take back his decision. As for themissioner Pennsylvania State Police, it was just a matter of words. Hearing Jon¡¯s words, the four of them fell silent. Six million. Who wouldn¡¯t be tempted by it? Although they were the cream of the crop in the police station, their monthly sry wasn¡¯t much. If they wanted to save six million, how many years would it take? Chapter 185 - The Highest Grade, Reward From the System!

Chapter 185: The Highest Grade, Reward From the System!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Thank you, Boss.¡± After a moment of silence, Will Smith looked at Jon and said. Since Jon was going to give it to him, he would take it humbly. After all, he was already in his thirties and his child was going to school, and it was time for him to worry about money. Although he had been a police officer for more than ten years, because his father had fallen seriously ill, he had spent most of his money on his father¡¯s treatment. Therefore, his did not have much savings. And now, he really needed Jon¡¯s six million dors. At this moment, he was extremely d that before the Pennsylvania drill began, Jon had chosen his aplices to the robbery drill. He had himself! ¡°Thank you, Boss!¡± ¡°Thank you, Boss!¡± Seeing that Will Smith did not refuse anymore. Brown Williams and Leon Evans, who were driving, also hurriedly thanked him. Venus Alice did not say anything. She looked at Jon¡¯s side profile, and no one knew what she was thinking. ¡°You guys deserve it. After all, it¡¯s not the first time we¡¯ve worked together. It¡¯s very likely that I will have to bring you guys along for the uing prison break drill, but it¡¯s up to you guys.¡± Jon said slowly. In fact, as he said, Will Smith and the others deserved this share. After all, these live broadcast gifts were not all for Jon alone. Perhaps there were viewers who liked the other members of the robbery team and rewarded them. ¡°Of course we want to. When the timees, we promise to be on call.¡± Will Smith said with a smile. Even without the six million, they would not hesitate to respond to Jon¡¯s call. After driving for a while, the five of them arrived at a high-end restaurant and booked a private room. They waited for Gal Gadot. Not long after, Gal Gadot arrived. The few of them had a happy dinner. After dinner, it was already 11pm. Jon booked a few hotel suites online. He asked Brown Williams to drive them there. Soon, they arrived at the hotel. ¡°Why did you participate in the prison break drill? A prison break drill is much more dangerous than a bank robbery drill.¡± Gal Gadot looked at Jon and asked. During the previous interview, she had wanted to persuade Jon. However, at that time, she was a reporter, so it was not appropriate for her to get involved in personal feelings. But now, there were only Gal Gadot and Jon here, so naturally, she wanted to understand Jon¡¯s thoughts. ¡°I can¡¯t tell you the reason now, but this prison escape drill is very important to me. Since I¡¯ve made a decision, it means that I¡¯m confident. You don¡¯t have to worry too much.¡± Jon said softly. He couldn¡¯t tell anyone about the fact that he had the system. Not even Gal Gadot. ¡°Alright.¡± Gal Gadot said after a moment of silence. Since Jon intended not to say the reason yet, she didn¡¯t ask again. ¡°Go take a shower.¡± Jon touched Gal Gadot head and said with a smile. Gal Gadot¡¯s face turned red from his gaze. She obediently went to take a shower. Meanwhile, Jon sat on the sofa and opened his attribute panel. Now that the drill had ended, it was time to receive the reward. This exercise was much more difficult than the previous two drills. Therefore, the system¡¯s reward should be more generous than the previous two. As for how generous it was, Jon was looking forward to it. ¡°Ding, this acting mission has beenpleted. Do you want to receive the reward now?¡± At this moment, the system¡¯s voice sounded at the right time. ¡°Yes.¡± After receiving the reward twice, Jon appeared much calmer. Regarding this drill initiated by the Florida Police Department, Jon was still looking forward to what kind of rating could the system give and what kind of reward that he could get. ording to the specifications of the drill and his performance in this exercise, the reward given should be more generous than the previous one no matter what, right? The system¡¯s voice continued. ¡°In this drill, the host yed the robber perfectly and won the final victory, obtaining an SSS rating!¡± ¡°The SSS rating is the highest rating of the system. The additional reward is 10 attribute points.¡± ¡°Received cash: 20 million! The money is currently stored in the system store. The host can withdraw it at any time.¡± ¡°Received reward: Godly irvoyance (low-level). Note: after the skill is activated, the host has a certain level of irvoyance ability. At low-level, the host can see through the back of the poker card, see through walls, metal doors, etc.¡± [ Reward: Godly Swimming Skill (low-level)] [ Reward: Godly Rock Climbing Skill (intermediate)] [ Reward: Mysterious and Unpredictable (high-level) . Note: this skill is a passive skill. In the eyes of others, the host will have a mysterious and unpredictable aura. Just by looking at the back of the host, they will know that the host is not to be trifled with. ] [ Reward: 20 attribute points. ] [ Reward obtained: 10,000 points. ] [ Skill: Godly lockpicking skill upgraded to intermediate. ] [ Skill: Robber¡¯s Aura upgraded to advanced. ] After a series of system notifications sounded out, the reward also appeared on the stats panel in front of Jon. Looking at the additional rewards. Jon was still very satisfied. This time, the system gave him the highest rating. The SSS rating made him a little surprised. Even though he knew that his performance was not bad. Jon still did not expect to receive the highest rating. Moreover, his points and cash had almost doubled. As for the few skills, they did not seem too useful to Jon now, but they woulde in handy in the future. Who wouldin that they had too many skills? The system store had more than 30 million in money. However, Jon didn¡¯t really care about money at the moment. After all, just the ie from the live broadcast alone had already exceeded this number. Jon was most interested in attribute points. This was because his score of acting as a robber had reached the highest score of the system. Therefore, the system rewarded him with an additional 10 attribute points. The points were no less than a reward of tens of millions of dors to Jon. After all, he felt that 10 attribute points were much more precious than tens of millions of dors in cash. After that, he looked at his attribute panel. Chapter 186 - Invitation to Aga Mountain Prison

Chapter 186: Invitation to Aga Mountain Prison

[ Host ] : Kirby Jon [ Intelligence ] : 125 (normal person¡¯s average is 100) [ Physical fitness ] : 145 (normal person¡¯s average is 100) [ Points ] : 13,430 [ Skills ] : Combat Arts (master level) , Firearms Expert (master level) , Robber Aura (high level) , Police Acting Aura (low level) , Godly lock-picking skill (intermediate level) , Aura Concealment Skill (low level) , God level Medical Skill (low level) , Godly irvoyance (low level) , Godly swimming skill (low level) , Godly rock climbing skill (middle level) [ Passive skill ] : Breezy Breeze (intermediate) , Mysterious and Unpredictable (advanced) [ Attribute points ] : 30 Jon ced his focus on 30 attribute points. He was thinking about how to use them. Intelligence? It seemed to be enough. After all, he did not want to be a scientist or a schr. He had enough intelligence to act as a robber. As for his physical fitness, it seemed to be enough as well How should he use the points? Jon thought for a moment. He decided to add 10 attribute points to his intelligence. Add 20 attribute points to his physical fitness. Jon didn¡¯t hesitate, he immediately used up all his attribute points. His mind and body were changing. This change couldn¡¯t be seen from the outside. But Jon could feel it. This feeling was veryfortable. 20 attribute points added to his physical fitness, he seemed like been trained in the Navy SEALs team for more than ten years. Then Jon closed his attribute panel. Heid on the sofa and rxed. Next, it was time for the prison break drill. Although he didn¡¯t know if there was a prison that would be interested to invite him to participate in the drill. However, Jon was still looking forward to it. At this moment, his phone rang. Jon took a look. It was Commissioner Raymond of the Florida State Police Department. ¡°You¡¯re here?¡± Seeing this, Jon frowned. It was already twelve o¡¯clock, and Raymond called him again. It shouldn¡¯t be a casual conversation. There was a very high possibility that a prison that wanted to cooperate with him had contacted him. Then, they had Raymond ry the message. ¡°Hello,missioner?¡± Jon picked up the call. ¡°Jon, guess why I¡¯m calling you now?¡± On the other side, Raymond spoke with a casual tone. ¡°Let me guess. Is there a prison that wants to cooperate with me in a drill and have you ry the message to me, am I right?¡± Hearing Raymond¡¯s words, Jon was basically certain. ¡°As expected of the smartest robber. Nothing seems to be hidden from you.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. There is indeed a prison that contacted me and said that they want to cooperate with you in a drill. This prison is the Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°The reason why they want to cooperate with you in a drill is mainly because after you expressed your intention to participate in the prison break drill today, more than 100,000 viewers went to their official Twitter and asked them to lock you up.¡± ¡°You are an extremely vicious robber, so the Aga Mountain Prison agreed to it.¡± Raymond said jokingly. When Jon heard that, he could not help but smile. The influence of the audience was very strong. The new drill was settled so quickly. ¡°They will invite you to participate in the drill. This is something that I did not expect. After all, it is very rare for their prison to have a drill.¡± ¡°This prison is well-known throughout the country. If you want to escape from here, I¡¯m afraid it won¡¯t be easy.¡± Raymond¡¯s voice continued to say. ¡°It¡¯s precisely because it¡¯s not easy that we have to try. If a prison is so easy to escape from, then it won¡¯t be challenging at all.¡± Jon replied. Prison escape drills were different from bank robbery drills. They rarely invited outsiders for the drill. Because the participants had to bear great risk, it was also the same to the prison. After all, if the participants encountered any serious troubles in the prison, the prison was also likely to be responsible. So, even if the audience appealed. But there shouldn¡¯t be too many prisons that actually invited Jon for the drill. Now that Aga Mountain Prison had taken the initiative to invite Jon, Jon had no intention of rejecting it. ¡°I know that you¡¯ve already made up your mind. You can¡¯t be persuaded. I¡¯m not trying to persuade you this time. It¡¯s just that although Aga Mountain Prison has taken the initiative to ask you to participate in the drill, they have many conditions.¡± ¡°The first condition: you must enter the prison as a normal person and you won¡¯t be treated differently.¡± ¡°After all, the drill is based on actualbat. It is impossible for the prison to specially set up a few special cells for the drill ¡°The second condition: during the live broadcast of the drill, cameramen and reporters are not allowed to enter the cell area. They can only film in the prison¡¯s surveince room. It will be dangerous for them to enter the cell area.¡± ¡°The third condition: During this exercise, the prison will not provide anything, including weapons.¡± ¡°If you can ept these conditions, the Aga Mountain Prison is looking forward to cooperating with you.¡± ¡°Of course, two days after the start of the drill, if you feel that it is impossible to sessfully escape from the prison, you can withdraw from the drill at any time and end the drill.¡± ¡°Think about it carefully. After the press conference is over tomorrow, give me an answer and I will reply to them.¡± Raymond told Jon about the situation at Aga Mountain Prison. They had requested a lot, but in general, it was still eptable to Jon. ¡°Okay, I will give you an answer tomorrow.¡± Jon said slowly. Then he hung up the phone and put it aside. Although he had already made a decision, Raymond gave him time to consider. So he was in no hurry to respond. Maybe, before the interview ended tomorrow, there might be other prisons that would invite him. As for the Aga Mountain Prison, he knew something about it. It was located in Pennsylvania, and it was one of the most heavily guarded prisons in the United States. The prison only amodated male prisoners, with a maximum of 5,000 people. It had been built for several decades now. During that time, it had imprisoned all kinds of people from all walks of life, terrorist killers, and so on. After several decades of renovations, many safety facilities had been added. Five years ago, it had been named the safest prison in the world. This prison had quite a reputation. Moreover, it was located at Pennsylvania. Will Smith and the others were from the Pennsylvania State Police Department. If they needed to work together as a team in their escape drill, they would be the best choice. Naturally, they would be the best teammates. ¡°Who are you talking to? Is it about the prison break drill?¡± Gal Gadot came out from the bathroom and looked at Jon curiously. Chapter 187 - I Need Your Help!

Chapter 187: I Need Your Help!

¡°The Aga Mountain Prison has already sent out an invitation. It is a good choice.¡± Jon nodded and spoke. He was quite satisfied with it. If there was no better choice before tomorrow morning, then the Aga Mountain Prison would be Jon¡¯s final choice. ¡°I¡¯ve heard of this prison. It¡¯s said that the prisoners inside are all heavy criminals. These people are all very dangerous.¡± ¡°If you choose this prison, you must be very careful of your safety.¡± Gal Gadot said with a worried expression. She had no way to interfere with Jon¡¯s decision, so she could only remind Jon. Although Jon was very powerful, this prison was still full of dangerous criminals. And the prisoners inside were obviously in cahoots. Once Jon entered, there would definitely be a lot of trouble. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I am not afraid of them, but they should be afraid of me.¡± ¡°If they carelessly provoke me, they will get their ass beat.¡± Jon smiled. Before he acquired the system, he was a former member of the Navy SEALs Team, and his physical fitness was quite good in all aspects. Not to mention, now that he had acquired the system, his physical fitness and intelligence had increased by a lot. Moreover, he had mastered a master level fighting technique. Now, it would be no problem for him to fight against more than a dozen special police officers. Not to mention, some of the so-called felons in the prison. The reason why felons were terrifying was that they did things that other people did not dare to do. They weren¡¯t much stronger than an ordinary person in term of physical strength, some of them might even weaker than most people. Therefore, Jon was not worried at his safety at all. The next day. Gal Gadot left the hotel early in the morning. She was an official live reporter. Naturally, she had to go to the police station in advance to prepare for the live broadcast of the interview. As for Jon, he slept until nine o¡¯clock. Then, he got up and washed up. He went to the hotel¡¯s lobby. Will Smith and the other three were already waiting there. ¡°Boss, how¡¯s your sleep?¡± Will Smith asked with a smile when he saw Jon walk down. ¡°Not bad.¡± Jon replied with a smile, ¡°Let¡¯s get down to business. You should all know about the Aga Mountain Prison, right?¡± The prison was in Pennsylvania, and Will Smith and the other three were Pennsylvania police officers. They should be more familiar with the prison. ¡°Although this prison is in the same ce as ours, it¡¯s not close to our police station.¡± ¡°Furthermore, although I¡¯m a police officer, I¡¯m only responsible for catching criminals and not sending them to prison.¡± ¡°So I really don¡¯t know much about this Aga Mountain Prison.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s question, Will Smith said helplessly. The other three also shook their heads. They didn¡¯t know much about Aga Mountain Prison. ¡°Boss, do you mean that this prison has already issued an invitation to invite you to participate in the prison break drill?¡± Will Smith seemed to have thought of something and hurriedly asked. After all, Jon would not ask about a prison that waspletely unrted. Even if he was going to participate in the prison escape drill, he would not be sure about that. Since he had urately asked about the name of this prison. This meant that there was a very big situation. This prison had already invited Jon to participate in the drill. ¡°That¡¯s right. Yesterday, themissioner of the Florida State Police Department told me that the Aga Mountain Prison wanted to invite me to participate in the drill.¡± Jon nodded in response. Since he had taken the initiative to ask, he naturally wouldn¡¯t slow them down. ¡°Although I don¡¯t know much about the Aga Mountain Prison, I do know that this prison is very secure like a safe box. Moreover, the prisoners in this prison are all serious criminals.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect that they would invite you.¡± Will Smith couldn¡¯t help but say. Before Will Smith heard the news from Jon, he wasn¡¯t sure if any prison would be willing to invite Jon to cooperate. After all, the prison break drill wasn¡¯t a bank robbery drill. There were too many uncertainties, and the safety risks were too high. If Jon wasn¡¯t careful, he would be in danger. However, they did not expect that the Aga Mountain Prison would act so quickly. As they spoke, the five of them had already arrived at the hotel¡¯s parking lot. ¡°Although the Aga Mountain Prison has already stated that they intend to cooperate, I have yet to agree. Moreover, the Aga Mountain Prison has set conditions for the drill.¡± Jon sat in the passenger seat and said slowly. Last night, he had looked up a lot of information about the prison. From the looks of it, if he escaped alone, the chances of sess were not high. If he wanted to seed, he would need someone to help him. Therefore, Jon still wanted to invite Will Smith and the others to participate in the prison escape drill. Moreover, among the conditions made by the prison. It did not prevent Jon from inviting the team. ¡°What kind of conditions did the Aga Mountain Prison make?¡± Venus Alice asked curiously. ¡°Yes, boss, what kind of conditions?¡± Will Smith also asked. Brown Williams and Leon Evans, who were driving, did not ask. But they were also curious. ¡°Three conditions. First, those who participate in the drill will be sent to prison as robbers, and the treatment will be the same as other criminals.¡± ¡°Second, live reporters and cameramen are not allowed to enter the prison area.¡± ¡°Third, the prison does not provide any weapons.¡± ¡°In short, at the beginning of the drill, I was a real prisoner.¡± Jon outlined the conditions set by the Aga Mountain Prison to them. There was no need to hide these things from Will Smith and the others. ¡°The prison is famous for its security, and all of the prisoners in it are wicked criminals. Any one of them could be a psychopathic murderer.¡± ¡°If you enter as a prisoner, not to mention breaking out of the prison, even facing those criminals would be very troublesome.¡± ¡°The prison is like a society without good people. The people in there are basically devils. They are very unfriendly to the new prisoners.¡± ¡°Of course, with your strength, Boss, you don¡¯t have to care about this. However, the probability of sessfully breaking out of the prison is not optimistic.¡± Will Smith became serious, which was rare. ¡°It is indeed difficult for a person to break out of prison. Therefore, I need your help.¡± Jon smiled and said what he was thinking. Chapter 188 - Interview!

Chapter 188: Interview!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°That¡¯s not a problem. We¡¯re a team of robbers, and we can participate in the drill again.¡± Hearing this, Will Smith replied with a smile. Although he tried to persuade Jon to not to join the prison break drill, Will Smith himself was secretly excited towards it. After all, none of the people who yed with bombs were well-behaved and boring. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, will I not be able to participate?¡± ¡°After all, this Aga Mountain Prison only imprisons male prisoners.¡± At this moment, Venus Alice said with a disappointed tone. She naturally wanted to help Jon, but the Aga Mountain Prison only imprisoned male prisoners and not female prisoners. ¡°A prison break drill is very important to us. The arrangements outside the prison are equally important.¡± ¡°Because someone has to help us from the outside.¡± ¡°Brown and I will enter the prison.¡± ¡°The three of you will be waiting for us outside. When the timees, I will think of a way to contact you so that we can sessfully escape.¡± Jon said slowly. This was what Jon had decided after careful consideration. It was not difficult for him to leave the cell. What was difficult was to have someone outside the prison to cooperate with him. Only then could Jon¡¯s n be carried out. The three people outside. One was an explosives expert, one was aputer expert, and the other was a sniper. With the three of them working together outside, it was not difficult for Jon toe up with a perfect escape n. ¡°Alright, Will, Leon, and I will be waiting for you outside.¡± Venus Alice nodded and spoke. ¡°When we arrive in Pennsylvania, I will borrow you guys from yourmissioner. Then, we will borrow a sniper rifle. Since the prison doesn¡¯t give weapons, we will think of a way to get some.¡± Jon smiled and spoke. Soon, they arrived at the police station. Then, Raymond invited the five of them into his office. There was still some time before the interview started. In the Raymond¡¯s office, the five of them came here and first greeted each other. Then, Raymond took out 100,000 dors as Jon¡¯s reward. Although, this money was nothingpared to the ie from the live broadcast, Jon still epted it. After all, this was his gain, so why not take it. ¡°Oh right,missioner, sincest night, have any other prisons contacted you?¡± Jon asked. This was something that Jon was more concerned about. If other prisons contacted Raymond, it meant that Jon had other choices. ¡°No. After all, the prison invited people from outside the system to participate in the drill. This is something that has almost never happened before.¡± ¡°Because no one knows what will happen during the drill, so not many prisons are willing to give it a try.¡± Raymond slowly said. The fact that Aga Mountain Prison could send an invitation to Jon in such a short time. This was unexpected. It was only logical that no other prison would invite Jon. ¡°In that case, let¡¯s respond to Aga Mountain Prison. We can ept their conditions, and my only request is that the five of us participate in this drill. As for the deployment of the five of us, Aga Mountain Prison cannot interfere.¡± ¡°If they agree, then let¡¯s make an appointment tomorrow afternoon at the Pennsylvania police station to discuss the details.¡± Jon spoke out his requirement. Since there was no other choice, Jon did not dy any longer. He directly decided on this matter. ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll make a call now and contact the Aga Mountain Prison.¡± Raymond nodded and agreed. Then, he took out his cell phone and contacted the Aga Mountain Prison and ryed Jon¡¯s request to them. Soon, after Raymond finished the call, he said to Jon, ¡°The Aga Mountain Prison has no objections to your request. At three o¡¯clock tomorrow afternoon, their person-in-charge will be waiting for you at the Pennsylvania Police Station.¡± ¡°A prison break drill is not like a bank robbery drill, so you have to be prepared in advance.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be at a loss when you enter the prison.¡± ¡°Try to win in this drill! ¡± Raymond looked at Jon and said seriously. Raymond hoped Jon would win. That was what he really thought. After all, if Jon failed in this prison break drill, it meant that the police who participated in the bank robbery drill were not strong enough. Raymond naturally did not want this to happen. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, director. I won¡¯t let you down.¡± Jon said with a smile. He naturally knew what Raymond was worried about. The reason why he participated in the drill was because he really wanted to win. Even if he lost, there would be a system reward. But if he lost, the reward would be not as good. ¡°With your words, I¡¯m relieved. Okay, now that the interview is about to start, let¡¯s not waste time here. Let¡¯s go to the venue now.¡± Raymond looked at the time. It was already 9:57 am. There were still three minutes before the interview officially began. Then, Raymond stood up and led a few people to the venue. The Florida Police Department¡¯s interview was also set up in thergest conference room of the police department. Jon and the others followed Raymond in. Themander and the squad leader had already taken their seats. Jon smiled and nodded at the two of them. The two of them also smiled and responded. By the time everyone had taken their seats, it was already 10 o¡¯clock sharp. ¡°Now, the interview after the bank exercise held by the Florida Police Department and Jon will officially begin.¡± ¡°Dear reporters, you may ask any questions you have. After the reporters have finished their questions, we will select the questions of the viewers from the livestream and answer them.¡± Raymond said. As he spoke, the interview for this drill began. At this moment, in the official livestream. The number of viewers was already quiterge. After all, Raymond had already announced the news of today¡¯s live interviewst night. So, there were already many viewers waiting in the official livestream before the live broadcast began. Even though the audience was facing a ck screen, they were still in high spirits. They were discussing Jon¡¯s next drill in thements section. As the time for the interview slowly came, the number of viewers in the livestream also increased. Now, the interview was only the official beginning, but there were already more than 60 million viewers in the livestream! Moreover, the number of viewers was still soaring. Chapter 189 - Live Interview, Questions from Reporters!

Chapter 189: Live Interview, Questions from Reporters!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio In the livestream. ¡°Is the interview finally starting? That¡¯s great. I¡¯ve been looking forward to it for more than ten hours, and now it¡¯s finally starting.¡± ¡°Looking forward to it for more than ten hours? Is it necessary, dude? It¡¯s just an interview. You¡¯re making me feel like you¡¯re a brainless fan.¡± ¡°To be precise, I¡¯m not looking forward to an interview. I¡¯m looking forward to whether Jon will release the news of the next drill during the interview.¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m also looking forward to this too. After all, Jon¡¯s next drill is a brand-new attempt. It¡¯s no longer a bank robbery drill, but a prison break drill.¡± ¡°I inexplicably feel that the prison break drill is even more exciting, because the bank robbery drill seems to be boring at this point.¡± ¡°My mate, that¡¯s because Jon has already participated in the bank drill three times in a row. You might be a little tired of the same sh*t, that¡¯s why you feel that the bank robbery drill is not exciting.¡± ¡°Thisd is correct, it is indeed be a little boring to watch another bank robbery drill, but Jon seems to know that we are tired of this, so he changed the drill method.¡± ¡°Haha, I wonder if Jon will reveal the information about the next drill in today¡¯s interview.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. How could it be so fast? After all, the prison break drill doesn¡¯t like a bank robbery drill. The difficulty of the prison break drill is very high.¡± ¡°Moreover, the prison break drill usually doesn¡¯t look for people outside the system. They usually conduct the drills internally.¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s too risky to let the outsiders participate. Prisons are not like banks. There are all kinds of criminals in prisons. If they can¡¯t protect the safety of the people participating in the drill, it¡¯ll be troublesome.¡± ¡°Yeah, sigh, I wonder if there will be prisons looking for Jon to cooperate. Even if there¡¯s only one prison, it¡¯ll be good. That way, we¡¯ll be able to watch the live broadcast.¡± ¡°Up until now, there have been hundreds of thousands ofments under the official Twitter feed of the Aga Mountain Prison. I wonder if the Aga Mountain Prison wille out and invite Jon.¡± ¡°Haha, I have to say that the audience in the livestream is pretty awesome. After all, the Aga Mountain Prison is still on trending since yesterday.¡± ¡°Maybe Aga Mountain Prison didn¡¯t expect that this prison break drill will be so popr. There is no such thing as a prison goes trending online. It has never happened before.¡± ¡°Ha-ha, it¡¯s Jon again.¡± ¡°Guys, themissioner of the Florida State Police Department has said that he will select the most frequently asked questions from the livestream to answer, so let¡¯s quickly type up this question, and maybe themissioner will see it and reply to us.¡± ¡°Spam it.¡± ¡°But there¡¯s no need to do that. After all, Jon¡¯s next drill is a point that everyone is concerned about. There will be questions from the media, and it¡¯s not up to us to ask.¡± ¡°ording to the previous process, the news will be released by New York City Television the day after the interview ends.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The news of the previous two drills was released by the city television station. Looks like New York City Television has many connections under the table.¡± ¡°It shouldn¡¯t be because of the background of the city television station. It should be due to this youngdy named Gal Gadot.¡± ¡°The truth is out...¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. This time, the focus of their discussion was on whether Jon had chosen the next drill, and did the Aga Mountain Prison, which had been on trending on Twitter sincest night, invite Jon to participate in the drill. In the conference room. Gal Gadot sat at the front of the room. She was watching the situation in the livestream. Commissioner Raymond had said that he would choose a few more questions from the livestream to answer after the reporters had finished asking their questions. However, Gal Gadot did not waste her time. It was necessary for Gal Gadot to pay attention to the situation in the livestream at all times. This way, she could some good questions. ¡°Mr. Jon, after this bank drill, you no longer choose to participate in the bank robbery drill. Instead, you want to turn to the prison break drill.¡± ¡°Do you feel that the bank robbery drill is no longer a challenge for you?¡± ¡°Or do you feel that the police can¡¯t put too much pressure on you during the bank robbery drill?¡± While Gal Gadot was watching the livestream, some reporters had already started to ask questions. This question was very misleading. This was amon tactic used by reporters. They used misleading questions to create more controversial news. In order to attract the attention of the audience. Hearing this, Jon frowned. This kind of questioning was something that Jon had not thought of. However, since the reporter had already asked, he need to answer it. ¡°I think I made it very clear in the livestream yesterday that the safety of the bank and the safety of the prison are both very important issues. I can be considered to have participated in quite a few bank robbery drills.¡± ¡°The reason why I turned to the prison break drills now is to challenge myself.¡± ¡°It doesn¡¯t mean that the bank robbery drills are no longer challenging for me, or that the police officers are unable to well-match with me.¡± ¡°In fact, during every drill, when I face the police, I feel a great deal of pressure. It is precisely because of this that I treat every drill seriously.¡± His answer was rather perfect,pletely avoiding the misleading nature of the reporters¡¯ questions. ¡°Thank you, Mr. Jon.¡± When the reporter didn¡¯t get the answer he wanted from Jon, he could not help but feel a little disappointed. Some controversial news was not something that every media person yearned for. But Jon¡¯s EQ was very good. Jon¡¯s answer was brilliant, it did trigger any sensitive topics or any controversies. The media couldn¡¯t use his words to make some eye-catching controversial headlights The reporter sat down helplessly. Because there were many media outlets participating in this interview, each of the selected reporters could only ask one question. After that, other people raised their hands. Raymond also randomly chose one of the people who raised their hands. At the same time, he also remembered the reporters who had asked misleading questions. He remembered the media outlets he represented. This thest time the reporters from this media toe to the police station. Next time, he would definitely not choose them. ¡°I would like to ask themander some questions. During this drill, you were eliminated by the robbers and withdrew from the drill. This is also the first time in the history of the drill in Florida that themander-in-chief has been eliminated.¡± ¡°Now, the Inte is saying that you are the most miserablemander-in-chief, and all of this is naturally caused by Jon. What do you have to say to Jon now?¡± A reporter stood up and looked at themander and asked. This question was less misleadingpared to thanst question, but to themander, it was very harsh question. Chapter 190 - Announce Cooperation with Aga Mountain Prison!

Chapter 190: Announce Cooperation with Aga Mountain Prison!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio After all, it was not a very honorable thing to be eliminated by the robbers during the exercise. Instead, it was quite shameful. It was a mistake that he did not want to think about. However, a reporter hade to him and asked him a harsh question. He had to answer it in front of so many people in the country. He had no choice but to face this matter head on. However, this was also something that he had expected. After all, as themander-in-chief of the police force, he had been eliminated by the robbers during the drill. This was a piece of explosive news. This incident would still be the topics that people talked about even after the drill ended. ¡°Actually, I have nothing to say to Jon about this matter.¡± ¡°In this drill, Jon and the other four perfectly yed the role of a robber team. I, as themander of the police was eliminated. This was my mistake, and I will bear the consequences of this mistake.¡± ¡°However, Jon¡¯s performance in the drill allowed me to discover many problems. I also admire Jon, this highly intelligent robber.¡± The person-in-charge picked up the microphone and said after a moment of silence. His attitude was very clear. Since he had made a mistake, he had to ept it and make an improvement. Moreover, even though he felt a little humiliated, the person-in-charge did not think of avoiding this matter. Next, it was the third reporter who was selected to ask questions. And this person was Gal Gadot. ¡°Mr. Jon, after the drill ended yesterday, you said that you would be in a prison break drill next time. And this is something that all the audience is looking forward to very much.¡± ¡°So I would like to ask, regarding the choice of the prison for the next drill, do you have a general idea?¡± ¡°Or, did any prison invite you to participate in the drill?¡± Gal Gadot directly asked what the audience wanted to know the most. Naturally, she already knew Jon¡¯s choice. After Gal Gadot finished asking, the room quieted down. This was big news. The interview was being broadcast live, so Jon¡¯s answer would be immediately known by the viewers from the livestream and spread throughout the inte. However, it could still be a big news and was still very valuable for the television station. Jon smiled and picked up the microphone. He had been prepared to announce the news of the coboration with the Aga Mountain Prison during the interview, and now, Gal Gadot had asked him a question. Then, he would treat it as the news was dug up by Gal Gadot. ¡°There is indeed a prison that has contacted me. This prison is the Aga Mountain Prison rmended by the viewers.¡± ¡°The Aga Mountain Prison is one of the top prisons. I have no reason to refuse. Therefore, my next drill will be with the Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°As for the specific time, it will have to wait for me to discuss with the Aga Mountain Prison. However, this drill will begin soon.¡± ¡°At that time, this drill will still be broadcast live.¡± Jon said with a smile. After all, this drill had already been confirmed. There was nothing that could not be said. In the livestream. ¡°Wow, there¡¯s actually a prison has invited Jon to participate in the drill. Aga Mountain Prison? Is this the power of the inte?¡± ¡°Good news, good news. The prison break drill is confirmed. We have something good to watch again. It definitely won¡¯t be long before it starts.¡± ¡°For each of the previous drills, the time interval is around ten days. The main reason is that Jon needs to familiarize himself with the environment, but breaking out of the prison shouldn¡¯t require him to familiarize himself with the prison environment, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. After all, the drill was treated as an actualbat. When you truly enter the prison, no one will let you familiarize yourself with the prison environment.¡± ¡°Ya, that¡¯s make sense. Therefore, Jon don¡¯t need that much time to prepare for this drill. I guess they should be able to do it in two days.¡± ¡°Two days or three days? Boy, if that¡¯s really the case, it can be said to be seamless. Jon¡¯s drills came one after another. He should be the most diligent robber in history, right?¡± ¡°After all, in a month¡¯s time, he has already robbed four banks and even went to prison. He should be the best robber of the month.¡± ¡°LMAO. You guys are hrious¡± ¡°But let¡¯s be clear. If you can receive gifts that worth of tens of millions of dors after one round of drills, you won¡¯t be willing to stay idle. Please believe me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. It was conservatively estimated that Jon had earned tens of millions of dors from thest two drills. No one would stop making money. Who would be bothered by having too much money?¡± ¡°Yeah, I felt jealous. Tears of envy flowed from the corners of my eye.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be sad bro, you will never as rich as Jon.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be? Jon will be participating in the prison break drill in three days. Why is the time interval so short?¡± ¡°Did that person just woke up? Or did he juste to the live broadcast room? Three days is just a guess. Jon did not set the time. As for the specifics, it will still need to be discussed with the Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°I see. I was thinking that the prison break drill should not be as simple as a bank robbery drill. No matter what, it will take some time to prepare.¡± ¡°No matter how long he prepares, as long as he is excited to watch it, it will be fine.¡± ¡°Haha, however, the reason why the Aga Mountain Prison was able to invite Jon to participate in the drill, I feel that this is the credit of us.¡± ¡°Right, if we didn¡¯t go to Aga Mountain Prison¡¯s Twitter and started a petition, they probably wouldn¡¯t have invited Jon, Haha.¡± ¡°Awesome, Brothers!¡± In the livestream, the viewers were discussing crazily. The number ofments was terrifying, and they were surging crazily. No one had expected that Jon would want to participate in the prison break drill. It was decided so quickly as well. Now that the prison break drill had been decided, it meant that they would be able to watch the live broadcast soon. And it should be something more exciting than the bank robbery drill! Moreover, when they heard Jon say that it was the Aga Mountain Prison, to the viewers, it was as if they had aplished a great mission. This gave them a sense of aplishment. Because they felt that part of the reason why the Aga Mountain Prison invited Jon to participate in the drill was because of them. And at the interview venue. All the reporters recorded the news, and the cameraman quickly recorded it. Chapter 191 - Go to the Pennsylvania State Police Department

Chapter 191: Go to the Pennsylvania State Police Department

¡°Hello, Mr. Jon. As far as we know, the Aga Mountain Prison is one of the most secured prisons in the United States. No one has ever questioned their safety.¡± ¡°Because of this, the Aga Mountain Prison rarely holds drills, let alone public drills.¡± ¡°How did you get the prison to agree to the joint drill with you?¡± The interview continued. Another reporter who was chosen by Raymond stood up, he looked at Jon and asked curiously. The prison was quite famous. Many people did not know much about the prison, but at least they had heard of the name. As one of the most secure prisons in the world, no one ever questioned the security of the prison. Therefore, the prison rarely conducted drills. However, they invited outsiders to participate in the drill. Therefore, many of the reporters present found it unbelievable that the first prison to invite Jon was actually Aga Mountain Prison. Therefore, the reporters took this opportunity to ask. ¡°It wasn¡¯t me to get the prison to agree to invite me to participate in the drills.¡± ¡°It was the contribution of the viewers in the official livestream. They wanted the Aga Mountain Prison to invite me to participate in the drill ¡°I just confirmedst night that my next drill would be a prison break drill, So I haven¡¯t choose which prison I should cooperate with.¡± ¡°And the people had spoken, they want to see me cooperate with Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°It was the audience who let the prison sees their wish, which then led to the matter of the prison inviting me.¡± ¡°On this point, I would like to thank everyone in the livestream.¡± As he spoke, Jon looked at the camera. These words were said to the audience. ¡°Good man, even Jon personally expressed his gratitude at the interview. The brothers in the livestream are awesome.¡± ¡°Cheers to the most powerful robber in history. You deserve It!¡± ¡°D*mn it. Jon¡¯s gratitude made me feel overwhelmed. What¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯m starting to drift. Even the strongest robber in history thank me.¡± ¡°Haha, Jon thanked us. This is something I didn¡¯t expect. I even know that this is the contribution of all of the brothers in the livestream. It¡¯s not in vain that I stayed up all night to leave a message on the official Twitter of Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be, it can¡¯t be. Jon was just being polite. You guys didn¡¯t take it seriously, right? It can¡¯t be, it can¡¯t be, right?¡± ¡°Are you an idiot? Why are you being so weird here?¡± After Jon said his thanks, thements in the livestream surged wildly once again. After all, this was a appreciation for the audience¡¯s crazy spamming on the official Twitter of Aga Mountain Prison yesterday, as well as putting it on trending. And because of Jon¡¯s words of thanks, the gifts in the livestream went up a little. The interview would soon be over. And after the interview was over. Jon and the others didn¡¯t stay long in the Florida State Police Department. After bidding farewell to Raymond, themander, and the squad leader, Jon and the others left the police department. They returned the cars they had rented during the drill, and Jon booked a flight to Pennsylvania the next morning. Through Commissioner Raymond of the Florida State Police, Jon had already made an appointment with the person-in-change of Aga Mountain Prison. Tomorrow afternoon, they would discuss the escape drill in the Pennsylvania State Police Department. There was still plenty of time now. Jon could still take his time and book the flight tomorrow morning. Jon and the others went back to the hotel. He got the bank ount numbers of Will Smith and the others. Then, he transferred $6 million into each person¡¯s ount. In the evening, they found a restaurant and had a meal together. After all, after such a long time of preparation and drill, everyone was still nervous. Now that the drill was over, it was a rare break, so everyone naturally had fun. The next morning, Jon and the others flew to Pennsylvania. After they got off the ne, they hailed a cab and headed straight for the Pennsylvania Police Department. When they arrived at the police department, it was nearly three o¡¯clock in the afternoon. It was just in time for the appointment. They entered the police station and arrived at themissioner¡¯s office. They knocked on the door. After obtaining themissioner¡¯s permission. A few people walked in. At this time, in themissioner¡¯s office, besides themissioner, there was a middle-aged man sitting on the sofa. He was drinking tea and chatting. ¡°You guys are really right on time. I can¡¯t see your shadows until three o¡¯clock.¡± Seeing a few people walk in, themissioner looked at the time and said with a smile. ¡°There¡¯s a traffic jam on the road? Otherwise, we would havee here a long time ago.¡± Jon said helplessly. ¡°Hehe, Jon, and this reporter,e and sit here. As for you guys, just stand.¡± Themissioner smiled and beckoned Jon and Gal Gadot to sit down. Then, he asked Will Smith and the other three to stand. That was because themissioner¡¯s office was not very big. After a middle-aged man sat down with Jon and Gal Gadot, there were no more seats left. Will Smith curled his lips and did not say anything about this. After all, when they came to the Pennsylvania Police Station, they were considered the owners, while Jon and Gal Gadot were the guests. Naturally, they had to let the guests sit down first. In the absence of a seat, as the hosts, they naturally had to stand. ¡°Let me introduce you. This is the warden of the Aga Mountain Prison. Although he¡¯s here for you, I don¡¯t think you¡¯ve met him yet.¡± After Jon and Gal Gadot sat down, themissioner poured a cup of tea for the two of them, and then introduced the middle-aged man to Jon. ¡°This is Jon. He¡¯s the most powerful robber in history, a highly intelligent robber. Florida suffered a lot during the drill.¡± Then, themissioner introduced Jon to the warden. The warden looked at Jon with a faint smile on his face. ¡°I¡¯ve also heard about the title of the most powerful robber. If it weren¡¯t for him, there wouldn¡¯t be so manyments under the official Twitter of our Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve seen it before. Just thements alone are already close to a million.¡± ¡°Moreover, our prison has also been trending this time.¡± The warden looked at Jon and said with a smile. Chapter 192 - A Detailed Discussion with the Warden

Chapter 192: A Detailed Discussion with the Warden

When Jon heard this, he also smiled slightly. ¡°Then you have to thank Jon. After all, you guys be a hot topic on the inte now, and many people can¡¯t buy it with money.¡± ¡°Alright, we are here today to discuss the matter of your joint prison break drill. I won¡¯t waste your time. You guys can chat.¡± Themissioner said to Jon and the warden. Although they met at the Pennsylvania police station, this matter did not have much to do with themissioner. He was just a middleman. After introducing both parties, Jon and the warden started their discussion. ¡°Warden, you don¡¯t mind having reporters present, right? This is the reporter from New York City Television Station, Gal Gadot. She¡¯s also my girlfriend.¡± ¡°She was the official live broadcast reporter for the previous two drills.¡± Jon looked at the warden and said with a smile. ¡°I don¡¯t mind at all. It looks like we¡¯ll have to trouble this reporter to be the official live broadcast for this drill.¡± ¡°It also saves me the trouble of choosing the live broadcast reporter.¡± The warden replied with a smile. Since Jon had already made it clear that this was his girlfriend, and he also emphasized that Gal Gadot was the official live broadcast reporter of the previous two drills. The warden could naturally understand the meaning behind those words. As for who was to be the official reporter, the warden did not care. Moreover, if there were no official reporters, the warden would have to contact the television station to hire a team. This was a very troublesome matter for him. ¡°Then let¡¯s talk about the specific details of this exercise.¡± Jon said. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s begin.¡± ¡°Because of the special nature of the prison, the prison break drill this time is naturally different from the bank robbery drill. And you agreed to our three conditions.¡± ¡°And we also agreed to your request. We won¡¯t interfere with your deployment of the other four persons.¡± ¡°However, before the drill, you need to sign a disimer.¡± ¡°After all, you will be imprisoned as prisoners. Although we will try our best to ensure your safety, no one can guarantee that there will be no idents.¡± ¡°Am I right?¡± For the warden, the biggest problem was the safety of Jon and the others, as both sides had agreed to each other¡¯s request. After all, the prison was no other ce. There were all kinds of people in prison. No one could predict what would happen to Jon and the others once they entered. Although the prison officers would try its best to ensure the safety of Jon and the others, if something unexpected happened, it would be hard to find a party to take responsible for it. Therefore, the warden needed to ask them to sign a disimer in advance. In this way, even if something happened to Jon and the others in the prison, the prison would not bear too much responsibility. ¡°Okay.¡± Jon nodded and agreed. He believed that nothing would happen in the prison. However, the warden was not as confident as Jon Therefore, in order to make the warden feel at ease, he signed the disimer. ¡°Huh? You guys? Aren¡¯t you the only one participating in the prison break drill?¡± themissioner was stunned. Wasn¡¯t Jon the only one participate the prison break drill? He didn¡¯t get it at all. ¡°Um¡­missioner, I forgot to tell you about this.¡± ¡°I still want to pick up Will and the others from the police station for this prison break drill. With my strength alone, it will be difficult for me to escape from Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°So, I still need a team.¡± ¡°Also, I have worked with them in the past two drills. We are familiar with each other, so they are naturally my first choice.¡± Jon said with a smile. Jon had originally nned to discuss this matter with the warden before telling themissioner. ¡°Oh, I don¡¯t have a problem with that. I just don¡¯t know if Will and the others are willing to join.¡± Even though he said that, Will Smith and the others were the elites of the police station. Themissioner was reluctant to have loaned them out to participate in the drill. And the reason he said that was because he couldn¡¯t say no directly. Thus, he gave the choice to Will Smith and the others. Let them choose. In his estimation, Will Smith and the others would definitely not be willing to continue participating in the drill. Thus, they would reject Jon. But he did not expect what was about toe. ¡°Yes, we are willing to participate in this prison break drill,missioner!¡± ¡°Regarding Jon¡¯s invitation, we will never say no.¡± As soon as themissioner finished speaking, Will Smith quickly replied. Hearing Will¡¯s words, themissioner not only felt that his n had failed. What was going on? Will Smith was a thorn. Why was he so willing to participate in the drill with Jon? Wasn¡¯t he still unconvinced of Jon? ¡°Venus, Brown, Leon, what do the three of you think?¡± Then, themissioner looked at the other three people and asked. Now, themissioner still did not want them to agree to Jon¡¯s participation in the prison break drill. After all, the police force was a little short of manpower. If two out of four of them stayed at the police station to handle some duties, themissioner would also have less headaches. ¡°I want to join.¡± ¡°I have no objections.¡± ¡°I¡¯m in too!¡± The three of them answered themissioner. Hearing the three of them answer, themissioner could not help but feel a little helpless. In his own police station, there had always been a few rebellious talents. In such a short period of time, they had all became admirers of Jon? This brat Jon was really capable. Since the four of them had already expressed their opinions, themissioner naturally could not object now. ¡°Since they are all willing to participate in the prison break drill with you, then you can take them away. You are really good. You only used two drills to subdue these subordinates of mine.¡± ¡°If you don¡¯t want to participate in the drill one day, just let me know. I¡¯ll let youe to our police station. I¡¯ll give you a special position to help me manage these troublemakers.¡± Themissioner said with a joking tone. ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll think about it.¡± ¡°Oh,missioner, I have a presumptuous request.¡± Jon said with a serious expression. Hearing that, themissioner couldn¡¯t help but frown. Since Jon said so, it was definitely not a simple matter. ¡°Tell me. If I can do it, I¡¯ll try my best to help you.¡± Themissioner said after a moment of silence. Themissioner admired Jon very much, so he was willing to help him if he could. Chapter 193 - Confirming the Time of the Drill

Chapter 193: Confirming the Time of the Drill

¡°We doesn¡¯t provide any weapons for this prison break drill, but it would be impossible for us to seed without weapons. So, I n to borrow an LR5 sniper rifle, two handguns, some nks for the drill, and some high-explosive bombs from you.¡± ¡°These things are for Venus, Will, and the others to use.¡± ¡°After all, we are a group. Since we want to escape from prison, it makes sense that the person receiving us has some weapons.¡± Jon slowly said. Actually, he could also borrow weapons from the director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation. However, because this drill did not have much to do with the Federal Bureau of Investigation, there was no need to borrow weapons from the director. Moreover, it was troublesome. Anyway, he was already here. He could conveniently borrow some of the weapons he needed. After all, these weapons were for the use of Venus and the other police officers. Hearing this, themissioner fell into deep thought. The matter of borrowing weapons was not really a big deal. After all, there were sniper rifles and high explosives in the weapons. ¡°Warden, since the prison doesn¡¯t provide weapons, it shouldn¡¯t be too much of a problem for me to get some from other ces, right?¡± While themissioner was deep in thought, Jon asked the warden again. ¡°As long as themissioner agrees, I have no objections.¡± the warden replied. ¡°Alright then. Since you brought my people to the drill, and the warden has no objections, then I¡¯ll lend you this weapon.¡± ¡°After all, as a robber, it doesn¡¯t make sense you don¡¯t have any weapons in your hands.¡± themissioner joked. After thinking for a while, he still agreed to Jon¡¯s request. The reason why he lent the weapon was partly because themissioner admired Jon. Since Jon had already spoken, themissioner couldn¡¯t refuse him. And partly because Jon had brought four people from his own police force to participate in the drill. If they won, it would raise the impression of his police department Therefore, themissioner decided to give Jon and the others a little help. The matter of the weapons was thus settled. ¡°Then let¡¯s discuss the time for the drill. Yourst drill has just ended. You must be very tired, so see how much rest time you need.¡± ¡°The time for this prison break drill is up to you.¡± The warden looked at Jon and said. This was a practical drill. Since Jon and the others entered the prison as prisoners, the prison did not need to prepare anything. They just asked Jon to set a time and send Jon and the others into the prison as if they were prisoners. ¡°Then how about this? This drill will be set in five days.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll go to New York City to take care of some things. After two days, I¡¯ll head to Phdelphia.¡± ¡°When the timees, my team and I will take some time to get a clear picture of the situation around the prison. Then, we can begin.¡± Jon thought for a moment and said to the warden. The previous bank robbery drill required him to get a clear picture of the situation around the bank and find a suitable escape route. Therefore, he needed to spend quite a long time. And this time, the preparation work required was far less than the bank robbery drill. Five days was enough. Although Aga Mountain Prison was in Pennsylvania, it was not in the same ce as the police station. Aga Mountain Prison was in Phdelphia. Therefore, two dayster, Jon went directly to Phdelphia. There was no need for him toe to the police station. ¡°Alright, then I¡¯ll wait for you at the Aga Mountain Prison. When the timees, if you have any details that you need to add, we¡¯ll discuss it again.¡± The warden nodded. ¡°I look forward to our cooperation during this prison break drill.¡± After saying that, he reached out his hand. Jon also reached out his hand and shook the warden¡¯s hand. Then, the warden took out a much-prepared disimer. In front of themissioner, Jon, Will Smith, and the others all signed their names on it. They also pressed their handprints. They also confirmed that Gal Gadot would be the official live broadcast reporter. After the agreement was made, it was already evening. Themissioner invited a few people to have a meal in the police dining hall. The warden left and returned to Phdelphia. Jon and Gal Gadot stayed in Pennsylvania for a day. The next day, they took the high-speed train back to New York. Because on the high-speed train, Gal Gadot already informed the station manager of the city television station, so when they got off the high-speed train, the station manager had already met them at the exit. This time, the station manager personally came to wee them. From this, it wasn¡¯t hard to see how much importance the station manager ced on Jon. After all, Jon had brought huge poprity to the city television station. After returning to the television station, the station head didn¡¯t waste any time. He directly took out the contract and let Jon sign It. After signing the contract, the live broadcast tform sent people to settle Jon¡¯s live broadcast earnings. Including the earnings from the previous drill. Jon received a total of 200 million US dors. Looking at these earnings, Jon was a little shocked. After all, the total earnings from the previous drill were only 30 to 40 million US dors. In other words, the Florida drill¡¯s earnings this time had reached more than 100 million US dors! It was even more than robbing 10 banks. Following that, Gal Gadot handed over the details for the next drill, as well as the press release of the meeting between Jon and themissioner of Aga Mountain Prison, to the station manager. The station manager was so excited that his mouth almost split open. He had never expected to receive such a big piece of news. After all, the previous drill between Jon and Aga Mountain Prison had already been announced in the live broadcast. The station manager thought that there wouldn¡¯t be any exclusive news at the start of the battle. However, he didn¡¯t expect Gal Gadot to bring back the details of the drill as well as the video of meeting of Jon and the warden. This was something that other news outlets couldn¡¯t possibly get! Another exclusive news! This was another good opportunity to increase the viewership. During the prime time of the night, the station manager released this news. Once it was released, the exact time that Jon would have a drill with the Aga Mountain Prison was known to all the viewers. After all, they were waiting for this matter. The station manager couldn¡¯t release this news for less than ten minutes. It went straight to the top of the trending topics on Twitter. At the same time, the major websites and media outlets also reported one after another. In an instant, the hype exploded. Compared to the previous two press releases, this time it caused a greater response. This was Jon¡¯s overwhelming poprity! Chapter 194 - Arrive in Philadelphia, Aga Mountain Prison!

Chapter 194: Arrive in Phdelphia, Aga Mountain Prison!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The second day after returning to New York City. Jon returned to the FBI and met with the director. This time, the higher up still only gave him a portion of the photo. However, this portion of the photo only showed a ck umbre and a dark sky. Other than that, there was no other useful information. It seemed that the higher up did not want to give him the clue so easily. Jon was not surprised by this. However, as an agent, he had not been to work for almost a month. However, the director did not intend to fire him. He had always taken care of Jon. The two of them chatted for a while in the office, and Jon walked out of the FBI. Then he had dinner with some friends of his, Sean and the others. Then he spent the day in New York City with Gal Gadot. On the third day, he went to Phdelphia, Pennsylvania. Before he left, Jon contacted Will Smith and the others. They were packing up and ready to go to the police station to get their weapons. When Jon arrived in Phdelphia, it was already one o¡¯clock in the afternoon. At this time, Will Smith and the others hadn¡¯t arrived yet. After all, they hade by car. They didn¡¯te by ne or high-speed train. Because they had guns and ammunition and bombs. Under such circumstances, it would take a lot of procedures to travel by ne or high-speed train. It was too troublesome. Moreover, those bombs were mostly banned on ne and the train. Therefore, driving here was their best choice. After Jon got off the high-speed train. He waited for them outside the high-speed train station. Half an hourter, a car stopped in front of Jon. The window rolled down. Jon looked over. The people sitting inside were naturally will Smith and the others. ¡°Boss, get in the car.¡± Will Smith had a big smile on his face as he looked at Jon. Jon directly got into the car and sat in the passenger seat. ¡°Boss, you don¡¯t know how troublesome it is toe out with guns. We¡¯ve been stopped countless times along the way.¡± As soon as Jon got into the car, Will Smith spoke with a bitter face. Jon smiled helplessly. Although guns were not banned here, the government still had strict control over guns. Therefore, there would definitely be a lot of trouble from them to travel all the way from Pennsylvania to Phdelphia while carrying guns ¡°Where did you get this car?¡± Jon looked around the car. He couldn¡¯t help but ask. It was a seven-seater ck MPV. It was simr to the car they had rented during the drill in Florida. This car did not look like the family car of Will Smith and the others. After all, very few families would choose to buy a seven-seater MPV. ¡°We rented it from a car rentalpany. We have to pick you up from the outside the prison. No matter what, we will need a car, so I rented one.¡± Will Smith said with a smile. ¡°You even made preparations beforehand. How rare is that? It¡¯s true, renting a car in advance can indeed save a lot of things.¡± ¡°Tell me the rental fee to meter. I¡¯ll reimburse for it.¡± Jon said slowly. Jon was somewhat satisfied with Will Smith renting a car in advance, because it could indeed save a lot of time. As for the rental fee, he would reimburse it. After all, Jon took the biggest share of the profits from the live broadcast. ¡°Don¡¯t, renting a car is only a few dors. I can afford it. Besides, you gave me six million each a few days ago. How can I let you pay for the car rental?¡± Will Smith quickly said. Not long ago, Jon gave them six million dors each. The rental fee was nothingpared to this money. So, how could Will Smith let Jon pay for this rental fee. Seeing Will Smith say so. Jon didn¡¯t insist. The rental fee was indeed not much.. Jon also nned to split the profits from this drill after it was over. He would give a portion to the four of them. After all, they had indeed done their best by following him in the exercise. ¡°Alright, I let you .¡± ¡°Next, we¡¯ll go to the Aga Mountain Prison. Now that we have no way to understand the situation inside the prison, let¡¯s first take a look at the surrounding of the prison.¡± ¡°Familiarize yourself with the terrain around the prison. That way, you guys will know how to receive us.¡± Jon smiled and turned his head to Brown, who was driving. There were only a few days left until the scheduled start of the drill. Now, they had to hurry. Before the prison break exercise began. They did not have the chance to go to the prison to check the situation inside. So, they could only observe the surrounding of the prison. While familiarizing themselves with the surroundings, they could find a better hiding ce for Will Smith and the others who were waiting outside. Moreover, they had to first understand the situation outside the prison. When the drill started, Jon entered the prison and then understood the situation inside. This way, both the inside and the outside would understand and be able to formte a perfect escape n. ¡°Yes, Boss.¡± Brown responded, turned on the car navigation, and drove towards the location of the prison. When the prison was built, it was built in the suburbs of Phdelphia. However, nearly a hundred years had passed since the prison was built. During these 100 years, with the development of Phdelphia, the city had been expanding. Hence, the prison that used to belong to the suburbs was no longer so remote. Now, it was not so remote. There was even a small town a few hundred meters away from the prison. Therefore, the prison was not like most prisons which were far away from the city and deste. After nearly twenty minutes, they had arrived a small town near the prison, Jon first let Brown drive around the town, and then found a hotel to get a room. Because the escape drill was different from the bank robbery drill. So, Jon and the others did not need to hide their identity to the hotel, there were no police traced them down this time. Chapter 195 - Preparation Work Before the Drill!

Chapter 195: Preparation Work Before the Drill!

Five of them booked five rooms. All of them used their own identity information to register. Each person¡¯s room had the view of Aga Mountain Prison more than 100 meters away. The Aga Mountain Prison was very big. ording to the information Jon had read online, the area of the Aga Mountain Prison was 300,000 square meters. There was a factory in the prison. The size of the factory was about 60,000 square meters. The entire prison was surrounded by a high wall. If one wanted to get out, they had to fly through the air. After getting the room, Jon led four people to the prison. They drove around the prison. There was only one gate in the entire prison. There were several armed guards guarding the gate. The other ces were all surrounded by walls. On the walls, there was an electric fence. Of course, under normal circumstances, the electric fence was not on. Only under special circumstances, such as when a criminal wanted to escape and was discovered, would the electric fence be turned on. ¡°This prison really lives up to its reputation. Looking at the security facility here, I feel that it¡¯s simply impossible to escape from the inside.¡± ¡°Now, I finally know why the warden of the Aga Mountain Prison doesn¡¯t object to you wanting a weapon like a bomb.¡± ¡°But it¡¯s still impossible to blow up these walls.¡± As the car circled around the prison, Will Smith already had a direct understanding of the prison. After understanding it, he was simply stunned. As expected of the Aga Mountain Prison. It was just like a safe box! There was no opening. There was simply no w! How could he escape? ¡°Is it impossible?¡± Jon frowned slightly. As an explosive expert, Will Smith naturally had some knowledge of all kinds of buildings. ¡°Impossible, not a chance at all. It¡¯s different from the outer walls of ordinary prisons, they didn¡¯t reinforce the outer walls during the renovation. Instead, they built another wall next to the original outer wall. This was quite a huge construction.¡± ¡°The reason why they did this was also because at that time, they intentionally upgraded Aga Mountain Prison to be one of the safest prisons in the world.¡± ¡°Therefore, this prison has two outer walls ¡°The original wall is one meter thick. It was built a long time ago. With buildings like red bricks and cement, it¡¯s very easy to blow it up ¡°But the outer wall that was built a few years ago waspletely made of reinforced concrete. It¡¯s 1.2 meters thick at the bottom and six meters high.¡± ¡°The two walls add up to a total thickness of 2.2 meters. There¡¯s no possibility of blow it up at all.¡± Will Smith exined to Jon. Because he was going to participate in the prison escape drill this time, Will Smith had a thorough understanding of the prison construction. He had done his homework. Jon nodded. He didn¡¯t say anything. Based on the safety of this outer wall alone, it was probably the best in the world. There weren¡¯t many prisons that couldpare to it. ¡°Boss, even high strong explosion is useless against these walls. After we go in, will we have a chance to escape?¡± After listening to Will Smith¡¯s exnation, Brown Williams, who was driving, could not help but ask Jon. Even strong explosives couldn¡¯t blow up the wall. Moreover, the outermost high wall was six meters high. Brown Williams really could not think of how to get out after entering. ¡°I did not say that the bombs are used to to st through the outer wall. However, this drill is really difficult. I really don¡¯t have a hundred percent confidence in escaping from here. We can only go in and take it one step at a time.¡± Jon said slowly. After hearing Jon¡¯s words, Will Smith felt a little incredulous. After seeing the Aga Mountain Prison, he no longer had any hope of winning this drill. However, Jon said that he didn¡¯t have 100% confidence? In other words, He was still certain that he could escape? Will Smith found it hard to believe. He really didn¡¯t know what n Jon had to escape from such a prison. ¡­ A few days of preparation time. Jon took Will Smith and the others around the prison. Of course, while they were wandering around, they needed to avoid the prison guards. Otherwise, with their frequent wandering, they would have been caught by the prison guards as delinquents. They arrived at the agreed time for the drill. Early in the morning, the warden called Jon. ¡°I¡¯m the Warden of the prison. You¡¯ve arrived near the prison, right, Jon?¡± ¡°Yes. I¡¯m at the Four Seasons Hotel next to the prison.¡± earing the Warden¡¯s question, Jon replied. It had already been agreed that Jon and the others would be sent to prison as ordinary prisoners. Therefore, he naturally had to tell the warden of his specific location. Then, he asked the warden to send someone to pick him up. ¡°Okay, at two in the afternoon, I¡¯ll bring someone to pick you up. You should prepare well. It¡¯s best to have a good meal at noon. After all, you won¡¯t get such treatment in prison.¡± The warden said with a smile. ¡°Okay, at two in the afternoon, I¡¯ll wait for you in the hotel.¡± Jon replied. Then, he informed the team. At noon, they had a meal, and Jon told the team something. Then, Will Smith and the other two went back to their rooms. Jon and Brown Williams were in the lobby of the hotel, waiting for the warden to arrive. At the same time. At the Aga Mountain Prison. The warden was preparing a car, while Gal Gadot and the cameraman were in the warden¡¯s office. As the official live reporter for the drill, Gal Gadot and the two cameramen from City Television had arrived in Phdelphia yesterday. They had a night off somewhere else. They arrived at Agatha prison this morning. After entering the warden¡¯s office, Gal Gadot started to prepare for the live broadcast. It was already 1:20 pm. Gal Gadot knew that the warden would pick up Jon and Brown at the hotel. So, now that they were ready, Gal Gadot and her crew were ready to start the live broadcast. Because, after picking up Jon at 2 pm, they should be leaving early. Looking at the time, they should be leaving soon. After checking the camera equipment, Gal Gadot checked her appearance. Then, Gal Gadot told the cameraman to start the live broadcast. Chapter 196 - The Live Broadcast Begins!

Chapter 196: The Live Broadcast Begins!

At this moment. In the official livestream. There were already quite a number of viewers waiting. This was because the audience already knew that the prison break drill would begin today, even though they didn¡¯t know the exact time of the drill. However, looking at the previous few drills, everyone felt that it should be around two or three o¡¯clock in the afternoon. In order to not miss the beginning of the broadcast, some viewers had alreadye to the broadcast room at noon. And as the time went past one o¡¯clock. More and more viewers entered the livestream. By the time Gal Gadot and the others started their live broadcast, there were already close to 10 million people watching the live broadcast. As more and more people watched in the drills, Jon¡¯s poprity also increased. And this time, it wasn¡¯t a bank robbery drill like the previous three drills. It was a new type of drill. A prison break drill. It was well known that a prison break was more than twice as difficult as robbing a bank. So, whether or not Jon could seed in this prison break drill became something that everyone was looking forward to. It could be said that it was full of anticipation from the audience. The audience¡¯s anticipation was far higher than the previous bank exercise. Therefore, before the exercise started, tons of people were already wating for it. After the livestream started, Gal Gadot went on the camera. She gave a simple opening speech. ¡°Ladies and gentlemen. Hello, I¡¯m Gal Gadot, the official reporter of this exercise.¡± ¡°I¡¯m still hosting the live broadcast of this prison break exercise jointly conducted by the Aga Mountain Prison and Jon ¡°Right now, we are in the warden¡¯s office. Soon, the warden will bring the prison guards to pick up Jon and send him to prison ¡°Because this exercise is a realbat, Jon will actually be imprisoned as a prisoner. During his imprisonment, he will not receive any special treatment. Also, the criminals in the prison do not know Jon¡¯s identity ¡°Being imprisoned in the prison that is globally famous for its security, we will see what method Jon will use to break out of the prison and whether or not he will seed!¡± After the opening speech was over. In the livestream. ¡°The youngdy is still hosting the livestream. That¡¯s great. Brothers, which one of you is excited?¡± ¡°Not only am I excited, but my heart is also moved. For every drill, I will be in the livestream channel one or two hours in advance so that when the live broadcast starts, I can see the youngdy on the scene.¡± ¡°This youngdy is really beautiful, and she has a good figure. I wonder which b*stard was lucky enough to be with her.¡± ¡°Yeah, sigh. That lucky b*stard probably had tasted that tasty cherry. While the unlucky guys like us could only watch her gorgeous face through the screen.¡± ¡°Good lord, can you guys stop being a pervert.¡± ¡°Can you stop for a while so that I can watch the live broadcast in peace?¡± ¡°But then again, what is the deal with this youngdy? Why can she be an official live broadcast reporter several times in a row?¡± ¡°But she has the support of thepany or the support of the officials. Anyway, we aren¡¯t gonna get that pretty girl, might as well just fantasize it through the screen.¡± ¡°Did you hear the youngdy say that Jon was sent to prison as a prisoner during this exercise?¡± ¡°Yes, I have some understanding of this prison. It is full of vicious criminals. Do you think Jon will be put in a difficult position if he goes in?¡± ¡°He will definitely be put in a difficult position. There will always be new and old criminals in every prison. I hope they won¡¯t make things too difficult for Jon.¡± ¡°Yeah, if some people get violent and attack Jon, he¡¯ll be in trouble.¡± ¡°Jon won¡¯t be beaten to death, right?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not impossible. I really think that Jon chose the wrong direction for the prison break drill. Hepletely underestimated the violence inside of the prison and overestimated himself.¡± ¡°Yeah, when he¡¯s in prison, what¡¯s the use of his high IQ when he¡¯s facing some violent criminals? Is he using his high IQ to fight people?¡± ¡°Ya, Jon¡¯s choice was indeed wrong. However, since he chose to escape from prison, he will have to bear the consequences.¡± ¡°It¡¯s a pity that such a smart person actually got confused in the end. or could it be that he won a few drills consecutively, causing him to be arrogant?¡± ¡°Both. Jon was originally a little-known FBI agent. In just a short period of time, he became famous all over the United States, bringing with him extremely high fame and benefits. Under such circumstances, it¡¯s understandable that he couldn¡¯t see his own arrogance clearly.¡± ¡°Moreover, this prison is filled with male criminals. Some of them have even been locked up for many years, yet they had already e out¡±. Jon is so handsome, his buttock might be in great danger.¡± ¡°Good lord, are you guys serious?¡± ¡°Are you all devils? How can you think of such a thing?¡± ¡°Devils? I think you have never experienced prison life. After you understand it, you won¡¯t make a fuss.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t make wild guesses. Although Jon was sent to prison as a prisoner, do you think the prison will ignore him?¡± ¡°Yes, since it¡¯s a drill, the prison will definitely ensure Jon¡¯s safety.¡± ¡°Hehe, you guys are too naive. Even if they protect Jon, they cannot protect him all day long?¡± ¡°Agree. It¡¯s impossible for the prison to protect Jon 24 hours a day. Does that mean that it¡¯s inevitable for Jon to have conflicts with the criminals in prison?¡± ¡°It should be. I hope Jon can protect himself. Even if he can¡¯t, he has to guard his back.¡± ¡°I¡¯m a female fan of Jon. When I think of such an attractive man being pressed down by other men, my heart aches. I want to press Jon too.¡± ¡°You guys are too wild.¡± ¡°You might not be able to press Jon, but you can press me down. You can even sit on my face. My number is¡­¡± ¡°Get outta here! You¡¯re trading sex in the livestream? I hate people like you the most. It¡¯s immoral. Girl, ignore him. But you can look for me. My number is¡­¡± ¡°F ck, there are more and more idiots. Ignore them. But do Jon have a lot of female fans?¡± ¡°Not really, probably only a few million.¡± Chapter 197 - Jon In the Prison Van!

Chapter 197: Jon In the Prison Van!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The audiences were discussing crazily. Because Jon was in prison as a criminal. So, the audiences were curious about what Jon would experience after he was in prison. After all, for most people, prison was a ce they would never go. It was full of mystery and unknown. Even though they had seen some prisons through TV dramas, movies and so on, they had been modified to suit for the movie and were not real. So, they were very curious about what real prison life was like. And some viewers had already started to send the gifts. But it the drill had not officially started yet, the number of gifts they was rtively small. Meanwhile, Gal Gadot was watching the live broadcast through her tablet. About four to five minutes had passed since the start of the live broadcast. The number of viewers in the live broadcast room had already reached 15 million. The surge in the number of viewers was mainly because before the start of the drill, the live broadcast tform had added a notification function. Once the live broadcast started, it would be notified to the viewers through their apps on phones orputers. Therefore, the number of viewers entering the livestream at the very beginning was very high. Seeing how good the reaction was, Gal Gadot was very excited. Because the number of viewers for this drill might exceed the previous record of the drill held in Florida. ¡°Knock! Kncok! Kncok!¡± At this moment, there was a knock on the office door. The door was opened, and the warden walked in. ¡°The van is ready. We can set off now.¡± the warden walked in and said. Although this was his office, Gal Gadot and the cameraman were still here, so the warden knocked on the door before entering. From this, it could be seen that the warden was a very polite person. ¡°Okay, warden.¡± Gal Gadot nodded and replied. Then, together with the photographer, they followed the warden out of the office. At this moment. The prison vehicle had already stopped downstairs in the office area. A prison van that was specially used to escort prisoners had already quietly stopped here. Under the arrangement of the warden, Gal Gadot and the cameraman boarded the vehicle to film the whole process of Jon¡¯s arrest. Besides the warden, Gal Gadot and the cameraman, there were two other guards on the vehicle. One was the driver. The other was an armed escort. They said that this was a normal escort configuration. As the prison van slowly drove out of the prison, there were already a lot of media waiting outside. After all, there were too many media outlets that wanted to take some of the profits from Jon¡¯s poprity. So, just like the previous two times, even if this drill had an official live broadcast. It was already difficult for the other media outlets to split the profits. But there were still many media outlets rushing over. After all, even if they split a small amount of traffic for their website, there would still be a lot of profits. It was just that this time, the prison break drill was really not convenient to these media outlets. Because, other than Gal Gadot, the other media reporters couldn¡¯t even enter the prison gates. During the previous bank drills, the other reporters could still film outside the police cordon. They could even film the temporarymand room of the police. But this time. They couldn¡¯t enter the prison. Even if they were to film, they could only film the gate of the Aga Mountain Prison. In other words. The drill was destined to be exclusive to Gal Gadot. It would be hard for others to get even a little bit oftest news of the drill. As the prison van came out, the media vehicles outside also followed. They drove toward the small town near the prison. Four Seasons Hotel. Jon and Brown Williams were sitting on the sofa in the hall and chatting. Brown Williams looked a little nervous. After all, he had been a police officer for so many years, but this was his first time being a prisoner, Moreover, he knew nothing about life in prison, so it was impossible to say that he was not nervous. In contrast, Jon was much more rxed. He looked like he did not care at all. At 1:50 pm. The prison van arrived. Some people came in the hotel to watch. Although the town was just beside the prison, it was not a new thing for the prison van to escort prisoners. However, it was really unusual to bring so many news cars to transport the prisoners. This kind of situation was really umon. So people ran out one after another. Of course, people in the town also watched the live broadcast. These people took out their phones one after another to take photo. The prison van stopped in front of the Four Seasons Hotel. The warden took a group of officers out of the van and entered the hotel. They saw the group of people walking in. Jon and Brown Williams, who were sitting on the sofa, also got up. ¡°People outside call you the strongest robber in history, but I think you should be given another title, the most popr robber in history.¡± ¡°Look, even though the drill hasn¡¯t started yet, so many media outlets have already gathered here.¡± The warden walked over and said to Jon with a smile. He even reached out a hand to Jon in a friendly manner. Jon also reached out his hand to shake the Warden¡¯s. He smiled and did not say anything. ¡°It¡¯s not the same to be surrounded by so many people. Let¡¯s get in the van first.¡± After shaking hands, the warden said with a smile. Even though the warden could already imagine that this drill would definitely be more popr. However, before the drill had even begun, there were already so many media outlets surrounding them. This was something that the warden had not expected. ¡°Alright.¡± Jon nodded and said. Then, he left the hotel with Brown Williams. Because the two of them were in prison as prisoners, they did not need to prepare anything. After all, after entering the prison, all of their belongings would be taken away. Walking out of the hotel, dozens of cameras immediately shot at Jon. In addition, there were many people watching from afar. Under everyone¡¯s gaze, Jon walked into the prison van. And the cameraman naturally filmed this scene. In the livestream. ¡°Hello everyone, I¡¯m juste. May I ask what¡¯s the situation now? Why is Jon being arrested?¡± ¡°Let me tell you what¡¯s going on. After robbing a bank and having a fierce confrontation with the police, Jon finally couldn¡¯t hold on and was arrested.¡± ¡°F*ck, does that mean that Jon is going to lose? I¡¯ve always heard from my friends that Jon is very impressive. How did he lose this time?¡± Chapter 198 - In the Prison!

Chapter 198: In the Prison!

¡°No matter how powerful he is, he is still a robber. However, Jon is already very powerful, especially in thest fight. He was about to escape, but the police were better than him!¡± ¡°Newbie, leave. You missed the most exciting part. Now that Jon is in the prison van, the strongest robber in history is about to go to prison. The drill is over.¡± ¡°Ah? is that so? Jon has disappointed me. He doesn¡¯t live up to his name. I¡¯m leaving.¡± ¡°Newbie, don¡¯t listen to these people¡¯s nonsense. They are just talking nonsense. This drill has just begun. Now, Jon is going to perform a prison break drill.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t let these idiots mislead the neer. Don¡¯t let him get away.¡± ¡°However, from this moment on, the strongest robber in history has be a prisoner. I don¡¯t know if Jon will be able to escape sessfully.¡± ¡°I think it¡¯s impossible for him to escape. After all, in a ce like this, it¡¯s not possible to escape sessfully with just high intelligence.¡± ¡°Yes, there are many people with high IQ. However, in the past 50 years, there hasn¡¯t been a sessful escape in the Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°Then there¡¯s no hope for Jon. I wanted to give him the title of the strongest prison escapee in history after this drill.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, there¡¯s still hope. After all, at the beginning of the previous drills, there were a lot of people who didn¡¯t believe that Jon could win. In the end, they were all pped in the face by Jon. This time, just watch. Jon will definitely win.¡± ¡°You¡¯re all thinking too much. What you need to worry about now is whether Jon can stay in prison for a few days.¡± The audience was discussing crazily in the livestream. Although the drill hadn¡¯t officially started yet, the audience in the livestream had been divided into several parts. Some people thought that it was impossible for Jon to win this drill. After all, prison drills were more difficult than bank robbery drills. Besides, there were all kinds of people in prison. Some people thought that not only could Jon not win, but he could also not even stay in prison for five or six days. After all, there were all kinds of people in prison, and most of the people in Aga Mountain Prison were extremely evil. It would be strange if they could stay with these people. Only a very small number of people. believed in Jon from the beginning to the end. Because Jon had never disappointed them. No matter at any time, no matter whether his situation looked desperate or not, Jon would be able to get through it safely. This prison break drill seemed to be much more difficult, but they felt the same way. Jon would definitely win. ¡°Since you¡¯re going to prison as prisoners, then I¡¯ll have to trouble you. Put this thing on first.¡± In the prison van, the warden looked at Jon and said, then handed them handcuffs. Jon nodded and put the handcuffs on. He didn¡¯t say anything. After all, since they were prisoners, they had to put on a good show. ¡°There are some things that I need to tell you.¡± ¡°In order to ensure that this drill will have the vor of a real battle, I did not inform the prison guards and prisoners about the escape drill.¡± ¡°Of course, the prison guards who have ess to the Inte know about it. However, the prisoners do not have the opportunity to know about the drill, so they may not know your identity.¡± ¡°In this case, when you go in, try to keep yourself safe.¡± ¡°If the prisoners inside threaten your safety, you must report the termination of the exercise as soon as possible. We will also keep an eye on the surveince cameras to ensure your safety as much as possible.¡± Said the warden, as he watched Jon in handcuffs. Although, prior to this, Jon and the others had signed a waiver. But in this drill, the warden still didn¡¯t want anything to happen to Jon and Brown in the prison. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we can guarantee our own safety.¡± Jon nodded in response. ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± the warden smiled in response. The warden also wanted to win this drill. After all, if Jon really seeded in escaping, the reputation of the Aga Mountain Prison as the safest prison in the world would be at stake. However,pared to the oue of the drill, the warden didn¡¯t want anything to happen to Jon. If anything happened bad to Jon, the impact on the prison would be more serious than the losing the drill. Soon, the prison van returned to the prison. The prison gate slowly closed, preventing the media from entering. They lost the opportunity to broadcast the drill. However, they did not leave. They waited outside the prison to see if there was any opportunity. The prison van drove all the way to the cell block. It stopped in front of an area that was surrounded by irons. The area that was surrounded was veryrge, and there was only one iron gate. Inside the iron gate was the area where the prisoners could move freely. When the prison van stopped, the prisoners who were moving inside all looked over. Life in the prison was really boring. Seeing that there were new people, the prisoners were naturally interested. As the van stopped, Jon and Brown Williams were brought down by the prison guards. Both of them were in the front. Behind them were the prison guards. Behind them were the warden, Gal Gadot, and the cameraman. Inside the iron, the prisoners began to discuss when they saw this scene. ¡°Who is this neer? To be able to get the warden to personally escort him, and to have the media follow him, he doesn¡¯t look simple.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve been here for more than ten years, from a young man to a middle-aged man. I¡¯ve never seen the warden personally escort a criminal here. This is the first time.¡± ¡°What crime did hemit that made him so powerful?¡± ¡°At least he killed someone. It could be a serial killer. He might even be a drug lord or a mafia boss. I feel that he¡¯s not someone to be trifled with.¡± ¡°Hehe, since he¡¯s in this prison, so what if he¡¯s awesome outside? What¡¯s not to be trifled with?¡± ¡°I feel that this kid is different. Looking at his expression, there¡¯s an indescribable aura.¡± ¡°In the end, he¡¯s just a neer. Since he¡¯s here, let him understand whose territory this is.¡± ¡°Wait a moment. Let¡¯s show him a bit first. Let¡¯s see what he¡¯s up to first.¡± The group of criminals gathered together and discussed. In the prison, it was a usual the prisoners to bully the neers. Moreover, it was in a ce like the Aga Mountain Prison, where vicious criminals were imprisoned. So, someone was already nning to show to find Jon and Brown¡¯s trouble! Chapter 199 - The Reaction of the Audience!

Chapter 199: The Reaction of the Audience!

At this moment. Jon didn¡¯t pay any attention to those gazes. As a former Navy SEALs team and now an FBI agent, he naturally knew the habits of prison inmates. He also knew that those prisoners who been around a long time must be thinking of some n against him. After all, this was something that would happen in every prison. But Jon didn¡¯t care. He just slowly walked forward. After all, he was a prisoner now, so he naturally had to act like a prisoner entering a prison for the first time. The cameraman was filming Jon from behind, then, he also filmed the situation inside the fence. A group of prisoners who were standing inside the fence and watching Jon enter the prison were on the camera. In the livestream. ¡°Good man, as expected of the Aja Mountain Prison. As expected of the prison where all the vicious criminals and felons are imprisoned. With just one look, I can tell that these people are not to be trifled with.¡± ¡°Yeah, these criminals look fierce, it is still the famous Aja Mountain Prison. Ordinary criminals would definitely not be imprisoned here.¡± ¡°Is this the real prison? But it looks pretty good? Why do I have this illusion?¡± ¡°Ya, believe in yourself. It¡¯s really not bad inside. This is not your illusion. If it really feels good, you can also go in and experience prison life.¡± ¡°Haha, there¡¯s a special car to pick you up, food and amodation are provided, and there¡¯s a big boss in the prison who wants you to pick up soap. Life can be said to be very good.¡± ¡°Being picked up by a big boss in the prison is very badass, but you guys are wrong. Nowadays, the prison doesn¡¯t provide food and amodation. There¡¯s a fee, 300 dors per month.¡± ¡°What the f*ck? I even have to pay to go to prison?¡± ¡°What do you think it is? Let you waste the country¡¯s resources?¡± ¡°Good God, these criminals look fierce. Jon¡¯s prison life will definitely not be peaceful. When do you think the first conflict between the old criminals and Jon will erupt?¡± ¡°It should be soon. I don¡¯t think it will happen today. Don¡¯t you see those criminals watching Jon and mumbling?¡± ¡°Yeah, I think they are already thinking about how to deal with Jon. After all, a neer in prison must be taken care of as soon as possible.¡± ¡°What kind of care are you talking about, is it serious?¡± ¡°Something serious, which is to find trouble with him. It depends on Jon¡¯s attitude. If Jon can endure it, he might be found fault with every day.¡± ¡°What if Jon resists?¡± ¡°Are you dumb? It¡¯s obvious. If Jon resists, the conflict will definitely escte. At that time, it won¡¯t be as simple as finding fault.¡± ¡°I feel that with Jon¡¯s personality, he definitely won¡¯t tolerate it. At that time, I don¡¯t know what will happen. Sigh.¡± ¡°But to be honest, if Jon can¡¯t win against these old prisoners, he won¡¯t have time to n a prison break.¡± ¡°Yeah, if his regr activity is affected, how can he have time to n a prison break?¡± ¡°I hope Jon can hold on.¡± ¡°Hold on? I feel that it will be difficult for him tost through tonight. After all, these prisoners are all tall and sturdy. Any one of them looks stronger than Jon.¡± ¡°Here ites again. The ssic ¡°Jon is definitely losing this one, he won¡¯t get through this night¡± bullsh*t. Bro, was it you who said thatst time? You haven¡¯t even learned your lesson yet. Why are you here again?¡± ¡°Hmph, you don¡¯t have to be so cocky. Although I was pped in the facest time, this is clearly not a bank robbery exercise. Both of them are rookies in the prison. Let¡¯s see if he will be taken care of by the criminals.¡± ¡°Haha, you¡¯re so pathetic. You have no idea that Jon will definitely be able to defeat these old people. Let¡¯s just wait and see.¡± ¡°Hehe, how about we take a gamble? If Jon doesn¡¯t appear on the live broadcast tomorrow with a bruised face, I¡¯ll eat sh*t while livestreaming!¡± ¡°Oh my God, you¡¯re here to freeload again?¡± ¡°Sure, when the timees, you have to share your livestream. Although it¡¯s a little disgusting, I still want to see you finish eating.¡± ¡°Hehe, he¡¯s just a hater. He¡¯s just posting his irresponsiblements on the inte, don¡¯t hope that he will really eat it¡± ¡°He¡¯s just a trash. There¡¯s no need to pay attention to this kind of person. He¡¯ll do anything to vilify Jon.¡± The audience was discussing crazily. There were a lot ofments. After all, this time¡¯s drill was no longer like the previous bank robbery drill, but a prison break drill. Now, through the camera, the audience saw a group of prisoners being held in this prison. These prisoners were all felons. After all, ordinary criminals couldn¡¯t be held in this prison. After seeing these felons, some of the audience started to worry about Jon. After all, these prisoners looked like they weren¡¯t to be trifled with. They were worried about what Jon would do to them inside. There were some people who just wanted to watch the show and hoped that Jon would be dealt with by the criminals in the prison. Now, no one cared about the oue of the drill. That was because, in most people¡¯s eyes, whether Jon could live a rather peaceful life in prison was a big problem. If Jon didn¡¯t even ovee the most basic obstacle in front of him, it would be a lot of trouble to him. If he wanted to escape from prison, it would be very difficult. However, there were some people who still believed in Jon. After all, Jon hadpleted one seemingly impossible task after another during the previous few drills. Therefore, these people who believed in Jon, and those who didn¡¯t believe in Jon. It was inevitable that there would be quarrel on the livestream. Jon and Brown Williams arrived at the iron gate under the escort of the prison guards. On both sides of the iron gate stood four prison guards. Two of them were guards on guard duty, while the remaining two were there to wee Jon and Brown Williams. After all, Jon and Brown Williams were not sent to the cell area. They were new prisoners, and they had to be brought in by the guards. They had to experience the tedious process of receiving daily necessities in the cell area. After handing Jon over to the two guards at the door of the cell area, the warden and the others stood outside the door and watched as the two were taken away. Gal Gadot looked nervous, although Jon was confident that he would be safe, Gal Gadot still very worried. Chapter 200 - First Day in Prison!

Chapter 200: First Day in Prison!

And now, when she saw the fierce-looking criminals, the worry in her heart became even more intense. Although she knew that Jon¡¯ was very smart, and that he would have a careful n for what he did, Gal Gadot didn¡¯t know that Jon could protect himself or not. The situation in the prison was like a jungle. Only a strong person could survive here. Without a strong body, intelligence wouldn¡¯t be of much use. However, Jon had already entered the prison, and the drill had begun. No matter how worried she was, it was useless. She could only pray that nothing would happen to Jon. At the same time, she hoped that Brown Williams would be able to protect Jon. After all, Brown was an experienced police officer. They watched Jon and Brown Williams disappeared into the cell area. The warden and Gal Gadot turned around and left. Then, Gal Gadot and the cameraman went to the prison¡¯s surveince room. For the rest of the time, they broadcast live here. After all, they couldn¡¯t enter the cell block. So, they could only film the surveince footage of the cell. On the surveince screen. After Jon and Brown Williams entered the medical examination room, they temporarily lost their images. When a prisoner first entered the prison, they would have a full physical examination. During the physical examination, the prisoner was basically naked. Therefore, there were no surveince cameras in the physical examination room. Jon and the others entered the prison at three in the afternoon. After the physical examination, they changed into the prisoner¡¯s uniform and received some daily necessities. After a series of procedures, it was time to allocate the m to their cell. It was naturally impossible to have a single room in the prison¡¯s cell. After all, it was not a hotel. Outside the confinement room, all the cells were big rooms with fourteen beds. Their cell had fourteen people other than them. However, at this time, the prisoners were all working, so when Jon and the others entered, there was no sign of the other prisoners. After assigning the cell, Jon and Brown Williams made up the bed. It was already six o¡¯clock in the afternoon. Six o¡¯clock in the afternoon was the time for the prisoner to start eating at the cafeteria. Therefore, Jon and Brown were taken directly to the cafeteria. The cafeteria was not small. There was some free food in it, but the free food was not good. At most, there was some in rice. If they wanted to eat better, they would need to charge money. Each prisoner¡¯s ID card was simr to the student¡¯s meal card in the school. When their rtives left to visit the prison, they could charge money into it. Prisoners could also earn some ie through work. The money in the ID card could be used to spend in the prison¡¯s small stores or cafeteria. However, how much money each ID card could be filled up depended on the prison¡¯s evaluation of the prisoner¡¯s performance. If the prisoner performed well, the amount of money that could be filled up in the ID card would be a little more. If the prisoner performed poorly, even if there were rtives outside sending money, it wouldn¡¯t be able to be filled up in the card. The warden wouldn¡¯t give Jon and the others preferential treatment, Jon and Brown still received the same treatment as normal prisoners. Both of them had $500 in their ID cards. This was a limit that only criminals who performed extremely well could have. With their ID cards, Jon and Brown Williams ordered a pretty good dinner. There were fried chicken, nuggets, milk, snacks, and other food. This could be said to be the best dinner in the Aga Mountain Prison. After all, the first meal on their first day in prison was naturally better. The two of them held their tes. They had just found a seat to sit down. However, five people came over and surrounded the two of them. One of them, who had a scar on his face, sat opposite Jon and stared at him with an arrogant face. The other four people stood to the side and looked at the two of them with a mocking expression. ¡°The food is not bad. You¡¯re new. You look very rich.¡± The scar-faced man sitting opposite Jon looked at the two people¡¯s dinner on the table, then looked at Jon and said with a smile. Jon looked up at the man and didn¡¯t say anything. Then, he put on disposable gloves and began to eat. Brown Williams stared at the few people with a bad expression. It was just as the outside world had said, the old man from the prison came to find fault with them as soon as they entered. ¡°Neer, didn¡¯t you hear that we came to ask you a question? Are you f*cking deaf?¡± One of the underlings on the side saw Jon¡¯s attitude and immediately spoke with an unfriendly tone. Seeing that Jon ignoring his boss, as a subordinate, he naturally had to put on a good show. Jon still didn¡¯t say anything. This time, he didn¡¯t even raise his head, he kept chewing his food. Although Jon didn¡¯t care, Brown Williams couldn¡¯t stand it anymore. Originally, as a police officer, he didn¡¯t want to see criminals being so arrogant. Now that he saw them being so provocative, he was very unhappy. He pped the table. Bang. Brown Williams stood up with an angry face. ¡°You little brat, , you¡¯d better leave now before my boss gets angry. I won¡¯t stop beating you up until your teeth fall on the ground!¡± His sinister expression was coupled with his deep voice. At this moment, Brown Williams did not look like a police officer, but more like a criminal. After all, he had also participated in two drills with Jon. He had a good grasp of the role of a robber or criminal. Moreover, although he did not speak as much as Will Smith, he was a wild person in his heart. Thus, when he yed the role of a criminal, his ferocity was immediately disyed. His attitude made the few of them stunned. For a moment, they didn¡¯t react. Obviously, they didn¡¯t expect that a newbie who had just arrived at the prison would actually be acting so tough. ¡°Quit messing around! Finish your food!¡± The sound of Brown Williams pping the table attracted the attention of the prison guards in the cafeteria. Immediately, a prison guard shouted at them. Seeing this, the five people who came to stir up trouble all nned to leave. The scar-faced man also got up. In this ce, it was better to not provoke the prison guards. ¡°Neer, you quite arrogant. You two have just entered. You just wait, I have plenty of time to y with you two.¡± Chapter 201 - Haters and Fans

Chapter 201: Haters and Fans

The scar-faced man looked at Jon and said in a deep voice. Although they were prepared to leave due to the intervention of the prison guards, they were not over with Jon yet. He would definitely not let these two people off. And at this time, Jon slowly raised his head and nced at the few people. His expression was very calm andposed. It was obvious that he did not take their threat seriously. With his current strength, these people were like ants in front of him. Would humans care a bite from an ant? Definitely not. At the instant when they made eye contact with Jon. The few of them were stunned once again. They felt a chill run down their spines. This was because Jon had a passive skill. It was ¡®Mysterious and Unpredictable¡¯. This passive skill could allow Jon to automatically emit a mysterious aura. Now that the passive skill was activated, the five of them were instantly stunned. They felt like their bodies were covered in ayer of ice. It wasn¡¯t until Jon lowered his head again, the coldness finally disappeared. ¡°Gulp!¡± The leader of the five felt the coldness enveloping him recede and subconsciously swallowed a mouthful of saliva. ¡°Boss, this neer doesn¡¯t look simple. Even an ordinary murderer wouldn¡¯t have this kind of gaze.¡± One of the underlings said in a low voice. This gaze was too mysterious and gave people a feeling of fear. ¡°It feels like he¡¯s a serial killer. He might even have experienced a battlefield!¡± ¡°I think we shouldn¡¯t provoke him.¡± the other underling also said in a low voice. Hearing the voices of the two underlings, the leader finally reacted at this time. He sneered and said, ¡°Why are you afraid of him? All the us here also had killed people?¡± ¡°Even if he is a serial killer, even if he has been on the battlefield, this is a prison!¡± ¡°There are only two of them. What¡¯s there to be afraid of? Call a few brothers at night. I want to teach these two neers a good lesson.¡± Even though Jon¡¯s gaze earlier had indeed frightened him, he still had a lot of underlings in his hands. If he didn¡¯t teach these two people a lesson, how would he be able to stand on his feet? Moreover, even if this neer was powerful and impressive outside of the prison, there were only two of them locked in with them. With so many of them, how could he not be able to deal with Jon and Brown? After the five of them left, Brown Williams sat down and looked at Jon as he ate. ¡°Boss, this is the prison. We are neers, there will be a lot of trouble in the future.¡± Even though that was what he said, Brown Williams was not worried. Because he knew that Jon was very strong. After all, Will Smith, the fighting champion, could not even take a punch from Jon. One could imagine how terrifying Jon¡¯s strength was. ¡°It¡¯s only interesting if someone is looking for trouble. Otherwise, prison life will be very boring.¡± Jon smiled and spoke. He naturally knew that these things would happen, but he did not care. These people would not affect his ns. In the monitoring room. The cafeteria was such arge public ce, so there would naturally be many surveince cameras. Therefore, everything that happened in the cafeteria was seen by Gal Gadot and the others in the monitoring room. When they saw that someone was looking for trouble with Jon, their expressions became serious. Fortunately, Brown Williams stood up for Jon. Without Brown, Gal Gadot really didn¡¯t know what to do. Back then, on the night when she first invited Jon to dinner, she met a few homeless people. At that time, Jon also beat them away. However, at that time, Jon¡¯s opponents were vagrants who did not have enough food to eat. Their fighting strength was definitely notparable to the prison¡¯s criminals. Even if Jon¡¯sbat skill was a little better, Gal Gadot felt that Jon alone would not deal with a few criminals easily. In the livestream. ¡°Is this the beginning? As expected by most of us, not long after Jon entered the prison, there will be prisonersing to stir up trouble.¡± ¡°After all, this is the tradition of all prisons in the world. How can a neer not be taken care of?¡± ¡°The leaders of these troublemakers look quite powerful. They are tall and sturdy, and they even have tattoos on their bodies. They look fierce.¡± ¡°They do look very fearsome. All all, there are all kinds of vicious and dangerous criminals are imprisoned in Aga Mountain Prison?¡± ¡°Haha, in the entire prison, only Jon himself is an ordinary person. Him as a small FBI agent is obviously not a threat to these scary criminals.¡± ¡°If it¡¯s apetition of strength and brutality, then forget it. Didn¡¯t you see that when Jon was provoked by those prisoners, Jon didn¡¯t even dare to reply?¡± ¡°Yeah, in that situation, Jon was probably scared to death and didn¡¯t even have the time to react.¡± ¡°Haha, the strongest robber in history is actually a coward. I¡¯m not going to watch this anymore.¡± ¡°You better scram quickly. Don¡¯t show off your stupidity here.¡± ¡°There are some haters in the chat. They won¡¯t let go of any opportunity to defame Jon. They¡¯re just a bunch of trash.¡± ¡°Where are the stream moderators? Can they ban these trash haters from the chat?¡± ¡°Although Jon didn¡¯t respond to the five people who provoked him just now, I feel that Jon just doesn¡¯t want to lower himself to their level.¡± ¡°Yeah, he just doesn¡¯t want to fuss about it. Otherwise, those people would have long fallen onto the ground and eat dust.¡± ¡°Well, Jon should have beat them up just now. But there¡¯s no rush. The drill has only just begun, and Jon¡¯s trouble has only just begun. Just Wait and watch.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily in the livestream. Jon had no reaction to the few people. Some people thought that Jon had chickened out. Under such circumstances, it naturally gave the haters a chance. Thus, some haters began to mock him. There were haters, and there were fans. One side criticized Jon, while the other side was defending him. Both sides began quarrel in the livestream. It was already past six o¡¯clock in the evening, and this time was also the time when most of the viewers got off work. Therefore, the audience in the livestream blew up again. It was a real surge. That was because the number of viewers had already reached 90 million! At the beginning of this drill, the number of viewers at this time was already a lot more than the number of viewers from the previous drill. This meant that this live drill was likely to break the previous record. Moreover, as the number of viewers increased, the gift ie also soared. But these were not the concerns of Gal Gadot. Right now, she was only concerned about Jon¡¯s safety. Chapter 202 - Coincidence

Chapter 202: Coincidence

In the prison canteen, Jon and Brown Williams were still eating. As time went on, more and more criminals came to eat. The other criminals were looking at their food, whether intentionally or not. Jon and Brown Williams were eating such good food for the first time. This meant that there must be a lot of money in their ID cards. Moreover, everyone liked to bully the rookies. Therefore, when the criminals saw their ID cards, they wanted to snatch them. After all, they didn¡¯t have enough money in their ID cards. Even if they did, who wouldin about having too much money. Jon could guess what these criminals were thinking. They just thought that the neers were easy to bully. He didn¡¯t care at all. Jon couldn¡¯t control what other people thought as long as they didn¡¯t find trouble with him. If anyone dared to provoke Jon, it would be end of his luck. Soon, the two of them finished eating. Jon and Brown Williams were brought to a small room by the prison guards. It was like a ssroom. Jon and Brown were new, so there were guards here to teach them the rules of the prison. They trained for more than two hours. At 9 pm. The guards brought Jon and Brown Williams back to their cell. They had just returned. Jon saw the scar-faced man who had picked a fight during dinner. The scar-faced man looked at Jon and Brown with a cold smile. It was obvious that he already knew that these two rookies were in the same dorm as him. He was waiting for Jon and Brown toe back. After the prison guard left. A dozen of people in the dorm stared at Jon and Brown with unfriendly expressions. The cold smile on their boss¡¯s face was even wider. However, they did not choose to make a move. That was because there were cameras in the dormitory. They could not make a move now. ¡°Boss, I didn¡¯t expect that we would be in the same dormitory as this person?¡± Brown Williams looked at this group of people with a disdain expression. Jon, on the other hand, looked rxed. He did not even look at this group of people and returned to his bed. In the livestream. When Gal Gadot saw this scene, she looked extremely nervous and worried. She did not expect Jon to be in the same dormitory as this group of people. Now, things were getting a little troublesome. In the livestream. ¡°Wow, the prison¡¯s dormitory is equipped with a camera? The prisoners are also human. Don¡¯t they have any right to privacy?¡± ¡°Yeah, and it¡¯s already the 21st century. There are still so many people living in the same cell. Don¡¯t they have the money to build a single room?¡± ¡°That¡¯s too much. The prison has vited their human rights. They should at least get someputers and other entertainment facilities in the cell.¡± ¡°Good God, are you guys idiots? Privacy, single cell, and even entertainment? F*ck, you¡¯re here to go to jail, not to enjoy your life.¡± ¡°I feel like there are so many idiots every time, and there are even more of them this time.¡± ¡°Yeah, why don¡¯t you think about what kind of people are in the prison? These are all extremely vicious criminals. Do they deserve privacy and entertainment?¡± ¡°Good lord, some of the dumbass make meughed my ass off.¡± ¡°The people locked up in Aga Mountain Prison are all serious criminals. Most of their crimes cannot be forgiven. People who still arguing about the prisoner¡¯s human rights are dumb.¡± ¡°Actually, there aren¡¯t many prisons that have surveince cameras installed in their cells. However, Mount Agar prison only holds serious criminals and felons. It¡¯s still necessary to install cameras. After all, these serious criminals are capable of doing anything.¡± ¡°But then again, it¡¯s really a coincidence that Jon is locked up with the person who started the trouble.¡± ¡°Haha, it¡¯s a coincidence for that scarred-faced man. For Jon, it¡¯s his bad luck.¡± ¡°This cell should be this scarred-faced man¡¯s territory. Jon looks like he¡¯s in trouble.¡± ¡°However, seeing that there are cameras in the cell, these people don¡¯t dare to do anything to Jon.¡± ¡°Hehe, it¡¯s true that there are cameras. However, I don¡¯t believe that there are cameras in the toilet. I don¡¯t believe that if Jon and Brown don¡¯t go to the toilet.¡± ¡°When Jon goes to the toilet, he might get a good beating by them. They might need to use a stretcher to carry Jon out of the toilet.¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯m looking forward to this scene.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t understand one thing. Why are there more and more haters in the livestream? Why do they all want to see Jon get into trouble?¡± ¡°Maybe they guessed Jon¡¯s ending before, but they didn¡¯t get it right. As a result, they were pped in the face by Jon. After being pped in the face, these people were mad, so they went straight to being haters.¡± ¡°Really? Haha, make meugh. I didn¡¯t expect the haters to have such an unbearable experience.¡± ¡°Speaking of which, these people are like clowns. They¡¯ve been hoping for something to happen to Jon, but every time they get pped in the face, it won¡¯t cause them any psychological trauma, right?¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. I hope they¡¯ll contact a psychiatrist in advance, Haha.¡± The audience saw that Jon and the man were living in the same dormitory. This caused another wave of intense discussion. Prison. Prison cell. Jon and Williams had already on their own beds. There were only bunk beds in the prison¡¯s dormitory. Jon was sleeping on the lower bed, while Brown Williams was sleeping on upper bed. ¡°Boss, there are two cameras in this dorm. The reason these people aren¡¯t attacking us right now is probably because of the cameras.¡± ¡°But there¡¯s a bathroom in the bedroom. There definitely won¡¯t be any cameras in the bathroom. They¡¯re probably waiting for us to go to the bathroom.¡± Brown Williams sat on Jon¡¯s bed and said in a low voice. At this moment, Brown was still a little nervous. His skills were not as good as Will Smith¡¯s, and their opponents were more than ten people. And there were only two of them. ¡°Waiting for us to go to the bathroom? Then let¡¯s go to the bathroom.¡± ¡°Since the conflict has already started, it¡¯s only a matter of time before we confront them. The earlier we resolve it, the easier it will be.¡± ¡°Teach them a lesson. This way, when we fall asleep, they won¡¯t disturb us.¡± Jon looked at Brown and slowly said. Inside a prison was not like the outside world. If he wanted to make others submit to him, it would be too easy. All he needed to do was beat them up. Jon wasn¡¯t very interested in this scar-faced man who was looking for trouble with him. However, judging from his status, he should have been in prison for quite some time, so he should know more about this prison. If Jon could beat him into submission and make him listen to him, then it would be of some help to his escape n. Chapter 203 - Conflict!

Chapter 203: Conflict!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Therefore, Jon was ready to make his move. Since there were cameras in the cell, these people were waiting for him to go to the bathroom. So, he took the initiative to go over. ¡°Okay.¡± Hearing Jon¡¯s words, Brown Williams nodded in response. He would not question Jon¡¯s decision. Whatever Jon decided, he just needed to do it. Therefore, even though he felt that he was not confident in dealing with these people, Brown Williams still listened to Jon and walked to the bathroom. As the two of them entered the bathroom. Scarface sneered. He led a dozen people and also walked to the bathroom. In the monitoring room. Through the surveince footage, Gal Gadot saw Jon and Brown entered the bathroom together with Scarface and the others. She immediately became nervous. ¡°Officer, aren¡¯t you going to take care of this?¡± Gal Gadot looked at the prison guard in the monitoring room and said anxiously. She hoped that the prison guard would intervene. Otherwise, if things continued to develop, it would definitely be very bad to Jon. ¡°Attention, prison guard on the second floor of building A, south district. There seems to be a brawl in Room 502. Please go and check the situation immediately.¡± After the prison guards in the monitoring room heard what Gal Gadot said and took a look at the monitor, they quickly picked up the walkie-talkie and informed the prison guards in Jon¡¯s dormitory. Although the warden did not inform them, this prison guard still knew about the drill. He also knew that Gal Gadot was currently broadcasting live. Moreover, there were quite a number of viewers in the livestream. The prison guard naturally had to pay attention to this. ¡°Coy that!¡± A reply came from the walkie-talkie. At this moment in the prison cell, Jon and Brown were both blocked in the bathroom. The bathroom was not considered small. After all, it was a bathroom shared by 14 people in a dormitory. The entire bathroom space could amodate more than 10 people. After surrounding Jon and Williams, the Scarface stood at the front of the group and sneered at the two of them, ¡°You two are the most arrogant rookies I have ever seen. Remember, this is my territory.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t care how awesome you are outside, but when youe here, you have to obey to me, understand?¡± The Scarface looked at the two of them and said fiercely. Jon did not say anything. Brown Williams, who was standing behind Jon, did not say anything when he saw that Jon was still steady as usual. Scarface could not help but feel happy when he saw this. When he saw Brown Williams¡¯ tough attitude in the canteen this afternoon, he thought that the two of them would be difficult to deal with. He did not expect them to be two people who looked strong but were chickened out he threatened them. ¡°Rookies, since you¡¯vee to my territory, you have to follow my rules.¡± ¡°Now, take the money in your ID cards and go to the supermarket to buy some cigarettes for me. Then you will be under my lead.¡± ¡°As long as you follow me, you won¡¯t be bullied while you¡¯re in prison.¡± Seeing that the two of them didn¡¯t speak, Scarface sneered and spoke. These two people ate the most expensive meal on the first day they came in. Moreover, the warden personally escorted them here. This meant that they were either people with status or people with money. Scarface didn¡¯t actually want to beat them up. If he could scare them and make them give him the money from their ID cards every month, wouldn¡¯t that be better? After all, if he beat them up, the prison guards might find out. In that case, he had to bear the responsibility. If he could scare these two people without beating them up, he would be in the best situation. ¡°What if I don¡¯t do as you say?¡± Jon smiled and slowly walked toward the scarred face man. ¡°Huh?¡± Scarface was stunned. He thought that the two of them were scared by him. But judging from their expressions, they were not afraid at all Moreover, when Jon spoke, the aura on his body made Scarface feel a little scared. He did not react for a moment. ¡°How about this? I¡¯ll give you a chance to follow me. You don¡¯t have to give me anything. As long as you listen to me, I¡¯ll protect you from today onwards.¡± ¡°How about it? You only have one chance to choose.¡± Jon stood in front of the Scarface . Even though he had a smile on his face, under the influence of the passive skill, ¡®Mysterious and Unpredictable¡¯, the sca faced man was stunned by his aura. He subconsciously took a step back and kept his distance from Jon. He was terrified. He looked fierce and had a scar on his face, it was enough to shock people. However, he was a person who bullied the weak, and feared the strong. Today, he had encountered a strong man, so he did not know what to do. ¡°Rookie, are you tired of living? How dare you talk to our boss like that? Do you believe that I will beat you to the ground?¡± seeing that the boss did not speak, the underling started to show off again. As he spoke, he raised his fist. He aimed it at Jon¡¯s face. However, before he could touch Jon, Jon had already kicked him a few meters away. Afternding on the bathroom wall, the man grimaced in pain. Everyone was stunned. They did not expect this skinny man to be so ruthless. How could he be so ruthless? ¡°Remember, don¡¯t be so arrogant in front of me next time. Otherwise, it won¡¯t be as simple as just kicking you.¡± Jon looked at the little underling who was leaning against the wall and his tone gradually turned cold. ¡°Rookie, you have guts. How dare you hit my men?¡± ¡°Let¡¯s attack together. Teach him a good lesson. Let him know who is in charge of 502!¡± Seeing how ruthless Jon was, Scarface could not help but suck in a breath of cold air. Now, he was already afraid of Jon. But he was the one who could be the leader of the dormitory. Naturally, the Scarface was not a simple man. Therefore, even though he was a little afraid, he still asked his underlings to take care of Jon. Hearing Scarface¡¯s words, all the underlings surrounded Jon. However, they all looked at Jon with fear and did not immediately make a move! Because they could tell that Jon had gone throughbat training before. They were not confident that they could subdue Jon. Chapter 204 - Scarface Was Scared!

Chapter 204: Scarface Was Scared!

¡°Don¡¯t just stand there, hurry up and give him a good beating!¡± Seeing that his underlings hadn¡¯t take Jon down, Scarface shouted angrily. Now, seeing that there were so many underlings in front of him, the fear in his heart couldn¡¯t help but lessen a little. After all, no matter what Jon and Brown were arrested for, no matter how unfathomable Jon looked, they couldn¡¯t stand a chance. Because this was a prison, only strength mattered. Whoever was stronger and had more underlings, he would be the strongest. When the group of underlings heard the Scarface¡¯s words, they all pounced on Jon. There were eight or nine people of them, although they didn¡¯t have any weapons, they still looked difficult to deal with. However, Jon¡¯s movement was agile like a cheetah, dodging every attacks. This group of criminals couldn¡¯t touch him at all. While dodging, Jon also attacked them. In less than a minute, this group of underlings had all fallen to the ground, moaning in pain. Scarface was stunned. While he was stunned, a chill rose from his back. He knew that he had met a fierce opponent! Not only him, but even Brown Williams, who was standing behind Jon, was also stunned by the scene in front of him. At that time, before Jon participated in the second drill. He knew how strong Jon was. Jon and Will Smith had a battle, he was at the scene. Jon only used one move, and Will Smith was unable to resist. But back then, Jon wasn¡¯t as strong as he was today. Now it seemed like he was holding back. ¡°What are you guys doing in the bathroom!¡± But at this moment, a shout came from the cell door. However, no one paid any attention to them. Because, at this moment, the underlings and criminals were all lying on the ground moaning. Scarface was already petrified. Meanwhile, Jon came in front of Scarface again and said in an indifferent tone, ¡°I said, you only have one chance. Have you considered it?¡± Scarface reacted and couldn¡¯t help but swallow a mouthful of saliva. He looked at his underlings who were lying on the ground. Then he looked at Jon. He had never expected that Jon would be so strong! To be able to fight nearly ten people at once, and still be able to remain calm and steady, his underlings didn¡¯t cause him any harm at all! It was too terrifying! Just what kind of person was this! As for Scarface, even though he looked extremely ferocious with the scar on his face, he knew that he was no match for Jon. If he continued to go against Jon, he would be the one who suffered. Thinking of this, the Scarface ¡®s expression suddenly changed and turned into a bright smile. ¡°Boss, from today onwards, I will follow you. From today onwards, this 502 room will be yours. I will do whatever you want me to do!¡± As he said this, he also groveled. Scarface was also a person who could be obedient. When he was in power, he appeared to be a little tough and arrogant. But now that he saw that how strong Jon was, he immediately began to tter Jon. Seeing Scarface groveling, the group of underlings lying on the ground were stunned. Even Brown Williams was stunned. Brown had thought that Scarface was a difficult character to deal with. Brown did not expect this ferocious looking scar faced man would chicken out so quickly? The sudden reversal made Brown Williams unable to react for a moment. ¡°Very good. If you had done this earlier, wouldn¡¯t it also make your brothers suffer less?¡± Jon said with a faint smile. Scarface did not know what to say. He could only nod and smile apologetically. His smile was ttering. ¡°What are you guys doing! Go back to your beds!¡± At this time, the prison guards opened the cell door and walked in. Their faces were cold and stern, and they held batons in their hands. At this time, Scarface also hurriedly kicked his underlings a few times, telling them to get up quickly. ¡°What are you guys doing here in the washroom?¡± The prison guard had already arrived at the entrance of the washroom. Looking at the people who had just stood up, he frowned and shouted. ¡°Um, officer, we are going to the washroom.¡± Scarface replied with a smile on his face. ¡°You need a group of people to go to the washroom? 4040, I warn you to be more honest. Don¡¯t bully these two people just because they are new here!¡± ¡°If this kind of thing happens again, I¡¯ll take charge of your ten-day detention!¡± The prison guard said with a cold face. Hearing that, Scarface really had a bitter feeling in his heart. Indeed. Today, it was indeed him who wanted to bully these two rookies, but he didn¡¯t seed in bullying them! Not only did he not seed in bullying them, but his underling was also beaten up by this neer. Moreover, he had to lower his head to him. He, Scarface, was also the one who was bullied! ¡°Yes, yes, yes, Officer. I guarantee that such a thing will not happen again.¡± Scarface nodded repeatedly in response. If such a thing happened again, would he let a bunch of underling block Jon in the bathroom? This was definitely impossible. ¡°Now, all of you return to your beds and lie down properly. All of you are being yed!¡± After the prison guard heard the Scarface¡¯s promise, he shouted at everyone. When everyone heard this, they all followed suit. They watched as this group of people came out of the bathroom. The prison guard¡¯s expression was a little surprised. After seeing the situation in the bathroom, the prison guard naturally thought that Scarface was bullying these two rookies. After all, this was not the first time Scarface had done this. However, the prisoners who came out were mostly holding their stomachs and hugging their arms. Two of them were even limping. On the contrary, there was the two rookies, there was nothing strange about their bodies. This made the prison guard confused. Could it be that these two rookies had beaten up the old man here? This kind of situation was really umon. No, it wasn¡¯t that it wasn¡¯tmon. It was that they had never seen it before. However, the prison guard had watched Jon¡¯s live broadcast and knew the purpose of Jon¡¯s visit to Aga Mountain Prison. Therefore, since he realized it, it was probably Jon who had beaten up these criminals. But he didn¡¯t say anything. After everyone returned to their beds. The prison guard walked around the cell once more. ¡°All of you, behave yourself. If I find out that someone is causing trouble, I won¡¯t let him sleep tonight!¡± He gave a warning. The prison guard then left the cell and locked the door again. At this time. In the monitoring room. Seeing that the prison guard had appeared, it could be considered as temporarily relieving Jon and Brown Williams of their crisis. Gal Gadot breathed a sigh of relief. Chapter 205 - The Audience鈥檚 Guess. What Happened

Chapter 205: The Audience¡¯s Guess. What Happened

In the livestream. ¡°Although the prison guard came to stop them, they had been in the bathroom for a few minutes. It felt like Jon had already been beaten up.¡± ¡°But Jon was lucky. If the prison guards didn¡¯te in time, Jon would have been crippled.¡± ¡°Haha, the strongest robber in history was beaten up by the criminals in the prison. He really deserved it.¡± ¡°He really deserved it. He was so arrogant to think that he could survive in a prison escape drill. He couldn¡¯t me anyone else for being beaten up.¡± ¡°You idiots know so much aren¡¯t you. Were you at the scene? Do you see Jon got beaten up yourself?¡± ¡°They were the toilet bowl, toilet brush, and wastepaper basket. That¡¯s why they were so clear about it.¡± ¡°LMAO, you are so creative.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t the situation now obvious enough? Two people are blocked in the toilet by more than a dozen people, are you sure they won¡¯t get beaten up?¡± ¡°Hehe, so what if there are more than a dozen people? What¡¯s the use of having more people?¡± ¡°You guys are really Jon¡¯s hardcore fans. You guys only know to brag how strong Jon is. I¡¯m telling you Jon will be in a lot of trouble next day.¡± ¡°Hehe, tell Jon¡¯s hardcore fans some bad news. Although the prison guard able to save him this time, Jon¡¯s trouble isn¡¯t over yet.¡± ¡°Just because the prison guard was able to save Jon this time doesn¡¯t mean that Jon will be safe from now on. When that timees, Jon will be beaten up again.¡± ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to Jon being beaten up by criminals, Haha.¡± ¡°However, didn¡¯t you notice that when they came out of the toilet, the Scarface¡¯s subordinates were all holding their stomachs. Two of them even limped out.¡± ¡°On the contrary, it was as if nothing had happened to Jon and Brown. Let¡¯s make a bold guess. Jon and Brown beat up more than ten people.¡± ¡°No way. Don¡¯t tell me someone really thinks that two people can beat up more than ten people?¡± ¡°What¡¯s impossible about that? Jon is an FBI agent, and Brown is a police officer!¡± ¡°Fine, fine, fine, Jon is awesome. Jon can fight ten people at once. Jon is the strongest in the universe, are you happy now?¡± ¡°Stop bragging about Jon can beat more than 10 people, I¡¯m sure he will be doomed either way.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. Some of the audiences already thought that Jon had been beaten up. Although there were no injuries on his face, who would be stupid enough to hit someone else¡¯s face in a fight in prison? Otherwise, they would expose themselves when the prison guard saw the injuries on the victim. There were also some spectators who thought that it was because of the prison guards that Jon was able to temporarily resolve this crisis. However, since the conflict between Jon and the scar-faced man had already happened. It was obvious that it wouldn¡¯t end like this. After the prison guards left, Scarface would definitely find trouble with Jon. After all, the criminals in this Aga Mountain Prison were all extremely vicious. It was impossible for them to let Jon go just because of the intervention prison guards. Therefore, some of the haters in the livestream were already looking forward to it. They were looking forward to Scarface beating Jon up again. On the other hand, the warden was still in his office, watching Jon¡¯s situation through the live broadcast room on theputer. He was supposed to be off duty at this time. But for this public drill, the warden had to pay attention and didn¡¯t go back so early. After all, there were so many eyes watching in the livestream. Although the warden wasn¡¯t worried that Jon could escape from the prison, because he was very confident in the security of the prison. However, this drill tested not only the security of the prison, but also the capability to control the discipline of the prisoners. If this drill allowed the audience to see a prison where prisoners often fought and quarrelled, it would have adverse impact on the reputation of the prison. Therefore, the warden kept an eye on the livestream. He wanted to see if there was any special situation, so he could deal with it in time. Just now, the warden saw that Scarface in the cell wanted to cause trouble. When Scarface and the others surrounded Jon in the washroom, the prison guards immediately took action. The warden was satisfied. Moreover, seeing that a criminal wanted to cause trouble for Jon, the warden was somewhat happy. After all, if someone wanted to look for trouble, Jon would definitely spend time and energy to deal with them. Naturally, Jon did not have much time to n about the escape. Perhaps after a few days, when there was no hope of escaping, Jon would voluntarily surrender. So¡­ As long as no bad things happened, the warden would be happy to see criminals go after Jon. In the cell. After the warden left, he did not turn off the lights. There were still 20 minutes left before the lights went out. It was still time for criminals to move around freely. Scarfacey on the bed for a while, then stood up and walked towards Jon¡¯s bed. At this moment, Gal Gadot saw that in the monitoring room and became nervous again. The viewers in the livestream were excited when they saw this, and thements went absurd. Although the prison guards had interfered before, after the prison guards left, they would definitely bother Jon again. This was something that the viewers in the livestream could guess. However. What happened next was not what the audience had guessed. The Scarface didn¡¯t force Jon to go to the bathroom, or rather, directly attacked Jon. Through the surveince footage, the audience in the livestream could clearly see that after Scarface came to Jon¡¯s bed, he respectfully handed him a cigarette. He bent down and handed it over with both hands. His attitude was very respectful. ¡°Jon, do you smoke?¡± Scarface looked at Jon with a smile and asked. People who were adaptive and obedient had such an advantage. It was that they could quickly adapt to all kinds of roles. Ever since he promised Jon to follow him, the Scarface now looked like ackey. ¡°I don¡¯t smoke.¡± Jon nced at him and said indifferently. Jon rarely smoked. Not to mention, the Scarface handed over a very cheap cigarette. ¡°You just came today. You must be tired. How about I massage your legs?¡± Seeing Jon¡¯s indifferent expression, the Scarface still had a ttering smile on his face. After all, Jon¡¯sbat skill was really terrifying. His strength was formidable. Although he was the boss of Cell 502, he didn¡¯t do well in the entire prison. He was often bullied by other bosses of other cells. Chapter 206 - Jon Went On Trending!

Chapter 206: Jon Went On Trending!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Now that a ruthless person like Jon hade, dorm 502 would have a chance to stand up. When that time came, even if Scarface was no longer the boss of 502, but he would be the second boss of this prison cell if he followed Jon. How wonderful was that ¡°Okay.¡± Jon thought for a moment and nodded. Even though he wasn¡¯t used to being touched by someone he didn¡¯t know too much of, it wasn¡¯t a big problem for him to just massage his legs. Besides, after a long day, he was really tired. Then, he ced his feet on the bed beside him and spread them over his quilt. Scarface kneeled on the ground and massaged Jon¡¯s legs with great effort. He hadpletely blended into the role of a subordinate. Although Jon didn¡¯t make him kneel on the ground, Scarface thought that this action could greatly express his respect for Jon. So, he knelt down. Seeing how obedient Scarface was, Jon was a little impressed. Scarface was able to trim his sails to the wind despite after humiliating by Jon. He was quite adaptive. This scene was saw by the people in the monitoring room. The prison guard, Gal Gadot, and the cameraman were all stunned. Even the warden in the office was dumbfounded. He waspletely stunned by Scarface¡¯s actions. The viewers in the livestream were also stunned. They didn¡¯t understand what was going on. Wasn¡¯t Scarface trying to whop Jon? How did he suddenly be Jon¡¯sckey? This fierce-looking prisoner was kneeling and massaging Jon¡¯s legs, and ? ! In the livestream. ¡°? ? ?¡± ¡°I¡¯m dumbfounded. Can someone please tell me what¡¯s going on?¡± ¡°Bro, I¡¯m also have no clue. I don¡¯t know.¡± ¡°Didn¡¯t that Scarface trying to take light with Jon? Why did he suddenly kneel down?¡± ¡°It seems that what those idiots said just now in the bathroom wasn¡¯t true. Jon was not beaten up, but it was Jon who beat these people into submission.¡± ¡°Hehe, I¡¯ve said it before. Who is Jon? He¡¯s the strongest robber in history. So what if he¡¯s in prison? He¡¯s still dominating the prison.¡± ¡°That¡¯s too awesome. These people are definitely not submitted by Jon¡¯s intelligence. They should be surrendered by force.¡± ¡°Now that I think about it, it¡¯s really scary. Not only is Jon intelligent, but he¡¯s also very strong? He¡¯s practically both civil and martial!¡± ¡°Where are those idiots who said that Jon was beaten up by criminals? Come out and get pped in the face.¡± ¡°Haha, speaking of those haters, I want tough at them. They¡¯re always being pped in the face by Jon, but theye her again and again. I think their faces are so swollen that their mothers cannot recognize them anymore.¡± ¡°Haha, these haters are making meugh. They¡¯re just a bunch of clowns.¡± ¡°Haters, don¡¯t be dumb. Come out and make meugh. Hahaha, I¡¯m dying ofughter.¡± ¡°Hmph, I didn¡¯t expect this Scarface to be a good-looking but useless idiot. But don¡¯t get too cocky. As long as Jon is in prison, someone will deal with him!¡± ¡°Look, borthers, the haters are out.¡± ¡°Everyone don¡¯t be too excited. It¡¯s not easy for a hater to speak up now. Don¡¯t scare him away.¡± ¡°I can¡¯t help but startughing. HAHAHA.¡± ¡°Forget it, forget it. Let them be. I¡¯m going to send some gifts to Jon. He has never disappointed anyone. He¡¯s a god-like man.¡± ¡°I¡¯m going to give some gifts too.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. At this moment, they were all a little shocked. Because no one knew what had happened when Jon and Brown were stuck in the bathroom by Scarface. Everyone thought that Jon and Brown Williams had been beaten up. And after the prison guard left, the audience watched Scarface get up and walk towards Jon. They basically thought that Scarface was going to cause trouble for Jon. However, they did not expect what happened next to catch them off guard. Not only did Scarface not try to provoke Jon, but he also even came down and respectfully gave him a leg massage. This made the audience very surprised. They did not know what Jon had done to make this person so humble to him. Although the audience did not know what had happened, it did not stop them from thinking that Jon was awesome. Seeing Jon be the boss of the cell on his first day in prison, the audience was excited. They started to send gifts. At this moment. In the monitoring room, Gal Gadot also let out a sigh of relief. When she saw Scarface massaging Jon¡¯s leg, she couldn¡¯t help but smile. Before this, she had always thought that Jon¡¯s life would be very tough after he went to prison, but she didn¡¯t expect him to receive such treatment on his first day in the prison. It seemed that her worries werepletely unnecessary. Then, she picked up her tablet and looked at the data in the livestream. She had been in no mood to look at the data in the live broadcast room because she was worried about Jon. It was almost ten o¡¯clock now, the peak time for viewers to surf the inte. The number of viewers in the livestream had reached 120 million. It was equal to the record set by the previous exercise. This number was already very difficult to break. This number basically meant that all of the fans from the previous drills were watching the drill. Therefore, it was very difficult for the number of viewers to increase by too much. Moreover, the gift ie from the livestream had already reached over 60 million! Only eight hours had passed since the start of the drill, and the number of gifts had reached such a terrifying figure. After looking at the situation in the livestream Gal Gadot opened up Twitter and other major inte tforms. This was because every single one of Jon¡¯s exercises was extremely popr on the inte. It could basically dominate the hot searches on all tforms. Moreover, there were many posts about Jon¡¯s drills on the Inte. Hence, Gal Gadot wanted to see how the inte was discussing this drill. She opened up all the major tforms. The top five hot searches on all the major tforms were all rted to Jon¡¯s prison break drill. ¡°Shocking. On the first day of Jon¡¯s imprisonment, he was blocked by criminals in the bathroom. What happened next willpletely blow up your mind!¡± ¡°During the prison break drill, Scarface actually knelt down in front of Jon. Is this a distortion of human nature or a loss of morality?¡± ¡°A rational discussion. Three minutes in the bathroom. What exactly did Jon do to these criminals?¡± ... There were many posts on the inte. But the content was basically the same. It was basically what had happened in the prison. Scarface, who everyone thought was going to take flight with Jon, suddenly knelt down in front of Jon. This became a very explosive piece of news! Other than Gal Gadot, the other media outlets were unable to obtain news about the prison break drill immediately. Chapter 207 - The Escape Starts Tomorrow, But the Chance Is Not High!

Chapter 207: The Escape Starts Tomorrow, But the Chance Is Not High!

Therefore. Many media outlets were guarding the official livestream of Gal Gadot. As soon as there was any breaking news in the livestream, they would immediately post to their websites. This way, they could still get some traffic. It was not an exaggeration to say that these few drills of Jon¡¯s had fed many media outlets. In the prison cell. Scarface was still kneeling on the ground and massaging Jon¡¯s legs. The other criminals did not make a sound when they saw this scene. Now, their leader had already acknowledged Jon as his boss. And they could only acknowledge Jon as their boss as well. Soon, it was time to turn off the lights. After the lights were turned off, there would be prison guards checking on them. All the criminals had to go to bed. If a criminal didn¡¯t go to sleep after the light was off, he would be caught. They would be punished. Therefore, Scarface respectfully returned to his bed. ¡°Boss, are you going to cover this Scarface in prison?¡± After Scarface returned, Brown Williams, who was in the upper bunk, came down and asked Jon in a low voice. He really could not stand Scarface¡¯s altitude. He felt that this person had no dignity. ¡°I¡¯ll back him up for the time being, because we can use him when we break out of prison.¡± Jon replied. Now, he had already begun to prepare his own escape n. And this scar-faced man could be used as a chess piece in the process of his escape. Scarface could y a great role. ¡°I understand.¡± Brown Williams nodded his head when he heard that. Then he returned to his bed. After lights out. Brown Williams couldn¡¯t fall asleep no matter how hard he tried. After all, this was the first time he slept in a prison. Although he knew that this was just a drill and not a real imprisonment, he still felt uneasy. Jon was different. Not long after lights out, he fell asleep. Jon slept until six o¡¯clock the next day until the prison bell rang woke him up. In prison, criminals had strict schedules. After waking up, they only had half an hour to wash up and tidy up. So, after the bell rang. All the prisoners had to hurry up and get up. In the bathroom. Because Jon was now the boss of dorm 502, his status was naturally the highest. So, when Jon and Brown came in to wash up, the other prisoners went out to give them space. ¡°Boss, when are we going to break out of prison?¡± Brown Williams brushed his teeth as he approached Jon and asked. He had dark circles beneath his eyes, and his eyes were bloodshot. He did not sleep for the entire night. Although, as a police officer, Brown Williams often stayed upte, it was different from now. At that time, after staying upte, he could still catch up on sleep during the day. But now, he did not have the chance to catch up on sleep. ¡°We¡¯ll start the operation tomorrow.¡± Jon replied, and then he began to wash up. ¡°That¡¯s great!¡± Hearing this, Brown Williams¡¯ face lit up. It would be better to him to escape the prison as soon as possible. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep in the prison environment. He would probably be mentally weak after a few days. Soon, the two of them finished washing up and gave the bathroom to the other criminals. While Jon was making the bed, Brown Williams moved closer to Jon and asked, ¡°Boss, if we move tomorrow, wouldn¡¯t it be too rushed?¡± Although Brown Williams also wanted to start the escape operation as soon as possible. However, the two of them had just entered the prison yesterday. They didn¡¯t even know the environment of the prison. Therefore, he felt that it was a little too fast. Could Jone up with a n to escape in such a short time? ¡°The faster we operate, the higher the chance for us to escape.¡± Jon replied. ¡°But can you think of a n to escape from prison by tomorrow?¡± Brown Williams asked again. ¡°This is the time when we have the best chance. Although the warden didn¡¯t tell the prisoners and the prison guards about our drill this time.¡± ¡°But the prison guards can understand the information outside, so they have some understanding of the robbers in our drill.¡± ¡°They must know that we are here for the prison break drill, so the prison guards will definitely pay attention to us.¡± ¡°Previously, the warden said that we have to stay in the prison for at least three days before we can surrender.¡± ¡°Therefore, I guess the warden subconsciously believes that we have no chance of escaping in these three days.¡± ¡°Since the warden thinks so, the prison guards will naturally think so too. Therefore, they shouldn¡¯t be too vignt during the first three days.¡± ¡°But as time goes by, the prison guards will definitely know that we have gradually understood the prison. Therefore, their vignce will be higher.¡± ¡°At that time, it will be very difficult for us to carry out the escape n again. So, although it is a little rushed now, the best time for us to escape is precisely within the first three days.¡± Jon slowly exined. In fact, if they were toe up with a perfect escape n today, Jon was not absolutely confident. However, they had to escape as soon as possible. ¡°I see. If we start the escape tomorrow, what are our chances of sess?¡± After listening to Jon¡¯s exnation, Brown Williams finally understood the current situation. He was curious about how confident Jon was. ¡°About a 50% chance. I¡¯m not very confident, but I can only try. If the escape fails tomorrow, then we can only withdraw from the drill.¡± ¡°Because once the escape fails, the prison guards will definitely keep a close watch on us. At that time, the chance of escaping is basically zero.¡± Jon said slowly. He did not have a perfect n for the escape tomorrow. Therefore, he did not have much confidence. This was also the most uncertain decision he had made since he participated in the drill. However, the system did not require him to win. Therefore, even if he was not confident, he had to try. Otherwise, the prison guards would be more vignt after a few days. Then, it would be very difficult for them tounch an escape operation. Chapter 208 - New Trouble!

Chapter 208: New Trouble!

When everyone in the dormitory had finished washing up. Jon and Brown Williams led the dorm 502 criminals to the canteen for breakfast. The breakfast in the prison was very simple. There was only in rice and pickles. Jon and the others found a seat and sat down to eat. ¡°Aren¡¯t these two guys new? Scar, I heard that he was assigned to your dormitory?¡± ¡°How is it? Is it done? If not, we don¡¯t mind helping you.¡± While Jon and the others were eating, a few people walked over. These people looked fierce and had a strong body. It was obvious that they were not easy to provoke. ¡°ck Dragon, I¡¯ll tell you what you need to do. Be careful when you speak to my boss. Otherwise, I will whop your ass.¡± Jon had yet to speak, Scarface had already opened his mouth in anger. After listening to Scarface¡¯s words, the few people who came to look for trouble were all stunned. What was going on? Wasn¡¯t this the neer who had just entered yesterday? How did he be Scarface¡¯s boss? ¡°Scarface, are you out of your mind? Are these two brats your bosses?¡± a man with a tattoo on his head, asked. As the former boss of dorm 502, Scarface was also one of the prison tyrants. However, his status was very low. Therefore, after hearing Scarface¡¯s words, the few of them were a little angry. ¡°I told you to be careful when you speak. Don¡¯t call him ¡®brat¡¯. This is my boss. Aren¡¯t you clear about that?¡± At this moment, Scarface was also very unyielding. In the past, when he faced these people, he was extremely fearful. If he always avoided conflict with them. But now it was different. Now he had Jon¡¯s support. What was there to be afraid of? ¡°Scarface, I gave you face, right? You dare to talk to me like that? Do you believe that I¡¯ll kill you?¡± The tattooed man saw Scarface talking to him in such a tone, so he grabbed his cor and said fiercely. Right after the man finished speaking. Suddenly, his face twisted, and an uncontroble scream came out of his mouth. At this time, Jon had already stood up. His hand was holding the tattooed man¡¯s wrist. Jon¡¯s expression was calm. He did not seem to use much strength, but he had already caused the tattooed man to release his hand in pain. ¡°What are you still standing there for? Hurry up and get his hand off me!¡± The tattooed man was in so much pain that he could not take it anymore. He quickly shouted at his subordinates. A few people stepped forward upon hearing this. Seeing this, Brown Williams didn¡¯t move. He knew that dealing with these criminals was easy for Jon. Jon moved his body and avoided the attacks of these people. Then, he continued to use more strength. The tattooed man who was caught by him instantly turned pale and his lips trembled. It was too painful! He couldn¡¯t take it anymore! ¡°What are you doing? Get on the floor!¡± Themotion naturally attracted the attention of the prison guard at the entrance of the canteen. The prison guard quickly came over and pulled out his baton. The few people who came to look for trouble obediently crouched down. After all, even prison tyrants were afraid of the prison guard¡¯s baton. Jon nced at the tattooed man and released his hand. However, he did not cover his head and squatted down. Instead, he sat on a stool and started eating. At this moment, the tattooed man was in so much pain that cold sweat oozed out of his forehead. He sucked in a breath of cold air. ¡°I see you guys fighting in the canteen, do you want to be locked up?¡± The prison guard walked over and shouted coldly at the few people. ¡°No, no, officer, we¡¯re not fighting, we¡¯re just ying around.¡± The tattooed man covered his wrist and forced a smile. He naturally wouldn¡¯t admit that he was fighting. After all, they were the ones who provoked him first. Even if they were the ones who were beaten, they would still be locked up. ¡°If you don¡¯t want to be locked up, then all of you better behave!¡± the prison guard said coldly again, then turned around and left. Because the matter wasn¡¯t serious, the prison guard only gave a warning. ¡°Kid, just you wait. Today¡¯s matter won¡¯t be over!¡± After the prison guard left, the tattooed man red at Jon and warned him fiercely. Although he had already seen how powerful Jon was, as a prison bully, he couldn¡¯t take it. He had to take revenge! Faced with his threat, Jon did not say anything. He did not even raise his head and continued to eat. After the few of them left, Scarface said to Jon, ¡°Boss, among these people, the leader is called ck Dragon. He is a powerful person in our South District.¡± ¡°I heard that before he came in, he was a ruthless arms dealer.¡± ¡°He¡¯s been in prison for five to six years now. He¡¯s powerful, and he¡¯s someone who takes revenge. Boss, you have to be careful.¡± ¡°After all, this man not only has many subordinates, but he also likes to y dirty. It¡¯s hard to guard against him.¡± Scarface told Jon some information about ck Dragon. He had already offended ck Dragon for Jon. Now, Jon was his backer. ¡°Revenge?¡± Jon smiled nonchntly. He could naturally tell that he did not intimidate ck Dragon and the others. After all, this prison was full of vicious criminals. There were not many people like Scarface who was weak. However, it was fine if they did not trouble him. If they dared toe bother him again, Jon did not mind teaching them a lesson and a good beating. After all, Jon was going to make a n to escape from prison today. This was the most important thing. He didn¡¯t want to be disturbed when he was making a n. ¡°By the way, Scar, how long have you been in prison?¡± Jon suddenly looked at Scarface and asked. Scarface was slightly stunned and said, ¡°Boss, I¡¯ve been here for almost ten years.¡± Hearing that, Jon slowly nodded. Ten years. It seemed that Scarface hadmitted quite a big crime. ¡°Then, you should be very familiar with this prison, right? After dinner, let me take a look around the prison.¡± Jon said. The prisoners in the prison all had to work in the factory. The prisoners had to work eight hours per day throughout weekdays, Saturday and Sunday were their off day. During weekends, although the prisoners still strictly followed the prison¡¯s schedule, they would have some free time to move around. Therefore, after breakfast, Jon and the others could wander around the prison cell area. ¡°Okay, boss. After breakfast, I¡¯ll bring you to walk around the prison.¡± Scarface quickly agreed. He didn¡¯t think much about Jon wandering around the prison area. Most criminals chose to understand their surroundings when they first entered the prison. Chapter 209 - Solitary Confinement Room

Chapter 209: Solitary Confinement Room

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio In the monitoring room. Jon and the others were eating in the canteen. Once again, Jon was bothered by the prisoners. Naturally, Gal Gadot and the others saw it through the monitoring. Gal Gadot, who had already rxed, could not help but be nervous again. Sure enough, life in prison could not be peaceful. Not to mention, Jon was new in the prison, there were all kinds of troubles waiting for him He had just solved the problem in his own dorm yesterday, and now there was a new problem. If this continued, it would not be a solution. And today¡¯s new problem seemed to be more difficult to deal with than Scarface and the others. There were two cameramen who participated in the live broadcast with Gal Gadot. Therefore, this live broadcast was carried out all day 24 hours. The livestream had not been interrupted since it was started yesterday. It was eight o¡¯clock in the morning, and it was still early. The people who had left the live broadcast room the night before had yet to return. Currently, there were only about ten million viewers in the livestream. And these viewers were also discussing Jon¡¯s encounter. ¡°It looks like it won¡¯t be easy for Jon to get through this drill quietly. He just solved a problem yesterday, and now there¡¯s a new problem.¡± ¡°After all, this is a prison. It¡¯s normal for newbies to get into trouble. There¡¯s no need to make a big deal out of it.¡± ¡°It looks like the people who came to find trouble today are stronger than Scarface. After all, Scarface isn¡¯t even in their eyes.¡± ¡°I had initially thought that Scarface was a ruthless person, but I never expected him to be such a coward. No wonder he was looked down upon by others!¡± ¡°But looking at the current situation, Jon probably doesn¡¯t have time to think about how to escape from prison. Just dealing with these troubles is an arduous task.¡± ¡°Haha, I told you, Jon can¡¯t win! You brainless fans were still trying to find excuse for Jon?¡± ¡°Oh my God, the haters are here again. They¡¯re showing off their stupidity again.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t bother with these clowns. Just let them vent their jealousy.¡± ¡°It can¡¯t be. It can¡¯t be that there are still people who think that Jon can sessfully escape from prison, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s enough. Last time, you haters said that Jon couldn¡¯t escape from the city, right? In the end, he still managed to escape. How about that, you bunch of monkeys, stupid morons¡± ¡°But no matter what, the prison break drill is not like the bank robbery drill. The prison break drill is much more difficult. I hope Jon canst a few more days.¡± Although the number of viewers in the livestream was much lower than it was at its peak, there were still a lot of discussion. At this time, most of the viewers already thought that Jon would not be able to escape sessfully. After all, the current situation did not look optimistic because someone was looking for trouble. Even if it were not the case, some people thought that it was unlikely for Jon would be able to escape sessfully. After all, the Aga Mountain Prison was well-known around the world for its security. In the past few decades, there had not been a sessful escape. Not to mention, there were still people kept bothering Jon, dealing with these people might cause Jon to waste his energy. Under such circumstances, he would be distracted by nning the prison escape It was too difficult. Gal Gadot naturally knew the situation Jon was facing. As Jon¡¯s lover, she naturally hoped that Jon could win the drill. But the current situation was very harsh. Jon¡¯s main problem was that the prisoners would not let him go easily since he was new to the prison. Only by solving these problems could he have the time and energy to n a prison break. This was a very difficult thing to do. At this time, Jon and the others had finished eating. Under the guidance of Scarface, they began to walk around the prison cell area. In this prison, the range of movement of the prisoners was muchrger than Jon had imagined. The protective facilities here were very good. It was extremely difficult to break out of prison. After walking around the prison for nearly an hour, Jon looked at an old house in the distance. This was an eight-story building. The walls were a little mottled, and the paint on the walls was faded. Compared to the prison area, most of the buildings that had been renovated looked particrly dpidated. ¡°That¡¯s the ce was the forbidden ce to us. It¡¯s also the ce where the prisoners don¡¯t want to go, because that¡¯s the solitary confinement room!¡± ¡°I¡¯ve been locked up a few times because I made a mistake. There were all small cubicles where the sunlight couldn¡¯t be seen inside there. I couldn¡¯t even do anything. It was so quiet that I could even hear my own breathing.¡± ¡°It would be fine if one was locked up for two or three days. During this period of time, an ordinary person could still endure it. But if they were locked up for ten to half a month, it would be a brutal torture to their mental.¡± Seeing that Jon¡¯s gaze was fixed on that old house, Scarface took the initiative to speak without waiting Jon to ask. After all, even if he didn¡¯t say it, Jon should have asked anyway. Taking the initiative to speak, he could be considered to have some insight. When he spoke of the confinement room, Scarface became scared. It seemed that the confinement room had left a deep psychological impact on him. ¡°It¡¯s just confinement, is it as serious as you say? Sure, that¡¯s no one to speak with in the confinement room, but you don¡¯t have to work. It¡¯s a single room, and someone will deliver food to you. Isn¡¯t that veryfortable?¡± Brown Williams couldn¡¯t help but ask after hearing Scarface¡¯s words. Because he had never been confined before, Brown Williams naturally couldn¡¯t understand the pain of being confined. ¡°You don¡¯t know a thing. Yes, you don¡¯t have to work when you are being lock up in there. However, thebor in the prison is mandatory. If you work less than the targeted period, it will be recorded.¡± ¡°After youe out of the confinement room, you have to make up for it.¡± Scarface looked at Brown Williams and said. Brown Williams didn¡¯t expect that there would be such a rule. It seemed that confinement wasn¡¯t asfortable as he thought. ¡°There shouldn¡¯t be many prisoners in this confinement room, right?¡± Jon¡¯s gaze never left the building of the confinement room. When he looked around, he asked casually. After all, solitary confinement was a form of punishment. And prisoners were more afraid of punishment. Therefore, they basically wouldn¡¯t break the rules. In that case, there shouldn¡¯t be too many prisoners in the solitary confinement room. Chapter 210 - Try to Enter the Confinement Room

Chapter 210: Try to Enter the Confinement Room

¡°Indeed, there aren¡¯t many. However, in a ce like a prison, there will always be people who cause trouble. Therefore, there will often be people who are locked up.¡± ¡°Under normal circumstances, there will be a few people in the solitary confinement room every day.¡± ¡°If there is arge-scale fight, it is very likely that the confinement room will be full of people.¡± Scarface replied. Although he did not know what Jon was trying to do by asking these questions, he still wanted to exin it to Jon. ¡°What is the situation in the confinement room? Are there many cameras inside? How many guards are there?¡± Jon asked slowly. Hearing this, Scarface was confused. He brought Jon and Brown around for almost an hour. Jon wasn¡¯t interested in other ces, but he was extremely interested in this confinement room building. It made the Scarface think that Jon wasn¡¯t a well-behaved person. After all, how could a well-behaved person be interested in a ce that punished criminals? The only possibility was that Jon knew that he would cause trouble in prison in the future, so he thought that Jon would be locked in the confinement room. That was why Jon wanted to know about the confinement room in advance. ¡°The building are all separate rooms, so every room was locked. The entire confinement room is only a few square meters, and there are toilets in every room.¡± ¡°There is also a bed and a stool. Other than that, there is nothing else.¡± ¡°There are no cameras in the room, but there are cameras in the stairwell. As for the prison guards, there is one on every floor.¡± Scarface told Jon everything he knew about the confinement room. Jon nodded. ording to Scarface, the security at the confinement room was not as strict as he had imagined. Instead, it was much loosened. They probably felt that after the prisoner was locked in the confinement room, there was no chance of escaping. And in the confinement room, it was easy to understand why there were no cameras. After all, there was a toilet in the confinement room. No matter what, they couldn¡¯t install cameras and watched the prisoners to relieve themselves, right? That would be too much. ¡°Boss, what¡¯s your n?¡± At this moment, Brown Williams approached Jon and asked in a low voice. He knew that Jon wouldn¡¯t be interested in the confinement room for no reason. It could only mean one thing ¡ª Jon was preparing for the escape. The reason he was interested in the confinement room was that he had included this building in his n. ¡°We need to enter the confinement room!¡± Jon replied slowly. This confinement room building was rtively close to the prison walls, and the guards were not that strict. The confinement room might be a good ce for them to escape. However, if they wanted to escape from the confinement room, the most difficult thing would be how to escape from the individual cubicles. After all, every confinement room had a lock. So, it was undoubtedly safe. Anyone without the key was unable to open the lock. However, Jon was different. After thest drill, his Godly Lock-picking Skill had been upgraded to intermediate. Now, he could even open a bank safe. Not to mention the prison¡¯s confinement room. Therefore, the biggest problem of escaping from the istion room. For Jon, it was not a problem at all. As long as he could enter the confinement room, Jon would naturally have a way to get out. After listening to Jon¡¯s words, Brown Williams nodded. Then, he looked at Scarface and asked, ¡°Scarface, under what circumstances would a prisoner be ced in istion?¡± ¡°The mostmon situations are fighting, provoking the prison guards, and hiding contraband. All of them will be ced in istion.¡± ¡°But don¡¯t worry, as long as I¡¯m here, I¡¯ll try my best to prevent you from being grounded.¡± ¡°No matter what, I¡¯ve been here for almost ten years. I know the rules of the prison well.¡± Hearing Brown¡¯s words, Scarface quickly promised. He thought that Brown was asking because he wanted to know the rules of the prison. But he didn¡¯t know that Jon wanted to enter the confinement room of his own ord. ¡°Fighting?¡± Jon muttered these words, then looked at Scarface and slowly said, ¡°Scarface, now take us to the people who were trying to provoke us.¡± ¡°What? ? ?¡± Hearing this, Scarface¡¯s face was full of question marks. He even suspected that he had heard wrong. Jon actually took the initiative to look for the ck Dragon? ¡°Boss, why are you looking for the ck Dragon?¡± Scarface looked at Jon with an extremely surprised expression. At this moment, he wondered Jon did not understand his words. Didn¡¯t he just say it? He would be locked p in confinement room if he involved in fighting! He just mentioned the consequence earlier, but why Jon still wanted to look for ck Dragon? ¡°No one has ever dared to cause trouble for me. Since this ck Dragon hase to me, I will teach him a lesson.¡± Jon¡¯s lips curled into a cold smile. It seemed like Jon was going to find the ck Dragon to vent his anger on him. Jon could not tell his real purpose to Scarface. Even though Scarface looked very loyal to Jon right now. But with his personality, after knowing that Jon was going to break out of prison, he would most probably betray Jon. Even though most of the prison guards knew that Jon was participating in the prison break drill. However, if the prison guards knew that he got himself in the confinement room to break out of prison, they would definitely increase the defense of the confinement room At that time, it would be difficult for him to break out of prison. ¡°Boss, I know that you can¡¯t stand this anger, but if you get in a fight with ck Dragon now, the prison guards will find you.¡± ¡°At that time, it is very likely that you will be locked in the confinement room. That ce is not a ce for people to stay!¡± Scarface looked at Jon and said, wanting to dissuade him. ¡°Don¡¯t talk nonsense. My boss asked you to lead the way, so you can lead the way. It¡¯s none of your business.¡± seeing Scarface¡¯s hesitation, Brown Williams said impatiently. ¡°Alright, Alright. I¡¯ll bring you there now.¡± Scarface quickly replied. He had already made his words very clear, but Jon and Brown Williams¡¯ attitudes were very clear. They wanted to find trouble with ck Dragon. In fact. Scarface also wanted to teach ck Dragon a lesson. It was just that he did not have the ability. If he really went to provoke ck Dragon, he would just beaten up by ck Dragon and his men. And now, since Jon wanted to take a flight with ck Dragon, it was a good thing for Scarface. The reason why he exined it so clearly was because he was afraid that when Jon came out after being locked down in the confinement room, they would me him for not making things clear. Then, they would beat him up, and that would be miserable. However, now that he had exined it a few times, Jon still wanted to cause trouble for the ck Dragon. Scarface was not worried anymore. Chapter 211 - Provocation, Shock!

Chapter 211: Provocation, Shock!

Scarface led the two of them to a small football field. He knew ck Dragon¡¯s habits. When he was free, he would call a group of people to y football on the football field. When they arrived at the small football field, they saw ck Dragon and the others. ck Dragon was running on the football field. He took off his shirt, that was a long scar on his back. It looked like a knife scar. This knife scar was longer and more ferocious than the scar on Scarface. Jon came to the periphery of the football field, but he did not go in. Instead, he stood there calmly. At this moment, the ck Dragon also saw Jon and could not help but be stunned. He did not expect that Jon woulde here. The incident during the breakfast in the canteen had always made the ck Dragon hold a grudge. He originally wanted to look for Jon after he finished ying football. He did not expect Jon came to him. Then, ck Dragon sneered and raised his foot. He was going to shoot, but he did not kick the ball to the football goal. Instead, he aimed at Jon. Whoosh! After a strong kick, the ball flew rapidly towards Jon. Jon easily caught it and stepped on the football with one foot. ¡°Brat, kick the ball over.¡± Seeing Jon receive the ball, the ck Dragon could not help but frown. His idea of using the football to attack Jon did not work. But now, there were many prison guards standing guard around the football field. He could not take the initiative to provoke Jon under the watchful eyes of these prison guards. After all, using the football to attack could be said to be a mistake. But if he used his fist, he would be caught by the prison guards. Hearing ck Dragon, Jon did not move. One of his feet was still stepping on the football. He looked at the ck Dragon and had no intention of giving back the football. ¡°Huh?¡± Seeing this, ck Dragon frowned in anger. Now he finally understood that Jon came here with a purpose. Jon wasing for him ck Dragon did not expect that Jon woulde in front of him and tried to pick up a fight. He had guts! ¡°Big Brother, this kid is definitely here to make some scene.¡± The other people who were ying football on the field came to ck Dragon¡¯s side when they saw this scene. One of the underlings looked at Jon and said to ck Dragon, ¡°We haven¡¯t gone to look for him yet, but he delivers himself to us. He¡¯s quite brave aren¡¯t he.¡± Basically, no one in the south district of Aga Mountain Prison dared to provoke this group of people. There were not many people like Jon who took the initiative to look for trouble. ¡°This kid is a little too arrogant, but I think he¡¯s not easy to deal with. We don¡¯t know what he had done before he came in.¡± another underling also said. ck Dragon did not respond. He continued to stare at Jon. He also felt that Jon was not easy to deal with. And this morning, Jon held his wrist with a very strong force, he knew that Jon was not an ordinary person. At this moment. Whoosh! Another air-piercing sound was heard. It was Jon kicked the football towards ck Dragon. The football quickly streaked through the air. It directly crashed into the ck Dragon¡¯s head. ck Dragon wanted to dodge but he didn¡¯t dodge in time because the football was too fast. It was almost twice as fast as when he kicked it. Almost at the moment he saw Jon¡¯s foot move, the football arrived at the ck Dragon¡¯s head in the next moment. Bang! With a muffled sound, the football hit the ck Dragon¡¯s face. Suddenly, a sharp pain came from his face. ck Dragon felt like he had a concussion, and his face burned with pain. Especially the bridge of his nose, which seemed to be broken. There seemed to be liquid flowing out of his nostrils. He wiped it. It was blood. At this moment, ck Dragon¡¯s face was extremely vicious. ¡°You dare to hit me? Go, kill him!¡± ck Dragon roared. He had been in the prison for quite some time, and Jon was the first person who dared to do this to him. Now, regardless of whether Jon was easy to deal with or not, he had to fight with Jon. Otherwise, his power and position in the prison hierarchy would be affected. Even though the prison guards were still around, ck Dragon couldn¡¯t hold himself anymore. A few people walked towards Jon aggressively. ¡°Bos¡­ Boss, why don¡¯t we run now?¡± when Scarface saw these people walking over, he was terrified. After all, these subordinates of ck Dragon were not as weak as his own subordinates. Scarface did not have much confidence in Jon confronting ck Dragon¡¯s men. In the monitoring room. Because there were many monitors in the football field, the moment Jon appeared in the monitors, livestream could also see it. Seeing that Jon had taken the initiative to provoke this group of people, Gal Gadot felt extremely nervous. She did not know why Jon had taken the initiative to provoke them. Moreover, she could tell that ck Dragon and his subordinates were very tough. Could Jon and Brown deal with them? In the livestream. ¡°F*ck, what did I see? Jon actually provoked these prison bullies? How dare he!¡± ¡°I really don¡¯t understand why Jon dared to provoke them. Doesn¡¯t he know that these people are difficult to deal with?¡± ¡°Are you blind? Didn¡¯t you see that the other party used the ball to attack Jon first? Jon was just retaliated.¡± ¡°Hehe, the other party didn¡¯t cause any harm to Jon. It¡¯s Jon¡¯s fault for injuring the other party.¡± ¡°What kind of logic is that. How is he not guilty because Jon wasn¡¯t injured even though he attacked Jon? Then how about how this, I stab you in the chest, but I¡¯ll be fine cause you not death. Is that okay?¡± ¡°Haha, good logic. There are really more and more such brain-damaged things.¡± ¡°However, I still don¡¯t understand why Jon would do this in front of the prison guards. Although prison tyrant was at fault in this matter, he could still find an excuse by saying that he aimed at the wrong direction. But if Jon fight back, that¡¯s no way for Jon to get away with it.¡± ¡°Moreover, looking at the actions of these people, they don¡¯t care if the prison guards were around. They just want to teach Jon a lesson.¡± ¡°I guess Jon wanted to vent his anger. He thought that since the prison guards were here, these people wouldn¡¯t dare to do anything to him, but he didn¡¯t expect that these people didn¡¯t care about the guards at all.¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, these people looked difficult to deal with. Jon would probably be sent out of the prison by an ambnce.¡± Chapter 212 - Jon鈥檚 Strength

Chapter 212: Jon¡¯s Strength

¡°Jon is done. These people all look extremely strong and fierce. Scarface can¡¯tpare to them at all.¡± ¡°It¡¯s all because Jon is a highly intelligent person. But from his actions this time, it can be seen that he¡¯spletely brainless.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, he doesn¡¯t seem to understand his main purpose at all. He supposes to break out of prison, it¡¯s not to get in a fight with these prison bullies.¡± ¡°What an unbelievable act of foolishness, and it was done by a so called the strongest robber in history.¡± ¡°I think, it should be because Jon felt that there was no hope of escaping from prison and wanted to experience the feeling of fighting in the prison. That¡¯s why he provoked these people.¡± ¡°Hehe, don¡¯t you guys worry. I¡¯ve watched all of Jon¡¯s drills. Every decision he made was to bring himself one step closer to victory.¡± ¡°Yeah, since Jon dares to provoke this group of people, it means that he has confidence.¡± ¡°What confidence? Using his tiny body to deal with these big guys? A single punch from these buffed guys would be enough to make Jon lie on the ground and pass out.¡± ¡°Hehe,st night when Jon and Scarface were stuck in the bathroom, these haters said the same thing. Then what was the result? Scarface kneeled down and massaged Jon¡¯s legs.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t put yourself in Jon¡¯s shoes. You guys are weak, you just jealous of Jon being outstanding. Is it so hard to admit that others are outstanding?¡± ¡°I admit that Jon is very strong, but from the looks of it, Jon and these people are obviously not on the same level of strength. If Jon could still win under such circumstances, it would be a miracle.¡± ¡°Miracle? Since Jon joined the drill, haven¡¯t he already created many miracles?¡± ¡°Hehe, the so-called miracle was only so-so after it was revealed. Now that Jon and Brown are facing so many people, I really don¡¯t know how they will win.¡± ¡°This kind of idioticment ising again. You can¡¯t see them win the fight that just because your IQ isn¡¯t good, it doesn¡¯t mean that Jon can¡¯t win.¡± ¡°My God, seeing that Jon was in trouble, all kinds of evil people are jumping out andment. Anyway, I believe in Jon.¡± ¡°Haha, if they don¡¯te out now, when Jon beat everyone down, they won¡¯t have a chance to shame on Jon.¡± ¡°But now that they¡¯re so salty, if things turn out in another way, won¡¯t they look like clowns?¡± ¡°They don¡¯t care anymore, because they¡¯ve been pped in the face many times. Their faces are probably numb by now.¡± ¡°Haha, LMAO.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily. They saw Jon directly face ck Dragon and the others. Most of the audience thought that Jon was brainless. After all, ck Dragon and the others didn¡¯t seem to be easy to deal with. Under such circumstances, Jon still wanted to provoke them. This was something the audience didn¡¯t expect. Especially some of the haters, they already wanted to see Jon make a fool of himself. Previously, they had alreadymented that they did not think Jon would win. In the end, they were pped in the face by Jon every time. And at this time, it was already 9:50 in the morning. The poprity of the livestream began to rise. Now, the number of viewers had reached 60 million. It was obvious that they were looking forward to Jon¡¯s prison break drill. On the football field, ck Dragon and the others walked in front of Jon. At this moment, ck Dragon¡¯s nostrils were still bleeding, and the bridge of his nose was already bruised. ¡°Kid, you have guts. You dare to hit me with a ball? No one has ever hit me in this prison or out there. I¡¯m telling you, you¡¯re finished, you¡­¡± ck Dragon spoke harshly in front of Jon. But before he could finish his words, Jon had already punched the ck Dragon in the face. ck Dragon immediately broke out in cold sweat from the pain. He never thought that Jon would punch him in the face. ¡°Go, kill him!¡± ck Dragon roared. ¡°You talk too much.¡± Jon nced at ck Dragon and said, then punched ck Dragon in the abdomen. ¡°Ah!¡± ck Dragon immediately covered his abdomen and bent his body. ¡°Kid, you¡¯re courting death!¡± ck Dragon¡¯s underlings saw this and wanted to deal with Jon. When Brown Williams saw this, he quickly came to help. As for Scarface, he quickly retreated to the side. He knew that it was impossible for him to beat ck Dragon¡¯s underlings. He didn¡¯t even have the courage to fight. Moreover, he didn¡¯t want to be locked up in prison because he participated in the fight. He didn¡¯t participate in this fight at all. If Jon could deal with ck Dragon. He could also use his power to intimidate others. If Jon couldn¡¯t defeat this group of people, Scarface could also distance himself from them. Therefore, no matter who won or lost this fight, it wouldn¡¯t affect him much. A few of ck Dragon¡¯s subordinates had already surrounded them. Brown Williams stopped one person. But Jon still had to face a few more of them. However, with Jon¡¯s current strength, this group of people were not his match. After taking down one person with one punch. The prison guard finally noticed themotion. ¡°You guys, Stop right now!¡± The prison guard blew his whistle a few times, then shouted and quickly ran over with his baton. However, the prison guard was still quite far away, and it would take him more than ten seconds to run over. This time was enough for Jon to use. In less than ten seconds, Jon had already taken down all the people in front of him. A few of ck Dragon¡¯s men were curled up on the ground, moaning. They couldn¡¯t even stand up. Of course, Jon was actually holding back. It only made them temporarily lose their ability to fight. ¡°Boss!¡± At this moment, Brown Williams¡¯ shouted. He turned around and saw that Brown Williams had been pressed to the ground by one of ck Dragon¡¯s men. As a police officer, Brown Williams¡¯ ability to fight wasn¡¯t as good as Will Smith¡¯s, but it was still pretty good. However, there was still a gap between him and ck Dragon¡¯s men. Jon walked over and first punched ck Dragon¡¯s men in the abdomen, then kicked the man to the ground. At this point, ck Dragon and his men were all knocked down by Jon. Not only were there people from both sides of Jon and ck Dragon, but there were also other criminals who gasped when they saw this scene. After all, in the entire south district, ck Dragon was definitely considered the number one. However, they didn¡¯t expect that he would be easily taken down by this neer. At this moment, all the people looked at Jon with fear in their eyes. He was a ruthless person! Standing at the side, Scarface was already extremely shocked. Things had gonepletely out of his expectations! Chapter 213 - Jon Is Being Lock Up!

Chapter 213: Jon Is Being Lock Up!

Although he had thought that Jon could deal with the ck Dragon, he didn¡¯t expect it would be this easy. Basically, he knocked down each one of them with just a single punch! This¡­ This was too ridiculous! How was he so strong? In the monitoring room. Gal Gadot¡¯s eyes widened as she stared nkly at the figure in the monitor. She had never known that Jon was so powerful. Before this, Gal Gadot had hoped that Brown Williams would be able to help Jon in the prison. But looking at the situation now¡­ Jon didn¡¯t need anyone¡¯s help at all. She had been wrong from the start. After seeing Jon¡¯s strength, Gal Gadot waspletely relieved. Not only he was smart but also fought really well. Let alone in prison, he could be unstoppable in every corner of the world. ¡°F * ck, I¡¯m shocked. What¡¯s going on the screen? Jon actually defeated this group of fierce criminals?¡± ¡°It¡¯s unbelievable. After all, Jon¡¯s physique is inferior to his opponent¡¯s. How could he defeat these people?¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t expect Jon was hiding his strength. I always thought that he¡¯s only smart, and not good inbat. I didn¡¯t expect him to be so strong as well!¡± ¡°Oh my god, what kind of man is this? He¡¯s ridiculously strong!¡± ¡°Wow, I never thought that a livestream can make my blood boil. His put down every single one of them. Jon is awesome!¡± ¡°Are all FBI agents this awesome? I¡¯m impressed.¡± ¡°I think I need to correct you. It¡¯s not that all FBI agents are awesome, only Jon is. There are also weaklings among FBI agents.¡± ¡°Jon is awesome, Jon is really too awesome!¡± ¡°His marksmanship is high, his IQ is high, hisbat skills are awesome, and his coordination ability is awesome. Why is there such an all-rounder in the world?¡± ¡°It¡¯s not all-rounder, there are still some ws. Jon¡¯s w is that he¡¯s too perfect, making people feel despair whenpared to him.¡± ¡°No wonder Jon still looked calm when he faced these prison bullies. It turns out that he has confidence in his own strength.¡± ¡°When will I be as strong as Jon?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s impossible for you in this lifetime.¡± ¡°Oh right, where are the people who said Jon was going to be doomed? Those who wanted to see Jon make a fool of himself? Why didn¡¯t theye out and continue bragging?¡± ¡°Those haters were stunned as well. I don¡¯t think you can ept this result. Haha.¡± ¡°I think these haters are about to die of anger. They¡¯re probably thinking, why is it so difficult to see Jon Make a fool of himself?¡± ¡°Haha, there¡¯s no other way. Jon is just that strong!¡± ¡°After Jon showed his strength this time, I think he¡¯ll definitely seed in breaking out of prison.¡± ¡°Hehe, are you bragging already? If you said that Jon could be a prison bully, I¡¯d believe it. But with just this bit of skill, you think he will seed in breaking out of prison? Do you think Aga Mountain Prison is make of biscuits? He never get out of that prison!¡± ¡°Everyone,e and watch. The haters are out!¡± ¡°Haha,e and see the monkeys. This group of people, no matter how outstanding Jon is, they don¡¯t want to admit it.¡± ¡°But Jon is breaking the rules now. He should be locked up. Once he is locked up, is it possible for Jon to sessfully escape from prison?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so, but I¡¯m not sure. After all, Jon is too strong. Before the final result is out, I¡¯ll only discuss other things and not guess the result.¡± ¡°Yeah, although he¡¯s in solitary confinement, with Jon¡¯s intelligence, it¡¯s hard to say if he¡¯ll be able to escape sessfully. Let¡¯s not make wild guesses.¡± In the livestream, thements were surging wildly. When the audiences saw that Jon had easily defeated all of ck Dragon¡¯s subordinates. All of the audience exploded in an instant. They had never expected that Jon had such a powerful energy within him despite having a average sized body. He had directly provoked these subordinates of ck Dragon? Before this, basically all of the audience didn¡¯t think highly of Jon. However, there was an ultimate reversal! This reversal stunned everyone. At this moment, the poprity of the livestream began to rise rapidly, there were 100 million viewers in the livestream. Some viewers began to buy gifts. They were buying gifts for Jon¡¯s performance. The various major online tforms also reported this matter. Jon had taken care of a few prison bullies at the Aga Mountain Prison, and they were immediately trending on all the major websites. This time, the world knew that Jon was not only superior in tactic, but also very strong inbat. He could be both smart and extremely strong! In the prison. Outside the football field. The prison guards had already taken control of the scene. Jon and Brown Williams held their heads as they squatted on the ground. Their faces were very calm, and there was some excitement in their calmness. After all, they were about to enter the confinement room. At this moment, ck Dragon¡¯s underlings were still curled up on the ground, groaning. Although Jon did not put their lives in danger, the pain in their body would still hurt for a while. ¡°Very good. Fighting right after entering the prison. It seems like you don¡¯t know enough about the prison¡¯s rules?¡± ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s lock you up and see how arrogant you¡¯ll be then!¡± ¡°Bring the two of them to the confinement room!¡± At this moment, there were three prison guards standing in front of Jon and Brown Williams. There were three prison guards. The one in the lead had a uniform that was slightly different from the other prison guards. He was the captain of the prison guards. Jon and Brown Williams didn¡¯t say anything when they heard that. Being locked up was his goal. Now, seeing that his goal was about to be achieved, he was overjoyed. The two followed behind a prison guards and slowly walked towards the confinement room. As for Scarface, he hid far away from them. He was afraid that he would be implicated. ¡°The few of you, quickly get up and go to the confinement room. You guys just know how to cause trouble. This time, I will make sure that you will have a good time in the confinement room!¡± The captain of the prison guards saw that Jon and Williams had gone far away. He came in front of ck Dragons and said coldly. He even used his foot to kick one of the ck Dragons¡¯ subordinates. He did not want to treat these criminals like he treated Jon and Brown. Because he knew why Jon and Brown Williams had entered the prison. As for ck Dragon and his men, they often stirred up trouble in the prison. ¡°Officer, it¡¯s really not our fault this time. I only lifted the ball to his side, and he attacked me with the ball. He even hit people. We are also victims.¡± ck Dragon said with a miserable face. At this moment, he hadpletely lost his usual demeanor, blood flowing out of his nostrils and dripping onto his prison uniform. His face was ashen, and his forehead was covered in sweat. His abdomen was still in pain, and he looked pitifully miserable. Chapter 214 - Jon Locked Up in the Confinement Room!

Chapter 214: Jon Locked Up in the Confinement Room!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio This time, he didn¡¯t provoke Jon and Brown. Instead, he was beaten up by them. And now, he¡¯s still being locked up! ck Dragon felt extremely aggrieved. He had never felt this way before. No matter what happened outside or inside the prison, no matter where he went, everyone respected and gave in to him. However, he did not expect that he would actually beat down by a neer today. It was embarrassing, aggrieved! ¡°Cut the crap!¡± ¡°Ever since the few of you entered the prison, how many troubles have you caused?¡± ¡°When others enter the prison, they try their best to perform well and strive for a reduction in their sentence. Yet, have been breaking the rules as if you guys wanted to stay in the prison forever!¡± ¡°It¡¯s not the first-time you guys have bullied rookies. This time, you want to deny it?¡± The prison guard looked at ck Dragon and said coldly. After hearing the prison guard¡¯s words, ck Dragon opened his mouth, but he really could not refute. Bullying rookies had always been a hidden rule in the prison. Over the years, he always had bullied rookies. Even if there weren¡¯t a hundred of them, there were still ny of them. This was the first time he had met someone as ruthless as Jon. Just because he was beaten up by a rookie, it didn¡¯t mean that he didn¡¯t bully a rookie before. The ck Dragon covered his nose and nced at Jon who was far away. He had already remembered him. Even though ck Dragon had already witnessed Jon¡¯s strength, ck Dragon was also the number one boss in the Aga Mountain Prison. Today, Jon had humiliated him in front of everyone. The ck Dragon naturally wouldn¡¯t let it go. Now he knew Jon was good in fighting. So what? There were many of his men in this prison! Wouldn¡¯t it be easy to deal with Jon when they were all gathered here? However, ck Dragon didn¡¯t know. He had been locked up for half a month. When he came out of the confinement room. There was no trace of Jon in the prison. At that time, the two people were gone, but there was a legend. A legend of using a perfect method to sessfully escape the prison! At this time. Jon, Brown and the ck Dragon were all sent to the confinement room by the prison guards. Jon and Brown did resist. After all, going to the cell was his ultimate goal. Only in the detention room could he n a better escape! But the ck Dragon¡¯s group was different. It could be said that they were gloomy, and their faces were miserable. If they beat up Jon during this fight, then even if they were imprisoned, they could still ept it. At least they would be managed to teach Jon a lesson. But now, they were beaten up by Jon instead And then they were sent to solitary confinement. In the long time they had been in the prison, ck Dragon had never been so sullen. Following the prison guards, Jon and Brown Williams entered the solitary confinement building. Jon took the opportunity to look around. As expected, the building had not been renovated. The inside was as dpidated as the outside. The group went to the fourth floor. When they first entered the fourth floor, there was a guard room. At this time, there was a prison guard reading the newspaper in the guard room. Guarding the istion room was a rtively easy job. Except when it was time for meals. They delivered meals to the prisoners in the confinement room and patrolled and checked every few hours. Other than that, there was nothing else. After all, there were all separate rooms, so they didn¡¯t have to worry about any conflicts when the prisoners entered the room. Therefore, it was easier to manage. Their work was also rtively easier. Usually, when they were rxed, the prison guards would read books or newspapers to pass the time. ¡°These are the new guys here. Get them into the room.¡± after leading Jon and the others to the door of the guard room, the captain of the prison guards looked at the prison guards in the guard room and said. ¡°Yes, Captain!¡± the guard in the guard room looked over when they heard the voice. They quickly put down the newspapers in their hands and walked out. Then, the Jon and the others were taken into separate confinement rooms. Each of them had a room. The captain of the guards had someone separate Jon and Brown Williams. They didn¡¯t want their cells to be next to each other. After all, their goal was to escape. Whether they seeded or not was rted to the reputation of the entire prison. Every guard had a responsibility to it. Separating them was also to prevent them frommunicating in the cells. This way, the difficulty of breaking out of the prison would increase. After all, neither of them couldmunicate. In the end, Jon was locked in Room 10. ¡°You should know thisd in Room 10. His name is Jon. I don¡¯t need to tell you his purpose.¡± ¡°Keep an eye on him. Don¡¯t let him do anything in the istion room.¡± after locking everyone in the confinement room, the captain of the prison guard looked at the prison guard guarding the detention room and said. Although the captain of the prison guard didn¡¯t think that Jon could sessfully escape from this confinement room or even leave this building, he still had to remind the prison guards here to stay alert. After all, if something like this happened, it would be very troublesome. ¡°Jon? Oh, my god, it¡¯s him?¡± after hearing the captain¡¯s words, the prison guard was suddenly enlightened. At first, he didn¡¯t recognize him. Most of the prison guards knew that Jon hade to this prison for the prison escape drill. Therefore, after hearing the captain¡¯s reminder, the prison guard immediately knew what to do. ... In the solitary confinement room. The space here was indeed very small. So small that if Jon stayed here, he would involuntarily feel a sense of oppression. However, his state of mind was very stable. He was not affected by this faint oppression. Every solitary confinement room contained a bedroom and a toilet. There was only a bed and a stool. Other than that, there was nothing else in the confinement room. The door of the confinement room was a hollowed-out iron door. There was a lock on the door. The locks used in the prison were naturally different from thosemonly seen on the market. They should be specially made for the prison. After all, the prison required very high security. However, this lock was basically no different from a regr lock for Jon. He could open it. And it was the kind that could be easily opened, he could open this lock effortless. In other words, Jon could easily get out of this confinement room. And there was only one guard guarding this confinement room, and the guard was in the guard room at the stairwell. Chapter 215 - Jon鈥檚 Escape Plan!

Chapter 215: Jon¡¯s Escape n!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio However, in a prison, any ce needed to be guarded 20 hours a day. The prison guards worked three shifts. They were not allowed to doze off when they were at work. Therefore, when Jon was preparing to escape, he could not take advantage of the time when the prison guards were dozing off. However, when Jon arrived, he noticed that the guards in the guard room were reading the newspaper. Obviously, guarding the confinement room was a rtively easy job. They didn¡¯t need to be tense all the time. And now, they were still on the day shift. When they were on the night shift, they might be even more rxed. Jon was locked Room 10, which was about 20 meters away from the guard room. Hence, no matter how careful Jon was, it¡¯s impossible to get to the guard room without being seen by the guards. After all, the gate to the guardhouse is facing the confinement room. The guard could see what was going on at the confinement rooms by lifting his head in the guard room. Therefore, Jon had to be careful with his movement and not alerted the guard. Only then would he be able to leave the confinement room. But then again, this was not an easy task. The distance was twenty meters. Even if hisbat skills had been upgraded to master level, even if his physical strength was much stronger than ordinary people, it was impossible to do so. As for how to solve this problem of the prison guards, he needed a wless n. Another problem was when Jon and Brown wanted started the escape, how should they inform Will Smith and the others outside? Although they couldn¡¯t blow up the prison wall, they could make some big scene. They could attract the attention of the prison guards inside the prison. This would be of great help to Jon¡¯s escape n. Jon and Brown Williams were both in prison as prisoners. Naturally, they couldn¡¯t bring their phones and othermunication devices. Of course, if Jon wanted to, he could buy a cell phone from the system store at any time. However, this would affect the system¡¯s rating. After all, using the cheat or his own hard work would definitely result in different ratings. Furthermore, he wouldn¡¯t be able to tell others where he got his phone. Therefore, Jon didn¡¯t n to use the system store. He couldn¡¯t bring anything to jail but this was within Jon¡¯s expectations. After all, any prisoner had to hand over their belongings to the prison guards before they were sent to jail. During the preparations before the drill began, Jon had also made arrangements. The equipment that Will Smith and the others brought this time included a few walkie-talkies in addition to guns, ammunition, and bombs. Police officers, prison guards, and other public officials usually used walkie-talkies. The frequency range of the police walkie-talkies was different from that of the civilian walkie-talkies. So, the civilian walkie-talkies cannot be connected to the police walkie-talkies under any circumstances. However, he walkie-talkies that Will Smith and the others brought are the police walkie-talkies that they borrowed from the Pennsylvania State Police. If they know the frequency, the walkie-talkies in their hands can be connected to the signal of the walkie-talkies in the Aga Mountain Prison. Even though Will Smith and the others didn¡¯t know the frequency of the walkie-talkies in the prison, their walkie-talkies weren¡¯t used to eavesdrop on the conversations of the guards in the prison, but to receive Jon¡¯s orders. Before this drill started. The walkie-talkies they brought had already been set up. As long as Jon could get the walkie-talkie from the prison guard and connected the channel that his teammates had set up beforehand, he could use the walkie-talkie in the prison to contact Will Smith and the others. After all, the effective range of the police walkie-talkie was very far, and it could cover the outside of the hotel where Will Smith and the others were. Standing in the dark confinement room, Jon¡¯s face was very serious, and he was thinking about the specific details of the escape n. The best time to escape from prison was after midnight. Although at this time, the prison guards would not fall asleep, but they would loosen up their alert. After all, at this time, most of the prisoners were already asleep. So, the guards would definitely be more rxed The prison guards worked three shifts. The changing times were six o¡¯clock at evening, two o¡¯clock in the midnight, and ten o¡¯clock at morning. The time that Jon chose to escape was between 2am until 10am. But the guards just changed the shift, it was naturally not the best time. But as time went by, after daybreak, it would be very difficult to escape. Therefore, it was best to choose 3am or 4am. Jon needed to care of the guard, he took the walkie-talkie in the hand of the guard and contacted Will Smith and the others outside. He waited until they made a move outside and attracted the attention of most of the guards. Then he started to move. As for himself and Brown Williams. After they left the solitary confinement building, they escaped from the nearest wall. However, the height of the wall was quite high, it was six meters tall, it was impossible to climb the wall with bare hands or with Will Smith. However, hen Jon entered the istion room, he saw a prison guard tidying up the storage room on the first floor. In the storage room, there was a foldingdder. He could use the foldingdder. Plus, he and Brown Williams could support each other. They could still climb up the six-meter-high wall. Jon thought for a long time and finally felt that the n was good enough. Now, it was time to wait for the next morning. There was nothing else to do. So, Jony on the bed in the confinement room with his eyes closed, trying to figure out his escape n in his mind. From the moment he entered the confinement room to the moment he entered the room, Jon memorized everything he could see in his mind. Therefore, Jon waspletely able to figure out his escape route and estimate all kinds of situations that would happen. Even though the n to escape from prison had already been formted, Jon still had to visualize what might happen when he escaped from prison. He also had to visualize how he would solve the problems he would encounter. Only in this way would he be able to increase the chance of his escape. Of course, whether this n would seed or not, he would only know after he took action. Before action is taken, even if there is a 90% chance of sess, he might still be ended up failing and all his previous efforts would be in vain. Chapter 216 - Prison Break Begins at 3:00 a.m!

Chapter 216: Prison Break Begins at 3:00 a.m!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio 2:00 a.m. Jon was still lying in bed. But he didn¡¯t fall asleep. There was no clock in the confinement room. Jon confirmed the time by the noise outside the confinement room and the sound of the guards changing shifts. Before the shift change, the guards would patrol the area. When the prison guards¡¯ footsteps sounded outside the confinement room. Jon closed his eyes andy on the bed, not moving at all. It looked like he had fallen asleep. The prison guard¡¯s shlight shone in, but he did not find anything unusual. ¡°This person is Jon? The situation is a little strange. He was sent to the confinement room as soon as he entered the prison.¡± ¡°He¡¯s already here. How can he escape? It looks like Jon is going to lose this drill.¡± The two prison guards whispered outside Jon¡¯s confinement room. It was obvious that they knew about Jon, the highly intelligent robber that was popr all over the country. ¡°But you don¡¯t have to say it. The title of the strongest robber in history really isn¡¯t bragging.¡± ¡°Today at the football field, Jon single-handedly knocked down seven or eight people from the ck Dragon Gang. He wasn¡¯t injured at all, and he wasn¡¯t even beaten by them.¡± one of the prison guards said in a respectful tone. ¡°But after this drill, Jon¡¯s undefeated drill record is going to be broken.¡± ¡°It¡¯s basically impossible to break out of our Aga Mountain Prison, not to mention that he¡¯s now in the confinement room. It¡¯spletely impossible for him to sessfully break out of the prison.¡± ¡°Alright, go and rest. Let me watch him from now on.¡± the prison guard who spoke first said. As he spoke, he once again used the shlight to sh at Jon¡¯s face. Seeing that he had no reaction, he assumed that Jon was already asleep. He turned around and left. The shift changing of the two prison guards waspleted very quickly. The prison guard who was off duty had already went back. The one who took over the shift entered the guard room and took out a book from the table to read. Although there two special prisoners had entered the confinement room today, the guard was still as rxed same as usual. After all, no one thought that Jon would escape from the confinement room. In the thoughts of all the guard, the best time to escape was when the prisoners¡¯ free time. The entire solitary confinement building was extremely quiet. After a long time, Jon slowly opened his eyes in the dark and quietly got out of bed. The whole process did not make any noise. Not even the sound of footsteps. Jon stood at the door and looked out of the solitary confinement room. There were surveince cameras in the hallway of the solitary confinement room. However. The solitary confinement room where Jon was in was number 10. It was thest confinement room. This camera was above Jon¡¯s confinement room. Therefore, most of the confinement room Jon was in was in the blind spot of the cameras. In fact, Jon wasn¡¯t thinking about what the prison guards thought. They actually arranged for him to be in the blind spot of the surveince cameras. One had to know that he was now the focus of surveince. Not to mention 24-hour surveince, which was not very realistic, but they had to be sure that Jon be seen by the surveince cameras always. But the prison guard did not arrange it that way. Was he really not afraid of his escape? Or was the prison guard very confident in the security of the prison, and did not worry about his escape at all? In any case, his confinement room was in the blind spot of the surveince camera That¡¯s one of the conditions that worked in Jon¡¯s favor. The lights are out in the room. There was only a light on outside the guard room. The rest of the ce was dark. In the dark, Jon pulled up his stats panel and looked at the time. Three o¡¯clock! It was the time when Jon nned to escape from prison. Jon took out a steel wire from his pocket, he used to open the door. He had gotten this steel wire during the day and picked it up from the corner of the fence when he was fighting with ck Dragon and the others. This saved him the trouble of buying it in the system shop. Then, Jon gently squatted down and picked up the door lock. The structure of the lock was indeedplicated, it was much harder to openpared to the locks avable on the market. But it was a piece of cake to Jon He inserted the wire into the lock hole and felt the movement from the wire. Soon, there was a crisp sound from inside the lock. Jon sessfully opened the lock. The sound of opening the lock was not loud, but because the istion room was extremely quiet. Therefore, this crisp sound still rmed the prison guard in the security room. ¡°What is it?¡± the prison guard shouted in confusion and looked at the dark corridor. Then, he hurriedly took out a shlight. At this time. Jon also hurriedly put down the lock in his hand. He retracted his hand. Just as he retracted his hand, a beam of light shone over. However, the prison guard did not find anything. After looking at the situation in the other confinement rooms, the prison guard put down the shlight and continued to read. Although he heard a noise, there were more than a dozen prisoners in the detention room, it was normal to have a little noise. It was possible that one of the prisoners was getting up to go to the bathroom. Therefore, the prison guard didn¡¯t suspect anything. After waiting for a while, Jon took the lock off the door. After he took the lock off. There was a bolt on the door. This time, Jon didn¡¯t have any scruples. He reached out and pulled the bolt off. Instantly, the sound of metal rubbing against metal could be heard in the darkness. ¡°Who is it? !¡± In the guard room, the prison guard heard the sound and shuddered. He stood up almost instantly and looked at the dark corridor again. However, no one answered him. The prison guard¡¯s nerves were gradually tensed up. He picked up the shlight and shone it over, but this time, he still did not find anything either. There was no sound again. The prison guard stared at it and frowned. Then, he slowly walked over. At this time, Jon had already unplugged the bolt and stood behind the iron door. Such a big noise was naturally caused by him on purpose. Now that the door was open, he could not hide under the surveince camera and suppress the prison guard before he reported the situation to the outside. Therefore, the best way was naturally to lure the prison guard out. Then, he would suppress him at the entrance of the confinement room, in the blind spot of the surveince camera! Chapter 217 - The Prison Guard Disappeared!

Chapter 217: The Prison Guard Disappeared!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio The prison guard was walking toward the confinement room where Jon was. His footsteps broke the silence in the building Jon could tell from the sound of footsteps. The prison guard was very cautious at the moment. Because he was not sure if the sound just now wasing from someone¡¯s room. So, the prison guard held the shlight and checked each room. Soon, he arrived at Jon¡¯s cell. At this time, Jon stood behind the door, still waiting quietly, waiting for the prison guard to arrive. The next moment would be crucial for Jon to sessfully carry out his n. The footsteps outside the door were getting closer and closer. Jon could already see the light of the shlight shining on the door of the confinement room he was in. The prison guard was very close to him. Soon, the prison guard arrived at the door of Jon¡¯s confinement room. The shlight in his hand shone into Jon¡¯s confinement room. The guard had checked the other confinement rooms, all the other people were all asleep and had not woken up. So, it could only be the confinement room where Jon was. He thought the noise was most probably made by Jon. Therefore, the prison guard had already taken precautions. However, even though he was mentally prepared, he still shocked when he suddenly saw Jon was looking at him from behind the door. ¡°Oh my God, why aren¡¯t you sleeping in the middle of the night? Did you make that noise just now?¡± the prison guard calmed himself down and said to Jon unhappily. After all, that moment just now had really scared him. If Jon was just an ordinary criminal, the prison guard would have held a grudge against Jon. When there was a chance in the future, he would make Jon pay. However, Jon was not a criminal. Therefore, the prison guard could not do anything. Jon nced at him and did not say anything. The prison guard could not help but raise his eyebrows. At this moment, through the peripheral light of the shlight, the prison guard keenly sensed that something was wrong with the iron door. He moved the shlight downward and checked, he realized the door of the confinement room was already open! The lock of the confinement room was gone, and the bolt had been pulled out. The prison guard was shocked. He had been a prison guard here for a while. He had never seen anyone who could open the door from the confinement room. Did Jon have a key on him? But now was not the time to think about this. Because when he came to check on the situation, he did not bring a walkie-talkie. The walkie-talkie was still on the table in the guard room. Therefore, the first thing he had to do was to return to the guard room and report the situation through the walkie-talkie. Otherwise, if Jon really seeded in escaping from prison, things would be troublesome. However, just as the prison guard was about to run, Jon suddenly pushed open the iron door. He blocked the guard¡¯s path. At this moment, the guard felt helpless and scared. After all, when he was taking over the shift, he had heard what the other guard had said to him. ck Dragon and the others were easily defeated by Jon. As an old guard, how could he not know the strength of ck Dragon¡¯s group? They were very strong. This was also one of the reasons why there were very few prisoners in the south district provoked ck Dragon. But somehow, this group of fearsome prisoners were single-handedly defeated by Jon. Then, how strong was Jon? It was simply unimaginable. At least he definitely couldn¡¯t defeat Jon. ¡°In order for me to sessfully escape from prison, you might have to sleep for a while.¡± as Jon spoke, one of his hands grabbed towards the prison guard. The prison guard wanted to resist, but he did not have the chance to resist at all. Jon grabbed him and hit him on the neck. The prison guard fainted. After knocking the prison guard unconscious, Jon quickly dragged him into the cell and pulled out his uniform. This uniform was a good thing for Jon. At this time in the monitoring room. On the main screen, it was the live footage of the confinement room. After all, Jon was currently in the confinement room. In order to cooperate with his drills, the surveince cameras were always monitoring Jon¡¯s activities in the prison. At this moment, Gal Gadot had already gone to sleep. The cameraman was still working. Other than that, there were two prison guards. ¡°What¡¯s going on in the confinement room?¡± ¡°Even if it¡¯s a patrol, it won¡¯t take that long, right? This prison guard has already entered the blind spot for a few minutes.¡± One of the prison guards looked at the situation on the main screen and couldn¡¯t help but frown. From the moment the prison guard stood up with the shlight, he had noticed that if there weren¡¯t any problems during a normal patrol. It would be fine to just stroll around. However, this prison guard had already disappeared for a few minutes. ¡°He¡¯s probably hiding in the blind spot to smoke.¡± Another prison guard came over to take a look and said in a rxed tone. It was quitemon for prison guards to disappear from the surveince footage for a few minutes. If it were under normal circumstances, they wouldn¡¯t mind it. However, the situation was different now. There was Jon in the confinement room. So, they became a little cautious. Although the two prison guards watching the surveince footage didn¡¯t think that Jon would be able to escape from the confinement room, they still needed to be cautious. After all, the live camera was right behind them. ¡°Whether it¡¯s true or not, use the walkie-talkie to ask what¡¯s going on over there.¡± The first prison guard who spoke stared at the surveince footage for a few seconds. He said to his colleague. He had a feeling that something was not right. Because there was no smoke in the surveince footage. Moreover, the prison did not stipte that one could not smoke while on duty. Therefore, he did not need to hide from the surveince cameras and smoke. ¡°Okay.¡± another prison guard replied and then took out his walkie-talkie. ¡°Fourth floor of the confinement room, what¡¯s the situation on your side?¡± There was no response. The two prison guards looked at each other when they saw the situation and their expressions became serious. ¡°Fourth floor of the confinement room, what¡¯s the situation on your side? Please reply if you receive it!¡± he asked again. There was still no response. Something was wrong! ¡°Find the prison guards patrolling nearby and check what¡¯s going on.¡± another prison guard said with a frown. Even if this situation had happened, he still did not think that Jon had run out. After all, this ce was very safe and heavily guarded. However, as for why the prison guard in the confinement room left his post without permission, they still needed to check it out. The prison guard holding the inte nodded and was about to speak into the inte. However, he suddenly saw a person wearing prison guard uniform appear on the main monitor screen. Seeing this, the two of them couldn¡¯t help but heave a sigh of relief. It was good that the man had showed up on the camera. Chapter 218 - Operation Started!

Chapter 218: Operation Started!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Let me ask you again, did something happen?¡± The prison guard who spoke first said to the guard of the confinement room. ¡°Did something happen at the fourth floor of the istion room?¡± the prison guard asked again. Then, he saw the guard quicken his pace and walk towards the security room. Then, he picked up the walkie-talkie on the table. ¡°Nothing happened.¡± hearing this response, the two prison guards in the monitoring room nodded. It turned out that he had ced the walkie-talkie on the table in the guard room. No wonder he didn¡¯t reply before. Now, both of them were relieved. In the guard room, Jon pretended to be the prison guard continued to flip through the book. The real prison guard was lying on the bed in the confinement room. Now, Jon was already a prison guard. The first step of the escape n had beenpleted. And this was also a very important step. As long as his disguise was not exposed, the next step of the n was very easy to carry out. However, Jon did not n to release Brown Williams yet. Because there must be guards on the surveince cameras. If he released Brown Williams now, he would expose himself. Then there would be no hope for escaping. So, what Jon needed to do now was to inform Will Smith and the others. Let them make some scene outside the prison and attracted the attention of the prison guards. That would be his chance. Jon pretended to read a book while picking up the walkie-talkie on the table, pretending to be bored and ying with it. But he had already started tapping on it in secret. He tapped on the walkie-talkie with the secret signal that he had told to his team before the drill. ¡°Boss?¡± After about a minute, Will Smith¡¯s voice sounded from the walkie-talkie. It was already past three o¡¯clock in the midnight. However, before Jon went to prison, he had told them that he could contact them at any time. Therefore, there had to be someone guarding the walkie-talkie 24 hours a day. ¡°It¡¯s me. Where¡¯s Leon?¡± Jon did not waste any time and asked directly. ¡°Leon is sleeping now. I¡¯ll go get him.¡± Will Smith responded from the other side. They could take turn to guard the talkie-walkie, so that was no need for all of them guarding it at the same time. Therefore, only one person was enough to guard it while the other two rested. ¡°Boss, what are your orders?¡± Soon, Leon Evans¡¯ voice sounded. ¡°Leon, can you see if you can hack into the surveince system of Aga Mountain Prison and cut off the images of the surveince cameras?¡± Jon said to the walkie-talkie as he flipped through the book. Even if he could make some noise and attract the attention of the prison guards outside, the prison guards would still pay attention to the situation in the detention room. After all, once there was any movement outside, the prison personnel couldpletely determine that it was their partners who came to rescue them. Naturally, all the prison personnel would know that Jon and Brown were preparing to break out of the prison. Therefore, they would not let down their guard against the detention room. Hence, Jon could only rely on Leon to hack into the surveince system of Aga Mountain Prison. ¡°It¡¯s a little difficult. The prison¡¯s surveince system is usually encrypted with more than 80 digits. For a special prison like Aga Mountain Prison, it¡¯s very likely to be 100 digits.¡± ¡°I can only try. I¡¯m not 100% sure.¡± said Leon Evans. ¡°Well, give it a try, and then tell Will and Venus that we¡¯re good to go.¡± ¡°ording to the original n, we are now in the confinement cell at the east wing of the prison, and you will make some scenes outside the south wing fence to attract the attention of the guards.¡± Jon said slowly. If Leon Evans can hack into the prison¡¯s surveince cameras and cut them off, it¡¯s going to be very beneficial to Jon and Brown But if he couldn¡¯t hack into it, Jon would have to take the risk. Because his escape had begun, there was no way out. ¡°Good! I¡¯ll give you an answer within 15 minutes whether I could hack it or not.¡± Leon Evans replied. Jon didn¡¯t say anything more. He continued to flip through the books on the table. In the hotel. At this time, Will Smith had already woke Venus Alice up. Then they picked up their prepared backpacks and left the hotel. They drove the rented car toward the south side of the prison as Jon said. The three of them had their own jobs. Venus Alice was the driver. Will Smith was preparing up the bomb in the backpack. Leon Evans was typing away at hisputer, lines of code appearing on the screen. He was trying to crack the surveince system of the Aga Mountain Prison. Ten minutester, they were at the outside the high walls of the south side! When they arrived, Will Smith was carrying his backpack and preparing to deploy the bombs. Venus Alice and Leon Evans were sitting in the car. In the guard room, Jon was reading a book and waiting quietly. It had been more than ten minutes since they had spoken on the walkie-talkie. But Leon Evans did not respond. Jon was not in a hurry. He knew that Leon Evans was trying hard. This situation was not the worst. He believed in Leon Evans would sessfully crack the security system of the prison Time passed slowly, Will Smith had set the bombs outside the south wall. The purpose of the bombs wasn¡¯t to break the wall, because the wall couldn¡¯t be broken with these bombs, so they were just to attract the attention of the prison guards. In order to attract the maximum attention of the prison guards. Will Smith scattered the bombs to ensure that they would make the most noise. Then, he returned to the car. And at this time. ¡°It¡¯s done!¡± Leon Evan¡¯s serious and stressed expression slowly rxed. The security level of the surveince system of the Aga Mountain Prison was indeed very good, but with his hard work, he sessfully cracked it. Looking at the time, almost twenty minutes had passed. Leon Evans quickly took out his walkie-talkie and reported the situation to Jon. ¡°Boss, I cracked it.¡± ¡°Well done!¡± hearing that, Jon smiled. It was very important for him to hack the security system. ¡°Also, have you arranged the bomb?¡± ¡°Yes, we¡¯re waiting for your arrangements.¡± Leon Evans replied. The escape operation was about to start, so the three of them were quite nervous. After all, the operation this time was rted to the sess or failure of the exercise. If the operation failed, the prison guards would definitely strengthen the surveince. At that time, if they tried to break out of the prison again, it would be even more difficult than ascending to the heavens! Chapter 219 - The Surveillance Footage Was Cut Off!

Chapter 219: The Surveince Footage Was Cut Off!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Leon, cut off all the surveince screens in the prison.¡± ¡°In three minutes, let Will detonates the bomb to attract the attention of the prison guards. After the bomb is detonated, you must evacuate immediately, because there will definitely be prison guardsing after you guys.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t let me and Brown fail to escape, and you ended up being caught.¡± Jon spoke slowly and told Leon Evans the n he had prepared. Now, he and Brown Williams were both in the detention room. Normally, they only needed to cut off the surveince in the detention room. However, if they just cut off the surveince in the detention room, they might be exposed. It would be too obvious that they were escaping from the confinement room. So, Jon had Leon Evans cut the security cameras in the entire prison block. That way, the prison personnel would not suspect Jon, at least for a while. They would think there was a problem with the prison¡¯s security system. Under such circumstances, Jon would be able to buy enough time to escape. ¡°Understood, boss.¡± Leon Evans replied. Hearing Leon Evans¡¯ response, Jon did not speak again. Instead, he switched the channel on the walkie-talkie. Because he had already told Leon Evans and the others everything. So, there was no need to stay on Leon Evans¡¯ channel anymore. Besides, when there was a problem in the monitoring room, the guards in the monitoring room must be the first to contact the guards in the confinement room. If Jon didn¡¯t respond immediately, the guards in the monitoring room would definitely notice that something was wrong and send someone to check it out immediately. Then he would be in trouble. Therefore, he needed to switch back the channel as soon as possible. He was waiting for the call from the monitoring room. Every walkie-talkie had a function of pre-setting channel, so even though Jon didn¡¯t know what the prison channel number was, he could still find the pre-set channel on it. Then, the switch waspleted. Jon continued to flip through the book and wait. At the south side of the prison. After receiving Jon¡¯s order, Leon Evans immediately put down the walkie-talkie and began to tap on theputer. All the surveince signals in the prison cell area were cut off. Then, he left the keyboard with both hands and looked at the time to tell Will Smith. He told Will Smith the order that Jon told him to detonate the bomb three minutester. At the same time in the monitoring room, the two prison guards were tired, even though they only worked eight hours a day. They had plenty of rest time, but the night shift was very tiring. Just as the two prison guards couldn¡¯t help but yawn, all the monitors in front of them instantly turned half ck. ¡°What? What¡¯s going on?¡± The older prison guards were instantly stunned. They didn¡¯t understand why the surveince cameras couldn¡¯t work anymore. Beside him was a younger prison guard. He was also at a loss when he saw this scene. ¡°Quickly contact the technicians. Tell them that there¡¯s a problem with the surveince screens in the cell area. Get them toe over and check it out!¡± the older prison guard said to the younger prison guard. The older prison guard stared at the pitch-ck screen for a while. He had encountered a problem with the surveince footage a few times, but this time, almost all the surveince footage went ck. This was the first time he had seen such a situation. The older prison guard didn¡¯t dare to dy the matter. He quickly asked another prison guard to contact the technical department. ¡°Okay!¡± the young prison guard immediately replied upon hearing this. Then, he quickly picked up the walkie-talkie. ¡°Technical department, this is the monitoring room. There is arge-scale malfunctioning of surveince footage in the monitoring room. Please quicklye over and check.¡± After he finished speaking, there was no immediate response from the walkie-talkie. After waiting for about a minute, there was a response from the walkie-talkie atst. ¡°Received by the technical department!¡± Upon hearing this response, the young prison guard heaved a sigh of relief. Just now, he was still nervous. After all, he had just started this job not too long ago. Naturally, he was more nervous when he encountered an unexpected situation. But now that he heard that there was a professional staffing to help. His nervousness was immediately alleviated. Butpared to him, he older prison guard was still tense. He worked for a long time here and had a lot of experience. He always felt that this incident was not that simple. After all, nothing had happened to the surveince cameras for almost half a year. But it happened when Jon was in prison, when Jon was in the detention room, and then arge-scale malfunctioning surveince footage urred! Was there really such a coincidence? The older prison guard rubbed his be. Although he felt that something was wrong, he was also a little uncertain. After thinking for a moment, he asked the young prison guard for the walkie-talkie. He pressed the walkie-talkie, and said, ¡°Confinement room. This is the monitoring room. did anything happen in the detention room?¡± The older prison guard wasn¡¯t sure what happened in the confinement, so he was prepared to ask. ¡°Everything is normal!¡± Soon, a reply came from the walkie-talkie. Of course, Jon was the one who replied. However, there were so many prison guards in a prison. Even though the older prison guard had been working in the prison for a long time, it was impossible for him to be familiar with everyone. Therefore, even if Jon answered him, the older prison guard did not notice it at all. ¡°That¡¯s good. There¡¯s a problem with the surveince cameras in the confinement room. Pay more attention to Jon in the istion room to prevent anything bad from happening.¡± After hearing the response of the prison guard in the istion room, the older prison guard heaved a sigh of relief, then quickly reminded him. ¡°Roger!¡± There was another response. The older prison guard ended the call and rubbed his eyes. His eyes fell on the ck monitor screen again. As long as the prison guards in the istion room be more cautious, nothing should happen. That was what he thought. After all, there was only a problem with the monitor. As long as there was no problem with the power system, no defensive measures would be affected. At this moment, although the monitoring screen had already gone ck, the cameraman was still using the camera to film. In the live broadcast room. ¡°What¡¯s the situation with the monitoring system at the prison? Why it turns ck?¡± ¡°I feel like something was wrong. Even if there is a problem with the monitoring system, it would not be so bad that almost the entire prison is affected, right?¡± ¡°I guess the Jon¡¯s team are helping him now. After all, there is aputer expert in Jon¡¯s team. I don¡¯t know if everyone remembers this person.¡± Chapter 220 - Wake Brown Williams Up

Chapter 220: Wake Brown Williams Up

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°I¡¯ll remember him. He¡¯s a gentle young man. He doesn¡¯t like to talk, but he¡¯s very talented inputers.¡± ¡°But that¡¯s unlikely. After all, the security system in a prison is very hard to hack, not to mention Aga Mountain Prison.¡± ¡°Maybe that young man Leon Evans did it. After all, he¡¯s aputer expert from the Pennsylvania State Police Department!¡± ¡°Hehe, what¡¯s aputer expert? Ordinary people might think that so-calledputer experts are powerful, but what is this ce? It¡¯s a prison for felons!¡± ¡°If anyputer expert could sessfully hack into the surveince system of a prison, it will be not good. Doesn¡¯t it mean that every prisons have a security breach?¡± ¡°Your analysis is right. No matter how awesome Leon Evans is, he¡¯s only a police officer. He definitely can¡¯t hack into the surveince system of the Aga Mountain Prison. I think there¡¯s a problem with the surveince system.¡± ¡°Yes, I think so too. After all, if it was just a problem with the cameras, there wouldn¡¯t be a problem with all the cameras at the same time. But if there is a problem with the system, it would be different. After all, these surveince cameras are all using the same system.¡± ¡°Besides, there is no point for the rescue team to hack into the surveince. They can¡¯t enter the prison.¡± ¡°Yeah, if they really did it, they should have hacked into the prison¡¯s electrical system, because the electrical system is the most important thing in the prison.¡± ¡°It¡¯s already very difficult for Jon to escape from this prison escape drill. Now I feel like the rescue team can¡¯t do anything.¡± ¡°Yeah, the rescue team probably hasn¡¯t contacted Jon yet. After all, Jon and Jon were sent to prison as prisoners. It¡¯s impossible for them to carry amunication device when they¡¯re in prison. So, how do theymunicate the outside world?¡± ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about this anymore. How long has Jon been in prison? Less than two days, right? In such a short time, I¡¯m afraid he¡¯s not even familiar with the prison.¡± ¡°With Jon¡¯s ability, there¡¯s no need to be so pessimistic. I think he should be able to escape, but it¡¯s impossible for him to escape so quickly. Right now, Jon is probably preparing a n. He¡¯ll wait a few days to familiarize himself with this prison before starting his operation.¡± ¡°Yeah, I also feel that Jon will be able to sessfully escape. After all, he won all of the previous drills.¡± The audiences were discussing crazily in the livestream. Although it was already three o¡¯clock in the midnight, there were still quite a number of people watching the live broadcast. At this time, there were still close to ten million online viewers! This was an extremely terrifying number. After all, this time was the time when the number of viewers was at its lowest. Because at this time, even the night owls had gone to sleep. However, there were still 10 million viewers in the livestream. This was enough to show the poprity of this drill. When the viewers saw that the monitor screen had turned ck, they all guessed what had happened. Some people thought that the rescue team had made a move. After all, if Jon wanted to sessfully escape from prison, he would definitely need the rescue team. However, this guess was quickly rejected by arge portion of the audience. After all, most of the audience had some understanding of the security of the prison¡¯s surveince system. Even if they were not sure about the situation, they knew what a prison was. It was a ce to lock up criminals. The surveince system was the most important system in the prison. It would not be easily cracked Under such circumstances, was a mereputer expert capable of hacking a surveince system of a well-known prison? That was underestimating the prison¡¯s surveince system. They didn¡¯t think that Leon Evans had the ability to sessfully hack into it. Moreover, it has only been two days since Jon went to prison. In such a short period of time, he definitely wasn¡¯t familiar with the prison¡¯s situation. As a cautious robber, it was too reckless to escape without knowing the situation. And now, they thought that Jon may not even be able to contact the rescue team. So they didn¡¯t think the rescue team was involved. They were more willing to believe that there was something wrong with the prison¡¯s surveince system. That was why the surveince footages were down. While the viewers were discussing it in the broadcast room, Jon, who was in the guard room, got up, took the key and went to the brig where Brown Williams was. Brown Williams was sleeping soundly. After all, he couldn¡¯t sleepst night. He couldn¡¯t stay awake today and he slept like a log. Even the sound of Jon picking the lock didn¡¯t wake him up. Jon tried to shake him, but he didn¡¯t wake up. It seemed that Jon couldn¡¯t wake him up easily. Then, Jon hit Brown Williams on his head. This time, Brown Williams finally woke up. ¡°Get up, we¡¯re moving now, prepare to escape!¡± seeing that Brown woke up, Jon quickly said in a low voice. ¡°Hu... What? We¡¯re starting to move now?¡± Having suffered a heavy blow in his sleep and being forcefully interrupted from his deep sleep, Brown Williams was a little angry. Just as he was about to lose his temper, he heard Jon¡¯s words. Immediately, all his dissatisfaction disappeared. He did not expect that Jon was the one who had woken him up, and he also did not expect that Jon would choose to escape at this time. Immediately, the sleepiness disappeared. He forced himself to be alert. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s start now. Don¡¯t waste time. Get Up.¡± Jon said. Then Brown quickly got out of bed. To facilitate movement, Brown didn¡¯t take off his clothes when he slept. ¡°Boss, what time is it?¡± Brown asked as he followed him out of the room. ¡°It¡¯s almost 3:30,¡±Jon replied. As the two of them walked out of the confinement room, Brown Williams saw Jon¡¯s prison guard uniform with the help of the lights in the security room. He was curious. ¡°Boss, where did you get this prison guard uniform? Do you have another one? Do I still need to change?¡± Because when Jon made his move just now, Brown Williams was in a deep sleep. So, he did not notice anything. Now that he saw it, he was naturally a little curious. ¡°You don¡¯t need to change. Only this one was taken from the prison guard on this floor.¡± Jon replied as he walked forward. There was not enough time now, so they needed to leave quickly. Although, now that he had pretended as a guard and responded to the monitoring room, he could only buy them some time. Chapter 221 - An Emergency! A Tense Situation!

Chapter 221: An Emergency! A Tense Situation!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio But Jon was not sure that the prison guards would be able to rte the malfunction of the surveince system to their escape. So, now is not the time to waste. ¡°I see.¡± after listening to Jon, Brown Williams nodded. He was not surprised that Jon was able toe out of the detention room. After all, Jon was pretty good. He had seen Jon¡¯s lockpicking skills at the time. But how did he deal with the prison guards? Brown Williams couldn¡¯t figure it out. Suddenly, another thing appeared in his mind that made him even more confused. Brown Williams realized that Jon did not seem to care about the surveince cameras here? Although Jon was wearing the uniform of a prison guard, he did not wear it. Even if Jon were mistaken as a prison guard, when a real prison guard saw him, wouldn¡¯t he feel that the situation was very strange? Bringing up a prisoner in the middle of the night? Moreover, the prisoner should be walk in front of the guard. Brown Williams really couldn¡¯t figure it out. ¡°Boss, are we just going to walk around like this? Don¡¯t we have to hide from the surveince cameras?¡± Jon replied as he walked, ¡°I¡¯ve already used the prison guard¡¯s walkie-talkie to get in touch with Leon¡¯s side. Leon has already hacked into the prison¡¯s surveince system.¡± ¡°So, as long as we don¡¯t bump into the prison guards, it¡¯s safe for us to move in the cell area.¡± After Jon finished his reply, they had already gone down to the third floor. Behind Jon, Brown Williams could not help but reveal a look of admiration. This was too amazing. He did not expect that Jon would be able to aplish so many things when he was sleeping. It was simply unbelievable! Then, the two of them went to the first floor. Jon did not directly walk out of the building with Brown Williams. Instead, he walked in the opposite direction of the exit. Brown Williams did not understand, but he still followed. Then, the two of them came to the door of the deepest room. Brown Williams carried it away and looked at the door te. The storage room. Brown Williams was stunned. What was he doing here? Was he hiding? ¡°The prison wall is six meters high. At this height, we have to use some tools to get out.¡± ¡°When we entered the detention room, I saw a man tidying up things in here and then I saw a foldingdder.¡± ¡°Although thedder is not six meters high, it should be enough for us to escape.¡± In the darkness, although he could not see Brown Williams¡¯ expression, Jon felt that he should still be curious, so he exined to him. ¡°Boss, it¡¯s awesome!¡± When Brown Williams heard this, he could not help but praise. He did not expect Jon to be able to remember these things, because when he entered the detention room, he did not notice that someone was tidying up the storage room. Everything was in Jon¡¯s eyes. Brown Williams admired this. He could not help but think that if someone like Jon were to be a police officer, a lot of the tricky cases could be solved in no time. He had seen so many people, but he had never met a human who was more meticulous than Jon! At this time, Jon, who was in the dark, was about to open the door to the storage room. But the storage room had a lock, and it could not be opened easily. But Jon was not surprised. He squatted down and took out the wire. Soon the lock was opened. There was a clear sound in the dark. This sound surprised Brown Williams. Brown Williams had seen Jon¡¯s lock-picking skills a long time ago, at that time, Jon still needed half a minute to open it. But now, it seemed like he didn¡¯t even need ten seconds to open the lock in the detention room. This meant that he was even more skilled. Jon opened the door and the two of them entered the storage room. At that moment, a few explosions suddenly came from afar. Hearing these explosions. Jon looked at the window, but because of the high walls, he couldn¡¯t see anything. ¡°This is Will and the others making a move. It¡¯s the sound of bombs.¡± Jon said slowly, then retracted his gaze. He didn¡¯t turn on the lights. As he spoke, he thought that Will and the others had already made a move, and there would probably be prison guards rushing over soon. If Jon turned on the light in the storage room now, and if a prison guard passing by looked over, it would be troublesome. So, Jon didn¡¯t turn on the light. Then, with the help of the limited lighting from outside the window, he found the foldabledder. Jon looked at the number carved on thedder and learned that it was six and a half meters. It was fifty centimeters higher than the prison wall. But the real trouble for them now wasn¡¯t the six-meter-high wall. It was the electric fence above the fence. These electric fences were made of iron wire, and there were sharp barbs on them. Even if there was no electricity. It was not easy to get through. ¡°Go search if there are any pliers here. We need to cut the electric fence open!¡± Jon thought for a moment and said to Brown Williams. Since there was a foldingdder in the storage room, there might be pliers. ¡°Okay.¡± Brown Williams replied and began to search the ce. At that moment, a beam of light suddenly hit the window. ¡°Who¡¯s inside?¡± Suddenly, a prison guard noticed the noise. He came to the window and knocked on the ss with the shlight in his hand. He then asked the question. Jon and Brown Williams didn¡¯t even dare to breathe, let alone respond. After receiving no response, the guard shone the shlight inside again. Then he left. Before the two people in the storage room could breathe. Footsteps came from the corridor. Brown Williams¡¯ body instantly tensed up. He looked at Jon, asking what to do. Jon shook his head, telling Brown Williams not to act rashly. Thud. Thud. The footsteps in the corridor were getting closer. It was clear that the guard was determined to check the situation. Jon frowned slowly. He was thinking about how to deal with the situation. He looked at the prison guard uniform he was wearing. Originally, he could have used this uniform to fool the prison guard who came to inquire about the situation. However, he did not respond immediately when the prison guard asked. Moreover, he did not even turn on the lights when he was searching for something in the storage room. It was a little suspicious. Therefore, the method of disguising as a prison guard did not work. Chapter 222 - Changing Clothes!

Chapter 222: Changing Clothes!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°Boss, what should we do?¡± Hearing the footsteps outside getting closer and closer, Brown Williams lowered his voice and asked Jon. ¡°Knock him out!¡± Jon also lowered his voice and replied. Since he couldn¡¯t disguise himself as a prison guard and deceive this prison guard, the most efficient way was to knock this prison guard out. That way, they wouldn¡¯t be exposed. From the sound of footsteps, there was only one prison guard. With Jon¡¯s skills, he would be able to knock down this prison guard immediately. Moreover, after knocking out the prison guard, they would be able to get another set of clothes. Then, both of them would be wearing prison guard uniforms. Even if they were carryingdders around the prison, they wouldn¡¯t be suspicious by the others. Brown Williams nodded and didn¡¯t say anything else. He was ready for battle. At this time. The prison guard outside had already arrived in front of the door. From the slight noise, Jon could tell the prison guard was opening the lock. He stared at the door handle. ¡°Ka!¡± The lock was opened. The door slowly opened. The prison guard who came to check on the situation was a little cautious. He pushed the door very slowly. As he pushed the door open, he shone his shlight in. After all, there was a sounding from the storage room at night. It was indeed a little scary. It might be something like a mouse, or something else. Therefore, the prison guard had to be more cautious. As the storage room door was slowly pushed open, Jon and Brown Williams appeared in the prison guard¡¯s field of vision. ¡°Yeee!¡± The moment he saw the two of them, the prison guard was so scared that he squealed. Originally, he was also mentally prepared, he was thought that there was some kind of animal making a noise in the storage room. But when he saw Jon and Brown Williams, his heart skipped a beat. Jon didn¡¯t give him too much time to react. He pulled the guard into the storage room. He covered the guard¡¯s mouth with one hand and grabbed the guard¡¯s cor with the other. He didn¡¯t let him shout or make any noise. Although the istion room building was rtively remote in the prison, if the guard made too much noise, it was very likely others would hear it. ¡°Don¡¯t make a sound, or I¡¯ll kill you. Do you understand?¡± In the pitch-ck storage room, Jon threatened the guard, and the weak lighting from the window reflected on his face. The guard waspletely intimidated Jon. The prison guard quickly nodded, indicating that he would not make a sound. Jon saw that the prison guard was still cooperative and let go of him. Then, the guard was knocked by the neck, and he passed out. ¡°Quickly change his clothes, so that we can break out of the prison!¡± Jon dragged the guard to the side and said to Brown Williams. ¡°Okay.¡± Brown Williams quickly responded, and then began to strip the guard¡¯s uniform. Meanwhile, Jon continued to search the storage room for the pliers. In less than a minute. Brown Williams changed into the prison guard¡¯s clothes. After all, he only needed to change his outer clothes. As for the clothes inside, no one could see them, so it was not necessary. Then, the two of them searched the storage room for a few minutes. They only found a steel pliers the size of a palm. ¡°Boss, can we cut the electric fence with this small pair of pliers?¡± Looking at the small pair of pliers, Brown Williams asked with uncertainty. The most ideal pair of pliers was naturally the type of hydraulic pliers that could break steel bars. However, there were no such pliers in the storage room. ¡°It should be. This thing can even cut nails. The prison¡¯s electric fence uses iron wire, how can it be as hard as nails?¡± Jon slowly said. Although the pliers looked a little small, it should be enough to cut the electric fence. Then, the two of them did not waste any more time. They quickly carried the foldingdder and walked out of the storage room. In the monitoring room. At this time, besides the two prison guards and cameramen, there were two more technicians. The technicians were checking the monitoring system while the two prison guards in the monitoring room were waiting. They looked a little anxious. That was because they had heard a few explosions outside. They were not sure what had happened. They wanted to use the repaired surveince camera to take a look. In the livestream. ¡°What happened to the explosions just now? Did the boiler room of the prison explode?¡± ¡°Good lord, Aga Mountain Prison is a well-known prison in the world. It uses modern machines, so there won¡¯t be a boiler room.¡± ¡°Those sounds might be the sound of a bomb explosion!¡± ¡°A bomb explosion? It doesn¡¯t make sense at all. Who would dare to use a bomb to blow up Aga Mountain Prison?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say that. There really are people who would do it. It¡¯s Jon¡¯s rescue team. So, the current situation is that Jon is already preparing to break out of the prison. They must be making some noise to attract the attention of the prison guards.¡± ¡°Is this the time when Jon decided to break out of prison tonight? It can¡¯t be, right? It can¡¯t be? Shouldn¡¯t he familiarize himself with the prison first? How could he break out of prison in such a hurry?¡± ¡°I think so, since most of the audience thinks that Jon should familiarize himself with the prison first, he should wait until he¡¯s familiar with it before breaking out.¡± ¡°Simrly, the prison guards should think the same. So, if Jon take few more days to familiarize himself with the prison, the prison guards will also be stricter with him.¡± ¡°Jon chose to break out of the prison now at a time that the audience didn¡¯t expect, and neither did the prison guards. So, breaking out of the prison at this time might have unexpected effects.¡± ¡°Huh, so that¡¯s how it is. So this time, Jon predicted the prison guards¡¯ move?¡± ¡°You can think of it that way. After all, he¡¯s a highly intelligent robber. His thinking is indeed different from ordinary people.¡± ¡°Impressive, impressive. I have to admit that he was outstanding. Everyone thought that Jon will take action after he be familiar with the situation in the prison. However, we did not expect him to act so quickly. He was able to catch the prison guards off guard.¡± ¡°Moreover, Jon¡¯s team is really strong. They even used bombs. It seems that the probability of sess of this exercise is still very high.¡± ¡°Not necessarily. I know about the Aga Mountain Prison. As one of the most secured prisons in the world, the walls of the prison are six meters high and two meters thick. Unless it is a super strong bomb, it is impossible to blow up these walls.¡± Chapter 223 - Prison Guard Felt That Something Was Not Right!

Chapter 223: Prison Guard Felt That Something Was Not Right!

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio ¡°They even used bombs? If they still can¡¯t blow up the wall, doesn¡¯t that mean that Jon will definitely lose?¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need to be so pessimistic. We don¡¯t understand how Jon escaped, but with Jon¡¯s intelligence, he should have nned it out.¡± ¡°Then does that mean that the surveince signal from before was also done by Jon¡¯s team?¡± ¡°It¡¯s very possible. There are a lot of experts in this team. Let¡¯s just say that thisputer expert was able to hack into the surveince system of the Aga Mountain Prison. It¡¯s really amazing.¡± ¡°Yeah. This is not something that ordinaryputer experts can do.¡± ¡°No matter what, he¡¯s also an elite of the Pennsylvania State Police Department. You shouldn¡¯t be so surprised.¡± ¡°Jon¡¯s team is really full of hidden talents. Other than the leader, the others are all experts in various fields.¡± ¡°But even though Jon had someone hack into the surveince system and used a bomb, it feels like it¡¯s still very difficult for the two of them to sessfully escape.¡± ¡°It¡¯s definitely very hard. Aga Mountain Prison is also one of the safest prisons in the world. But I believe that Jon will definitely be able to sessfully escape.¡± ¡°I also believe that. After all, he encountered a lot of difficulties in the past few drills. However, he still managed to win in the end!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say anything else. Jon will be done as long as he¡¯s awesome.¡± Thements in the live broadcast room surged crazily. Although the surveince screen had turned ck, the audience in the livestream did not know what direction the drills were heading in. But this did not affect the enthusiasm of the audience at all. They treated the livestream as a chat room, discussing the direction of the drill. They were so enthusiastic. It was almost three or four o¡¯clock in the morning, yet they were still not sleeping and discussing. There were even a few haters of Jon. At this time, they were still not sleeping. They were tirelessly leaving negativements about Jon in the livestream. ¡°The prison¡¯s surveince system didn¡¯t malfunction. Someone hacked into the surveince system and cut off the surveince footage in the prison area.¡± After the technicians checked the system, one of them said to the older prison guard. ¡°Hacked into the surveince system?¡± When the older prison guard heard this, his expression immediately turned grave. He had a bad feeling in his heart. First, the surveince system was hacked, and then there was the sound of an explosion outside. These two things were very likely done by Jon¡¯s rescue team. Otherwise, it would be too much of a coincidence. If it was really done by Jon¡¯s rescue team. Then would Jon in the confinement room be safe? ¡°What¡¯s wrong, ke?¡± The young prison guard saw the serious expression on the older prison guard¡¯s face. He walked over and asked. ¡°The prison guard on the fourth floor of the confinement room disappeared for a period of time during the surveince. If I remember correctly, Jon¡¯s confinement room happened to be in the surveince blind spot.¡± ¡°Also, I don¡¯t know if you¡¯ve noticed, but after this prison guard came out of the surveince blind spot, something really strange with him.¡± this old prison guard named ke spoke, he was still trying hard to recall the scene from before.¡± Before, when he could still see the surveince footage, ke didn¡¯t pay too much attention to it. After all, at that time, he didn¡¯t think that Jon would escape today. Even if he escaped, he might not be able to sessfully leave the prison. Therefore, he didn¡¯t think too much about it. However, the prison¡¯s surveince system had been hacked. There was also the sound of an explosion outside the prison. All of this seemed to indicate that the robbers outside were covering for Jon¡¯s escape. Connecting these things together. When the prison guard disappeared from the surveince blind spot, he appeared extremely strange. ¡°Strange? He seemed quite normal.¡± the young prison guard scratched his head and said. He indeed did not feel anything abnormal. ¡°Think about it carefully. After he reappeared from the blind spot, did he keep his head down as if he wanted to hide from the camera?¡± ¡°Do you think that within the few minutes when the prison guard entered the blind spot, he was controlled by Jon, and Jon also put on the prison guard¡¯s clothes and came out, disguised as a prison guard?¡± ¡°After all, the blind spot of the surveince is right in front of Jon¡¯s room.¡± ke leaned into the guard¡¯s ear and whispered his thoughts to the young guard. However, ke thought that it was not likely the case. After all, the confinement rooms were all separatepartments with locks on them. Perhaps the prisoners in the confinement rooms thought that they could make some noise and lure the prison guards over. Then, they could subdue the prison guards, grab the keys, open the door, and escape. But this was impossible! First of all, the prison guards would only bring the keys unless it was to release the prisoners or to lock them up. Otherwise, the keys were always kept in the guard room. Moreover, every prison guard was trained. When they were patrolling, they would maintain a certain distance from the cell to avoid being touched by the prisoners in the solitary confinement room. The most important point was. Although the upper part of the iron door of the solitary confinement room was made up of prison bars, the gap was so narrow that it could not allow an adult¡¯s arm to reach out. Therefore, it waspletely impossible for the prisoners to control the prison guards behind the iron door and snatched the key. ¡°ke, are you saying that Jon came out of the confinement room and changed into the prison guard¡¯s clothes and showed up under the surveince camera?¡± ¡°This is impossible. After all, for so many years, there has never been a situation where the prisoner coulde out of the confinement room.¡± The young prison guard said in disbelief. He thought that what ke said waspletely impossible. Even though he had seen Jon¡¯s drill and knew that he was a very powerful person. But to break out from the confinement room, it was simply undoable? ¡°Forget it, I¡¯ll stay in the monitoring room. I¡¯ll go to the confinement room to take a look!¡± The older prison guard, ke, thought for a while and was still worried. Then, he picked up the walkie-talkie and walked out of the control room. He could have asked the other prison guards on the other floors to check the situation. However, because of the explosion just now, many prison guards had rushed over to the scene. There weren¡¯t many people around. Therefore, ke could only go and check the situation himself. And when the cameraman saw this, he frowned and thought for a few seconds. He quickly picked up the camera and followed ke. After all, arge portion of the surveince footage had disappeared in the monitoring room, and no one knew when it would be taken care of. There was really nothing to film in the monitoring room. He might have something to film by following ke. Chapter 224 - The Drill Is Over! Jon Reached the Peak of His Life! (Finale)

Chapter 224: The Drill Is Over! Jon Reached the Peak of His Life! (Finale)

Trantor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Editor: Nyoi-Bo Studio Ten minutester. ke arrived at the confinement room building. He ran straight up to the fourth floor. When he saw that the guard room was lit up, but there were no more guards. His heart sank. Could it be that something had really happened? Could it be that Jon had escaped from prison? If that were the case, it would be a serious matter. He quickly went to the confinement room where Jon was held. When he saw a person sleeping on the bed, he heaved a sigh of relief. Fortunately, Jon had not escaped from prison. However, when he saw that the lock of the door to the confinement room was already open, he was instantly shocked and froze on the spot. Then, he walked in with a shlight. When he saw the person lying on the bed... His face instantly turned ashen. Although he didn¡¯t know this prison guard, he had seen Jon¡¯s picture. The person lying on the bed was definitely not Jon! In an instant, ke¡¯s entire body went numb. The thing he was most worried about had still happened. ¡°Calling superintendent, there¡¯s an emergency in the confinement room. Jon has disappeared!¡± ¡°I repeat, Jon has escaped from the confinement room. His whereabouts are unknown!¡± ke quickly spoke into the walkie-talkie and told the superintendent about this. ¡°Roger, we¡¯re on our way!¡± Soon, the superintendent replied. Soon, the superintendent came over and asked ke, ¡°What happened?¡± ¡°After most of the surveince footage in the monitoring room was lost, there was the sound of an explosion outside. I sensed that something was wrong, so I quickly went to the confinement room to check the situation. In the end, there was no one in the confinement room.¡± ke looked at the superintendent and told him the whole story. ¡°So, Jon and Brown Williams are probably looking for an opportunity to escape from the prison!¡± the superintendent said after thinking for a moment, and then arranged for people to search around the prison wall. They sent a few people to search the confinement room building to see if Jon was hiding there. Then, they woke up the prison guard who had been knocked out by Jon. The prison guard quickly told them how Jon had knocked him out. Then, a prison guard found another prison guard who had been knocked out by Jon in the storage room on the first floor. This time, there were already two prison guards who had been knocked unconscious. It really put a shame on the prison officers. However, the most important thing was that after Jon knocked out the two prisoner guards, he took off their clothes. In other words, Jon and Brown must have changed into the prison guards¡¯ clothing and mingled among the prison guards. ¡°All prison guards, please pay attention. The two robbers have two sets of prison guard uniforms, which means that they have changed into the prison guard uniform and mingled among the prison guards.¡± ¡°I repeat, the robber is suspected to have changed into the prison guard uniform and mingled among the prison guards.¡± ¡°All prison guards, please pay attention to the people around you.¡± After the superintendent learned about the situation, he quickly said to all the prison guards through the walkie-talkie. ¡°Check if anything is missing in the storage room.¡± Then, the superintendent ordered. Since the robbers were in the storage room before, they should be looking for something. A prison guard heard this and quickly responded. He quickly asked someone to get the inventory list in the storage room to check. In a prison, the rules and regtions were rtively strict. Even if it was a storage room, whatever was in the storage room needed to be checked. The purpose was to prevent the prisoners from stealing anything from here. Soon, the storage list in the storage room was sent over. A prison guard took the storage list and started to check the things inside the storage room. ¡°Report, a foldingdder has been lost in the storage room!¡± Soon, the prison guard who checked the storage list came to the back of the superintendent and reported the situation. The third item on the storage list was the foldabledder, so he found the problem right after he started checking the storage list. Losing a foldabledder was a big problem. After all, if thedder was really taken away by Jon and Brown, it would greatly increase their chance to escape. This was definitely bad news. The superintendent frowned. He did not expect that such an item was missing from the storage room. Jon had taken this item. After such a long time, it was possible that he had sessfully escaped from prison. At this moment. ¡°Report, we found a foldingdder. It was taken by the robbers. The electric fence above the wall has also been cut by the robbers... Jon may have sessfully escaped from prison.¡± When the superintendent heard this, he was extremely embarrassed. ¡°A six-meter-high wall? Can the robbers escape unscathed after jumping down?¡± the superintendent asked. ¡°ording to the situation we have now, it¡¯s indeed possible that the robbers jumped down from here and jumped out of the prison.¡± the prison guard reported. Jon ran away. This was a sure thing. Aga Mountain Prison, which was known as one of the most secured prisons in the world, only took Jon less than two days to sessfully escape. This was a disgrace to Aga Mountain Prison. The superintendent did not know how to exin it to the warden. However, he still had to report it. ¡°Jon and Brown Williams have already left Aga Mountain Prison, they have won the drill. Clean up the scene and fix the electric fence before dawn.¡± the warden announced it after learning about the situation. It only took two days for Jon to sessfully escape, which surprised the warden. However, the warden still epted it. He knew how Jon strong was, so he had some sort of mental preparation for it. After Jon¡¯s sessful escape, the media reported on it. The number of viewers in the livestream reached 150 million, once again breaking the previous record. At this moment, Jon had already returned to the hotel. After the warden called, the two of them had a discussion together and decided to start the interview at three o¡¯clock the next day. After all, it was already early in the morning. They had to give Jon some time to rest. Jon agreed to attend. Then, just as Jon was about to rest, the director of the FBI called and told him that the person who killed Jon¡¯s team three years ago was a former leader of his. He was now in prison because of some crimes, but he died in a car ident on the way to prison. Jon was speechless for a long time after hearing that. He got his revenge, but he didn¡¯t do it himself, but it also solved one of his worries. At three in the afternoon. An interview started in the meeting room of the Aga Mountain Prison. When a reporter asked Jon when the next drill would be. He was slightly stunned because at that moment, the system¡¯s voice suddenly sounded in his mind. ¡°Ding, the system has helped the host reach the peak of his life and is untying...¡± ¡°Ding, the system¡¯s untying is sessful. This is the system¡¯sst voice. Host, farewell!¡± Hearing the system¡¯s final voice, even though Jon was reluctant, he still smiled. It was over, it was all over. The enemy was dead, and the system had left. ¡°I will not participate in any more drills from now on, that¡¯s all.¡± Jon smiled at the media. The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and continue reading tomorrow, everyone!